Yamaha V1 de handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: V1

Categorie: Audiomixers

Type: de handleiding

OWNER’S MANUAL

Version 1.2

Getting Started

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

Getting Started with DME Designer

Thank you for purchasing the DME64N/24N.

Your DME64N/24N mixing engine, together the DME Designer software, lets you build a custom audio

system installation that can support an incredible variety of conditions. You can build an entire system

from input to output with the DME Designer software, then send the data from that system to the

DME64N/24N, which becomes an independent processor.

An amazing variety of applications are possible, including audio installations, sub-mixing, speaker

system control, matrix/routing, and multi-effect processing.

In this manual the abbreviation “DME” refers to the DME64N/24N.

SPECIAL NOTICES

• The software and this Owner’s Manual are the exclusive copyrights of Yamaha Corporation.

• Use of the software and this manual is governed by the license agreement which the purchaser fully

agrees to upon breaking the seal of the software packaging. (Please read carefully the Software

Licensing Agreement at the end of “DME Designer Installation Guide” before installing the

application.)

• Copying of the software or reproduction of this manual in whole or in part by any means is expressly

forbidden without the written consent of the manufacturer.

•Yamaha makes no representations or warranties with regard to the use of the software and

documentation and cannot be held responsible for the results of the use of this manual and the

software.

• This disc is a CD-ROM. Do not attempt to play the disc on an audio CD player. Doing so may result

in irreparable damage to your audio CD player.

• The company names and product names in this Owner’s Manual are the trademarks or registered

trademarks of their respective companies.

• The screen displays as illustrated in this Owner’s Manual are for instructional purposes, and may

appear somewhat different from the screens which appear on your computer.

• Future upgrades of application and system software and any changes in speciﬁcations and

functions will be announced separately.

• Windows

is the registered trademark of Microsoft

Corporation.

NOTE

Here the abbreviation “DME” does not include the “DME32.”

NOTE

This manual is based on the English version of the software. Illustrations, command names, window names, and similar

information are from that version. Some items may differ from what you see on the computer screen, depending on which

operating system you are using.

Getting Started

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

About DME Designer

DME Designer is software that provides an integrated environment where you can build and control

systems that use DME.

Audio systems with DME are built on the computer screen in block diagram format using the DME

Designer software. Information about the inputs/outputs along with the arrangement of components

and their connections is called the “conﬁguration.”

The software sends DME settings, along with conﬁguration and parameter data, to the DME unit

through a USB or Ethernet connection. Once the data is transferred, the DME unit can be

disconnected from the computer and used as an independent processor. The DME can also be kept

connected to the computer and controlled in realtime from DME Designer software.

If multiple DME units are connected to the computer, you can use the DME Designer software to build

a conﬁguration that includes those multiple units.

For a DME overview and glossary, see the “DME64N/24N Owner’s Manual.”

Systems built with DME Designer can have multiple zones within an area and multiple conﬁgurations

and scenes within a zone. However, only one area, zone, or conﬁguration can be made active and

edited at a time. When active these are called the “Current Zone,” “Current Scene,” and “Current

Conﬁguration.”

■ One DME unit/Zone

Area This means the entire site, and is therefore the uppermost level for a system built using

DME Designer. At least one zone must be located within the area.

Zone Speciﬁes a space that has individual sound effects within the area, and creates DME

connection conditions. You can create and switch between multiple conﬁgurations.

Conﬁguration Information related to the layout and connection of components in a zone.

Scene Information related to conﬁguration assigned to a zone and the settings of the

components included in the conﬁguration.

Component An object that is arranged within the Conﬁguration window.

No.

001

002

003

004

005

006

....

Confuguration

Output Processor for Dome

...

Scene Name

All On

Opening

Band Set 1

Band Set 2

Band Set 3

...

Preset

All On

BGM & MC

Band 1

Band 2

Band 3

Microphone

Mixer

External Head Amp

etc...

Power Amp

Processor

etc...

Input

External Device (MIDI, GPI, DAW, AMX/Crestron)

Audio signal

Notes

Zone

Output

Control signal

Data explanation

Setting preset data

LCD Display

Dome Low

Dome Mid

Dome Hi

....

Assigned Parameter

Crossover: Output Low: Level

Crossover: Output Mid: Level

Crossover: Output Hight: Level

(No Assign)

User Defined Button Scene Manager

Specifies the parameter to be changed.

Specifies the configuration

and preset data combination.

Configuration

Output Processor for Dome

Local parameter link settings

External device settings

MY8-AE

(Input)

MY8-AE

(Output)

Cross-

Over

Delay EQ Dyn

Delay

All On Component value

BGM & MC

Band 1

Band 2

Band 3

Preset data for output processor

Set the value

Getting Started

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

■ Two DME units/Zone

When one DME unit doesn’t provide sufﬁcient processing power, up to 16 DME units can be used

DME#2

Configuration

Output Processor

for Hall

Local parameter link settings

External device settings

All On

BGM & MC

Band

Zone

LCD Display

Dome Low

Dome Mid

Dome Hi

Hall Low

Hall Mid

Hall Hi

....

Assigned Parameter

#1: Crossover: Output Low: Level

#1: Crossover: Output Mid: Level

Crossover

Output Hight

Level

#2: Crossover: Output Low: Level

#2: Crossover: Output Mid: Level

Crossover

Output Hight

Level

No.

001

002

003

004

005

006

....

Configuration

Output Processor for Dome

...

Scene Name

All On

Opening

Band Set 1

Band Set 2

Band Set 3

...

Preset

All On

BGM & MC

Band 1

Band 2

Band 3

Configuration

Output Processor for Hall

...

Preset

All On

BGM & MC

Band

User Defined Button

Scene Manager

DME#1

Configuration

Output Processor

for Dome

Local parameter link settings

External device settings

All On

BGM & MC

Band 1

Band 2

Band 3

Preset data Preset data

External Device (MIDI, GPI, DAW, AMX/Crestron)

Microphone

Mixer

External Head Amp

etc...

Power Amp

Processor

etc...

Input Output

DME#1

DME#2

For DME#2

For DME#1

Specifies the parameter to be linked between DME units.

Grobal Parameter Link

For DME#1 For DME#2

Audio signal

Notes

Control signal

Data explanation

Setting preset data

Selects the parameter to be

edited from two DME units.

Specifies the configuration and preset

data combination in each DME

Getting Started

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

System Requirement

Common data for DME units in the same zone

Scene Manager A “scene” is information that is used to change the audio processing content.

A combination of a conﬁguration and preset data is speciﬁed for each scene.

A Scene Manager is function used to memorize and manage scenes. Up to 999

scenes can be memorized, and each scene is managed by number.

MIDI Program Change

settings

This setting is necessary to switch scenes using MIDI messages.

User Deﬁned Button setting This information is necessary to control component parameters from the unit’s

panel. Up to 24 parameters can be memorized.

Global parameter link settings This information is necessary to allow operation of similar parameters to be

linked between multiple DME units.

Separate data for individual DME units

Conﬁguration This information deﬁnes the conﬁguration of audio processing, audio input/

output, and external device components and the connections between

components required to achieve the desired audio processing.

Local parameter link

settings

This information is necessary to allow linked operation between similar

parameters within a single DME unit.

External device settings This information is necessary to allow control of component parameters from

external devices.

Independent settings are required for each external device.

The following external devices can be used:

• MIDI controller( MIDI Control Change, Paramter Change)

• GPI controller

• DAW controller

• AMX, Crestron, and similar remote controllers.

Preset data These are the parameter values for the components included in a conﬁguration.

Audio processing details can be changed by changing the preset data.

The following component types include preset data:

• GEQ, Matrix Mixer, and other audio processing components.

• Internal AD/DA (DME24N), Cascade (DME64N), and MY Card I/O

components.

• External device components for external head amps (AD8HR, AD824).

Operating System Windows

XP Professional/XP Home Edition/2000 Professional

CPU 1 GHz or better Intel

Pentium

/Celeron

family processor

Memory At least 256 MB

Hard Disk Capacity At least 300 MB

Display 1,280 x 1,024 pixels or better/High Color 16 bit or better

Other Mouse, CD-ROM drive, 100Base-TX/10Base-T Ethernet or USB connection

environment.

Getting Started

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

Main Changes from V1.0 to V1.1

■ Main Panel Window

• Instead of the former Parameter Link function, there are now two functions: a Global Link function

that links parameters within all DMEs in a zone and a Local Link function that links parameters

within a single DME unit. (→ page 73)

• The Synchronization function can now not only send data from DME Designer to the DME unit,

but can also synchronize by reading data from the DME unit. (→ page 75)

• Scene Increment/Decrement and Time Adjustment can now be assigned in the GPI input

function. (→ page 80)

• DME unit events can now be recorded by the Event Logger function and displayed in the Event

Logger window. (→ page 111)

• The time for executing an event can now be set by using the Event Scheduler function.

(→ page 116)

• Parameters in the current conﬁguration can now be listed on the display and printed out by using

the Parameter List function. (→ page 124)

• The Wav File Manager can manage Wave ﬁles played by the Wav File Player. (→ page 128)

• Settings can be made by the DAW Control function that are used for controlling DMEs from a

DAW controller. (→ page 132)

• DME unit data can now be saved as a backup ﬁle by using the Backup function. (→ page 135)

■ Designer Window

• The port name display can now be switched between long name display and short name display.

(→ page 148)

• DME64N cascade connections can now be set. (→ page 165)

• Priority items can now be set when compiling conﬁgurations by using the [Compile Priority]

function in the “Preferences” dialog box. (→ page 209)

• Delay time can now be displayed for each component by using the Show Signal Delay function.

(→ page 246)

• Monitoring points can now be edited by using the “Monitoring Point List” dialog box. (

→

page 247

)

• The status of connections in a conﬁguration can now be analyzed in advance by using the

Analyze function, without connecting the DME unit. (→ page 249)

•You can now set the action that occurs when you double-click a user module object. You can also

turn user module security ON or OFF, and set a password. (→ page 254)

• Libraries with component parameters saved in them can now be recalled from the context menu

for a component object. (→ page 277)

•A new rule for wiring prohibits connections to terminals that would short the terminator.

■ Component Editor/Component

•A status bar has been added to the component editor. It displays the component name,

component ID, and parameter IDs for parameters that are being edited. (→ page 265)

•A Snap function has been added that records parameters in the editor temporarily. Parameter

sets can then be switched by using the Snap buttons. (→ page 273)

• The meter's peak hold function can now be turned ON or OFF. (→ page 291)

•A Wav File Player component has been added for playing Wave ﬁles. (→ page 359)

• An effect component called SPX has been added that supports many different effect

applications, such as reverb, delay, and modulation effects, along with complex combinations of

multiple effects. (→ page 397)

•A Slot Out component editor has been added. (→ page 409)

• An Undo/Redo function is now available when using the design mode. It can undo the most

recent operation (control movement/resize/deletion).

Getting Started

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

Changes from V1.1 to V1.2

■ Main Panel Window

• The synchronization algorithm has been reﬁned for faster synchronization.

• Synchronization now can be executed from DME to DME Designer without any break in the

sound.

• In the following cases, synchronization can be executed from DME Designer to DME without any

break in the sound:

The second or later synchronization after starting DME Designer* and when differences in data

between the DME and DME Designer are limited to parameters within components, AD824/

AD8HR/DME24N AD/DA setting data, or MY card setting parameters.

* If the ﬁle was saved when DME Designer was closed, there will be no break in sound even in the ﬁrst

synchronization after saving.

• Compile speed has been increased.

Up to three times faster when AutoDelayCompensation is turned On.

Up to two times faster when AutoDelayCompensation is turned Off.

• Synchronization is possible when no MY card or a different MY card is installed in the DME unit

(a conﬁrmation dialog will appear).

• An option to automatically close the dialog after synchronization has been added. (→ page 37)

•A progress bar has been added to the Synchronization dialog. (→ page 36)

•A message appears to warn when synchronization will cause muting.

• The following operations can be performed while on line:

- Scene storage.

- Scene name changes.

- Fade ON/OFF and Fade Mode changes.

- Fade time changes.

- Parameter link setting changes.

• When a scene store is executed, that scene becomes the current scene.

•Wave ﬁles can be saved as DME data ﬁles, and are included in import/export operations.

(→ page 32)

•Wave ﬁles can be saved in the Wav ﬁle library.

• Event Log events can be output via GPI. (→ page 115)

• The on-line indicator appears as a button which can be used to switch between on-line and

off-line. (→ page 43)

• Scene edits cause the EDIT indicator to appear. (→ page 42)

• An auto ﬁle save function (Auto Save, post synchronization) has been added. (→ page 53)

• Different zones can be speciﬁed for use by different users. (→ page 56)

• Scene parameters related to User Deﬁned Button, Program Change, GPI In and GPI Out can be

set via the Scene Manager. (→ page 63)

• [Select All] and [Clear All] buttons have been added to the Scene Manager Recall Safe dialog.

(→ page 67)

• User Control can be created for individual users as well as security levels. (→ page 70)

•A Remote Control Setup List has been added. (→ page 123)

This list can be used to make detailed settings for a new software protocol that allow the DME to

be controlled from AMX, Crestron, and similar devices.

Refer to the “DME-N Remote Control Protocol Speciﬁcations” document for details about the

communication protocol. Information about the “DME-N Remote Control Protocol Speciﬁcations”

document can be found at the Yamaha pro Audio website (URL below).

http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/

• It is possible to specify whether listed events will be executed by the Event Scheduler.

(→ page 116)

Getting Started

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

• The order of same-time events can be changed in the Event Scheduler. (→ page 116)

• Exceptions can be speciﬁed for Event Scheduler execution day/time. (→ page 122)

• Event Scheduler execution times can be speciﬁed in 1-second increments. (→ page 121)

• Head amp gain and MY-Card can be set via GPI, MIDI, User deﬁned Button, DAW Control.

• Parameter values, scene recall, GPI output, Wave ﬁle playback, and head amp gain can be set

via the User Deﬁned Buttons. (→ page 98)

• The Component Lock function dialog is separate from the Parameter List dialog. (→ page 127)

• Shortcuts can be freely set as required. (→ page 134)

• Files can be saved in the DME unit. (→ page 52)

•A [Close All Editor Windows] button has been added to the Window menu. (→ page 51)

• External head amp parameters will be recognized by the DME unit when either the DME or the

external head amp (AD824, AD8HR) are turned on. Execute a scene recall to send DME settings

an external head amp.

• This manual is now separate from the DME Designer installer, and can not be accessed from the

DME Designer menus.

■ Designer Window

• The following operations can be carried out via the shortcut keys.

- Navigator

- Activate Navigator

- Activate Toolkit

- Activate Design Window

- Select Left Port and Start Wiring

- Select Right Port and Start Wiring

- Wire Auto Single to Right

- Wire Auto Multi to Right

- Wire Auto Single to Left

- Wire Auto Multi to Left

- Delete Wire

• It is now possible to simultaneously edit multiple objects of the same type.

Example: Change the thickness or color of multiple wires at once.

• Files related to user modules (user module ﬁles, library ﬁles, user module editor ﬁles) can be

combined and exported/imported as a single ﬁle.

• Port colors can be independently speciﬁed for each port type. (→ page 156)

• Default wire thicknesses and types can be independently speciﬁed for each port type.

• An automatic hot-spot connection function has been added. (→ page 225)

• Port display has been added to External Device, Picture, DME, and ICP1 objects.

• When drawing wires the keyboard cursor keys can be used to move the mouse cursor, and the

<Enter> key can be used to create nodes.

• When drawing wires <Shift> key plus <→> key and <Shift> key plus <←> key combinations can

be used to automatically connect horizontally-aligned hot spots.

• DME object ports can be freely speciﬁed.

• Compilation of conﬁgurations with loop connections is possible when Auto Delay Compensation

is On.

• The name has been changed from “Foot Monitor” external device to “Floor Monitor.”

• Addition External Device types have been provided.

• External Devices can be double-clicked to open a ﬁle saved by other applications. (

→

page 172

)

• Picture objects can be double-clicked to open a speciﬁed editor. (→ page 187)

•Text objects can be double-clicked to open a speciﬁed editor. (→ page 190)

Getting Started

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

• User module port labels can be edited. (→ page 183)

• Graphics can be placed to represent user modules. (→ page 183)

• The Legend ﬁeld automatically resizes to accommodate project names and titles of different

lengths.

•A Generic “MY-Others” setting has been provided to accommodate third-party MY cards.

■ Component Editor Window

• Undo and Redo are now shortcut compatible.

•A scroll bar appears when the size of the component editor window is reduced.

• The size and position of the component editor window are memorized.

• An option to allow mouse-over zooming of the edit box has been added. (→ page 266)

•A [Back] button that allows switching between related parent and child windows has been

added. (→ page 265)

•A [Close All Editor Windows] button has been added to the contextual menu.

• Source Selector, Speaker Processor, Limiter, Slot In, Cascade In, and Cascade Out components

have been added.

• The Delay algorithm has been revised. (→ page 332)

- LEVEL and MUTE are effective when Delay is Off for each channel.

- The name of the overall Delay [On] parameter has been changed to [All Bypass].

• The bus send level range for Delay, Matrix, and Matrix Mixer components has been changed to

-∞ through 0.0 dB.

• Snap copy is possible. (→ page 274)

• Snap can be retained until the application is quit or another ﬁle is opened.

• Security status is displayed in the user module editor status bar.

• Multiple controllers can be selected by clicking while holding the <Ctrl> key when the editor is in

the design mode. (→ page 286)

• [Picture], [Text], [Box], [Ellipse], and [Frame] have been added to the tool palette of the user

module editor and user control editor design mode. (→ page 279)

• Controller properties can be accessed by double-clicking controllers in the user module editor or

user control editor design mode. (→ page 303)

• Picture and Text objects can be clicked to open a speciﬁed editor in the user module editor or

user control editor.

• The User Module Editor and User Control Editor offer a greater range of customization options for

color, size. etc., of the placed controls.

■ MIDI Setup

•A MIDI Setup minimize function has been added.

■ V1.2 Precautions

• When using project ﬁles (*.daf) created by version 1.1.5 or earlier, synchronize from the DME

Designer to the DME unit for the ﬁrst synchronization.

•Project ﬁles (*.daf) created using version 1.2 will not open properly on version 1.1.

Input

Mute

Input

Level

Input

Mute

Input

Level

Delay On

Delay All Bypass

OUT

Mute Level

On Mute Level

Delay

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

Contents

Chapter 1 Before Using 11

Installing DME Designer.....................................................11

Starting DME Designer.......................................................11

Closing DME Designer.......................................................13

Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview 14

Names and Functions of the Windows...............................14

Users and Security.............................................................19

Project Files........................................................................22

DME Data File....................................................................30

Configuration Creation Procedure......................................34

Online.................................................................................35

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window 39

Main Panel Window............................................................39

Main Panel Window Menu..................................................44

DME File Storage...............................................................52

Preferences........................................................................53

Security (Creating Users and Making User Settings).........55

Scene Manager..................................................................63

User Control .......................................................................70

Parameter Link...................................................................73

Synchronization

(DME Designer and DME Unit Synchronization)................75

GPI .....................................................................................79

MIDI....................................................................................90

User Defined Button (User Defined Parameters)...............98

Word Clock.......................................................................102

Monitor .............................................................................104

Clock ................................................................................105

Language Settings ...........................................................106

DME Firmware Update.....................................................107

Event Logger....................................................................111

Event Scheduler...............................................................116

Remote Control Setup List ...............................................123

Parameter List..................................................................124

Component Lock ..............................................................127

Wav File Manager ............................................................128

DAW Control.....................................................................132

Shortcut Keys...................................................................134

Backup .............................................................................135

Chapter 4 Designer 136

Editing Configurations ......................................................136

Designer Window .............................................................137

Designer Window Menu ...................................................144

Toolkit Window.................................................................152

Objects .............................................................................156

Design Window Shared Settings and Operations ............207

Drawing and Editing Wires ...............................................219

Adding, Deleting, and Renaming a Zone..........................231

Adding, Deleting, and Renaming a Configuration.............233

Area Window ....................................................................235

Zone Window....................................................................237

Configuration Window.......................................................242

User Module .....................................................................250

Chapter 5 Components 259

Types of Components.......................................................259

Component Editor Window...............................................264

Snap .................................................................................273

Library...............................................................................275

User Control/User Module Editor......................................279

Creating Parameter Links.................................................314

Chapter 6 Component Guide 316

Crossover .........................................................................316

Crossover Processor........................................................320

Delay.................................................................................332

Dynamics..........................................................................334

Equalizer (EQ)..................................................................344

Fader ................................................................................348

Filters................................................................................349

Meter.................................................................................357

Miscellaneous...................................................................358

Mixer.................................................................................360

Pan ...................................................................................378

Router...............................................................................386

Source Selector................................................................388

Speaker Processor...........................................................390

SPX...................................................................................397

Slot....................................................................................408

Cascade............................................................................410

Internal Head Amp............................................................412

MY-Card ...........................................................................413

Remote Controlled Head Amp..........................................417

Component Glossary........................................................419

Troubleshooting 423

Index 424

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

Chapter 1 Before Using

Installing DME Designer

To use DME Designer, you must ﬁrst install the software on the computer. Before you can connect the

DME Designer software to the DME unit, send and receive conﬁgurations, or perform control, you must

ﬁrst install the USB MIDI Driver or the DME-N Network Driver, according to how you will be connecting,

and then make the appropriate settings.

For instructions about how to install DME Designer and about the installation and setup method for the

MIDI driver and DME-N Network Driver, see the “DME Designer Installation Guide.”

Starting DME Designer

The DME Designer software is started from the [Start] menu. DME Designer is used with one user

logged on. The user logs on when the software is started.

■ DME Designer Start Up and Logon (When Auto-Logon Is Not Set)

1 Click [Start] ➞ [All Programs] ➞ [YAMAHA OPT Tools] ➞ [DME Designer] ➞ [DME

Designer].

The “Log On” dialog box will be displayed.

2 Click the [▼] at the right of the [User] box, and select the user.

If no user has been created, only [Administrator] will appear in the list. When starting DME

Designer for the ﬁrst time after installing, select [Administrator].

NOTE

In Windows2000, click [Start] → [Programs] → [YAMAHA OPT Tools] → [DME Designer] → [DME Designer].

NOTE

Automatic log-on is the default setting. If the automatic logon feature is enabled, the “Log On” dialog box will not be

displayed when the application is started. Instead, the auto-logon user will be logged on automatically. See page 21

for information about auto-logon.

Chapter 1 Before Using

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

3 Enter the password into the [Password] box.

Enter the password set for the user.

If no password has been set, leave the password box blank when you log on.

4 Click the [OK] button.

DME Designer starts up.

■ When Automatic Logon Has Been Set (page 21)

If automatic logon has been set, the “Log On” dialog box will not be displayed. The user set for

automatic logon will be logged on.

With automatic log on, even if a password is set for a user, it will not be requested during log on.

This is useful when logging on a speciﬁc user.

■ Starting by Opening a Project File

DME Designer starts when a project ﬁle with a saved conﬁguration is opened. When the project ﬁle

is opened, DME Designer is started with the window conﬁguration that was in place when the ﬁle

was last saved.

Chapter 1 Before Using

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

Closing DME Designer

To close DME Designer, click [Exit] on the [File] menu of the Main Panel window. It can also be closed

by clicking the [Close] button on the Main Panel window.

1 Click [Exit] on the Main Panel window [File] menu.

When you try to close DME Designer, “Project File has been modiﬁed. Save?” will be displayed in a

dialog box.

2 To save the ﬁle, click [Yes]. To close without saving, click [No].

If you click [Yes], the ﬁle currently saved with the same name will be overwritten. If the ﬁle has not

been saved, the File Save dialog box will always be displayed.

NOTE

Sometimes the “Project File has been modiﬁed. Save?” dialog box will not be displayed.

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview

Names and Functions of the Windows

The DME Designer software has several windows, including the Main Panel window, Designer window,

Component Editor window, Resource Meter window, and others.

Main Panel Window

Menus and buttons are available in the Main Panel window. The current DME Designer environment,

including the active scene and zone, the currently logged on user name, and the connection status to

the DME unit are displayed on the right side of the Main Panel window.

Main Panel Window

Designer Window

Component Editor Window

Resource Meter Window

Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

Designer Window

The Designer window displays several different windows. First among them is the Area window, where

you can manage the entire system. The Area window includes one or more Zone windows, which in

turn include one or more DME units that are used to build a zones within the area. Next is the

Conﬁguration window, where you create the internal conﬁguration of each DME unit. Within the

Conﬁguration window are the User Module windows, where you can assemble often-used

components into presets; the Toolkit window, which displays objects used in the other windows as the

basic building blocks for sound designs; and the Navigator window, which lets you grasp the overall

status of the system at a glance.

■ Area Window

The Area window is used for designing areas, which manage the entire system. While at least one

zone is included within an area, multiple zones can be arranged there.

Toolkit Window

Conﬁguration Window

User Module Window

Navigator Window

Zone Window

Zones

Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

■ Zone Window

The Zone window is used to design zones within the area. A zone is a more concrete blueprint that

includes at least one DME. It shows the DME’s connections with other devices and the wiring

between them. You can create multiple zones.

The DME units and connected devices are arranged in each Zone window, creating conﬁgurations.

■ Conﬁguration Window

The Conﬁguration window is used to design the internal conﬁguration of each DME unit contained

in the Zone window. By arranging and connecting components (audio processors like mixers,

compressors, effects, and crossovers, along with parts like faders and meters) in the Conﬁguration

window, you can create things like complex processors or matrix mixers, that determine the actual

internal structure that operates each DME unit.

■ User Module Window

The User Module window is used for designing user modules that can be arranged in the

Conﬁguration window. You can create original modules by combining multiple examples of often-

used components. When you save these modules as presets, you can recall them easily whenever

you want.

Conﬁgurations

Components

Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

■ Toolkit Window

The Toolkit window displays the objects that you can use in each window that can be displayed in

the Designer window. Those windows are the Area, Zone, Conﬁguration, and User Module

windows. The Toolkit displays different objects, according to the currently active window. To place

an object in a window, double-click it in the Toolkit window where it is displayed or drag it to the

currently active window.

■ Navigator Window

The Navigator window displays the area, zones, conﬁgurations, and components in a hierarchal

fashion that lets you check their status as a whole. When editing ofﬂine, you can click an area

name, zone name, or conﬁguration name to make that window active. Clicking a component name

will open the component editor window for that component.

■ Objects and Components

“Object” is the name for the parts that are arranged in the various design windows, such as the

Area, Zone, Conﬁguration, and User Module windows. Objects are always laid out in the Toolkit

window. Only the appropriate objects for each window are displayed. The blocks displayed at the

higher level of the Toolkit window in particular are called “components.” This refers to each type of

processor that operates the DME. “Object” normally refers to Picture, Text, Ellipse and other items

that are used after connecting them by wire to the various components.

Component Editor

The blocks that are arranged in the conﬁguration window are called “components.” Audio processors

like mixers, compressors, effects, and crossovers, along with parts like faders and meters, are used

for this purpose in the Conﬁguration window.

When you double-click on a component block arranged in the Conﬁguration window, the Component

Editor window will open. There you can edit the parameters for that component. The types of

parameters displayed will differ, depending on the component.

Component Editor

(Stereo Compressor)

Component

Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

Resource Meter

This window provides an indication of the usage of the components in the conﬁguration window. The

usage percentage increases as the number of components increases, and is shown in graph form in

this window.

This window is shown at the same time as the designer window, and provides a guide when creating

conﬁgurations.

The usage percentage also depends on the sampling frequency at which the DME unit is set to

operate. Make sure that the usage percentage is kept below 100%.

Window Operations

Operations in all windows are the same as for normal Windows applications. The windows are

controlled with the [Minimize], [Maximize/Restore], and [Close] buttons at the upper right of the title

bar. DME Designer is closed by clicking the [Close] button on the Main Panel window.

Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

Users and Security

You can create multiple users in DME Designer and set the functions that are available to each user.

Although users who will design and put together installations must be able to use all the functions of

DME Designer, users who will only operate the system can be restricted to functions that will not allow

them to accidentally change the settings.

DME Designer is used with one user at a time logged on. To change the user, click the [File] menu →

[Log Off] command on the Main Panel window.

About Users

To use DME Designer, you must logon when you start the software. Except for the ﬁrst time the

software is started or when separate settings are made for the ﬁrst time, you can logon by specifying

the name and password for a user that has been set as the administrator. The administrator can build

the system as a whole, or apply function limitations that let other people edit. Administrators or other

people that can use DME Designer are called “users.” The user name for the currently logged on user

appears below [User] on the Main Panel window.

The default user, named [Administrator], is set to use all of the functions. Immediately after DME

Designer is installed, [Administrator] is the only user, and there is no password set.

Multiple users can be created. When the system administrator creates multiple users, restrictions can

be applied separately for each one of them. A user with restrictions applied can edit using only the

functions the administrator enables for him.

The place to create, setup, and delete users is the “Security” dialog box. See “Security (Creating

Users and Making User Settings)” on page 55.

Currently Logged On User Name

Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

Logging On

The “Log On” dialog box is displayed whenever the application is started or a user is logged off.

Whenever one user is already logged on, another user cannot be logged on. To log on as another

user, ﬁrst log off the currently logged on user.

■ The “Log On” dialog box

1 [User]

From the list, select the user you want to log on as.

2 [Password] Box

Enter the password.

3 [OK] Button

Log on as the selected user.

4 [Exit] Button

When the application is started, and the “Log On” dialog box is displayed, there is an [Exit]

button. This closes the application without logging on a user.

5 [Cancel] Button

When the “Log On” dialog box is displayed after a user is logged off, there is a [Cancel] button

instead of an [Exit] button. This cancels the logoff. The original user will continue to be logged

on.

■ Logon Procedure

1 Click [▼] at the right of the [User].

A drop-down list of user names will be displayed.

2 Click the user you want to log on.

3 Enter the password into the [Password] box.

When you type in the password box, the characters you enter will display as asterisks (*).

4 Click the [OK] button.

NOTE

If the automatic logon feature is enabled, the “Log On” dialog box will not be displayed when the application is started.

Instead, the auto-logon user will be logged on automatically.

Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

Logging Off

Logoff is used when changing users. When you log off, the document currently being edited is closed,

and the “Log On” dialog box is displayed so you can log on the next user. Log off with the [Log Off]

command on the [File] menu in the Main Panel window.

1 Click the [File] menu ➞ [Log Off] command on the Main Panel window.

Log on the next user in the “Log On” dialog box.

Automatic Logging On

With the auto-logon function, you can have a speciﬁed user automatically logged on when the

application is started. If you enable the auto-logon feature, the speciﬁed user will be logged on when

the application is started, without displaying the “Log On” dialog box.

Auto-logon is set from the “Security” dialog box. See “Security (Creating Users and Making User

Settings)” on page 55.

Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

Project Files

Systems built with DME Designer are saved as project ﬁles. Project ﬁles have “.daf” as the extension

for their ﬁlenames.

These ﬁles include settings for the area, zones, conﬁgurations, and each parameter.

Since only one project ﬁle can be open at a time, before you can open a second ﬁle, the ﬁrst one must

be closed.

The commands for opening project ﬁles, creating new ones, and saving them, are found in the [File]

menu of the Main Panel window.

Creating New Project Files

Project ﬁles are created using the [File] menu → [New] command in the Main Panel window.

1 Click [File] menu ➞ [New] in the Main Panel window.

Since the currently open project ﬁle must be closed before a new one can be created, a “Project

ﬁle has been modiﬁed. Save?” dialog box will be displayed.

2 To save the ﬁle, click [Yes]. To close without saving, click [No].

If you click [Yes], the ﬁle currently saved with the same name will be overwritten. If the ﬁle has not

been saved, the File Save dialog box will be displayed.

A new project ﬁle will be created.

Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

Saving Project Files

Project ﬁles are saved using the [File] menu → [Save] and [Save As] commands in the Main Panel

window. The [Save] command overwrites the previously saved version of the ﬁle. The [Save As]

command lets you give a new name to the ﬁle before saving it. When you save the ﬁle with a new

name, you can protect it with a password.

■ The “Save As” Dialog Box

When you click the [File] menu → [Save As] command in the Main Panel window, the “Save As”

dialog box is displayed. Except for some [Security] options, this dialog box is the same as the

normal Windows dialog box for saving ﬁles.

1 [Save In]

Specify the folder for saving the ﬁle. The folder name is displayed in this box. Click the [▼] on

the right to move to another folder.

The large box below displays the contents of the folder in this box.

2 [Up One Level] Button

Moves to the folder one level higher in the hierarchy.

3 [Create New Folder] Button

Creates a new folder in the folder currently being displayed.

4 [Views] Button

Changes the way the folder content list is displayed. If you click this button, a menu appears

that lets you change the arrangement and display format of the ﬁles in the list.

5 List

This box displays the contents of the folder shown in the [Save In] box. Only ﬁles belonging to

the type selected in the [Save As Type] box will be displayed.

6 [File Name] Box

Enter the ﬁlename. If the currently open ﬁle has already been saved, its name will be already

entered in this box. To save using a different ﬁlename, change the name here.

)

[Up One Level] Button

[Create New Folder] Button

[Views] Button

Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

7 [Save as type]

Selects the format for the ﬁle you are saving. When saving project ﬁles including Wave ﬁles set

for Wav File Player, select “Project File with wave (*.daf)”. Otherwise, select “Project File (*.daf)”.

8 [Security]

Protects ﬁles with a password. If you check here, you will be able to enter settings in the [ID],

[Password], and [Conﬁrm Password] boxes.

9 [ID] Box

Enter the ID that has been set for the ﬁle. The currently logged on user name will be pre-

entered, but you can change it. This need not be the same as a user name.

) [Password] Box

Enter the password that has been set for the ﬁle. You can enter up to 256 alphanumeric

characters. The characters you enter will be displayed as asterisks (*) in the [Password] box.

! [Conﬁrm Password] Box

Enter the password once again to conﬁrm it. Enter the same password as was entered into the

[Password] box. The characters you enter will be displayed as asterisks (*), the same as in the

[Password] box.

@ [Save] Button

Saves the project ﬁle.

If the characters entered into the [Password] and [Conﬁrm Password] boxes were not the same,

a “Password is different” dialog box will be displayed. Click the [OK] button and reenter the

correct password in the [Password] and [Conﬁrm Password] boxes.

# [Cancel] Button

Cancel the ﬁle save process.

NOTE

When someone attempts to open a password-protected project ﬁle, the application will request an ID and password.

If they are not entered correctly, the ﬁle cannot be opened. Be careful to avoid mistakes when entering the ID and

password. The password cannot be reissued and the ID and password cannot be changed. Be careful not to forget

them.

Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

■ Saving Project Files

1 Click [File] menu ➞ [Save] in the Main Panel window.

If there is a ﬁle already saved with the same name, it will be overwritten.

When saving a project ﬁle for the ﬁrst time, you must name the ﬁle before saving it. The “Save

As” dialog box will open, the same as when clicking the [File] menu [Save As] command. Enter

a ﬁlename and specify the folder where the ﬁle will be saved.

■ Saving a File with a New Name

With the [File] menu [Save As] command in the Main Panel window, you can save the currently

open ﬁle with a new ﬁlename. When saving for the ﬁrst time, this creates a new ﬁle. A ﬁle that has

already been saved with a name will be saved as a separate ﬁle.

1 Click [File] menu ➞ [Save As] in the Main Panel window.

The “Save As” dialog box will be displayed.

2 Enter a ﬁlename into the [File name] box.

3 Specify the folder where the ﬁle will be saved.

4 Click the [Save] button.

Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

■ Protecting a Project File with a Password

When you save a project ﬁle with a new name, you can set a password and protect the ﬁle. If a

password is set, an ID and password will be requested when the ﬁle is opened.

The security settings for a ﬁle cannot be changed by resaving the ﬁle with the same name. They

can only be changed when saving the ﬁle with a new name using the [Save As] command. Once

set, the ID and password cannot be changed. To change the ID and password for password-

protected project ﬁles, use the [Save As] command to save the ﬁle as a new one with a different

name.

1 Click [File] menu ➞ [Save As] in the Main Panel window.

The “Save As” dialog box will be displayed.

2 Place a checkmark for [Security] in the ﬁle save dialog box.

3 Enter an ID into the [ID] box.

The name of the currently logged on user will be automatically entered into the [ID] box. To

change it, enter another ID into the box.

When using [Save As] to save a password-protected ﬁle, the dialog box will be displayed with

the ID and password boxes automatically ﬁlled in with the ID and password that were assigned

to the original ﬁle. To change the ID and password, enter new ones into the boxes.

4 Enter the desired password into the [Password] box.

You can enter up to 256 alphanumeric characters for the password. The characters you enter

will be displayed as asterisks (*) in the [Password] box.

5 Enter the same characters into the [Conﬁrm Password] box as were entered into the

[Password] box.

The characters you enter will be displayed as asterisks (*) in the [Password] box.

6 Click the [Save] button.

When saving a password-protected ﬁle without changing the name, the same ID and password

will be set (the ID and password cannot be changed).

Using the [Save] command, you cannot password protect an already saved project ﬁle that was

not already password protected. To set a password for a ﬁle that is not already password

protected, save it as a separate ﬁle using the [Save As] command.

Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

Opening Project Files

Project ﬁles are opened using the [File] menu → [Open] command in the Main Panel window. Since

the currently opened project ﬁle must be closed before another one can be opened, a “Project ﬁle has

been modiﬁed. Save?” dialog box may be displayed.

■ [Open] Command

Project ﬁles are opened using the [File] menu → [Open] command in the Main Panel window.

1 Click [File] menu ➞ [Open] in the Main Panel window.

A “Project ﬁle has been modiﬁed. Save?” dialog box may be displayed.

2 Click the [Yes] or [No] button.

The “Open” dialog box will be displayed.

3 Selects the ﬁle to be opened.

4 Click the [Open] button.

Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

■ Opening a Project File That Has Security Set

If security is set for a project, the “Enter ID & Password” dialog box will be displayed when you

click the [Open] button in the “Open” dialog box.

Enter the ID and password for the ﬁle into the [ID] and [Password] boxes, and click the [OK]

button.

If you enter an incorrect ID or password and click the [OK] button on the “Enter ID & Password”

dialog box, the “Wrong ID or password!” dialog box will be displayed.

Click the [OK] button and enter the correct ID and password the “Enter ID & Password” dialog

box.

■ Opening a Project File from the “Recently Used Files” List

Recently used project ﬁles are displayed on the [File] menu in the Main Panel window. If you click

one of the ﬁlenames, you can open that project ﬁle.

If security is set for a project ﬁle, the “Enter ID & Password” dialog box will be displayed if that ﬁle is

selected from the recently used ﬁles list. Enter the ID and password to open the ﬁle.

Recently Used Files

Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

■ Double-Click the Icon for the Project File

When you double-click the icon for the project ﬁle, the ﬁle will open. If DME Designer is not started,

it will start. After logon, the project ﬁle will open.

Just as when you use the [Open] command, if DME Designer is already started, the currently open

project ﬁle must be closed before another one can be opened. Therefore, a “Project ﬁle has been

modiﬁed. Save?” dialog box will be displayed.

If security is set for the project ﬁle, the “Enter ID & Password” dialog box will be displayed. Enter

the ID and password to open the ﬁle.

Closing Project Files

You cannot have multiple project ﬁles open simultaneously in DME Designer. To close the currently

open project ﬁle, you can create a new project ﬁle or open another project ﬁle.

NOTE

Sometimes the “Project ﬁle has been modiﬁed. Save?” dialog box will not be displayed.

Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

DME Data File

You can import or export parameters for a DME that is arranged in a conﬁguration ﬁle. Parameters for

a single DME unit in the current conﬁguration (the one being edited) are saved as a ﬁle. Saved

parameters can be imported into another project ﬁle.

Files with parameters saved in them are called “DME Data Files.” These ﬁles have “.ddf” as the

extension for their ﬁlenames.

DME Data Import

This imports DME data ﬁle settings into a DME included in the current conﬁguration.

1 Make active the conﬁguration that arranged the DME into which you are going to import.

If there are multiple conﬁgurations, display the window in front for the conﬁguration that arranged

the DME to which you are going to import.

2 Click the [File] menu in the Main Panel window, and move the mouse cursor over [Import

DME Conﬁguration].

A submenu will be displayed. The DMEs included in the current conﬁguration will be displayed on

a submenu.

Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

3 On the submenu, click on the DME into which you will import settings.

The “Open” dialog box will be displayed.

4 Select the DME data ﬁle and click the [Open] button.

■ [Import DME Conﬁguration] Submenu

The DMEs included in the current conﬁguration will be displayed on the [Import DME

Conﬁguration] submenu.

[Create New DME] creates a new DME and imports settings.

NOTE

Only users for whom the [Operation Security] → [Edit] checkbox in the “Security” dialog box has been checked can

import DME data. For information about user security levels, see “Security (Creating Users and Making User Settings)”

on page 55.

NOTE

If DME data ﬁle import was not possible, a “DME ﬁle import failed.” message will be displayed.

Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

DME Export

This exports parameters from a DME included in the current conﬁguration and saves them as a ﬁle.

1 Make active the conﬁguration that includes the DME from which you will export.

If there are multiple conﬁgurations, display the window in front for the conﬁguration that arranged

the DME from which you are going to export.

2 Click the [File] menu in the Main Panel window, and move the mouse cursor over [Export

DME Conﬁguration].

A submenu will be displayed.

3 On the submenu, click on the DME from which you will export settings.

The “Save As” dialog box will be displayed.

4 Enter the ﬁlename.

Determines whether a selected ﬁle type will be exported along with a wave ﬁle.

5 Specify the folder where the ﬁle will be saved, then click the [Save] button.

Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

■ [Export DME Conﬁguration] Submenu

The DMEs included in the current conﬁguration will be displayed on the [Export DME

Conﬁguration] submenu.

Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

Conﬁguration Creation Procedure

The conﬁguration is a design diagram that determines the DME conﬁguration. Transferring this data

causes the DME to operate. Follow the procedure below to create a DME Designer conﬁguration.

1 Creating a New Project.

When you start DME Designer, a new project is created. If another project ﬁle is already open, use

the [File] menu → [New] command in the Main Panel window to create a new ﬁle.

“Main Panel Window Menu” → [File] menu → [New] (page 44)

2 Zone Settings.

Zone names are set, and zones are added and deleted using the “Zone” dialog box.

See “Adding, Deleting, and Renaming a Zone” on page 231.

3 Conﬁguration Settings.

Zone names are set, and zones are added and deleted using the “Zone” dialog box.

See “Adding, Deleting, and Renaming a Conﬁguration” on page 233.

4 DME, ICP, External Device Layout.

Arrange DMEs, ICPs, and external devices in the Zone window.

See “Zone Window” on page 237,

“Objects” on page 156,

“Design Window Shared Settings and Operations” on page 207.

5 Placing Components.

Place components and user modules in the Conﬁguration window.

See “Conﬁguration Window” on page 242,

“User Module” on page 250,

“Types of Components” on page 259.

6 Component Logical Connections.

Use wires to connect the components and user modules you placed in the Conﬁguration window.

See “Drawing and Editing Wires” on page 219.

7 Setting Parameters.

Edit the component parameters in the component editor.

See “Component Editor Window” on page 264.

8 Setting User Deﬁned Parameters.

Parameters can be assigned to function keys F1 through F6 in the DME unit.

See “User Deﬁned Button (User Deﬁned Parameters)” on page 98.

9 Storing Scenes.

Store the scene using the [Tools] menu → [Scene Manager] command in the Main Panel window.

See “Scene Manager” on page 63.

NOTE

Conﬁgurations can be created only when the DME unit is ofﬂine. To transfer the data, you must ﬁrst go into online status. The

procedure for going online is given later in this document.

Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

Online

You can connect the DME unit to your computer and transfer conﬁgurations, scenes and parameters

created in DME Designer into the DME unit. You can also read data from the DME unit into DME

Designer, synchronizing it with the status of the DME unit.

Because Synchronization presupposes that the DME unit can communicate with the computer where

DME Designer is installed, the necessary drivers (USB-MIDI or DME-N Network Driver) must be

installed, and appropriate settings must be made for each driver and for DME Designer MIDI port.

1 DME Unit and Computer Connection.

Connect the DME unit and computer using a USB cable or an Ethernet cable.

See separate “DME64N/24N Owner’s Manual” for details.

2 MIDI Driver Installation.

Install the USB-MIDI driver or DME-N Network driver in the computer.

See separate “DME Designer Installation Guide” for details.

3 MIDI Driver Setup.

Make the necessary settings for the MIDI driver installed in the computer. If the driver is set up

already, check the settings before going online.

See separate “DME Designer Installation Guide” for details.

4 MIDI Driver Port Setup.

The MIDI Setup dialog will be displayed if you press the MIDI Setup button on the MIDI Setup

toolbar that is displayed when you start DME Designer Set up the In/Out/Thru ports connected to

the DME.

5 Making MIDI IN/OUT Settings in DME Designer.

On the [Port] tab of the “MIDI” dialog box, select the MIDI driver used for sending and receiving

MIDI messages. If the driver is set up already, check the settings before going online.

“MIDI” → [Port] tab (page 97)

NOTE

Because there are no scene settings when the DME unit is purchased, the conﬁguration and scene information created in

DME Designer must ﬁrst be transferred.

Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

6 Storing and Checking Scenes.

When moving online, the lowest scene must be stored. You can check if a scene is stored using the

“Scene Manager” dialog box.

See “Scene Manager” on page 63.

7 Recalling Scenes.

When going online, the scene will be recalled. Its scene number must be displayed in [Scene

Number], and its scene name will be displayed in Scene Name. If [--------] is displayed of [Scene

Name], the scene will be recalled.

Main Panel Window → “Current Scene” (page 42)

See “Scene Manager” on page 63.

8 Display the “Synchronization” dialog box.

Click [Synchronization] in the [Tools] menu or the large [Synchronization] button on the toolbar.

When the dialog box opens, a list of connected DME units will be obtained.

DMEs connected to the computer are displayed in the [Network] list.

NOTE

When requesting the “Synchronization” dialog box, a one-time alert will be displayed if no scene has been recalled, or

the MIDI Port settings have not been made. After clicking the [OK] button on the alert, each dialog will open. At this time,

you can make the needed settings in the displayed dialog box, and then again display the “Synchronization” dialog box.

Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

9 IP Address Selection

The DMEs included in the current zone are displayed in the [Designer] list in the

“Synchronization” dialog box. Click the [IP Address] box, then select the DME unit IP address

that matches the DME currently in the DME Designer.

10 Going Online.

Clicking the [Go On-Line] button displays a dialog box where you can decide the synchronization

method.

Click the [Designer→DME] direction button.

Transfer of the conﬁguration will begin, and DME Designer will be synchronized with the unit.

If there are many zones, this process may take time.

NOTE

IP addresses are displayed for devices of the same type in the area.

Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

When going online is ﬁnished, the [Go On-line] button will be grayed out, and the Main Panel

window [On-Line] button will light up. The dialog box will close automatically if [Close this window

after synchronization] is checked.

To go off line, click either the [ON-Line] button in the main panel window, or the [Go Off-line]

button in the “Synchronization” dialog box.

NOTE

It may not be possible to go online if a scene has not been stored when [Recall Safe] is selected.

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

Main Panel Window

The Main Panel window is the main window of DME Designer.

Title Bar

“DME Designer” is displayed on the title bar.

Menu Bar

Commands that can be executed in the application are collected into categories on the menu bar.

When you click one of the categories, a list of commands is displayed.

Also, the name of the currently open project ﬁle is displayed at the right. When a new project ﬁle has

been opened, or has not yet been saved, “Untitled” will be displayed for the ﬁle name.

Tool Buttons (Small)

Frequently used commands are arranged here as buttons. When a command cannot be used, its

button will be grayed out.

Log On User

Title Bar

Menu Bar

Tool Buttons (Small)

Tool Buttons (Large)

[Mute] Button

Current Scene

Current Zone

Communication

Status

[Open File] Button

[Save File] Button

[Undo] Button

[Undo History] Button

[Redo] Button

[User Deﬁned] Button

[Word Clock] Button

[GPI] Button

[MIDI] Button

[Parameter Link] Button

[Clock] Button

[User Control Manager] Button

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

■ [Open File] Button

Opens project ﬁles.

→ [Open] on the [File] menu (page 45)

■ [Save File] Button

Saves the project ﬁle currently being edited.

→ [Save] on the [File] menu (page 45)

■ [Undo] Button

Undoes the most recent edit operation.

→ [Undo] on the [Edit] menu (page 47)

■ [Undo History] Button

Opens the “Undo History” dialog box. Undoes multiple operations.

→ [Undo History] on the [Edit] menu (page 47)

■ [Redo] Button

Restores operations undone with the [Undo] button back to their original condition.

→ [Redo] on the [Edit] menu (page 47)

■ [User Deﬁned] Button

Opens the “User Deﬁned Button” dialog box.

→ See “[User Deﬁned Button]” on page 49.

■ [Word Clock] Button

Opens the “Word Clock” dialog box.

→ See “[Word Clock]” on page 49.

■ [GPI] Button

Opens the “GPI” dialog box.

→ See “[GPI]” on page 49.

■ [MIDI] Button

Opens the “MIDI” dialog box.

→ See “[MIDI]” on page 49.

■ [Parameter Link] Button

Opens the “Parameter Link” dialog box.

→ See “[Parameter Link]” on page 49.

■ [Clock] Button

Opens the “Clock” dialog box.

→ See “[Clock]” on page 50.

■ [User Control Manager] Button

Opens the “User Control Manager” dialog box.

→ See “[User Control]” on page 48.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

Tool Button (Large)

■ [Show/Hide Designer] Button

Displays or hides the Designer window.

■ [User Control] Button

Works the same as the [User Control] command on the [View] menu. Clicking this button displays a

menu.

User Control will be displayed on the menu. If you click there, the user control window will be

displayed.

If you click [New User Control], the “New User Control” dialog box opens.

■ [Synchronization] Button

Opens the “Synchronization” dialog box.

→ See “Synchronization” Dialog Box on page 76.

■ [Event Logger] Button

Opens the Event Logger window.

→ See “Event Logger” Window on page 111.

■ [Event Scheduler] Button

Opens the “Event Scheduler” dialog box.

→ See “Event Scheduler” Dialog Box on page 116.

[Show/Hide Designer] Button

[User Control] Button

[Synchronization] Button

[Event Logger] Button

[Event Scheduler] Button

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

[Mute] Button

Tur ns ON and OFF the DME mute button for the current zone.

To turn it ON, press the <Shift> key while clicking. If you click the button while it is OFF without

pressing the <Shift> key, the following message will be displayed: “Click the Mute Button with the Shift

Key.”

To turn it OFF, click on the button. There is no need to press the <Shift> key.

Current Scene

Displays the number and name of the current scene. You can switch between scenes.

■ [Scene Number]

Displays the number of the current scene. A list where you can select a scene is displayed when

you press the [▼]. The EDIT indicator will light when a parameter has been edited after recalling or

storing a scene.

■ [Scene Name]

Displays the name of the current scene.

■ [Scene Manager] Button

Opens the “Scene Manager” dialog box.

NOTE

Press <Ctrl> key and <+> key simultaneously recall the next scene and press <Ctrl> key and <-> key simultaneously

recall the previous scene. These settings can be changed via the Shortcut keys dialog box (page 134).

Mute OFF Mute ON

[Scene Number]

[Scene Name]

[Scene Manager] Button

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

[User] (Logged On User)

■ Currently Logged On User Name

Displays the currently logged on user name.

■ [Security] Button

Opens the “Security” dialog box.

Current Zone

Displays the name of the active zone. A list where you can select a zone is displayed when you press

the [▼].

Communication Status

Displays the communication status between the DME unit and the computer.

■ [On-line] Button

When the DME unit is connected to a computer, clicking this button alternately switches the unit's

on-line/off-line status. The indicator will light when the DME unit is on-line.

■ Message Transmit/Receive Indicators

[Rx]

Lights when MIDI messages from the DME unit are received by DME Designer.

[Tx]

Lights when MIDI messages are transmitted from DME Designer to the DME unit.

Currently Logged On

User Name

[Security] Button

ON-line Button

Message Transmit/Receive Indicator

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

Main Panel Window Menu

[File] Menu

■ [New]

Creates a new project. When a new project is created, the current project will be closed.

A conﬁrmation message asking “Project ﬁle has been modiﬁed. Save?” will be displayed.

[Yes] Button

Saves the currently open project.

If the currently open ﬁle was already given a name and saved, that saved ﬁle will be overwritten.

The “Save As” dialog box will be displayed for ﬁles that have not yet been saved. In this dialog box,

you can name the ﬁle when you save it.

[No] Button

Closes the project without saving it. If the ﬁle has already been given a name and saved, the most

recently saved version will remain as is. If the project has not been given a name and saved, it will

be lost.

[Cancel] Button

Cancels creation of a new project.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

■ [Open]

Opens saved project ﬁles. Because the currently open project will be closed, a conﬁrmation dialog

box asking “Project ﬁle has been modiﬁed. Save?” will be displayed.

When you select this command, the “Open” dialog box will be displayed. Select the project ﬁle you

want to open and click the [Open] button.

If security is enabled for the project ﬁle, the “Enter ID & Password” dialog box will be displayed.

Enter the ID and password to open the ﬁle and click the [OK] button. The project ﬁle will open.

■ [Save]

Overwrites an already saved project ﬁle with the current changes. If the ﬁle is being saved for the

ﬁrst time, the “Save As” dialog box will be displayed.

→ See “Project Files” on page 22.

■ [Save as]

Saves the current project ﬁle as another ﬁle with a new name or in a new location. When you select

this command, the “Save as” dialog box will be displayed.

→ See “Project Files” on page 22.

■ [Import DME Conﬁguration]

Imports parameters for a DME that is arranged in a conﬁguration ﬁle.

→ See “DME Data File” on page 30.

■ [Export DME Conﬁguration]

Exports parameters of a DME that is arranged in a conﬁguration ﬁle.

→ See “DME Data File” on page 30.

■ DME File Storage

Opens the “DME File Storage” dialog box.

→ See “DME File Storage” on page 52.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

■ Recently Used Files

Displays recently saved ﬁles. If you click one of the ﬁle names, you can open that ﬁle.

■ [Preference]

Opens the “Preference” dialog box.

→ See “Preferences” on page 53.

■ [Log Off]

Logs off the currently logged on user. Because the currently logged on user must be logged off

before a new one can be logged on, the “Log On” dialog box will be displayed so you can log on

the next user.

→ See “Users and Security” on page 19.

■ [Exit]

Closes “DME Designer.” A conﬁrmation dialog box asking “Project ﬁle has been modiﬁed. Save?”

will be displayed. To save, click [Yes]. To close without saving, click [No.]

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

[Edit] Menu

■ [Undo]

Undoes a single operation. The name of the operation that will be undone by [Undo] is displayed in

the command name. You can also select the commands that come after that.

When [Undo] is not possible, the command will be grayed out.

■ [Redo]

Returns to the status before the [Undo] command was executed. The name of the operation that

will be restored by [Redo] is displayed. You can [Redo] only as many operations as were undone

with the [Undo] command. When [Redo] is not possible, the command will be grayed out.

■ [Undo History]

Opens the “Undo History” dialog box. Undoes multiple operations. Also deletes the history of

operations.

1 List

Displays all operations performed so far, in order starting with the oldest. You can select an

operation by clicking on it.

2 [OK] Button

Undoes all operations below the one selected on the list. The operation selected on the list does

not get undone.

3 [Close] Button

Closes the dialog box.

4 [Delete All] Button

Deletes the entire history of operations displayed on the list. When an operation is deleted from

the list, it cannot be undone.

Operations undone from the [Undo History] can be re-executed one-by-one using [Redo].

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

[View] Menu

■ [Designer]

Displays or hides the Designer window.

■ [Event Logger]

Displays the network event log.

Not displayed if selected while the network event log is showing.

→ See “Event Logger” on page 111.

■ [User Control]

This opens User Control.

The user controls that can be opened by the currently logged on user are displayed on a submenu.

If you click [New User Control] on the submenu, the “New User Control” dialog box opens.

→ See “User Control/User Module Editor” on page 279.

[Tools] Menu

■ [Scene Manager]

Opens the “Scene Manager” dialog box.

→ See “Scene Manager” on page 63.

NOTE

Controls that are not available to the currently logged-on user are not shown in the menu.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

■ [User Control Manager]

Opens the “User Control Manager” dialog box.

→ See “User Control” on page 70, page 279

■ [Parameter Link]

Opens the “Parameter Link” dialog box.

→ See “Parameter Link” on page 73.

■ [Synchronization]

Opens the “Synchronization” dialog box.

→ See “Synchronization (DME Designer and DME Unit Synchronization)” on page 75.

■ [Event Scheduler]

Opens the “Event Scheduler” dialog box.

→ See “Event Scheduler” on page 116.

■ [Wav File Manager]

Opens the “Wav File Manager” dialog box.

→ See “Wav File Manager” on page 128.

■ [GPI]

Opens the “GPI” dialog box.

→ See “GPI” on page 79.

■ [MIDI]

Opens the “MIDI” dialog box.

→ See “MIDI” on page 90.

■ [User Deﬁned Button]

Opens the “User Deﬁned Button” dialog box.

→ See “User Deﬁned Button (User Deﬁned Parameters)” on page 98.

■ [DAW Control]

Opens the “DAW Control” dialog box.

→ See “DAW Control” on page 132.

■ [Remote Control Setup List]

Opens the “Remote Control Setup List” Dialog box.

→ See “Remote Control Setup List” on page 123.

■ [Word Clock]

Opens the “Word Clock” dialog box.

→ See “Word Clock” on page 102.

■ [Monitor]

Opens the “Monitor Out” dialog box.

→ See “Monitor” on page 104.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

■ [Clock]

Opens the “Clock” dialog box.

→ See “Clock” on page 105.

■ [Language]

Opens the “Language” dialog box.

→ See “Language Settings” on page 106.

■ [Parameter List]

Opens the “Parameter List” dialog box.

→ See “Parameter List” on page 124.

■ [Component Lock]

Opens the “Component Lock” dialog box.

→ See “Component Lock” on page 127.

■ [Security]

Opens the “Security” dialog box.

→ See “Security (Creating Users and Making User Settings)” on page 55.

■ [Shortcut Keys]

Opens the “Shortcut Keys” dialog box.

→ See “Shortcut Keys” on page 134.

■ [Backup]

Opens the “Backup” dialog box.

→ See “Backup” on page 135.

■ [Firmware Update]

Updates the DME unit ﬁrmware.

→ See “DME Firmware Update” on page 107.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

[Window] Menu

Displays the open windows. Click a window name to bring that window to the front.

■ [Close All Editor Windows]

Closes all editor windows.

[About] Menu

■ [About DME Designer]

Displays information about this application.

NOTE

Each design windows within the Designer window can be switched using the [Window] menu in the Designer window.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

DME File Storage

Allows management of DME ﬁles. Project ﬁles can be managed on the DME, eliminating the need to

manage them on the computer.

Click [DME File Storage] in the [File] menu to display the “DME File Storage” dialog.

■ Zone List

Select the desired zone and DME from the list.

■ File List

A list of the ﬁles stored on the selected DME.

[Send] Button

Transfers selected ﬁles from the computer to the DME.

[Receive] Button

Transfers selected ﬁles from the DME to the computer.

[Delete] Button

Deletes selected ﬁles from the DME.

NOTE

Synchronization may become impossible if the [Remaining Memory] value (the amount of remaining DME memory)

becomes too small. If this occurs, delete unwanted ﬁles to increase the amount of available memory.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

Preferences

When you click the [Preference] command on the [File] menu in the Main Panel window, the

“Preferences” dialog box is displayed. Here you can make environmental settings for using DME

Designer.

■ [Application] Tab

Here you can set the general usage environment.

On Startup

Selects the action when the application starts up.

• [Load the last ﬁle opened]

Opens the last opened ﬁle. If the ﬁle cannot be found because it was moved, deleted, or its

name was changed, a new project will be opened.

• [Create an empty ﬁle]

Opens a new project.

• [Load File & Synchronization]

Opens the last opened ﬁle and synchronizes with the DME unit.

Contents Folder

Speciﬁes the folder where the images used by the Design windows and user controls are stored.

Click the [Browse] button and specify the folder.

Auto Save

Set up the automatic ﬁle save feature.

• [Enable]

Auto save of project ﬁles being worked on will occur when checked. The ﬁle will be

overwritten, but the Undo history will not be cleared. This setting has no effect when the ﬁle

being worked on has not previously been saved, or the computer is online.

• [Interval in minutes]

Speciﬁes the auto-save interval in minutes.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

[Conﬁrm Scene Store]

Place a checkmark here to have a conﬁrmation dialog box displayed when storing a scene.

[Save after synchronization]

If a save is performed after the DME Designer is synchronized to the DME unit, the next

synchronization will be signiﬁcantly faster because one the difference needs to be synchronized.

Check this checkbox to specify auto-save after the DME Designer is synchronized to the DME unit.

■ [Component Editor] Tab

Sets up operation of the Component Editor knobs, sliders, and edit boxes. Refer to “Changing

Parameters” on page 266.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

Security (Creating Users and Making User Settings)

When you click the [Security] command on the [Tools] menu, the “Security” dialog box is displayed.

Here you can create and delete users. You can also set the security level for each user. Users are

saved as DME Designer settings. You don’t need to create users for each ﬁle.

■ User Setting Restrictions

Various restrictions apply, depending on the security level of the user that is currently logged on.

• The currently logged on user can edit only users at a security level lower than his or her own.

• The currently logged on user cannot raise his or her own security level.

■ [Administrator] User

The [Administrator] user is registered by default, and can use all functions. Immediately after DME

Designer is installed, there is no password set for the [Administrator] user.

Auto-Logon User

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

■ Security Level

User security levels are set with the [Operation Security] item at the right of the “Security” dialog

box.

You can allow or disallow editing and the ability to open windows or set controls.

Ten levels, 1 through 10, are set for scene storage/recall and user controls. Level 1 is the highest

level and 10 is the lowest. By default, level 1 is set for the [Administrator] user. Level 1 can be set

for the [Administrator] only. Users created by the [Administrator] directly below itself can be set at

levels 2 through 10. New users created subordinate to users at level 2 can be set at levels 3

through 10. New users can be created no higher than one level below the user that created them.

Scene sets the level for storing and recalling scenes. The logged on user can store or recall scenes

at levels equal to or lower than his or her own level. For example, a user at level 3 can recall scenes

set for scene recall at levels 3 through 10.

Levels are also set for user control. The logged on user can display or edit user controls at levels

equal to or lower than his or her own level.

The log-on user can use zones that are checked in the [View Zone] ﬁeld.

Level 1 User

Level 2 User

Level 3 User

Level 4 User

Security Level Settings

User Level

High

Low

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

[Enable Auto-Log On]

Enables auto-logon. If this checkbox is selected, the user displayed in the box to the right will be

logged on automatically when DME Designer is started. Auto-logon logs on the user without any

password entry.

Click the [▼] at the right of the box, and select the user for auto-logon from the displayed user list.

If auto-logon is turned OFF, the “Log On” dialog box will be displayed whenever the DME Designer is

started. Each time a user must be selected and a password entered in order to log on.

If auto-logon is changed from ON to OFF when a password is set for the currently logged on user, a

“Conﬁrmation of Current User” dialog box will be displayed.

Enter the user’s password into the [Password] box, and click the [OK] button.

If you click the [Cancel] button, auto-logon will remain ON.

■ Auto-Logon User

Selects the user for auto-logon when [Enable Auto Log On] is checked.

The currently logged on user can set this command for users at a security level equal to or lower

than his or her own. If a user at a higher level is selected, a message that warns “Cannot access

higher user level.” will be displayed. Click the [OK] button.

To set auto-logon for a user at a security level higher than the currently logged on user, ﬁrst log off

as the current user, then logon as a user at a higher security level.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

User List

The registered users are displayed here. The currently logged on user is displayed in bold text. Click

the name of the user whose settings you want to edit.

The [Administrator] is the user set by default, and it is used for administering the system. The

[Administrator] user has the highest level and can use all functions.

All new users are created at a level lower that the [Administrator] user, and are displayed below the

[Administrator].

If a user at level 2 and below has other users subordinate to him or her, a [+] or [-] button will be

displayed to the left of higher level user’s name on the list. Clicking the [+] or [-] buttons displays or

hides the users subordinate to that higher user.

The currently logged on user can create multiple users at lower levels.

1 Name

Displays the user names. The currently logged on user is displayed in bold text.

2 Startup User Control

Displays “ON” to automatically open the user control and make settings when the user is logged

on.

3 [Add User] Button

Adds a user subordinate to the user selected on the list. Clicking here displays the “Add User”

dialog box. Select the user that will be superior to the new user, then click this button.

If a user higher than the currently logged on user is selected, the button will be grayed out and

no user can be added.

4 [Remove User] Button

Deletes the user selected on the list. Only users at levels lower than the currently logged on user

can be deleted.

Furthermore, the currently logged on user cannot delete himself.

5 [Change] Button

Changes settings for the user selected on the list. Opens the “Change User Information” dialog

box. The contents of the dialog box are the same as the “Add User” dialog box.

4 5

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

6 Operation Security

Sets the functions that can be used by the user selected on the [User List] to the left. Selecting

a checkbox enables use of the corresponding function.

• [Edit]

You can change the following settings: editing in the Designer window, user control edit, user

deﬁned parameter edit, word clock, scene edit, GPI and MIDI.

• [View DME Design Window]

Allows display of the Designer conﬁguration window.

• [Control Component Editor]

Allows parameter editing in the component editor.

• [View Component Editor]

Allows display of the component editor.

• [Change Conﬁguration]

Allows switching between conﬁgurations.

• [Synchronization]

Allows synchronizing with the DME unit.

• [View Log Window]

Displays the Event Logger window.

• [Scene Store/Recall Level]

Sets the level at which scenes can be stored and recalled. Click the [▲] and [▼] buttons or

enter a number into the box to set the level. While levels 1 through 10 are available, the range

of levels that can be actually set varies according to the level of the user doing the setting.

When a user is created, automatically this is set to “One level lower than the user above.” The

initially set level is the highest level that can be set for that user.

• [User Control Level]

Sets the user control level. Click the [▲] and [▼] buttons or enter a number into the box to set

a level from 1 through 10. While levels 1 through 10 are available, the range of levels that can

be actually set varies according to the level of the user doing the setting.

When a user is created, automatically this is set to “One level lower than the user above.” The

initially set level is the highest level that can be set for that user.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

“Add User” Dialog Box/“Change User Information” Dialog Box

When you click the [Add User] button in the “Security” dialog box, the “Add User” dialog box is

displayed. If you click the [Change] button in the “Security” dialog box, the “Change User Information”

dialog box is displayed.

The “Add User” dialog box is for setting a user name and password when adding a new user. You can

change user settings in the “Change User Information” dialog box. The contents of the dialog boxes

are the same.

■ [Name] Box

Enter the user name. Enter a name different than other existing user names.

■ [Password] Box

Enter the password. When you type in the password box, asterisks (*) will be displayed instead of

the characters you enter. If you do not want to set a password the user, leave the box blank.

■ [Conﬁrm Password] Box

Enter the password once again to conﬁrm it. When you type in the password box, asterisks (*) will

be displayed instead of the characters you enter. If you do not want to set a password the user,

leave the box blank.

■ [Startup User Control]

When a user logs on, user controls and settings which are speciﬁed or below that user’s security

level are automatically opened.

In the “Security” dialog box [User List], [User Control] will be “ON” for users for whom this option

has been turned on.

■ [OK] Button

In the “Add User” dialog box, this creates new users according to the settings made there. In the

“Change User Information” dialog box, this applies the dialog box settings and changes the user

settings.

■ [Cancel] Button

Cancels user creation or setting changes, and closes the dialog box.

“Add User” dialog box “Change User Information” dialog box

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

Creating Users

Users are created as follows:

1 Click [Security] on the Main Panel window [Tools] menu.

The “Security” dialog box will be displayed.

You can open the “Security” dialog box by clicking the [Security] button in the Main Panel window.

2 Select a user from the [User List] in the “Security” dialog box.

A user will be created subordinate to the selected user. [Administrator] can be selected only if the

logged on user is the [Administrator]. If there are multiple users, select the user that will be above

the new user.

Multiple users can be created subordinate to a single user.

3 Click the [Add User] button.

The “Add User” dialog box will be displayed.

4 Enter the user name into the [Name] box.

5 Enter the password into the [Password] box.

You can also create users with no password. If you do not want to set a password for the user,

leave the [Password] box blank.

6 Enter the password into the [Conﬁrm Password] box also.

If you do not want to set a password for the user, leave the [Conﬁrm Password] box blank also.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

7 Set the [Startup User Control].

8 Click the [OK] button.

This closes the “Add User” dialog box. The new user will be added to the “Security” dialog box list.

9 Set the security level for the user, using [Operation Security] in the “Security” dialog box.

When creating a new user, all the checkboxes in [Operation Security] will be turned OFF. Click and

turn ON the functions you want to permit the new user to use. [Scene Store/Recall Level] and [User

Control Level] will be set to one level lower than the user above the newly created user. The initially

set level will automatically be the highest level that can be set for that user. To lower the level, enter

a larger number in the box.

Click the [OK] button and the dialog will close. You can continue creating new users without

closing the dialog box.

NOTE

If the text entered into the [Password] and [Conﬁrm Password] boxes is not the same, a “Different password!” message

will be displayed. Click the [OK] button and reenter the correct password in the [Password] and [Conﬁrm Password]

boxes in the “Add User” dialog box.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

Scene Manager

Scenes

Conﬁguration contents can be given a name and saved as “Scenes.” Saving scenes is called “Scene

Store.” Parameter settings in the conﬁguration for each site used can be stored multiple times and

recalled and used when needed. There are 999 scene memories available. When a scene is stored,

DME parameters are saved as “preset parameters.” Presets are automatically created when a scene

is stored.

Bringing back a scene (making a scene the current scene) is called “scene recall.” Scenes are

recalled using the [▼] button next to the current scene on the Main Panel window or by using the

“Scene Manager” dialog box.

■ Security for the Logged On User

The currently logged on user can store, recall, or edit scenes that have a security level equal to or

lower than his or her own. User security levels are set with the [Edit] → [Store/Recall/Edit] item in

the “Security” dialog box.

“Scene Manager” Dialog Box

When you click [Scene Manager] in the [Tools] menu, the “Scene Manager” dialog box is displayed.

[Cut] Button

[Copy] Button [Insert] Button

[Paste] Button

[Clear] Button

[Recall Safe] Button

List

[Store] Button

[Recall] Button

[Detail] Button

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

■ List

Displays the contents of the scene.

Scene No.

Displays the scene number. There are 999 scene memories available. Click here to select a scene.

Name

Displays the name of the scene. Click the [Name] box to enter a scene name. Up to 18 characters

can be entered.

If the scene has not been stored, “[No Data]” will be displayed. A name can be entered when a

scene is stored. The default names are “Scene001,” “Scene002,” etc. The three-digit number is the

same as the scene number (displayed in [Scene Number]) for the stored scene.

Conﬁguration

Displays the conﬁguration name. If the scene has not been stored, a hyphen (-) will be displayed.

Edit Security

Displays the scene edit security levels. Clicking here will display a list where you can change these

security levels. Only levels at or below the security level of the currently logged on user are

displayed in the list. When a user is created, these settings are the same as the new user's security

level, but scene store and edit settings can be set lower.

Recall Security

Displays the scene recall security level. Clicking here will display a list where you can change the

security level. Only levels at or below the security level of the currently logged on user are

displayed in the list. When a user is created, these settings are the same as the new user's security

level, but the scene recall setting can be set lower.

Fade

Fade is used when Fader components are used in a conﬁguration. It sets whether fade is applied

(ON) or not (OFF) when a scene is recalled.

NOTE

The fade function cannot be simulated in DME Designer.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

Fade Mode

Sets the fade mode. You can select “All” or “Selected.”

If you select “All,” all channels using Fader components in their conﬁguration will be affected. Even

when multiple components are used, all channels are targeted. If you select “Selected,” the only

channels affected will be those for which the Fade switch in the component editor has been set to

ON.

Fade Time

Sets the fade time: i.e. the time it will take fader and pan parameters to reach their new settings

when a scene is recalled. The changes are smooth and continuous. If only the presets in the

recalled scene are set when that scene is recalled, the volume will be adjusted while the sound

from the previous scene is playing, until the new level is reached If the conﬁguration also changes,

the volume will rise from silence until it reaches the new value. This can be set from zero to 60

seconds, in 0.1 second increments.

■ [Cut] Button

Cuts the scene selected on the list.

■ [Copy] Button

Copies the scene selected on the list.

■ [Paste] Button

Pastes the contents of the cut or copied scene into the scene selected on the list. The selected

scene will be overwritten. If no scene has been cut or copied, the button will be grayed out and

cannot be used.

NOTE

The Fade switch for each channel is set to OFF by default. The fade effect will not be applied, even if Fade=ON and

Fade Mode=Selected is selected. To apply the effect, you must set the Fade switch to ON for the channels where you

need it.

NOTE

Right-click in the list and use the contextual menu that appears to set User Deﬁned Button, Program Change, GPI In, or GPI

Out for the scene.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

■ [Insert] Button

Inserts the contents of the cut or copied scene into the location of the scene selected on the list.

The selected scene and those below are moved down by one. For example, if “Door_Open” was

stored as scene number “005,” and selected when the [Insert] button was clicked, the inserted

scene would become scene number “005,” and “Door_Open” would be moved to scene number

“006.”

If no scene has been cut or copied, the button will be grayed out and cannot be used.

If a scene is stored in the lowest scene on the scene memory list (with the scene number [999]), the

button will be grayed out and the insert function will not be available. Delete the contents of scene

number 999 before attempting to use the insert function.

■ [Clear] Button

Deletes the contents of the scene selected on the list.

If the presets included in a scene are not used in another scene, a “Delete preset?” message will

be displayed.

If the presets are not needed, click the [OK] button. If you click the [Cancel] button, the presets will

not be deleted. Whichever you click, the scene itself will be deleted.

NOTE

Move the scene data to a different scene memory when you don’t want to erase the contents of Scene No. 999.

NOTE

The [Cancel] button on the “Delete Preset?” message does not cancel the [Clear] for the scene. It merely cancels

deletion of the presets.

Click the

[Insert] button

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

■ [Recall Safe] Button

Before performing a recall, you can check the contents of the scene selected on the list, and set

components that will not be read. This is used when there are components you do not want

changed by the scene recall.

When you click this button, the “Recall Safe” dialog box will be displayed.

All components included in the scene will be displayed. There is a checkbox to the left of each

component. Place a check next to the components you do not wish to have read by scene recall

(those you do not wish changed from their current status).

Press the [Select All] button to check all components, or the [Clear All] button to clear the checks

from all components.

Click the [OK] button. The dialog box will close and when the scene is recalled, all components,

except those checked, will be read.

■ [Store] Button

Stores the contents of the current conﬁguration into the scene selected in the list. If an empty scene

is selected and the contents stored there, a new scene is created. If a scene is already stored in

the selected scene number, it will be overwritten. If [Conﬁrm Scene Store] is checked on the

[Application] tab of the “Preferences” dialog box, a conﬁrmation dialog box will be displayed

before the scene is stored.

When a scene is stored, the conﬁguration parameters at that time are saved as “preset

parameters.” Presets are created automatically.

NOTE

The components checked in the “Recall Safe” dialog box are the components that will not be read (that will be ignored).

If you want to read all components, there is no need to make settings in the “Recall Safe” dialog box.

“Recall Safe” is used when you want to keep some components with their current settings, while there are other

components you want to change according to the scene.

NOTE

The currently logged on user can store scenes at a security level equal to or lower than his or her own only.

NOTE

When the computer and DME unit are online, a scene stored in the DME Designer will also be stored on the DME unit,

regardless of the DME settings.

The DME utility display Misc. page [Scene Store] setting only affects store operation from the DME panel controls.

Component NameCheckbox

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

■ [Recall] Button

Recalls the scene selected in the list and makes it the current scene.

■ [Detail] Button

Expands the dialog box and displays a preset list. If you click the preset list while it is displayed,

the preset list will be hidden. When the dialog box is opened, its status will be the same as the last

time it was closed.

■ Preset List

Displays the presets for each DME unit in the scene selected in the list. When another scene is

selected on the list, the contents of the preset list will be changed.

You can change the presets used in the scene by clicking the radio buttons to the left of the preset

names. You can also create, delete, and store presets or change their names.

DME

Displays the DME. Below the DME are [Slot], [Component], and [AD]. If there are presets below

them, a [+] button will be displayed. When you click the [+] it becomes a [-] and the presets are

displayed.

Preset

Displays DME presets.

If you click the preset name, selecting the text that is there, you can change the preset name. When

presets are automatically created when a scene is stored, they are named “Preset001,”

“Preset002,” and so on. Presets created with the [New] button are named “New Preset.”

You can select the presets used in a scene by clicking the radio buttons to the left of the preset

names.

NOTE

The currently logged on user can recall scenes at a security level equal to or lower than his or her own only.

Preset List

[Del] Button

[Store] Button

[New] Button

[Del Unused] Button

[Detail] Button

DME

Preset

DME

Preset

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

■ [Del] Button

Deletes the preset selected on the preset list.

■ [Store] Button

Stores the current parameter status in the preset selected in the preset list. The contents of the

selected preset will be overwritten.

■ [New] Button

Stores the current status and creates a new preset. The newly created preset is named “New

Preset.”

■ [Del Unused] Button

Deletes presets that are not used by DMEs included in the current zone.

NOTE

Presets used in a scene cannot be deleted.

NOTE

There is no [OK] button or [Cancel] button in the “Scene Manager” dialog box. To close the dialog box, click the [Close]

button at the upper-right of the dialog box.

Changes from storing/recalling scenes or editing, such as changing names or contents, will be applied immediately.

With the dialog box open, you can make the Designer window active and add components or change parameters.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

User Control

User Controls

You can create an original control by arranging knobs and sliders in the component editor. Controls

you create are called “user controls.”

Those created user controls are displayed in the [View] → [User Control] submenu in the Main Panel

window

■ Security for the Logged On User

The currently logged-on user can create and edit the user controls of all users at lower security

levels as well as the controls speciﬁed for that user. Available user controls are displayed in the

User Control manager dialog box that can be accessed through the [User Control] sub-menu of the

main panel window [View] menu.

The user control security level for each user is set with [Operation Security] → [User Control Level]

in the “Security” dialog box. For information about user security, see “Security (Creating Users and

Making User Settings)” on page 55.

“User Control Manager” Dialog Box

When you click [User Control Manager] on the [Tools] menu, the “User Control Manager” dialog box is

displayed. This dialog box displays a list of user controls included in the conﬁguration of the current

zone. There they can be created or deleted. You can also edit the name and security level of user

controls here.

NOTE

Only controls available to the currently logged on user are shown in the list.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

■ User Control

Displays the names of the user controls. Clicking here will select the characters in the name,

allowing you to change it.

■ Security Level

Displays the security level set for each user control.

Clicking here will display a list where you can change the security level.

■ User

Displays the name of the user speciﬁed in User Control.

Clicking here will display a list of the available users.

NOTE

Levels at or below the security level of the currently logged on user are displayed in the list.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

■ [New] Button

Creates new user controls. Clicking here displays the “New User Control” dialog box.

Enter the User Control name in the [Name] box.

■ [User Level]/[User Name]

Use the radio buttons to the left to select security-level or user dependent control.

[User Level]

Select a security level from the drop-down list.

[User Name]

Check a checkbox.

Click [OK] to create the speciﬁed User Control setup.

■ [Delete] Button

Deletes the user control selected on the list.

■ [OK] Button

Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box.

■ [Cancel] Button

Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

Parameter Link

About Parameter Links

You can group parameters of the same type and link them. These groups are called “Parameter

Links.” When one parameter in a group is changed, all parameters in the group will change in the

same way.

There are two parameter link types: global links and local links. Global links link parameters for DMEs

within a zone. Local links link parameters that are included for a single DME.

Groups can be created and parameters added to groups in the user control/user module control

editor and component editor. For information about creating parameter links, see “Creating Parameter

Links” on page 314.

You can check the status of parameter links and edit them in the Parameter Link window.

Parameter Link Window

When you click [Parameter Link] in the [Tools] menu, the “Parameter Link” window is displayed. You

can also display the window by selecting [Open Parameter Link] from the context menu displayed in

the user control/user module editor and component editor.

1 [Global Link] button/[Local Link] button

Switches the window display.

• Global Link

Links to the parameters of multiple DME units in the zone.

• Local Link

Links to the parameters of one DME unit.

NOTE

Parameters can not apply to multiple groups.

NOTE

Because there is a large load on the network, the maximum number of Global Links will be limited to eight.

[Global Link] button/[Local Link] button

Parameter Link Mode

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

2 Parameter Link Mode

Parameter linking is active when checked. Uncheck to temporarily disable parameter linking.

Uncheck when you want to adjust the parameters individually.

You can also turn parameter link mode ON or OFF using the context menu in the user control/

user module editor or component editor.

• Group List

Displays a hierarchical list of groups and the parameters that belong to them.

When a group name is selected, the controls that belong to that group are selected.

•Keep Offset (Group icon)

Tur ns ON or OFF whether the offset value set for each parameter is retained as it is. When ON

is set for a group, the Keep Offset icon is displayed in orange. When OFF is set for a group, it

is displayed in green.

When Keep Offset is set to ON and any parameter within the group goes to the minimum or

maximum value, the parameters cannot be further changed.

Keep Offset can be set to ON or OFF using the “Keep Offset” item on the context menu that is

displayed when you right click the name of a group.

• Group Name

You can select a group name by clicking on it. Clicking the selected group name again will

select the characters in the name, allowing you to change it.

Clicking the plus (+) or minus (-) sign to the left of the group name displays or hides items that

belong to that group.

You can delete a group by selecting it and pressing the <Delete> key. You can also delete a

group by right-clicking on the group name and selecting [Delete] in the context menu that is

displayed.

• DME Icon

Displays the DME that includes the parameters that belong to a group. The components can

be displayed or hidden by clicking the plus (+) or minus (-) signs for the DME icon. The

parameters, Min, and Max can be displayed or hidden by clicking the plus (+) or minus (-)

signs for the component.

•Parameter

Displays the parameters that belong to a group. You can display or hide minimum and

maximum values for a parameter by clicking the plus (+) or minus (-) signs.

You can delete a parameter from a group by selecting the parameter name and pressing the

<Delete> key.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

Synchronization

(DME Designer and DME Unit Synchronization)

The DME unit and DME Designer are synchronized by Synchronization. The DME operates according

to the conﬁguration and scene information transferred during this process.

This Synchronization is used when transferring the conﬁguration in DME Designer and when

controlling the DME unit in real time.

Online and Ofﬂine

When a DME unit is connected to the computer and synchronized with DME Designer, its status is

called “Online.” When a DME unit is not physically connected to the computer or is not synchronized

even when it is connected, its status is called “Ofﬂine.” You can check the online/ofﬂine status and

message transmission in [Communication Status] in the Main Panel window.

■ Online

Sends conﬁgurations created in DME Designer to the DME unit and reads data from the DME unit,

so that the DME unit conﬁguration is reﬂected in the DME Designer conﬁguration. You can also

control the DME in real time from DME Designer. Operations performed in the DME Designer

control editor are reﬂected in the DME unit, and operations on the DME side are reﬂected in DME

Designer.

You can not perform conﬁguration editing using the Designer while online.

■ Ofﬂine

The communication status becomes ofﬂine when editing conﬁgurations.

■ Switching Between Online and Ofﬂine

You can switch between online and ofﬂine in the “Synchronization” dialog box.

NOTE

Because Synchronization presupposes that the DME unit can communicate with the computer where DME Designer is

installed, the necessary drivers (USB-MIDI or DME-N Network Driver) must be installed, and appropriate settings must be

made for the driver and for DME Designer MIDI IN/OUT (page 90).

For information about driver installation and settings, see the installation guide. For DME Designer communications settings,

see “Online” (page 35).

NOTE

Because there are no scene settings when the DME unit is purchased, the conﬁguration and scene information in DME

Designer must ﬁrst be transferred.

NOTE

For information about the online procedure, see “Online” (page 35).

NOTE

For information about the online procedure, see “Online” (page 35).

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

“Synchronization” Dialog Box

When you click the [Synchronization] command on the [Tools] menu, the “Synchronization” dialog box

is displayed. The data from the current zone in the Designer is synchronized with the DME unit.

Here you can make settings for synchronizing the unit in DME Designer one-on-one with the DME that

actually exists on the network.

[Go On-line] Button

[Go Off-line] Button

[Designer]

[Network]

Message Area

[Close this window after synchronization] checkbox

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

■ [Go On-line] Button

This button will be grayed out when the software is online.

Clicking the button displays a dialog box where you can decide the synchronization method.

[Designer→DME] button

A consistency check is performed between the data in the current zone and the DME data, then

the communication status changes to online. Transmits data from the DME Designer to the DME

unit and synchronizes the two.

[Designer←DME] button

Data from the DME unit is read into DME Designer. Current data stored in the DME unit, such as

scenes, are read into DME Designer. This assumes that the conﬁgurations in the DME unit and the

DME Designer agree.

■ [Go Off-line] Button

Clicking this button changes from online to ofﬂine. While ofﬂine, this button will be grayed out.

■ [Close this window after synchronization] Checkbox

When this checkbox is checked the dialog window will close automatically after synchronization.

■ Designer

The Designer list displays DME units arranged in the currently valid zone in the DME Designer.

The unit in the DME Designer is matched with a recognized IP address, and they are compared

one-to-one.

DME Name

Displays the names of DME units included in the project.

When multiple DMEs of the same type are arranged in a zone window, it is a good idea to change

the name of each one.

IP Address Select Box

Matches the units in the Designer with recognized IP addresses. Click the [▼] to display the IP

addresses of same type of devices in the area. If the unit is a DME24N, IP addresses for all

DME24N devices in the area will be displayed on the list.

If you click the title bar with “IP Address” written on it (pale ▲ mark appears), you can line them up

vertically.

IP Address Select Box

DME Name

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

■ Network

The devices currently connected to the network are displayed in the Network list. To keep

consistency with the Designer list on the left side, the status of DMEs on the network is displayed.

IP Address

• DME Icon

Displays DME and ICP1 devices connected to the network. The zone master DME icon is red.

Icons for slave DMEs are blue. DMEs and ICP1 devices with no relation to DMEs in Designer

have gray icons.

• IP Address

Displays the DME IP address.

■ Message Area

Displays a message that synchronization is in progress.

Reading from the DME Unit

When you are ofﬂine in a condition where it is possible to go online, you can read data.

Before this can be done, conﬁgurations, such as cards inserted in the slots and any connected serial

devices, must agree for the DME unit and DME Designer.

Preset data overwritten in the DME unit is read, along with every type of parameter setting managed in

DME Designer.

NOTE

The event log is read in the Event Logger.

DME Icon

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

GPI

About GPI

GPI is an abbreviation for General Purpose Interface. Using GPI input and output, DMEs can be

remotely controlled from custom-made controllers or external equipment. For both input and output,

the DME64N provides 16 GPI channels and the DME24N provides eight. Sets GPI input/output for

each DME.

Using GPI input data, you can switch DME scenes and change component change component

parameters.

For hardware-related information such as the connection method for GPI, see the “DME64N/24N

Owner’s Manual.”

“GPI” Dialog Box

When you click the [GPI] command on the [Tools] menu, the “GPI” dialog box is displayed. Sets GPI

input/output for the DME.

■ [DME]

From the list, select the DME where you will be making settings.

■ Conﬁguration

The current conﬁguration name will be displayed.

NOTE

Only users for whom the [Operation Security] → [Edit] checkbox has been checked can make GPI settings.

[DME]

GPI IN

GPI OUT

[Apply] Button

[OK] Button

[Cancel] Button

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

■ GPI IN

The DME64N has 16 GPI IN channels, and the DME24N has 8 GPI IN channels.

These settings determine which DME parameters will be controlled by input received at each

individual GPI IN channel. The channel numbers are shown in the leftmost column.

[Function]

Speciﬁes the function to be controlled by GPI input. Click to see a list from which you can choose

the function to be assigned to the corresponding GPI IN channel.

The nine available functions are: [No Assign], [Parameter Value Edit], [Scene Change], [Scene

Increment], [Scene Decrement], [Mute], [GPI Lock], [Time Adjustment], [Play Wav File].

The [Parameter], [Min], [Max], and [Terminal] items will change according to the selected function.

• [No Assign]

No function assigned. This is the default setting.

Select [No Assign] to clear an assigned function.

The [Parameter], [Min], [Max], and [Terminal] items are not available.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

•[Parameter Value Edit]

Allows component parameters to be changed via GPI input.

In this case [Parameter] is used to select the parameter to be controlled.

[Min] and [Max] specify the range over which the parameter can be changed.

[Terminal] determines how the GPI input voltage will affect the speciﬁed parameter.

and specify continuous control of continuously-variable parameters from an external

fader, knob, or similar device.

and specify on/off control of 2-state parameters via an external switching device.

The parameter value changes in proportion to the voltage applied to the GPI input.

The minimum voltage applied to GPI IN will produce the speciﬁed [Min] parameter value, and the

maximum voltage applied to GPI IN will produce the speciﬁed [Max] parameter value, with

intermediate voltages produced the corresponding intermediate parameter values.

The parameter value changes in inverse proportion to the voltage applied to the GPI input.

The minimum voltage applied to GPI IN will produce the speciﬁed [Max] parameter value, and the

maximum voltage applied to GPI IN will produce the speciﬁed [Min] parameter value, with

intermediate voltages produced the corresponding intermediate parameter values.

The speciﬁed [Min] and [Max] parameter values are alternately selected each time the voltage

applied to GPI IN rises from below to above the median voltage.*

The speciﬁed [Min] and [Max] parameter values are alternately selected each time the voltage

applied to GPI IN drops from above to below the median voltage.*

Example: Relationship between the voltage applied to GPI IN and the Fader Level when [Fader Level]

is set in the [Parameter] box.

Max. voltage applied to GPI IN

Min. voltage applied to GPI IN

[Max] parameter value

[Min] parameter value

Max. voltage applied to GPI IN

Min. voltage applied to GPI IN

[Max] parameter value

[Min] parameter value

Example: Relationship between the voltage applied to GPI IN and the Fader Level when [Fader Level]

is set in the [Parameter] box.

Max. voltage applied to GPI IN

Min. voltage applied to GPI IN

[Max] parameter value [Max] parameter value[Min] parameter value

Median voltage

Example: Relationship between the voltage applied to GPI IN and the Fader Level when [Fader Level]

is set in the [Parameter] box.

Max. voltage applied to GPI IN

Min. voltage applied to GPI IN

[Max] parameter value [Max] parameter value[Min] parameter value

Median voltage

Example: Relationship between the voltage applied to GPI IN and the Fader Level when [Fader Level]

is set in the [Parameter] box.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

• [Scene Change]

GPI input can be used to recall a speciﬁed scene.

[Parameter] speciﬁes the number of the scene to be recalled.

[Min] and [Max] are not available.

[Terminal] determines how the GPI input voltage will affect the speciﬁed parameter.

The scene speciﬁed by [Parameter] will be recalled each time the voltage applied to GPI IN rises

from below to above the median voltage.*

The scene speciﬁed by [Parameter] will be recalled each time the voltage applied to GPI IN drops

from above to below the median voltage.*

Same as .

• [Scene Increment]

GPI input can be used to increment the scene number.

[Parameter], [Min], and [Max] are not available.

[Terminal] determines how the GPI input voltage will affect the speciﬁed parameter.

The scene number will be incremented each time the voltage applied to GPI IN rises from below to

above the median voltage.*

The scene number will be incremented each time the voltage applied to GPI IN drops from above to

below the median voltage.*

Same as .

Max. voltage applied to GPI IN

Min. voltage applied to GPI IN

Median voltage

Trigger

Max. voltage applied to GPI IN

Min. voltage applied to GPI IN

Median voltage

Trigger

Max. voltage applied to GPI IN

Min. voltage applied to GPI IN

Median voltage

Trigger

Max. voltage applied to GPI IN

Min. voltage applied to GPI IN

Median voltage

Trigger

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

• [Scene Decrement]

GPI input can be used to decrement the scene number.

[Parameter], [Min], and [Max] are not available.

[Terminal] determines how the GPI input voltage will affect the speciﬁed parameter.

The scene number will be decremented each time the voltage applied to GPI IN rises from below to

above the median voltage.*

The scene number will be decremented each time the voltage applied to GPI IN drops from above to

below the median voltage.*

Same as .

Max. voltage applied to GPI IN

Min. voltage applied to GPI IN

Median voltage

Trigger

Max. voltage applied to GPI IN

Min. voltage applied to GPI IN

Median voltage

Trigger

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

• [Mute]

GPI input can be used to engage or disengage the DME mute function.

[Parameter], [Min], and [Max] are not available.

[Terminal] determines how the GPI input voltage will affect the speciﬁed parameter.

Mute will be ON when the voltage applied to GPI IN is above the median voltage*, and OFF when the

voltage is below the median.

Mute will be OFF when the voltage applied to GPI IN is above the median voltage*, and ON when the

voltage is below the median.

Mute will be alternately turned ON and OFF each time the voltage applied to GPI IN drops from

below to above the median voltage.*

Mute will be alternately turned ON and OFF each time the voltage applied to GPI IN rises from above

to below the median voltage.*

Max. voltage applied to GPI IN

Min. voltage applied to GPI IN

Median voltage

MUTE ON

MUTE OFF MUTE OFF

Max. voltage applied to GPI IN

Min. voltage applied to GPI IN

Median voltage

MUTE OFF

MUTE ON MUTE ON

Max. voltage applied to GPI IN

Min. voltage applied to GPI IN

Median voltage

ON ONOFF

Max. voltage applied to GPI IN

Min. voltage applied to GPI IN

Median voltage

ON ONOFF

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

• [GPI Lock]

GPI Lock can be turned on or off via GPI input. When GPI Lock is ON, all GPI inputs other than

the one being used for GPI Lock control are locked and input will be ignored.

[Parameter], [Min], and [Max] are not available.

[Terminal] determines how the GPI input voltage will affect the speciﬁed parameter.

GPI lock will be ON when the voltage applied to GPI IN is above the median voltage*, and

OFF when the voltage is below the median.

GPI Lock will be OFF when the voltage applied to GPI IN is above the median voltage*, and

ON when the voltage is below the median.

GPI Lock will be alternately turned ON and OFF each time the voltage applied to GPI IN drops

from below to above the median voltage.*

GPI Lock will be alternately turned ON and OFF each time the voltage applied to GPI IN rises

from above to below the median voltage.*

Max. voltage applied to GPI IN

Min. voltage applied to GPI IN

Median voltage

MUTE ON

MUTE OFF MUTE OFF

Max. voltage applied to GPI IN

Min. voltage applied to GPI IN

Median voltage

MUTE OFF

MUTE ON MUTE ON

Max. voltage applied to GPI IN

Min. voltage applied to GPI IN

Median voltage

MUTE ON

MUTE OFF MUTE OFF

Max. voltage applied to GPI IN

Min. voltage applied to GPI IN

Median voltage

MUTE OFF

MUTE ON MUTE ON

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

• [Time Adjustment]

GPI input can be used to adjust the DME internal clock as follows:

[Parameter], [Min], and [Max] are not available.

[Terminal] determines how the GPI input voltage will affect the speciﬁed parameter.

and specify continuous control of continuously-variable parameters from an external

fader, knob, or similar device.

and specify on/off control of 2-state parameters via an external switching device.

The internal clock time will be adjusted each time the voltage applied to GPI IN rises from below to

above the median voltage.*

The internal clock time will be adjusted each time the voltage applied to GPI IN drops from above to

below the median voltage.*

Same as .

Internal clock time Time after adjustment

0~14 seconds Returned to 0 seconds

15~29 seconds Advanced to 30 seconds

30~44 seconds Returned to 30 seconds

45~59 seconds Advanced to 0 seconds

Max. voltage applied to GPI IN

Min. voltage applied to GPI IN

Median voltage

Trigger

Max. voltage applied to GPI IN

Min. voltage applied to GPI IN

Median voltage

Trigger

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

• [Play Wav File]

GPI input can be used to initiate playback of the speciﬁed Wave ﬁle.

[Parameter] speciﬁes the Wave ﬁle to be played. Files speciﬁed by the Wav File Manager can

be selected. Wave ﬁles can only be selected if a Wav Player is included in the DME

conﬁguration.

[Min], and [Max] are not available.

[Terminal] determines how the GPI input voltage will affect the speciﬁed parameter.

and specify continuous control of continuously-variable parameters from an external

fader, knob, or similar device.

and specify on/off control of 2-state parameters via an external switching device.

The speciﬁed Wave ﬁle will be played each time the voltage applied to GPI IN rises from below to

above the median voltage.*

The speciﬁed Wave ﬁle will be played each time the voltage applied to GPI IN drops from above to

below the median voltage.*

Same as .

* “Median voltage” refers to the voltage halfway between the maximum and minimum voltages detectable by the GPI

input terminals. Refer to the “GPI Page” section of the “Utility Screens” chapter of the DME64N/24N Owner’s manual

for details on GPI voltages.

Max. voltage applied to GPI IN

Min. voltage applied to GPI IN

Median voltage

Trigger

Max. voltage applied to GPI IN

Min. voltage applied to GPI IN

Median voltage

Trigger

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

■ GPI OUT

The DME64N has 16 GPI OUT channels, and the DME24N has 8 GPI OUT channels.

These settings determine which DME parameter values will be output via each individual GPI IN

channel. The channel numbers are shown in the leftmost column.

[Function]

Speciﬁes the function to be transmitted via a GPI output.

The four available functions are: [No Assign], [Parameter Value Edit], [Scene Change], and [GPI

Lock].

The [Parameter], [Threshold], [Terminal], and [Polarity] items will change according to the selected

function.

• [No Assign]

No function assigned, and no GPI output will occur. This is the default setting.

Select [No Assign] to clear an assigned function.

The [Parameter], [Threshold], [Terminal], and [Polarity] items are not available.

•[Parameter Value Edit]

Allows component parameter values to be output via GPI.

In this case [Parameter] is used to select the parameter to be output.

[Threshold] speciﬁes the parameter threshold value.

[Terminal] and [Polarity] determine how the GPI voltage will be output in response to

parameter changes.

Ter minal Polarity GPI Output

Ignored When value of the speciﬁed parameter is above the threshold level the

output will be high, and when below the threshold level the output will be

low.

Ignored When value of the speciﬁed parameter is below the threshold level the

output will be high, and when above the threshold level the output will be

low.

A pulse

will be output when the value of the parameter changes from

below to above the threshold.

A pulse

will be output when the value of the parameter changes from

above to below the threshold.

A pulse

will be output when the value of the parameter changes from

below to above the threshold.

A pulse

will be output when the value of the parameter changes from

above to below the threshold.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

• [Scene Change]

The recall status of the speciﬁed scene is transmitted via GPI output.

[Parameter] speciﬁes the scene for which the recall status is to be output.

[Threshold] and [Polarity] are not available.

[Terminal] determines how the GPI voltage will be output in response to parameter changes.

• [GPI Lock]

The GPI Lock status is transmitted via GPI output.

[Parameter], [Threshold], and [Polarity] are not available.

[Terminal] determines how the GPI voltage will be output in response to parameter changes.

Event Schedule

Event Schedule is shown when [GPI OUT] is set in “Event Scheduler.”

See “Event Scheduler” on page 116.

User Deﬁned Button

User Deﬁned Button is shown when [GPI OUT] is set in “User Deﬁned Button.”

See “User Deﬁned Button (User Deﬁned Parameters)” on page 98.

Event Log

Event Log is shown when [GPI OUT] is set in “Event Logger.”

See “Event Logger” on page 111.

Ter minal GPI Output

When the current scene is the same as the scene speciﬁed by [Parameter] the output will

be high, and when different the output will be low.

When the current scene is the same as the scene speciﬁed by [Parameter] the output will

be low, and when different the output will be high.

A pulse

will be output when the current scene is the same as the scene speciﬁed by

[Parameter].

A pulse

will be output when the current scene is the same as the scene speciﬁed by

[Parameter].

Ter minal GPI Output

When GPI Lock is ON the output will be high, and when OFF the output will be low.

250 msec

*1 Pulse waveform 1

*2 Pulse waveform 2

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

MIDI

When you click the [MIDI] command on the [Tools] menu, the “MIDI” dialog box is displayed. Here you

can make MIDI input/output port, remote control, and other settings.

[Setup] Tab

Sets the DME MIDI channels along with program change, control change, and parameter change.

■ [DME]

From the list, select the DME where you will be making settings.

■ MIDI CH

Sets the MIDI channel. This number is also used as the Parameter Change Device ID.

[Tx]

Select the MIDI transmit channel from the list.

[Rx]

Select the MIDI receive channel from the list.

■ Program Change/Control Change/Parameter Change

Sets transmit (Tx), receive (Rx), OMNI, and Echo for program change/control change/parameter

change. When ON, clicking turns this OFF. When OFF, clicking turns this ON. When OMNI is [ON]

channel messages are received regardless of the receive channel setting. When ECHO is [ON] the

input data is “echoed” (re-transmitted) via the output port that corresponds to the input port via

which it was received.

Detailed settings for program change, control change, and parameter change are made on the

[Program Change] tab, the [Control Change] tab, and the [Parameter Change] tab.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

[Control Change] Tab

Assigns components to control change for each DME. You can change DME parameters by sending

control change messages from external equipment.

You can assign to control change numbers 1-31, 33-95, and 102-119.

■ [DME]

From the list, select the DME where you will be making settings.

■ Control Change List

The control change numbers and current settings are displayed in the list in the center.

No.

Displays the control change numbers.

Component

Displays the assigned components. Control changes that have no component assigned to them

are blank. If you click here, a list will be displayed. Usable components are on the list. Click the

component name to select it.

NOTE

Because control change numbers 0 and 32 are used for bank select MSB, numbers 96-101 are RPN/NRPN related, and

120-127 are used for mode messages, they cannot be used for component assignment.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

Parameter

Set the assigned component link parameter.

When you click here, a list of parameters included in the component is displayed. Select the

parameter you want to assign.

Min/Max

Sets the range of operation for the parameter. The current values for the [Min] (lower limit) and

[Max] (upper limit) are displayed. If you click here, a slider will be displayed. The range and

parameter units that can be set will vary, depending on the parameter selected in the [Parameter]

box.

You can change the parameter by dragging the slider. To make a ﬁner setting, press the <Shift>

key while dragging the slider. The value for the parameter will be shown while you are dragging the

slider. When you ﬁnish dragging and release the mouse button, the slider will disappear.

The same slider is displayed whether you click the [Min] box or the [Max] box. The black part is the

parameter range. If you drag the left edge of the black part, the [Min] value will change. If you drag

the right edge, the [Max] will change.

■ [Clear] Button

Clears assignments for the selected control change numbers.

■ [All Clear] Button

Clears assignments for all control change numbers.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

[Program Change] Tab

Assigns scenes to program control change numbers 1 through 128. Switches scenes when program

changes are received. These settings are shared by all DMEs in the zone. Up to 999 assignments can

be made. Scenes above number 128 are assigned by changing banks.

■ Program Change Event

Program numbers and the scenes assigned to them are displayed in a list.

No.

This displays program numbers from 1 to 128.

Scene

Displays the scene number and name of the assigned scene. Program changes that have no

scene assigned to them are blank.

When you click here, a list of scenes is displayed. Select the scene you want to assign.

■ [All Clear] Button

Clears all scene assignments.

■ [Clear] Button

Clears the scene assignment for the program number selected in the list, so that no scene is

assigned to that number.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

■ [All Assign] Button

Assigns all scenes in order starting from program number 1.

■ Bank Select LSB

The bank is changed when assigning scenes numbered 129 and higher. Eight banks can be used,

numbered from zero to seven. Click the [▼] and select the bank where you will make settings.

[Parameter Change] Tab

Speciﬁes the parameter to be controlled by parameter change commands for each address. Up to

128 can be set.

■ [DME]

From the list, select the DME where you will be making settings.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

■ Parameter Change List

The current settings are displayed in the list in the center.

No.

This displays the parameter change numbers.

Component

Assigns components. If you click here, a list will be displayed. Assignable components are on the

list. Click the component name to select it.

Parameter

Set the assigned component link parameter.

When you click here, a list is displayed of parameters included in the component selected in the

[Component] box.

Select the parameter you want to assign.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

Min/Max

This sets the parameter range. The current values for the [Min] (lower limit) and [Max] (upper limit)

are displayed. The range and units that can be set will vary, depending on the parameter selected.

If you click here, a slider will be displayed.

You can change the parameter by dragging the slider. To make a ﬁner setting, press the <Shift>

key while dragging the slider. The value for the parameter will be shown while you are dragging the

slider. When you ﬁnish dragging and release the mouse button, the slider will disappear.

The same slider is displayed whether you click the [Min] box or the [Max] box. The black part is the

parameter range. If you drag the left edge of the black part, the [Min] value will change. If you drag

the right edge, the [Max] will change.

■ [Clear] Button

Clears the assignment for the parameter change selected in the list, so that nothing will be

assigned to it.

■ [All Clear] Button

Clears all parameter change assignments.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

[Port] Tab

Sets the MIDI port for the current zone used by DME Designer.

■ MIDI PORT

Selects the MIDI driver used for transmitting and receiving MIDI messages.

[Tx]

Selects, from a list, the MIDI driver used for transmitting MIDI messages.

[Rx]

Selects, from a list, the MIDI driver used for receiving MIDI messages.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

User Deﬁned Button (User Deﬁned Parameters)

User Deﬁned Parameters

Parameters that the user can operate using function keys <F1> through <F6> in the DME unit or ICP1

are called “User Deﬁned Parameters.” Frequently changed parameters can be assigned in advance

to any of 24 (four pages times six) presets, and operated on the DME unit or ICP1 even if DME

Designer is not being used.

This function sets parameters in DME Designer that can be called by these function keys <F1>

through <F6>.

In DME Designer, user deﬁned parameter settings are made using the “User Deﬁned Button” dialog

box. The user deﬁned parameter settings are shared between zone conﬁgurations.

“User Deﬁned Button” Dialog Box

When you click [User Deﬁned Button] in the [Tools] menu, the “User Deﬁned Button” dialog box is

displayed.

■ [1]/[2]/[3]/[4] Tabs

Switches the set to which settings will apply. You can set up to six function keys in each set. The

user deﬁned parameters set on a single tab are displayed on one page in the DME unit main

screen.

Function Keys

The function keys are displayed in the leftmost column of the table. When you enter text for [LCD

Display], a short name with up to eight characters will be created and displayed to the right of the

function key.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

Function

Speciﬁes the function to be assigned to the function keys.

• [No Assign]

No assignment. Select this option to clear an assigned function.

•[Parameter Value Edit]

Allows the parameter speciﬁed in the [Parameter] ﬁeld to be changed.

• [Direct Parameter Value]

Allows the value of a parameter to be set directly. The target parameter is speciﬁed in the

[Parameter] ﬁeld, and the value to be set is speciﬁed in the [Max] ﬁeld.

• [Scene Change]

Allows scene recall. The scene to be recalled is speciﬁed in the [Parameter] ﬁeld.

• [GPI OUT]

Allows GPI output. The GPI setting is made in the [Parameter] ﬁeld.

• [Play Wav File]

Allows initiation of Wave ﬁle playback. The Wave ﬁle setting is made in the [Parameter] ﬁeld.

Wave ﬁles set by the Wav File manager can be speciﬁed. Files can not be selected unless a

Wav Player is included in the DME conﬁguration.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

100

Parameter

Sets the parameter assigned to each function key. If you click here, a list will be displayed. This list

displays the parameters that are included in the current conﬁguration. Select the parameter you

want called by the function key.

LCD Display

Sets the text displayed on the DME unit. Click the [LCD Display] box and enter text. Up to 23

characters can be entered into the [LCD Display] box.

After you conﬁrm the name by pressing the <Enter> key, a short name will be created and

displayed in the function key area as follows: “F1 [shortnam].” The short name will also be

displayed in the DME unit main display. A short name is automatically created with up to eight

characters for display as the user deﬁned parameter name on the DME unit main screen

Min, Max

Sets the lower and upper limits for a parameter.

■ [Clear] Button

Clears assignments for the selected function keys. This is the same as “No Assign.”

■ [OK] Button

Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box.

■ [Cancel] Button

Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

101

Setting User Deﬁned Parameters

After creating a parameter link group to assign, set the user deﬁned parameter.

1 Create a conﬁguration.

2 Click [User Deﬁned Button] in the [Tools] menu.

The “User Deﬁned Button” dialog box will be displayed.

3 Click one of the tabs numbered [1] through [4] to select the set of user deﬁned parameters

you will assign your parameters to.

The four tabs correspond to the pages on the DME unit main screen.

4 Click the [Parameter] box for the function key to which you will assign the parameter.

A list of parameters included in the current conﬁguration will be displayed.

5 Select the parameter to assign to the function key.

6 Click the [LCD Display] box and enter text for the user deﬁned parameter name.

The [LCD Display] box can accept up to 23 characters, but only eight characters can be displayed

in the DME unit main screen. When making a user deﬁned parameter name, the ﬁrst eight

characters should be understandable.

Note

When making multiple registrations, you can save time by ﬁrst setting just the [Parameter] box for all keys, then setting

the [LCD Display] box names. When you enter a user deﬁned parameter name into an [LCD Display] box and press the

<Enter> key to conﬁrm it, the next [LCD Display] box down will be selected, and you can enter text there immediately.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

102

Word Clock

The signal that synchronizes all devices connected to the DME is called the “Word Clock.” It uses the

same frequency as the sampling frequency. The word clock is set for each DME in the “Word Clock”

dialog box.

When you click [Word Clock] on the [Tools] menu, the “Work Clock” dialog box is displayed.

■ DME

From the list, select the DME where you will be making settings.

■ Clock Information

Displays the word clock frequency for the DME selected in [DME].

Clock Information

Slot Information

Clock Status

• The DME24N has only one SLOT, and [Cascade] is not available.

• The number of channels varies according to the card inserted into the slot.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

103

■ Card (Slot Information)

Displays the name of the card inserted into the slot.

■ Clock Status

The clock status is displayed using a color code:

■ Internal/Word Clock/Cascade

You can select one of the following for the word clock: [Slot] (64N: 1-4, 24N: 1 only), [Internal]

(44.1kHz/48kHz/88.2kHz/96kHz), [Word Clock] (WCK IN), [Cascade] (IN/OUT, 64N only). Clock

buttons that are grayed out cannot be selected.

■ [Close] Button

Closes the dialog box.

Status Meaning

Indicates that there is no input signal.

Indicates there is an input signal and sync is possible with the current

word clock.

Indicates there is an input signal but cannot sync with word clock (clocks

are different).

Indicates that there is no DME unit information.

NOTE

You can close the dialog box using the Close button, or by pressing <Esc> or <Alt>+<F4>.

Slot Number

Card Name

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

104

Monitor

When you click the [Monitor] command on the [Tools] menu, the “Monitor” dialog box is displayed.

Sets the monitor output destination.

■ [DME]

From the list, select the DME where you will be making settings.

■ Drop down list

From the list, select the card that will be the destination for the monitor output.

■ [OK] Button

Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box.

■ [Cancel] Button

Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

105

Clock

When you click the [Clock] command on the [Tools] menu, the “Clock” dialog box is displayed. Here

you can set the DME internal clock. This can be set only when online. The default is the computer date

and time.

Set the date in the left box and the time in the right box. You can change the numbers using the [▲]

and [▼] at the right of the boxes.

NOTE

You can close the dialog box using the Close button, or by pressing <Esc> or <Alt>+<F4>.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

106

Language Settings

When you click the [Language] command on the [Tools] menu, the “Language” dialog box is

displayed. This sets the DME unit language.

■ [Language]

Select the language. [English/German/French/Spanish] and [Japanese] are in the list.

■ [OK] Button

Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box.

■ [Cancel] Button

Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.

NOTE

You can close the dialog box using the Close button, or by pressing <Esc> or <Alt>+<F4>.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

107

DME Firmware Update

You can update the DME unit ﬁrmware using the [Firmware Update] command on the [Tools] menu.

When you move the mouse cursor over the [Firmware] command on the [Tools] menu, a submenu is

displayed.

When you select [Program] or [Component] on the submenu, the “Open” dialog box will be displayed.

You can perform a ﬁrmware update by specifying a ﬁrmware update ﬁle.

When performing a ﬁrmware update, connect the DME unit and the computer.

When the DME update is ﬁnished, the DME unit will be automatically restarted. You also need to restart

DME Designer.

NOTE

If the ﬁrmware has been updated from V1.07 or lower to V1.10 or upper, perform the update twice. Because the text display

data in the DME unit is changed, text display for Japanese is not possible with one update only.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

108

■ [Program]

Updates the DME/CP1 unit program area ﬁrmware. Opens update ﬁles with the extension “.DPB”.

1 Select [Firmware Update] ➞ [Program] in the [Tools] menu.

The “Open” dialog box will be displayed.

2 Select an update program with the extension “.DPB” and click the [Open] button.

The “Firm Update” dialog box will be displayed. The DMEs in the current zone will be displayed

in a list.

3 Check the DME you wish to update.

You can click on a checkmark to turn it ON/OFF. The [Select All] button places a checkmark

next to all the DMEs. The [Clear All] button turns OFF all the DME checkmarks.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

109

4 Check the DME you wish to update, then click the [Update] button.

The ﬁrmware update will begin.

When the DME update is ﬁnished, the DME unit will be automatically restarted. You also need to

restart DME Designer.

■ [Component]

Updates the DME unit component ﬁrmware. When you select this command, the “Open” dialog

box will be displayed. Opens update ﬁles with the extension “.DCB” (for DME) or “.CCB” (for ICP1).

You can select multiple update ﬁles for components.

■ DME Unit

When performing the ﬁrmware update, connect the DME unit and the computer by USB or

Ethernet. The USB-MIDI or DME-N Network Driver must be installed in the computer.

■ ICP1

To perform the ﬁrmware update, the ICP1 and the zone master DME unit must be connected by

Ethernet. In addition, the zone master DME unit must be connected to the computer as described

above.

1 Select [Firmware Update] ➞ [Component] in the [Tools] menu.

The “Open” dialog box will be displayed.

NOTE

While updating, be very careful not to disconnect the USB or Ethernet cable or turn off the power to the DME. The

DME Designer MIDI setting information will be lost.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

110

2 Select an update program with the extension “.DCB” (for DME) or “.CCB” (for ICP1) and

click the [Open] button.

The “Firmware Update” dialog box will be displayed. The DMEs or ICPs in the current zone will

be displayed in a list. The component names and versions will be displayed hierarchically for

each DME.

3 Check the component you wish to update.

You can click on the checkmark to turn it ON/OFF. The [Select All] button places a checkmark

next to all the DMEs. The [Clear All] button turns OFF all the DME checkmarks.

4 Check the component you wish to update, then click the [Update] button.

The component update will begin.

When the DME update is ﬁnished, the DME unit will be automatically restarted. You also need to

restart DME Designer.

NOTE

While updating, be very careful not to disconnect the USB or Ethernet cable or turn off the power to the DME.

The DME Designer MIDI setting information will be lost.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

111

Event Logger

When you click [Event Logger] in the [View] menu while online, the “Event Logger” window is

displayed. This records and displays DME unit events.

When the dialog box is opened while online, the event log is automatically obtained and displayed as

a list in the Event Logger window.

Events are displayed in realtime as long as the dialog box stays open while online. The information is

also simultaneously recorded in a ﬁle if the log function is enabled.

■ DME List

• [Date]

Displays the date the event occurred. (Example Display: 2004-08-24)

• [Time]

Displays the time the event occurred.

•[Type]

Displays the event type and icon.

There are three event types:

(Warning): Warning event

(Error): Error event

(Information): Other events

• [Zone]

Displays the name of the zone in which the event occurred.

• [DME]

Displays the name of the DME in which the event occurred.

• [Event]

Displays the content of the event.

NOTE

Only users for whom the [View Log Window] checkbox in the “Security” dialog box has been turned ON can display the

Event Logger window. The default setting for this parameter is OFF.

NOTE

The events you wish to display in the Event Logger window must be set in advance in the “Event Log List” dialog box.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

112

[Log Setup] Button

Displays the “Log Setup” dialog box. Here you can make Event Log settings.

[Get Log] Button

When you are ofﬂine, this selects the DME from which the log will be taken. During online status,

this button is grayed out and cannot be used.

Clicking here displays the “Get Log” dialog box.

[Zone]

Selects the zone for which events will be displayed. Only events from the selected zone will be

displayed in the window. If [All Zones] is selected, events will be displayed for all DMEs arranged

in the zone.

Display button (Information/Warning/Error)

• [Display Information] Button

Switches between displaying and hiding Information events.

When turned ON, Information events are displayed in the Event Logger window.

• [Display Warning] Button

Switches between displaying and hiding Warning events.

When turned ON, Warning events are displayed in the Event Logger window.

• [Display Error] Button

Switches between displaying and hiding Error events.

When turned ON, Error events are displayed in the Event Logger window.

[Clear Screen] Button

Clears (erases) events.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

113

“Log Setup” dialog box

Click the [Log Setup] button in the Event Logger window to display the “Log Setup” dialog box. Here

you can make Event Log settings. These settings apply to the system as a whole.

■ [Enable Logging]

Tur ns ON or OFF the function that writes the obtained event log data to a ﬁle. When a check is

placed here, the event log is written to a ﬁle.

When checked, it is set in the [Enable Logging] frame.

Record __ days per log ﬁle

Sets the number of days recorded into a single log ﬁle. When the speciﬁed number of days is

exceeded, a new log ﬁle is created, and future log events are recorded there.

When “1” is set for the number of days at 10:00 AM, information will be recorded in the same ﬁle

until the next day at 9:59 AM. The number of days counted are cleared when the “Log Setup”

dialog box is closed by clicking the [OK] button, or when the system goes online.

Automatically delete log ﬁles after __ days

When a check is placed here, log ﬁles exceeding the speciﬁed number of days are automatically

deleted. Speciﬁes the number of days after which log ﬁles are automatically deleted.

Log ﬁle folder

Specify the folder for saving log ﬁles. Clicking the [Browse] button opens the standard operating

system dialog box for specifying folders. Here you can select a folder.

Log ﬁles are saved with the following ﬁle name: “LOG + Start_Date.txt”.

If there is a ﬁle with the same name already in the speciﬁed folder, a number will be afﬁxed to the

end of the ﬁle name, and it will be saved as a separate ﬁle. (Example: LOG20040824-2.txt)

■ [Display Event]

Displays events with checks next to them. This operates together with the [Display Information],

[Display Warning], and [Display Error] buttons in the Event Logger window. You can place checks

next to multiple events.

■ [Display Log Buffer Full Message]

When a check is placed here, “Log Buffer Full” messages will be displayed on the displays of all

DME units in the zone.

■ [Log List Setup] Button

Sets events sent from the DME units. Clicking here displays the “Event Log List” dialog box.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

114

“Get Log” dialog box

Click the [Get Log] button in the Event Logger window to display the “Get Log” dialog box.

■ DME List

Displays the IP addresses and types of DME units included in the zone. Click the DME from which

to obtain events by placing a check next to it.

■ [Output File Name]

Sets the ﬁle name and save location for the log ﬁle. Clicking the [Browse] button opens the ﬁle

select dialog box, where you can select a ﬁle.

■ [DME Log Clear]

Clears (erases) logs in the DME checked. When you click this button, a conﬁrmation dialog is

displayed.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

115

“Event Log List” Dialog Box

Sets events sent from the DME units. Sends events with checks next to them.

■ [Zone]

If you click here, a list will be displayed. Speciﬁes a zone.

■ [DME]

If you click here, a list will be displayed. Speciﬁes DMEs.

■ [Event]

You can turn sending of logs for each event ON or OFF.

■ [Type]

If you click here, a list will be displayed. Select type of event.

[Information], [Warning], and [Error] are displayed in a list.

■ [GPI OUT]

Sends GPI output for each event.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

116

Event Scheduler

“Event Scheduler” Dialog Box

When you click [Event Scheduler] in the [Tools] menu, the “Event Scheduler” dialog box is displayed.

This sets the scheduling for events. You can schedule events by specifying the date, time, and the

action to execute. You can set up schedules for events to be executed at a speciﬁed time, and events

that are to be repeated periodically. Periodic events are those that repeat each year, month, week, or

day. Up to 50 events can be scheduled. Scheduling can be set separately for each zone. Settings and

changes are sent to the DME unit during online status.

Scene changes, parameter changes, and GPI output can all be scheduled.

■ Event View

Displays registered scheduling events. When periodic events (cyclical events) are ﬁrst displayed

together, they are displayed in order of date.

The order of same-time events can be changed by dragging and dropping.

Click to select an event.

■ [No.]

Displays the event number. Numbers are added from the top in order.

This function will not be executed if the checkbox is not checked.

■ [Name]

Displays the event names. Clicking an event will select it, allowing you to change its name. There is

no limit to the number of characters.

■ [Operation]

Displays the function that will be executed when the event starts.

NOTE

Only users for whom the [Edit] checkbox in the “Security” dialog box has been turned ON can edit scheduling settings.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

117

■ [Date]

Displays the event start date.

Periodic events are displayed as shown below, with an icon and text that indicate a periodic event.

•[January 1 every year]

Each New Year's Day

• [First Monday of January every year]

First Monday in January each year

• [Day 1 every month]

First day of each month

• [Second Monday of every month]

The second Monday of each month.

• [Monday every week]

Each week on Monday

• [Every day]

Every day

■ [Time]

Displays the time for starting the event.

■ [Enable Event Schedule]

Enables the scheduled events.

■ [Add] Button

Adds an event. Clicking here displays the “Add Event” dialog box. If the maximum of 50 events has

already been registered, this button is grayed out.

■ [Remove] Button

Deletes the event selected on the list. This button is grayed out when no event is selected.

■ [Edit] Button

Lets you edit the selected event. Displays the “Edit Event” dialog box. This button is grayed out

when no event is selected.

■ [Copy] Button

Copies the selected event. This button is grayed out when no event is selected.

■ [Paste] Button

Pastes the copied event. The event is added. This button is grayed out when no event has been

copied.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

118

[Add Event (Edit Event)] Dialog Box

The dialog box is displayed when you click on the [Add] or [Edit] button in the “Event Scheduler”

dialog box. Here you can add or edit a scheduling event.

■ [Event Name] Box

Enter the event name. There is no limit to the number of characters.

■ [Event Operation]

Set the operation that is executed when the event starts.

[Operation]

When you click this button, a list of events is displayed. Specify the operation that is executed

when the event starts.

The following three items are on the list:

• [Scene Change]

Changes the scene.

•[Parameter Value Edit]

Changes a parameter.

• [GPI Out]

Sends GPI output.

• [Play Wav File]

Allows initiation of Wave ﬁle playback.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

119

[Operation Setting]

The content changes according to the event selected for [Operation].

• When [Scene Change] is selected:

Select the scene to be recalled from the [Scene] list. Stored scenes are displayed in the list.

• When [Parameter Value Edit] is selected:

[Scene]

Select a scene from the list.

If the DME unit's current scene differs from the scene speciﬁed in event scheduling, the scheduled

scene will be recalled. If the DME unit's current scene is the same as the scene speciﬁed in event

scheduling, the scheduled scene will not be recalled.

[DME Unit]

From the list, select the DME unit to which this scheduled event will apply. The DMEs included in the

zone are displayed in the list.

[Component]

Select the component that has the parameter to be changed. The list displays the components

arranged for the DME that is selected in the [DME Unit] box.

[Parameter]

Select the parameter that will change. Parameters for the component that is selected in the

[Component] box are displayed in a list.

[Value]

Set a value for the parameter. Change the parameter using the spin buttons or the slider on the right.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

120

• When [GPI Out] is selected:

[DME]

From the list, select the DME that will produce the GPI output.

[Ch1]/[Ch2]/[Ch3] ...

Set [ON], [OFF], or [---] for each channel. If it is set to [OFF], the [LOW→HIGH] channel outputs

[HIGH→LOW] signal, the [HIGH→LOW] channel outputs [LOW→HIGH] signal.

• When [Play Wav File] is selected:

[Scene]

Select a scene from the list.

[Wave]

Select a Wave ﬁle from the list.

Wave ﬁles set by the Wav File manager can be speciﬁed. Files can not be selected unless a Wav

Player is included in the DME conﬁguration.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

121

■ [Event Schedule]

Set the year/month/date to start the event.

Calendar

Sets the date the event will start.

Change the year and month using the [<] and [>] buttons. Click on a day to set that date. February

29 can be set on the calendar, where it appears every four years (each leap year).

[Time]

Sets the time the event will start.

Click the hour and minute, then set numerical values using the spin boxes.

Only the time is set for periodic events.

[Repeating Event]

When a check is placed here, the event becomes a periodic event, and the calendar is ignored.

•[Year]/[Month]/[Week]/[Day]/[Hour]

Set the period for the event, using the radio buttons to the left.

• [Day]/[Day of the week]

Set the conditions on the right side. Select [Day]/[Day of the week], and set the date and other

information. The items that can be set vary according to the selected period.

When the event period is [Year]

All settings can be made.

When the event period is [Month]

If [Day] is selected, only the date can be set.

If [Day Of The Week] is selected, the week of the month and day of the week is set.

When the event period is [Week]

Only [Day Of The Week] can be selected. Set the day of the week.

When the event period is [Day]/[Hour]

Condition settings on the area on the right are not needed.

[Exception] Button

Opens the “Event Exceptions” dialog.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

122

■ [Event Exceptions]

Speciﬁes “exception” year/month/day and time settings at which events will not be executed.

The available settings will depend on the event cycle.

• When the event cycle is [Year]

Only the [Year] setting is available.

• When the event cycle is [Month]

Only the [Month] and [Week] setting is available.

• When the event cycle is [Week]

Only the [Month], [Week] and [Day] settings are available.

• When the event cycle is [Day]

Only the [Month], [Week], [Day], and [Day of the week] settings are available.

• When the event cycle is [Hour]

Only the [Month], [Week], [Day], [Day of the week], and [Hour] settings are available.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

123

Remote Control Setup List

Registers the parameters to be controlled from an external controller. Refer to the “DME-N Remote

Control Protocol Speciﬁcations” document for details about the communication protocol. Information

about the “DME-N Remote Control Protocol Speciﬁcations” document can be found at the Yamaha pro

Audio website (URL below).

http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/

[DME]

Click to see a list and select a DME.

[Function]

Select [No Assign], [Parameter Value Edit] or [Level Meter].

[Parameter]

Speciﬁes the parameter to be controlled. A list of parameters will be displayed according to the

selection of [Function].

[Min]/[Max]

Displays the minimum and maximum values for the parameter.

[Type]

Selects a fader curve when level, etc., is select for [Parameter].

Select [dB] to directly control the level in dB, or [Curve Table] to use one of the DME fader curves

for level adjustment.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

124

Parameter List

When you click [Parameter List] in the [Tools] menu, the “Parameter List” dialog box is displayed. A list

of parameters in the current conﬁguration of the current zone are displayed. Here you can check

things like the parameter IDs. You can also print the list of parameters.

When the dialog box is opened or when a DME is selected from the [DME] list, the parameter values

are displayed.

■ [DME]

From the list, select the DME that will have its parameters displayed. The DMEs included in the

current conﬁguration are displayed in the list. Components in the selected DME are displayed in

the component list.

Component List

The components and user modules included in the DME, their IDs, and the component parameters

are displayed in hierarchal list. The AD and slot are also displayed.

[ID]

Displays the component or parameter ID.

The following is displayed for the parameter ID: “Element No. : X : Y : Parameter No. : Index No.”

[Value]

Displays the value for the parameter.

NOTE

Components for user modules are also listed in a hierarchal display, but if user module security is enabled, the

components are not displayed. However, parameters displayed in the user module editor are displayed here.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

125

[Min]/[Max]

Displays the minimum and maximum values for the parameter.

■ [Preview] Button

Prints a list of parameters. When you click this button a preview screen is displayed.

■ [Save] Button

Saves the parameter list as a CSV ﬁle. When you click this button, the standard operating system

save dialog box is displayed.

■ [Cancel] Button

Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.

Printing a List of Parameters

Prints all parameters for the component selected in the list, all parameters for the selected DME, or all

parameters for all DMEs.

When you click the [Preview] button, the dialog box display will change, and the print preview will be

displayed in the center. Buttons will be added to the upper part of the dialog box.

■ [Print] Button

Prints a list of parameters. Clicking here displays the “Print” dialog box. When you click the [Print]

button, printing begins.

NOTE

The displayed parameter values are those that were in effect when the dialog box was opened or when the displayed

DME was selected from the [DME] list. They cannot be changed here.

NOTE

The CSV format is a comma delimited text ﬁle that can be read by many types of software, such as word processor,

spreadsheet, or database programs.

NOTE

The displayed [Print] dialog box will vary according to the connected printer.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

126

■ [Setup] Button

Clicking here displays the “Print Setup” dialog box.

Here you can set the paper size, paper orientation, and font.

[Paper Size]

Select the paper size from the list.

[Orientation]

Set the orientation of the paper by clicking one of the radio buttons.

•[Portrait]

Prints on the paper with it oriented vertically.

• [Landscape]

Prints on the paper with it orientated horizontally.

[Font]

Displays the set font. Clicking the [Font] button displays the “Font” dialog box, where you can

change the font.

[Target]

Set the parameters to be printed by clicking one of the radio buttons.

• [Selected Component]

Prints all parameters for the component selected in the list.

• [Selected DME]

Prints all parameters for the selected DME.

• [All DME]

Prints all parameters for all DMEs.

[Close] Button

Ends the preview and returns the screen to the original dialog box.

[Prev] Button/[Next] Button

Switches the page being previewed when there are multiple pages. The [Prev] button goes to the

previous page. The [Next] button goes to the next page.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

127

Component Lock

Click [Component Lock] in the [Tools] menu to display the Component Lock dialog.

The component/user module names included in the DME will be displayed. AD and Slot will also be

displayed.

Components can be locked so that parameter changes cannot be made from an external device by

checking the checkbox to the left of the component name. The lock settings will be transferred to the

DME when the unit is placed on-line. The settings can only be changed while off-line.

■ [Select All] Button

Checks all component checkboxes.

■ [Clear All] Button

Clears all component checkboxes.

■ [OK] Button

Enters the settings and closes the dialog box.

■ [Cancel] Button

Closes the dialog box without entering the settings.

NOTE

The hierarchy of user components in user modules will be displayed, but if user module security is enabled the components

will not be displayed. Components displayed by the User Module Editor will be displayed.

NOTE

Only users who's [Edit] box is checked can edit the lock status.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

128

Wav File Manager

When you click [Wav File Manager] on the [Tools] menu, the “Wav File Manager” dialog box is

displayed. Here you can manage playback settings for Wave ﬁles played in the Wav File Player. This is

set for each DME. The setting can be made only when in ofﬂine status. Up to 100 Wave ﬁles can be

managed.

Up to a maximum of 12 megabytes of Wave ﬁles can be registered for each DME unit. If a Wave ﬁle is

added that will exceed this amount, a warning message will be displayed.

■ [DME]

From the list, select the DME you want to set. The DMEs included in the current zone are displayed

in the list.

■ [Wave File]

Displays the Wave ﬁle information. Settings can be made here as well.

[No.]

The Wave ﬁle number is displayed in the leftmost column. Numbers are added from the top in

order.

[List Name]

You can set up to 27 characters as a label separate from the Wave ﬁle name. The Wave ﬁle name is

displayed here by default.

[File Name]

Up to 31 characters are displayed as the wave ﬁle name. If you double-click the name, the ﬁle

selection dialog is displayed, where you can select a ﬁle.

NOTE

These settings can be edited only by users for whom the [Edit] checkbox in the “Security” dialog box has been turned ON.

NOTE

Only Wave ﬁles with ﬁle names of 31 characters or less, (including the extension) can be registered. Check the Wave ﬁle

name beforehand. Change the name if it has 32 or more characters, including the extension.

NOTE

When saving project ﬁles including Wave ﬁles, select “Project File with wave (*.daf)” in the ﬁle save dialog box.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

129

[Size]

Displays Wave ﬁle size information. The units vary, depending on the ﬁle size. The size is displayed

to the ﬁrst decimal.

[Repeats]

Sets the number of repeats for playback.

Clicking here will display a list where you can select the number of times.

Select [0] to [98] or [INFINITY].

Since external input cannot be edited, [---] is displayed.

[Interval]

Sets the time until the next playback when [Repeats] is one or more. If you click here, a list will be

displayed. You can set [0] to [99].

Since external input cannot be edited, [---] is displayed.

[Auto Start]

Tur ns automatic playback ON or OFF. If ON is set, playback happens automatically when the ﬁle is

selected.

If you click here, a list will be displayed. Select [ON] or [OFF].

[Next No.]

Speciﬁes the number for the Wave ﬁle to be played next.

If you click here, a list will be displayed. Select the number for the Wave ﬁle to be played next.

• [Stop]

This stops playback after this Wave ﬁle is ﬁnished playing, without specifying the next wave

ﬁle.

Since external input cannot be edited, [---] is displayed.

■ [Store] Button

Saves the current settings in the “Wav File Manager” dialog box in a ﬁle, as a library. Clicking here

displays the ﬁle save dialog box.

■ [Recall] Button

Reads a saved library.

Clicking this button displays a menu. A menu displays library ﬁles saved in the folder that has been

set as the Contents Folder. Click the library to be read.

[Open File Dialog]

Displays the ﬁle select dialog box. You can select a library ﬁle that is saved in the folder set as the

Contents Folder, and read it.

Size Display

Up to 1023 bytes 0.X KB

1024 bytes to 1023.9 kilobytes XXX.X KB

1024 kilobytes or more X.X MB

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

130

■ [Add] Button

When you click here, External Input and the ﬁle select list is displayed.

[Wave File]

The ﬁle selection dialog box is displayed, where you can select a Wave ﬁle.

If the selected table already has data, an overwrite conﬁrmation dialog box is displayed.

[External Input]

Sets [External Input].

You can select multiple Wave ﬁles. If multiple ﬁles are speciﬁed, they are added after the selected

table. If a Wave ﬁle is registered to the number being added, it will be overwritten.

The following Wave ﬁle formats are supported: 48, 44.1, 24, 22.05 kHz, 16bit/8bit, Mono/Stereo. If a

ﬁle is selected with a format different than these, a message is displayed that says the ﬁle cannot

be used.

There is an upper limit to size beyond which a ﬁle cannot be used. This limit varies according to the

format. If the size of the selected ﬁle is beyond the limit, a message is displayed that says the ﬁle

cannot be used.

■ [Remove] Button

Deletes settings from the selected line. This button is grayed out when no Wave ﬁle is selected in

the list.

■ [Up] Button

Moves the selected line up one. It is switched with the line immediately above.

The button will be grayed out if nothing is selected in the list, or if [No. 1] is selected in the list.

■ [Down] Button

Moves the selected line down one. It is switched with the line immediately below.

The button will be grayed out if nothing is selected in the list, or if [No. 100] is selected in the list.

■ [Play] Button

Plays the selected Wave ﬁle on the computer. Allows monitoring and checking of the Wave ﬁle.

■ [Stop] Button

Stops playback of the Wave ﬁle.

■ [Remaining Memory]

Displays the remaining size that can be added.

22.05 K Mono 8 bit 1.37 MB 44.1 K Mono 8 bit 2.75 MB

22.05 K Stereo 8 bit 2.75 MB 44.1 K Stereo 8 bit 5.5 MB

22.05 K Mono 16 bit 2.75 MB 44.1 K Mono 16 bit 5.5 MB

22.05 K Stereo 16 bit 5.5 MB 44.1 K Stereo 16 bit 5.9 MB

24.05 K Mono 8 bit 1.5 MB 48 K Mono 8 bit 3 MB

24 K Stereo 8 bit 3 MB 48 K Stereo 8 bit 5.9 MB

24 K Mono 16 bit 3 MB 48 K Mono 16 bit 5.9 MB

24 K Stereo 16 bit 5.9 MB 48 K Stereo 16 bit 5.9 MB

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

131

■ [OK] Button

Updates the settings and closes the dialog box.

■ [Cancel] Button

Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.

Adding Wave Files

To add a Wave ﬁle, select the line where you want to add the ﬁle, then click the [Add] button. You can

also add a Wave ﬁle by dragging and dropping it from the desktop to the “Wav File Manager” dialog

box list.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

132

DAW Control

When you click [DAW Control] on the [Tools] menu, the “DAW Control” dialog box is displayed. Here

you can make settings for when the DME is controlled from a DAW controller. This is set for each zone

conﬁguration. The setting can be made only when in ofﬂine status.

■ [DME]

From the list, select the DME you want to set. The DMEs included in the current zone are displayed in

the list.

■ [DAW Type]

Select the DAW type. The following choices are in the list: [Off], [Type1], and [Type2].

■ DAW Control Table

The following can be set for each channel from 1 to 64: [Function], [Controller], [Label], [Parameter].

[Function]

Selects the function that will be changed by the DAW controller. If you click here, a list will be

displayed.

NOTE

DAW control editing can be performed only by users for whom the [Edit] security checkbox has been checked.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

133

• [No Assign]

Makes no assignments. Select this when you are erasing an already set assignment.

•[Parameter Value Edit]

Allows the parameter of the component speciﬁed in the [Parameter] ﬁeld to be changed.

• [Scene Change]

Recalls a scene. The scene is recalled even if the current scene, and the one changed by the

DAW controller, are the same.

When a selection has been made, [SCENE] is displayed in the [Label] ﬁeld. The last scene is

set in the [Parameter] ﬁeld.

• [Scene Increment]

Sets the scene increment. Recalls the next valid scene after the current scene.

When a selection has been made, [SINC] is displayed in the [Label] ﬁeld.

• [Scene Decrement]

Selects the scene decrement. Recalls the next valid scene before the current scene.

When a selection has been made, [SDEC] is displayed in the [Label] ﬁeld.

• [Mute]

Sets all mute. Mute is set ON and OFF by the DAW controller.

When a selection has been made, [MUTE] is displayed in the [Label] ﬁeld.

• [Component]

Changes the component parameters. Selectable component names that are arranged in the

conﬁguration are displayed in a list.

When selected, the ﬁrst parameter included in the component is set in the [Parameter] ﬁeld.

• [GPI Lock]

Assigns GPI Lock. GPI Lock is set ON and OFF by the DAW controller.

When a selection has been made, [LOCK] is displayed in the [Label] ﬁeld.

• [Play Wav File]

Allows initiation of Wave ﬁle playback. The Wave ﬁle setting is made in the [Parameter] ﬁeld.

Wave ﬁles set by the Wav File manager can be speciﬁed. Files can not be selected unless a

Wav Player is included in the DME conﬁguration.

[Controller]

Selects a controller from the list when [Parameter Value Edit] is set in [Function]. [Switch],

[Fader], or [Knob] can be selected.

[Label]

Enter a label. Double-click to enter the text. You can enter up to 16 characters of text. Set the value

with the <Enter> key, or cancel it with the <ESC> key.

[Parameter]

If [Scene Change] , [Parameter Value Edit] or [Play Wav File], is set in [Function], set the

parameters.

If you click here, a list will be displayed.

• When [Scene Change] is set in [Function]

Displays scenes that can be selected.

• When [Parameter Value Edit] is set in [Function]

Selectable parameters are displayed.

• When [Play Wav File] is set in [Function]

Selectable Wave ﬁles are displayed.

NOTE

If [Scene Change], [Scene Increment], [Scene Decrement], [Mute], or [GPI Lock] is selected for [Function], the label

name is ﬁxed.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

134

Shortcut Keys

Click [Shortcut Keys] in the [Tools] menu to display the “Shortcut Keys” dialog.

Click to select the desired shortcut item.

■ [Enter New Key]

If assigned, the current shortcut will be displayed.

A shortcut entered via the computer keyboard will be displayed.

■ [OK] Button

Enters the settings and closes the dialog box.

■ [Cancel] Button

Closes the dialog box without entering the settings.

Chapter 3 Main Panel Window

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

135

Backup

When you click the [Backup] command on the [Tools] menu, the “Backup” dialog box is displayed.

Data in the DME is gathered in the computer and saved as a ﬁle. Backup ﬁles are created for each

DME. You can also send the information saved in a ﬁle to a DME. Backup can be performed only when

in ofﬂine status.

■ [Target DME]

Displays DME, IP addresses, and DME types for each zone. Check the DME from which you want

to obtain data. You can place checks next to multiple DMEs.

■ [Folder] Box

Speciﬁes the folder that will be the destination for saving and reading operations. Clicking the

[Browse] button opens the folder select dialog box, where you can specify a folder.

The backup ﬁle name will be the DME’s IP address. If the folder is speciﬁed when sending DME

data, the ﬁle sent to the DME will be the ﬁle in the folder whose ﬁle name that matches the DME’s IP

address.

■ [Load] Button

Sends the backed up ﬁle to the speciﬁed DME.

■ [Save] Button

Obtains data from the speciﬁed DME, and saves it as a backup ﬁle.

■ [Close] Button

Closes the dialog box.

NOTE

Backup operations can be performed only by users for whom the [Edit] security checkbox has been checked.

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

136

Chapter 4 Designer

Editing Conﬁgurations

Conﬁgurations

Information about inputs/outputs, along with the arrangement of components and how they are

connected, is called a “conﬁguration.” Conﬁgurations are created in the Designer window and sent

to the DME unit.

In the Designer window, conﬁgurations are designed using various design windows, such as the Area,

Zone, Conﬁguration, and User Module windows. In each window a sheet is displayed, on which

objects can be arranged.

New Conﬁgurations

You can create multiple zones within an area, and multiple conﬁgurations within a zone.

Zones are added using the “Zone” dialog box, while conﬁgurations are added using the

“Conﬁguration” dialog box. For information about the “Zone” dialog box, see “Adding, Deleting, and

Renaming a Zone” on page 231. For information about the “Conﬁguration” dialog box, see “Adding,

Deleting, and Renaming a Conﬁguration” on page 233.

Security

Editing in the Designer window can be restricted based on the user security settings. Only users for

whom the [Operation Security] → [Edit] checkbox in the “Security” dialog box has been checked can

display the Designer window and edit conﬁgurations.

For information about the “Security” dialog box, see “Security (Creating Users and Making User

Settings)” on page 55.

Edit Mode

There is an “Edit Mode” in the Designer window. When the Edit Mode is ON, conﬁgurations can be

edited. When it is turned OFF, the DME is controlled by DME Designer.

■ Edit Mode=ON

When Edit Mode is ON, you can do conﬁguration editing tasks such as arranging objects, making

connections, and changing properties.

■ Edit Mode=OFF

When Edit Mode is OFF, you cannot arrange objects, make selections, or display “Properties”

dialog boxes for objects. You can display the component editor.

■ Edit Mode ON/OFF

The edit mode can be turned on or off via the [Edit Mode] command in the [Tools] menu or in the

contextual menu that appears when you right-click the sheet. To turn Edit Mode ON click the

command, placing a checkmark to the left of the command name. When there is a checkmark next

to the command (when Edit Mode is ON), clicking the command again removes the checkmark

and turns OFF the Edit Mode.

NOTE

Only users for whom the [Operation Security] → [Edit] checkbox in the “Security” dialog box has been checked can turn

the Edit Mode ON.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

137

Designer Window

You can display or hide the Designer window using the [Designer] command on the [View] menu in

the Main Panel window.

Title Bar

“Designer” is displayed on the title bar. You can move the window by dragging the title bar. There are

[Minimize], [Maximize]/[Restore], and [Close] buttons at the right edge of the title bar.

Menu Bar

Commands that can be executed in the application are collected into categories on the menu bar.

When you click one of the categories, a list of commands is displayed.

Title Bar

Menu Bar

Toolbar

Toolkit Window

Design

Window

Navigator Window

Resource Meter

Window

Status Bar

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

138

Toolbar

Frequently used commands are arranged here as buttons.

■ [Print] Button

Prints the active design window.

→ “Printing Each Design Window” in “Design Window Shared Settings and Operations” (page 214)

■ [Undo] Button (page 145)

Undoes the most recent edit operation.

■ [Redo] Button (page 145)

Restores operations undone with the [Undo] button back to their original condition.

■ [Cut] Button (page 145)

Cuts the selected object from the screen and moves it to the clipboard.

■ [Copy] Button (page 145)

Copies the selected object to the clipboard.

■ [Paste] Button (page 145)

Pastes data from the clipboard.

■ [Navigator] Button (page 140)

Displays or hides the Navigator window.

■ [Resource Meter] Button (page 139)

Displays or hides the Resource Meter window.

■ [Analyze] Button

Displays the “Analyze” dialog box, and analyzes the conﬁguration.

→ "Analyze (Conﬁguration Analysis)" in "Conﬁguration Window" (page 249)

■ [Show Signal Delay] Button

The digital signal delay value is displayed in the Conﬁguration window.

→ "Show Signal Delay (Delay Display Value)" in "Conﬁguration Window" (page 246)

■ [Probe Monitor] Button

Tur ns the probe monitor ON or OFF.

→ “Probe Monitor” in “Conﬁguration Window” (page 244)

[Print] Button

[Undo] Button

[Redo] Button

[Cut] Button

[Copy] Button

[Paste] Button

[Navigator] Button

[Resource Meter] Button

[Zoom Out] Button

[Zoom In] Button

[Actual Size] Button

[Zoom To] Button

[Show Signal Delay]

button

[Analyze] button

[Probe Monitor] Button

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

139

■ [Zoom Out]/[Zoom In]/[Actual Size]/[Zoom To] Buttons

These buttons correspond to the commands on the [View] menu with the same names. Changes

the magniﬁcation of the display on the screen.

→ “[View] Menu” in “Designer Window Menus” (page 147)

Status Bar

■ DME ID/Component ID

When the mouse pointer is moved over a DME device in the Zone window, the ID for that DME

device is displayed. When the mouse pointer is moved over a component in the Conﬁguration

window, the ID for the component is displayed.

■ Sheet size

Displays the size of the sheet in the active design window.

■ Coordinates

Displays the coordinates of the mouse pointer any time it is within the design window. When

dragging an object, the coordinates displayed here refer to the upper left corner of the object

being dragged.

Resource Meter Window

The Resource Meter window is displayed only when the Conﬁguration window and User Module

window are active. Meters for the DSP memory usage percentage and the SPX resource usage

percentage are in the Resource Meter window.

■ DSP Memory Usage Percentage

When you are designing in the Conﬁguration window, it gives you a yardstick for judging the total

usage percentage for DSP memory in the DME unit. You cannot create a design that exceeds 100

percent usage in a single conﬁguration window. In addition, the usage percentage varies

depending on the sampling frequency, even for the same component.

When the conﬁguration is synchronized with the DME unit during online status, checks of

connections and component information begin automatically (this is called compiling). The actual

total usage percentage is calculated after this compiling operation. The usage percentage will vary

according to the number of connections and components. The Resource Meter window gives you

a precompile guideline for use while designing your conﬁguration. An error may occur even when

the meter shows less than 100 percent, based on conditions such as the number of connections,

and type and number of components used.

NOTE

If a conﬁguration is compiled at fs=44.1kHz or 48kHz, and the sampling frequency is then changed to 88.2kHz or 96kHz, it is

necessary to recompile at 88.2kHz or 96kHz. If this is not done some conﬁgurations may produce no sound. In such cases a

“DSP Power Shortage” message will be displayed on the DME unit.

Sheet Size

Coordinates

DME ID/Component ID

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

140

■ SPX Resource Usage Ratio

Displays the resource usage ratio for SPX components arranged in the conﬁguration.

Navigator Window

Gives a hierarchical display of the area, zones, and conﬁgurations, along with the DME devices, user

modules and components arranged within the conﬁgurations. This allows you to check the overall

status of your setup.

When doing ofﬂine editing, you can click the icon or name for an area, zone, conﬁguration, DME

device, user module, or component to make each design window active.

■ [+]/[-]

The subordinate items are displayed or hidden using the [+]/[-] buttons to the left of the area,

zones, conﬁgurations, user modules, or DME devices. When the subordinate items are displayed,

the button changes to [-]. If you click this button, the subordinate items will be hidden. When the

subordinate items are hidden, the button changes to [+]. If you click this button, the subordinate

items will be displayed.

Subordinate items are also displayed and the button changes to [-] when you click on an area,

zone, conﬁguration, user module, or DME device.

NOTE

If the [Matrix Mixer 64 input 64 output] or the [Matrix Mixer 64 input 32 output] components are placed in the DME64N

conﬁguration window, you will not be able to use other components, even though the window does not reach 100 percent.

The [Matrix Mixer 64 input 64 output] or [Matrix Mixer 64 input 32 output] components cannot be used in the DME24N.

NOTE

For user modules with security enabled, a password is requested when displaying the hierarchical display shown below.

Area

Zones

Conﬁguration

DME Devices

User Module

Components included

in the User Module

Components

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

141

■ Area

If you click the area while doing ofﬂine editing, the Area window becomes active.

■ Zone

If you click a zone while doing ofﬂine editing, the Zone window becomes active. If another Zone

window is open, it will be closed.

■ Conﬁguration

If you click a conﬁguration while doing ofﬂine editing, the Zone window for the clicked conﬁguration

becomes active. If another Zone window is open, it will be closed.

■ DME Device

If you click a DME, a Conﬁguration window will be opened for that unit. If that window is already

open, it will be displayed on top of any other windows.

■ Component

Click a component and the component editor will open.

■ User Module

The window speciﬁed by “User Module Properties [Double Click Action]” will open when clicked.

■ Components Included in the User Module

Click a component in the user module and the component editor will be displayed.

NOTE

When there are multiple conﬁgurations in a zone, click a conﬁguration to switch conﬁgurations, not the zone.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

142

Four Design Windows

The following design windows are available: the Area window, Zone window, Conﬁguration window,

and User Module window. In each window there is a single sheet on which objects can be arranged.

Within the Designer window, you can simultaneously open and edit in the Area window, Zone Window,

Conﬁguration window, and User Module window.

■ Area Window

Used to design areas.

→ See “Area Window” on page 235.

■ Zone Window

Used to design zone conﬁgurations.

→ See “Zone Window” on page 237.

■ Conﬁguration Window

Used to design conﬁgurations for DME units arranged in a zone.

→ See “Conﬁguration Window” on page 242.

■ User Module Window

Used to design user modules conﬁgurations. A module that combines a number of other

components, yet is treated as a single component, is called a “user module.” It is arranged in the

Conﬁguration window.

→ See “User Module Window” on page 257.

Conﬁguration Structure and Four Design Windows

Area Window

Zone Window

Conﬁguration Window

User Module Window

Component Editor

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

143

Toolkit Window

The Toolkit displays objects that can be arranged in each design window. The displayed contents vary

according to which window is active.

→ See “Toolkit Window” on page 152.

Displayed in the designer

window

Floating-style

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

144

Designer Window Menu

[Print] Menu

This menu provides commands for exporting conﬁgurations and printing windows.

■ [Export DXF]

Exports the information in the active window and saves it as a DXF ﬁle, which is compatible with

CAD software sold by other companies.

→ “Exporting the Design Window” in “Design Window Shared Settings and Operations” (page 211)

■ [Print Setup]

When you select this command, the “Print Setup” dialog box will be displayed. Sets the paper size

and orientation.

→ “Printing Each Design Window” in “Design Window Shared Settings and Operations” (page 214)

■ [Print Preview]

Displays a print preview of the active design window.

→ “Printing Each Design Window” in “Design Window Shared Settings and Operations” (page 214)

■ [Print]

Prints the active window. When you select this command, the “Print” dialog box will be displayed.

→ “Printing Each Design Window” in “Design Window Shared Settings and Operations” (page 214)

■ [Preferences]

Displays the “Preferences” dialog box. Sets the line thickness and the design window edit

operations.

→ “Preferences” in “Design Window Shared Settings and Operations” (page 207)

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

145

[Edit] Menu

This menu provides edit commands.

■ [Undo]

Undoes the most recent edit operation. Repeatedly clicking this button will delete multiple

operations. When [Undo] is not possible, the command will be grayed out.

■ [Redo]

Returns to the status before the [Undo] command was executed. If you repeatedly click this button,

it will redo multiple operations. If redo is not possible, the command will be grayed out.

■ [Cut]

Cuts the selected object. Moves the selected object to the clipboard.

■ [Copy]

Copies the selected object to the clipboard. The selected object remains as is.

■ [Paste]

This command pastes the object on the clipboard into the active window. If there is no data on the

clipboard or if the object on the clipboard is not a type that can be pasted into the active window,

this command cannot be used.

■ [Delete]

Deletes the selected object. The data on the clipboard does not change.

■ [Select All]

Selects all objects in the active design window.

■ [Duplicate]

Duplicates the selected object. The data on the clipboard does not change.

NOTE

There are some objects that cannot be deleted with the [Delete] command.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

146

■ [Display Order]

Changes the display order (in front or behind) of the selected objects.

→ “Changing the Order” in “Design Window Shared Settings and Operations” (page 218)

■ [Edit Legend]

This command can be selected when an Area window, Zone window, or Conﬁguration window is

active. It lets you edit the descriptive text (legend) displayed on the sheet in the Area window, Zone

window, or Conﬁguration window. When this command is selected, the “Edit Legend” dialog box

will be displayed.

→ “Legend (Descriptive Fields)” in “Objects” (page 198)

■ [Properties]

Opens the “Properties” dialog box for the selected objects.

→ See “Object Types” on page 156.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

147

[View] Menu

Displays or hides the windows.

■ [Toolbar]

Displays or hides the toolbar. A checkmark appears beside this menu item when the toolbar is

displayed.

■ [Status Bar]

Displays or hides the status bar. A checkmark appears beside this menu item when the status bar

is displayed.

■ [Area]/[Toolkit]/[Resource Meter]/[Navigator]

Displays or hides the Area window, Toolkit, Resource Meter, or Navigator window. A checkmark

appears to the left of the command name when a window is displayed.

The Resource Meter window is displayed only when the Conﬁguration window and User Module

window are active.

■ [Full Screen]

Displays in full-screen mode. Displays the active design window (Area, Zone, Conﬁguration, or

User Module window) exclusively, with it covering the entire screen.

A context menu appears wherever you right-click on the screen, containing the commands that are

needed at that location.

To return from the full-screen mode to the original display status, press the <Esc> key.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

148

■ [Port Long Name]

Switches the port name display. When you select this command, a checkmark appears next to it

and long names are displayed. If you select this command when a checkmark is next to it, the

checkmark disappears and short names are displayed.

■ [Zoom In]

Gives a closer view of an area displayed on the screen.

■ [Zoom Out]

Widens the area displayed on the screen.

■ [Zoom To]

Selects the display magniﬁcation from a submenu.

■ [Actual Size]

Returns the display to normal dimensions.

■ [Fit in Window]

Increases or decreases the display magniﬁcation so that the sheet exactly ﬁts the current window.

The entire sheet will be visible.

Long name

Short name

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

149

[Tools] Menu

■ [Area Parts List]

This command can be used only when the Area window is active. A submenu displays the same

objects that are in the Toolkit window displayed while the Area window is active. Clicking an object

on the submenu, then clicking the Area window, places that object in the Area window.

→ [Area Parts List] in “Toolkit Window” (page 153)

■ [Device List]

This command can be used only when the Zone window is active. A submenu here displays the

same objects as the Toolkit window. Clicking an object on the submenu, then clicking the Zone

window, places that object in the Zone window.

→ [Zone Device List] in “Toolkit Window” (page 154)

■ [Component List]

This command can be used only when a Conﬁguration window or User Module window is active.

A submenu here displays the same objects as the Toolkit window. Clicking an object on the

submenu, then clicking the Conﬁguration/User Module window, places the object in that window.

→ “Component List (Conﬁguration Window)” in “Toolkit Window” (page 154), “Component List

(User Module Window)” in “Toolkit Window” (page 155)

■ [Zone]

Displays the “Zone” dialog box. Here you can add, delete, or rename a zone.

→ See “Adding, Deleting, and Renaming a Zone” on page 231.

■ [Conﬁguration]

Displays the “Conﬁguration” dialog box. Here you can add, delete, or rename a conﬁguration.

→ See “Adding, Deleting, and Renaming a Conﬁguration” on page 233.

■ [Save User Module]

This command can be used only when a User Module is selected in the Conﬁguration window.

Saves the selected user module.

→ “User Module Manager” Dialog Box in “User Modules” (page 255)

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

150

■ [User Module Manager]

Displays the “User Module Manager” dialog box. Here you rename or delete user modules.

→ “User Module Manager” Dialog Box in “User Modules” (page 250)

■ [Show Signal Delay]

The digital signal delay value is displayed in the conﬁguration window with sample units.

→ "Show Signal Delay (Delay Display Value)" in "Conﬁguration Window" (page 246)

■ [Analyze]

Displays the “Analyze” dialog box, and analyzes the conﬁguration.

→ "Analyze (Conﬁguration Analysis)" in "Conﬁguration Window" (page 249)

■ [Probe Monitor]

Tur ns the probe monitor ON or OFF. This command can be selected only when a Conﬁguration

window or User Module window is active while in online status.

→ “Probe Monitor” in “Conﬁguration Window” (page 244)

■ [Monitoring Point List]

Opens the “Monitoring Point List” dialog box. Registers points for monitoring with headphones.

→ "Monitoring Point List" in "Conﬁguration Window" (page 247)

■ [Edit Mode]

Tur ns the edit mode ON or OFF.

→ “Edit Mode” in “Editing Conﬁgurations” (page 136)

■ [Sheet]

Opens the “Sheet” dialog box. Sets the sheet size and background.

→ “Sheet” in “Objects” (page 200)

■ [Prohibit Diagonal Connections]

Allows you to draw horizontal and vertical wires only. Diagonal wires cannot be drawn.

→ “Drawing Settings” in “Drawing and Editing Wires” (page 223)

■ [Grid]

Opens the “Grid” dialog box. Displays or hides the grid and sets the grid spacing.

→ “Grid” in “Design Window Shared Settings and Operations” (page 210)

NOTE

Only users for whom the [Operation Security] → [Edit] checkbox in the “Security” dialog box has been checked can

select this command.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

151

[Window] Menu

Arranges multiple windows. The lower part of the menu displays the names of currently open

windows. A checkmark appears next to the active window. When you click the name of a window, that

window becomes active.

■ [Cascade]

Displays the windows overlapping one another.

■ [Tile]

Displays the windows arranged side-by-side.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

152

Toolkit Window

Displaying the Toolkit Window

You can display or hide the Toolkit window using the [Toolkit] command on the [View] menu. The

Toolkit displays objects that can be arranged in each design window. You can arrange objects in each

design window by dragging them from the Toolkit window or by double-clicking them in the Toolkit

window.

The objects are categorized by type and displayed here in a hierarchy. You can use the [+]/[-] buttons

to display or hide items below a particular level in the window. Click the [+] button to display the items

on the next level down, and the [-] button to hide them.

Moving the Toolkit Window

You can move the Toolkit window by dragging it. If you drag the window to right or left side, it will

remain ﬁxed. If you drag it to other locations, it will ﬂoat independently. When DME Designer is started,

the Toolkit window is displayed at the left side of the Designer window.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

153

Toolkit Window Types

The contents of the Toolkit window will vary, depending on which window is active.

The following objects are displayed in each window:

[Area Parts List]

The [Area Parts List] displays objects that can be arranged in the Area window. The same objects are

displayed in the [Area Parts List] submenu on the [Tools] menu or on the context menu that appears

when you right-click on the sheet.

Active Design Window Toolkit Window

Area Window Area Parts List

Zone Window Device List

Conﬁguration Window Component List

User Module Window Component List

Area Parts List Device List

Component List

(Conﬁguration

Window)

Component List

(User Module

Window)

DME ✔

ICP ✔

External Device ✔✔

Component ✔✔

SPX Component ✔✔

User Module ✔

Pictures ✔✔✔✔

Tex t ✔✔✔✔

Boxes ✔✔✔✔

Ellipses ✔✔✔✔

NOTE

You can create multiple zones in an area. They are added using the menu bar [Tool] menu → “Zone” dialog box.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

154

[Device List]

The Device list displays objects that can be arranged in a Zone window (conﬁguration). The same

objects are displayed in the [Device List] submenu on the [Tools] menu or on the context menu that

appears when you right-click on the sheet.

[Component List] (Conﬁguration Window)

The Component List displays objects that can be arranged in Conﬁguration windows. The same

objects are displayed in the [Component List] submenu on the [Tools] menu or on the context menu

that appears when you right-click on the sheet.

NOTE

Conﬁgurations are added using the menu bar [Tool] menu → “Conﬁguration” dialog box.

[Tools] menu

Toolkit window

[Device List] submenu on the [Tools] menu or

on the context menu

Toolkit window

[Tools] menu

[Component List] submenu

on the [Tools] menu

or on the context menu

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

155

[Component List] (User Module Window)

The Component List displays objects that can be arranged in the User Module window. The same

objects are displayed in the [Component List] submenu on the [Tools] menu or on the context menu

that appears when you right-click on the sheet.

Toolkit window

[Tools] menu

[Component List] submenu

on the [Tools] menu

or on the context menu

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

156

Objects

Object Types

The devices, shapes, and wires that can be arranged in each design window are called “Objects.”

The following objects are available:

Various design elements, such as name, color and size, can be set in the “Properties” dialog box for

each object.

Size is set using the [Width] and [Height] boxes in the “Properties” dialog box. The maximum size

values that can be set may vary according to the sheet size and object position. You can set a size

that allows the object to ﬁt in the sheet.

Name

Window Where It can be

Placed/Displayed

Explanation

Zone Area Zones

DME Zones DME and any cards inserted into its slots

ICP Zones User deﬁned parameter control

External Device Zones External Device

Component Conﬁguration

User Module

User Module, Audio processor, Control parts

SPX Component Conﬁguration

User Module

SPX components

User Module Conﬁguration Combination of components

Slot Component Conﬁguration Cards inserted into DME slot

Pictures All Image

Text All Text box

Boxes All Box shape

Ellipses All Circular shape

Wires All Connecting wire, straight line shape

Legend All

Zones

Conﬁguration

An area displayed on the sheet where descriptive

information is presented.

Sheet -- One sheet per design window.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

157

Zone

There must be at least one zone in the Area window. Zones are added and deleted using the “Zone”

dialog box. Zones are not displayed in the Toolkit window or in the [Area Parts List] submenu in the

[Tools] Menu

If you right-click on the name of a zone object located in the Area window, a context menu will be

displayed.

■ Zone Context Menu

[Open]

Opens the Conﬁguration window.

[Display Order]

Changes the display order of the objects, according to a command in the submenu.

[Properties]

Displays the “Area Properties” dialog box.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

158

■ Zone Object Properties

When you select a zone in the Area window, then click the [Properties] command on the [Edit]

menu, the “Area Properties” dialog box is displayed. Here you can set properties for zone objects.

The [Properties] command is also located on the context menu for zone objects.

[Text] Box

You can enter up to 100 English characters for the object name.

The object name is displayed in the rectangular box for the object. If there is a large number of

characters and the object’s shape is too narrow, all characters might not be displayed.

[Font] Button

Clicking here displays the “Select Font” dialog box. This sets the font used to display the object

name.

For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see page 202.

[Color] Button

Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. This sets the color of the object name text.

For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203.

Text Position

Sets the location of the text. The list to the left sets the vertical position of the text. The list to the

right sets the horizontal position.

•Vertical Position

Select [Top], [Center], or [Bottom].

• Horizontal Position

Select [Left], [Center], or [Right].

[Width] Box

Speciﬁes the width of the object in pixels. The default is 50 pixels.

[Height] Box

Speciﬁes the height of the object in pixels. The default is 50 pixels.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

159

[Style]

Sets the style of the object. From the list, select [Plain], [Raised], or [Sunken].

Background Image

Sets background effects for the object.

• [Color] Button

Sets the color. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.

For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203.

• [Image] Button

Displays an image inside the object. You can use image ﬁles in the following formats: BMP

(.bmp), PNG (.png), XPM (.xpm), and JPEG (.jpg). Clicking here displays the “Select Image”

dialog box. Specify an image ﬁle and set its display method.

For information about the “Select Image” dialog box, see page 205.

[OK] Button

Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box.

[Cancel] Button

Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.

Raised Sunken

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

160

DME

DMEs are arranged in the Zone window. If DME properties settings have been made for an expansion

card installed in one of the DME slots, the card will be displayed automatically.

DME24N

DME64N

DME24N with no I/O card installed.

DME24N with an I/O card installed in

its expansion slot.

DME64N with no I/O cards connected in slots.

DME64N with I/O cards installed

in expansion slots 1, 2, and 4.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

161

When I/O Cards Are Installed in DME Expansion Slots

When an I/O card is selected for an expansion slot in the DME properties, an I/O port is added for

the DME arranged in the Zone window. An I/O component block will be added to the conﬁguration

window.

If [None] is selected for I/O cards in the DME properties, any I/O component blocks will also be

deleted automatically from the Conﬁguration window. (Even if the I/O components are deleted, the

wiring will remain.)

When the DME64N Cascade Setting is Turned ON

When [Show Cascade Port] is checked in the DME64N “DME Device Properties” dialog box, the

cascade I/O components will be displayed in the Conﬁguration window.

If “Show Cascade Port” is turned OFF in the DME64N “DME Device Properties” dialog box,

cascade I/O components will also be deleted automatically in the Conﬁguration window. (Even if

the Cascade I/O components are deleted, the wiring will remain.)

DME64N block with card inserted in a slot and the Conﬁguration window

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

162

CobraNet Card

If the I/O card is a CobraNet card, a CobraNet icon will be displayed in the DME object.

■ Object Selection

To open a conﬁguration window for a DME object arranged in the Zone window, ﬁrst select it by

clicking on it, then double-click on it. If you right-click on the object, a context menu will be

displayed.

DME block with CobraNet card inserted

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

163

■ DME Object Context Menu

[Open Conﬁguration Window]

Opens the Conﬁguration window.

[Cut]

Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard.

[Copy]

Copies the selected object to the clipboard.

[Paste]

Pastes the DME device that is on the clipboard.

[Delete]

Deletes the object you clicked on.

[Duplicate]

Duplicates the object you clicked on.

[Display Order]

Changes the display order of the objects, according to a command in the submenu.

[Flash Unit LEDs]

When selected the DME front panel will ﬂash, and will continue ﬂashing until selected a second

time.

[Output Level]

When you select this command, the “Output Level” dialog box will be displayed. This sets the DME

master volume.

[Properties]

Displays the “DME Device Properties” dialog box.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

164

■ DME Properties

To display the “DME Device Properties” dialog box, select a DME object, then click the [Properties]

command on the [Edit] menu. Here you can set DME properties.

[Label] Box

You can enter up to 100 English characters to display over the object.

[Width] Box

Speciﬁes the width of the object in pixels.

[Height] Box

Speciﬁes the height of the object in pixels.

[Style]

Sets the style of the object. From the list, select [Plain], [Raised], or [Sunken].

[Label Font] Button

Sets the font for the label. Clicking here displays the “Select Font” dialog box.

For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see page 202.

[Label Color] Button

This sets the color of the label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.

[Port Label Color] Button

Sets the color for the I/O port label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.

[Color] Button

Sets the color of the object. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.

NOTE

The name set in the [Label] box will be displayed on the list in the Toolkit window, [Import]/[Export] menu commands,

and on the list in the dialog box. If there are multiple examples of the same DME, set different names for each so that you

can distinguish one from the other.

NOTE

For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203.

DME24N DME64N

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

165

Analog I/O

Sets the label for the DME24N I/O port. When you click the [Edit I/O Port Label] button, the “Edit

Port Label” dialog box is displayed.

Cascade

Tur ns the DME 64N cascade ON or OFF.

• Show Cascade Port

Checking this enables cascade.

• Cascade Setting

Here you can make settings that apply when cascade is enabled. Clicking here displays the

“Cascade Setting” dialog box.

I/O Card

Settings for the [Slot1] ~ [Slot4] I/O cards. [Slot1] only can be set for DME24N.

• [Select I/O Card]

Speciﬁes the type of I/O card.

• [Card Label]

I/O card names having up to 100 characters can be entered here.

• [Edit SlotN I/O Port Label] Button

Speciﬁes an I/O port label for each slot. Clicking here displays the “Edit Port Label” dialog

box.

Port Style On Zone Window

Speciﬁes how the DME ports appear in the zone window.

•[Audio Port (Classic Style)]

Displays all audio ports.

• [Custom Port Style]

Customizes the port display.

[Left]

Sets the number of ports to be displayed on the left.

[Right]

Sets the number of ports to be displayed to the right.

• [Edit Port Label and Type]

Sets the label and type for each port. Click to display the [Edit Port Label] dialog.

[OK] Button

Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box.

[Cancel] Button

Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

166

■ “Cascade Setting” Dialog Box

Clicking the [Cascade Setting] button displays the “Cascade Setting” dialog box. Here you can

display DME64E cascade connections and make settings related to them. These settings are

common to the cascaded DMEs in the same zone.

Unit No. (Cascade Connection Number)

All DME units other than the ﬁrst unit (default “1”) are assigned automatically, and are grayed out

after connection indicating that the settings cannot be changed.

Head Margin

Here you can display and set the head margin for the Cascade connection audio signal. Select [0

db] or [-18 db]. All DME Unit No. settings for DME units other than the ﬁrst unit will be automatically

set to the same value as the ﬁrst unit when connected. These settings are grayed out after

connection indicating that they cannot be changed.

Mixer I/O Channel

Here you can display and set the channel used for audio input/output to a mixer. If the checkbox is

turned ON, the channel for the Cascade connection with the mixer is set. If turned OFF, the channel

for connecting with the DME is set.

[Check All] Button

Checks all checkboxes.

[Clear All] Button

Clears all checkboxes.

[OK] Button

Updates the settings and closes the dialog box.

[Cancel] Button

Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

167

■ “Edit Port Label” Dialog Box

When you click the [Edit I/O Port Label]/[Edit SlotN I/O Port Label] button, the “Edit Port Label”

dialog box is displayed. Here you can set the port labels displayed for components. Enter a [Short

Name] and [Long Name] for [Inputs] and [Outputs]. You can enter up to 100 English characters for

each name.

You can switch between long and short port names displayed in the conﬁguration window with the

[Port Long Name] command in the [View] menu. When you select this command, a checkmark

appears next to it and long names are displayed. If you select this command while a checkmark is

next to it, the checkmark disappears and short names are displayed.

When the Port Style On Zone Window [Custom Port Style] is selected, labels speciﬁed here will not

appear in the Zone Window. Labels speciﬁed here are always displayed in the Conﬁguration

Window.

■ Edit Port Label and Type Dialog Box

The Edit Port Label and Type dialog box will appear when the [Edit Port Label and Type ..] button is

clicked. Here you can specify the port labels and types to be displayed in for the components.

To set labels enter the [Port Name] for [Left] and [Right]. Each name can be up to 100 characters in

length.

To set the port type use [Port Type] to select the [Left] and [Right] types.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

168

ICP

You can arrange control panel objects in the Zone window. These can be controlled using user

deﬁned parameters.

First click on an ICP object arranged in the Zone window to select it, then double-click the object. This

opens a “Control Panel Properties” window. If you right-click on the object, a context menu will be

displayed.

■ ICP Object Context Menu

[Cut]

Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard.

[Copy]

Copies the selected object to the clipboard.

[Paste]

Pastes the control panel object that is on the clipboard. If the same control panel object exists on

the sheet where you are pasting, a new ICP object will be created.

[Delete]

Deletes the object you clicked on.

[Duplicate]

Duplicates the object you clicked on.

[Display Order]

Changes the display order of the objects, according to a command in the submenu.

[Properties]

Displays the properties dialog box.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

169

■ ICP Properties

To display the “Control Panel Properties” dialog box, select a ICP object, then click the [Properties]

command on the [Edit] menu.

[Label] Box

You can enter up to 100 text characters to display above the object. Labels for identical ICP

objects that exist in other conﬁgurations will also be changed.

[Width] Box

Speciﬁes the object width in pixels.

[Height] Box

Speciﬁes the object height in pixels.

[Style]

Sets the object style. Select [Plain], [Raised], or [Sunken] from the list.

[Label Font] Button

Sets the font for the label. Clicking here displays the “Select Font” dialog box.

For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see page 202.

[Back Color] Button

Sets the object color. Click to display the Select Color dialog box.

[Label Color] Button

This sets the color of the label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.

For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203.

[User Deﬁned Lock]

Sets whether user deﬁned parameters will be displayed or hidden. Pages with checkmarks will not

be displayed. The four [1]/[2]/[3]/[4] tabs in the “User Deﬁned Button” dialog box correspond to the

pages on the DME unit main display.

Ethernet Port

Tur ns Ethernet port rendering on or off. Ethernet port display will appear when the checkbox is ON.

The radio buttons can be used to specify whether the display is on the left or right side.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

170

[OK] Button

Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box.

[Cancel] Button

Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.

External Device

Arranges external device objects in the Zone window. These objects can be added by plug-in

functions. External applications can be linked to the devices arranged in the window. These links to

external applications are set using the “External Device Properties” dialog box.

To start the application linked to an external device object arranged in the Zone window, ﬁrst click on

the object to select it, then double-click it. If you right-click on the object, a context menu will be

displayed.

■ AD824/AD8HR

The AD824 is an eight-channel analog-to-digital converter. The AD8HR is an eight-channel analog-

to-digital converter that features a head amp with high quality sound.

You can connect Yamaha AD824 and AD8HR A/D converters to a DME unit and control them

remotely from DME Designer. DME Designer has a component editor for controlling [AD824] and

[AD8HR] units.

If you arrange an [AD824] or [AD8HR] from [External Device] in the Zone window, select the

connected DME unit in the properties dialog box, and double-click on an [AD824] or [AD8HR]

block, the component editor is displayed.

NOTE

If no external application is linked to the an object, no application will start when the object is double-clicked.

NOTE

If a DME is not selected in the properties dialog box, the component editor will not be displayed even if you double-click.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

171

■ External Device Object Context Menu

[Open Component Editor]

Starts the application assigned to the object.

For the [AD824] and [AD8HR], it opens the component editor.

[Cut]

Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard.

[Copy]

Copies the selected object to the clipboard.

[Paste]

Pastes the object that is on the clipboard.

[Delete]

Deletes the object you clicked on.

[Duplicate]

Duplicates the object you clicked on.

[Display Order]

Changes the display order of the objects, according to a command in the submenu.

[Properties]

Displays the “External Device Properties” dialog box.

At the lowest position below [External Device], [AD824] and [AD8HR] display the “Serial Controlled

Device Properties” dialog box. The other objects display the “External Device Properties” dialog

box.

■ External Device Properties

To display the “External Device Properties” dialog box, select any external device object besides

AD824 or AD8HR, then click the [Properties] command on the [Edit] menu.

[Label] Box

You can enter up to 100 English characters to display over the object.

[Width] Box

Speciﬁes the object width in pixels.

[Height] Box

Speciﬁes the object height in pixels.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

172

[Style]

Sets the object style. Select [Plain], [Raised], or [Sunken] from the list.

[Label Font] Button

Sets the font for the label. Clicking here displays the “Select Font” dialog box.

For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see page 202.

[Label Color] Button

This sets the color of the label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.

[Port Label Color] Button

Sets the color of the I/O port label. Click to display the Select Color dialog box.

[Back Color] Button

Sets the object color. Click to display the Select Color dialog box.

Launch Application

The radio buttons determines whether an application or ﬁle will be linked to an external device.

• [Application] Box

The linked application will be displayed. Click the [Browse] button to locate and select an

application. Speciﬁes the path to an application to be launched when an External Device

object is double-clicked.

• [File] Box

The linked ﬁle will be displayed. Click the [Browse] button to locate and select a ﬁle. Speciﬁes

the path to a ﬁle to be launched when an External Device object is double-clicked.

Port

Speciﬁes the number of ports displayed for an External Device object.

• [Left]

Sets the number of ports to be displayed on the left.

• [Right]

Sets the number of ports to be displayed to the right.

• [Edit Port Label] Button

Sets the label and type for each port. Click to display the [Edit Port Label] dialog.

[OK] Button

Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box.

[Cancel] Button

Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.

NOTE

For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

173

■ External Device Properties (AD824, AD8HR “Serial Controlled Device

Properties” Dialog Box)

To display the “Serial Controlled Device Properties” dialog box, select AD824 or AD8HR, then click

the [Properties] command on the [Edit] menu.

This dialog box is the same as the “External Device Properties” dialog box, except for [Remote].

Remote

Select the DME you will control remotely from AD824 and AD8HR.

• [DME Unit]

The DMEs in the current conﬁguration will be displayed in a list. Select the DME you will

control remotely.

• [ID]

Selects an ID from 1 to 8. The default is 1.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

174

Component

Components are arranged in the Conﬁguration window and the User Module window. They include

audio processors like mixers and compressors, and control parts like switches and sliders. They can

be added by plug-in functions. Component objects arranged in a conﬁguration are displayed in block

form.

To open the component editor for an arranged component, ﬁrst select it by clicking on it, then double-

click on it. If you right-click on the object, a context menu will be displayed.

■ Component Object Context Menu

[Open Component Editor]

Opens the component editor.

[Cut]

Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard.

[Copy]

Copies the selected object to the clipboard.

[Paste]

Pastes the object that is on the clipboard.

[Delete]

Deletes the object you clicked on.

[Duplicate]

Duplicates the object you clicked on.

[Display Order]

Changes the display order of the objects, according to a command in the submenu.

[Recall Component Library]

Recalls libraries with component parameters saved in them. Clicking here displays the submenu.

When a library is selected from the submenu, the library is read and the component parameters are

changed.

For more information about libraries, see “Library” (page 275).

[Store Component Library]

Saves the component parameters. Click to display the Store dialog. If you then save without

changing the folder, the parameters will be added to the library.

Refer to “Library” on page 275 for more information.

[Properties]

Displays the “Component Properties” dialog box.

Label

Input Port

Output Port

Amount of DSP memory used

in the DME

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

175

■ Component Properties

Here you can set properties for each component. If multiple examples of the same component type

are arranged on a single sheet, changing the properties of a single component does not change

the others.

To display the “Component Properties” dialog box, select a component object, then click the

[Properties] command on the [Edit] menu.

[Label] Box

You can enter up to 100 English characters to display over the object.

[Width] Box

Speciﬁes the width of the object in pixels.

[Height] Box

Speciﬁes the height of the object in pixels.

[Style]

Sets the style of the object. From the list, select [Plain], [Raised], or [Sunken].

[Label Font] Button

Sets the font for the label. Clicking here displays the “Select Font” dialog box.

For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see page 202.

NOTE

Libraries can be recalled only by users for whom [Control Component Editor] in security is turned ON. The command is

grayed out for users for whom [Control Component Editor] is turned OFF.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

176

[Label Color] Button

This sets the color of the label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.

[Inputs/Outputs Label Color] Button

Sets the color for the I/O port label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.

[Color] Button

Sets the color of the object. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.

[OK] Button

Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box.

[Cancel] Button

Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.

NOTE

For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

177

SPX Component

SPX components are arranged in the Conﬁguration window and the User Module window. Component

objects arranged in a conﬁguration are displayed in block form.

Clicking on a positioned SPX component will select it, and right-clicking will display a contextual

menu.

Unlike normal components, SPX components use SPX-speciﬁc resources and therefore the usage

percentage display that appears to the lower right of normal components will not appear. Check the

SPX resource usage percentage via the SPX meter in the Resource Meter window.

■ Context Menu for SPX Component Objects

[Cut]

Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard.

[Copy]

Copies the selected object to the clipboard.

[Paste]

Pastes the object that is on the clipboard.

[Delete]

Deletes the object you clicked on.

[Duplicate]

Duplicates the object you clicked on.

[Display Order]

Changes the display order of the objects, according to a command in the submenu.

[Properties]

Displays the “SPX Component Properties” dialog box.

[Recall Component Library]

Recalls libraries with component parameters saved in them. Clicking here displays the submenu.

When a library is selected from the submenu, the library is read and the component parameters are

changed.

For more information about libraries, see “Library” (page 275).

When you will change the effect type for the SPX component, select the desired type from the

[Effect Type] displayed in the submenu.

NOTE

Libraries can be recalled only by users for whom [Control Component Editor] in security is turned ON. The command is

grayed out for users for whom [Control Component Editor] is turned OFF.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

178

■ SPX Component Properties

SPX component properties are set for each component. If multiple examples of the same

component type are arranged on a single sheet, changing the properties of a single component

does not change the others.

To display the “SPX Component Properties” dialog box, select a component object, then click the

[Properties] command on the [Edit] menu.

[Label] Box

You can enter up to 100 characters to display over the object.

[Width] Box

Speciﬁes the width of the object in pixels.

[Height] Box

Speciﬁes the height of the object in pixels.

[Style]

Sets the style of the object. From the list, select [Plain], [Raised], or [Sunken].

[Label Font] button

Sets the font for the label. Clicking here displays the “Select Font” dialog box.

For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see “Select Font” dialog box (page 202).

[Label Color] Button

Sets the color for the label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.

[Inputs/Outputs Label Color] Button

Sets the color for the I/O port label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.

[Color] Button

Sets the color of the object. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.

[OK] Button

Updates the settings and closes the dialog box.

[Cancel] Button

Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.

NOTE

For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see “'Select Color' Dialog Box” (page 203).

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

179

Slot Component

If an inserted I/O card is selected in the DME properties settings, it will be displayed in the

Conﬁguration window as a Slot component.

Slot component objects arranged in a conﬁguration are displayed in block form.

If you select an arranged component by clicking on it, then double-click it, the Slot Out component

editor opens. If you right click on the object, a context menu will be displayed.

■ Slot Component Object Context Menu

[Open MY-Card Editor]

Opens the editor for an MY-Card inserted in a slot.

[Open Slot Out Component Editor]

Opens the Slot Out component editor.

[Cut]/[Copy]/[Paste]/[Delete]/[Duplicate]

The functions cannot be used with Slot components.

[Display Order]

Changes the display order of the objects, according to a command in the submenu.

[Properties]

Displays the “Slot Out Component Properties” dialog box.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

180

■ Slot Out Component Properties

To display the “Slo tOut Component Properties” dialog box, select a Slot Out component object,

then click the [Properties] command on the [Edit] menu.

[Label] Box

You can enter up to 100 characters to display over the object.

[Width] Box

Speciﬁes the width of the object in pixels.

[Height] Box

Speciﬁes the height of the object in pixels.

[Style]

Sets the style of the object. From the list, select [Plain], [Raised], or [Sunken].

[Label Font] button

Sets the font for the label. Clicking here displays the “Select Font” dialog box.

For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see “'Select Font' Dialog Box” (page 202).

[Label Color] Button

This sets the color of the label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.

[Inputs/Outputs Label Color] Button

Sets the color for the I/O port label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.

[Color] Button

Sets the color of the object. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.

[OK] Button

Updates the settings and closes the dialog box.

[Cancel] Button

Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.

NOTE

For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see “'Select Color' Dialog Box” (page 203).

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

181

User Module

A user module combines a number of other components into a module that is treated as a single

component. It can be arranged in the Conﬁguration window. A user object arranged in a window is

displayed as a single block. The User Module Design Window or User Module Window will open,

according to the “User Module Manager” setting when you double click the user module (page 250).

If you right-click on the object, a context menu will be displayed.

■ User Module Object Context Menu

[Open User Module Design Window]

Opens the User Module Design Window.

[Open User Module Editor]

Opens the User Module Editor.

[Cut]

Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard.

[Copy]

Copies the selected object to the clipboard.

[Paste]

Pastes the object that is on the clipboard.

[Delete]

Deletes the object you clicked on.

[Duplicate]

Duplicates the object you clicked on.

[Display Order]

Changes the display order of the objects, according to a command in the submenu.

[Recall Component Library]

Recalls a library into which component parameters have been saved. Click to display a sub-menu.

Select a library from the sub-menu to load the parameters into the component.

Refer to “Library” on page 275 for more information.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

182

[Store Component Library]

Saves the component parameters. Click to display the Store dialog. If you then save without

changing the folder, the parameters will be added to the library.

Refer to “Library” on page 275 for more information.

[Save User Module]

Saves the selected user module. See “Saving User Modules” on page 255.

[Properties]

Displays the “User Module Properties” dialog box.

The submenu displays library ﬁles saved in the “Library” folder for user modules.

• [Open File Dialog]

Displays the ﬁle select dialog box. You can recall libraries saved in folders other than the user

module “Library” folder.

■ User Module Properties

To display the “User Module Properties” dialog box, select a user module object, then click the

[Properties] command on the [Edit] menu.

NOTE

Libraries can be recalled only by users for whom [Control Component Editor] in security is turned ON. The command is

grayed out for users for whom [Control Component Editor] is turned OFF.

NOTE

The “User Module Properties” dialog box is also displayed when a [Blank User Module] is arranged in the conﬁguration

window.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

183

[Label] Box

You can enter up to 100 English characters to display over the object.

[Width] Box

Speciﬁes the width of the object in pixels.

[Height] Box

Speciﬁes the height of the object in pixels.

[Style]

Sets the style of the object. From the list, select [Plain], [Raised], [Sunken], or [Image]. When

[Image] is selected the Open dialog will appear. Select an image ﬁle and click [Open] to place the

selected image as an object.

[Label Font] Button

Sets the font for the label. Clicking here displays the “Select Font” dialog box.

For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see page 202.

[Label Color] Button

This sets the color of the label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.

[Inputs/Outputs Labels Color] Button

Sets the color for the I/O port label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.

[Color] Button

Sets the color of the object. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.

Inputs/Outputs Sets

Sets the number of input/output ports. Enter a number into the [Inputs] box and [Outputs] box, or

set a value using the [▲] and [▼] buttons at the right of each box. The maximum of both input and

output ports is 64.

Edit I/O Port Label

Input and output port names up to 100 characters in length can be entered.

Double-Click Action

Sets the action that occurs when you double-click on a user module object arranged in the

Conﬁguration window.

• [Open User Module Design Window]

Opens the User Module window.

• [Open User Module Editor]

Opens the User Module editor.

NOTE

For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

184

Security Settings

Tur ns user module security ON or OFF, and sets a password.

• [Enable Security]

Enables user module security. If you turn this function ON when no password is currently set,

the “Set Password” dialog box appears. Enter a password, then click the [OK] button.

If you change the setting from OFF to ON, the “Input Password” dialog box appears. You

cannot turn Security OFF until you enter the correct password.

• [Set Password] Button

Changes the password for user modules. Clicking this button displays the “Input Password”

dialog box. Enter the current password and click the [OK] button. The “Set Password” dialog

box will be displayed, and you can set a new password.

This button will be grayed out when [Enable Security] is turned OFF.

[OK] Button

Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box.

[Cancel] Button

Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.

NOTE

When security is active the editor cannot be opened unless the appropriate password is entered. Once the

password has been entered security is temporarily disabled until the DME Designer is quit, or a different ﬁle is

opened.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

185

Picture

An image can be arranged as an object on a sheet. This speciﬁes a ﬁle for this purpose. You can use

image ﬁles in the following formats: BMP (.bmp), PNG (.png), XBM (.xbm), XPM (.xpm), and JPEG

(.jpg).

Before placing a picture object, prepare an image ﬁle. Copy the image ﬁle to the folder speciﬁed in the

“Preferences” dialog box → [Application] tab → [ContentsFolder] in the Main Panel window.

In the project ﬁle, the location and name of the image ﬁle are registered in an relative path below the

[ContentsFolder] and the linked image ﬁle is read and displayed. If the image ﬁle is moved, renamed,

or the [ContentsFolder] is changed, the image cannot be displayed.

■ Placing Pictures

There are three picture placement methods:

•You can drop the [Picture] item from the Toolkit window into each design window.

•You can double-click [Picture] on the Toolkit window.

•You can click [Picture] in the [Area Parts]/[Device List]/[Component List] on the [Tools] menu,

then click each design window.

When you place a picture object, the “Open” dialog box is displayed. Select the image ﬁle and

click the [Open] button. The picture will be placed in the design window.

NOTE

The default for the “Preferences” dialog box → [Application] tab → [ContentsFolder] in the Main Panel window is

“C:\Program Files\YAMAHA\OPT Tools\DME Designer.” The [Designer] folder is located in the [DME Designer] folder. Within

that folder, there is an [Images] folder prepared for saving image ﬁles.

NOTE

Background images for sheets are speciﬁed in the “Sheet” dialog box. Pictures are arranged as objects on the sheets.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

186

■ Picture Object

When you click a picture object that is located in each design window, handles (small squares)

appear at the corners and sides of the object. You can expand or reduce the picture’s size by

dragging a handle.

If you double-click on the object, the “Open” dialog opens. There you can change the image ﬁle.

If you right-click on a picture object, a context menu will be displayed.

■ Picture Module Object Context Menu

[Cut]

Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard.

[Copy]

Copies the selected object to the clipboard.

[Paste]

Pastes the object that is on the clipboard.

[Delete]

Deletes the object you clicked on.

[Duplicate]

Duplicates the object you clicked on.

[Display Order]

Changes the display order of the objects, according to a command in the submenu.

[Properties]

Displays the “Picture Properties” dialog box.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

187

■ Picture Object Properties

To display the “Picture Properties” dialog box, select a picture object, then click the [Properties]

command on the [Edit] menu.

[Label] Box

You can enter up to 100 English characters to display over the object.

If the box is left blank, the label will disappear.

[Draw Picture Border]

Displays a border around picture objects.

[Label Font] Button

Sets the font for the label. Clicking here displays the “Select Font” dialog box.

For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see page 202.

[Label Color] Button

This sets the color of the label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.

For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203.

[Port Label Color] Button

Sets the color of the I/O port label. Click to display the Select Color dialog box.

[File Name] Box

Displays the path to the graphic ﬁle.

[Browse] Button

Selects a graphic ﬁle.

[Link Component Editor]

When On a Picture object can be double clicked to open the component editor speciﬁed by the

[Select Component] button.

[Select Component] Button

Speciﬁes the component editor to be opened when a Picture object is double clicked. Only

effective when [Link Component editor] is On.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

188

Port

Speciﬁes the number of ports to be displayed for a picture object.

• [Left]

Sets the number of ports to be displayed on the left.

• [Right]

Sets the number of ports to be displayed to the right.

• [Edit Port Label] Button

Sets the label and type for each port. Click to display the [Edit Port Label] dialog.

[OK] Button

Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box.

[Cancel] Button

Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

189

Text Box

Text objects can be arranged in all design windows. Text is entered into the “Text Properties” dialog

box. When ﬁrst placed in the design window, the word “Text” is entered into the box.

If you click the text object, handles (small squares) appear at the corners and sides of the object. You

can adjust the size by dragging the handles. You can open the “Text Properties” dialog box by double-

clicking the box. If you right-click on the object, a context menu will be displayed.

■ Text Object Context Menu

[Cut]

Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard.

[Copy]

Copies the selected object to the clipboard.

[Paste]

Pastes the object that is on the clipboard.

[Delete]

Deletes the object you clicked on.

[Duplicate]

Duplicates the object you clicked on.

[Display Order]

Changes the display order of the objects, according to a command in the submenu.

[Properties]

Displays the “Text Properties” dialog box.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

190

■ Text Object Properties

To display the “Text Properties” dialog box, double-click on a text object, or select a text object,

then click the [Properties] command on the [Edit] menu.

[Text] Box

You can enter up to 10,000 English characters to display in the text object box.

[Text Font] Button

Sets the font. Clicking here displays the “Select Font” dialog box.

For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see page 202.

[Text Color] Button

Sets the color of the text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.

[Background Color] Button

Sets the color of the background. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.

[Draw Text Border]

Displays a frame around the text object. If this is not checked, only the text will be displayed on the

sheet.

[Text Border Style] Box

Sets the style of the object. From the list, select [Plain], [Raised], or [Sunken].

[Link Component Editor]

When On a Text object can be double clicked to open the component editor speciﬁed by the

[Select Component] button.

[Select Component] Button

Speciﬁes the component editor to be opened when a Text object is double clicked. Only effective

when [Link Component editor] is On.

[OK] Button

Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box.

[Cancel] Button

Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.

NOTE

For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

191

Box (Rectangle)

You can arrange rectangles on the sheet.

If you click the box, handles (small squares) appear at the corners and sides of the object. You can

adjust the size by dragging the handles. You can open the “Box Properties” dialog box by double-

clicking the box. If you right-click on the object, a context menu will be displayed.

■ Box Object Context Menu

[Cut]

Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard.

[Copy]

Copies the selected object to the clipboard.

[Paste]

Pastes the object that is on the clipboard.

[Delete]

Deletes the object you clicked on.

[Duplicate]

Duplicates the object you clicked on.

[Display Order]

Changes the display order of the objects, according to a command in the submenu.

[Properties]

Displays the “Box Properties” dialog box.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

192

■ Box Object Properties

To display the “Box Properties” dialog box, double-click on a box object or select a box object,

then click the [Properties] command on the [Edit] menu.

[Width] Box

Speciﬁes the width of the object in pixels. The default is 50 pixels.

[Height] Box

Speciﬁes the height of the object in pixels. The default is 50 pixels.

[Style]

Sets the style of the object. From the list, select [Plain], [Raised], or [Sunken].

[Round Corner]

Creates a rectangular box with rounded corners.

[Color] Button

Sets the color of the box. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.

For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203.

Line

Sets the line that frames the box.

•[Type]

Displays a list where you can select the type of line to frame the box. The following types are

available: [Solid], [Dash], [Dot], [DashDot], and [DashDotDot].

• [Size] Box

Sets the width of the line that frames the box. This setting can range from 1 to 100 pixels.

• [Color] Button

Sets the color of the line that frames the box. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog

box.

For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203.

[OK] Button

Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box.

[Cancel] Button

Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

193

Ellipse

[Ellipse] in the Toolkit window places a elliptical shape on the sheet.

When you click an Ellipse object that is located in the sheet, handles (small squares) appear at the

corners and sides of the object. You can adjust the size by dragging the handles. You can open the

“Ellipse Properties” dialog box by double-clicking the ellipse. If you right-click on the object, a context

menu will be displayed.

■ Ellipse Object Context Menu

[Cut]

Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard.

[Copy]

Copies the selected object to the clipboard.

[Paste]

Pastes the object that is on the clipboard.

[Delete]

Deletes the object you clicked on.

[Duplicate]

Duplicates the object you clicked on.

[Display Order]

Changes the display order of the objects, according to a command in the submenu.

[Properties]

Displays the “Ellipse Properties” dialog box.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

194

■ Ellipse Object Properties

To display the “Ellipse Properties” dialog box, double-click on an ellipse object, or select an ellipse

object, then click the [Properties] command on the [Edit] menu.

[Width] Box

Speciﬁes the width of the object in pixels. The default is 50 pixels.

[Height] Box

Speciﬁes the height of the object in pixels. The default is 50 pixels.

[Color] Button

Sets the color of the ellipse. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.

For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203.

Line

Sets the line that frames the ellipse.

•[Type]

Displays a list where you can select the type of line to frame the ellipse. The following types

are available: [Solid], [Dash], [Dot], [DashDot], and [DashDotDot].

• [Size] Box

Sets the width of the line that frames the ellipse. This setting can range from 1 to 100 pixels.

• [Color] Button

Sets the color of the line that frames the ellipse. Clicking here displays the “Select Color”

dialog box.

For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203.

[OK] Button

Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box.

[Cancel] Button

Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

195

Wire

Draws lines (wires) for connecting components and creating shapes. For instructions on drawing

wires, see “Drawing and Editing Wires” on page 219.

First click on an wire object arranged on the sheet to select it, then double-click the object. This opens

a “Wire Properties” window.

If you right-click on a wire object, one of three types of context menus will be displayed, depending

where you clicked.

■ Wire Object Context Menu (Line Segment)

[Start Wire]

Begins drawing a line segment from the location where you clicked.

[Delete Wire]

Deletes the entire wire.

[Cut]

Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard.

[Copy]

Copies the selected object to the clipboard.

[Paste]

Pastes the object that is on the clipboard.

[Delete]

Deletes the line segment where you right-clicked.

[Duplicate]

Duplicates the wire object.

Line SegmentNode

Ter mination

Line Segment Context Menu

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

196

[Wire Color]

Speciﬁes the wire color.

[Properties]

Displays the “Wire Properties” dialog box.

■ Wire Object Context Menu (Node)

[Start Wire]

Begins drawing a wire segment from the location where you right-clicked.

[Delete Wire]

Deletes the entire wire.

[Delete]

Deletes the node. The nodes before and after will become directly connected.

[Properties]

Displays the “Wire Properties” dialog box.

■ Wire Object Context Menu (Termination)

[Continue Wire]

Begins drawing wire from a termination node.

[Start Wire]

Begins drawing a wire from the location where you right-clicked.

[Delete Wire]

Deletes the entire wire.

[Properties]

Displays the “Wire Properties” dialog box.

Node Context Menu

Ter mination Context Menu

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

197

■ Wire Object Properties

To display the “Wire Properties” dialog box, double-click on a wire object. You can also select a

wire object, then click the [Properties] command on the [Edit] menu.

[Line Width] Box

Set the line width. This setting can range from 1 to 10 pixels.

[Line Type]

Displays a list where you can select the type of line. The following types are available: [Solid],

[Dash], [Dot], [DashDot], and [DashDotDot].

[Line Color] Button

Sets the color of the line. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.

[Selected Color] Button

Sets the color of the selected line. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.

[OK] Button

Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box.

[Cancel] Button

Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.

NOTE

For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

198

Legend (Descriptive Fields)

Displays a legend for all sheets except the User Module window.

When you click the [Edit Legend] command on the [Edit] menu or double-click on one of the Legend

ﬁelds displayed on the sheet, the “Edit Legend” dialog box is displayed. If you right-click on the

Legend, the displayed context menu will have the [Edit Legend] command only. If you click there it will

display the “Edit Legend” dialog box.

The “Edit Legend” dialog box is used to enable/disable Legend display and to set the contents

displayed there. You can display the [Edit Legend] command from the [Edit] menu.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

199

■ “Edit Legend” Dialog Box

[Project] Box, [Title] Box, [No.] Box, [Author] Box, [Company] Box, [Address1] Box, and

[Address2] Box

Used to enter the Project, Title, Number, Author, Company, Address1, and Address2. You can enter

up to 100 English characters for each ﬁeld.

[Date] Box and [Revisions] Box

You can enter up to ﬁve dates and ﬁve revisions. You can enter up to 100 English characters for

each ﬁeld.

[Legend Base Font Style]

Displays a list where you can select the font.

[Show Legend]

Place a checkmark here to display the legend on the sheet.

[Save as Default Legend]

Saves this legend as the default legend used when a new sheet is created. When a new

conﬁguration is created, it will have a legend with the same contents as this one.

[Change for All Legends In Area]

Place a checkmark here to have the changes made here reﬂected in sheets in all design windows

included in the area.

[OK] Button

Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box.

[Cancel] Button

Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

200

Sheet

There is one sheet in each design window for arranging objects. The size of the sheet and its

background image are speciﬁed with the “Sheet” dialog box. This dialog box is displayed using the

[Sheet] command from the [Tools] menu.

Make the window where you are going to change sheet settings active, then click [Tools] menu →

[Sheet].

■ “Sheet” Dialog Box

[Preset Size]

Displays a list where you can select preset paper sizes.

When you select a paper size, numerical values are set for [Horizontal] and [Vertical].

[Custom Sizes]

Set a custom size by specifying the vertical and horizontal sizes of the sheet.

• [Horizontal] Box

Sets the horizontal width of the sheet.

•[Vertical] Box

Sets the vertical height of the sheet.

• [Fixed Aspect Ratio]

When this is checked the relationship between horizontal and vertical is ﬁxed. When the value

for [Horizontal] or [Vertical] changed, the size of the other direction changes so that the

proportions of the paper remain the same.

• [Save As Default Sheet Size]

When turned ON, the current values will become the default for creating sheets. New sheets

will be created at the same size.

NOTE

The upper left is the starting point for measuring sheet size. Therefore, in the [Horizontal] box set the number of

pixels to the right edge, and in the [Vertical] box, set the number of pixels to the lower edge. The boundaries in

which items are already arranged on the sheet will form the minimum sheet size.

Because any objects that are moved, cut, or deleted will return to the same location if the [Undo] command is

used, the minimum sheet size will be determined by the boundaries in which any objects were located, now or in

the past.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

201

Background Effect

Sets the background for the sheet.

• [Color] Button

Sets the color of the background. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.

For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203.

• [Image] Button

Displays an image as the sheet background. You can use image ﬁles in the following formats:

BMP (.bmp), PNG (.png), XPM (.xpm), and JPEG (.jpg). Clicking here displays the “Select

Image” dialog box.

For information about the “Select Image” dialog box, see page 205.

• [Change for All Sheets]

Changes all sheets so that they are the same.

[OK] Button

Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box.

[Cancel] Button

Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

202

“Select Font” Dialog Box

When you click the [Font] or [Label Font] button in an object’s properties dialog box, the “Select Font”

dialog box is displayed. Sets the font.

■ Font

Selects the font. The currently selected font name is displayed in this box. Select a font by clicking

its name on the list.

■ Font Style

Sets the style of the text. The currently selected style is displayed in the box. Select a style by

clicking its name on the list below.

• Normal ..........Standard style

• Italic ..............Italic or slanted text

• Bold ..............Bold text

• Bold Italic......Bold italic text

■ Size

Sets the text size. The currently selected size is displayed in the box. Select a size by clicking it in

the list below.

■ Effects

Sets effects for the text. Check the effects you wish to set.

• Strikeout........Adds a strikeout line through the center of the text.

• Underline ......Adds an underline to the text.

■ Script

From the list, select the script (language) for the text. There is no need to change the language

setting unless you want to specify a speciﬁc language.

■ Sample

Displays an example of the current settings.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

203

“Select Color” Dialog Box

When you click the [Color] or [Label Color] button in an object’s properties dialog box, the “Select

color” dialog box is displayed. Sets the color of objects and text.

■ Setting Basic Colors

There are 48 basic colors provided in the [Basic colors] section. When you select a basic color by

clicking on it, the position of that color in the color palette to the right is indicated by a cross (+).

Information about the selected color is displayed below the color palette.

Click the [OK] button to set the color you selected.

■ Setting Colors That Are Not in the [Basic colors] Section.

You can select any color in the color palette displayed at the upper-right of the dialog box by

clicking on it in the palette. Color information is displayed below the color palette. If you like the

color you selected, click the [OK] button. If you don’t like the color, you can select a new color by

clicking in another location in the color palette, or by dragging the cross symbol to another location

there.

Grey colors can be selected on the tall, thin chart to the right of the palette.

Click the [OK] button to set the color you selected.

■ Saving Colors You Have Created

In the custom color section, you can save up to 16 colors you have created. When you save a

custom color, it can be selected by clicking on its color button, in the same way as for the [Basic

colors].

Even if you open the “Select color” dialog box from the Properties of another object, any custom

color you save will be displayed and you can use that same color for the other object.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

204

1 Click the [Custom colors] box where you will save the color you create.

The box you clicked will be selected and a frame will appear around it.

2 Set the color on the color palette.

3 Click the [Add to Custom Colors] button.

The selected color will be added to [Custom colors].

NOTE

You can save another color in a box that already has an original color saved in it. Just click on the box to select it.

The new color will overwrite the previous color, which will be lost.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

205

“Select Image” Dialog Box

You can display an image for the background of sheets or objects. You can use image ﬁles in the

following formats: BMP (.bmp), PNG (.png), XPM (.xpm), and JPEG (.jpg).

In the project ﬁle, the location and name of the image ﬁle are registered in an relative path below the

[ContentsFolder] and the linked image ﬁle is read and displayed. If the image ﬁle is moved, renamed,

or the [ContentsFolder] is changed, the image cannot be displayed.

If you click the [Image] button in the properties dialog box for an object that can display a background

image or in the “Sheet” dialog box, the “Select Image” dialog box will be displayed. Specify an image

ﬁle and set its display method.

Image Layout

Selects the manner in which the image ﬁle will be displayed.

• [Center]

Centers the image in the object or sheet.

• [Tile]

Displays multiple copies of the image side-by-side until the available space is ﬁlled. If the

image ﬁle is smaller than the sheet, it will be displayed repeatedly like tiles on a wall.

• [Fit]

Expands or reduces the size of the image to match the size of the sheet where it will be

displayed.

[File] Box

Speciﬁes a path for the image ﬁle. A path can be directly entered in the box. You can also click the

[Browse] button and select the image ﬁle. It will be entered automatically.

To stop display of an image, delete all characters in the box, leaving the ﬁeld blank.

NOTE

The default for the “Preferences” dialog box → [Application] tab → [ContentsFolder] in the Main Panel window is

“C:\Program Files\YAMAHA\OPT Tools\DME Designer.” The [Designer] folder is located in the [DME Designer] folder. Within

that folder, there is an [Images] folder prepared for saving image ﬁles.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

206

[Browse] Button

Speciﬁes a path for the image ﬁle. Clicking here displays the “Open” dialog box. Select a ﬁle with

one of the following extensions: “.bmp,” “.png,” “.xpm,” or “.jpg,” then click the [Open] button.

[OK] Button

Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box.

[Cancel] Button

Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

207

Design Window Shared Settings and Operations

Preferences

You can set the operating environment for the Designer window in the “Preferences” dialog box. This

dialog box is opened using the [Preferences] command in the Designer window [Print] menu.

■ Graphics

Ports & Wires

Speciﬁes wire color, thickness, and type for each port type.

• [Color]

Sets the default color for the port and wire.

• [Width]

Sets the default wire width from a range of 1 to 5.

•[Type]

Sets the port type.

NOTE

The initial color and thickness of the wires produced when drawing connections are speciﬁed here. The color and

thickness of drawn wires can be changed via the Wire Properties dialog box.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

208

Crosshairs

• [Show Crosshairs While Dragging]

Place a checkmark here to have crosshairs displayed for guidance when dragging the wire

endpoint.

• [Arbitrary Crosshair Length]

Speciﬁes the length of the crosshair lines.

Enter a number into the [Arbitrary Crosshair Length] box to specify the length in pixels.

[Inﬁnite Crosshairs] causes the lines to go all the way to the edge of the window.

Offset Paste/Duplicate from Original By

Sets the position when pasting or duplicating objects.

•[Auto-size (based on original object)]

If you place a checkmark here, the paste/duplicate position will be automatically adjusted so

that the object does not overlap the original object.

• [Horizontal Pixels] Box

Sets the horizontal distance.

•[Vertical Pixels] Box

Sets the vertical distance.

Auto Sufﬁx Number

Tur ns automatic appending of sequentially-numbered sufﬁxes to the names of placed objects on or

off.

• [DME/ICP1]

When ON numbered sufﬁxes will automatically be appended to added DME, and ICP objects.

• [Component]

When ON numbered sufﬁxes will automatically be appended to added SPX and user module

objects.

• [Other Objects]

When ON numbered sufﬁxes will automatically be appended to added objects not covered by

the above two categories.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

209

Compile Priority

Here you can make compile settings for the conﬁguration.

• [Resource]

Compiles arrangable components in order based on their component numbers. The Delay

values differ depending on the signal lines.

• [Fixed Delay]

Fixes the Delay value (number of Samples) for the signal lines. However, it also reduces the

number of components that can be arranged.

•[Auto Delay Compensation]

This turns ON or OFF a function that automatically corrects the component delay when [Fixed

Delay] is selected.

[OK] Button

Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box.

[Cancel] Button

Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.

NOTE

These compile settings are reﬂected in online status. If you change the settings in ofﬂine status, it will be enabled when

going online after going ofﬂine once.

NOTE

Auto Delay Compensation will not function properly in conﬁgurations that have a loop connection.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

210

Grid

Displays a grid on the sheet in each design window to guide the placement of objects. You can also

have the objects “snap to” (automatically align with) the grid when dragging them. When you click the

[Grid] command on the [Tools] menu, the “Grid” dialog box is displayed. Here you can enable or

disable display of the grid and set the grid interval and form.

[Snap to Grid]

Makes objects align the grid when dragging them.

Spacing

This sets the spacing of the grid. This setting can range from 2 to 99 pixels.

• [X:] Box

This sets the spacing of the grid in the horizontal direction.

•[Y:] Box

This sets the spacing of the grid in the vertical direction.

[Show Grid]

Displays the grid. Place a checkmark here to enable display and select the type of grid.

• [Line]

Displays the grid using lines.

• [Dot]

Displays the grid using dots.

[Save As Default Setting]

Place a checkmark here to make the current grid settings the default when a new sheet is created.

[OK] Button

Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box.

[Cancel] Button

Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

211

Exporting Each Design Window

Conﬁgurations are saved in project ﬁles. This is done using the [File] menu → [Save] and [Save As]

commands in the Main Panel window. For information about saving project ﬁles see “Project Files” on

page 22.

Instead of saving projects in their entirety, you can output the information contained in the active

window using the Designer Window [Print] → [Export DXF] command and save it in a DXF format ﬁle.

These ﬁles have “.dxf” as their ﬁlename extension.

Because the DXF format uses the standard CAD ﬁle format, it can be opened using CAD software.

DXF format ﬁles can also be opened by graphics software that support vector graphics, such as

Adobe Illustrator

When you select this command, the “Export DXF” dialog box will be displayed.

• Symbols are substituted for external devices in the following three types of folders.

Microphone → mike symbol

Power Amp → amp symbol

Speaker → speaker symbol

•Text decoration except for size will be eliminated.

• Picture objects and background images for the sheet or objects will all be eliminated.

• [Style] attributes for boxes will be eliminated.

When you select the [Print] menu → [Export DXF] command, the “Export DXF” dialog box will be

displayed.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

212

■ DXF File Name

Enter a ﬁlename for the DXF ﬁle. The default ﬁle name entered here will vary according to the

currently active window.

If you click the [...] button at the right of the box, the “DXF File Name” dialog box is displayed.

Specify the DXF ﬁle ﬁlename and the folder where the ﬁle will be saved.

Enter the ﬁlename, specify the folder where the ﬁle will be saved, then click the [Save] button.

When you return to the “Export DXF” dialog box, the speciﬁed ﬁlename will be displayed in the

[DXF File Name] box.

■ Scale

Sets the reduction ratio. When the size of the sheet is large, you can reduce it before exporting it.

■ Text Style

Speciﬁes the text font for output in DXF format. The default is the “TXT” (drawing font used in CAD).

■ Block

Sets the block form used in the sheet. Displays a list where you can select the form.

[Block]

Makes the blocks rectangular and groups the text in the port icons and port names.

[Explode]

Makes the blocks into sets of four lines, and does not group the text in the port icons and port

names.

NOTE

When you click on the [Save] button in the “DXF File Name” dialog box, the DXF ﬁle is not saved. Only when you click on

the [OK] button in the “Export DXF” dialog box, does the DXF ﬁle become saved.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

213

■ [Paper Size]

Sets the size of the paper.

[Preset Size]

Displays a list where you can select preset paper sizes. When you select a paper size, numerical

values are set for [Horizontal] and [Vertical].

[Custom Sizes]

Set a custom size by specifying the vertical and horizontal sizes of the sheet.

• [Horizontal] Box

Sets the horizontal width of the sheet.

•[Vertical] Box

Sets the vertical height of the sheet.

[Unit]

Selects the unit used for setting the sheet size.

[OK] Button

Saves the DXF ﬁle according to the settings in the dialog box.

[Cancel] Button

Cancels the DXF ﬁle export process.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

214

Printing Each Design Window

You can print out the content of each design window just as it appears on the screen. The content in

the window will be expanded or reduced in size as necessary to match the size and orientation of the

paper, and printed onto a single sheet of paper. Commands related to printing are found on the

Designer Window [Print] menu.

■ [Print Setup]

When you select this command, the “Print Setup” dialog box will be displayed. Sets the paper size

and orientation.

[Paper Size]

Displays a list where you can select the paper size.

Orientation

Sets the orientation of the paper.

•[Portrait]

Prints on the paper with its long sides vertical.

• [Landscape]

Prints on the paper with its long sides horizontal.

[OK] Button

Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box.

[Cancel] Button

Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

215

■ [Print Preview]

Displays a print preview of the active design window. You can check the appearance of the page

before printing it.

[Print]

Displays the “Print” dialog box.

[Close]

Closes the print preview window.

■ [Print]

Prints the active window. When you select this command, the “Print” dialog box will be displayed.

Enter the number of copies to print into the [Number of Copies] box, and click the [Print] button.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

216

Arranging Objects

Multiple object placement methods are available.

■ Dragging from the Toolkit Window

You can drag items from the Toolkit window to the location where you want to place them in each

design window.

■ Double-Clicking an Object in the Toolkit Window

You can double-click an object in the Toolkit window to place it in each design window.

■ Selecting from the [Tools] Menu

Available objects are displayed on the [Area Parts List]/[Device List]/[Component List] submenus

which are accessed from the [Tools] menu. When you click an object name, the mouse pointer

changes shape. Click the location on the sheet where you want to place the object.

■ Selecting from the Context Menu

If you right-click on the sheet, you will see the [Area Parts List]/[Device List]/[Component List]

commands displayed on the context menu that appears. When you click an object name on the

submenu, the mouse pointer changes shape. Click the location on the sheet where you want to

place the object.

Selecting Objects

■ Selecting with a Click

You can select an object by clicking on it. If you click another object or an empty location on the

sheet, it will cancel selection of the object you previously clicked.

■ Selecting with Click + <Ctrl> Key

When you want to select multiple objects, hold down the <Ctrl> key as you click each new object

you want to select. If you hold down the <Ctrl> key and click again on one of the objects that is part

of the multiple selection, it will cancel selection of that single object.

■ Selecting by Dragging

If you position the mouse in an empty location on the sheet and start dragging from there, a frame

will be displayed as the pointer moves.

Any objects within this frame will be selected.

■ Changing the Selected Object Using the <Tab> Key

When a single object is selected, you can change the selection to the next object by pressing the

<Tab> key. If you press <Shift> + <Tab>, the selection moves to the previous object. The selection

order moves from left to right.

NOTE

Wires cannot be selected with the <Tab> key.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

217

Editing Objects

Objects that have been arranged on the sheet can be edited using the [Cut], [Copy], [Paste],

[Duplicate], and similar commands in the [Edit] menu. These edit commands will also appear in the

context menu displayed when you right-click an object in the design window. Buttons for [Cut],

[Copy], and [Paste] are also available on the Designer window toolbar.

■ Undoing and Redoing Operations

You can undo operations using the [Undo] command on the [Edit] menu. You can use the [Redo]

command to redo operations that have been undone.

■ Deleting Objects

Objects can be deleted by selecting them and pressing the <Delete> key.

■ Moving Objects

You can move objects by dragging them with the mouse. If [Snap to Grid] is ON in the “Grid” dialog

box, the dragged objects will automatically align with the grid.

You can also move a selected object using the arrow keys. If [Snap to Grid] is ON in the “Grid”

dialog box, the selected object will move from grid line to grid line. If [Snap to Grid] is OFF, the

object will move pixel to pixel.

NOTE

Some objects cannot be edited.

NOTE

Some objects cannot be deleted. With some other objects, you must ﬁrst make appropriate settings in a dialog box

before you can delete them.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

218

Changing the Order

Objects newly placed on the sheet will be displayed above any previously placed objects they

overlap. You can change this behavior using the [Display Order] command on the [Edit] menu. Select

the object for which you want to change the display order, then select the appropriate command from

the [Display Order] submenu on the [Edit] menu.

[Top]

Moves the selected object to the top of the stack.

[Bottom]

Moves the selected object to the bottom of the stack.

[Front]

Moves the selected object up one level in the stack.

[Back]

Moves the selected object down one level in the stack.

Uppermost Object

BackBottom

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

219

Drawing and Editing Wires

Wire

Objects that are arranged on sheets in the Conﬁguration or User Module windows can be connected

to each other by wires. Not only does this let you logically connect signal sources (output side) and

destinations (input side), it also lets you draw connections and independent lines on the display. Each

wire has at least two wire nodes. Between the nodes are line segments.

■ Selecting Wires and Canceling Selection

You can select a line segment by clicking on it.

If you hold down the <Alt> key while clicking, you will select the entire wire.

NOTE

The color used when a wire object is selected can be set with [Selected Color] in the “Wire Properties” dialog box.

Line Segment

Wire Node

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

220

■ Line Segment

The line width default value is set from one to ﬁve pixels in the Designer window “Properties” dialog

box. In the “Wire Properties” dialog box, the line thickness and color can be adjusted as required

for the various wires arranged on the sheet.

Line Segment Selection

When you select a line segment by clicking on it, only that line segment is selected. If you hold

down the <Ctrl> key while clicking, you can select multiple line segments. Furthermore, if you drag

the mouse from an empty location on the sheet so that nodes are enclosed by a box, line segments

between those nodes will be selected.

Canceling Line Segment Selection

If you select another object or an empty location on the sheet, it will cancel selection of the object

you previously clicked.

You can also cancel selections by holding the <Ctrl> key while clicking.

<Ctrl> + Click

Canceling Selection of a Line Segment

Selected with <Ctrl> + Click

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

221

■ Wire Nodes

Both ends of a wire, the location where wires bend, and the location where wires diverge are called

“Nodes.” When a wire object is not selected, its nodes are not displayed. When a wire is selected,

the nodes are displayed with a red circle.

Node Selection

When you click on a node, only that node itself is selected. You can select multiple nodes by

holding down the <Ctrl> key while clicking. Furthermore, if you drag the mouse from an empty

location on the sheet so that nodes are enclosed by a box, the enclosed nodes will be selected.

Canceling Node Selection

If you select another object or an empty location on the sheet, it will cancel selection of the object

you previously clicked.

You can also cancel node selections by holding the <Ctrl> key while clicking. With this technique,

you can cancel only the node you clicked on when multiple nodes are selected.

<Ctrl> + Click

Canceling Selection of a Node Selected with

<Ctrl> + Click

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

222

Hotspot

The small white rectangles at the edge of objects are called “Hotspots.” Wires usually connect to

hotspots.

• Some hotspots do not have a connection to a logical signal within the hardware.

• Component and user module hotspots normally include logical connections.

• External device hotspots do not include logical connections.

■ Selecting Hotspots

If you click a hotspot, drawing will start. To select, press <Shift> + click.

You can select multiple hotspots as follows: Select a hotspot with <Shift> + click, then select

additional hotspots using <Ctrl> + <Shift> + click.

Hotspots

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

223

Drawing Settings

Several functions are available to help ensure accurate wire drawing.

■ Grid

To accurately draw in relation to the grid, turn ON [Snap to Grid] in the “Grid” dialog box.

■ Draw Exact Vertical and Horizontal Lines

If you turn ON [Prohibit Diagonal Connections] in the [Tools] menu, wires will be drawn only

vertically or horizontally. It will not be possible to draw diagonal wires. When you select this

command, it is turned ON, and a checkmark appears next to it. If you select the command while it

is ON, it will turn OFF.

Even if “Prohibit Diagonal Connections” is turned OFF, this function will operate whenever you

press the <Shift> key while drawing.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

224

Wire Drawing

Wire drawing starts at the positions shown in the following table:

■ Connecting Hotspots with Hotspots

Method 1 Clicking

Click the hotspot where the connection originates to begin drawing, then click the destination

hotspot. The two hotspots will be connected by a wire.

Method 2 Dragging

Drag from the origin hotspot to the destination hotspot.

■ Connect with Bent Line

Method 1 From Hotspot to Hotspot

Click the hotspot where the connection originates to begin drawing, then click the location (which

will become a node) where you want the line to bend. Finally, click the destination hotspot to

complete the connection.

Drawing Start Location Start Method

Hotspot Click

Wire End Terminal Right-click → click [Continue Wire] on the menu

Node Right-click → click [Start Wire] on the menu

Line Segment Right-click → click [Start Wire] on the menu

Anywhere on the Sheet Right-click → click [Start Wire] on the menu

NOTE

When creating diagrams the keyboard cursor keys can be used to move the mouse cursor, and the <Enter. Key can be used

to create nodes.

NOTE

A termination cannot be connected to a terminal that will be shorted. Multiple connections cannot be made to a DME

object's Cascade port.

NOTE

When creating diagrams horizontally aligned hot spots can be automatically connected by pressing the <Shift> + <→>

keys or <Shift> + <←> keys.

NOTE

A termination cannot be connected to a terminal that will be shorted. Multiple connections cannot be made to a DME

object's Cascade port.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

225

Method 2 From Hotspot to Node or Line Segment

Click the hotspot where the connection originates to begin drawing, then click the location (node)

where you want the line to bend. Click an already drawn wire node or line segment to complete the

connection. If you connect to a line segment, a node will be created there.

■ Connect Multiple Hotspots in a Single Operation

Method 1 <Ctrl> Key Combinations

If you hold down the <Ctrl> key when ﬁnishing dragging, a wire will be drawn at all origin hotspots.

The wire will be connected to the destination hotspot you dragged and those that come after.

Begin dragging from the connection origin hotspot, then press the <Ctrl> key after aligning the

mouse pointer with the hotspot you will connect too. A wire will be displayed below the destination

hotspot. Finish dragging while holding the <Ctrl> key down.

Method 2 Connect Multiple Selected Hotspots

Select multiple hotspots using <Shift> + click and <Ctrl> + click, then drag from one of the

selected hotspots to the destination hotspot. The selected multiple origin hotspots will all be

connected.

NOTE

A termination cannot be connected to a terminal that will be shorted. Multiple connections cannot be made to a DME

object's Cascade port.

Press <Ctrl> Key

Multiple Hotspots Selected

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

226

Method 3 Using Shortcuts

Press the [F2] key to select the uppermost open hot spot to the right of the selected object and

begin drawing a wire.

Press <Shift> + [F2] to select the uppermost open hot spot to the left of the selected object and

begin drawing a wire.

Press the [F4] key to connect the uppermost open hot spot to the right of the selected object and

the uppermost open hot spot to the left of the object on the right.

Press <Shift> + [F4] to connect the uppermost open hot spot to the left of the selected object and

the uppermost open hot spot to the right of the object on the left.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

227

Press the [F5] key to connect the uppermost open hot spot to the right of the selected object and

the uppermost open hot spot to the left of the object on the right, and continue automatically

making sequential connections until no more open ports are available on either object. Automatic

connections will not be made over other objects.

Press <Shift> + [F5] to connect the uppermost open hot spot to the left of the selected object and

the uppermost open hot spot to the right of the object on the left, and continue automatically

making sequential connections until no more open ports are available on either object. Automatic

connections will not be made over other objects.

Press the [F8] key to clear all wires connected to the selected object.

■ Starting Drawing from the End Point/Node/Line Segment of an Existing Wire

You can draw from the end or midway point of an existing wire. If you start from a node or line

segment, a branch line will be created.

Method 1 Continue Drawing from a Wire End Point

When continuing an existing wire, right-click on the wire end point, then click [Continue Wire] on

the displayed context menu.

NOTE

When multiple objects are selected these operations apply to the ﬁrst object selected.

NOTE

These shortcuts can be changed as required.

→ See Chapter 3 Main Panel Window, “Shortcut Keys” on page 134.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

228

Method 2 Start Drawing from a Node

Right-click on a wire node, then click [Start Wire] on the displayed menu. You can start a branch

wire from the node you clicked on.

Method 3 Start Drawing from a Line Segment

Right-click on a wire line segment, then click [Start Wire] on the displayed menu. A node will be

created at the point you right-clicked, and you can start a branch wire from that node.

■ Drawing from Anywhere on the Sheet

Right-click the start position for drawing, the click [Start Wire] on the context menu that is

displayed. Click the location where the line should bend, then double-click at the end location to

ﬁnish drawing.

■ Finishing Drawing

When the hotspots or already drawn wires are connected, drawing is ﬁnished.

To ﬁnish drawing without connecting to a hotspot, use one of the following methods:

• Right-click the mouse

• Double-click

•Press the <Esc> key

Drawing also ﬁnishes if another window is made active.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

229

Wire Editing

You can delete wires, change node positions, connect to other wires, and perform other wire edit

operations.

■ Delete

Deleting an Entire Wire

Right-click the wire then click [Delete Wire] in the context menu

Deleting Nodes

Nodes can be deleted by selecting them and pressing the <Delete> key. Nodes on both sides of

the deleted node will become directly connected.

■ Editing by Dragging

Moving Nodes

You can move nodes by dragging them with the mouse.

When multiple nodes are selected and dragged with the mouse, you can move all selected nodes

simultaneously.

Selected Node

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

230

Moving Line Segments

To move a line segment, select the nodes on both sides of the segment, and drag one of the

nodes.

■ Connecting to Other Wires

If you drag a node and lay it over another wire, the two will be connected at that position. If you

drag it to a line segment, a node will be created.

Logical connection

A connection from a source (output side) signal to a destination (input side) signal is called a “logical

connection.” If a logical connection is present in a conﬁguration, the actual hardware signal will be

connected. A single wire can make a single logical connection.

Logical connections are possible only in the Conﬁguration window and the User Module window.

Wires in the Area window or Zone window can be drawn for display only. Even in the Conﬁguration

window and User Module window, you can also draw wires for display only.

■ Situations Where No Logical Connection Is Created

• Both sides are source (output side) signals

• Both sides are destination (input side) signals

•Two source (output side) signals are connected to a destination

• There are two destination (input side) signals, and the wire is not connected to a source (output

side) signal.

Window Wire

Area Window Drawing for display only

Zone Window Drawing for display only

Conﬁguration Window Logical connection and drawing for display only

User Module Window Logical connection and drawing for display only

Created Node

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

231

Adding, Deleting, and Renaming a Zone

At least one zone is included within an area. In the default Area window that zone will be named

[Zone1]. Multiple zones can be arranged in an Area.

When you click the [Zone] command on the [Tools] menu, the “Zone” dialog box is displayed. Here

you can add, delete, or rename a zone.

Zone List

Lists the zones included in the project. To change settings for a zone, select it by clicking it in the

list.

[Add] Button

Adds a zone. Clicking here displays the “Please enter new name” dialog box. Enter a new name,

then click [OK]. A zone will be added.

[Delete] Button

Deletes the zone selected on the list. Clicking here displays the “Are you sure?” dialog box. Click

the [OK] button, and the zone will be deleted. Click the [Cancel] button, and the deletion will be

cancelled.

NOTE

A minimum of one zone is required. When only one zone remains, deletion is impossible.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

232

[Rename] Button

Changes the name of the zone selected on the list. Clicking here displays the “Enter new name for

the current zone name” dialog box. Enter a zone name, then click the [OK] button.

[Close] Button

Closes the “Zone” dialog box.

NOTE

The current name of the zone you will be renaming is displayed in the “Current Zone Name” box of the “Enter new name

for current zone name” message.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

233

Adding, Deleting, and Renaming a Conﬁguration

At least one conﬁguration is included within a zone. In a new Zone that conﬁguration will be named

[Conﬁguration1]. You can add conﬁgurations as required.

When you click the [Conﬁguration] command on the [Tools] menu, the “Conﬁguration” dialog box is

displayed. Here you can add, delete, or rename a conﬁguration.

Conﬁgurations

Lists the conﬁgurations included in the zone being edited. To change settings for a conﬁguration,

select it by clicking it in the list.

[Add] Button

Adds a conﬁguration. Clicking here displays the “Please enter new name” dialog box. Enter a

conﬁguration name, then click [OK]. A conﬁguration will be added.

[Delete] Button

Deletes the conﬁguration selected on the list. Clicking here displays the “Are you sure?” dialog

box. Click the [OK] button, and the conﬁguration will be deleted. Click the [Cancel] button, and the

deletion will be cancelled.

NOTE

A minimum of one conﬁguration is required. When only one conﬁguration remains, deletion is impossible.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

234

[Rename] Button

Changes the name of the conﬁguration selected on the list. Clicking here displays the “Enter new

name for the current conﬁguration” dialog box. Enter a conﬁguration name, then click the [OK]

button.

[Close] Button

Closes the “Conﬁguration” dialog box.

NOTE

The current name of the conﬁguration you will be renaming is displayed in the “Current Conﬁguration Name” box of the

“Enter new name for current conﬁguration name” message.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

235

Area Window

In the Area window, the area is designed by arranging objects on a design sheet, When you click

“Area” in the Navigator window, the Area window becomes active. You can also open the Area window

using the [Area] command in the [View] menu.

The following objects can be arranged in the Area window:

• Zone

• External Device

• Picture

•Text

• Box

• Ellipse

• Wire

• Legend

■ Title Bar

You can move windows by dragging the title bar.

■ Zone

Zones are added and deleted using the “Zone” dialog box. You cannot perform operations such as

deletion, cut, or copy. You can change the position and design of zone objects in the Area window.

Double-click to open a Zone window.

■ Objects

You can perform edit operations such as arrange, cut, copy, paste, delete, and move on all objects

except zones.

Title Bar

Menu Bar

Tool Bar

Toolkit Window

Zones

Picture

(Image)

Sheet

Text (Text Object)

Box

(Rectangle)

Ellipse (Circle)

Legend

Wire (Line)

Wire

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

236

Arranging Objects

Objects other than zones can be placed in the window by dragging them from the Toolkit window. You

can also place objects by double-clicking them in the Toolkit window. You can also display the [Area

Parts List] from the [Tools] menu or from the context menu that appears when you right-click on the

sheet.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

237

Zone Window

In the Zone window, the zone conﬁguration is designed by arranging zone devices on a design sheet,

A zone conﬁguration can be created that is the same as the actual hardware arrangement.

To display the Zone window, double-click in the Area window. When you click a conﬁguration in the

Navigator window, it becomes active.

The following objects can be arranged in the Zone window:

• DME

• ICP

• External Device

• Picture

•Text

• Box

• Ellipse (Circle)

• Legend

■ Title Bar

Displays the zone name you have in the “Zone” dialog box. There is always one zone named [Zone

1] in a newly created project.

■ Conﬁguration

You can create multiple conﬁgurations within a zone, but they cannot be arranged within the Zone

window. There is a Zone window for each conﬁguration where devices can be arranged. To switch

conﬁgurations, click the desired conﬁguration in the Navigator window.

You can add, delete, and rename conﬁgurations in the “Conﬁguration” dialog box.

DME

ICP

Title Bar

Menu Bar

Tool Bar

Toolkit Window

Sheet

External Device

Picture (Image)

Text

(Text Object)

Box (Rectangle)

Ellipse (Circle)

Legend

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

238

■ Objects

You can perform edit operations such as place, cut, copy, paste, delete, and move to devices and

shapes. If you double-click on a device arranged in the window, a Conﬁguration window or dialog

box will open.

Arranging Objects

You can place objects by dragging them from the Toolkit window. You can also place objects by

double-clicking them in the Toolkit window. The same objects are displayed in the [Device List]

submenu on the context menu that appears when you right-click the [Tools] menu or on the sheet.

For information about the “Device List,” see page 154.

■ DME Arrangement

To place a DME object, ﬁrst drag the [New] icon. When you drag the [New] icon and place it in the

Zone window, you also add an icon for that DME to the Toolkit window. You can rename the DME in

the “DME Device Properties” dialog box. This also renames the DME icon in the Toolkit Window.

You can place a created DME in another conﬁguration, but you cannot place multiple identical

DMEs in a single conﬁguration. If there are multiple DMEs in a hardware conﬁguration, create an

equivalent number of DME objects.

Device Action When Double-Clicked

DME Displays Conﬁguration Window

ICP Displays “Control Panel Properties” dialog box

External Device Opens external application linked to the device.

Place New DME

Placed DME

DME not placed in

active conﬁguration

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

239

Placing a New DME

Below the DME folder in the Toolkit window are the [DME24N] and [DME64N] folders. Below these

folders you will ﬁnd a [New] icon. Drag it to the Zone window.

When you drag the [New] icon and place it in the Zone window, you also add an icon for that DME

to the Toolkit window.

A DME added to the Toolkit window cannot be placed again in the same conﬁguration window. The

DME placed in the Toolkit window will be displayed with a muted color.

To place multiple DMEs, drag the [New] icon to add each DME.

Placing Existing DMEs

When there are multiple conﬁgurations, you can place existing DMEs in conﬁgurations other than

their original one.

Drag the DME icon created in the Toolkit window to the Zone window.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

240

When you place the DME in the Zone window, the DME icon display in the Toolkit window will

change to a muted color that indicates that it has already been placed.

■ ICP Placement

Just like for a DME, the ﬁrst step it placing an ICP is to drag the [New] icon from the Toolkit window.

You can place the created ICP in another conﬁguration, but you cannot place multiple identical

ICPs in a single conﬁguration. If there are multiple ICPs in a hardware conﬁguration, create an

equivalent number of ICP objects.

Placing a New ICP

Subordinate to the ICP folder in the Toolkit window is the [ICP1] folder. Below these folders you will

ﬁnd a [New] icon. Drag it to the Zone window.

ICP not placed in

active conﬁguration

Placed ICP

Place New ICP

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

241

When you drag the ICP [New] icon and place it in the Zone window, you also add an icon for that

ICP to the Toolkit window.

The ICP added in the Toolkit window will be displayed with a muted color to indicate it has already

been placed. To place multiple ICPs, drag the [New] icon to add each new ICP.

Placing Existing ICPs

When there are multiple conﬁgurations, you can place existing ICPs in conﬁgurations other than

their original one.

Drag the ICP icon created in the Toolkit window to the Zone window.

The ICP will be placed in the Zone window. The ICP added in the Toolkit window will be displayed

with a muted color to indicate it has already been placed.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

242

Conﬁguration Window

The Conﬁguration window is used for arranging components on the sheet and making logical

connections. It is displayed when you double-click on a DME.

■ Title Bar

Displays “DME Name (Zone Name).” The conﬁguration window for a DME64N placed in [Zone1]

will be “DME64N (Zone1).” The DME name is set in the properties for the DME placed in the Zone

window.

■ Objects

Objects such components, user modules, and shapes are arranged in the Conﬁguration window.

When you double-click a component placed in the window, the component editor will open. If you

double-click a user module, the user module will open.

■ I/O Component

Depending on the settings for the DME placed in the Zone window, I/O components will be

automatically placed or added.

• I/O components can be arranged in the DME24N conﬁguration window.

• When “Show Cascade Port” is ON in the DME64N “DME Device Properties” dialog, Cascade I/O

is added automatically.

• When you set a slot in the properties for a DME placed in the Zone window, Slot I/O will be

automatically added.

You cannot apply edit operations like cut/copy/paste/duplicate to I/O components, Slot I/O, and

Cascade I/O.

Title Bar

Menu Bar

Tool Bar

Toolkit Window

Sheet

User Module

Component

Wire

I/O Component

Legend

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

243

Placing Components

You can place objects by dragging them from the Toolkit window. You can also place objects by

double-clicking them in the Toolkit window. The same objects are displayed in the [Component List]

submenu on the [Tools] menu or on the context menu that appears when you right-click on the sheet.

For information about the [Component List] in the Conﬁguration window, see page 154.

■ Arranging a Number of Components of the Same Type

You can arrange a number of components of the same type. If there are two or more of the same

component, numbers will be attached to their names as follows: “Compressor (2),” “Compressor

(3)” and so on. Multiple components placed in the conﬁguration are independent, and you can set

different parameters for each of them.

NOTE

If the [Matrix Mixer 64 input 64 output] or the [Matrix Mixer 64 input 32 output] components are placed in the DME64N

conﬁguration window, you will not be able to use other components, even though the window does not reach 100 percent.

The [Matrix Mixer 64 input 64 output] or [Matrix Mixer 64 input 32 output] components cannot be used in the DME24N.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

244

Probe Monitor

Probe monitor is a function that lets you monitor output ports in your conﬁguration with headphones.

You can turn it ON or OFF using [Probe Monitor] in the [Tools] menu or the [Probe Monitor] button on

the toolbar. The probe monitor can be set to ON or OFF for each DME.

The probe monitor can be used only when online with the DME and Conﬁguration window or user

module active. When the probe monitor is ON, no editing is possible except in the Component Editor.

■ Probe Monitor Procedure

1 Turn the probe monitor ON.

Click [Probe Monitor] in the [Tools] menu or the [Probe Monitor] button on the toolbar.

The shape of the mouse pointer changes.

2 Click the output port you want to monitor.

The output port you clicked will be selected and monitoring will begin.

If you click another output port, the location being monitored will change.

Monitor object

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

245

■ L/R Selection

To monitor the left channel and right channel simultaneously, <Shift> + click on the left channel,

then do the some for the right channel.

■ Exiting the Probe Monitor

Click [Probe Monitor] in the [Tools] menu or the [Probe Monitor] button on the toolbar to turn OFF

the probe monitor. When probe monitor is turned off, the mouse pointer returns to its normal shape.

■ Monitoring the Second or Later Time

The software remembers the location being monitored even when probe monitoring is turned OFF.

The next time probe monitoring is turned ON, the location that was being monitored previously will

be selected.

NOTE

If the conﬁguration is edited after turning monitoring OFF, the monitor location will not be selected.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

246

Show Signal Delay (Delay Display Value)

The signal delays according to the processing time in the audio processor. The [Show Signal Delay]

command from the [Tools] menu calculates a delay value and displays it for the component. Selecting

this command switches delay value display between ON and OFF. A checkmark appears when

display is turned ON.

When turned ON, the settings are compiled to obtain a delay value, which is displayed for

components and lines. The delay value obtained through compilation remains valid until the

conﬁguration is edited. Sample units are used to display the delay value.

This corresponds to the [Show Signal Delay] button on the toolbar.

ON and OFF settings for [Show Signal Display] are saved for each conﬁguration window. Switching

the setting between ON and OFF in another conﬁguration window has no effect on the current window.

You can edit the conﬁguration while [Show Signal Delay] is turned ON.

Delay values for components and I/O components are displayed at the lower center of the object.

Delay values for wires are displayed beside the input port of the connected object.

NOTE

Delay values for SPX components vary depending on the Bypass ON/OFF status, because SPX components add the effect

signal to the original signal. When [Show Signal Delay] is turned ON, the delay value for the Bypass ON status will be

displayed.

NOTE

Delay values for Wav File Player components are displayed for external inputs. Delay values for local Wave ﬁles cannot be

displayed.

When you turn ON [Show Signal Delay], the delay value appears

above the object.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

247

Monitoring Point List

When you click [Monitoring Point List] in the [Tools] menu, the “Monitoring Point List” dialog box is

displayed. Here you can register or edit points for monitoring with headphones.

■ [Cut] Button

Cuts the selected monitoring point information. When monitoring point information is cut,

information below that point moves up.

■ [Copy] Button

Copies the selected monitoring point information.

■ [Paste] Button

Pastes the copied monitoring point information at the selected line.

■ [Insert] Button

The copied monitoring point information is inserted at the selected point.

■ [Clear] Button

Deletes the selected monitoring point information.

NOTE

Monitoring points can be edited only by users for whom the [Edit] security checkbox has been turned ON.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

248

■ Monitoring Point List

Displays and allows editing of monitoring point information.

[No.]

Displays the numbers for monitor link points. Numbers are assigned in order from the top.

[Label]

Displays and allows editing of monitoring point names. Clicking here selects the text. You can then

enter a new name.

[Component L]

Sets the monitoring point L channel component. Clicking here displays a list of components

arranged in the active conﬁguration window. You can then select components for monitoring.

[Port L]

Sets the monitoring point L channel port. Clicking here displays a list of ports for the component

selected in the [Component L] ﬁeld. Click the port you want to monitor.

[Component R]

Sets the monitoring point R channel component. Clicking here displays a list of components

arranged in the active conﬁguration window. You can then select components for monitoring.

[Port R]

Sets the monitoring point R channel port. Clicking here displays a list of ports for the component

selected in the [Component R] ﬁeld. Click the port you want to monitor.

■ [OK] Button

Updates the settings and closes the dialog box.

■ [Cancel] Button

Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.

NOTE

Components arranged in user modules are also displayed in the list. However, components for user modules for which

security is set will not be displayed.

NOTE

If you click a port in the designer window while the “Monitoring Point List” dialog box is displayed, the port will be

registered to the monitoring point of current selected row. If you will register the monitoring points as stereo, click a port

while holding down the <Shift> key to register Component L and Port L, then click a port again while holding down the

<Shift> key to register Component R and Port R.

NOTE

Components arranged in user modules are also displayed in the list. However, components for user modules for which

security is set will not be displayed.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

249

Analyze (Conﬁguration Analysis)

When you click the [Analyze] command on the [Tools] menu or the [Analyze] button on the toolbar, the

“Analyze” dialog box is displayed. The wire connections in the currently active conﬁguration window

are analyzed, and the results are displayed in the “Analyze” dialog box.

Because this function allows you to make sure there are no problems with component arrangement

and wires without connecting to the DME unit, it is useful for eliminating complier errors before

executing Synchronization.

■ Message Box

Displays the progress of the analysis operation. When the analysis ﬁnishes, the results are

displayed.

If errors are detected during analysis, they will display as shown below.

■ [Close] Button

Closes the dialog box.

NOTE

The [Analyze] command on the [Tools] menu can be selected only when a conﬁguration window is active.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

250

User Module

User Modules

A module treated as a single component that combines a number of other components is called a

“user module.” A user module can be arranged in the Conﬁguration window just like any other

component. User module editing consists of placing the component and making logical connections

with wires, the same as for conﬁgurations.

User modules are saved in the project ﬁle, but they can also be saved as ﬁles. User modules saved as

ﬁles can be displayed in the Toolkit window and used in other project ﬁles.

A “User Modules” folder will be created in the folder speciﬁed in [Contents Folder] in the “Preferences”

dialog box in the Main Panel window. User modules will be saved there. If you do not change the

setting in the “Preferences” dialog box, the location will be “C:\Program Files\YAMAHA\OPT Tools\DME

Designer\User Modules.”

User Module Manager

When you click [User Module Manager] on the [Tools] menu, the “User Module Manager” dialog box is

displayed. You can change settings, rename or delete in the window that opens when you double-

click a user module.

■ User Modules

Lists user modules that are saved in the “User Modules” folder. Select the target user module by

clicking on it.

NOTE

The Main Panel Menu “Preferences” dialog box is displayed using [Preference] in the [File] menu.

NOTE

Only user modules saved can be displayed. User modules placed in the component editor are saved in project ﬁles, and

can be used without being saved as ﬁles. However, they will not be displayed in the “User Module Manager” dialog box

list.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

251

■ Double Click Action

Sets the action that occurs when you double-click on a user module placed in the Conﬁguration

window.

[Open User Module Design Window]

Opens the User Module window.

[Open User Module Editor]

Opens the User Module editor. The user module editor is a window where controls for components

that are placed in a user module can be laid out and their parameters changed. For more

information about the user module editor, see “User Control/User Module Editor” on page 279.

■ Security Settings

Makes security settings for the user module selected on the list.

[Enable Security]

Enables user module security. If security is enabled, a password is requested when attempting to

open the User Module window. If the correct password is not entered, the window will stay closed.

When you place a checkmark here, the “Set Password” dialog box appears. Enter the same

password into the [Password] box and [Conﬁrm Password] box, and click the [OK] button.

To disable user module security, turn OFF the checkbox. If you click the checkbox when it already

has a checkmark, the “Input Password” dialog box appears. Enter the password set for this user

module, and click the [OK] button. You can disable security in this way. If you do not enter the

correct password, you will not be able to disable security.

[Set Password] Button

Changes the password. Clicking here displays the “Input Password” dialog box. Enter the current

password and click the [OK] button. The “Set Password” dialog box will be displayed. Enter the

same password into the [Password] box and [Conﬁrm Password] box, and click the [OK] button.

■ Default Library

Speciﬁes the default library ﬁle for newly-created user modules.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

252

■ [Rename] Button

Changes the name of the user module selected on the list. Clicking here displays the “Rename

User Module” dialog box. Enter a name into the user module name box, and click the [OK] button.

■ [Delete] Button

Deletes the user module selected on the list.

■ [Import] Button

Imports the user module settings and library from the user module export ﬁle.

■ [Export] Button

Saves the user module settings and library to the user module export ﬁle.

Click to display the Export dialog, All features of this dialog window are the same as the standard

Windows ﬁle save dialog, except for the [Export Library] option.

[Export Library] can be sued to select the library to be saved.

■ [Import Library] Button

Loads a ﬁle from the speciﬁed folder into the library.

NOTE

The user module name also becomes the ﬁle name. When naming a user module, do not use characters that cannot be

used for ﬁlenames.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

253

■ [Export Library] Button

Saves the library to a ﬁle.

Use [Export Library] to select the library to be saved.

■ [OK] Button

Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box.

■ [Cancel] Button

Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.

NOTE

Settings in the “User Module Manager” dialog box are changed when you click the [OK] button. If you mistakenly set

security, change the password, or delete a user module, you can click the [Cancel] button to close the dialog box and

return to the original unchanged settings.

Please note that [Import], [Export], [Import Library], and [Export Library] will be applied even if the [Cancel] button is

clicked.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

254

Creating User Modules

When you place a blank user module in the Conﬁguration window, a new user module is created.

1 Make the Conﬁguration window active.

2 Click the [+] next to [User Module] in the Toolkit window.

The items in the level below the [User Module] folder will be displayed.

3 Drag the [Blank User Module] to the Conﬁguration window.

When you release the mouse button at the location where you will place the user module, the “User

Module Properties” dialog box is displayed.

4 Here you can set object properties.

[Inputs/Outputs Sets] is set to 1. Set the required number of ports.

5 Click the [OK] button.

A user module will be created, and placed in the Conﬁguration window.

The user module properties can also be changed later. For information about the “User Module

Properties” dialog box, see “User Module” on page 181.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

255

Saving User Modules

When user modules are saved, they appear below [User Module] in the Toolkit window. They can be

used in other project ﬁles.

Save the User Module using the [Save User Module] command on the [Tools] menu. The [Save User

Module] command can be used only when a user module is selected in the Conﬁguration window.

When you select the command, the “Save User Module” dialog box will be displayed. Enter a name for

the User Module, then click the [OK] button.

Set [Double Click Action] and [Security Settings] at the lower part of the “Save User Module” dialog

box.

They correspond to the same items in the “User Module Manager” dialog box. When saved with

different settings than the “User Module Manager” dialog box, the saved settings are immediately

applied.

■ Double Click Action

Sets the window that opens when you double-click on a user module placed in the component

editor.

[Open User Module Design Window]

Opens the User Module window.

[Open User Module Editor]

Opens the User Module editor.

NOTE

User modules placed in the component editor are saved in the project ﬁle. When you want to use a user module in another

project or in another conﬁguration in the same project, save it using the “Save User Module” command.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

256

■ Security Settings

Sets user module security.

[Enable Security]

Enables user module security.

If you place a checkmark here, the “Set Password” dialog box appears. Enter the same password

into the [Password] box and [Conﬁrm Password] box, and click the [OK] button.

[Set Password] Button

Changes the password. Clicking here displays the “Input Password” dialog box. Enter the current

password and click the [OK] button. The “Set Password” dialog box will be displayed. Enter the

same password into the [Password] box and [Conﬁrm Password] box, and click the [OK] button.

If you try to save a user module with the same name as an already saved user module, a message

asking “This ﬁle already exists. Overwrite?” will be displayed. To overwrite, click the [Yes] button. To

change the name, click the [No] button, and change the ﬁle name in the “Save User Module”

dialog box.

NOTE

When the “Save User Module” dialog box is displayed, the name set in the user module’s “User Module Properties”

dialog box will be entered into the [File name] box. If you change the name of a user module and save it using the “Save

User Module” dialog box, the ﬁlename in the user module and the user module name displayed in the Toolkit window will

also change.

The [Label] box displayed in the “User Module Properties” dialog box will not change.

NOTE

If characters not usable in ﬁle names are used in the ﬁle name set in the “User Module Properties” dialog box, an error

message will be displayed at the same time as the “Save User Module” dialog box. Delete the unusable characters

before saving.

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

257

User Module Window

User modules are edited in the User Module window. The User Module window is used for arranging

components on the sheet and making logical connections. It is displayed when you double-click on an

object arranged in the Conﬁguration window.

■ Title Bar

The user module names are displayed on the title bar. User module names are set in the “User

Module Properties” dialog box.

■ Objects

You can place, cut, copy, paste, delete, and move component and shape objects. When you

double-click an object placed in the window, the component editor will open.

■ Placing Components

Components are placed the same as in the Conﬁguration window.

You can place objects by dragging them from the Toolkit window to the User Module window. You

can also place objects by double-clicking them in the Toolkit window. The same objects are

displayed in the [Component List] submenu on the [Tools] menu or on the context menu that

appears when you right-click on the sheet.

For information about the User Module window [Component List], see page 155.

Title Bar

Menu Bar

Tool Bar

Component

Wire

Chapter 4 Designer

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

258

■ Placing a Number of Components of the Same Type

You can arrange a number of components of the same type. If there are two or more of the same

component, numbers will be attached to their names as follows: “Compressor (2),” “Compressor

(3)” and so on. Multiple components placed in the conﬁguration are independent, and you can set

different parameters for each of them.

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

259

Chapter 5 Components

Types of Components

Component Groups

When the Conﬁguration window and User Module window are made active, a component list is

displayed in the Toolkit window, and you can use the [Component List] on the [Tools] menu.

Components can be separated into groups based on types. In the Toolkit window, component groups

are displayed as folders. Some of the groups in the Toolkit window are further divided into subgroups.

Click the [+]/[-] buttons to the left of the folders to display the components.

NOTE

When the User Module window is active, [User Module] is not present on the menu.

Group

Component

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

260

In the Designer window [Tools] menu → [Component List] menu, component groups are displayed as

submenu items.

The items with small rightward-facing triangles are groups. Those without triangles are components.

Component List

NOTE

When the User Module window is active, [User Module] is not present in the menu.

Group Component Variations

Crossover

2 Way

3 Way

4 Way

5 Way

6 Way

Crossover Processor

2 Way

3 Way

4 Way

5 Way

6 Way

Crossover Processor II

2 Way

3 Way

4 Way

5 Way

6 Way

Delay Long

1 Output

2 Output

3 Output

4 Output

5 Output

6 Output

7 Output

8 Output

Short

1 Output

2 Output

3 Output

4 Output

5 Output

6 Output

7 Output

8 Output

Group

Component

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

261

Dynamics Compander CompanderH

Mono

Stereo

CompanderS

Mono

Stereo

Compressor

Mono

Stereo

De-Esser

Mono

Stereo

Ducking

Mono

Stereo

Expander

Mono

Stereo

Gate

Mono

Stereo

Limiter

Mono

Stereo

EQ GEQ Mono

7 Band

15 Band

31 Band

Stereo

7 Band

15 Band

31 Band

PEQ Mono

2 Band

3 Band

4 Band

6 Band

8 Band

Stereo

2 Band

3 Band

4 Band

6 Band

8 Band

Fader

1 Channel

2 Channel

4 Channel

8 Channel

12 Channel

16 Channel

Filter BPF

Mono

Stereo

HPF

Mono

Stereo

LPF

Mono

Stereo

Notch

Mono

Stereo

Programmable BPF

Mono

Stereo

Programmable HPF

Mono

Stereo

Programmable LPF

Mono

Stereo

Meter

1 Channel

2 Channel

4 Channel

8 Channel

12 Channel

16 Channel

Miscellaneous Oscillator Mono

Wav File Player

Group Component Variations

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

262

Mixer Auto Mixer

2 Channel

4 Channel

8 Channel

12 Channel

16 Channel

Delay Matrix

2 Input 2 Output

4 Output

8 Output

12 Output

16 Output

4 Input 2 Output

4 Output

8 Output

12 Output

16 Output

8 Input

2 Output

4 Output

8 Output

12 Output

16 Output

Matrix Mixer 2 Input

1 Output

2 Output

4 Input

1 Output

2 Output

4 Output

8 Input 1 Output

2 Output

4 Output

8 Output

12 Input 1 Output

2 Output

4 Output

8 Output

12 Output

16 Input 1 Output

2 Output

4 Output

8 Output

12 Output

16 Output

32 Input 16 Output

32 Output

64 Input 32 Output

64 Output

Pan LCR 1 Channel

2 Channel

4 Channel

8 Channel

12 Channel

16 Channel

LR 1 Channel

2 Channel

4 Channel

8 Channel

12 Channel

16 Channel

Surround 3-1

5.1

6.1

Group Component Variations

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

263

Router 1 Input 2 Output

4 Output

8 Output

12 Output

16 Output

2 Input 2 Output

4 Output

8 Output

12 Output

16 Output

4 Input 2 Output

4 Output

8 Output

12 Output

16 Output

8 Input 2 Output

4 Output

8 Output

12 Output

16 Output

12 Input 2 Output

4 Output

8 Output

12 Output

16 Output

16 Input 2 Output

4 Output

8 Output

12 Output

16 Output

Source Selector 3 Position 1 Channel

4 Position 1 Channel

2 Channel

6 Channel

8 Position 1 Channel

2 Channel

6 Channel

16 Position 1 Channel

Speaker Processor 1 Way

2 Way

3 Way

4 Way

5 Way

6 Way

SPX

Slot Slot In Component Editor

Slot Out Component Editor

Cascade Cascade In Component

Editor

Cascade Out Component

Editor

Group Component Variations

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

264

Component Editor Window

Component Editor

Component parameters are edited in the component editor. The same component can be placed

multiple times on the same sheet in a Conﬁguration or User Module window. If there are multiple

examples of the same component in a conﬁguration window or user module window, each component

is independent and its parameters are set individually in a separate Component Editor window.

Opening the Component Editor

When you double-click on a component located in a Conﬁguration window, the Component Editor

window will open. There is not just one window that is called the component editor. The contents of the

editor and the name on the title bar will differ according to type of component for which the window

was opened.

Component Editor Window Structure

The contents of the Component Editor window vary according to the component.

■ Title Bar

Displays the label. Label settings are made in the “Component Properties” dialog box. For

information about component labels see “Component” (page 174) in “Objects.”.

Title Bar

Library

[ON] Button

Graph

Knob

Meter

Slider

Edit Box

Snap

Back Button

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

265

■ Back Button

This button appears in the child window of windows that have a parent-child relationship, and can

be clicked to return the parent window.

■ Status Bar

Component Name

Displays the component name.

Component ID

Displays the component ID.

Parameter ID

Displays the parameter ID for controls that are being operated.

■ Snap

Up to four component editor parameter sets can be recorded temporarily. You can switch between

parameter sets using buttons.

Parameter sets can be copied by dragging and dropping a button onto any other button. Copy can

also be carried out from the contextual menu that appears when a button is right-clicked.

■ Library

Saves and recalls component editor parameter sets as ﬁles.

→ See “Library” on page 275.

■ Graph

Displays the effects of the component in a graphical format. When parameters are changed, the

graph changes too. In graphs that have control points, adjust parameters by dragging the points.

As you drag the points, the corresponding parameters reﬂect the changes you make.

■ Meter

Displays the signal level.

■ Slider/Knob

You can change parameters by dragging the corresponding sliders or knobs.

NOTE

When controlling the DME64N/24N by connecting an RS-232C compatible controller to the [REMOTE] terminal, a

component ID is required for distinguishing the same components in the DME64N/24N. The component ID is included in

the signal that controls the component parameters. For details about control methods, contact your nearest Yamaha

representative or the authorized distributor at the end of the DME64N/24N Owner’s Manual.

Component Name

Component ID

Parameter ID

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

266

Changing Parameters

In the Component Editor window, parameter settings can be made by dragging buttons and sliders,

not only by directly entering numbers. In locations where multiple controls, like edit boxes and knobs,

are combined, you can change the values either way.

■ Preference

When you click the [Preference] command on the [File] menu in the Main Panel window, the

“Preferences” dialog box is displayed. You can set the action of the knobs and sliders on the

[Component Editor] tab of the “Preferences” dialog box.

When you close the dialog box after changing settings, those changes are immediately reﬂected in

the component.

Knob Mode

Sets how the knobs operate.

Slider Mode

Sets the action that occurs when you click on the scale located under the sliders.

Edit Box Zoom

Speciﬁes whether the edit box will be enlarged or not on mouse-over.

Edit Box Font

Speciﬁes the edit box font.

NOTE

This is the font when the box is enlarged, not the font that is used when the box is at it's smallest size. The text may bleed

beyond the box with some fonts.

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

267

■ Knob

You can change the way knobs operate, using the [Component Editor] tab → [Knob Mode] setting

in the “Preferences” dialog box.

Circular

The knob is dragged following its shape, as though you were drawing a circle.

Linear

As you drag the knob to the upper, the value increases. Dragging it down decreases the value.

NOTE

To make a ﬁner setting, press the <Shift> key while dragging the knob.

If you click a knob while pressing the <Ctrl> key, the setting will return to its default value.

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

268

■ Slider

You can change the parameter by dragging the slider.

You can set the action that results from using the mouse on the scale area with [Component Editor]

tab → [Slider Mode] in the “Preferences” dialog box.

Ramp

When the fader bar is clicked the knob will move a preset amount in the corresponding direction.

Touch

The slider does not move without directly touching it, even if you click the mouse button.

Jump

The slider jumps to the location where you click.

NOTE

To make a ﬁner setting, press the <Shift> key while dragging the slider.

If you click a slider while pressing the <Ctrl> key, the setting will return to its default value.

Scale

Slider

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

269

■ Buttons

There are several types of buttons.

Switches between ON/OFF. When turned on, the button lights up. The color depends on the

button’s function.

In button sets of this type, you can select one of several buttons. When you do all other buttons in

the set turn off.

Click here to execute a command.

Displays a menu.

When turned ON When turned OFF

Click this button

to switch all channels

in the block.

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

270

Displays another window.

■ Edit Box

Displays current values for settings. You can modify values by typing from the keyboard or using

the mouse. When a value is changed, the knob or slider moves.

Mouse-over

When [Edit Box Zoom] in the [Component Editor] tab of the Preferences dialog box is checked, the

edit box will zoom when the mouse is positioned over it (mouse-over).

Click

Text in the selected edit box will turn red. Values can be entered and edited via the keyboard. It is

not necessary to enter the unit. Press the <ENTER> key to conﬁrm the entry and display the unit.

Changing Values Using Spin Boxes

When the mouse pointer is placed over an edit box, a spin box appears. Clicking the up arrow

button [▲] increases the value, while clicking the down arrow [▼] decreases it.

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

271

Double-click

Selects a number. You can change the selected number using the keyboard. There is no need to

enter units. When you press the <Enter> key, the numbers you entered will be set and the units

displayed.

Moving with the <Tab> Key

If you press <Tab> key while an edit box is selected, the selection will move to the next edit box.

If you press <Shift> + <Tab>, the selection moves to the previous edit box.

Changing Selections with the Key/Mouse Wheel

You can modify values in selected edit boxes using the direction keys or the mouse wheel.

• Up and Down Arrow Keys

Increases or decreases number settings.

•<PageUp> Key/<PageDown> Key

Increases or decreases number settings in large increments. The <PageUp> key increases

and the <PageDown> key decreases the setting.

• <Enter> Key

When you press the <Enter> key, the numbers you entered will be conﬁrmed.

• <Ctrl> Key + <Enter> Key

When you press the <Ctrl> + <Enter> key, the setting will return to its default value.

• Mouse Wheel

Rolling the mouse wheel upward (away from you) increases the value. Rolling it down

(towards you) decreases the value.

•Dragging

Dragging upward increases the value, while dragging downward decreases it.

• <ESC> Key

The <ESC> key can be used to cancel a value being entered.

Enter a number from

the keyboard.

Set the value with

the <Enter> key.

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

272

■ Graph

Displays parameters graphically. When parameters are changed, the graph also changes.

In graphs that have control points, you can adjust parameters by dragging the points. On graphs

with control points that are limited to movement in one direction only, aligning the mouse pointer

with the control point and pressing the mouse button causes the mouse pointer to change to a

double-headed arrow pointing in both directions of movement. Change the parameter by dragging

in the directions of the arrow.

Control points that can be dragged in any direction usually have their position determined by

multiple parameters in the component editor. These multiple parameters can be adjusted by

dragging the point.

When there are multiple control points in the graph, they are identiﬁed by their colors. A bar with the

same color as each control point can be found below the corresponding knob or edit box.

NOTE

When a graph that has control points is copied to the User Control Editor or User Module Editor, the controls points will

not be displayed. The controllers assigned to the corresponding parameters must also be copied to display the control

points.

Control Point

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

273

Snap

About Snap

The Snap function records parameters for the component editor, user control editor, and user module

editor temporarily. Clicking a button switches the parameter set, setting all parameters in the editor to

the status that existed when the parameters were recorded in the memory. You can record the current

values for parameters. Furthermore, when you recall a library, it is recorded to the Snap button that is

on at that time. For more information about libraries, see “Library” (page 275).

■ Snap Buttons ([A] through [D])

The Snap buttons allow you to switch between parameter sets. The buttons change in appearance

according to their ON/OFF status and to whether or not there were changes to the parameter set

from when the editor was started.

When there has been no change to the parameter set since the editor was started

When a button is selected it lights up.

When a parameter set that is different than when the editor was started has been recorded

to a button

The color of the button name changes on buttons for which the parameter set has changed. When

a button is selected it lights up.

Snap Buttons

ON OFF

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

274

■ Recording Parameter Sets

Recording parameters from the current window

The parameters present when the snap button is switched are recorded to the snap button before

the switch.

1 Click the snap button ([A] through [D]) that will record the parameter set. This turns it

ON.

2 Set the parameters in the editor to the settings you want to record.

3 Click another snap button.

Recalling a Library

1 Click the snap button that has recorded the parameter set. This turns it ON.

2 The library is recalled.

■ Switching Parameter Set

If you click a snap button that has a parameter set recorded, the system switches to the parameter

set recorded there.

■ Copying Parameter Sets

Parameter sets can be copied between snap buttons [A]~[D].

• Select from the contextual menu.

• Drag and drop.

Drag-and-drop copy will also work between components of the same type.

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

275

Library

The Library

Component editor, user control editor, and user module editor parameters can be saved as library

ﬁles. By reading back a saved library ﬁle, you can reset all the editor parameters to the status they had

when the ﬁle was saved. Saving in a library ﬁle is called “storing,” while bringing back the settings is

called “recalling” them.

Library ﬁles have the following ﬁle name extensions: “.cel” for component editors, “.ucl” for user

control editors, and “.uml” for user module editors.

If you store library ﬁles in folders that conform to the following path, they will be automatically

displayed in the component editor [Recall Library] menu: “C:\Program Files\YAMAHA\OPT Tools\DME

Designer\Editor\Library\Component Group Name\Component Name.”

The dialog box used for storing items in the library opens with the library folder displayed.

[Store Library] Button

[Recall Library] Button

[Recall Library]

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

276

If you save like this without changing the folder, the item you saved will be displayed on the [Recall

Library] menu. When a library is saved, it can be displayed in the component editor for other project

ﬁles besides the currently open one, and also in new project ﬁles.

■ Library Filenames

Because the library ﬁlenames are displayed in the [Recall Library] menu, use a ﬁlename that helps

you understand the contents of the parameter set in the ﬁle. When saving in the default folder, there

is no need to include the component name in the ﬁlename.

For example, when you are storing a parameter set in the stereo compressor library, the “Save

Library File” dialog will be displayed with the “C:\Program Files\YAMAHA\OPT Tools\DME

Designer\Editor\Library\Compressor\Compressor Stereo” folder selected. If you save in that folder,

the ﬁle you save will be displayed only in the [Recall Library” menu for stereo compressor

components only. It will not be displayed in any other library.

If you use a ﬁlename that makes it easy to understand the parameter contents or the conditions

under which they are used, you can select them without confusion when recalling.

Storing in the Library

The library is the place to store component editor parameters.

■ Editor Window

1 Set the parameters to be stored in the library.

2 Click the [Store Library] button in the component editor.

The “Save Library File” dialog box will be displayed.

3 Enter the ﬁlename.

Select a ﬁlename that makes it easy to understand the contents of the parameter set.

4 Specify the folder for saving the ﬁle.

If you want the saved ﬁle displayed on the [Recall Library] menu, do not change the folder for

saving.

5 Click the [Save] button.

■ Designer Window

Right-click a component or user module in the Designer window to show the contextual menu. Use

the [Store Component Library] command to store the library.

The menu that appears when the contextual menu [Store Component Library] command is clicked

is the same as the menu that appears when the Edit window [Store Library] button is clicked.

Specify a ﬁle name and save the ﬁle.

NOTE

If you change the [Contents Folder] in the “Preferences” dialog box in the Main Panel window, a “Library” folder will be

created in the speciﬁed folder, and a folder for each component will be created there.

NOTE

In the “Save Library File” dialog box, you can specify another folder for saving library ﬁles, and save them there. Library ﬁles

that are saved in another folder also can be recalled by specifying the folder.

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

277

Recalling a Library

The recall function reads stored parameters into the component editor.

■ Editor Windows

You can recall libraries in the component editor, user control editor, and user module editor

windows by clicking the [Recall Library] button. When a library is recalled in an editor window, the

parameter set is recorded to the selected snap button.

1 Click the snap button ([A] through [D]) that will record the parameter set.

2 Click the [Recall Library] button in the component editor.

The [Recall Library] menu will be displayed.

3 Click the library name (ﬁlename) in the [Recall Library] menu.

The parameters in the library will be recalled.

■ Designer Window

If you right-click on a component or user module in the design window, a context menu will be

displayed. You can recall a library using the [Recall Component Library] command.

If you click [Recall Component Library] in the context menu, the same menu is displayed as when

you click the [Recall Library] button in the editor window. If you select a library that is displayed in

the submenu, that library is recalled.

Not only the library name, but also the effect type is displayed in the submenu that appears when

you right-click on an SPX component.

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

278

■ Recalling a Library Stored in a Folder Other Than the Default

Libraries not stored in the default folder do not appear on the [Recall Library] menu. You must

specify the ﬁle you want in order to recall it.

1 Click the [Recall Library] button in the component editor.

The [Recall Library] menu will be displayed.

2 Click the [Recall Library] menu [Open File Dialog].

The “Open” dialog box will be displayed.

3 Move to the correct folder and select a library ﬁle.

4 Click the [Open] button.

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

279

User Control/User Module Editor

User Control

The user control function lets you lay out a set of component controls in the Conﬁguration window or

User Module window, and create a control window with them. The controls in the user control editor

are linked to the controls for the original component. If the parameters are changed in the user control

editor, the parameters will change in the same way in the component editor. If parameters are

changed in the component editor, the controls in the user control window will also change in the same

way.

You can create a compact control window by only including controls for parameters that are used

frequently.

You can also lay out controls for multiple components, so that you can adjust parameters for them from

a single window.

There is also a [Library] button in the user control editor, which you can use to save parameters to the

library.

User controls are created by selecting [View] menu → [User Control] → [New User Control] in the

Main Panel window. Created user controls are displayed in the [View] menu → [User Control]

submenu. If you select one, a window will open for it. The controls which can be opened by the user

control editor are automatically set according to the user security settings of the currently logged in

user.

User Control Editor

Laid Out Controls

Edit Palette

Component Editor

Controls Laid Out

in the User Control

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

280

[User Control] Menu

User controls are displayed in the [View] → [User Control] submenu of the Main Panel window. If you

click the [User Control] button in the Main Panel window, you will display the same menu as the [View]

menu → [User Control] submenu.

User Control Name

Displays a menu of user controls included in the current conﬁguration of the current zone. Clicking

one of the user controls opens the user control editor. A checkmark appears next to already open

windows.

New User Control

When you select the “New User Control” command, the “User Control Manager” dialog box will be

displayed. Here you can create, delete, rename, and otherwise manage user controls. For

information about the “User Control Manager” dialog box, see page 70.

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

281

Creating New User Controls

New user controls are added in the “User Control Manager” dialog box.

1 Click [User Control Manager] on the Main Panel window [Tools] menu.

The “User Control Manager” dialog box will be displayed.

2 Click the [New] button.

The “New User Control” dialog box will be displayed.

3 Enter the name for the new user control into the [Name] box.

4 Sets security for User Control.

Different settings are provided for individual security levels and users.

Security cannot be set higher than the user security level.

Click the [User Level] [▼] button to select a security level.

NOTE

You can also display the “User Control Manager” dialog box by clicking the [View] menu → [User Control] → [New User

Control] command.

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

282

Use [User Name] to select a user.

5 Click the [OK] button.

The user control will be created and displayed on the list in the “User Control Manager” dialog box.

6 Click the [OK] button in the “User Control Manager” dialog box.

When a new user control is created, it will be displayed in the [View] menu → [User Control]

submenu in the Main Panel window. If you click the control, it will be displayed in a user control

editor window.

[Snap] and [Library] appear appears in a new user control.

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

283

User Control Security

Security can be set independently for each User Control. User Control levels higher than the user

security level will not be displayed in the menu or the User Control Manager dialog box.

The security level settings for both the user control and the user affect editing and display of user

controls.

■ User Control Security Level

Security 1 ~ 10 can be set for each level or user. Level 1 is the highest level and 10 is the lowest.

If the security level for a user control is set to 2, only users at level 1 or level 2 can display or edit it

Security levels for user controls can be changed in the “User Control Manager” dialog box by a

user who has logged on at a security level equal to or higher than the user control.

1 Click [User Control Manager] on the Main Panel window [Tools] menu.

The “User Control Manager” dialog box will be displayed.

2 Changing User Control Security

•To Change the Security level

Click the [Security Level] box of the User Control to be changed.

The security level list will appear.

Click the level to be set for the User Control.

The selected level will be displayed in the [Security Level] box.

NOTE

The levels displayed on the list will differ according to the security level of the user.

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

284

• Setting Security for Individual Users

Click the [User] box of the User Control to be changed.

The user list will appear.

Click the user to be set for the User Control.

The selected user name will be displayed in the [User] box.

3 Click the [OK] button.

■ User Security Settings

In the “Security” dialog box in the Main Panel window, you can set the user control levels at which

to allow or disallow editing and display.

A user can edit user controls if a check has been placed for that user in the [Operation Security] →

[Edit] checkbox. User controls at a level equal to or lower than the level set in [Operation Security]

→ [User Control Level] will be displayed in the menu.

Using user security, you can set whether user controls will open at logon or when a ﬁle is opened.

If [Startup User Control] is turned ON, the user control editor will be automatically displayed when

ﬁles that include user controls are opened.

For information about the “Security” dialog box, see “Security (Creating Users and Making User

Settings)” on page 55.

NOTE

The users that can be selected will depend on the user security level.

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

285

User Module Editor

The user module editor lets you make a layout of controls for components arranged in the user module

window. For each user module there is one user module editor. The name of the user module is

displayed in the title bar. Only components that are arranged in a particular user module can be laid

out in the speciﬁc control window that is associated with that user module. Both the user module and

the control window will have the same name.

■ Opening a User Module Editor Window

Use [Double Click Action] in the “User Module Manager” dialog box or “User Module Properties”

dialog box to set the window that will open when you double-click in the Conﬁguration window. If

the [Open User Module Editor] checkbox has been turned ON for a user module, a user module

editor can be opened for it. For information about the “User Module Manager” dialog box, see

page 250. For information about the “User Module Properties” dialog box, see page 181.

A User Module can also be opened via the User Module contextual menu in the Designer window.

NOTE

You can copy controls from a user module to the user control editor.

User Module Editor

Laid Out Controls

Edit Palette

Component Editor

Controls Laid Out

in the User Control

Status Bar

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

286

Operation Mode and Design Mode

There are two modes for the user control editor/user module editor and the component editor:

“operation mode” and “design mode.” In operation mode you adjust parameters, while in design

mode you lay out controls.

You can switch between operation mode and design mode using the context menu that is displayed

when you right-click in the user control editor/user module editor or component editor.

The [Design Mode] command switches the design mode between ON and OFF. A checkmark

appears when the design mode is turned ON. If you click in the context menu when the checkmark is

present, design mode will turn OFF, and the edit window will return to operation mode.

NOTE

Only users for whom the [Operation Security] → [Edit] checkbox in the “Security” dialog box has been checked can turn the

design mode ON.

NOTE

You can select controls in the component editor so that you can copy them into the user control editor/user module editor.

When you want to select multiple objects, hold down the <Ctrl> key as you click each new object you want to select.

Switches

between

operation mode

and design

mode

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

287

Status Bar

The lock icon will appear in the User Module when security is active.

→ User Module properties (page 181).

→ User Module (page 250).

The lock icon will appear locked when the password has not been entered, and layouts edited in the

Design Mode cannot be saved.

When the password is entered it becomes temporarily possible to save the layout.

The lock icon will not appear if the [Enable Security] checkbox in the “Properties” dialog box is not

checked.

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

288

Edit Palette

The edit palette is automatically displayed whenever the user control editor/user module editor is

active in design mode. Whenever you move the user control editor/user module editor, the edit palette

moves together with it. When you turn OFF design mode, the palette disappears.

Commands for editing in the user control editor/user module editor are provided on the edit palette.

■ [Design Mode Off] Button

Tur ns OFF the design mode.

■ [Undo] Button/[Redo] Button

Used to undo/redo operations.

■ [Cut] Button/[Copy] Button

Cuts or copies the selected controls.

→ See “Cut/Copy/Paste Controls” on page 303.

■ [Paste] Button

Pastes cut or copied controls.

→ See “Cut/Copy/Paste Controls” on page 303.

[Design Mode Off] Button

[Undo] Button

[Redo] Button

[Cut] Button

[Copy] Button

[Paste] Button

Control Alignment

Grid Setting

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

289

■ Alignment of Controls

Aligns the positions of multiple controls.

[Align Left] Button

Aligns all selected controls with the left edge of the leftmost selected control.

[Align Right] Button

Aligns all selected controls with the right edge of the rightmost selected control.

[Align To Top] Button

Aligns all selected controls with the top edge of the uppermost selected control.

[Align To Bottom] Button

Aligns all selected controls with the bottom edge of the lowermost selected control.

[Align Horizontally] Button

This button can be used only when three or more controls are selected.

It arranges the controls in a uniform horizontal line. Without changing the position of the leftmost

and rightmost control, this button arranges the controls between them at uniform intervals. It puts

the same amount of space between each control and its neighbor.

[Align Vertically] Button

This button can be used only when three or more controls are selected.

It arranges the controls in a uniform vertical line. Without changing the position of the uppermost

and lowermost control, this button arranges the controls between them at uniform intervals. It puts

the same amount of space between each control and its neighbor.

[Horizontal/Center Align] Button

Aligns the selected controls horizontally with the center position.

[Vertical/Center Align] Button

Aligns the selected controls vertically with the center position.

[Align Left] Button

[Align Right] Button

[Align To Top] Button

[Align To Bottom] Button

[Align Horizontally] Button

[Align Vertically] Button

[Horizontal/Center Align] Button

[Vertical/Center Align] Button

[Picture] Button

[TEXT] Button

[Box] Button

[Ellipse] Button

[Frame] Button

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

290

■ [Picture] Button

Places a graphic ﬁle.

■ [TEXT] Button

Places a text box.

■ [Box] Button

Places a square.

■ [Ellipse] Button

Places an ellipse.

■ [Frame] Button

Places a frame.

■ Grid Setting

When arranging controls, you can align them along the grid. This menu sets the spacing of the

grid.

Clicking the [▼] button displays a menu. Click the menu to set the grid spacing. Select [OFF] to

turn OFF the grid.

NOTE

When the grid is turned ON (when any grid item besides OFF is selected), clicking any control that is not aligned with the

grid position, will cause it to align with the nearest grid.

Please note that after copying multiple controls in one operation from the component editor and adjusting their positions

manually, their positions could become disarranged when you select them by clicking on them, if they do not already

align with the grid interval.

Furthermore, if you change the grid spacing after aligning the positions of controls in the user control editor/user module

editor, the controls will be placed into positions that do not align with the grid even if they are arranged using the align

buttons. When there are controls that do not align with the grid, turn the grid OFF.

Grid=10

Grid=20

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

291

User Control Editor/User Module Editor Context Menu

The context menus that appear when you right-click in a window will differ in operation mode and in

design mode. In design mode, other commands will be added, depending on where you click.

The context menu for the user module editor contains the [Set User Module As Master Layout]

command.

■ Operation Mode

Commands that are displayed in the context menus for operation mode will also be displayed in

design mode.

[Design Mode]

Switches between design mode and operation mode. When you are in design mode, a checkmark

will appear to the left of the command name.

[Peak Hold]

Tur ns the peak hold meter ON or OFF and performs a reset. The ON or OFF setting for peak hold

applies to the whole zone.

• [On]

When you select this, peak hold is turned ON, and a checkmark appears next to it. If you

select this item while it is checked, peak hold is turned OFF.

• [Reset]

Resets peak hold.

[Close All Editor Windows]

Closes all component editor windows.

[Open Parameter Link]

Opens the “Parameter Link” window. For information about the Parameter Link window, see

“Parameter Link” (page 73).

NOTE

Peak hold is a function that makes it easy to see the maximum signal value by lighting up at the level of the

maximum value as the signal peak comes in.

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

292

[Parameter Link Mode]

A checkmark appears when this is turned ON.

Tur ning this ON changes to parameter link mode, where group parameters can be linked.

When this is turned OFF, group parameters will not be linked, and they can be changed

individually. Turn this OFF when editing the offset for each parameter.

Parameter link mode is linked to the [Parameter Link] check box in the Parameter Link window.

[Set User Module As Master Layout] (User Module Editor Only)

Sets the layout of active user module editor as the master layout. The window size and the

background will be applied to user module editors created in the future.

■ The Context Menu Displayed in Design Mode When You Right-Click an Empty

Location

[Tab Order]

When using user control editors or user module editors, this function displays the order in which

you move through them by pressing the <Tab> key. When you select this command, numbers are

displayed next to the edit boxes. A checkmark appears next to [Tab Order] in the context menu. To

exit tab order settings, click [Tab Order] the context menu or click anywhere besides a tab order

number in the user control editor.

Clicking the displayed numbers changes the order. The numbers are changed in the order that

they are clicked. To exit tab order settings, click [Tab Order] the context menu or click anywhere

besides a tab order number in the user control editor.

→ See “Changing the Tab Order” on page 313.

[Set Background Image]

Sets a background image for a window. Clicking here displays the “Background Image” dialog

box.

→ See “Setting Background Images for Windows” on page 295.

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

293

■ The Context Menu Displayed in Design Mode When You Right-Click a Control

[Open Original Component Editor]

This menu is displayed when you right-click a control in design mode. It opens the component

editor for the control you clicked.

[Add Parameter to Parameter Link]

Adds a control to the parameter link group. Click the group name displayed in the submenu. See

“Creating Parameter Links” (page 314).

If you click a parameter link group name, a control is added to that group.

[Property]

Opens the properties dialog box for the control.

→ See “Control Properties” on page 303.

NOTE

There some controls, such as edit boxes and sliders, that do not display the [Property] command.

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

294

Changing the Window Size

In design mode, you can change the window size of the user control editor. If you align the mouse

pointer with a side or corner of the window, its shape will change into a double-headed arrow. When

the arrow is shaped like this, dragging it will change the size of the window.

Even if you change the width of the window, the library button will remain where it is, in the upper right

corner.

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

295

Setting Background Images for Windows

The default color for the user control editor/user module editor window background is black, the same

as for the component editor window. However, you can change the color or display an image in the

background. These settings are made in the “Background Image” dialog box. To display this dialog

box, right-click in the user control editor window while in design mode, then click [Set Background

Image] on the displayed context menu.

■ [Default]

Sets the background color to black, the same as the component editor. Select this if you have set

the background with [Color] or [Image], and you want to return to the original background.

■ [Color]

Sets the color of the background. Use the [Select Color] button to select a color.

[Select Color] Button

Clicking here displays the “Select color” dialog box. This sets the color of the background. For

information about the “Select color” dialog box, see page 203.

NOTE

If you select a light color, it may be difﬁcult to see the grid.

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

296

■ [Image]

Displays an image for the background. You can use image ﬁles in the following formats: BMP

(.bmp), PNG (.png), XPM (.xpm), and JPEG (.jpg). Use the [Select Image] button to select an

image ﬁle.

[Select Image] Button

Clicking here displays the “Select Image” dialog box. Here you can select an image ﬁle to be

displayed as the window background.

[Layout] Box

This box displays a list where you can select how the image ﬁle will be displayed.

• [Center]

Centers the image in the window.

• [Tile]

Displays multiple copies of the image side-by-side until the available space is ﬁlled. If the

image ﬁle is smaller than the window, it will be displayed repeatedly like tiles on a wall.

• [Fit]

Expands or reduces the size of the image to match the size of the window where it will be

displayed.

[File] Box

Speciﬁes a path for the image ﬁle.

Click the [Select Image] button and select an image ﬁle. The path will be automatically entered.

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

297

Placing Controls

Controls can be placed when you are in the design mode. You can turn the design mode ON and OFF

by right-clicking in the user control editor/user module editor, or component editor, then clicking the

[Design Mode] command in the context menu that is displayed.

You can place controls by dragging them from the component editor or by using the copy and paste

commands.

■ Selecting Controls

If you click a control in the component editor while in design mode, the control will be selected and

a red frame will be displayed around it. Controls like knobs, sliders, edit boxes, and labels are all

separate objects. Only the item clicked will be selected.

If you hold down the <Ctrl> key while clicking, you can select multiple controls and labels. If you

use <Ctrl> + click on a selected control, it will cancel that control’s selection.

If you position the mouse in an empty location on the sheet and start dragging from there, a frame

will be displayed as the pointer moves. All controls enclosed by that frame will be selected.

[Library]

Edit Palette

Knob

Slider

Edit Box

Buttons

Text

Graph

Solid Frame

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

298

■ Placing Controls by Dragging Them (User Control Editor)

You can drag the controls you want to copy from the component editor to the user control editor.

1 Open the component edit window that has the controls you will be placing in the user

control box.

2 Open the user control editor.

User control names are displayed in the [View] → [User Control] submenu in the Main Panel

window Click a user control name to open its window.

3 Right-click in the component editor or the user control editor.

The context menu will be displayed.

4 Click [Design Mode] on the menu.

Design mode will be turned ON.

5 Drag the controls from the component editor to the user control editor.

NOTE

If you drag controls like knobs and sliders, edit boxes and labels that show parameter types, and place them one-by-one

in the user control editor, they must be arranged in the user control editor. If you select multiple items and drag them, you

can copy them as a group into the user control editor, keeping their original arrangement.

When copying multiple controls from a single component editor, if you select all the controls you want copy and drag

them together as a unit, their original positional relationship and tab order will be maintained.

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

299

Arrange the controls in the user control editor.

■ Placing Controls by Dragging Them (User Module Editor)

You can drag the controls you want to copy from the component editor window in the user module

to the user module editor.

1 Create a user module, then arrange and connect the components for it.

2 Store the user module by checking [Double Click Action] ➞ [Open User Module Editor]

in the Store dialog box (see “Saving User Modules” on page 255 for details about

storing user modules).

3 Double-click a user module in the Conﬁguration window.

The user module editor and edit windows for the components arranged in the user module will

be displayed.

4 Right-click in the component editor or user module editor, then click the [Design Mode]

command in the context menu.

Design mode will be turned ON.

5 Drag the controls from the component editor to the user module editor.

Arrange the controls in the user control editor.

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

300

■ Placing Controls Using Copy and Paste

Copy the controls in the component editor and paste in the user control editor or user module

editor.

To copy controls in the component editor, press the [Copy] command shortcut keys, <Ctrl> + <C>.

To paste in the user control editor or user module editor, press the [Paste] command shortcut key,

<Ctrl> + <V>, or the [Paste] button on the edit palette.

1 Click on the source component editor window to make it active, then select the control

or controls you want to copy.

2 Press the <C> key while holding down the <Ctrl> key.

The selected controls will be copied to the clipboard.

3 With the target user control editor or user module editor active, press the <V> key while

holding down the <Ctrl> key.

You can also paste by clicking the [Paste] button on the edit palette.

The controls will be copied.

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

301

■ When You Cannot Copy

Regardless of whether you drag or use copy and paste, you cannot create multiple copies from the

same single component. If you drag controls that are already copied into the user control editor or

user module editor, the mouse pointer will change into the “unavailable” mark (a circle with a

diagonal slash), indicating that you cannot copy.

You can copy more than one component of the same type into the user control editor, as long as

they come from different components located in the conﬁguration or user module.

Controls for components arranged in the conﬁguration can be copied only to the user control

editor.

Controls for components arranged in a user module can be copied to both the user control editor

and the user module.

■ Order of Controls

Controls newly pasted in the user control editor will be displayed above any previously pasted

controls they overlap. The tab order for edit boxes will be the order in which they were pasted.

Because the order cannot be changed, paste solid frames with parameter groups arranged on

them before copying controls.

NOTE

In the component editor, you can select multiple controls using <Ctrl> + click or by dragging. Once controls are copied,

they will be pasted in the order in which they were copied.

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

302

Moving and Aligning Controls

In the user control editor or user module editor, you can move or align copied controls.

■ Selecting Controls

In the user control editor or user module editor, controls are selected in the same way as in the

component editor. Click a control to select it, or press <Ctrl> + click to select multiple controls. If

you use <Ctrl> + click on a selected control, it will cancel that control's selection. If you position the

mouse in an empty location in the user control editor or user module editor and start dragging from

there, a frame will be displayed as the pointer moves. All controls enclosed by that frame will be

selected.

A red frame will be drawn around the selected controls.

■ Moving Controls

Move selected controls by dragging them or by pressing the arrow keys on your keyboard. When

you select multiple controls using <Shift> + click, you can move all of them at the same time.

Dragging

When grid is ON, the upper left of the dragged controls will automatically align with the grid. When

dragging, the coordinates displayed here refer to the upper left corner of the object being

dragged. The “Distance to Right” and “Distance to Bottom” are displayed in pixel units, using the

upper-left of the window as a reference point.

When multiple controls are selected and dragged, the coordinates are those of the upper-left

corner of the control where the mouse is aligned.

Arrow Keys

When the grid is ON, the arrow keys move controls a grid unit at a time. When the grid is OFF,

controls are moved one pixel at a time.

■ Alignment

You can align controls using the following alignment buttons on the edit palette: [Align Left], [Align

Right], [Align To Top], [Align To Bottom], [Align Horizontally], [Align Vertically], [Horizontal/Center

Align], and [Vertical/Center Align].

You can only use the [Align Horizontally] or [Align Vertically] buttons when three or more controls

are selected.

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

303

Cut/Copy/Paste Controls

You can edit controls arranged in the user control editor or user module editor using the [Cut], [Copy],

and [Paste] commands in the edit palette.

■ Cut

Cuts controls arranged in the user control editor. Select one or more controls, then press the [Cut]

button on the edit palette

■ Copy

Copies controls arranged in the user control editor or user module editor. Select one or more

controls, then press the [Copy] button on the edit palette.

■ Paste

Pastes cut or copied controls. Click the [Paste] button on the edit palette. If you cannot paste, the

button color turns pale.

■ Delete

Controls can be deleted by selecting them and pressing the <Delete> key.

Undo and Redo Commands During Editing

You can undo or redo control movements, size changes, or deletions using the [Undo] and [Redo]

commands in the [Edit] menu.

Control Properties

A properties dialog box will open when you either double click a controller in the User Control Editor or

User Module Editor, or right-click the controller and select [Properties] from the contextual menu. Here

you can specify a design for the controller.

Multiple properties of the same type can be set at the same time by clicking the controllers while

holding the <Ctrl> key and then opening the properties dialog box.

Edited items are shown in bold text until you either click [OK] or [Cancel].

NOTE

If you close an editor window, you will no longer be able to undo and redo operations performed there.

NOTE

Sliders have no property settings.

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

304

■ “Knob Properties” Dialog Box

When you right-click on a knob, then select [Properties] from the context menu, the “Knob

Properties” dialog box will be displayed. This dialog box sets the size of the knob.

[Size]

Displays a list where you can select the knob size. Select [Large], [Medium], [Small], or [Very

Small].

[Color]

Select a color from the list: [White], [Red], [Yellow], [Green], [Blue], or [Violet].

■ “Toggle Button Properties” Dialog Box

The Toggle Button Properties dialog box will appear when you either double click the ON/OFF

button or right-click it and select [Properties] from the contextual menu. This sets the text displayed

by the button, along with the color of the button.

[Text] box

Enter the text to be displayed by the button. You can set different text for when the button is ON and

for when it is OFF.

[Size]

Select a button size from the list: [Small (37x11)], [Small (51x11], [Medium (74x11)], [Medium

(74x22)], or [Large (111x33)].

NOTE

You can change the size of a knob by dragging one of the marks at the four corners (top, bottom, left, right) of the knob

in the user control editor.

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

305

[Color]

Displays a list where you can select the color of the button. If you click the [▼], a list of button

colors will be displayed.

[Text Font] Button

Sets the font, size and style. Clicking here displays the “Select Font” dialog box.

For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see page 202.

■ “Radio Button Properties” Dialog Box

The Radio Button Properties dialog box will appear when you either double click a radio button or

right-click it and select [Properties] from the contextual menu. You can set the button's color, size,

and font.

[Color]

Select a color from the list: [White], [Red], [Yellow], [Green], [Blue], or [Violet].

[Size]

Select a button size from the list: [Small (37x11)], [Small (44x11], [Medium (75x11)], [Medium

(74x22)], or [Large (111x33)].

[Text] Box

Enter the text to be displayed by the button.

[Text Font] Button

Sets the font, size and style. Clicking here displays the “Select Font” dialog box.

For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see page 202.

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

306

■ “Text Properties” Dialog Box

The Text Properties dialog box will appear when you either double click a parameter name or other

text, or right-click it and select [Properties] from the contextual menu. Here you can enter the text to

be displayed.

[Text] Box

Enter the text to be displayed by the button.

[Text Font] button

Click this button to display the “Select Font” dialog box. Sets the font, font size, and style. For

information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see page 203.

[Alignment]

Speciﬁes the horizontal alignment of the text: [Left], [Center], or [Right].

[Rotate]

Rotates the text by the speciﬁed angle: [-90], [0], [90], or [180].

[Link Component Editor]

Speciﬁes the component editor to be opened when text is clicked.

[Text Color] Button

Click this button to display the “Select Color” dialog box. Sets the color of the text. For information

about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203.

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

307

■ Edit Box Properties

The Edit Box Properties dialog box will appear when you either double click an edit box or right-

click it and select [Properties] from the contextual menu. Here you can set the edit box size.

[Size]

Select an edit box size from the list: [Large], [Medium], or [Small].

■ Level Meter Properties

The Level Meter Properties dialog box will appear when you either double click a level meter or

right-click it and select [Properties] from the contextual menu. Here you can specify the number of

meter segments and scale.

[Segment]

Select a number of meter segments from the list: [2], [6], or [60].

[Scale]

Select the type of scale to be displayed beside the meter from the list. This option is only available

when [Segment] is set to 60.

■ “Solid Frame Properties” Dialog Box

The Solid Frame Properties dialog box will appear when you right-click a solid frame and select

[Properties] from the contextual menu. Here you can enter the text to be displayed. Here you can

set the frame size and divider location.

Frame Size

The width is set using the [Width] and the height is set using [Height]. The units are pixels.

Partition Line/Sub-Partition Line

Sets partition lines within the frame. [Partition Line] is a long partition line displayed from end to

end, and [Sub-Partition Line] is a short partition line.

• [Direction]

Select the direction of a partition line from the list. [Vertical] inserts a vertical partition line and

[Horizontal] inserts a horizontal partition line. When [None] is select, partition lines are not

displayed.

NOTE

You can change the size of a frame by dragging one of the marks at the four corners (top, bottom, left, right) of the frame

in the user control editor.

Partition Line

Sub-Partition Line

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

308

•[Position]

Displays the currently set line position. Displays the number of pixels from the top of the solid

frame when [Vertical] is selected for the [Direction], and the number of pixels from the left of

the solid frame when [Horizontal] is selected.

• [Add] Button

If you set the position of the partition line in the box on the right and click the [Add] button, the

partition line will be added and displayed in the [Position] list.

• [Delete] Button

Deletes the partition line selected in the [Position] list.

■ “Color Frame Properties” Dialog Box

The Color Frame Properties dialog box will appear when you right-click a solid frame and select

[Properties] from the contextual menu. Here you can enter the text to be displayed. Here you can

set the frame size and divider location.

Frame Size

The width is set using the [Width] and the height is set using [Height]. The units are pixels and the

minimum value is 3.

Frame Color

Sets the color of the color frame.

Click this button to display the “Select color” dialog box. For information about the “Select color”

dialog box, see page 203.

Fill Color

Sets the frame ﬁll color.

Click the [Select Color] button to display the “Select color” dialog box. Refer to “Select Color”

Dialog Box in the Object section on page 203 for information on this dialog box.

Line Width

Sets the thickness of the lines at [Top]/[Left]/[Right]/[Bottom]. Set “0” to display no lines.

NOTE

You can change the position of a partition line by dragging one of the marks on the line in the user control editor.

NOTE

You can change the size of a frame by dragging one of the marks at the four corners (top, bottom, left, right) of the frame

in the user control editor.

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

309

■ User Picture Properties Dialog Box

Right-click the image and select [Properties] from the contextual menu to display the User Picture

Properties dialog box.

[File Path] Box

Displays the path to the graphic ﬁle.

[Select File] Button

Selects a graphic ﬁle.

Size

• [Width]

Speciﬁes the width in pixels.

• [Height]

Speciﬁes the height in pixels.

• [Reset] Button

Click to display the graphic at it's original size.

• [Stretch]

When ON, the graphic will be enlarged when a size that is bigger than it's original size is

speciﬁed.

[Link Component Editor]

When ON, clicking the [Select Component] button selects the editor that is opened when the

graphic is clicked.

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

310

■ Text Properties Dialog Box

Right-click the text box and select [Properties] from the contextual menu to display the Text

Properties dialog box.

[Text] Box

Displays and edits the text to be displayed.

[Text Font]

Selects the font. Click to display the Select Font dialog box.

Refer to “Select Font” Dialog Box on page 202 for more information on the Select Font dialog box.

[Text Color] Button

Sets the text color. Click to display the Select Color dialog box.

[Alignment]

Selects [Left], [Center], or [Right] text alignment.

[Rotate]

Rotates the text box.

[Link Component Editor]

When ON, clicking the [Select Component] button selects the editor that is opened when the text

box is clicked.

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

311

■ Box Properties Dialog Box

Right-click the box and select [Properties] from the contextual menu to display the Box Properties

dialog box.

Box Size

• [Width]

Speciﬁes the width in pixels.

• [Height]

Speciﬁes the height in pixels.

Box Style

• [Style]

Sets the style of the object. Select [Plain], [Raised], or [Sunken] from the list.

• [Round Corner]

Turn ON to produce a round-cornered box. Use [Curve] to select the degree of roundness.

Line

•[Type]

Select a type of frame line from the list: [Solid], [Dash], [Dot], [Dash Dot]. Or [Dash Dot Dot].

• [Size]

Sets the thickness of the frame line in pixels. The range is from 1 to 100.

• [Select Color] Button

Sets the color of the frame line. Click to display the “Select color” dialog box.

Refer to “Select Color” Dialog Box on page 203 for more information on the Select Color

dialog box.

Fill Color

• [Select Color] Button

Sets the frame ﬁll color. Click to display the “Select color” dialog box.

Refer to “Select Color” Dialog Box on page 203 for more information on the Select Color

dialog box.

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

312

■ Ellipse Properties Dialog Box

Right-click the ellipse and select [Properties] from the contextual menu to display the Ellipse

Properties dialog box.

Ellipse Size

• [Width]

Speciﬁes the width in pixels.

• [Height]

Speciﬁes the height in pixels.

Line

•[Type]

Select a type of frame line from the list: [Solid], [Dash], [Dot], [Dash Dot]. Or [Dash Dot Dot].

• [Size]

Sets the thickness of the frame line in pixels. The range is from 1 to 100.

• [Select Color] Button

Sets the color of the frame line. Click to display the “Select color” dialog box.

Refer to “Select Color” Dialog Box on page 203 for more information on the Select color dialog

box.

Fill Color

Sets the ellipse ﬁll color when ON.

• [Select Color] Button

Sets the ellipse ﬁll color. Click to display the “Select color” dialog box.

Refer to “Select Color” Dialog Box on page 203 for more information on the Select color dialog

box.

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

313

Changing the Tab Order

The tab order for controls is determined by the order in which they were pasted into the user control

editor or user module editor. If you right-click the user control editor or user module editor, you can

check or change the tab order using the [Tab Order] command on the context menu.

If you select the [Tab Order] command, tab order numbers will be displayed at the upper-left of each

edit box. Clicking the displayed numbers changes the order.

1 Right-click in the user control editor or user module editor.

The context menu will be displayed.

2 Click [Tab Order] in the context menu.

Numbers for the current tab order are displayed to the upper-left of each edit box.

3 Click the tab order numbers in the order in which you want to set the tab order.

Even if you do not want to change tab order number 1, click all the numbers in the order you desire,

starting from number 1. When you click on each number, it will change to the number that reﬂects

the order in which it was clicked.

4 Once you have ﬁnished specifying the order, click somewhere within the window

where there is no tab number.

The tab order numbers will disappear.

The changed tab order will apply the next time DME Designer is started.

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

314

Creating Parameter Links

You can group controls (parameters) and link their parameters. You can create parameter link groups

and add controls to them in the component editor. Parameter link settings are made in the Parameter

Link window. For information about parameter links and the Parameter Link window, see “Parameter

Link” (page 73).

■ Creating Parameter Links

If you right-click on a control, a context menu will be displayed.

The [Global Link] → [Add Group] and [Local Link] → [Add Group] commands create new groups.

Controls can be added by right-clicking.

■ Adding Controls to a Group

If you right-click a control in the component editor, a context menu will be displayed. You can

create groups or add controls using commands in the [Add Parameter to Parameter Link]

submenu. Groups that do not have the same type of parameters will be grayed out and cannot be

selected.

Global Link

The group names for global link groups are displayed in the [Global Link] submenu. When you

click a group name, a control is added to the group.

NOTE

A parameter can belong to one group only. Furthermore, only parameters of the same type can be grouped.

Chapter 5 Components

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

315

Local Link

The group names for local like groups are displayed in the [Local Link] submenu. When you click a

group name, a control is added to the group.

■ Adding Multiple Controls

You can select multiple controls in Design Mode. When multiple controls are selected, multiple

parameters can be added to a group simultaneously.

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

316

Chapter 6 Component Guide

Crossover

Separates input signals into multiple frequency channels and outputs them. The following ﬁve types of

components are available in the Crossover group: 2 Way, 3 Way, 4 Way, 5 Way, and 6 Way.

Crossover components have a single input and multiple outputs.

Double-click a component to display the component editor for it.

Name Function

1 Crossover Curve Displays the level of each frequency band,

distinguished by color.

Section Parameter Setting Range Function

2 Input Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the input signal level.

3 Output Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level for each

frequency band.

4 Mute ON/OFF Mutes the output signal level for each

frequency band.

5 Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the output signal for

each frequency band.

6 Frequency Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the cross frequency between each

frequency band.

8 9

)

! @

Crossover component

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

317

The number of output channels varies according to the component variation.

Set the attenuation curve for the lowest band and the middle bands with the Low Pass Filter (LPF) and

High Pass Filter (HPF), and the highest band with HPF. Each frequency band has its own color, with

Low being red, Mid being green, and so on. These correspond to the colors of the lines on the graph.

7 LPF Type Thru

6 dB/Oct

12 dB/Oct AdjustGc

12 dB/Oct Butrwrth

12 dB/Oct Bessel

12 dB/Oct Linkwitz

18 dB/Oct AdjustGc

18 dB/Oct Butrwrth

18 dB/Oct Bessel

24 dB/Oct AdjustGc

24 dB/Oct Butrwrth

24 dB/Oct Bessel

24 dB/Oct Linkwitz

36 dB/Oct AdjustGc

36 dB/Oct Butrwrth

36 dB/Oct Bessel

48 dB/Oct AdjustGc

48 dB/Oct Butrwrth

48 dB/Oct Bessel

48 dB/Oct Linkwitz

Sets the attenuation for each octave and the

ﬁlter type.

[THRU] turns off the ﬁlter.

8 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the LPF cutoff frequency.

9 Gc -6 dB to +6 dB When [AdjustGc] (Adjustable Gc) is selected

for [Type], this sets the gain for the cutoff

frequency.

) HPF Type Thru

6 dB/Oct

12 dB/Oct AdjustGc

12 dB/Oct Butrwrth

12 dB/Oct Bessel

12 dB/Oct Linkwitz

18 dB/Oct AdjustGc

18 dB/Oct Butrwrth

18 dB/Oct Bessel

24 dB/Oct AdjustGc

24 dB/Oct Butrwrth

24 dB/Oct Bessel

24 dB/Oct Linkwitz

36 dB/Oct AdjustGc

36 dB/Oct Butrwrth

36 dB/Oct Bessel

48 dB/Oct AdjustGc

48 dB/Oct Butrwrth

48 dB/Oct Bessel

48 dB/Oct Linkwitz

Sets the attenuation for each octave and the

ﬁlter type.

[THRU] turns off the ﬁlter.

! Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the HPF cutoff frequency.

@ Gc -6 dB to +6 dB When [AdjustGc] (Adjustable Gc) is selected

for [Type], this sets the gain for the cutoff

frequency.

2 Way Low/High

3 Way Low/Mid/High

4 Way Low/Low-Mid/High-Mid/High

5 Way Sub-Low/Low/Low-Mid/High-Mid/High

6 Way Sub-Low/Low/Low-Mid/Mid/High-Mid/High

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

318

■ Graphic Control Points

The graph control points show [Output Level] and [Frequency]. As you modify the parameters

using the knobs and edit boxes, the control points move. Also, as you drag the points, the [Output

Level] and [Frequency] parameters reﬂect the changes you make.

You can adjust the [Output Level] parameter by vertically dragging the control point in the center of

each curve.

You can adjust the [Frequency] parameter by horizontally dragging the control point at the

intersection of the curves for each frequency band.

Changing the [Output Level] Parameter

Changing the [Frequency] Parameter

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

319

■ LFP/HPF

[Type] sets the attenuation slope and the ﬁlter type for the LPF and HPF. The selected items are

displayed on the buttons. Clicking these buttons displays a menu. Combinations of six slope types

and four ﬁlter types are available. [6dB/Oct], [12dB/Oct], [18dB/Oct], [24dB/Oct], [36dB/Oct], and

[48dB/Oct] set the attenuation per octave. A low value produces gentle attenuation. A large value

produces sudden attenuation.

• THRU

No ﬁlter is applied. There is no attenuation, which produces a level line at all frequencies.

• AdjustGc (Adjustable Gc)

With this setting, you can adjust Gc (gain on the cutoff frequency) between -6 dB and +6 dB.

If you set -3 dB it becomes a Butterworth ﬁlter. If you set -6 dB, it becomes Linkwitz-Riley ﬁlter.

When you select Adjustable Gc, the Gc knob is displayed.

• Butrwrth (Butterworth)

This ﬁlter has the most general characteristics. The pass band is ﬂat and the gain for the

cutoff frequency is -3 dB.

• Bessel

For curves where phase characteristics are important, Bessel has gentler attenuation than

Butterworth, and there is little distortion of the waveform when square waves are passed

through.

• Linkwitz (Linkwitz-Riley)

As second-order ﬁlters, the sum of the output voltages for LPF and HPF have a gain of 0 dB

across the entire band. The pass band is ﬂat, but the cutoff frequency gain is -6 dB.

Type

Linkwitz-Riley

Butterworth

Bessel

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

320

Crossover Processor

A crossover processor consists of a crossover, delay, parametric equalizer, and compressor. After the

input signal is processed by the crossover, effects of the delay, parametric equalizer, and compressor

are applied to each frequency band. The following two types are available in the Crossover Processor

group: Crossover Processor and Crossover Processor II.

Crossover Processor

The following ﬁve types of components are available in the Crossover Processor group: 2 Way, 3 Way,

4 Way, 5 Way, and 6 Way. Crossover processors have a single input and 2 to 6 outputs.

Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. Band numbers may vary depending

on the component, but they share a common conﬁguration in the component editor.

If you click the [Crossover], [Compressor], [PEQ], or [Delay] button in the [Navigator] section, an

editor for the crossover, compressor, parametric equalizer, or delay will be displayed in a separate

window. A separate component editor will open for each output channel (such as Low or Mid) when

you click on the compressor, parametric equalizer, or delay.

Section Parameter Setting Range Function

1 Navigator Crossover -- This opens the crossover editor window.

2 Delay -- This opens the delay editor window.

3 PEQ -- This opens the parametric equalizer editor

window.

4 Compressor -- This opens the compressor editor window.

5 Input Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the input signal level.

6 Output Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the output signal level for each

frequency band.

7 Mute ON/OFF Mutes the signal for each frequency band.

8 Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the output signal for

each frequency band.

2 3 4

Component editor for Crossover Processor

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

321

The output number varies according to the component variation.

Set the attenuation curve for the lowest band and the middle bands with the Low Pass Filter (LPF) and

High Pass Filter (HPF), and the highest band with HPF. Each frequency band has its own color, with

Low being red, Mid being green, and so on. These correspond to the colors of the lines on the graph.

■ Crossover

When you click the [Crossover] button for the crossover processor, it opens the crossover editor

window.

2 Way Low/High

3 Way Low/Mid/High

4 Way Low/Low-Mid/High-Mid/High

5 Way Sub-Low/Low/Low-Mid/High-Mid/High

6 Way Sub-Low/Low/Low-Mid/Mid/High-Mid/High

Name Function

1 Crossover Curve Displays the level of each frequency channel,

distinguished by color.

Section Parameter Setting Range Function

2 Frequency Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the cross frequency between each

frequency band.

7 8 4 5

[Crossover Processor-Crossover] editor window

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

322

3 LPF Type Thru

6 dB/Oct

12 dB/Oct AdjustGc

12 dB/Oct Butrwrth

12 dB/Oct Bessel

12 dB/Oct Linkwitz

18 dB/Oct AdjustGc

18 dB/Oct Butrwrth

18 dB/Oct Bessel

24 dB/Oct AdjustGc

24 dB/Oct Butrwrth

24 dB/Oct Bessel

24 dB/Oct Linkwitz

36 dB/Oct AdjustGc

36 dB/Oct Butrwrth

36 dB/Oct Bessel

48 dB/Oct AdjustGc

48 dB/Oct Butrwrth

48 dB/Oct Bessel

48 dB/Oct Linkwitz

Sets the attenuation for each octave and the

ﬁlter type.

[THRU] turns off the ﬁlter.

4 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the LPF cutoff frequency.

5 Gc -6 dB to +6 dB When [AdjustGc] (Adjustable Gc) is selected

for [Type], this sets the gain for the cutoff

frequency.

6 HPF Type Thru

6 dB/Oct

12 dB/Oct AdjustGc

12 dB/Oct Butrwrth

12 dB/Oct Bessel

12 dB/Oct Linkwitz

18 dB/Oct AdjustGc

18 dB/Oct Butrwrth

18 dB/Oct Bessel

24 dB/Oct AdjustGc

24 dB/Oct Butrwrth

24 dB/Oct Bessel

24 dB/Oct Linkwitz

36 dB/Oct AdjustGc

36 dB/Oct Butrwrth

36 dB/Oct Bessel

48 dB/Oct AdjustGc

48 dB/Oct Butrwrth

48 dB/Oct Bessel

48 dB/Oct Linkwitz

Sets the attenuation for each octave and the

ﬁlter type.

[THRU] turns off the ﬁlter.

7 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the HPF cutoff frequency.

8 Gc -6 dB to +6 dB When [AdjustGc] (Adjustable Gc) is selected

for [Type], this sets the gain for the cutoff

frequency.

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

323

■ Delay

When you click the [Delay] button for the crossover processor, it opens the delay editor window.

Here you can set the delay for each frequency band.

Parameter Setting Range Function

1 Delay ms: 0 to 500

Sample: the range

depends on the Fs value.

Meter: 0 to 171.8

Feet: 0 to 563.6

Frame: the range depends

on the Frame value.

Beat: the range depends

on the Beat value.

Sets the delay time.

2 Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level for each channel

3 On ON/OFF Turns delay ON.

4 Mute ON/OFF Mutes the signal for each frequency band.

5 Delay Scale ms

Sample

Meter

Feet

Frame

Beat

Selects the units for setting the delay time. The

selected button will light up, and the units in the [Delay]

edit box will change.

If [Beat] is selected, use the knob to set the BPM

(beats/minute).

[Crossover Processor - Delay] editor window

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

324

■ Parametric Equalizer

When you click [PEQ] button for the crossover processor, it opens the parametric equalizer editor

window. Here you can make parametric equalizer settings for each frequency band.

Name Function

1 PEQ Curve Displays the PEQ curve.

Parameter Setting Range Function

2 Type PEQ

L.SHELF 6 dB/Oct

L.SHELF 12 dB/Oct

H.SHELF 6 dB/Oct

H.SHELF 12 dB/Oct

HPF

LPF

Select the ﬁlter type from a menu.

3 Q: 0.1 to 16.0 Sets the frequency band width for each band.

4 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the frequency for each band.

5 Gain -18 dB to +18 dB Sets the gain for each band.

6 Bypass ON/OFF Turns ON bypass for each band.

7 PEQ On ON/OFF Turns the PEQ ON.

[Crossover Processor-PEQ] editor window

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

325

■ Compressor

When you click the [Compressor] button for the crossover processor, it opens the compressor

editor window. Here you can make compressor settings for each frequency band.

Name Function

1 Compressor Curve Displays results graphically. The horizontal axis is the

input signal level, and the vertical axis is the output

level.

2 Gain Reduction Meter Displays the gain reduction attenuation.

3 Output Meter Displays the output signal level.

Parameter Setting Range Function

4 Threshold -54 dB to ±0 dB Sets the threshold value.

5 Ratio 1:1 to ∞:1 Sets the compression ratio.

6 Knee HARD, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 Sets the way compression is applied.

7 Attack 0 to 120 ms Sets the attack time.

8 Release 44.1 kHz: 6 ms to 46 s

48 kHz: 5 ms to 42.3 s

88.2 kHz: 3 ms to 23 s

96 kHz: 3 ms to 21.1 s

Sets the release time.

The setting range may very, depending on the

operating frequency.

9 Gain ±0 dB to +18 dB Sets the output gain.

) On ON/OFF Turns the compressor ON. When you turn this button

OFF, the compressor is bypassed.

2 )3

4 5 6

7 8 9

[Crossover Processor-Compressor] editor window

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

326

Crossover Processor II

The following ﬁve types of components are available in the Crossover Processor II group: 2 Way, 3

Way, 4 Way, 5 Way, and 6 Way. Crossover processor II components have a single input and 2 to 6

outputs.

Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The number of bands may vary

depending on the component, but they share a common conﬁguration in the component editor.

There are input and output level meters in the upper part of the window. If you click the [Crossover],

[Delay], [PEQ], or [Compressor] button in the [Navigator] section, an editor for the crossover, delay,

parametric equalizer, or compressor will be displayed in a separate window. A separate component

editor will open for each output channel (such as Low or Mid) when you click on the delay, parametric

equalizer, or compressor.

Name Function

1 Input Meter Displays the input signal level.

2 Output Meter Displays the output signal level.

Section Parameter Setting Range Function

3 Input Gain -∞ to +10 dB Sets the input signal level.

4 Mute ON/OFF Mutes the input signal.

5 Output Gain -∞ to +10 dB Sets the output signal level for each

frequency band.

6 Mute ON/OFF Mutes the output signal for each frequency

band.

56 )987

Crossover Processor II

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

327

■ Crossover

When you click the [Crossover] button for the crossover processor, it opens the crossover editor

window.

7 Navigator Crossover -- This opens the crossover editor window.

8 Delay -- This opens the delay editor window.

9 PEQ -- This opens the parametric equalizer editor

window.

) Compressor -- This opens the compressor editor window.

Name Function

1 Crossover Curve Displays the level of each frequency band,

distinguished by color.

Section Parameter Setting Range Function

2 Frequency Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the cross frequency between each

frequency band.

3 Polarity Polarity Normal/Inverted Reverses the output signal phase for each

frequency band.

4 Mute Mute ON/OFF Mutes the signal for each frequency band.

This is linked to the Mute setting in the

original window. The display appears as a

dotted line when muted.

Name Function

679)

Crossover Processor II component editor

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

328

5 LPF Type Thru

6 dB/Oct

12 dB/Oct AdjustGc

12 dB/Oct Butrwrth

12 dB/Oct Bessel

12 dB/Oct Linkwitz

18 dB/Oct AdjustGc

18 dB/Oct Butrwrth

18 dB/Oct Bessel

24 dB/Oct AdjustGc

24 dB/Oct Butrwrth

24 dB/Oct Bessel

24 dB/Oct Linkwitz

36 dB/Oct AdjustGc

36 dB/Oct Butrwrth

36 dB/Oct Bessel

48 dB/Oct AdjustGc

48 dB/Oct Butrwrth

48 dB/Oct Bessel

48 dB/Oct Linkwitz

Sets the attenuation for each octave and the

ﬁlter type.

[THRU] turns off the ﬁlter.

6 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the LPF cutoff frequency.

7 Gc -6 dB to 6 dB When [Adjustable Gc] is selected for [Type],

this sets the gain for the cutoff frequency.

8 HPF Type Thru

6 dB/Oct

12 dB/Oct AdjustGc

12 dB/Oct Butrwrth

12 dB/Oct Bessel

12 dB/Oct Linkwitz

18 dB/Oct AdjustGc

18 dB/Oct Butrwrth

18 dB/Oct Bessel

24 dB/Oct AdjustGc

24 dB/Oct Butrwrth

24 dB/Oct Bessel

24 dB/Oct Linkwitz

36 dB/Oct AdjustGc

36 dB/Oct Butrwrth

36 dB/Oct Bessel

48 dB/Oct AdjustGc

48 dB/Oct Butrwrth

48 dB/Oct Bessel

48 dB/Oct Linkwitz

Sets the attenuation for each octave and the

ﬁlter type.

[THRU] turns off the ﬁlter.

9 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the HPF cutoff frequency.

) Gc -6 dB to 6 dB When [Adjustable Gc] is selected for [Type],

this sets the gain for the cutoff frequency.

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

329

■ Delay

When you click the [Delay] button for the crossover processor, it opens the delay editor window.

Here you can set the delay for each frequency band.

Parameter Setting Range Function

1 Delay ms: 0 to 500

Sample: the range depends on the Fs value.

Meter: 0 to 171.8

Feet: 0 to 563.6

Frame: the range depends on the Frame value.

Beat: the range depends on the Beat value.

Sets the delay time.

2 Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level for each

channel.

3 On ON/OFF Turns delay ON.

4 Delay Scale ms

Sample

Meter

Feet

Frame

Beat

Selects the units for setting the delay

time. The selected button will light up,

and the units in the [Delay] edit box

will change.

If [Beat] is selected, use the knob to

set the BPM (beats/minute).

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

330

■ Parametric Equalizer

When you click the [PEQ] button for the crossover processor, it opens the parametric equalizer

editor window. Here you can make parametric equalizer settings for each frequency band.

Name Function

PEQ Curve Displays the PEQ curve.

Parameter Setting Range Function

2 Type PEQ

L.SHELF 6 dB/Oct

L.SHELF 12 dB/Oct

H.SHELF 6 dB/Oct

H.SHELF 12 dB/Oct

HPF

LPF

Select the ﬁlter type from the menu.

3 Q 0.1 to 16.0 Sets the band width of each band.

4 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the frequency of each band.

5 Gain -18 dB to +18 dB Sets the frequency gain for each band.

6 Bypass ON/OFF Bypasses all PEQ bands.

7 PEQ On ON/OFF Turn the PEQ ON.

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

331

■ Compressor

When you click the [Compressor] button for the crossover processor, it opens the compressor

editor window. Here you can make compressor settings for each frequency band.

Name Function

1 Compressor Curve Displays results graphically. The horizontal axis is the

input signal level, and the vertical axis is the output

level.

2 Gain Reduction Meter Displays the gain reduction attenuation.

3 Output Meter Displays the output signal level.

Parameter Setting Range Function

4 Threshold -54 dB to ±0 dB Sets the threshold value.

5 Ratio 1:1 to ∞:1 Sets the compression ratio.

6 Knee HARD, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 Sets the way compression is applied.

7 Attack 0 to 120 ms Sets the attack time.

8 Release 44.1 kHz: 6 ms to 46 s

48 kHz: 5 ms to 42.3 s

88.2 kHz: 3 ms to 23 s

96 kHz: 3 ms to 21.1 s

Sets the release time.

The setting range may vary, depending on the

operating frequency.

9 Gain ±0 dB to +18 dB Sets the output gain.

) On ON/OFF Turns the compressor ON. When you turn this button

OFF, the compressor is bypassed.

23 )

4 5 6

7 8 9

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

332

Delay

This is a multi-tap delay that provides independent delay and level control for each output. You can

specify the delay time in milliseconds, samples, meters, feet, time code frames, or number of beats.

Within the delay group, there are two subgroups called Long and Short. Each has a different setting

range for the delay.

Delay Long

Delay long components are available with from one to eight outputs. Each has a single input and from

one to eight outputs.

Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. Only the number of outputs in each

component is different. The other parts are the same.

Section Parameter Setting Range Function

1 Delay All Bypass ON/OFF Bypasses from input to output.

2 Input Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the input signal level.

3 Mute ON/OFF Mute the input signal.

4 Delay Tap Delay ms: 0 to 1300

Sample: the range depends

on the Fs value.

Meter: 0 to 446.7

Feet: 0 to 1465.4

Frame: the range depends on

the Frame value.

Beat: the range depends on

the Beat value.

Sets the delay time.

There are two edit boxes, displaying

milliseconds and the units selected for [Delay

Scale].

5 Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level for each channel.

6 On ON/OFF Turns ON each channel’s delay.

7 Mute ON/OFF Turns ON muting for each channel’s output.

8 Delay Scale Delay Scale ms

Sample

Meter

Feet

Frame

Beat

Selects the units for setting the delay time.

The selected button will light up, and the

units in the [Delay] edit box will change.

If [Beat] is selected, use the knob to set the

BPM (beats/minute).

Delay Long Component Editor

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

333

Delay Short

Delay short components are available with from one to eight outputs. Each has a single input and from

one to eight outputs.

Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. Only the number of outputs in each

component is different. The other parts are the same.

Section Parameter Setting Range Function

1 Delay All Bypass ON/OFF Bypasses from input to output.

2 Input Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the input signal level.

3 Mute ON/OFF Mute the input signal.

4 Delay Tap Delay ms: 0 to 130

Sample: the range depends

on the Fs value.

Meter: 0 to 44.7

Feet: 0 to 146.5

Frame: the range depends on

the Frame value.

Beat: the range depends on

the Beat value.

Sets the delay time.

There are two edit boxes, displaying

milliseconds and the units selected for [Delay

Scale].

5 Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level for each channel.

6 On ON/OFF Turns ON each channel’s delay.

7 Mute ON/OFF Turns ON muting for each channel’s output.

8 Delay Scale Delay Scale ms

Sample

Meter

Feet

Frame

Beat

Selects the units for setting the delay time.

The selected button will light up, and the

units in the [Delay] edit box will change.

If [Beat] is selected, use the knob to set the

BPM (beats/minute).

Delay-Short component editor

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

334

Dynamics

Components in the dynamic group adjust the dynamic range of the sound. There are eight types of

components, each of which is available in mono channel and stereo channel versions. The seven

types are: compander hard, compander soft, compressor, de-esser, ducking, expander, gate, and

limiter.

■ KeyIn

All components in the dynamic group, except the de-esser, have KeyIn input. This is used as a

trigger source that activates the effects of the component.

The trigger source is set in the [KeyIn] section of the component editor.

The currently selected trigger source is displayed on the button. Click the button and select the

trigger source from the menu.

• [SELF]

Sets the input signal as the trigger source for mono channel components.

• [L]/[R]

Sets the left or right input signal as the trigger source for stereo channel components.

• [LR BOTH]

Sets both the left and right input signals as the trigger source for stereo channel components.

The strongest input signal will be the trigger source, whether from the left or right channel.

• [KEYIN]

The KeyIn input will be the trigger source.

[KeyIn] Section

Mono channel

Stereo channel

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

335

Compander

The compander combines the effects of a compressor and an expander. A compressor compresses

signals that exceed the threshold, while the expander reduces signals that fall below the threshold.

There are two compander groups, CompanderH (compander hard) and CompanderS (compander

soft). Within each group, there are mono channel and stereo channel companders.

Mono channel companders have one input, one output, and one KeyIn input. Stereo channel

companders have two inputs, two outputs, and one KeyIn input.

Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for

mono channel and stereo channel components.

The compander hard and compander soft differ in the compression ratio of their ﬁxed expander. The

expander compression is expressed by the straight portion of the lower-left part of the compander

curve. The compression ratio of the compander hard is large. The slope is also large. The

compression ratio of the compander soft is small, with a gentle compression. The parameters in the

component editor are the same.

Name Function

1 Compander Curve Displays results graphically. The horizontal axis is

the input signal level, and the vertical axis is the

output level.

2 Gain Reduction Meter Displays the gain reduction attenuation.

3 Output Meter Displays the output signal level.

Parameter Setting Range Function

4 Threshold -54 dB to ±0 dB Sets the threshold value.

5 Ratio 1:1 to ∞:1 Sets the compression ratio.

6 Width +1 dB to +90 dB Sets the width of the expander.

7 Attack 0 to 120 ms Sets the attack time.

8 Release 44.1 kHz: 6 ms to 46 s

48 kHz: 5 ms to 42.3 s

88.2 kHz: 3 ms to 23 s

96 kHz: 3 ms to 21.1 s

Sets the release time.

The setting range may very, depending on the

operating frequency.

9 Gain -18 dB to ±0 dB Sets the output gain.

CompanderH

Mono channel

Stereo channel

CompanderS

Mono channel

Stereo channel

2 ) !3

4 5 6

7 8 9

2 ) !3

4 5 6

7 8 9

CompanderH Mono component editor CompanderS Stereo component editor

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

336

Compressor

Compresses signals that exceed a threshold. Narrows the dynamic range of the signal, making it

easier to mix or record signals with a wide dynamic range such as vocals or piano music. Both mono

channel and stereo channel compressors are provided.

Mono channel compressors have one input, one output, and one KeyIn input. Stereo channel

compressors have two inputs, two outputs, and one KeyIn input.

Double-click a component to open the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for mono

channel and stereo channel components.

) KeyIn Mono SELF

KEYIN

Selects the trigger source from a menu. The

currently selected trigger source is displayed on the

button.

Stereo L

LR BOTH

KEYIN

! On ON/OFF Turns the compander ON.

–70

–60

–50

–40

–30

–20

–10

+10

+20

–70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20

Input Level (dB)

Output Level (dB)

Width=25

Ratio=4:1

Threshold=–25dB

2 ) !3

4 5 6

7 8 9

Compressor component editor

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

337

De-Esser

Compresses the signal above a speciﬁed frequency. The de-esser controls sibilant (hissing) sounds

included in speech that are produced by the letter “S.” Both mono channel and stereo channel de-

essers are provided.

Mono channel de-essers have one input and one output each. Stereo channel de-essers have two

inputs and two outputs each.

Name Function

1 Compressor Curve Displays results graphically. The horizontal axis is

the input signal level, and the vertical axis is the

output level.

2 Gain Reduction Meter Displays the gain reduction attenuation.

3 Output Meter Displays the output signal level.

Parameter Setting Range Function

4 Threshold -54 dB to ±0 dB Sets the threshold value.

5 Ratio 1:1 to ∞:1 Sets the compression ratio.

6 Knee HARD, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 Sets the way compression is applied.

7 Attack 0 to 120 ms Sets the attack time.

8 Release 44.1 kHz: 6 ms to 46 s

48 kHz: 5ms to 42.3 s

88.2 kHz: 3 ms to 23 s

96 kHz: 3 ms to 21.1 s

Sets the release time.

The setting range may very, depending on the

operating frequency.

9 Gain ±0 dB to +18 dB Sets the output gain.

) KeyIn Mono SELF

KEYIN

Selects the trigger source from a menu. The

currently selected trigger source is displayed on the

button.

Stereo L

LR BOTH

KEYIN

! On ON/OFF Turns the compressor ON.

–70

–60

–50

–40

–30

–20

–10

+10

+20

–70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20

Input Level (dB)

Output Level (dB)

Ratio=2:1

Knee=Hard

Threshold=–20dB

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

338

Double-click a component to open the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for mono

channel and stereo channel components.

Name Function

1 De-Esser Curve Displays results graphically. The horizontal axis is the

input signal level, and the vertical axis is the output

level.

2 Gain Reduction Meter Displays the gain reduction attenuation.

3 Output Meter Displays the output signal level.

Parameter Setting Range Function

4 Threshold -54 dB to ±0 dB Sets the threshold value.

5 Ratio 1:1 to ∞:1 Sets the compression ratio.

6 Knee HARD, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 Sets the way the de-esser effect is applied.

7 Attack 0 to 120 ms Sets the attack time.

8 Release 44.1 kHz: 6 ms to 46 s

48 kHz: 5 ms to 42.3 s

88.2 kHz: 3 ms to 23 s

96 kHz: 3 ms to 21.1 s

Sets the release time.

The setting range may very, depending on the

operating frequency.

9 Gain ±0 dB to +18 dB Sets the output gain.

) Frequency 80 Hz to 10 kHz Sets the minimum signal frequency for compression.

! On ON/OFF Turns the de-esser ON.

2 93

4 5 6

7 8 9 )

De-Esser component editor

–70

–60

–50

–40

–30

–20

–10

+10

+20

–70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20

Input Level (dB)

Output Level (dB)

Ratio=2:1

Knee=Hard

Threshold=–20dB

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

339

Ducking

Attenuates the output a particular amount, when an input signal exceeds its threshold. Both mono

channel and stereo channel duckers are provided.

Mono channel duckers have one input, one output, and one KeyIn input. Stereo channel duckers have

two inputs, two outputs, and one KeyIn input.

Double-click a component to open the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for mono

channel and stereo channel components.

Name Function

1 Ducking Curve Displays results graphically. The horizontal axis is

the input signal level, and the vertical axis is the

output level.

2 Gain Reduction Meter Displays the gain reduction attenuation.

3 Output Meter Displays the output signal level.

Parameter Setting Range Function

4 Threshold -54 dB to ±0 dB Sets the threshold value.

5 Range -70 dB to ±0 dB Sets the amount by which the level is reduced.

6 Attack 0 to 120 ms Sets the attack time.

7 Hold 44.1 kHz: 0.02 ms to 2.13 s

48 kHz: 0.02 ms to 1.96 s

88.2 kHz: 0.01 ms to 1.06 s

96 kHz: 0.01 ms to 981 ms

Sets the hold time.

The setting range may very, depending on the

operating frequency.

8 Decay 44.1 kHz: 6 ms to 46 s

48 kHz: 5 ms to 42.3 s

88.2 kHz: 3 ms to 23 s

96 kHz: 3 ms to 21.1 s

Sets the decay time.

The setting range may very, depending on the

operating frequency.

9 KeyIn Mono SELF

KEYIN

Selects the trigger source from a menu.

The currently selected trigger source is displayed

on the button.

Stereo L

LR BOTH

KEYIN

) On ON/OFF Turns the ducking ON.

2 9 )3

4 5 6

7 8

Ducking component editor

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

340

Expander

Widens the dynamic range of the signal. Low-level signals such as noise are diminished. Both mono

channel and stereo channel expanders are provided.

Mono channel expanders have one input, one output, and one KeyIn input. Stereo channel expanders

have two inputs, two outputs, and one KeyIn input.

Double-click a component to open the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for mono

channel and stereo channel components.

Name Function

1 Expander Curve Displays results graphically. The horizontal axis is

the input signal level, and the vertical axis is the

output level.

2 Gain Reduction Meter Displays the gain reduction attenuation.

3 Output Meter Displays the output signal level.

Parameter Setting Range Function

4 Threshold -54 dB to ±0 dB Sets the threshold value.

5 Ratio 1:1 to ∞:1 Sets the compression ratio.

6 Knee HARD, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 Sets the way the expander is applied.

8 Attack 0 to 120 ms Sets the attack time.

–70

–60

–50

–40

–30

–20

–10

+10

+20

–70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20

Input Level (dB)

Output Level (dB)

Range=–25dB

Threshold=–20dB

2 3

4 5 6

) !

7 8 9

Expander component editor

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

341

Gate

Attenuates signals that are lower than the threshold level. Both mono channel and stereo channel

gates are provided.

Mono channel gates have one input, one output, and one KeyIn input. Stereo channel gates have two

inputs, two outputs, and one KeyIn input.

Double-click a component to open the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for mono

channel and stereo channel components.

8 Release 44.1 kHz: 6 ms to 46 s

48 kHz: 5 ms to 42.3 s

88.2 kHz: 3 ms to 23 s

96 kHz: 3 ms to 21.1 s

Sets the release time.

The setting range may very, depending on the

operating frequency.

9 Gain ±0 dB to +18 dB Sets the output gain.

) KeyIn Mono SELF

KEYIN

Selects the trigger source from a menu. The

currently selected trigger source is displayed on the

button.

Stereo L

LR BOTH

KEYIN

! On ON/OFF Turns the expander ON.

–70

–60

–50

–40

–30

–20

–10

+10

+20

–70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20

Input Level (dB)

Output Level (dB)

Ratio=2:1

Threshold=–10dB

Knee=Hard

2 9 )3

4 5 6

7 8

Gate component editor

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

342

Limiter

Signals above the threshold are compressed at an ∞:1 ratio, preventing output of signals that exceed

the threshold level. Mono channel and stereo channel components are provided.

Mono channel components have a single input and output plus a key input, while stereo channel

components have two inputs and outputs and a key input.

Name Function

1 Gate Curve Displays results graphically. The horizontal axis is

the input signal level, and the vertical axis is the

output level.

2 Gain Reduction Meter Displays the gain reduction attenuation.

3 Output Meter Displays the output signal level.

Parameter Setting Range Function

4 Threshold -54 dB to ±0 dB Sets the threshold value.

5 Range -70 dB to ±0 dB Sets the amount by which the level is reduced.

6 Attack 0 to 120 ms Sets the attack time.

7 Hold 44.1 kHz: 0.02 ms to 2.13 s

48 kHz: 0.02 ms to 1.96 s

88.2 kHz: 0.01 ms to 1.06 s

96 kHz: 0.01 ms to 981 ms

Sets the hold time.

8 Decay 44.1 kHz: 6 ms to 46 s

48 kHz: 5 ms to 42.3 s

88.2 kHz: 3 ms to 23 s

96 kHz: 3 ms to 21.1 s

Sets the decay time.

The setting range may very, depending on the

operating frequency.

9 KeyIn Mono SELF

KEYIN

Selects the trigger source from a menu. The

currently selected trigger source is displayed on the

button.

Stereo L

LR BOTH

KEYIN

) On ON/OFF Turns the gate ON.

–70

–60

–50

–40

–30

–20

–10

+10

+20

–70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20

Input Level (dB)

Output Level (dB)

Threshold=–20dB

Range=–25dB

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

343

Double click the component to open the component editor. Mono channel and stereo channel

components have the same parameters.

Name Function

1 Limiter Curve Displays the limiter response in graph form. The

horizontal axis represents input signal level and the

vertical axis represents output level.

2 Gain Reduction Meter Displays the amount of gain reduction.

3 Output Meter Displays the output signal level.

Parameter Setting Range Function

4 Threshold -54 dB to ±0 dB Sets the threshold value.

5 Attack 0 to 120 ms Sets the attack time.

6 Release 44.1 kHz: 6 ms to 46 s

48 kHz: 5 ms to 42.3 s

88.2 kHz: 3 ms to 23 s

96 kHz: 3 ms to 21.1 s

Sets the release time. The range varies according

to the operating frequency.

9 KeyIn Mono SELF

KEYIN

The trigger source can be selected from this menu.

The currently selected source is displayed in the

button.

Stereo L

LR BOTH

KEYIN

) On ON/OFF Turns the limiter ON.

5 6

3 7 8

Limiter component editor

–70

–60

–50

–40

–30

–20

–10

+10

+20

–70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20

Input Level (dB)

Output Level (dB)

Threshold=–20dB

RATIO=20:1

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

344

Equalizer (EQ)

The equalizer boosts or cuts the levels of speciﬁed frequencies. The EQ group contains graphic

equalizers (GEQ) and parametric equalizers (PEQ).

The frequency bands in the graphic equalizer are ﬁxed. The graphical interface lets you visually check

the gain of each frequency. There are three different types of equalizers, each with a different number

of frequency bands. Mono channel and stereo channel equalizers are available for each type.

With the parametric equalizer, you can freely adjust the frequency bands, their amplitudes, and

bandwidths. There are six different types of parametric equalizers, each with a different number of

frequency bands. Mono channel and stereo channel equalizers are available for each type.

Graphic Equalizer (GEQ)

Boosts or cuts signals within the speciﬁed frequencies. The mono group contains 7 band, 15 band,

and 31 band mono channel components. The stereo group contains 7 band, 15 band, and 31 band

stereo channel components.

Mono channel GEQs have one input and one output each. Stereo channel GEQs have two inputs and

two outputs each.

Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The number of bands varies

depending on the component, but all share a common conﬁguration in the component editor.

Name Function

1 Input Meter Displays the input signal level.

2 EQ Curve Displays the equalizer effect.

3 Output Meter Displays the output signal level.

Mono channel

Stereo channel

)

(

% ^

Component editor for GEQ

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

345

■ EQ Graph [Bypass] Button

A number for each frequency band is displayed on these buttons. When you click the button, it

lights up and the bypass turns ON. When you turn this ON, bypassed sound (unchanged sound) is

output. When you turn this OFF, the sound is output with effects applied.

Section Parameter Setting Range Function

4 Equalizer Bypass ON/OFF Bypasses all bands in the GEQ equalizer

section.

5 Gain Set by [Range]. Sets the output gain for its band.

6 GEQ ON ON/OFF Turns the GEQ ON.

7 Range (Button) ±15

±12

±6

-24

Selects the gain adjust width.

8 EQ Flat -- Returns the faders of all bands to 0dB.

9 Input Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the input signal level.

) Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal.

! HPF Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the HPF cutoff frequency.

@ Bypass ON/OFF Turns bypass ON.

# LPF Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the LPF cutoff frequency.

$ Bypass ON/OFF Turns bypass ON.

% Notch Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the notch ﬁlter frequency.

^ Q: 0.1 to 63.0 Sets the width of the frequency band that will

be changed by the ﬁlter.

& Bypass ON/OFF Turns bypass ON.

* Output Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the signal level.

( On ON/OFF Turns output ON.

Bypass ON

Bypass OFF

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

346

Parametric Equalizer (PEQ)

Boosts or cuts signals within speciﬁed frequencies. In both the Mono group and Stereo group there

are 2 band, 3 band, 4 band, 6 band, and 8 band components available.

Mono channel PEQs have one input and one output each. Stereo channel PEQs have two inputs and

two outputs each. The number of bands varies depending on the component, but all share a common

conﬁguration in the component editor.

Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The number of bands varies

depending on the component, but all share a common conﬁguration in the component editor.

Name Function

1 EQ Curve Displays the equalizer effect.

You can change the parameter by dragging

the control point with the mouse.

Section Parameter Setting Range Function

2 Input Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the input signal level.

3 Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal.

4 Equalizer Type PEQ

L.SHELF 6 dB/Oct

L.SHELF 12 dB/Oct

H.SHELF 6 dB/Oct

H.SHELF 12 dB/Oct

HPF

LPF

Select the ﬁlter type from the menu.

5 Q 0.1 to 16.0 Sets the band width for each frequency

band.

6 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the frequency for each band.

7 Gain -18 dB to +18 dB Sets the level of the frequency that will be

changed.

8 Bypass ON/OFF Turns ON bypass for each band.

)

PEQ component editor

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

347

■ Filter Type

Various types of curves are available for changing the level. Click the [Type] button and select the

type from the menu.

• PEQ

This is a general parametric equalizer.

•L. SHELF (Low Shelving)

There is no sound attenuation at low frequencies. The sound is attenuated at a constant rate

from the cutoff frequency towards the higher frequencies. The attenuation rate per octave can

be set to [6 dB/Oct] or [12 dB/Oct].

• H.SHELF (High Shelving)

There is no sound attenuation at high frequencies. The sound is attenuated at a constant rate

from the cutoff frequency towards the lower frequencies. The attenuation rate per octave can

be set to [6 dB/Oct] or [12 dB/Oct].

• HPF

This is a high-pass ﬁlter (Q=0.7). Attenuates the low frequencies with a gentle curve (12 dB/

Oct).

• LPF

This is a low-pass ﬁlter (Q=0.7). Attenuates the high frequencies with a gentle curve (12 dB/

Oct).

9 Equalizer PEQ ON ON/OFF Turns the PEQ ON

) Output Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level.

! On ON/OFF Turns output ON.

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

348

Fader

Controls the output level for each channel. Fader components are available for 1, 2, 4, 8, 12, and 16

channels.

Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The number of channels varies, but

all components share a common conﬁguration in the component editor.

■ [Fade]

Sets the action of the fader when there is a large change in its position during scene recall. When

you turn this ON, the fader moves gradually to the position after the jump. If you turn this OFF, it

immediately jumps to the parameters saved in the recalled scene.

See “The ‘Scene Manager’ Dialog Box” (page 63) for details about settings for the components to

be faded and the time period when the [Fade] is On.

Parameter Setting Range Function

1 Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the output signal for each

channel.

2 On ON/OFF Turns ON each channel’s output.

3 Fader -∞ to +10 dB Sets the output signal level for each channel.

4 Fade ON/OFF Sets fade during scene recall ON or OFF.

Fader component editor

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

349

Filters

A ﬁlter passes speciﬁc frequencies and attenuates all others.

There are seven types of ﬁlters available in the ﬁlter group: band pass ﬁlter (BPF), high pass ﬁlter

(HPF), low pass ﬁlter (LPF), notch ﬁlter (Notch), programmable BPF, programmable HPF, and

programmable LPF.

Band Pass Filter (BPF)

The band pass ﬁlter passes the signal from a speciﬁed frequency band, while attenuating frequencies

outside that band. There are two types of BPF components: mono channel and stereo channel. Mono

channel BPFs have one input and one output. Stereo channel BPFs have two of each.

Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for

mono channel and stereo channel components.

Section Parameter Setting Range Function

1 Input Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the input signal level.

2 Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal.

3 BPF Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the center frequency.

4 Q: 0.1 to 16.0 Sets the band width of a frequency band.

5 Bypass ON/OFF Turns bypass ON.

6 Output Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level.

3 4 6

BPF component editor

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

350

High Pass Filter (HPF)

The high pass ﬁlter passes frequencies in the signal that are higher than a speciﬁed frequency, while

attenuating lower frequencies in the signal. There are two types of HPF components: mono channel

and stereo channel. Mono channel HPFs have one input and one output. Stereo channel HPFs have

two of each.

Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for

mono channel and stereo channel components.

Section Parameter Setting Range Function

1 Input Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the input signal level.

2 Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal.

3 HPF Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the cutoff frequency.

4 Slope 6 dB/Oct

12 dB/Oct

Sets the attenuation for each octave.

5 Bypass ON/OFF Turns bypass ON.

6 Output Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level.

3 4 6

HPF component editor

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

351

Low Pass Filter (LPF)

The low pass ﬁlter passes frequencies in the signal that are lower than a speciﬁed frequency, while

attenuating higher frequencies in the signal. There are two types of LPF components: mono channel

and stereo channel. Mono channel LPFs have one input and one output. Stereo channel LPFs have

two of each.

Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for

mono channel and stereo channel components.

Section Parameter Setting Range Function

1 Input Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the input signal level.

2 Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal.

3 LPF Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the cutoff frequency.

4 Slope 6 dB/Oct

12 dB/Oct

Sets the attenuation for each octave.

5 Bypass ON/OFF Turns bypass ON.

6 Output Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level.

3 4 6

LPF component editor

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

352

Notch Filter (Notch)

The notch ﬁlter attenuates the signal within a speciﬁed frequency band, while passing frequencies

outside that band. There are two types of notch ﬁlter components: mono channel and stereo channel.

Mono channel notch ﬁlters have one input and one output. Stereo channel notch ﬁlters have two of

each.

Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for

mono channel and stereo channel components.

Section Parameter Setting Range Function

1 Input Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the input signal level.

2 Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal.

3 Notch Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the center frequency.

4 Q: 0.1 to 63.0 Sets the band width of the frequency band

that will be changed

5 Bypass ON/OFF Turns bypass ON.

6 Output Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level.

Notch component editor

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

353

Programmable BPF

The band pass ﬁlter passes the signal from a speciﬁed frequency band, while attenuating frequencies

outside that band. With the programmable band pass ﬁlter you can set the ﬁlter type and the slope

between the frequency band that is passed and the band that is cutoff.

There are two types of programmable BPF components: mono channel and stereo channel. Mono

channel programmable BPFs have one input and one output. Stereo channel programmable BPFs

have two of each.

Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for

mono channel and stereo channel components.

Section Parameter Setting Range Function

1 Input Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the input signal level.

2 Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal.

3 HPF Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the HPF cutoff frequency.

4 Type Thru

6 dB/Oct

12 dB/Oct AdjustGc

12 dB/Oct Butrwrth

12 dB/Oct Bessel

12 dB/Oct Linkwitz

18 dB/Oct AdjustGc

18 dB/Oct Butrwrth

18 dB/Oct Bessel

24 dB/Oct AdjustGc

24 dB/Oct Butrwrth

24 dB/Oct Bessel

24 dB/Oct Linkwitz

36 dB/Oct AdjustGc

36 dB/Oct Butrwrth

36 dB/Oct Bessel

48 dB/Oct AdjustGc

48 dB/Oct Butrwrth

48 dB/Oct Bessel

48 dB/Oct Linkwitz

Sets the attenuation for each octave and the

ﬁlter type.

[THRU] turns off the ﬁlter.

5 Gc -6 dB to +6 dB When [AdjustGc] (Adjustable Gc) is selected

for [Type], this sets the gain for the cutoff

frequency.

6 Bypass ON/OFF Turns bypass ON.

2 6 )

1 !

3 7

Programmable BPF component editor

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

354

7 LPF Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the LPF cutoff frequency.

8 Type Thru

6 dB/Oct

12 dB/Oct AdjustGc

12 dB/Oct Butrwrth

12 dB/Oct Bessel

12 dB/Oct Linkwitz

18 dB/Oct AdjustGc

18 dB/Oct Butrwrth

18 dB/Oct Bessel

24 dB/Oct AdjustGc

24 dB/Oct Butrwrth

24 dB/Oct Bessel

24 dB/Oct Linkwitz

36 dB/Oct AdjustGc

36 dB/Oct Butrwrth

36 dB/Oct Bessel

48 dB/Oct AdjustGc

48 dB/Oct Butrwrth

48 dB/Oct Bessel

48 dB/Oct Linkwitz

Sets the attenuation for each octave and the

ﬁlter type.

[THRU] turns off the ﬁlter.

9 Gc -6 dB to +6 dB When [AdjustGc] (Adjustable Gc) is selected

for [Type], this sets the gain for the cutoff

frequency.

) Bypass ON/OFF Turns bypass ON.

! Output Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level.

Section Parameter Setting Range Function

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

355

Programmable HPF

The high pass ﬁlter passes frequencies in the signal that are higher the speciﬁed frequency, while

attenuating lower frequencies in the signal. With the programmable high pass ﬁlter you can set the

ﬁlter type and the slope between the frequency band that is passed and the band that is cutoff.

There are two types of programmable HPF components: mono channel and stereo channel. Mono

channel programmable HPFs have one input and one output. Stereo channel programmable HPFs

have two of each.

Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for

mono channel and stereo channel components.

Section Parameter Setting Range Function

1 Input Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the input signal level.

2 Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal.

3 HPF Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the HPF cutoff frequency.

5 Type Thru

6 dB/Oct

12 dB/Oct AdjustGc

12 dB/Oct Butrwrth

12 dB/Oct Bessel

12 dB/Oct Linkwitz

18 dB/Oct AdjustGc

18 dB/Oct Butrwrth

18 dB/Oct Bessel

24 dB/Oct AdjustGc

24 dB/Oct Butrwrth

24 dB/Oct Bessel

24 dB/Oct Linkwitz

36 dB/Oct AdjustGc

36 dB/Oct Butrwrth

36 dB/Oct Bessel

48 dB/Oct AdjustGc

48 dB/Oct Butrwrth

48 dB/Oct Bessel

48 dB/Oct Linkwitz

Sets the attenuation for each octave and the

ﬁlter type.

[THRU] turns off the ﬁlter.

6 Gc -6 dB to +6 dB When [AdjustGc] (Adjustable Gc) is selected

for [Type], this sets the gain for the cutoff

frequency.

7 Bypass ON/OFF Turns bypass ON.

8 Output Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level.

2 6

Programmable HPF component editors

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

356

Programmable LPF

The low pass ﬁlter passes frequencies in the signal that are lower than the speciﬁed frequency, while

attenuating higher frequencies in the signal. With the programmable low pass ﬁlter you can set the

ﬁlter type and the slope between the frequency band that is passed and the band that is cutoff.

There are two types of programmable LPF components: mono channel and stereo channel. Mono

channel programmable LPFs have one input and one output. Stereo channel programmable LPFs

have two of each.

Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for

mono channel and stereo channel components.

Section Parameter Setting Range Function

1 Input Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the input signal level.

2 Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal.

3 LPF Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the LPF cutoff frequency.

5 Type Thru

6 dB/Oct

12 dB/Oct AdjustGc

12 dB/Oct Butrwrth

12 dB/Oct Bessel

12 dB/Oct Linkwitz

18 dB/Oct AdjustGc

18 dB/Oct Butrwrth

18 dB/Oct Bessel

24 dB/Oct AdjustGc

24 dB/Oct Butrwrth

24 dB/Oct Bessel

24 dB/Oct Linkwitz

36 dB/Oct AdjustGc

36 dB/Oct Butrwrth

36 dB/Oct Bessel

48 dB/Oct AdjustGc

48 dB/Oct Butrwrth

48 dB/Oct Bessel

48 dB/Oct Linkwitz

Sets the attenuation for each octave and the

ﬁlter type.

[THRU] turns off the ﬁlter.

6 Gc -6 dB to +6 dB When [AdjustGc] (Adjustable Gc) is selected

for [Type], this sets the gain for the cutoff

frequency.

7 Bypass ON/OFF Turns bypass ON.

8 Output Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level.

Programmable LPF component editor

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

357

Meter

Displays signal levels. Meter components are available with 1, 2, 4, 8, 12, and 16 channels.

Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The number of channels varies

depending on the component, but all share a common conﬁguration in the component editor.

Name Function

1 Meter Displays signal levels for each channel.

Meter component editor

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

358

Miscellaneous

In the Miscellaneous group, there are the Oscillator subgroup and the Wav File Player.

Oscillator

The Oscillator subgroup contains a monochannel oscillator component. The oscillator generates sine

waves at ﬁxed frequencies of 100 Hz, 1 kHz, and 10 kHz, a variable frequency sine wave, pink noise,

and burst noise. The oscillator component has two outputs.

Double-click a component to display the component editor for it.

Pink Noise

A standard signal used for sound measurement.

This sound covers a frequency range of 20 Hz to 20 kHz. As the frequency doubles, the energy of

the sound is cut in half. The sound level is equal at all frequencies.

Burst

Outputs pink noise continuously.

Section Parameter Setting Range Function

1 Wave Form Sine 100 Hz

1 kHz

10 kHz

Vari

Selects the frequency and waveform that will

be generated. Only one of the six [Sine] and

[Noise] buttons can be selected.

2 Noise Pink

Burst

3 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz When [Vari] is selected for [Sine], this sets

the frequency of the generated sine wave.

4 Output Level -∞ to +6 dB Displays the signal level.

5 On ON/OFF Turns ON the oscillator.

6 Meter -- Displays the output signal level.

Oscillator component editor

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

359

Wav File Player

The Wav File Player is a component for playing Wave ﬁles. Only one Wav File Player component can

be arranged for each single DME unit.

Double-click the component to display the component editor for it.

NOTE

If you switch the effect type for SPX components while playing Wave ﬁle by Wav File Player, drop-outs in the sound played in

the Wav File Player may occur.

Section Parameter Setting Range Function

1 Ex. Input Level -∞ to 0 dB Sets the input level from an input port. Only effective

when “External Input” is selected as the playback ﬁle.

2 Wav File Player Play 001 to 100 Selects and displays the playback ﬁle.

Only ﬁles set in the DME unit in which this component

is placed by the Wav File Manager can be selected.

3 List -- Open the Wav File Manager to display a list of ﬁles set

in the DME unit in which this component is located.

This list functions as a play list.

4 IG -- Selects the previous ﬁle in the play list.

5 HI -- Selects the next ﬁle in the playsuit.

6 F -- Plays the selected Wave ﬁle. Mute is turned OFF

when “External Input” is selected.

7 J -- Stops playback of the Wave ﬁle. Muted when

“External Input” is selected.

NOTE

Playback will be paused if synchronization is carried out in the “Designer ← DME” direction during playback.

Playback will resume once synchronization is complete, but if a Wave ﬁle was being played it will resume playback from the

beginning.

24 5673

Wav File Player component editor

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

360

Mixer

The Mixer group contains the Auto Mixer, Delay Matrix, and Matrix Mixer.

Auto Mixer

There is a noise gate for each input channel, which passes only signals that exceed a speciﬁed

threshold. There are ﬁve mixer types, each with a different number of inputs.

Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The number of channels varies

depending on the component, but all share a common conﬁguration in the component editor. The auto

mixer component editor consists of two sections: input channels and master output.

)

Auto Mixer component editor

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

361

Section Parameter Setting Range Function

1 Input Channels Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of each channel’s

input signal.

2 Gate Indicator -- When the gate is open, the light turns

green. When the gate is closed, the light

turns yellow.

3 Threshold -54 dB to ±0 dB Sets the threshold value for each gate.

4 Hold 44.1 kHz: 110 m to 2.13 s

48 kHz: 101 m to 1.96 s

88.2 kHz: 55.1 m to 1.06 s

96 kHz: 50. 6m to 981 m

Sets the gate hold time.

The setting range may vary, depending

on the operating frequency.

5 Input Channels Decay 44.1 kHz: 110 m to 46 s

48 kHz: 101 m to 42.3 s

88.2 kHz: 55 m to 23 s

96 kHz: 51 m to 21.1 s

Sets the speed for closing the gate.

The setting range may vary, depending

on the operating frequency.

6 Solo ON/OFF Turns solo ON.

7 On ON/OFF Turns ON each channel’s input.

8 Fader -∞ to +10 dB Sets the input signal level for each

channel.

9 Master Output Gain Correct ON/OFF Turns ON gain correction.

) On ON/OFF Turns ON each channel’s output.

! Master -∞ to +10 dB Sets the output signal level.

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

362

Delay Matrix

This is a matrix mixer that allows you to set an independent delay time and level adjustment for each

output. There are three groups of delay matrix, based on the number of inputs: 2 Input, 4 Input, and 8

Input. In each of the three groups there are ﬁve mixers available with 2, 4, 8, 12, or 16 outputs, for a

total of 15 components.

Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The number of input and output

channels varies depending on the component, but all share a common conﬁguration in the

component editor.

The delay matrix component editor consists of four sections: input, output, matrix, and block. The

[Master] buttons in the [Input] and [Output] sections display windows where you can make master

input and output settings. Delay and level for each channel are set in separate windows that display

four channels each.

Section Name Function

1 Input Master Opens the Input Master window.

2 Output Master Opens the Output Master window.

3 Matrix Delay meters

Output level meters

Displays output level and delay time for each output

channel. Clicking here displays the Crosspoint window.

2 Input

4 Input

8 Input

Delay Matrix component editor

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

363

■ Matrix (Delay Meter/Output Level Meter)

The upper row has delay meters, while the middle row has output level meters. You can view

parameters for all output channels at once.

When you click the output channel number on the matrix, the [Delay Matrix - All Inputs to One

Output] editor window opens. When you click the input channel number on the left side of the

matrix, the [Delay Matrix - One Input to All Outputs] editor window opens.

The matrix is divided into groups. For the 2 Input matrix, each group has two input channels and

four output channels. For the 4 Input matrix, each group has four input channels and four output

channels. Groups in matrixes with more than four inputs are the same as for the 4 Input matrix.

When you place the mouse pointer over a group, its channel numbers are highlighted. Click to

open the [Delay Matrix - Crosspoint] editor window.

4 Block On Turns ON output for all channels in the Crosspoint

window. Lights the [ON] button (does not change the

delay matrix component editor).

5 Off Turns OFF output for all channels in the Crosspoint

window (does not change the delay matrix component

editor).

6 Nominal Resets all output levels in the Crosspoint window,

making them 0 dB. The delay settings are not changed.

7 Minimum Resets all output levels in the Crosspoint window,

making them -∞ dB. The delay settings are not

changed.

Section Name Function

Output Level Meter

Delay Meter

Click to open the [Delay Matrix - All Inputs

to One Output] editor window.

Click to open the [Delay Matrix - One Input

to All Outputs] editor window.

Click to open the “In 1-4 x

Out 1-4” Crosspoint window.

Click to open the “In 5-8 x Out

5-8” Crosspoint window.

For 2 input matrix, click to

open the “In 1-2 x Out 1-4”

Crosspoint window.

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

364

■ Input Master

If you click the [Input Master] button in the delay matrix component editor, it will open the [Delay

Matrix - InputMaster] editor window. Here you can turn the master input for each channel ON and

OFF and set the level.

Section Parameter Setting Range Function

1 Input Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of each channel’s signal.

2 Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the level of the signal from each channel’s

input.

3 Solo ON/OFF Turns ON solo for each channel.

4 On ON/OFF Turns ON each channel’s input.

5 Block On -- Turns ON input for all channels in the Input Master

window. When turned ON, the [On] button lights up.

6 Off -- Turns OFF input for all channels in the Input Master

window.

7 Nominal -- Resets all input signal levels in the Input Master

window, making them 0 dB.

8 Minimum -- Resets all input signal levels in the Input Master

windows, making them -∞ dB.

[Delay Matrix - InputMaster] editor window

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

365

■ Output Master

If you click the [Output Master] button in the delay matrix component editor, it will open the [Delay

Matrix - OutputMaster] editor window. Here you can turn the master output for each channel ON

and OFF and set the level.

Section Parameter Setting Range Function

1 Output Meter -- Displays the output signal level for each channel.

2 Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the output signal level for each channel.

3 On ON/OFF Turns ON each channel’s output.

4 Block On -- Turns ON output for all channels in the Output

Master window. When turned ON, the [On] button

lights up.

5 Off -- Turns OFF output for all channels in the Output

Master window.

6 Nominal -- Resets all output signal levels in the Output Master

window, making them 0 dB.

7 Minimum -- Resets all output signal levels in the Output Master

window, making them -∞ dB.

[Delay Matrix - OutputMaster] editor window

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

366

■ All Inputs to One Output

When you click the output channel number on the matrix, the [Delay Matrix - All Inputs to One

Output] editor window opens. All input channels and one output channel are displayed. The output

channel is the one you have clicked on in the delay mixer component editor.

Output Channel Switching

The [Delay Matrix - All Inputs to One Output] editor window displays the output channel clicked on

in the delay matrix component editor. The [Channel] buttons in the [Output] section of the [Delay

Matrix - All Inputs to One Output] editor window switch the channel group that is displayed in the

window.

If you make the delay matrix component editor active while the [Delay Matrix - All Inputs to One

Output] editor window is displayed, and then click another output channel, that channel group will

be displayed in the [Delay Matrix - All Inputs to One Output] editor window.

One [Delay Matrix - All Inputs to One Output] editor window is displayed for each delay matrix

component editor.

Section Parameter Setting Range Function

1 Bus Send Level Delay 0 to 500 Sets the delay time for each input channel.

2 Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the output signal level for each input channel.

3 On ON/OFF Turns ON the output for each input channel.

4 Output Channel -- Displays the selected output channel. Select

another channel from a menu.

5 On ON/OFF Turns ON the output for the channel displayed in

the window.

6 Meter -- Displays the output signal level of the channel

displayed in the window.

7 Block On -- Turns ON all channel inputs. When turned ON, the

[On] button lights up.

8 Off -- Turns OFF all channel inputs.

9 Nominal -- Resets all of input signal levels, making them 0 dB.

) Minimum -- Resets all of input signal levels, making them -∞ dB.

)

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

367

■ One Input to All Outputs

When you click the input channel number on the left side of matrix, the [Delay Matrix - One Input to

All Outputs] editor window opens. One input channel and all output channels are displayed. The

input channel is the one you have clicked on in the delay mixer component editor.

Input Channel Switching

The [Delay Matrix - One Input to All Outputs] editor window displays the input channel for the

channel number clicked on in the delay matrix component editor.

The [Channel] buttons in the [Input] section of the [Delay Matrix - All Inputs to One Output] editor

window switch the channel group that is displayed in the window.

Section Parameter Setting Range Function

1 Input Channel -- Displays the selected input channel. Select another

channel from a menu.

2 Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal.

3 Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the input signal level.

4 Solo ON/OFF Turns solo ON.

5 On ON/OFF Turns input ON.

6 Bus Send Level Delay 0 to 500 Sets the delay time for each output channel.

7 Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the signal level for each output channel.

8 On ON/OFF Turns ON the output for each output channel.

9 Block On -- Turns ON all channel outputs. When turned ON, the

[On] button lights up.

) Off -- Turns OFF all channel outputs.

! Nominal -- Resets all output signal levels, making them 0 dB.

@ Minimum -- Resets all output signal levels, making them -∞ dB.

)

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

368

If you make the delay matrix component editor active while the [Delay Matrix - One Input to All

Outputs] editor window is displayed, and then click another input channel, that channel will be

displayed in the [Delay Matrix - One Input to All Outputs] editor window.

One [Delay Matrix - One Input to All Outputs] editor window is displayed for each delay matrix

component editor.

■ Crosspoint

If you click a level meter in the delay

matrix component editor, that group's

[Delay Matrix - Crosspoint] editor

window will be displayed. Turns the

input channels ON and OFF and sets

their levels. Just like the delay matrix

component editor, the input channels

are arranged vertically while the output

channels are arranged horizontally.

Section Parameter Setting Range Function

1 Input Channel -- Switches to another channel group.

2 Output Channel -- Switches to another channel group.

3 Bus Send Level Delay 0 to 500 Sets the delay time for each crosspoint.

4 Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the output signal level for each crosspoint.

5 On ON/OFF Turns ON output for each crosspoint.

6 Block On -- Turns ON output for all channels in the Crosspoint

window. The [On] button lights up.

7 Off -- Turns OFF output for all channels in the Crosspoint

window.

8 Nominal -- Resets all output signal levels in the Crosspoint

window, making them 0 dB.

9 Minimum -- Resets all output signal levels in the Crosspoint

window, making them -∞ dB.

[Delay Matrix - Crosspoint] editor window

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

369

Channel Group Switching

The [Delay Matrix - Crosspoint] editor window displays four channels each for Input and Output.

It displays the channel group you click on in the delay matrix component editor. The [Channel]

buttons in the [Input] and [Output] sections of the [Delay Matrix - Crosspoint] editor window switch

the channel group that is displayed in the window.

If you click another channel group when the delay matrix component editor is active and an [Delay

Matrix - Crosspoint] editor window is displayed, that channel group will be displayed in the open

[Delay Matrix - Crosspoint] editor window.

Only one [Delay Matrix - Crosspoint] matrix window is displayed for each delay matrix component

editor.

Matrix Mixer

In the matrix mixer, the input channels and output buses are arranged in a checkerboard

conﬁguration. You can adjust the group balance for each output bus. There are 24 components in the

in the Matrix Mixer group, each with different numbers of input and output channels. There are seven

groups based on the number of inputs, as follows: 2 Input, 4 Input, 8 Input, 12 Input, 16 Input, 32

Input, and 64 Input.

[Input] section

[Channel] menu

[Output] section

[Channel] menu

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

370

Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The number of input and output

channels varies depending on the component, but all share a common conﬁguration in the

component editor.

The matrix mixer component editor consists of four sections: input, output, matrix, and block. The

[Master] buttons in the [Input] and [Output] sections display windows where you can make master

input and output settings. The level for each channel is set in separate windows that display four

channels each.

NOTE

If a 64 input 64 output Matrix Mixer component or a 64 input 32 output Matrix Mixer component is placed in the DME64N

conﬁguration window, no other components can be used even though the resource meter does not reach 100%. The 64

input 64 output Matrix Mixer component or the 64 input 32 output Matrix Mixer component cannot be used in the DME24N.

Section Name Function

1 Input Master Opens the Input Master window.

2 Output Master Opens the Output Master window.

3 Matrix Output level meters These meters display the output level for each channel.

Clicking here displays the Crosspoint window.

4 Block On Turns ON output for all channels in the Crosspoint window.

Lights the [ON] button (does not change the matrix mixer

component editor).

5 Off Turns OFF output for all channels in the Crosspoint window

(does not change the matrix mixer component editor).

6 Nominal Resets all output levels in the Crosspoint window, making

them 0 dB.

7 Minimum Resets all output levels in the Crosspoint window, making

them -∞ dB.

Matrix Mixer component editor

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

371

■ Matrix (Output Level Meters)

In the matrix, you can view levels for all output channels at once. The meter will be grayed out when

the corresponding channel is set to Off.

When you click an output channel number on the matrix, the [Matrix Mixer - All Inputs to One

Output] editor window opens. When you click the input channel number on the left side of the

matrix, the [Matrix Mixer - One Input to All Outputs] editor window opens.

The matrix is divided into groups, each with four input channels and four output channels. When

you place the mouse pointer over a group, its channel numbers are highlighted. Click to open the

[Matrix Mixer - Crosspoint] editor window.

Output level meter

Click to open the [Matrix Mixer - All

Inputs to One Output] editor window.

Click to open the [Matrix Mixer - One

Input to All Outputs] editor window.

Click to open the “In 1-4 x Out 5-8”

[Matrix Mixer - Crosspoint] editor window

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

372

■ Input Master

If you click the [Input Master] button in the matrix mixer component editor, it will open the [Matrix

Mixer - InputMaster] editor window. Here you can turn the master input for each channel ON and

OFF and set the level.

Section Parameter Setting Range Function

1 Input Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of each channel’s signal.

2 Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the signal level from each channel input to the

output bus.

3 Solo ON/OFF Turns ON solo for each channel.

4 On ON/OFF Turns ON each channel’s input.

5 Block On -- Turns ON input for all channels in the Input Master

window. When turned ON, the [On] button lights up.

6 Off -- Turns OFF input for all channels in the Input Master

window.

7 Nominal -- Resets all output signal levels in the Input Master

window, making them 0 dB.

8 Minimum -- Resets all output signal levels in the Input master

window, making them -∞ dB.

[Matrix Mixer - InputMaster] GfB^[EB hE

[Matrix Mixer - InputMaster] editor window

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

373

■ Output Master Window

If you click the [Output Master] button in the matrix mixer component editor, it will open the Output

Master window. Her you can turn the master output for each channel ON and OFF and set the level.

Section Parameter Setting Range Function

1 Output Meter -- Displays the output signal level for each channel.

2 Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the output signal level for each channel.

3 On ON/OFF Turns ON each channel’s output.

4 Block On -- Turns ON output for all channels in the Output

Master window. When turned ON, the [On] button

lights up.

5 Off -- Turns OFF output for all channels in the Output

Master window.

6 Nominal -- Resets all output signal levels in the Output Master

window, making them 0 dB.

7 Minimum -- Resets all output signal levels in the Output Master

window, making them -∞ dB.

[Matrix Mixer - OutputMaster] GfB^[EB hE

[Matrix Mixer - OutputMaster] editor window

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

374

■ All Inputs to One Output

When you click the output channel number on the matrix, the [Matrix Mixer - All Inputs to One

Output] editor window opens. All input channels and one output channel are displayed. The output

channel is the one you have clicked on in the matrix mixer component editor.

Output Channel Switching

[Matrix Mixer - All Inputs to One Output] editor window displays the output channel clicked in the

matrix mixer component editor. The [Channel] buttons in the [Output] section of the [Matrix Mixer -

All Inputs to One Output] editor window switch the channel group that is displayed in the window.

If you make the matrix mixer component editor active while the [Matrix Mixer - All Inputs to One

Output] editor window is displayed, and then click another output channel, that channel group will

be displayed in the [Matrix Mixer - All Inputs to One Output] editor window.

One [Matrix Mixer - All Inputs to One Output] editor window is displayed for each matrix mixer

component editor.

Section Parameter Setting Range Function

1 Bus Send Level Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the output signal level for each input channel.

2 On ON/OFF Turns ON the output for each input channel.

3 Output Channel -- Displays the selected output channel. Select

another channel from a menu.

4 On ON/OFF Turns ON the output for the channel displayed in

the window.

5 Meter -- Displays the output signal level of the channel

displayed in the window.

6 Block On -- Turns ON all channel inputs. When turned ON, the

[On] button lights up.

7 Off -- Turns OFF all channel inputs.

8 Nominal -- Resets all input signal levels, making them 0 dB.

9 Minimum -- Reset all input signal levels, making them -∞ dB.

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

375

■ One Input to All Outputs

When you click the input channel number on the left side of the matrix, the [Matrix Mixer - One Input

to All Outputs] editor window opens. One input channel and all output channels are displayed. The

input channel is the one you have clicked on in the delay mixer component editor.

Input Channel Switching

The [Matrix Mixer - One Input to All Outputs] editor window displays the input channel for the

channel number clicked on in the matrix mixer component editor.

The [Channel] buttons in the [Input] section of the [Matrix Mixer - All Inputs to One Output] editor

window switch the channel group that is displayed in the window.

If you make the matrix mixer component editor active while the [Matrix Mixer- One Input to All

Outputs] editor window is displayed, and then click another input channel, that channel will be

displayed in the [Matrix Mixer - One Input to All Outputs] editor window.

One [Matrix Mixer - One Input to All Outputs] editor window is displayed for each matrix mixer

component editor.

Section Parameter Setting Range Function

1 Input Channel -- Displays the selected input channel. Select

another channel from a menu.

2 Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal.

3 Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the input signal level.

4 Solo ON/OFF Turns solo ON.

5 On ON/OFF Turns input ON.

6 Bus Send Level Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the signal level for each output channel.

7 On ON/OFF Turns ON the output for each output channel.

8 Block On -- Turns ON all channel outputs. When turned

ON, the [On] button lights up.

9 Off -- Turns OFF all channel outputs.

) Nominal -- Resets all output signal levels, making them

0 dB.

! Minimum -- Resets all output signal levels, making them

-∞ dB.

)

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

376

■ Crosspoint

If you click a level meter in the matrix mixer component editor, the output crosspoint window for the

group will be displayed. Turns the input channels ON and OFF and sets their levels. Just like the

matrix mixture component editor, the input channels are arranged vertically while the output

channels are arranged horizontally.

Section Parameter Setting Range Function

1 Input Channel -- Switches to another channel group.

2 Output Channel -- Switches to another channel group.

3 Bus Send Level Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the output signal level for each crosspoint.

4 On ON/OFF Turns ON output for each crosspoint.

5 Block On -- Turns ON output for all channels in the Crosspoint

window. When turned ON, the [On] button lights up.

6 Off -- Turns OFF output for all channels in the Crosspoint

window.

7 Nominal -- Resets all output signal levels in the Crosspoint

window, making them 0 dB.

8 Minimum -- Resets all output signal levels in the Crosspoint

window, making them -∞ dB.

[Matrix Mixer - Crosspoint] GfB^[EB hE

[Matrix Mixer - Crosspoint] editor window

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

377

Channel Group Switching

The [Matrix Mixer - Crosspoint] editor window displays four channels each for Input and Output.

It displays the channel group that was clicked on in the matrix mixer component editor. The

[Channel] buttons in the [Input] and [Output] sections of the [Matrix Mixer - Crosspoint] editor

window switch the channel group that is displayed.

If you click another channel group when the matrix mixer component editor is active and an [Matrix

Mixer - Crosspoint] editor window is displayed, that channel group will be displayed in the open

[Matrix Mixer - Crosspoint] editor window.

Only one [Matrix Mixer - Crosspoint] matrix window is displayed for each matrix mixer component

editor.

[Input] section

[Channel] menu

[Output] section

[Channel] menu

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

378

Pan

The Pan group contains the following subgroups: LCR, LR, and Surround.

■ Pan Nominal Position

Component editors for both LCR and Surround contain the “Pan Nominal Position” parameter.

The button for that parameter displays its current setting. Clicking the button displays a menu with

[Center] and [LR], which are used to set the pan 0 dB reference.

Center (Center Nominal)

Uses the center volume as a reference, setting it as 0 dB. The LR speakers are -3 dB.

LR (LR Nominal)

Uses the LR speaker volumes as a reference, setting them as 0 dB. The center volume is +3 dB.

LCR

In the LCR component, one input is divided into left, center, and right outputs. The number of outputs

is triple the inputs. Components are available with 1, 2, 4, 8, 12, and 16 channels.

Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The number of channels varies

depending on the component, but all share a common conﬁguration in the component editor.

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

379

Separates a single input into left and right outputs. Components are available with 1, 2, 4, 8, 12, and

16 channels.

Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The number of channels varies

depending on the component, but all share a common conﬁguration in the component editor.

Parameter Setting Range Function

1 CSR 0 to 100% Sets the ratio for sending the center signal to LR.

2 Pan L63 - Center - R63 Sets LR orientation.

3 Pan Nominal Position Center

Selects the nominal position from a menu.

Parameter Setting Range Function

1 Pan L63 - R63 Sets the LR orientation.

2 Pan Nominal Position Center

Selects the nominal position from a menu.

LCR component editor

Pan component editor

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

380

Surround

There are three types of surround pan components in the Surround subgroup: 3-1, 5.1, and 6.1.

The surround pan component editor has a two-dimensional surround pan graph where you can set the

location of the sound image.

You can set the sound location using the mouse in the two-dimensional surround pan graph.

The sound image location is displayed at the bottom of the two-dimensional surround pan graph, but

numbers cannot be entered there.

Name

Location,

Setting Range

Function

1 2D Surround Pan Graph -- Sets the sound image orientation. You can

move the sound image by clicking and

dragging.

2 Speaker

Button

L Left L63 F63 Clicking here moves the sound image to the

button location.

3 C Center C F63

4 R Right R63 F63

5 Ls Left Surround L63 R63

6 Bs Back Surround C R63

7 Rs Right Surround R63 R63

8 LFE Low Frequency

Effect (Sub Woofer)

-- Indicates that there is a sub woofer. Clicking

makes the LFE level 0 dB. The sound image

does not move by clicking.

9 Left-Right Position L63 - C - R63 Displays the LR sound image.

) Front-Back Position L63 - C - R63 Displays the front-back sound image.

3 4

5 6 7

9 )

Surround 6.1 component editor

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

381

Dragging

You can move the control by dragging it with the mouse.

Click

If you click within the graph, the control point will move to that position.

Click

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

382

Speaker Button

If you click any speaker button besides the [LFE] button, the control point will jump to that

speaker’s position.

Click

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

383

■ Surround 3-1

Surround 3-1 has four channel surround pan, with three channels in front, and one in the rear. There

is one input and four outputs.

Double-click a component to display the component editor for it.

Section Name/Parameter Setting Range Function

1 2D Surround

Pan Graph

2D Surround

Pan Graph

-- Sets the sound image orientation. You can

move the sound image by clicking and

dragging.

2 Speaker Button -- Clicking here moves the sound image to the

button location.

3 Position Left-Right Position L63 - C - R63 Displays the LR surround location.

4 Front-Back Position F63 - C - R63 Displays the front-back surround location.

5 Divergence Front 0 to 100% Sets the ratio for sending the front-center

signal to front L and front R.

6 Pan Nominal Position Center

Selects the nominal position from a menu.

3 4

Surround 3-1 component editor

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

384

■ Surround 5.1

Surround 5.1 has surround pan with three channels in front, two in the rear, and one sub woofer

channel. There is one input and six outputs.

Double-click a component to display the component editor for it.

Section Name/Parameter Setting Range Function

1 2D Surround

Pan Graph

2D Surround

Pan Graph

-- Sets the sound image orientation. You can

move the sound image by clicking and

dragging.

2 Speaker Button -- Clicking here moves the sound image to the

button location.

3 Position Left-Right Position L63 - C - R63 Displays the LR surround location.

4 Front-Back Position F63 - C - R63 Displays the front-back surround location.

5 Divergence Front 0 to 100% Sets the ratio for sending the front-center

signal to front L and front R.

6 LFE Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets output level to the sub woofer.

7 Pan Nominal Position Center

Selects the nominal position from a menu.

3 4

Surround 5.1 component editor

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

385

■ Surround 6.1

Surround 6.1 has surround pan with three channels in front, three in the rear, and one sub woofer

channel. There is one input and seven outputs.

Double-click a component to display the component editor for it.

Section Name/Parameter Setting Range Function

1 2D Surround

Pan Graph

2D Surround

Pan Graph

-- Sets the sound image orientation. You can

move the sound image by clicking and

dragging.

2 Speaker Button -- Clicking here moves the sound image to the

button location.

3 Position Left-Right Position L63 - C - R63 Displays the LR surround location.

4 Front-Back Position F63 - C - R63 Displays the front-back surround location.

5 Divergence Front 0 to 100% Sets the ratio for sending the front-center

signal to front L and front R.

6 Rear 0 to 100% Sets the ratio for sending the rear-center

signal to rear L and rear R.

7 LFE Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets output level to the sub woofer.

8 Pan Nominal Position Center

Selects the nominal position from a menu.

3 4

Surround 6.1 component editor

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

386

Router

The router assigns inputs to outputs. Each of the six router groups has a different number of inputs.

The groups are 1 input, 2 input, 4 input, 8 input, 12 input and 16 input. Each group has ﬁve

components, with 2, 4, 8, 12, and 16 outputs.

Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The number of channels varies

depending on the component, but all share a common conﬁguration in the component editor.

Routers let you route signals from various [Input] locations by connecting them to various [Output]

locations.

One output can be connected to one input only. A single input can be output to multiple channels, but

multiple inputs cannot be output over a single channel. In other words, you can distribute the inputs,

but you cannot mix them. You cannot setup routing for more signals than the number of output

channels.

1 Input

2 Input

8 Input

12 Input

16 Input

4 Input

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

387

■ Routing Settings

To change an assignment, click at the position where the desired input and output channels

intersect. When the mouse pointer is moved over a cell, the input and output channels are

highlighted, and a red line is displayed connecting them. Click to set routing for that position. If

another output channel has been assigned to the clicked input channel, the original assignment

will not be cleared. If another input channel has been assigned to the clicked output channel, the

original assignment will be cleared.

■ Clearing Routing Settings

If you click the dot that indicates routing, the routing indicated by that dot will be cleared and the

dot will be erased.

Click

Not Cleared

Cleared

Click

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

388

Source Selector

This component selects a single input source from multiple input sources.

“Position” is the number of input sources, and “Channel” is the number of channels included in the

source. For example, a “4 Position 2 Channel” component allows you to select a single 2-channel

source from four 2-channel input sources.

3 Position and 16 Position components are all 1 Channel types, while 1, 2, and 6 Channel versions of 4

Position and 8 Position components are provided.

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

389

Double-click a component to open the component editor. The component editor is the same for all

types, the only difference being the number of sources.

The Source Selector connects the selected input to the output. For example, if you select [1] for a 4

Position 2 Channel component, IN1-1 will be connected to OUT-1 and IN1-2 will be connected to

OUT2. If you select [2] IN2-1 will be connected to OUT-1 and IN2-2 will be connected to OUT2.

Source Selector Component

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

390

Speaker Processor

The Speaker Processor is a crossover processor that includes APF (All Pass Filter), horn EQ, and

limiter functions. Six component types are available: 1 Way, 2 Way, 3 Way, 4 Way, 5 Way, and 6 Way.

Speaker Processor components have one input and one or multiple outputs.

Double-click a component to open the component editor.

Name Function

1 Crossover response (phase) Crossover phase response, color coded for

output channel.

2 Crossover response (level) Crossover level response, color coded for

each output channel.

3 Input meter Displays the input signal level.

4 Output meter Displays the output level for each band.

5 Crossover Curve Display Button Turns crossover curve display for each

output channel on or off.

Section Parameter Range Function

6 Delay Delay ON/OFF Applies delay to the crossover response.

7 PEQ PEQ ON/OFF Applies PEQ to the crossover response.

8 9 ) ! @ # $

5655 7

Speaker processor Component

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

391

Different numbers of channels are provided by each component variation.

Each frequency band has its own color, with Low being red, Mid being green, and so on.

8 Navigator Input Level -∞ to +10 dB Speciﬁes the input signal level.

9 Crossover – Opens the crossover editor window.

) Delay – Opens the delay editor window.

! PEQ – Opens the parametric equalizer editor

window.

@ Output Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the output level from each output

channel.

# Mute ON/OFF Mutes the output of each output channel.

$ Limiter – Opens the limiter editor window.

1 Way ALL

2 Way Low/High

3 Way Low/Mid/High

4 Way Low/Low-Mid/High-Mid/High

5 Way Sub-Low/Low/Low-Mid/High-Mid/High

6 Way Sub-Low/Low/Low-Mid/Mid/High-Mid/High

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

392

■ Graph Control Points

The crossover level control points indicate [Output Level] and [Frequency]. The control points will

move in response to [Output Level] changes made via the knobs or edit boxes. The [Output Level]

and [Frequency] parameters can also be changed by directly dragging the control points.

Changes to the [Frequency] parameter are shown on the crossover phase response graph.

The control point in the center of the graph can be dragged vertically to change the [Output Level]

parameter.

Control points at the intersections between the frequency bands can be dragged horizontally to

change the [Frequency].

The [Output Level] parameter changes.

The crossover phase response will change.

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

393

■ Crossover

Click the Speaker Processor [Crossover] button to open the crossover editor window.

Section Parameter Range Function

1 Polarity Polarity Normal/Inverted Inverts the polarity of each output channel.

2 Mute Mute ON/OFF Mutes the output of each output channel.

This parameter is linked to the Mute setting in

the original window.

3 Frequency Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the crossover frequency between output

channels.

The display appears as a dotted line when

muted.

4 LPF Type Thru

6dB/Oct

12dB/Oct AdjustGc

12dB/Oct Butrwrth

12dB/Oct Bessel

12dB/Oct Linkwitz

18dB/Oct AdjustGc

18dB/Oct Butrwrth

18dB/Oct Bessel

24dB/Oct AdjustGc

24dB/Oct Butrwrth

24dB/Oct Bessel

24dB/Oct Linkwitz

36dB/Oct AdjustGc

36dB/Oct Butrwrth

36dB/Oct Bessel

48dB/Oct AdjustGc

48dB/Oct Butrwrth

48dB/Oct Bessel

48dB/Oct Linkwitz

Sets the roll-off slope and ﬁlter type for each

octave.

The ﬁlter is bypassed when [Thru] is

selected.

5 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the LPF cutoff frequency.

6 Gc -6 dB to +6 dB Sets the cutoff frequency gain when the

[Type] setting is [AdjustGc] (Adjustable Gc).

5 68 9

[Speaker Processor - Crossover] editor window

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

394

■ Delay

Click the Speaker Processor [Delay] button to open the window. Delay can be set independently

for each output channel.

7 HPF Type Thru

6dB/Oct

12dB/Oct AdjustGc

12dB/Oct Butrwrth

12dB/Oct Bessel

12dB/Oct Linkwitz

18dB/Oct AdjustGc

18dB/Oct Butrwrth

18dB/Oct Bessel

24dB/Oct AdjustGc

24dB/Oct Butrwrth

24dB/Oct Bessel

24dB/Oct Linkwitz

36dB/Oct AdjustGc

36dB/Oct Butrwrth

36dB/Oct Bessel

48dB/Oct AdjustGc

48dB/Oct Butrwrth

48dB/Oct Bessel

48dB/Oct Linkwitz

Sets the roll-off slope and ﬁlter type for each

octave.

The ﬁlter is bypassed when [Thru] is

selected.

8 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the HPF cutoff frequency.

9 Gc -6 dB to +6 dB Sets the cutoff frequency gain when the

[Type] setting is [AdjustGc] (Adjustable Gc).

Parameter Range Function

1 Delay ms: 0 to 500

Sample: the range

depends on the Fs value.

Meter: 0 to 171.8

Feet: 0 to 563.6

Frame: the range depends

on the Frame value.

Beat: the range depends

on the Beat value.

Sets the delay time.

Two edit boxes show milliseconds and the unit

speciﬁed in the [Delay Scale] section.

Sets the output level for each band.

2 On ON/OFF Turns delay ON.

3 Delay Scale ms

Sample

Meter

Feet

Frame

Beat

Selects the delay time units. The selected button will

light and the [Delay] edit box will change accordingly.

When [Beat] is selected the knobs can be used to

adjust BPM.

Section Parameter Range Function

[Speaker Processor - Delay] editor window

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

395

■ Parametric Equalizer

Click the Crossover Processor [PEQ] button to open the window. Parametric equalization is

provided for each crossover band.

*1 APF: The APF (All Pass Filter) is a ﬁlter that passes all frequency bands while affecting only the phase. Used to match the phase of the

crossover bands.

APF 1st shifts the phase from 0° to 180°, while APF 2nd shifts the phase from 0° to 360°. APF 2nd also allows Q adjustment.

*2 Horn EQ: CD (Constant Directivity) horn speakers exhibit a roll-off in high-frequency level.

Horn EQ is provided to compensate for this roll-off. For this reason the gain can only be set to higher than 0dB, and the frequency higher than

500Hz.

Name Function

1 Crossover response (phase) Shows crossover phase response.

2 Crossover response (level) Shows crossover level response.

Parameter Range Function

3 Type PEQ

L.SHELF 6dB/Oct

L.SHELF 12dB/Oct

H.SHELF 6dB/Oct

H.SHELF 12dB/Oct

HPF

LPF

APF

1st

APF

2nd

Horn EQ

Select a ﬁlter type from the menu.

4 B/W 0.090 to 6.672 Sets the octave bandwidth for each band.

5 Q 0.1 to 16.0 Sets the Q for each band.

6 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the frequency for each band.

7 Gain -18 dB to +18 dB Sets the gain for each band.

8 Bypass ON/OFF Bypasses the PEQ for each band.

9 PEQ On ON/OFF Turns PEQ ON.

[Speaker Processor - PEQ] edit window

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

396

■ Limiter

Click the Speaker Processor [Limiter] button to open the window. Limiter settings are provided for

each output channel.

Name Function

1 Limiter Curve A graphic representation of limiter response. The

horizontal axis represents input level, and the vertical

axis represents output level.

2 Gain Reduction Meter Displays the amount of gain reduction.

3 Output Meter Displays the output level.

Parameter Range Function

4 Threshold -54 dB to ±0 dB Sets the threshold level.

5 Attack Fast

Mid

Slow

Manual (0 to 120ms)

Sets the attack time.

6 Release Fast

Mid

Slow

Manual

(44.1kHz: 6ms to46s

48kHz: 5ms to 42.3s

88.2kHz: 3ms to 23s

96kHz: 3ms to 21.1s)

Sets the release time.

With the [Fast], [Mid], or [Slow] settings the optimum

value is automatically set based on the longest

wavelength audio signal received by the limiter. Three

settings are available: [Fast], [Mid], and [Slow].

7 On ON/OFF Turns the limiter ON. The limiter is bypassed when the

button is turned OFF.

4 5 6

23 7

[Speaker Processor - Limiter] Editor Window

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

397

SPX

SPX is an effect component that supports many different effect applications, such as reverb, delay,

and modulation effects, along with complex combinations of multiple effects. Although the SPX

component is a single component, it encompasses 43 effect types.

When you change the effect type, right-click the SPX component to display the context menu, click

[Recall Component Library], then select the effect type from the [Effect Type] submenu.

Double-click this component to display the component editor for it.

Name Function

1 Input Meter Displays the input signal level.

2 [Mix Balance] Control Adjusts the balance between the fundamental tone and the effect tone.

3 [Bypass] button When turned ON, the input signal is output without change.

4 Output Meter Displays the output signal level.

5 Other Parameters Other parameters vary according to the effect type.

SPX component editor

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

398

Other effect parameters vary according to the selected effect type, as shown below.

Effect Type Parameter Setting Range Function

Reverb Hall

Reverb Room

Reverb Stage

Reverb Plate

One input, two

output hall, room,

stage, and plate

reverb simulations,

all with gates.

Rev Time 0.3 to 99.0 s Reverb time

Ini.Dly 0.0 to 500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

Hi.Ratio 0.1 to 1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

Lo.Ratio 0.1 to 2.4 Low-frequency reverb time ratio

Diff. 0 to 10 Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spread)

Density 0 to 100% Reverb density

E/R Dly 0.0 to 100.0 ms Delay between early reﬂections and reverb

E/R Bal. 0 to 100% Balance of early reﬂections and reverb (0% = all

reverb, 100% = all early reﬂections)

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

Gate Lvl OFF, -60 to 0 dB Level at which gate kicks in

Attack 0 to 120 ms Gate opening speed

Hold 44.1kHz: 0.02ms to 2.13s

48kHz: 0.02 ms to 1.96s

88.2kHz: 0.01ms to 1.06s

96kHz: 0.01ms to 981ms

Gate open time

Decay 44.1kHz: 6.0ms to 46.0s

48kHz: 5.0ms to 42.3s

88.2kHz: 3ms to 23.0s

96kHz: 3ms to 21.1s

Gate closing speed

Early Ref.

One input, two

output early

reﬂections.

Type S-Hall, L-Hall, Random, Revers,

Plate, Spring

Type of early reﬂection simulation

RoomSize 0.1 to 20.0 Reﬂection spacing

Liveness 0 to 10 Early reﬂections decay characteristics (0 = dead,

10 = live)

Ini.Dly 0.0 to 500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

Diff. 0 to 10 Reﬂection diffusion (left-right reﬂection spread)

Density 0 to 100% Reﬂection density

ER Num. 1 to 19 Number of early reﬂections

FB.Gain -99 to +99% Feedback gain

Hi.Ratio 0.1 to 1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

Gate Reverb

Reverse Gate

One input, two

output early

reﬂections with

gate, and early

reﬂections with

reverse gate.

Type Type-A, Type-B Type of early reﬂection simulation

RoomSize 0.1 to 20.0 Reﬂection spacing

Liveness 0 to 10 Early reﬂections decay characteristics (0 = dead,

10 = live)

Ini.Dly 0.0 to 500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

Diff. 0 to 10 Reﬂection diffusion (left-right reﬂection spread)

Density 0 to 100% Reﬂection density

ER Num. 1 to 19 Number of early reﬂections

FB.Gain -99 to +99% Feedback gain

Hi.Ratio 0.1 to 1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

Mono Delay

One input, one

output basic repeat

delay.

Delay 0.0 to 2730.0 ms Delay time

FB.Gain -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase

feedback, minus values for reverse-phase

feedback)

Hi.Ratio 0.1 to 1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

399

Stereo Delay

Two input, two

output basic stereo

delay.

Delay L 0.0 to 1350.0 ms Left channel delay time

Delay R 0.0 to 1350.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB.Gain L -99 to +99% Left channel feedback (plus values for normal-

phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase

feedback)

FB.Gain R -99 to +99% Right channel feedback (plus values for normal-

phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase

feedback)

Hi.Ratio 0.1 to 1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

Mod.Delay

One input, two

output basic repeat

delay with

modulation.

Delay 0.0 to 2725.0 ms Delay time

FB.Gain -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase

feedback, minus values for reverse-phase

feedback)

Hi.Ratio 0.1 to 1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

Freq. 0.05 to 40.00 Hz Modulation speed

Depth 0 to 100% Modulation depth

Wave Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

Delay LCR

One input, two

output 3-tap delay

(left, center, right).

Delay L 0.0 to 2730.0 ms Left channel delay time

Delay C 0.0 to 2730.0 ms Center channel delay time

Delay R 0.0 to 2730.0 ms Right channel delay time

Delay FB 0.0 to 2730.0 ms Feedback delay time

Level L -100 to +100% Left channel delay level

Level C -100 to +100% Center channel delay level

Level R -100 to +100% Right channel delay level

FB.Gain -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase

feedback, minus values for reverse-phase

feedback)

Hi.Ratio 0.1 to 1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

Echo

Two input, two

output stereo delay

with crossed

feedback loop.

Delay L 0.0 to 1350.0 ms Left channel delay time

Delay R 0.0 to 1350.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB.Dly L 0.0 to 1350.0 ms Left channel feedback delay time

FB.Dly R 0.0 to 1350.0 ms Right channel feedback delay time

FB.Gain L -99 to +99% Left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-

phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase

feedback)

FB.Gain R -99 to +99% Right channel feedback gain (plus values for

normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-

phase feedback)

L->R FBG -99 to +99% Left to right channel feedback gain (plus values for

normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-

phase feedback)

R->L FBG -99 to +99% Right to left channel feedback gain (plus values for

normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-

phase feedback)

Hi.Ratio 0.1 to 1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

Chorus

Two input, two

output chorus

effect.

Freq. 0.05 to 40.00 Hz Modulation speed

AM.Depth 0 to 100% Amplitude modulation depth

PM.Depth 0 to 100% Pitch modulation depth

Mod.Dly 0.0 to 500.0 ms Modulation delay time

Wave Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

LSH F 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz Low shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G -12 to +12 dB Low shelving ﬁlter gain

EQ F 100 Hz to 8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G -12 to +12 dB EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q 10.0 to 0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

HSH F 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz High shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G -12 to +12 dB High shelving ﬁlter gain

Effect Type Parameter Setting Range Function

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

400

Flange

Two input, two

output ﬂange effect.

Freq. 0.05 to 40.00 Hz Modulation speed

Depth 0 to 100% Modulation depth

Mod.Dly 0.0 to 500.0 ms Modulation delay time

FB.Gain -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase

feedback, minus values for reverse-phase

feedback)

Wave Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

LSH F 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz Low shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G -12 to +12 dB Low shelving ﬁlter gain

EQ F 100 Hz to 8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G -12 to +12 dB EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q 10.0 to 0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

HSH F 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz High shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G -12 to +12 dB High shelving ﬁlter gain

Symphonic

Two input, two

output symphonic

effect.

Freq. 0.05 to 40.00 Hz Modulation speed

Depth 0 to 100% Modulation depth

Mod.Dly 0.0 to 500.0 ms Modulation delay time

Wave Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

LSH F 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz Low shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G -12 to +12 dB Low shelving ﬁlter gain

EQ F 100 Hz to 8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G -12 to +12 dB EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q 10.0 to 0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

HSH F 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz High shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G -12 to +12 dB High shelving ﬁlter gain

Phaser

Two input, two

output 16-stage

phaser.

Freq. 0.05 to 40.00 Hz Modulation speed

Depth 0 to 100% Modulation depth

FB.Gain -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase

feedback, minus values for reverse-phase

feedback)

Offset 0 to 100 Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset

PHASE 0.00 to 354.38 degrees Left and right modulation phase balance

Stage 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 Number of phase shift stages

LSH F 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz Low shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G -12 to +12 dB Low shelving ﬁlter gain

HSH F 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz High shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G -12 to +12 dB High shelving ﬁlter gain

Auto Pan

Two input, two

output autopanner.

Freq. 0.05 to 40.00 Hz Modulation speed

Depth 0 to 100% Modulation depth

Direction L<->R, L->R, L<-R, Turn L, Turn

Panning direction

Wave Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform

LSH F 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz Low shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G -12 to +12 dB Low shelving ﬁlter gain

EQ F 100 Hz to 8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G -12 to +12 dB EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q 10.0 to 0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

HSH F 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz High shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G -12 to +12 dB High shelving ﬁlter gain

Tremolo

Two input, two

output tremolo

effect.

Freq. 0.05 to 40.00 Hz Modulation speed

Depth 0 to 100% Modulation depth

Wave Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform

LSH F 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz Low shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G -12 to +12 dB Low shelving ﬁlter gain

EQ F 100 Hz to 8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G -12 to +12 dB EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q 10.0 to 0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

HSH F 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz High shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G -12 to +12 dB High shelving ﬁlter gain

Effect Type Parameter Setting Range Function

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

401

HQ.Pitch

One input, two

output high-quality

pitch shifter.

Pitch -12 to +12 semitones Pitch shift

Fine -50 to +50 cents Pitch shift ﬁne

Delay 0.0 to 1000.0 ms Delay time

FB.Gain -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase

feedback, minus values for reverse-phase

feedback)

Mode 1 to 10 Pitch shift precision

Dual Pitch

Two input, two

output pitch shifter.

Pitch 1 -24 to +24 semitones Channel #1 pitch shift

Fine 1 -50 to +50 cents Channel #1 pitch shift ﬁne

Pitch 2 -24 to +24 semitones Channel #2 pitch shift

Fine 2 -50 to +50 cents Channel #2 pitch shift ﬁne

Level 1 -100 to +100% Channel #1 level (plus values for normal phase,

minus values for reverse phase)

Pan 1 L63 to R63 Channel #1 pan

Level 2 -100 to +100% Channel #2 level (plus values for normal phase,

minus values for reverse phase)

Pan 2 L63 to R63 Channel #2 pan

Delay 1 0.0 to 1000.0 ms Channel #1 delay time

FB.Gain 1 -99 to +99% Channel #1 feedback gain (plus values for normal-

phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase

feedback)

Delay 2 0.0 to 1000.0 ms Channel #2 delay time

FB.Gain 2 -99 to +99% Channel #2 feedback gain (plus values for normal-

phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase

feedback)

Mode 1 to 10 Pitch shift precision

Rotary

One input, two

output rotary

speaker simulator.

Rotate STOP, START Rotation stop, start

Speed SLOW, FAST Rotation speed (see SLOW and FAST parameters)

Slow 0.05 to 10.00 Hz SLOW rotation speed

Fast 0.05 to 10.00 Hz FAST rotation speed

Drive 0 to 100 Overdrive level

Accel 0 to 10 Acceleration at speed changes

Low 0 to 100 Low-frequency ﬁlter

High 0 to 100 High-frequency ﬁlter

Ring Mod.

Two input, two

output ring

modulator.

Source OSC, SELF Modulation source: oscillator or input signal

Osc.Freq. 0.0 to 5000.0 Hz Oscillator frequency

FM Freq. 0.05 to 40.00 Hz Oscillator frequency modulation speed

FM Depth 0 to 100% Oscillator frequency modulation depth

Mod.Filter

Two input, two

output modulation

ﬁlter.

Freq. 0.05 to 40.00 Hz Modulation speed

Depth 0 to 100% Modulation depth

Phase 0.00 to 354.38 degrees Left-channel modulation and right-channel

modulation phase difference

Type LPF, HPF, BPF Filter type: low pass, high pass, band pass

Offset 0 to 100 Filter frequency offset

Reso. 0 to 20 Filter resonance

Level 0 to 100 Output level

Distortion

One input, two

output distortion

effect.

DST.Type DST1, DST2, OVD1, OVD2,

CRUNCH

Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)

Drive 0 to 100 Distortion drive

Master 0 to 100 Master volume

Tone -10 to +10 Tone

N.Gate 0 to 20 Noise reduction

Effect Type Parameter Setting Range Function

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

402

Amp Simulate

One input, two

output guitar amp

simulator.

AMP.Type STK-M1, STK-M2, THRASH,

MIDBST, CMB-PG, CMB-VR,

CMB-DX, CMB-TW, MINI, FLAT

Guitar amp simulation type

DST.Type DST1, DST2, OVD1, OVD2,

CRUNCH

Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)

Drive 0 to 100 Distortion drive

Master 0 to 100 Master volume

Bass 0 to 100 Bass tone control

Middle 0 to 100 Middle tone control

Treble 0 to 100 High tone control

Cab Dep 0 to 100% Speaker cabinet simulation depth

EQ F 100 to 8.0 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G -12 to +12 dB EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q 10.0 to 0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

N.Gate 0 to 20 Noise reduction

Dyna.Filter

Two input, two

output dynamically

controlled ﬁlter.

Sense 0 to 100 Sensitivity

Direction UP, DOWN Upward or downward frequency change

Decay 44.1kHz: 6.0ms to 46.0s

48kHz: 5.0ms to 42.3s

88.2kHz: 3ms to 23.0s

96kHz: 3ms to 21.1s

Filter frequency change decay speed

Type LPF, HPF, BPF Filter type

Offset 0 to 100 Filter frequency offset

Reso. 0 to 20 Filter resonance

Level 0 to 100 Output Level

Dyna.Flange

Two input, two

output dynamically

controlled ﬂanger.

Sense 0 to 100 Sensitivity

Direction UP, DOWN Upward or downward frequency change

Decay 44.1kHz: 6.0ms to 46.0s

48kHz: 5.0ms to 42.3s

88.2kHz: 3ms to 23.0s

96kHz: 3ms to 21.1s

Decay speed

Offset 0 to 100 Delay time offset

FB.Gain -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase

feedback, minus values for reverse-phase

feedback)

LSH F 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz Low shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G -12 to +12 dB Low shelving ﬁlter gain

EQ F 100 Hz to 8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G -12 to +12 dB EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q 10.0 to 0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

HSH F 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz High shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G -12 to +12 dB High shelving ﬁlter gain

Dyna.Phaser

Two input, two

output dynamically

controlled phaser.

Sense 0 to 100 Sensitivity

Direction UP, DOWN Upward or downward frequency change

Decay 44.1kHz: 6.0ms to 46.0s

48kHz: 5.0ms to 42.3s

88.2kHz: 3ms to 23.0s

96kHz: 3ms to 21.1s

Decay speed

Offset 0 to 100 Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset

FB.Gain -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase

feedback, minus values for reverse-phase

feedback)

Stage 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 Number of phase shift stages

LSH F 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz Low shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G -12 to +12 dB Low shelving ﬁlter gain

HSH F 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz High shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G -12 to +12 dB High shelving ﬁlter gain

Effect Type Parameter Setting Range Function

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

403

Rev+Chorus

One input, two

output reverb and

chorus effects in

parallel.

Rev Time 0.3 to 99.0 s Reverb time

Ini.Dly 0.0 to 500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

Hi.Ratio 0.1 to 1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

Diff. 0 to 10 Spread

Density 0 to 100% Reverb density

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

Rev/Cho 0 to 100% Reverb and chorus balance (0% = all reverb, 100%

= all chorus)

Freq. 0.05 to 40.00 Hz Modulation speed

AM.Depth 0 to 100% Amplitude modulation depth

PM.Depth 0 to 100% Pitch modulation depth

Mod.Dly 0.0 to 500.0 ms Modulation delay time

Wave Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

Rev->Chorus

One input, two

output reverb and

chorus effects in

series.

Rev Time 0.3 to 99.0 s Reverb time

Ini.Dly 0.0 to 500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

Hi.Ratio 0.1 to 1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

Diff. 0 to 10 Spread

Density 0 to 100% Reverb density

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

Rev Bal. 0 to 100% Reverb and chorused reverb balance (0% = all

chorused reverb, 100% = all reverb)

Freq. 0.05 to 40.00 Hz Modulation speed

AM.Depth 0 to 100% Amplitude modulation depth

PM.Depth 0 to 100% Pitch modulation depth

Mod.Dly 0.0 to 500.0 ms Modulation delay time

Wave Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

Rev+Flange

One input, two

output reverb and

ﬂanger effects in

parallel.

Rev Time 0.3 to 99.0 s Reverb time

Ini.Dly 0.0 to 500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

Hi.Ratio 0.1 to 1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

Diff. 0 to 10 Spread

Density 0 to 100% Reverb density

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

Rev/Flg 0 to 100% Reverb and ﬂange balance (0% = all reverb, 100%

= all ﬂange)

Freq. 0.05 to 40.00 Hz Modulation speed

Depth 0 to 100% Modulation depth

Mod.Dly 0.0 to 500.0 ms Modulation delay time

FB.Gain -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase

feedback, minus values for reverse-phase

feedback)

Wave Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

Rev->Flange

One input, two

output reverb and

ﬂanger effects in

series.

Rev Time 0.3 to 99.0 s Reverb time

Ini.Dly 0.0 to 500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

Hi.Ratio 0.1 to 1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

Diff. 0 to 10 Spread

Density 0 to 100% Reverb density

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

Rev Bal. 0 to 100% Reverb and ﬂanged reverb balance (0% = all

ﬂanged reverb, 100% = all reverb)

Freq. 0.05 to 40.00 Hz Modulation speed

Depth 0 to 100% Modulation depth

Mod.Dly 0.0 to 500.0 ms Modulation delay time

FB.Gain -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase

feedback, minus values for reverse-phase

feedback)

Wave Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

Effect Type Parameter Setting Range Function

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

404

Rev+Sympho.

One input, two

output reverb and

symphonic effects

in parallel.

Rev Time 0.3 to 99.0 s Reverb time

Ini.Dly 0.0 to 500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

Hi.Ratio 0.1 to 1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

Diff. 0 to 10 Spread

Density 0 to 100% Reverb density

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

Rev/Sym 0 to 100% Reverb and symphonic balance (0% = all reverb,

100% = all symphonic)

Freq. 0.05 to 40.00 Hz Modulation speed

Depth 0 to 100% Modulation depth

Mod.Dly 0.0 to 500.0 ms Modulation delay time

Wave Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

Rev->Sympho.

One input, two

output reverb and

symphonic effects

in series.

Rev Time 0.3 to 99.0 s Reverb time

Ini.Dly 0.0 to 500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

Hi.Ratio 0.1 to 1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

Diff. 0 to 10 Spread

Density 0 to 100% Reverb density

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

Rev Bal. 0 to 100% Reverb and symphonic reverb balance (0% = all

symphonic reverb, 100% = all reverb)

Freq. 0.05 to 40.00 Hz Modulation speed

Depth 0 to 100% Modulation depth

Mod.Dly 0.0 to 500.0 ms Modulation delay time

Wave Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

Rev->Pan

One input, two

output reverb and

autopan effects in

parallel.

Rev Time 0.3 to 99.0 s Reverb time

Ini.Dly 0.0 to 500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

Hi.Ratio 0.1 to 1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

Diff. 0 to 10 Spread

Density 0 to 100% Reverb density

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

Rev Bal. 0 to 100% Reverb and panned reverb balance (0% = all

panned reverb, 100% = all reverb)

Freq. 0.05 to 40.00 Hz Modulation speed

Depth 0 to 100% Modulation depth

Direction L<->R, L->R, L<-R, Turn L, Turn

Panning direction

Wave Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform

Delay+ER.

One input, two

output delay and

early reﬂections

effects in parallel.

Delay L 0.0 to 1000.0 ms Left channel delay time

Delay R 0.0 to 1000.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB.Dly 0.0 to 1000.0 ms Feedback delay time

FB.Gain -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase

feedback, minus values for reverse-phase

feedback)

Hi.Ratio 0.1 to 1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

Dly/ER 0 to 100% Delay and early reﬂections balance (0% = all delay,

100% = all early reﬂections)

Type S-Hall, L-Hall, Random, Revers,

Plate, Spring

Type of early reﬂection simulation

RoomSize 0.1 to 20.0 Reﬂection spacing

Liveness 0 to 10 Early reﬂections decay characteristics (0 = dead,

10 = live)

Ini.Dly 0.0 to 500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

Diff. 0 to 10 Spread

Density 0 to 100% Reverb density

ER Num. 1 to 19 Number of early reﬂections

Effect Type Parameter Setting Range Function

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

405

Delay->ER.

One input, two

output delay and

early reﬂections

effects in series.

Delay L 0.0 to 1000.0 ms Left channel delay time

Delay R 0.0 to 1000.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB.Dly 0.0 to 1000.0 ms Feedback delay time

FB.Gain -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase

feedback, minus values for reverse-phase

feedback)

Hi.Ratio 0.1 to 1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

DLY.BAL 0 to 100% Delay and early reﬂected delay balance (0% = all

early reﬂected delay, 100% = all delay)

Type S-Hall, L-Hall, Random, Revers,

Plate, Spring

Type of early reﬂection simulation

RoomSize 0.1 to 20.0 Reﬂection spacing

Liveness 0 to 10 Early reﬂections decay characteristics (0 = dead,

10 = live)

Ini.Dly 0.0 to 500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

Diff. 0 to 10 Spread

Density 0 to 100% Reverb density

ER Num. 1 to 19 Number of early reﬂections

Delay+Reverb

One input, two

output delay and

reverb effects in

parallel.

Delay L 0.0 to 1000.0 ms Left channel delay time

Delay R 0.0 to 1000.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB.Dly 0.0 to 1000.0 ms Feedback delay time

FB.Gain -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase

feedback, minus values for reverse-phase

feedback)

Delay Hi 0.1 to 1.0 Delay high-frequency feedback ratio

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

Dly/Rev 0 to 100% Delay and reverb balance (0% = all delay, 100% =

all reverb)

Rev Time 0.3 to 99.0 s Reverb time

Ini.Dly 0.0 to 500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

Rev Hi 0.1 to 1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

Diff. 0 to 10 Spread

Density 0 to 100% Reverb density

Delay->Reverb

One input, two

output delay and

reverb effects in

series.

Delay L 0.0 to 1000.0 ms Left channel delay time

Delay R 0.0 to 1000.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB.Dly 0.0 to 1000.0 ms Feedback delay time

FB.Gain -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase

feedback, minus values for reverse-phase

feedback)

Delay Hi 0.1 to 1.0 Delay high-frequency feedback ratio

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

Dly.Bal 0 to 100% Delay and delayed reverb balance (0% = all

delayed reverb, 100% = all delay)

Rev Time 0.3 to 99.0 s Reverb time

Ini.Dly 0.0 to 500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

Rev Hi 0.1 to 1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

Diff. 0 to 10 Spread

Density 0 to 100% Reverb density

Effect Type Parameter Setting Range Function

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

406

Dist->Delay

One input, two

output distortion

and delay effects in

series.

DST.Type DST1, DST2, OVD1, OVD2,

CRUNCH

Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)

Drive 0 to 100 Distortion drive

Master 0 to 100 Master volume

Tone -10 to +10 Tone control

N.Gate 0 to 20 Noise reduction

Delay 0.0 to 2725.0 ms Delay time

FB.Gain -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase

feedback, minus values for reverse-phase

feedback)

Hi.Ratio 0.1 to 1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

Freq. 0.05 to 40.00 Hz Modulation speed

Depth 0 to 100% Modulation depth

Dly.Bal 0 to 100% Distortion and delay balance (0% = all distortion,

100% = all delayed distortion)

Multi.Filter

Two input, two

output 3-band

multi-ﬁlter (24 dB/

octave).

Type 1 HPF, LPF, BPF Filter 1 type: high pass, low pass, band pass

Type 2 HPF, LPF, BPF Filter 2 type: high pass, low pass, band pass

Type 3 HPF, LPF, BPF Filter 3 type: high pass, low pass, band pass

Freq. 1 28.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz Filter 1 frequency

Freq. 2 28.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz Filter 2 frequency

Freq. 3 28.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz Filter 3 frequency

Level 1 0 to 100 Filter 1 level

Level 2 0 to 100 Filter 2 level

Level 3 0 to 100 Filter 3 level

Reso. 1 0 to 20 Filter 1 resonance

Reso. 2 0 to 20 Filter 2 resonance

Reso. 3 0 to 20 Filter 3 resonance

Stereo Reverb

Two input, two

output stereo

reverb.

Rev Time 0.3 to 99.0 s Reverb time

Rev Type Hall, Room, Stage, Plate Reverb type

Ini.Dly 0.0 to 100.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

Hi.Ratio 0.1 to 1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

Lo.Ratio 0.1 to 2.4 Low-frequency reverb time ratio

Diff. 0 to 10 Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spread)

Density 0 to 100% Reverb density

E/R Bal. 0 to 100% Balance of early reﬂections and reverb (0% = all

reverb, 100% = all early reﬂections)

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

Effect Type Parameter Setting Range Function

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

407

M.Band Dyna.

Two input, two

output 3-band

dynamics

processor, with

individual solo and

gain reduction

metering for each

band.

Low Gain -96.0 to +12.0 dB Low band level

Mid Gain -96.0 to +12.0 dB Mid band level

Hi. Gain -96.0 to +12.0 dB High band level

Presence -10 to +10 For positive values, the threshold of the high band is

lowered and the threshold of the low band is

increased. For negative values, the opposite will

occur. When set to 0, all three bands are affected

the same.

Cmp.Thre -24.0 dB to 0.0 dB Compressor threshold

Cmp.Rat 1:1 to 20:1 Compressor ratio

Cmp.Atk 0 to 120 ms Compressor attack

Cmp.Rel 44.1kHz: 6.0ms to 46.0s

48kHz: 5.0ms to 42.3s

88.2kHz: 3ms to 23.0s

96kHz: 3ms to 21.1s

Compressor release time

Cmp.Knee 0 to 5 Compressor knee

Lookup 0.0 to 100.0 ms Lookup delay

Cmp.Byp ON/OFF Compressor bypass

L-M XOver 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz Low/mid crossover frequency

M-H XOver 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz Mid/high crossover frequency

Slope -6 dB, -12 dB Filter slope

Ceiling -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB, OFF Speciﬁes the maximum output level

Exp.Thre -54.0 dB to -24.0 dB Expander threshold

Exp.Rat 1:1 to ∞:1 Expander ratio

Exp.Rel 44.1kHz: 6.0ms to 46.0s

48kHz: 5.0ms to 42.3s

88.2kHz: 3ms to 23.0s

96kHz: 3ms to 21.1s

Expander release time

Exp.Byp ON/OFF Expander bypass

Lim.Thre -12.0 dB to 0.0 dB Limiter threshold

Lim.Atk 0 to 120 ms Limiter attack

Lim.Rel 44.1kHz: 6.0ms to 46.0s

48kHz: 5.0ms to 42.3s

88.2kHz: 3ms to 23.0s

96kHz: 3ms to 21.1s

Limiter release time

Lim.Byp ON/OFF Limiter bypass

Lim.Knee 0 to 5 Limiter knee

Low ON/OFF Low band solo

Mid ON/OFF Mid band solo

High ON/OFF High band solo

Effect Type Parameter Setting Range Function

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

408

Slot

■ Slot In

The Slot In Component only has outputs. 4, 8, and 16 channel types are provided.

Right-click the component and select [Open Slot In Component] from the contextual menu to open the

component editor. The component editor is the same for all types.

Name Function

1 Meter Shows the signal level for each channel.

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

409

■ Slot Out

The Slot Out component has only an input. There are three types of Slot In components: four-

channel, eight-channel, and 16 channel types.

The component editor can be displayed by right-clicking the component, then clicking [Open Slot

Out Component Editor] on the displayed context menu.

Parameter Setting Range Function

1 Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the output signal for each

channel.

2 On ON/OFF Turns ON each channel's output.

3 Delay 0 to 24 Samples Sets the delay time.

4 Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the output level.

5 Dither Off

Sets the quantization bit rate for conversion.

Slot Out component editor

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

410

Cascade

■ Cascade In

The Cascade In Component only has outputs.

Only the DME64N has a Cascade In component, which can be displayed by checking [Show

Cascade Port] in the DME Device Properties dialog box.

Right-click the component and select [Open Component Editor] from the contextual menu to open the

component editor. The component editor is the same for all types.

Name Function

1 Meter Shows the signal level for each channel.

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

411

■ Cascade Out

The Cascade Out Component only has inputs.

Right-click the component and select [Open Component Editor] from the contextual menu to open the

component editor. The component editor is the same for all types.

Name Function

1 Meter Shows the signal level for each channel.

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

412

Internal Head Amp

In the DME24 conﬁguration window, there are [Unit Input] and [Unit Output] blocks. They are the

Analog In and Analog Out DME24 I/O ports.

■ Unit Input

Double-click [Unit Input] to display the component editor for it.

■ Analog Out

Double-click [Unit Output] to display the component editor for it. The displayed parameters are the

same as for Slot Out component editor.

Parameter Setting Range Function

1 +48 ON/OFF Turns ON phantom power (+48V).

2 Gain +10 to -60 dB Sets the head amp gain.

Internal Head Amp component editor

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

413

MY-Card

This shows the input and output for the card inserted into the DME expansion slot. The following

components are available, depending on the card types:

Input Format/Output Format

This is the I/O mode for high sample rate operation (88.2/96 kHz).

In the Double Channel Mode, high sampling rate data (88.2/96 kHz) is transmitted and received by

two channels, each channel handling the digital audio data at half the sampling rate. For this reason

the total number of available channels is halved, and even-numbered channels are unavailable.

In the Double Speed Mode digital audio data is transmitted and received at the current high sampling

rate (88.2/96 kHz).

In the Single Mode digital audio data is transmitted and received at half the current high sampling rate

(88.2/96 kHz).

Setting Examples

When the MY card word clock is used as the master word clock, Double FS determines whether the

speed of that word clock is to be doubled and used as the DME clock. The Double Fs setting is only

available the word clock from an MY Card is used.

Operation clock of related equipment The DME operation clock Input Format/Output Format

88.2/96 kHz (Double Channel) 88.2/96 kHz Double Channel

88.2/96 kHz (Double Speed) Double Speed

44.1k/48k Single

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

414

■ MY-Others

Double-click the block to display the component editor for it.This editor can be used for generic MY

card editing, but some parameters are not available. Use a card speciﬁc editor when available.

■ MY8-AE96S

Double-click the block to display the component editor for it.

Parameter Setting Range Function

1 Input Format Double Channel

Double Speed

Single

Selects the format for 88.2/96 kHz.

2 Double Fs ON/OFF When ON the speed of the word clock from the MY

Card is doubled.

3 Output Format Double Channel

Double Speed

Single

Selects the format for 88.2/96 kHz.

Parameter Setting Range Function

1 Input Format Double Channel

Double Speed

Selects the format for 88.2/96 kHz.

2 Double Fs ON/OFF When ON the speed of the word clock from the MY

Card is doubled.

3 Output Format Double Channel

Double Speed

Selects the format for 88.2/96 kHz.

4 Sampling Rate

Converter

ON/OFF Turns the sampling rate converter ON.

MY8-AE96S component editor

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

415

■ MY16-AE/MY8-AE96/MY8-AE/MY8-AT/MY8-TD/MY16-TD/MY16-AT

Double-click the block to display the component editor for it.

Parameter Setting Range Function

1 Input Format Double Channel

Double Speed

Selects the format for 88.2/96 kHz. For MY8-AE96, the

setting range is Double Channel/Double Speed. For

other cards, it is Double Channel/Single.

2 Double Fs ON/OFF When ON the speed of the word clock from the MY

Card is doubled. Only for MY16-AE/MY8-AE96/MY16-

TD. When On is set for the MY8-AE96, the Input Format

is Double Channel. When Off is set, the input format is

Double Speed.

3 Output Format Double Channel

Double Speed

Single

Selects the format for 88.2/96 kHz. For MY8-AE96, the

setting range is Double Channel/Double Speed. For

other cards, it is Double Channel/Single.

Example: MY16-AE component editor

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

416

■ MY16-C

Double-click the block to display the component editor for it.

Section Parameter Setting Range Function

1 Setting Priority Setting Priority Hardware/

Software

The MY16-C switch settings take priority when

“Hardware” is selected, and the DME Designer

settings take priority when “Software” is

selected.

2 Bundle Number Input 0 to 65279 Sets the input bundle number.

Output 0 to 65279 Sets the output bundle number.

3 Serial Channel Rx OFF, 1 - 16 Sets the serial channel for the receive side.

Tx OFF, 1 - 16 Sets the serial channel for the send side.

4 Properties Bit Length Bit Off

16 bit

20 bit

24 bit

Sets the bit rate for output. Mutes the signal if

[Bit Off] is set.

5 Latency 5.33 ms

2.67 ms

1.33 ms

Sets the delay.

NOTE

The parameters will not link immediately when Setting Priority is switched.

Please edit another parameter after switching Setting Priority.

MY16-C R | [ l g G f B ^ [

MY16-C component editor

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

417

Remote Controlled Head Amp

There are AD824 and AD8HR components arranged in the zone window.

■ AD824

Controls the Yamaha A/D converter AD824. The AD824 is an eight channel analog to digital

converter.

Double-click the component to display the component editor for it.

NOTE

If a DME is not selected in the properties dialog box, the component editor will not be displayed even if you double-click

(page 170).

Parameter Setting Range Function

1 +48 ON/OFF Turns ON phantom power (+48V).

2 Gain +10 to -62 dBu Sets the head amp gain.

3 Word Clock 48 kHz

44.1 kHz

BNC

Slot

Sets the operating frequency for the Word Clock.

AD824 component editor

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

418

■ AD8HR

Controls the Yamaha A/D converter AD8HR. The AD8HR is an eight channel analog to digital

converter.

Double-click this component to display the component editor for it.

NOTE

If a DME is not selected in the properties dialog box, the component editor will not be displayed even if you double-click

(page 170).

Section Parameter Setting Range Function

1 Gain +48 ON/OFF Turns ON phantom power (+48V).

2 HPF ON/OFF Turns output ON.

3 Frequency 20 to 600Hz Sets the cutoff frequency.

4 Gain +10 to -62 dBu Sets the head amp gain.

5 Word Clock Word Clock 96 kHz

88.2 kHz

48 kHz

44.1 kHz

Word Clock In

Digital Out A

Sets the operating frequency for the Word

Clock.

Double Speed

Double Channel

Selects the operation for 88.2/96 kHz.

AD8HR component editor

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

419

Component Glossary

Adjustable Gc (AdjustGc)

One type of ﬁlter characteristic. With this setting, you can adjust Gc (gain on the cutoff frequency)

between -6 dB and +6 dB. If you set -3 dB it becomes a Butterworth ﬁlter. If you set -6 dB, it becomes

Linkwitz-Riley ﬁlter.

Components: Crossover, Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, Programmable BPF,

Programmable HPF, Programmable LPF, Speaker Processor

Attack (Attack Time)

In dynamic components, sets the time period for compressing or expanding the signal after the

component operates. As the attack time is made faster, compression or expansion becomes more

instantaneous. As it is made slower, the initial attack part of the sound will not be compressed or

expanded.

Components: Crossover Processor, Compander, Crossover Processor II, Compressor, De-

Esser, Ducking, Expander, Gate, Limiter, Speaker Processor

Bessel

One type of ﬁlter characteristic. For curves where phase characteristics are important, Bessel has

gentler attenuation then Butterworth, and there is little distortion of the waveform when square waves

are passed through.

Components: Crossover, Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, Programmable BPF,

Programmable HPF, Programmable LPF, Speaker Processor

Butterworth (Butrwrth)

One type of ﬁlter characteristics. This ﬁlter has the most general characteristics. The pass band is ﬂat

and the gain for the cutoff frequency is -3 dB.

Components: Crossover, Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, Programmable BPF,

Programmable HPF, Programmable LPF, Speaker Processor

Bypass

Passes the signal without changing it. When you turn this ON, bypassed sound (unchanged sound) is

output. When you turn this OFF, the sound is output with effects applied.

Components: Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, GEQ, PEQ, BPF, HPF, LPF, Notch,

Programmable BPF, Programmable HPF, Programmable LPF, Speaker Processor, SPX

Decay (Decay Time)

Sets the time period until gain returns to normal after a trigger signal level falls below the threshold

value.

Components: Ducking, Gate, Auto Mixer

Delay

Sets the time period by which a signal is delayed.

Components: Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, Delay Long, Delay Short, Delay

Matrix, Speaker Processor, SPX, Slot Output, Unit Output

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

420

Delay Scale

Sets the units used for specifying the delay time.

Components: Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, Delay Long, Delay Short, Speaker

Processor

Divergence

Sets the ratio for sending the center signal to LR. When 100 percent is set, the signal will be sent to LR

only. When zero percent is set, the signal is sent to center only.

Components: LCR, Surround 3-1, Surround 5.1, Surround 6.1

Fade

Sets the action of the fader when there is a large change in its position during scene recall.

When you turn this ON, the fader moves gradually to the position after the jump. If you turn this OFF, it

immediately jumps to the parameters saved in the recalled scene.

Component: Fader

Frequency

Sets a frequency. In the de-esser, this sets the lowest frequency of the signal to be compressed when

the component is operating. In the BPF, HPF, and LPF ﬁlters, this sets the cutoff frequency. In the

graphic equalizer, it is also used as the frequency band button.

Components: Crossover, Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, De-Esser, GEQ, PEQ,

BPF, HPF, LPF, Notch, Programmable BPF, Programmable HPF, Programmable LPF, Oscillator,

Speaker Processor, SPX, Remote HA

Gain

Sets the ampliﬁcation factor for the entire signal level.

Components: Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, Compander, Compressor,

De-Esser, Expander, GEQ, PEQ, Auto Mixer, Speaker Processor, Remote HA, DME24N HA-AD

Gain Correct

In the Auto-Mixer, automatically controls the output level for the number of open channels. In

situations, where multiple microphones are used, feedback may occur because many channels are

open at the same time. Feedback can be avoided by using gain correct.

Component: Auto Mixer

Hold (Hold Time)

Sets how long the gate stays open or the ducking remains active once the trigger signal has fallen

below the threshold level.

Components: Ducking, Gate, Auto Mixer, SPX

KeyIn

Tur ns an input signal connected to a component's KeyIn port into a trigger that activates the

component. You can select the trigger source in components that have KeyIn ports.

Components: Compander, Compressor, Ducking, Expander, Gate, Limiter

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

421

Knee

In compressors, de-essers, and expanders, sets the way in which compression or expansion will be

applied after the signal exceeds the threshold. The following range of settings is available: HARD, 1,

2, 3, 4, 5.

If Hard is set, the signal level changes to a straight line following the speciﬁed slope when the trigger

signal exceeds the threshold.

If a value between 1 and 5 (5 = softest) is speciﬁed, the curve gradually changes when the threshold

is exceeded, producing a more natural sound.

Components: Compander, Compressor, Ducking, Expander, Gate, Limiter

LFE (Sub Woofer Speaker)

This is a special speaker for playing back low frequency sounds.

Component: Surround 5.1, Surround 6.1

Linkwitz-Riley (Linkwitz)

One type of ﬁlter characteristics. As second-order ﬁlters, the sum of the output voltages for LPF and

HPF have a gain of 0bB across the entire band. The pass band is ﬂat, but the cutoff frequency gain is

-6 dB.

Components: Crossover, Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, Programmable BPF,

Programmable HPF, Programmable LPF, Speaker Processor

Pan

Sets the distribution ratio of the input signal between right and left.

Components: LCR, LR, SPX

Pan Nominal Position

Sets the 0 dB reference for pan. There are two selections available, [Center] and [LR] (LR Nominal).

Center nominal uses the center volume as a reference. The means the center volume is 0 dB, and the

LR speakers are -3 dB.

LR nominal uses the LR speaker volume as the reference. The means the LR speaker volume is 0 dB,

and the center is +3 dB.

Components: LCR, Surround 3-1, Surround 5.1, Surround 6.1

Phase

Reverses the phase of the signal. If you turn this ON, signal is inverted. If you turn this OFF, the signal

is not inverted.

Components: Crossover, Crossover Processor, GEQ, PEQ, BPF, HPF, LPF, Notch,

Programmable BPF, Programmable HPF, Programmable LPF, Fader, Auto Mixer, Delay Matrix,

Matrix Mixer, Slot Output, Unit Output

Sets the frequency bandwidth that will change the sound. As the value gets larger, the width gets

narrower and the curve becomes steeper.

In the parametric equalizer, this sets the frequency width where the gain will be cut or boosted. When

Q is widened, the gain is boosted or cut along a wide range centering on the frequency set by the

frequency setting, resulting in a large change in the tone quality. When Q is narrowed, only a speciﬁc

frequency is boosted or cut.

Components: Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, GEQ, PEQ, BPF, Notch, Speaker

Processor, SPX

Chapter 6 Component Guide

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

422

Range

Set for Ducking and Gate. Sets the amount by which the level is reduced when signal is ducked/

gated. It can be set within the range of -70 to 0 dB. At -70 dB the entire signal above the threshold

value is cut. At 0 dB, there is no effect.

Components: Ducking, Gate

Ratio

Sets the ratio of change in the output signal level with respect to the input signal level.

At 1:1, there is no compression.

At 2:1, when a trigger signal level that exceeds the threshold changes by 10 dB, the output level will

change by 5 dB.

Components: Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, Compander, Compressor,

De-Esser, Expander, SPX

Release (Release Time)

Sets the time period until gain returns to normal after a trigger signal level falls below the threshold

value and operation of a component ceases.

If the release time is short, the sound will seem like it is jumping (the ear will notice the change)

because the gain suddenly returns to normal. If the release is set too long, compression might not be

applied properly because the next high level signal will be input before the gain returns to normal from

the previous high. It’s a good ideal to try an initial release time setting in the range of 0.11 to 0.5

milliseconds.

Components: Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, Compander, Compressor,

De-Esser, Expander, Limiter, Speaker Processor, SPX

Slope

In a high pass ﬁlter (HPF) or low pass ﬁlter (LPF), this sets the attenuation amount for each octave.

A large value results in rapid attenuation. Clicking the [Slope] button displays a menu.

You can select [6 dB/Oct] or [12 dB/Oct] in the HPF or LPF.

In the crossover that is part of the crossover processor, in the stand-alone crossover, the

programmable BPF, the programmable LPF, and the programmable HPF, you can select from [6 dB/

Oct], [12 dB/Oct], [18 dB/Oct], [24 dB/Oct], [36 dB/Oct], and [48 dB/Oct].

Component: HPF, LPF

Threshold

Sets the signal level that causes the component to operate.

Components: Crossover, Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, Compander,

Compressor, De-Esser, Ducking, Expander, Gate, Limiter, Auto Mixer, Speaker Processor, SPX

Width

Sets how much lower the level must be than the threshold level for the expansion effect to begin.

When the trigger signal level changes by 2 dB with the expansion ratio of the expander set at 5:1, the

output level will change by 10 dB.

In the compander, if the width is set at 90 dB, the expander effect will be essentially be turned OFF.

Component: Compander

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

423

Troubleshooting

For the latest information about DME Designer, visit the Yamaha pro audio site at

http://www.yamahaproaudio.com.

Symptom Possible Causes Corrective Actions

A compile error occurs during

synchronization.

DSP total resource consumption has

exceeded the upper limit.

Delete unneeded components. The

Resource Meter window must read 100%

or less.

The wiring between components is

connected from multiple output terminals

to a single input.

Change the connections so that a single

output is connected to a single input

terminal. Using a matrix mixer or similar

component, gather multiple outputs into

one signal.

Cannot place component. Cannot place

wiring.

You are in online status. Execute [Go Off-line] on the

synchronization screen to go into ofﬂine

status.

The Designer window in not in edit mode. Place a checkmark next to [Edit] on the

[Tool] menu.

The currently logged on user is restricted

from editing.

Logoff, then log in again as a new user,

or as the Administrator. If edit restrictions

are required for a user, place a check in

the [Security] → [Edit] checkbox

A user module is not displayed on the

list.

The [File] menu → [Preference] →

[ContentsFolder] has been changed, or

the “User Module” folder has been

moved.

Check that there are user module ﬁles

(.umf) in the “ContentsFolder” and “User

Module” folders.

Cannot switch conﬁgurations in the

Navigator Window.

While online, you cannot not switch to a

conﬁguration different from the current

scene.

If you can switch between scenes, you

will be able to switch conﬁgurations.

The user module window does not open,

even when a user module is double-

clicked.

This is a user module saved by selecting

[Open] → [User Module Design

Window].

Open the save dialog, select [Open] →

[User Module Editor], and resave the

user module.

No editor displays after right-clicking on

a card component, and selecting [Open]

from the context menu.

Some cards do not have editors. No special corrective action.

The message “Reset Conﬁg…” is

displayed for a long time in the message

area of the “Synchronization” dialog box.

This is not abnormal. If many scenes are

entered into the DME, processing takes

time.

Wait until processing ﬁnishes.

Cannot set the monitor output. This is because channels connected with

wiring cannot be used as monitor output.

Select an unconnected channel.

The MIDI Setup toolbar will not be

displayed.

Stored in the minimized task tray. Right-click the MIDI Setup icon in the

task tray then click [Show].

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

424

Index

AD824 .................................................................................170, 417

AD8HR ................................................................................170, 418

"Add Event" dialog box ................................................................ 118

“Add User” dialog box .................................................................. 60

Adjustable Gc (AdjustGc) ........................................................... 419

[Administrator] User ...................................................................... 55

Analyze ........................................................................................249

[Area Parts List] ........................................................................... 153

Area window .......................................................................... 15, 235

Attack (Attack Time) ....................................................................419

Auto Log On .................................................................................. 21

Auto-Logon User ................................................................... 57

Auto Mixer ...................................................................................360

Background Images

setting .................................................................................295

Backup ........................................................................................135

Band Pass Filter (BPF) ................................................................349

Bessel ..........................................................................................419

Box (rectangle) ............................................................................ 191

Butterworth (Butrwrth) ................................................................. 419

Bypass ........................................................................................419

“Cascade Setting” dialog box .....................................................166

“Change User Information” dialog box ......................................... 60

Changing Order ..........................................................................218

“Clock” dialog box ......................................................................105

Close .............................................................................................29

Communication Status ..................................................................43

Compander .................................................................................335

Component ............................................................................17, 174

placing ................................................................................243

Component Editor .........................................................................17

opening ...............................................................................264

Component Editor window

structure ..............................................................................264

Component Group ......................................................................259

Component List ........................................................................... 260

[Component List] (Configuration window) ..................................154

[Component List] (User Module window) ...................................155

Compressor .................................................................................336

Configuration ...............................................................................136

adding .................................................................................233

analysis ...............................................................................249

creating new .......................................................................136

creation procedure ................................................................34

deleting ...............................................................................233

editing .................................................................................136

renaming .............................................................................233

Configuration window ............................................................ 16, 242

[Component List] .................................................................154

Control

aligning ................................................................................302

copy ....................................................................................303

cut .......................................................................................303

moving .................................................................................302

paste ...................................................................................303

placing ................................................................................297

properties ............................................................................303

[Control Change] tab ....................................................................91

Crossover ....................................................................................316

Crossover Processor ...................................................................320

Crossover Processor II ................................................................326

Current Scene ............................................................................... 42

Current Zone ................................................................................. 43

DAW Control ................................................................................ 132

Decay (Decay Time) ................................................................... 419

De-Esser ...................................................................................... 337

Delay ................................................................................... 332, 419

delay long ...........................................................................332

delay short ..........................................................................333

Delay Matrix ................................................................................ 362

Delay Scale ................................................................................. 420

Delay value .................................................................................. 246

Design Mode ............................................................................... 286

Design window ............................................................................ 142

exporting ............................................................................. 211

printing ................................................................................ 214

shared settings and operations .......................................... 207

Designer window ........................................................................... 15

[Device List] ................................................................................ 154

Display Order .............................................................................. 218

Divergence .................................................................................. 420

DME ............................................................................................. 160

arrangement ........................................................................ 238

DME Data File ............................................................................... 30

export .................................................................................... 32

import .................................................................................... 30

Drawing Setting ...........................................................................223

Ducker ......................................................................................... 339

Dynamics .................................................................................... 334

"Edit Event" dialog box ................................................................ 118

[Edit] menu ............................................................................47, 145

Edit Mode .................................................................................... 136

Edit Palette .................................................................................. 288

Ellipse .......................................................................................... 193

Auto Log On

[Enable Auto-Log On] ........................................................... 57

[Enable Auto-Log On] ................................................................... 57

Equalizer

Graphic Equalizer (GEQ) .................................................... 344

Parametric Equalizer (PEQ) ................................................ 346

Equalizer (EQ) ............................................................................. 344

“Event Log List” dialog box ......................................................... 115

Event Logger ............................................................................... 111

“Event Scheduler” dialog box ..................................................... 116

Expander ..................................................................................... 340

Export

Design window .................................................................... 211

DME ...................................................................................... 32

External Device ........................................................................... 170

Fade ............................................................................................ 420

Fader ........................................................................................... 348

[File] menu .................................................................................... 44

Filter

Band Pass Filter (BPF) ........................................................ 349

High Pass Filter (HPF) ......................................................... 350

Low Pass Filter (LPF) ..........................................................351

Notch Filter (Notch) ............................................................. 352

Programmable BPF ............................................................. 353

Programmable HPF ............................................................. 355

Programmable LPF ............................................................. 356

Index

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

425

Filters ...........................................................................................349

Firmware Update

DME unit firmware ............................................................... 107

Frequency ...................................................................................420

Gain .............................................................................................420

Gain Correct ................................................................................420

Gate .............................................................................................341

General Purpose Interface (GPI) ................................................... 79

“Get Log” dialog box ................................................................... 114

GPI (General Purpose Interface) ................................................... 79

“GPI” dialog box ............................................................................ 79

Graphic Equalizer (GEQ) ............................................................ 344

Grid .............................................................................................210

[Help] menu ..................................................................................51

High Pass Filter (HPF) ................................................................. 350

Hold (Hold Time) ......................................................................... 420

Hotspot ........................................................................................222

ICP ...............................................................................................168

placement ...........................................................................240

Import

DME .......................................................................................30

KeyIn ...................................................................................334, 420

Knee ............................................................................................421

Language

setting .................................................................................106

“Language” dialog box ...............................................................106

LCR .............................................................................................378

Legend (Descriptive Fields) ........................................................198

LFE (Sub Woofer Speaker) .......................................................... 421

Library .........................................................................................275

recalling ...............................................................................277

storing .................................................................................276

Linkwitz-Riley (Linkwitz) ..............................................................421

Log Off ..........................................................................................21

Log On ..........................................................................................20

“Log Setup” dialog box ............................................................... 113

Logical connection ......................................................................230

situations where no logical connection is created .............. 230

Low Pass Filter (LPF) ................................................................... 351

LR ................................................................................................379

Main Panel window .................................................................14, 39

Matrix Mixer .................................................................................369

Menu bar ............................................................................... 39, 137

Meter ...........................................................................................357

MIDI ...............................................................................................90

[Control Change] tab ............................................................91

[Parameter Change] tab .......................................................94

[Port] tab ...............................................................................97

[Program Change] tab .......................................................... 93

[Setup] tab ............................................................................90

“MIDI” dialog box .......................................................................... 90

Miscellaneous .............................................................................358

Mixer ............................................................................................360

Auto Mixer ........................................................................... 360

Delay Matrix ........................................................................362

Matrix Mixer ......................................................................... 369

“Monitor” dialog box .................................................................... 104

Monitoring Point List .................................................................... 247

[Mute] button ................................................................................. 42

MY-Card ...................................................................................... 413

Navigator window .................................................................. 17, 140

Notch Filter (Notch) ..................................................................... 352

Object ............................................................................................ 17

arranging ............................................................. 216, 236, 238

editing ................................................................................. 217

selecting .............................................................................. 216

types ................................................................................... 156

Offline ............................................................................................ 75

switching between online and offfline ................................... 75

Online ...................................................................................... 35, 75

switching between online and offfline ................................... 75

Open ............................................................................................. 27

opening a project file from the “Recently Used Files” list ..... 28

opening a project file that has security set ........................... 28

Operation Mode .......................................................................... 286

Oscillator ..................................................................................... 358

Pan ...................................................................................... 378, 421

LCR ..................................................................................... 378

LR ........................................................................................ 379

Surround ............................................................................. 380

Pan Nominal Position .......................................................... 378, 421

Parameter

changing ............................................................................. 266

[Parameter Change] tab ............................................................... 94

Parameter Link ...................................................................... 73, 314

Parameter List ............................................................................. 124

Parametric Equalizer (PEQ) ........................................................ 346

Phase .......................................................................................... 421

Picture ......................................................................................... 185

placing ................................................................................ 185

[Port] tab ....................................................................................... 97

Preferences ........................................................................... 53, 207

Preset list ....................................................................................... 68

Design window .................................................................... 214

[Print] menu .................................................................................144

Probe Monitor .............................................................................. 244

[Program Change] tab .................................................................. 93

Programmable BPF ..................................................................... 353

Programmable HPF .....................................................................355

Programmable LPF ..................................................................... 356

Project file ...................................................................................... 22

closing ................................................................................... 29

creating new .........................................................................22

opening ................................................................................. 27

saving .............................................................................. 23, 25

Q .................................................................................................. 421

Range .......................................................................................... 422

Ratio ............................................................................................ 422

Release (Release Time) .............................................................. 422

Resource Meter ............................................................................. 18

Resource Meter window .............................................................. 139

Router .......................................................................................... 397

Index

DME Designer Owner’s Manual

426

Save ........................................................................................23, 25

saving a file with a new name ............................................... 25

Save As ...................................................................................23, 25

Scene

current ...................................................................................42

Scene Manager .............................................................................63

“Scene Manager” dialog box ........................................................ 63

Security .......................................................................................136

[Administrator] User .............................................................. 55

creating users and making user settings .............................. 55

security for the Logged On User .....................................63, 70

user security level .................................................................56

user setting restrictions ......................................................... 55

Security Level ................................................................................56

“Select Color” Dialog Box ...........................................................203

“Select Font” dialog box .............................................................. 202

“Select Image” dialog box ..........................................................205

[Setup] tab ....................................................................................90

Sheet ...........................................................................................200

Show Signal Delay ......................................................................246

Slope ...........................................................................................422

Slot Component ................................................................... 179, 408

Snap ............................................................................................273

SPX Component .................................................................. 177, 397

Status bar .................................................................................... 139

Surround 3-1 ...............................................................................383

Surround 5.1 ................................................................................ 384

Surround 6.1 ................................................................................ 385

Synchronization

DME Designer and DME unit synchronization ...................... 75

“Synchronization” dialog box ................................................ 76

Tab Order

changing .............................................................................313

Text box ....................................................................................... 189

Threshold ....................................................................................422

Title bar .................................................................................39, 137

Tool button

large ......................................................................................41

small ......................................................................................39

Toolbar ........................................................................................138

Toolkit window .......................................................................17, 143

displaying ............................................................................152

moving .................................................................................152

types ...................................................................................153

[Tools] menu .........................................................................48, 149

[User]

logged on user ...................................................................... 43

User ...............................................................................................19

creatng new ..........................................................................61

list ..........................................................................................58

User Control ..........................................................................70, 279

creating new .......................................................................281

security ................................................................................283

“User Control Manager” dialog box .............................................. 70

[User Control] menu ....................................................................280

User Defined Button

User Defined Parameters ...................................................... 98

“User Defined Button” dialog box ................................................. 98

User Defined Parameters ..............................................................98

setting .................................................................................101

User Module ........................................................................181, 250

creating ...............................................................................254

saving ..................................................................................255

User Module Editor .....................................................................285

context menu ......................................................................291

User Module Manager ................................................................250

User Module window ............................................................. 16, 257

[Component List] ................................................................155

User Setting Restrictions ............................................................... 55

[View] menu .......................................................................... 48, 147

Wav File Manager ....................................................................... 128

Wav File Player ............................................................................ 359

Width ........................................................................................... 422

[Window] menu ..................................................................... 51, 151

Window size

changing ............................................................................. 294

Wire ..................................................................................... 195, 219

drawing ............................................................................... 224

drawing settings .................................................................. 223

editing ................................................................................. 229

line segment ........................................................................ 220

nodes .................................................................................. 221

Zone ............................................................................................ 157

adding ................................................................................. 231

current ................................................................................... 43

deleting ............................................................................... 231

renaming ............................................................................. 231

Zone window ......................................................................... 16, 237

U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation

MW D0

Documenttranscriptie

Version 1.2 OWNER’S MANUAL EN Getting Started Getting Started with DME Designer Thank you for purchasing the DME64N/24N. Your DME64N/24N mixing engine, together the DME Designer software, lets you build a custom audio system installation that can support an incredible variety of conditions. You can build an entire system from input to output with the DME Designer software, then send the data from that system to the DME64N/24N, which becomes an independent processor. An amazing variety of applications are possible, including audio installations, sub-mixing, speaker system control, matrix/routing, and multi-effect processing. In this manual the abbreviation “DME” refers to the DME64N/24N. NOTE Here the abbreviation “DME” does not include the “DME32.” NOTE This manual is based on the English version of the software. Illustrations, command names, window names, and similar information are from that version. Some items may differ from what you see on the computer screen, depending on which operating system you are using. SPECIAL NOTICES • The software and this Owner’s Manual are the exclusive copyrights of Yamaha Corporation. • Use of the software and this manual is governed by the license agreement which the purchaser fully agrees to upon breaking the seal of the software packaging. (Please read carefully the Software Licensing Agreement at the end of “DME Designer Installation Guide” before installing the application.) • Copying of the software or reproduction of this manual in whole or in part by any means is expressly forbidden without the written consent of the manufacturer. • Yamaha makes no representations or warranties with regard to the use of the software and documentation and cannot be held responsible for the results of the use of this manual and the software. • This disc is a CD-ROM. Do not attempt to play the disc on an audio CD player. Doing so may result in irreparable damage to your audio CD player. • The company names and product names in this Owner’s Manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. • The screen displays as illustrated in this Owner’s Manual are for instructional purposes, and may appear somewhat different from the screens which appear on your computer. • Future upgrades of application and system software and any changes in specifications and functions will be announced separately. • Windows® is the registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation. 2 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Getting Started About DME Designer DME Designer is software that provides an integrated environment where you can build and control systems that use DME. Audio systems with DME are built on the computer screen in block diagram format using the DME Designer software. Information about the inputs/outputs along with the arrangement of components and their connections is called the “configuration.” The software sends DME settings, along with configuration and parameter data, to the DME unit through a USB or Ethernet connection. Once the data is transferred, the DME unit can be disconnected from the computer and used as an independent processor. The DME can also be kept connected to the computer and controlled in realtime from DME Designer software. If multiple DME units are connected to the computer, you can use the DME Designer software to build a configuration that includes those multiple units. Area This means the entire site, and is therefore the uppermost level for a system built using DME Designer. At least one zone must be located within the area. Zone Specifies a space that has individual sound effects within the area, and creates DME connection conditions. You can create and switch between multiple configurations. Configuration Information related to the layout and connection of components in a zone. Scene Information related to configuration assigned to a zone and the settings of the components included in the configuration. Component An object that is arranged within the Configuration window. For a DME overview and glossary, see the “DME64N/24N Owner’s Manual.” Systems built with DME Designer can have multiple zones within an area and multiple configurations and scenes within a zone. However, only one area, zone, or configuration can be made active and edited at a time. When active these are called the “Current Zone,” “Current Scene,” and “Current Configuration.” ■ One DME unit/Zone External Device (MIDI, GPI, DAW, AMX/Crestron) Zone Output Input Microphone Mixer External Head Amp etc... Notes Power Amp Processor etc... Audio signal Control signal Data explanation Setting preset data User Defined Button LCD Display Dome Low Dome Mid Dome Hi Scene Manager Assigned Parameter Crossover: Output Low: Level Crossover: Output Mid: Level Crossover: Output Hight: Level (No Assign) (No Assign) (No Assign) .... No. 001 002 003 004 005 006 .... Scene Name All On Opening Band Set 1 Band Set 2 Band Set 3 ... Confuguration Output Processor for Dome Output Processor for Dome Output Processor for Dome Output Processor for Dome Output Processor for Dome ... Preset All On BGM & MC Band 1 Band 2 Band 3 Specifies the configuration and preset data combination. Specifies the parameter to be changed. Configuration Preset data for output processor Output Processor for Dome All On Component value Delay MY8-AE (Input) EQ Delay CrossOver EQ Dyn BGM & MC MY8-AE (Output) Band 1 Set the value Band 2 Band 3 Local parameter link settings External device settings DME Designer Owner’s Manual 3 Getting Started ■ Two DME units/Zone When one DME unit doesn’t provide sufficient processing power, up to 16 DME units can be used External Device (MIDI, GPI, DAW, AMX/Crestron) DME#1 Zone Input Microphone Mixer External Head Amp etc... Input Output DME#2 Output Power Amp Processor etc... Notes Audio signal Control signal Data explanation Setting preset data For DME#1 For DME#2 Scene Manager User Defined Button LCD Display Dome Low Dome Mid Dome Hi Hall Low Hall Mid Hall Hi .... Assigned Parameter #1: Crossover: Output Low: Level #1: Crossover: Output Mid: Level #1: Crossover: Output Hight: Level #2: Crossover: Output Low: Level #2: Crossover: Output Mid: Level #2: Crossover: Output Hight: Level No. 001 002 003 004 005 006 .... Scene Name All On Opening Band Set 1 Band Set 2 Band Set 3 ... For DME#1 Configuration Output Processor for Dome Output Processor for Dome Output Processor for Dome Output Processor for Dome Output Processor for Dome ... Selects the parameter to be edited from two DME units. DME#1 Configuration Output Processor for Dome Preset data All On DME#2 Configuration Output Processor for Hall All On BGM & MC Band 1 Band Local parameter link settings Band 3 External device settings Specifies the parameter to be linked between DME units. Grobal Parameter Link DME Designer Owner’s Manual Preset data BGM & MC Band 2 4 For DME#2 Configuration Output Processor for Hall Output Processor for Hall Output Processor for Hall Output Processor for Hall Output Processor for Hall ... Preset All On BGM & MC Band Band Band Specifies the configuration and preset data combination in each DME Local parameter link settings External device settings Preset All On BGM & MC Band 1 Band 2 Band 3 Getting Started Common data for DME units in the same zone A “scene” is information that is used to change the audio processing content. A combination of a configuration and preset data is specified for each scene. A Scene Manager is function used to memorize and manage scenes. Up to 999 scenes can be memorized, and each scene is managed by number. Scene Manager MIDI Program Change settings User Defined Button setting This setting is necessary to switch scenes using MIDI messages. This information is necessary to control component parameters from the unit’s panel. Up to 24 parameters can be memorized. Global parameter link settings This information is necessary to allow operation of similar parameters to be linked between multiple DME units. Separate data for individual DME units This information defines the configuration of audio processing, audio input/ output, and external device components and the connections between components required to achieve the desired audio processing. Configuration Local parameter link settings This information is necessary to allow linked operation between similar parameters within a single DME unit. External device settings This information is necessary to allow control of component parameters from external devices. Independent settings are required for each external device. The following external devices can be used: • MIDI controller( MIDI Control Change, Paramter Change) • GPI controller • DAW controller • AMX, Crestron, and similar remote controllers. Preset data These are the parameter values for the components included in a configuration. Audio processing details can be changed by changing the preset data. The following component types include preset data: • GEQ, Matrix Mixer, and other audio processing components. • Internal AD/DA (DME24N), Cascade (DME64N), and MY Card I/O components. • External device components for external head amps (AD8HR, AD824). System Requirement Operating System Windows® XP Professional/XP Home Edition/2000 Professional CPU 1 GHz or better Intel® Pentium®/Celeron® family processor Memory At least 256 MB Hard Disk Capacity At least 300 MB Display 1,280 x 1,024 pixels or better/High Color 16 bit or better Other Mouse, CD-ROM drive, 100Base-TX/10Base-T Ethernet or USB connection environment. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 5 Getting Started Main Changes from V1.0 to V1.1 ■ Main Panel Window • Instead of the former Parameter Link function, there are now two functions: a Global Link function that links parameters within all DMEs in a zone and a Local Link function that links parameters within a single DME unit. (→ page 73) • The Synchronization function can now not only send data from DME Designer to the DME unit, but can also synchronize by reading data from the DME unit. (→ page 75) • Scene Increment/Decrement and Time Adjustment can now be assigned in the GPI input function. (→ page 80) • DME unit events can now be recorded by the Event Logger function and displayed in the Event Logger window. (→ page 111) • The time for executing an event can now be set by using the Event Scheduler function. (→ page 116) • Parameters in the current configuration can now be listed on the display and printed out by using the Parameter List function. (→ page 124) • The Wav File Manager can manage Wave files played by the Wav File Player. (→ page 128) • Settings can be made by the DAW Control function that are used for controlling DMEs from a DAW controller. (→ page 132) • DME unit data can now be saved as a backup file by using the Backup function. (→ page 135) ■ Designer Window • The port name display can now be switched between long name display and short name display. (→ page 148) • DME64N cascade connections can now be set. (→ page 165) • Priority items can now be set when compiling configurations by using the [Compile Priority] function in the “Preferences” dialog box. (→ page 209) • Delay time can now be displayed for each component by using the Show Signal Delay function. (→ page 246) • Monitoring points can now be edited by using the “Monitoring Point List” dialog box. (→ page 247) • The status of connections in a configuration can now be analyzed in advance by using the Analyze function, without connecting the DME unit. (→ page 249) • You can now set the action that occurs when you double-click a user module object. You can also turn user module security ON or OFF, and set a password. (→ page 254) • Libraries with component parameters saved in them can now be recalled from the context menu for a component object. (→ page 277) • A new rule for wiring prohibits connections to terminals that would short the terminator. ■ Component Editor/Component • A status bar has been added to the component editor. It displays the component name, component ID, and parameter IDs for parameters that are being edited. (→ page 265) • A Snap function has been added that records parameters in the editor temporarily. Parameter sets can then be switched by using the Snap buttons. (→ page 273) • The meter's peak hold function can now be turned ON or OFF. (→ page 291) • A Wav File Player component has been added for playing Wave files. (→ page 359) • An effect component called SPX has been added that supports many different effect applications, such as reverb, delay, and modulation effects, along with complex combinations of multiple effects. (→ page 397) • A Slot Out component editor has been added. (→ page 409) • An Undo/Redo function is now available when using the design mode. It can undo the most recent operation (control movement/resize/deletion). 6 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Getting Started Changes from V1.1 to V1.2 ■ Main Panel Window • The synchronization algorithm has been refined for faster synchronization. • Synchronization now can be executed from DME to DME Designer without any break in the sound. • In the following cases, synchronization can be executed from DME Designer to DME without any break in the sound: The second or later synchronization after starting DME Designer* and when differences in data between the DME and DME Designer are limited to parameters within components, AD824/ AD8HR/DME24N AD/DA setting data, or MY card setting parameters. * If the file was saved when DME Designer was closed, there will be no break in sound even in the first synchronization after saving. • Compile speed has been increased. Up to three times faster when AutoDelayCompensation is turned On. Up to two times faster when AutoDelayCompensation is turned Off. • Synchronization is possible when no MY card or a different MY card is installed in the DME unit (a confirmation dialog will appear). • An option to automatically close the dialog after synchronization has been added. (→ page 37) • A progress bar has been added to the Synchronization dialog. (→ page 36) • A message appears to warn when synchronization will cause muting. • The following operations can be performed while on line: - Scene storage. - Scene name changes. - Fade ON/OFF and Fade Mode changes. - Fade time changes. - Parameter link setting changes. • When a scene store is executed, that scene becomes the current scene. • Wave files can be saved as DME data files, and are included in import/export operations. (→ page 32) • Wave files can be saved in the Wav file library. • Event Log events can be output via GPI. (→ page 115) • The on-line indicator appears as a button which can be used to switch between on-line and off-line. (→ page 43) • Scene edits cause the EDIT indicator to appear. (→ page 42) • An auto file save function (Auto Save, post synchronization) has been added. (→ page 53) • Different zones can be specified for use by different users. (→ page 56) • Scene parameters related to User Defined Button, Program Change, GPI In and GPI Out can be set via the Scene Manager. (→ page 63) • [Select All] and [Clear All] buttons have been added to the Scene Manager Recall Safe dialog. (→ page 67) • User Control can be created for individual users as well as security levels. (→ page 70) • A Remote Control Setup List has been added. (→ page 123) This list can be used to make detailed settings for a new software protocol that allow the DME to be controlled from AMX, Crestron, and similar devices. Refer to the “DME-N Remote Control Protocol Specifications” document for details about the communication protocol. Information about the “DME-N Remote Control Protocol Specifications” document can be found at the Yamaha pro Audio website (URL below). http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/ • It is possible to specify whether listed events will be executed by the Event Scheduler. (→ page 116) DME Designer Owner’s Manual 7 Getting Started • The order of same-time events can be changed in the Event Scheduler. (→ page 116) • Exceptions can be specified for Event Scheduler execution day/time. (→ page 122) • Event Scheduler execution times can be specified in 1-second increments. (→ page 121) • Head amp gain and MY-Card can be set via GPI, MIDI, User defined Button, DAW Control. • Parameter values, scene recall, GPI output, Wave file playback, and head amp gain can be set via the User Defined Buttons. (→ page 98) • The Component Lock function dialog is separate from the Parameter List dialog. (→ page 127) • Shortcuts can be freely set as required. (→ page 134) • Files can be saved in the DME unit. (→ page 52) • A [Close All Editor Windows] button has been added to the Window menu. (→ page 51) • External head amp parameters will be recognized by the DME unit when either the DME or the external head amp (AD824, AD8HR) are turned on. Execute a scene recall to send DME settings an external head amp. • This manual is now separate from the DME Designer installer, and can not be accessed from the DME Designer menus. ■ Designer Window • The following operations can be carried out via the shortcut keys. - Navigator - Activate Navigator - Activate Toolkit - Activate Design Window - Select Left Port and Start Wiring - Select Right Port and Start Wiring - Wire Auto Single to Right - Wire Auto Multi to Right - Wire Auto Single to Left - Wire Auto Multi to Left - Delete Wire • It is now possible to simultaneously edit multiple objects of the same type. Example: Change the thickness or color of multiple wires at once. • Files related to user modules (user module files, library files, user module editor files) can be combined and exported/imported as a single file. • Port colors can be independently specified for each port type. (→ page 156) • Default wire thicknesses and types can be independently specified for each port type. • An automatic hot-spot connection function has been added. (→ page 225) • Port display has been added to External Device, Picture, DME, and ICP1 objects. • When drawing wires the keyboard cursor keys can be used to move the mouse cursor, and the <Enter> key can be used to create nodes. • When drawing wires <Shift> key plus <→> key and <Shift> key plus <←> key combinations can be used to automatically connect horizontally-aligned hot spots. • DME object ports can be freely specified. • Compilation of configurations with loop connections is possible when Auto Delay Compensation is On. • The name has been changed from “Foot Monitor” external device to “Floor Monitor.” • Addition External Device types have been provided. • External Devices can be double-clicked to open a file saved by other applications. (→ page 172) • Picture objects can be double-clicked to open a specified editor. (→ page 187) • Text objects can be double-clicked to open a specified editor. (→ page 190) 8 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Getting Started • User module port labels can be edited. (→ page 183) • Graphics can be placed to represent user modules. (→ page 183) • The Legend field automatically resizes to accommodate project names and titles of different lengths. • A Generic “MY-Others” setting has been provided to accommodate third-party MY cards. ■ Component Editor Window • Undo and Redo are now shortcut compatible. • A scroll bar appears when the size of the component editor window is reduced. • The size and position of the component editor window are memorized. • An option to allow mouse-over zooming of the edit box has been added. (→ page 266) • A [Back] button that allows switching between related parent and child windows has been added. (→ page 265) • A [Close All Editor Windows] button has been added to the contextual menu. • Source Selector, Speaker Processor, Limiter, Slot In, Cascade In, and Cascade Out components have been added. • The Delay algorithm has been revised. (→ page 332) - LEVEL and MUTE are effective when Delay is Off for each channel. - The name of the overall Delay [On] parameter has been changed to [All Bypass]. Input Input Mute Level IN On Mute Level Delay Input Input Mute Level Delay On IN On Mute Level Delay OUT Delay All Bypass OUT • The bus send level range for Delay, Matrix, and Matrix Mixer components has been changed to -∞ through 0.0 dB. • Snap copy is possible. (→ page 274) • Snap can be retained until the application is quit or another file is opened. • Security status is displayed in the user module editor status bar. • Multiple controllers can be selected by clicking while holding the <Ctrl> key when the editor is in the design mode. (→ page 286) • [Picture], [Text], [Box], [Ellipse], and [Frame] have been added to the tool palette of the user module editor and user control editor design mode. (→ page 279) • Controller properties can be accessed by double-clicking controllers in the user module editor or user control editor design mode. (→ page 303) • Picture and Text objects can be clicked to open a specified editor in the user module editor or user control editor. • The User Module Editor and User Control Editor offer a greater range of customization options for color, size. etc., of the placed controls. ■ MIDI Setup • A MIDI Setup minimize function has been added. ■ V1.2 Precautions • When using project files (*.daf) created by version 1.1.5 or earlier, synchronize from the DME Designer to the DME unit for the first synchronization. • Project files (*.daf) created using version 1.2 will not open properly on version 1.1. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 9 Contents Chapter 1 Before Using 11 Installing DME Designer ..................................................... 11 Starting DME Designer....................................................... 11 Closing DME Designer ....................................................... 13 Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview 14 Names and Functions of the Windows ............................... 14 Users and Security ............................................................. 19 Project Files........................................................................ 22 DME Data File .................................................................... 30 Configuration Creation Procedure ...................................... 34 Online ................................................................................. 35 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window 39 Main Panel Window............................................................ 39 Main Panel Window Menu.................................................. 44 DME File Storage ............................................................... 52 Preferences ........................................................................ 53 Security (Creating Users and Making User Settings) ......... 55 Scene Manager .................................................................. 63 User Control ....................................................................... 70 Parameter Link ................................................................... 73 Synchronization (DME Designer and DME Unit Synchronization)................ 75 GPI ..................................................................................... 79 MIDI .................................................................................... 90 User Defined Button (User Defined Parameters) ............... 98 Word Clock ....................................................................... 102 Monitor ............................................................................. 104 Clock ................................................................................ 105 Language Settings ........................................................... 106 DME Firmware Update ..................................................... 107 Event Logger .................................................................... 111 Event Scheduler ............................................................... 116 Remote Control Setup List ............................................... 123 Parameter List .................................................................. 124 Component Lock .............................................................. 127 Wav File Manager ............................................................ 128 DAW Control..................................................................... 132 Shortcut Keys ................................................................... 134 Backup ............................................................................. 135 Chapter 4 Designer 136 Editing Configurations ...................................................... 136 Designer Window ............................................................. 137 Designer Window Menu ................................................... 144 Toolkit Window ................................................................. 152 Objects ............................................................................. 156 Design Window Shared Settings and Operations ............ 207 10 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Drawing and Editing Wires ...............................................219 Adding, Deleting, and Renaming a Zone..........................231 Adding, Deleting, and Renaming a Configuration.............233 Area Window ....................................................................235 Zone Window....................................................................237 Configuration Window.......................................................242 User Module .....................................................................250 Chapter 5 Components 259 Types of Components.......................................................259 Component Editor Window ...............................................264 Snap .................................................................................273 Library...............................................................................275 User Control/User Module Editor......................................279 Creating Parameter Links .................................................314 Chapter 6 Component Guide 316 Crossover .........................................................................316 Crossover Processor ........................................................320 Delay.................................................................................332 Dynamics ..........................................................................334 Equalizer (EQ) ..................................................................344 Fader ................................................................................348 Filters ................................................................................349 Meter.................................................................................357 Miscellaneous ...................................................................358 Mixer .................................................................................360 Pan ...................................................................................378 Router ...............................................................................386 Source Selector ................................................................388 Speaker Processor ...........................................................390 SPX...................................................................................397 Slot....................................................................................408 Cascade............................................................................410 Internal Head Amp............................................................412 MY-Card ...........................................................................413 Remote Controlled Head Amp..........................................417 Component Glossary ........................................................419 Troubleshooting 423 Index 424 Chapter 1 Before Using Installing DME Designer To use DME Designer, you must first install the software on the computer. Before you can connect the DME Designer software to the DME unit, send and receive configurations, or perform control, you must first install the USB MIDI Driver or the DME-N Network Driver, according to how you will be connecting, and then make the appropriate settings. For instructions about how to install DME Designer and about the installation and setup method for the MIDI driver and DME-N Network Driver, see the “DME Designer Installation Guide.” Starting DME Designer The DME Designer software is started from the [Start] menu. DME Designer is used with one user logged on. The user logs on when the software is started. ■ DME Designer Start Up and Logon (When Auto-Logon Is Not Set) 1 Click [Start] ➞ [All Programs] ➞ [YAMAHA OPT Tools] ➞ [DME Designer] ➞ [DME Designer]. NOTE In Windows2000, click [Start] → [Programs] → [YAMAHA OPT Tools] → [DME Designer] → [DME Designer]. The “Log On” dialog box will be displayed. NOTE Automatic log-on is the default setting. If the automatic logon feature is enabled, the “Log On” dialog box will not be displayed when the application is started. Instead, the auto-logon user will be logged on automatically. See page 21 for information about auto-logon. 2 Click the [▼] at the right of the [User] box, and select the user. If no user has been created, only [Administrator] will appear in the list. When starting DME Designer for the first time after installing, select [Administrator]. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 11 Chapter 1 Before Using 3 Enter the password into the [Password] box. Enter the password set for the user. If no password has been set, leave the password box blank when you log on. 4 Click the [OK] button. DME Designer starts up. ■ When Automatic Logon Has Been Set (page 21) If automatic logon has been set, the “Log On” dialog box will not be displayed. The user set for automatic logon will be logged on. With automatic log on, even if a password is set for a user, it will not be requested during log on. This is useful when logging on a specific user. ■ Starting by Opening a Project File DME Designer starts when a project file with a saved configuration is opened. When the project file is opened, DME Designer is started with the window configuration that was in place when the file was last saved. 12 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 1 Before Using Closing DME Designer To close DME Designer, click [Exit] on the [File] menu of the Main Panel window. It can also be closed by clicking the [Close] button on the Main Panel window. 1 Click [Exit] on the Main Panel window [File] menu. When you try to close DME Designer, “Project File has been modified. Save?” will be displayed in a dialog box. NOTE Sometimes the “Project File has been modified. Save?” dialog box will not be displayed. 2 To save the file, click [Yes]. To close without saving, click [No]. If you click [Yes], the file currently saved with the same name will be overwritten. If the file has not been saved, the File Save dialog box will always be displayed. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 13 Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview Names and Functions of the Windows The DME Designer software has several windows, including the Main Panel window, Designer window, Component Editor window, Resource Meter window, and others. Component Editor Window Main Panel Window Designer Window Resource Meter Window Main Panel Window Menus and buttons are available in the Main Panel window. The current DME Designer environment, including the active scene and zone, the currently logged on user name, and the connection status to the DME unit are displayed on the right side of the Main Panel window. 14 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview Designer Window The Designer window displays several different windows. First among them is the Area window, where you can manage the entire system. The Area window includes one or more Zone windows, which in turn include one or more DME units that are used to build a zones within the area. Next is the Configuration window, where you create the internal configuration of each DME unit. Within the Configuration window are the User Module windows, where you can assemble often-used components into presets; the Toolkit window, which displays objects used in the other windows as the basic building blocks for sound designs; and the Navigator window, which lets you grasp the overall status of the system at a glance. Zone Window Configuration Window Navigator Window Toolkit Window User Module Window ■ Area Window The Area window is used for designing areas, which manage the entire system. While at least one zone is included within an area, multiple zones can be arranged there. Zones DME Designer Owner’s Manual 15 Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview ■ Zone Window The Zone window is used to design zones within the area. A zone is a more concrete blueprint that includes at least one DME. It shows the DME’s connections with other devices and the wiring between them. You can create multiple zones. The DME units and connected devices are arranged in each Zone window, creating configurations. Configurations ■ Configuration Window The Configuration window is used to design the internal configuration of each DME unit contained in the Zone window. By arranging and connecting components (audio processors like mixers, compressors, effects, and crossovers, along with parts like faders and meters) in the Configuration window, you can create things like complex processors or matrix mixers, that determine the actual internal structure that operates each DME unit. Components ■ User Module Window The User Module window is used for designing user modules that can be arranged in the Configuration window. You can create original modules by combining multiple examples of oftenused components. When you save these modules as presets, you can recall them easily whenever you want. 16 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview ■ Toolkit Window The Toolkit window displays the objects that you can use in each window that can be displayed in the Designer window. Those windows are the Area, Zone, Configuration, and User Module windows. The Toolkit displays different objects, according to the currently active window. To place an object in a window, double-click it in the Toolkit window where it is displayed or drag it to the currently active window. ■ Navigator Window The Navigator window displays the area, zones, configurations, and components in a hierarchal fashion that lets you check their status as a whole. When editing offline, you can click an area name, zone name, or configuration name to make that window active. Clicking a component name will open the component editor window for that component. ■ Objects and Components “Object” is the name for the parts that are arranged in the various design windows, such as the Area, Zone, Configuration, and User Module windows. Objects are always laid out in the Toolkit window. Only the appropriate objects for each window are displayed. The blocks displayed at the higher level of the Toolkit window in particular are called “components.” This refers to each type of processor that operates the DME. “Object” normally refers to Picture, Text, Ellipse and other items that are used after connecting them by wire to the various components. Component Editor The blocks that are arranged in the configuration window are called “components.” Audio processors like mixers, compressors, effects, and crossovers, along with parts like faders and meters, are used for this purpose in the Configuration window. When you double-click on a component block arranged in the Configuration window, the Component Editor window will open. There you can edit the parameters for that component. The types of parameters displayed will differ, depending on the component. Component Editor (Stereo Compressor) Component DME Designer Owner’s Manual 17 Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview Resource Meter This window provides an indication of the usage of the components in the configuration window. The usage percentage increases as the number of components increases, and is shown in graph form in this window. This window is shown at the same time as the designer window, and provides a guide when creating configurations. The usage percentage also depends on the sampling frequency at which the DME unit is set to operate. Make sure that the usage percentage is kept below 100%. Window Operations Operations in all windows are the same as for normal Windows applications. The windows are controlled with the [Minimize], [Maximize/Restore], and [Close] buttons at the upper right of the title bar. DME Designer is closed by clicking the [Close] button on the Main Panel window. 18 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview Users and Security You can create multiple users in DME Designer and set the functions that are available to each user. Although users who will design and put together installations must be able to use all the functions of DME Designer, users who will only operate the system can be restricted to functions that will not allow them to accidentally change the settings. DME Designer is used with one user at a time logged on. To change the user, click the [File] menu → [Log Off] command on the Main Panel window. About Users To use DME Designer, you must logon when you start the software. Except for the first time the software is started or when separate settings are made for the first time, you can logon by specifying the name and password for a user that has been set as the administrator. The administrator can build the system as a whole, or apply function limitations that let other people edit. Administrators or other people that can use DME Designer are called “users.” The user name for the currently logged on user appears below [User] on the Main Panel window. Currently Logged On User Name The default user, named [Administrator], is set to use all of the functions. Immediately after DME Designer is installed, [Administrator] is the only user, and there is no password set. Multiple users can be created. When the system administrator creates multiple users, restrictions can be applied separately for each one of them. A user with restrictions applied can edit using only the functions the administrator enables for him. The place to create, setup, and delete users is the “Security” dialog box. See “Security (Creating Users and Making User Settings)” on page 55. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 19 Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview Logging On The “Log On” dialog box is displayed whenever the application is started or a user is logged off. Whenever one user is already logged on, another user cannot be logged on. To log on as another user, first log off the currently logged on user. NOTE If the automatic logon feature is enabled, the “Log On” dialog box will not be displayed when the application is started. Instead, the auto-logon user will be logged on automatically. ■ The “Log On” dialog box 1 2 3 5 1 [User] From the list, select the user you want to log on as. 2 [Password] Box Enter the password. 3 [OK] Button Log on as the selected user. 4 [Exit] Button When the application is started, and the “Log On” dialog box is displayed, there is an [Exit] button. This closes the application without logging on a user. 5 [Cancel] Button When the “Log On” dialog box is displayed after a user is logged off, there is a [Cancel] button instead of an [Exit] button. This cancels the logoff. The original user will continue to be logged on. ■ Logon Procedure 1 Click [▼] at the right of the [User]. A drop-down list of user names will be displayed. 2 Click the user you want to log on. 3 Enter the password into the [Password] box. When you type in the password box, the characters you enter will display as asterisks (*). 4 Click the [OK] button. 20 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview Logging Off Logoff is used when changing users. When you log off, the document currently being edited is closed, and the “Log On” dialog box is displayed so you can log on the next user. Log off with the [Log Off] command on the [File] menu in the Main Panel window. 1 Click the [File] menu ➞ [Log Off] command on the Main Panel window. Log on the next user in the “Log On” dialog box. Automatic Logging On With the auto-logon function, you can have a specified user automatically logged on when the application is started. If you enable the auto-logon feature, the specified user will be logged on when the application is started, without displaying the “Log On” dialog box. Auto-logon is set from the “Security” dialog box. See “Security (Creating Users and Making User Settings)” on page 55. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 21 Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview Project Files Project Files Systems built with DME Designer are saved as project files. Project files have “.daf” as the extension for their filenames. These files include settings for the area, zones, configurations, and each parameter. Since only one project file can be open at a time, before you can open a second file, the first one must be closed. The commands for opening project files, creating new ones, and saving them, are found in the [File] menu of the Main Panel window. Creating New Project Files Project files are created using the [File] menu → [New] command in the Main Panel window. 1 Click [File] menu ➞ [New] in the Main Panel window. Since the currently open project file must be closed before a new one can be created, a “Project file has been modified. Save?” dialog box will be displayed. 2 To save the file, click [Yes]. To close without saving, click [No]. If you click [Yes], the file currently saved with the same name will be overwritten. If the file has not been saved, the File Save dialog box will be displayed. A new project file will be created. 22 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview Saving Project Files Project files are saved using the [File] menu → [Save] and [Save As] commands in the Main Panel window. The [Save] command overwrites the previously saved version of the file. The [Save As] command lets you give a new name to the file before saving it. When you save the file with a new name, you can protect it with a password. ■ The “Save As” Dialog Box When you click the [File] menu → [Save As] command in the Main Panel window, the “Save As” dialog box is displayed. Except for some [Security] options, this dialog box is the same as the normal Windows dialog box for saving files. 2 [Up One Level] Button 3 [Create New Folder] Button 4 [Views] Button 1 5 6 7 8 9 ) ! @ # 1 [Save In] Specify the folder for saving the file. The folder name is displayed in this box. Click the [▼] on the right to move to another folder. The large box below displays the contents of the folder in this box. 2 [Up One Level] Button Moves to the folder one level higher in the hierarchy. 3 [Create New Folder] Button Creates a new folder in the folder currently being displayed. 4 [Views] Button Changes the way the folder content list is displayed. If you click this button, a menu appears that lets you change the arrangement and display format of the files in the list. 5 List This box displays the contents of the folder shown in the [Save In] box. Only files belonging to the type selected in the [Save As Type] box will be displayed. 6 [File Name] Box Enter the filename. If the currently open file has already been saved, its name will be already entered in this box. To save using a different filename, change the name here. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 23 Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview 7 [Save as type] Selects the format for the file you are saving. When saving project files including Wave files set for Wav File Player, select “Project File with wave (*.daf)”. Otherwise, select “Project File (*.daf)”. 8 [Security] Protects files with a password. If you check here, you will be able to enter settings in the [ID], [Password], and [Confirm Password] boxes. 9 [ID] Box Enter the ID that has been set for the file. The currently logged on user name will be preentered, but you can change it. This need not be the same as a user name. ) [Password] Box Enter the password that has been set for the file. You can enter up to 256 alphanumeric characters. The characters you enter will be displayed as asterisks (*) in the [Password] box. ! [Confirm Password] Box Enter the password once again to confirm it. Enter the same password as was entered into the [Password] box. The characters you enter will be displayed as asterisks (*), the same as in the [Password] box. NOTE When someone attempts to open a password-protected project file, the application will request an ID and password. If they are not entered correctly, the file cannot be opened. Be careful to avoid mistakes when entering the ID and password. The password cannot be reissued and the ID and password cannot be changed. Be careful not to forget them. @ [Save] Button Saves the project file. If the characters entered into the [Password] and [Confirm Password] boxes were not the same, a “Password is different” dialog box will be displayed. Click the [OK] button and reenter the correct password in the [Password] and [Confirm Password] boxes. # [Cancel] Button Cancel the file save process. 24 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview ■ Saving Project Files 1 Click [File] menu ➞ [Save] in the Main Panel window. If there is a file already saved with the same name, it will be overwritten. When saving a project file for the first time, you must name the file before saving it. The “Save As” dialog box will open, the same as when clicking the [File] menu [Save As] command. Enter a filename and specify the folder where the file will be saved. ■ Saving a File with a New Name With the [File] menu [Save As] command in the Main Panel window, you can save the currently open file with a new filename. When saving for the first time, this creates a new file. A file that has already been saved with a name will be saved as a separate file. 1 Click [File] menu ➞ [Save As] in the Main Panel window. The “Save As” dialog box will be displayed. 2 Enter a filename into the [File name] box. 3 Specify the folder where the file will be saved. 4 Click the [Save] button. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 25 Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview ■ Protecting a Project File with a Password When you save a project file with a new name, you can set a password and protect the file. If a password is set, an ID and password will be requested when the file is opened. The security settings for a file cannot be changed by resaving the file with the same name. They can only be changed when saving the file with a new name using the [Save As] command. Once set, the ID and password cannot be changed. To change the ID and password for passwordprotected project files, use the [Save As] command to save the file as a new one with a different name. 1 Click [File] menu ➞ [Save As] in the Main Panel window. The “Save As” dialog box will be displayed. 2 Place a checkmark for [Security] in the file save dialog box. 3 Enter an ID into the [ID] box. The name of the currently logged on user will be automatically entered into the [ID] box. To change it, enter another ID into the box. When using [Save As] to save a password-protected file, the dialog box will be displayed with the ID and password boxes automatically filled in with the ID and password that were assigned to the original file. To change the ID and password, enter new ones into the boxes. 4 Enter the desired password into the [Password] box. You can enter up to 256 alphanumeric characters for the password. The characters you enter will be displayed as asterisks (*) in the [Password] box. 5 Enter the same characters into the [Confirm Password] box as were entered into the [Password] box. The characters you enter will be displayed as asterisks (*) in the [Password] box. 6 Click the [Save] button. When saving a password-protected file without changing the name, the same ID and password will be set (the ID and password cannot be changed). Using the [Save] command, you cannot password protect an already saved project file that was not already password protected. To set a password for a file that is not already password protected, save it as a separate file using the [Save As] command. 26 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview Opening Project Files Project files are opened using the [File] menu → [Open] command in the Main Panel window. Since the currently opened project file must be closed before another one can be opened, a “Project file has been modified. Save?” dialog box may be displayed. ■ [Open] Command Project files are opened using the [File] menu → [Open] command in the Main Panel window. 1 Click [File] menu ➞ [Open] in the Main Panel window. A “Project file has been modified. Save?” dialog box may be displayed. 2 Click the [Yes] or [No] button. The “Open” dialog box will be displayed. 3 Selects the file to be opened. 4 Click the [Open] button. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 27 Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview ■ Opening a Project File That Has Security Set If security is set for a project, the “Enter ID & Password” dialog box will be displayed when you click the [Open] button in the “Open” dialog box. Enter the ID and password for the file into the [ID] and [Password] boxes, and click the [OK] button. If you enter an incorrect ID or password and click the [OK] button on the “Enter ID & Password” dialog box, the “Wrong ID or password!” dialog box will be displayed. Click the [OK] button and enter the correct ID and password the “Enter ID & Password” dialog box. ■ Opening a Project File from the “Recently Used Files” List Recently used project files are displayed on the [File] menu in the Main Panel window. If you click one of the filenames, you can open that project file. Recently Used Files If security is set for a project file, the “Enter ID & Password” dialog box will be displayed if that file is selected from the recently used files list. Enter the ID and password to open the file. 28 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview ■ Double-Click the Icon for the Project File When you double-click the icon for the project file, the file will open. If DME Designer is not started, it will start. After logon, the project file will open. Just as when you use the [Open] command, if DME Designer is already started, the currently open project file must be closed before another one can be opened. Therefore, a “Project file has been modified. Save?” dialog box will be displayed. NOTE Sometimes the “Project file has been modified. Save?” dialog box will not be displayed. If security is set for the project file, the “Enter ID & Password” dialog box will be displayed. Enter the ID and password to open the file. Closing Project Files You cannot have multiple project files open simultaneously in DME Designer. To close the currently open project file, you can create a new project file or open another project file. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 29 Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview DME Data File You can import or export parameters for a DME that is arranged in a configuration file. Parameters for a single DME unit in the current configuration (the one being edited) are saved as a file. Saved parameters can be imported into another project file. Files with parameters saved in them are called “DME Data Files.” These files have “.ddf” as the extension for their filenames. DME Data Import This imports DME data file settings into a DME included in the current configuration. 1 Make active the configuration that arranged the DME into which you are going to import. If there are multiple configurations, display the window in front for the configuration that arranged the DME to which you are going to import. 2 Click the [File] menu in the Main Panel window, and move the mouse cursor over [Import DME Configuration]. A submenu will be displayed. The DMEs included in the current configuration will be displayed on a submenu. 30 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview 3 On the submenu, click on the DME into which you will import settings. The “Open” dialog box will be displayed. 4 Select the DME data file and click the [Open] button. ■ [Import DME Configuration] Submenu The DMEs included in the current configuration will be displayed on the [Import DME Configuration] submenu. [Create New DME] creates a new DME and imports settings. NOTE Only users for whom the [Operation Security] → [Edit] checkbox in the “Security” dialog box has been checked can import DME data. For information about user security levels, see “Security (Creating Users and Making User Settings)” on page 55. NOTE If DME data file import was not possible, a “DME file import failed.” message will be displayed. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 31 Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview DME Export This exports parameters from a DME included in the current configuration and saves them as a file. 1 Make active the configuration that includes the DME from which you will export. If there are multiple configurations, display the window in front for the configuration that arranged the DME from which you are going to export. 2 Click the [File] menu in the Main Panel window, and move the mouse cursor over [Export DME Configuration]. A submenu will be displayed. 3 On the submenu, click on the DME from which you will export settings. The “Save As” dialog box will be displayed. 4 Enter the filename. Determines whether a selected file type will be exported along with a wave file. 5 Specify the folder where the file will be saved, then click the [Save] button. 32 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview ■ [Export DME Configuration] Submenu The DMEs included in the current configuration will be displayed on the [Export DME Configuration] submenu. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 33 Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview Configuration Creation Procedure The configuration is a design diagram that determines the DME configuration. Transferring this data causes the DME to operate. Follow the procedure below to create a DME Designer configuration. NOTE Configurations can be created only when the DME unit is offline. To transfer the data, you must first go into online status. The procedure for going online is given later in this document. 1 Creating a New Project. When you start DME Designer, a new project is created. If another project file is already open, use the [File] menu → [New] command in the Main Panel window to create a new file. “Main Panel Window Menu” → [File] menu → [New] (page 44) 2 Zone Settings. Zone names are set, and zones are added and deleted using the “Zone” dialog box. See “Adding, Deleting, and Renaming a Zone” on page 231. 3 Configuration Settings. Zone names are set, and zones are added and deleted using the “Zone” dialog box. See “Adding, Deleting, and Renaming a Configuration” on page 233. 4 DME, ICP, External Device Layout. Arrange DMEs, ICPs, and external devices in the Zone window. See “Zone Window” on page 237, “Objects” on page 156, “Design Window Shared Settings and Operations” on page 207. 5 Placing Components. Place components and user modules in the Configuration window. See “Configuration Window” on page 242, “User Module” on page 250, “Types of Components” on page 259. 6 Component Logical Connections. Use wires to connect the components and user modules you placed in the Configuration window. See “Drawing and Editing Wires” on page 219. 7 Setting Parameters. Edit the component parameters in the component editor. See “Component Editor Window” on page 264. 8 Setting User Defined Parameters. Parameters can be assigned to function keys F1 through F6 in the DME unit. See “User Defined Button (User Defined Parameters)” on page 98. 9 Storing Scenes. Store the scene using the [Tools] menu → [Scene Manager] command in the Main Panel window. See “Scene Manager” on page 63. 34 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview Online You can connect the DME unit to your computer and transfer configurations, scenes and parameters created in DME Designer into the DME unit. You can also read data from the DME unit into DME Designer, synchronizing it with the status of the DME unit. Because Synchronization presupposes that the DME unit can communicate with the computer where DME Designer is installed, the necessary drivers (USB-MIDI or DME-N Network Driver) must be installed, and appropriate settings must be made for each driver and for DME Designer MIDI port. NOTE Because there are no scene settings when the DME unit is purchased, the configuration and scene information created in DME Designer must first be transferred. 1 DME Unit and Computer Connection. Connect the DME unit and computer using a USB cable or an Ethernet cable. See separate “DME64N/24N Owner’s Manual” for details. 2 MIDI Driver Installation. Install the USB-MIDI driver or DME-N Network driver in the computer. See separate “DME Designer Installation Guide” for details. 3 MIDI Driver Setup. Make the necessary settings for the MIDI driver installed in the computer. If the driver is set up already, check the settings before going online. See separate “DME Designer Installation Guide” for details. 4 MIDI Driver Port Setup. The MIDI Setup dialog will be displayed if you press the MIDI Setup button on the MIDI Setup toolbar that is displayed when you start DME Designer Set up the In/Out/Thru ports connected to the DME. 5 Making MIDI IN/OUT Settings in DME Designer. On the [Port] tab of the “MIDI” dialog box, select the MIDI driver used for sending and receiving MIDI messages. If the driver is set up already, check the settings before going online. “MIDI” → [Port] tab (page 97) DME Designer Owner’s Manual 35 Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview 6 Storing and Checking Scenes. When moving online, the lowest scene must be stored. You can check if a scene is stored using the “Scene Manager” dialog box. See “Scene Manager” on page 63. 7 Recalling Scenes. When going online, the scene will be recalled. Its scene number must be displayed in [Scene Number], and its scene name will be displayed in Scene Name. If [--------] is displayed of [Scene Name], the scene will be recalled. Main Panel Window → “Current Scene” (page 42) See “Scene Manager” on page 63. 8 Display the “Synchronization” dialog box. Click [Synchronization] in the [Tools] menu or the large [Synchronization] button on the toolbar. When the dialog box opens, a list of connected DME units will be obtained. DMEs connected to the computer are displayed in the [Network] list. NOTE When requesting the “Synchronization” dialog box, a one-time alert will be displayed if no scene has been recalled, or the MIDI Port settings have not been made. After clicking the [OK] button on the alert, each dialog will open. At this time, you can make the needed settings in the displayed dialog box, and then again display the “Synchronization” dialog box. 36 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview 9 IP Address Selection The DMEs included in the current zone are displayed in the [Designer] list in the “Synchronization” dialog box. Click the [IP Address] box, then select the DME unit IP address that matches the DME currently in the DME Designer. NOTE IP addresses are displayed for devices of the same type in the area. 10 Going Online. Clicking the [Go On-Line] button displays a dialog box where you can decide the synchronization method. Click the [Designer→DME] direction button. Transfer of the configuration will begin, and DME Designer will be synchronized with the unit. If there are many zones, this process may take time. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 37 Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview When going online is finished, the [Go On-line] button will be grayed out, and the Main Panel window [On-Line] button will light up. The dialog box will close automatically if [Close this window after synchronization] is checked. NOTE It may not be possible to go online if a scene has not been stored when [Recall Safe] is selected. To go off line, click either the [ON-Line] button in the main panel window, or the [Go Off-line] button in the “Synchronization” dialog box. 38 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Main Panel Window The Main Panel window is the main window of DME Designer. Log On User Title Bar Menu Bar Tool Buttons (Small) Tool Buttons (Large) Current Scene [Mute] Button Current Zone Communication Status Title Bar “DME Designer” is displayed on the title bar. Menu Bar Commands that can be executed in the application are collected into categories on the menu bar. When you click one of the categories, a list of commands is displayed. Also, the name of the currently open project file is displayed at the right. When a new project file has been opened, or has not yet been saved, “Untitled” will be displayed for the file name. Tool Buttons (Small) Frequently used commands are arranged here as buttons. When a command cannot be used, its button will be grayed out. [Open File] Button [Save File] Button [Undo] Button [Undo History] Button [Redo] Button [User Control Manager] Button [Clock] Button [Parameter Link] Button [MIDI] Button [GPI] Button [Word Clock] Button [User Defined] Button DME Designer Owner’s Manual 39 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ [Open File] Button Opens project files. → [Open] on the [File] menu (page 45) ■ [Save File] Button Saves the project file currently being edited. → [Save] on the [File] menu (page 45) ■ [Undo] Button Undoes the most recent edit operation. → [Undo] on the [Edit] menu (page 47) ■ [Undo History] Button Opens the “Undo History” dialog box. Undoes multiple operations. → [Undo History] on the [Edit] menu (page 47) ■ [Redo] Button Restores operations undone with the [Undo] button back to their original condition. → [Redo] on the [Edit] menu (page 47) ■ [User Defined] Button Opens the “User Defined Button” dialog box. → See “[User Defined Button]” on page 49. ■ [Word Clock] Button Opens the “Word Clock” dialog box. → See “[Word Clock]” on page 49. ■ [GPI] Button Opens the “GPI” dialog box. → See “[GPI]” on page 49. ■ [MIDI] Button Opens the “MIDI” dialog box. → See “[MIDI]” on page 49. ■ [Parameter Link] Button Opens the “Parameter Link” dialog box. → See “[Parameter Link]” on page 49. ■ [Clock] Button Opens the “Clock” dialog box. → See “[Clock]” on page 50. ■ [User Control Manager] Button Opens the “User Control Manager” dialog box. → See “[User Control]” on page 48. 40 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Tool Button (Large) [Synchronization] Button [User Control] Button [Show/Hide Designer] Button [Event Logger] Button [Event Scheduler] Button ■ [Show/Hide Designer] Button Displays or hides the Designer window. ■ [User Control] Button Works the same as the [User Control] command on the [View] menu. Clicking this button displays a menu. User Control will be displayed on the menu. If you click there, the user control window will be displayed. If you click [New User Control], the “New User Control” dialog box opens. ■ [Synchronization] Button Opens the “Synchronization” dialog box. → See “Synchronization” Dialog Box on page 76. ■ [Event Logger] Button Opens the Event Logger window. → See “Event Logger” Window on page 111. ■ [Event Scheduler] Button Opens the “Event Scheduler” dialog box. → See “Event Scheduler” Dialog Box on page 116. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 41 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window [Mute] Button Mute OFF Mute ON Turns ON and OFF the DME mute button for the current zone. To turn it ON, press the <Shift> key while clicking. If you click the button while it is OFF without pressing the <Shift> key, the following message will be displayed: “Click the Mute Button with the Shift Key.” To turn it OFF, click on the button. There is no need to press the <Shift> key. Current Scene Displays the number and name of the current scene. You can switch between scenes. [Scene Number] [Scene Name] [Scene Manager] Button ■ [Scene Number] Displays the number of the current scene. A list where you can select a scene is displayed when you press the [▼]. The EDIT indicator will light when a parameter has been edited after recalling or storing a scene. NOTE Press <Ctrl> key and <+> key simultaneously recall the next scene and press <Ctrl> key and <-> key simultaneously recall the previous scene. These settings can be changed via the Shortcut keys dialog box (page 134). ■ [Scene Name] Displays the name of the current scene. ■ [Scene Manager] Button Opens the “Scene Manager” dialog box. 42 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window [User] (Logged On User) Currently Logged On User Name [Security] Button ■ Currently Logged On User Name Displays the currently logged on user name. ■ [Security] Button Opens the “Security” dialog box. Current Zone Displays the name of the active zone. A list where you can select a zone is displayed when you press the [▼]. Communication Status Displays the communication status between the DME unit and the computer. Message Transmit/Receive Indicator ON-line Button ■ [On-line] Button When the DME unit is connected to a computer, clicking this button alternately switches the unit's on-line/off-line status. The indicator will light when the DME unit is on-line. ■ Message Transmit/Receive Indicators [Rx] Lights when MIDI messages from the DME unit are received by DME Designer. [Tx] Lights when MIDI messages are transmitted from DME Designer to the DME unit. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 43 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Main Panel Window Menu [File] Menu ■ [New] Creates a new project. When a new project is created, the current project will be closed. A confirmation message asking “Project file has been modified. Save?” will be displayed. [Yes] Button Saves the currently open project. If the currently open file was already given a name and saved, that saved file will be overwritten. The “Save As” dialog box will be displayed for files that have not yet been saved. In this dialog box, you can name the file when you save it. [No] Button Closes the project without saving it. If the file has already been given a name and saved, the most recently saved version will remain as is. If the project has not been given a name and saved, it will be lost. [Cancel] Button Cancels creation of a new project. 44 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ [Open] Opens saved project files. Because the currently open project will be closed, a confirmation dialog box asking “Project file has been modified. Save?” will be displayed. When you select this command, the “Open” dialog box will be displayed. Select the project file you want to open and click the [Open] button. If security is enabled for the project file, the “Enter ID & Password” dialog box will be displayed. Enter the ID and password to open the file and click the [OK] button. The project file will open. ■ [Save] Overwrites an already saved project file with the current changes. If the file is being saved for the first time, the “Save As” dialog box will be displayed. → See “Project Files” on page 22. ■ [Save as] Saves the current project file as another file with a new name or in a new location. When you select this command, the “Save as” dialog box will be displayed. → See “Project Files” on page 22. ■ [Import DME Configuration] Imports parameters for a DME that is arranged in a configuration file. → See “DME Data File” on page 30. ■ [Export DME Configuration] Exports parameters of a DME that is arranged in a configuration file. → See “DME Data File” on page 30. ■ DME File Storage Opens the “DME File Storage” dialog box. → See “DME File Storage” on page 52. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 45 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ Recently Used Files Displays recently saved files. If you click one of the file names, you can open that file. ■ [Preference] Opens the “Preference” dialog box. → See “Preferences” on page 53. ■ [Log Off] Logs off the currently logged on user. Because the currently logged on user must be logged off before a new one can be logged on, the “Log On” dialog box will be displayed so you can log on the next user. → See “Users and Security” on page 19. ■ [Exit] Closes “DME Designer.” A confirmation dialog box asking “Project file has been modified. Save?” will be displayed. To save, click [Yes]. To close without saving, click [No.] 46 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window [Edit] Menu ■ [Undo] Undoes a single operation. The name of the operation that will be undone by [Undo] is displayed in the command name. You can also select the commands that come after that. When [Undo] is not possible, the command will be grayed out. ■ [Redo] Returns to the status before the [Undo] command was executed. The name of the operation that will be restored by [Redo] is displayed. You can [Redo] only as many operations as were undone with the [Undo] command. When [Redo] is not possible, the command will be grayed out. ■ [Undo History] Opens the “Undo History” dialog box. Undoes multiple operations. Also deletes the history of operations. 1 2 3 4 1 List Displays all operations performed so far, in order starting with the oldest. You can select an operation by clicking on it. 2 [OK] Button Undoes all operations below the one selected on the list. The operation selected on the list does not get undone. 3 [Close] Button Closes the dialog box. 4 [Delete All] Button Deletes the entire history of operations displayed on the list. When an operation is deleted from the list, it cannot be undone. Operations undone from the [Undo History] can be re-executed one-by-one using [Redo]. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 47 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window [View] Menu ■ [Designer] Displays or hides the Designer window. ■ [Event Logger] Displays the network event log. Not displayed if selected while the network event log is showing. → See “Event Logger” on page 111. ■ [User Control] This opens User Control. The user controls that can be opened by the currently logged on user are displayed on a submenu. If you click [New User Control] on the submenu, the “New User Control” dialog box opens. → See “User Control/User Module Editor” on page 279. NOTE Controls that are not available to the currently logged-on user are not shown in the menu. [Tools] Menu ■ [Scene Manager] Opens the “Scene Manager” dialog box. → See “Scene Manager” on page 63. 48 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ [User Control Manager] Opens the “User Control Manager” dialog box. → See “User Control” on page 70, page 279 ■ [Parameter Link] Opens the “Parameter Link” dialog box. → See “Parameter Link” on page 73. ■ [Synchronization] Opens the “Synchronization” dialog box. → See “Synchronization (DME Designer and DME Unit Synchronization)” on page 75. ■ [Event Scheduler] Opens the “Event Scheduler” dialog box. → See “Event Scheduler” on page 116. ■ [Wav File Manager] Opens the “Wav File Manager” dialog box. → See “Wav File Manager” on page 128. ■ [GPI] Opens the “GPI” dialog box. → See “GPI” on page 79. ■ [MIDI] Opens the “MIDI” dialog box. → See “MIDI” on page 90. ■ [User Defined Button] Opens the “User Defined Button” dialog box. → See “User Defined Button (User Defined Parameters)” on page 98. ■ [DAW Control] Opens the “DAW Control” dialog box. → See “DAW Control” on page 132. ■ [Remote Control Setup List] Opens the “Remote Control Setup List” Dialog box. → See “Remote Control Setup List” on page 123. ■ [Word Clock] Opens the “Word Clock” dialog box. → See “Word Clock” on page 102. ■ [Monitor] Opens the “Monitor Out” dialog box. → See “Monitor” on page 104. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 49 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ [Clock] Opens the “Clock” dialog box. → See “Clock” on page 105. ■ [Language] Opens the “Language” dialog box. → See “Language Settings” on page 106. ■ [Parameter List] Opens the “Parameter List” dialog box. → See “Parameter List” on page 124. ■ [Component Lock] Opens the “Component Lock” dialog box. → See “Component Lock” on page 127. ■ [Security] Opens the “Security” dialog box. → See “Security (Creating Users and Making User Settings)” on page 55. ■ [Shortcut Keys] Opens the “Shortcut Keys” dialog box. → See “Shortcut Keys” on page 134. ■ [Backup] Opens the “Backup” dialog box. → See “Backup” on page 135. ■ [Firmware Update] Updates the DME unit firmware. → See “DME Firmware Update” on page 107. 50 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window [Window] Menu Displays the open windows. Click a window name to bring that window to the front. ■ [Close All Editor Windows] Closes all editor windows. NOTE Each design windows within the Designer window can be switched using the [Window] menu in the Designer window. [About] Menu ■ [About DME Designer] Displays information about this application. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 51 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window DME File Storage Allows management of DME files. Project files can be managed on the DME, eliminating the need to manage them on the computer. Click [DME File Storage] in the [File] menu to display the “DME File Storage” dialog. ■ Zone List Select the desired zone and DME from the list. ■ File List A list of the files stored on the selected DME. [Send] Button Transfers selected files from the computer to the DME. [Receive] Button Transfers selected files from the DME to the computer. [Delete] Button Deletes selected files from the DME. NOTE Synchronization may become impossible if the [Remaining Memory] value (the amount of remaining DME memory) becomes too small. If this occurs, delete unwanted files to increase the amount of available memory. 52 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Preferences When you click the [Preference] command on the [File] menu in the Main Panel window, the “Preferences” dialog box is displayed. Here you can make environmental settings for using DME Designer. ■ [Application] Tab Here you can set the general usage environment. On Startup Selects the action when the application starts up. • [Load the last file opened] Opens the last opened file. If the file cannot be found because it was moved, deleted, or its name was changed, a new project will be opened. • [Create an empty file] Opens a new project. • [Load File & Synchronization] Opens the last opened file and synchronizes with the DME unit. Contents Folder Specifies the folder where the images used by the Design windows and user controls are stored. Click the [Browse] button and specify the folder. Auto Save Set up the automatic file save feature. • [Enable] Auto save of project files being worked on will occur when checked. The file will be overwritten, but the Undo history will not be cleared. This setting has no effect when the file being worked on has not previously been saved, or the computer is online. • [Interval in minutes] Specifies the auto-save interval in minutes. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 53 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window [Confirm Scene Store] Place a checkmark here to have a confirmation dialog box displayed when storing a scene. [Save after synchronization] If a save is performed after the DME Designer is synchronized to the DME unit, the next synchronization will be significantly faster because one the difference needs to be synchronized. Check this checkbox to specify auto-save after the DME Designer is synchronized to the DME unit. ■ [Component Editor] Tab Sets up operation of the Component Editor knobs, sliders, and edit boxes. Refer to “Changing Parameters” on page 266. 54 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Security (Creating Users and Making User Settings) When you click the [Security] command on the [Tools] menu, the “Security” dialog box is displayed. Here you can create and delete users. You can also set the security level for each user. Users are saved as DME Designer settings. You don’t need to create users for each file. Auto-Logon User ■ User Setting Restrictions Various restrictions apply, depending on the security level of the user that is currently logged on. • The currently logged on user can edit only users at a security level lower than his or her own. • The currently logged on user cannot raise his or her own security level. ■ [Administrator] User The [Administrator] user is registered by default, and can use all functions. Immediately after DME Designer is installed, there is no password set for the [Administrator] user. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 55 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ Security Level User security levels are set with the [Operation Security] item at the right of the “Security” dialog box. User Level High Level 1 User Level 2 User Level 3 User Level 4 User Low Security Level Settings You can allow or disallow editing and the ability to open windows or set controls. Ten levels, 1 through 10, are set for scene storage/recall and user controls. Level 1 is the highest level and 10 is the lowest. By default, level 1 is set for the [Administrator] user. Level 1 can be set for the [Administrator] only. Users created by the [Administrator] directly below itself can be set at levels 2 through 10. New users created subordinate to users at level 2 can be set at levels 3 through 10. New users can be created no higher than one level below the user that created them. Scene sets the level for storing and recalling scenes. The logged on user can store or recall scenes at levels equal to or lower than his or her own level. For example, a user at level 3 can recall scenes set for scene recall at levels 3 through 10. Levels are also set for user control. The logged on user can display or edit user controls at levels equal to or lower than his or her own level. The log-on user can use zones that are checked in the [View Zone] field. 56 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window [Enable Auto-Log On] Enables auto-logon. If this checkbox is selected, the user displayed in the box to the right will be logged on automatically when DME Designer is started. Auto-logon logs on the user without any password entry. Click the [▼] at the right of the box, and select the user for auto-logon from the displayed user list. If auto-logon is turned OFF, the “Log On” dialog box will be displayed whenever the DME Designer is started. Each time a user must be selected and a password entered in order to log on. If auto-logon is changed from ON to OFF when a password is set for the currently logged on user, a “Confirmation of Current User” dialog box will be displayed. Enter the user’s password into the [Password] box, and click the [OK] button. If you click the [Cancel] button, auto-logon will remain ON. ■ Auto-Logon User Selects the user for auto-logon when [Enable Auto Log On] is checked. The currently logged on user can set this command for users at a security level equal to or lower than his or her own. If a user at a higher level is selected, a message that warns “Cannot access higher user level.” will be displayed. Click the [OK] button. To set auto-logon for a user at a security level higher than the currently logged on user, first log off as the current user, then logon as a user at a higher security level. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 57 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window User List The registered users are displayed here. The currently logged on user is displayed in bold text. Click the name of the user whose settings you want to edit. 1 2 6 3 4 5 The [Administrator] is the user set by default, and it is used for administering the system. The [Administrator] user has the highest level and can use all functions. All new users are created at a level lower that the [Administrator] user, and are displayed below the [Administrator]. If a user at level 2 and below has other users subordinate to him or her, a [+] or [-] button will be displayed to the left of higher level user’s name on the list. Clicking the [+] or [-] buttons displays or hides the users subordinate to that higher user. The currently logged on user can create multiple users at lower levels. 1 Name Displays the user names. The currently logged on user is displayed in bold text. 2 Startup User Control Displays “ON” to automatically open the user control and make settings when the user is logged on. 3 [Add User] Button Adds a user subordinate to the user selected on the list. Clicking here displays the “Add User” dialog box. Select the user that will be superior to the new user, then click this button. If a user higher than the currently logged on user is selected, the button will be grayed out and no user can be added. 4 [Remove User] Button Deletes the user selected on the list. Only users at levels lower than the currently logged on user can be deleted. Furthermore, the currently logged on user cannot delete himself. 5 [Change] Button Changes settings for the user selected on the list. Opens the “Change User Information” dialog box. The contents of the dialog box are the same as the “Add User” dialog box. 58 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window 6 Operation Security Sets the functions that can be used by the user selected on the [User List] to the left. Selecting a checkbox enables use of the corresponding function. • [Edit] You can change the following settings: editing in the Designer window, user control edit, user defined parameter edit, word clock, scene edit, GPI and MIDI. • [View DME Design Window] Allows display of the Designer configuration window. • [Control Component Editor] Allows parameter editing in the component editor. • [View Component Editor] Allows display of the component editor. • [Change Configuration] Allows switching between configurations. • [Synchronization] Allows synchronizing with the DME unit. • [View Log Window] Displays the Event Logger window. • [Scene Store/Recall Level] Sets the level at which scenes can be stored and recalled. Click the [▲] and [▼] buttons or enter a number into the box to set the level. While levels 1 through 10 are available, the range of levels that can be actually set varies according to the level of the user doing the setting. When a user is created, automatically this is set to “One level lower than the user above.” The initially set level is the highest level that can be set for that user. • [User Control Level] Sets the user control level. Click the [▲] and [▼] buttons or enter a number into the box to set a level from 1 through 10. While levels 1 through 10 are available, the range of levels that can be actually set varies according to the level of the user doing the setting. When a user is created, automatically this is set to “One level lower than the user above.” The initially set level is the highest level that can be set for that user. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 59 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window “Add User” Dialog Box/“Change User Information” Dialog Box When you click the [Add User] button in the “Security” dialog box, the “Add User” dialog box is displayed. If you click the [Change] button in the “Security” dialog box, the “Change User Information” dialog box is displayed. The “Add User” dialog box is for setting a user name and password when adding a new user. You can change user settings in the “Change User Information” dialog box. The contents of the dialog boxes are the same. “Add User” dialog box “Change User Information” dialog box ■ [Name] Box Enter the user name. Enter a name different than other existing user names. ■ [Password] Box Enter the password. When you type in the password box, asterisks (*) will be displayed instead of the characters you enter. If you do not want to set a password the user, leave the box blank. ■ [Confirm Password] Box Enter the password once again to confirm it. When you type in the password box, asterisks (*) will be displayed instead of the characters you enter. If you do not want to set a password the user, leave the box blank. ■ [Startup User Control] When a user logs on, user controls and settings which are specified or below that user’s security level are automatically opened. In the “Security” dialog box [User List], [User Control] will be “ON” for users for whom this option has been turned on. ■ [OK] Button In the “Add User” dialog box, this creates new users according to the settings made there. In the “Change User Information” dialog box, this applies the dialog box settings and changes the user settings. ■ [Cancel] Button Cancels user creation or setting changes, and closes the dialog box. 60 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Creating Users Users are created as follows: 1 Click [Security] on the Main Panel window [Tools] menu. The “Security” dialog box will be displayed. You can open the “Security” dialog box by clicking the [Security] button in the Main Panel window. 2 Select a user from the [User List] in the “Security” dialog box. A user will be created subordinate to the selected user. [Administrator] can be selected only if the logged on user is the [Administrator]. If there are multiple users, select the user that will be above the new user. Multiple users can be created subordinate to a single user. 3 Click the [Add User] button. The “Add User” dialog box will be displayed. 4 Enter the user name into the [Name] box. 5 Enter the password into the [Password] box. You can also create users with no password. If you do not want to set a password for the user, leave the [Password] box blank. 6 Enter the password into the [Confirm Password] box also. If you do not want to set a password for the user, leave the [Confirm Password] box blank also. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 61 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window 7 Set the [Startup User Control]. NOTE If the text entered into the [Password] and [Confirm Password] boxes is not the same, a “Different password!” message will be displayed. Click the [OK] button and reenter the correct password in the [Password] and [Confirm Password] boxes in the “Add User” dialog box. 8 Click the [OK] button. This closes the “Add User” dialog box. The new user will be added to the “Security” dialog box list. 9 Set the security level for the user, using [Operation Security] in the “Security” dialog box. When creating a new user, all the checkboxes in [Operation Security] will be turned OFF. Click and turn ON the functions you want to permit the new user to use. [Scene Store/Recall Level] and [User Control Level] will be set to one level lower than the user above the newly created user. The initially set level will automatically be the highest level that can be set for that user. To lower the level, enter a larger number in the box. Click the [OK] button and the dialog will close. You can continue creating new users without closing the dialog box. 62 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Scene Manager Scenes Configuration contents can be given a name and saved as “Scenes.” Saving scenes is called “Scene Store.” Parameter settings in the configuration for each site used can be stored multiple times and recalled and used when needed. There are 999 scene memories available. When a scene is stored, DME parameters are saved as “preset parameters.” Presets are automatically created when a scene is stored. Bringing back a scene (making a scene the current scene) is called “scene recall.” Scenes are recalled using the [▼] button next to the current scene on the Main Panel window or by using the “Scene Manager” dialog box. ■ Security for the Logged On User The currently logged on user can store, recall, or edit scenes that have a security level equal to or lower than his or her own. User security levels are set with the [Edit] → [Store/Recall/Edit] item in the “Security” dialog box. “Scene Manager” Dialog Box When you click [Scene Manager] in the [Tools] menu, the “Scene Manager” dialog box is displayed. [Copy] Button [Cut] Button [Insert] Button [Paste] Button [Clear] Button [Store] Button List [Recall Safe] Button [Detail] Button [Recall] Button DME Designer Owner’s Manual 63 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ List Displays the contents of the scene. Scene No. Displays the scene number. There are 999 scene memories available. Click here to select a scene. Name Displays the name of the scene. Click the [Name] box to enter a scene name. Up to 18 characters can be entered. If the scene has not been stored, “[No Data]” will be displayed. A name can be entered when a scene is stored. The default names are “Scene001,” “Scene002,” etc. The three-digit number is the same as the scene number (displayed in [Scene Number]) for the stored scene. Configuration Displays the configuration name. If the scene has not been stored, a hyphen (-) will be displayed. Edit Security Displays the scene edit security levels. Clicking here will display a list where you can change these security levels. Only levels at or below the security level of the currently logged on user are displayed in the list. When a user is created, these settings are the same as the new user's security level, but scene store and edit settings can be set lower. Recall Security Displays the scene recall security level. Clicking here will display a list where you can change the security level. Only levels at or below the security level of the currently logged on user are displayed in the list. When a user is created, these settings are the same as the new user's security level, but the scene recall setting can be set lower. Fade Fade is used when Fader components are used in a configuration. It sets whether fade is applied (ON) or not (OFF) when a scene is recalled. NOTE The fade function cannot be simulated in DME Designer. 64 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Fade Mode Sets the fade mode. You can select “All” or “Selected.” If you select “All,” all channels using Fader components in their configuration will be affected. Even when multiple components are used, all channels are targeted. If you select “Selected,” the only channels affected will be those for which the Fade switch in the component editor has been set to ON. NOTE The Fade switch for each channel is set to OFF by default. The fade effect will not be applied, even if Fade=ON and Fade Mode=Selected is selected. To apply the effect, you must set the Fade switch to ON for the channels where you need it. Fade Time Sets the fade time: i.e. the time it will take fader and pan parameters to reach their new settings when a scene is recalled. The changes are smooth and continuous. If only the presets in the recalled scene are set when that scene is recalled, the volume will be adjusted while the sound from the previous scene is playing, until the new level is reached If the configuration also changes, the volume will rise from silence until it reaches the new value. This can be set from zero to 60 seconds, in 0.1 second increments. NOTE Right-click in the list and use the contextual menu that appears to set User Defined Button, Program Change, GPI In, or GPI Out for the scene. ■ [Cut] Button Cuts the scene selected on the list. ■ [Copy] Button Copies the scene selected on the list. ■ [Paste] Button Pastes the contents of the cut or copied scene into the scene selected on the list. The selected scene will be overwritten. If no scene has been cut or copied, the button will be grayed out and cannot be used. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 65 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ [Insert] Button Inserts the contents of the cut or copied scene into the location of the scene selected on the list. The selected scene and those below are moved down by one. For example, if “Door_Open” was stored as scene number “005,” and selected when the [Insert] button was clicked, the inserted scene would become scene number “005,” and “Door_Open” would be moved to scene number “006.” Click the [Insert] button If no scene has been cut or copied, the button will be grayed out and cannot be used. If a scene is stored in the lowest scene on the scene memory list (with the scene number [999]), the button will be grayed out and the insert function will not be available. Delete the contents of scene number 999 before attempting to use the insert function. NOTE Move the scene data to a different scene memory when you don’t want to erase the contents of Scene No. 999. ■ [Clear] Button Deletes the contents of the scene selected on the list. If the presets included in a scene are not used in another scene, a “Delete preset?” message will be displayed. If the presets are not needed, click the [OK] button. If you click the [Cancel] button, the presets will not be deleted. Whichever you click, the scene itself will be deleted. NOTE The [Cancel] button on the “Delete Preset?” message does not cancel the [Clear] for the scene. It merely cancels deletion of the presets. 66 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ [Recall Safe] Button Before performing a recall, you can check the contents of the scene selected on the list, and set components that will not be read. This is used when there are components you do not want changed by the scene recall. When you click this button, the “Recall Safe” dialog box will be displayed. Checkbox Component Name All components included in the scene will be displayed. There is a checkbox to the left of each component. Place a check next to the components you do not wish to have read by scene recall (those you do not wish changed from their current status). Press the [Select All] button to check all components, or the [Clear All] button to clear the checks from all components. Click the [OK] button. The dialog box will close and when the scene is recalled, all components, except those checked, will be read. NOTE The components checked in the “Recall Safe” dialog box are the components that will not be read (that will be ignored). If you want to read all components, there is no need to make settings in the “Recall Safe” dialog box. “Recall Safe” is used when you want to keep some components with their current settings, while there are other components you want to change according to the scene. ■ [Store] Button Stores the contents of the current configuration into the scene selected in the list. If an empty scene is selected and the contents stored there, a new scene is created. If a scene is already stored in the selected scene number, it will be overwritten. If [Confirm Scene Store] is checked on the [Application] tab of the “Preferences” dialog box, a confirmation dialog box will be displayed before the scene is stored. NOTE The currently logged on user can store scenes at a security level equal to or lower than his or her own only. NOTE When the computer and DME unit are online, a scene stored in the DME Designer will also be stored on the DME unit, regardless of the DME settings. The DME utility display Misc. page [Scene Store] setting only affects store operation from the DME panel controls. When a scene is stored, the configuration parameters at that time are saved as “preset parameters.” Presets are created automatically. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 67 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ [Recall] Button Recalls the scene selected in the list and makes it the current scene. NOTE The currently logged on user can recall scenes at a security level equal to or lower than his or her own only. ■ [Detail] Button Expands the dialog box and displays a preset list. If you click the preset list while it is displayed, the preset list will be hidden. When the dialog box is opened, its status will be the same as the last time it was closed. [Del] Button [Store] Button [New] Button [Del Unused] Button DME Preset DME Preset [Detail] Button Preset List ■ Preset List Displays the presets for each DME unit in the scene selected in the list. When another scene is selected on the list, the contents of the preset list will be changed. You can change the presets used in the scene by clicking the radio buttons to the left of the preset names. You can also create, delete, and store presets or change their names. DME Displays the DME. Below the DME are [Slot], [Component], and [AD]. If there are presets below them, a [+] button will be displayed. When you click the [+] it becomes a [-] and the presets are displayed. Preset Displays DME presets. If you click the preset name, selecting the text that is there, you can change the preset name. When presets are automatically created when a scene is stored, they are named “Preset001,” “Preset002,” and so on. Presets created with the [New] button are named “New Preset.” You can select the presets used in a scene by clicking the radio buttons to the left of the preset names. 68 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ [Del] Button Deletes the preset selected on the preset list. NOTE Presets used in a scene cannot be deleted. ■ [Store] Button Stores the current parameter status in the preset selected in the preset list. The contents of the selected preset will be overwritten. ■ [New] Button Stores the current status and creates a new preset. The newly created preset is named “New Preset.” ■ [Del Unused] Button Deletes presets that are not used by DMEs included in the current zone. NOTE There is no [OK] button or [Cancel] button in the “Scene Manager” dialog box. To close the dialog box, click the [Close] button at the upper-right of the dialog box. Changes from storing/recalling scenes or editing, such as changing names or contents, will be applied immediately. With the dialog box open, you can make the Designer window active and add components or change parameters. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 69 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window User Control User Controls You can create an original control by arranging knobs and sliders in the component editor. Controls you create are called “user controls.” Those created user controls are displayed in the [View] → [User Control] submenu in the Main Panel window ■ Security for the Logged On User The currently logged-on user can create and edit the user controls of all users at lower security levels as well as the controls specified for that user. Available user controls are displayed in the User Control manager dialog box that can be accessed through the [User Control] sub-menu of the main panel window [View] menu. The user control security level for each user is set with [Operation Security] → [User Control Level] in the “Security” dialog box. For information about user security, see “Security (Creating Users and Making User Settings)” on page 55. “User Control Manager” Dialog Box When you click [User Control Manager] on the [Tools] menu, the “User Control Manager” dialog box is displayed. This dialog box displays a list of user controls included in the configuration of the current zone. There they can be created or deleted. You can also edit the name and security level of user controls here. NOTE Only controls available to the currently logged on user are shown in the list. 70 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ User Control Displays the names of the user controls. Clicking here will select the characters in the name, allowing you to change it. ■ Security Level Displays the security level set for each user control. Clicking here will display a list where you can change the security level. ■ User Displays the name of the user specified in User Control. Clicking here will display a list of the available users. NOTE Levels at or below the security level of the currently logged on user are displayed in the list. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 71 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ [New] Button Creates new user controls. Clicking here displays the “New User Control” dialog box. Enter the User Control name in the [Name] box. ■ [User Level]/[User Name] Use the radio buttons to the left to select security-level or user dependent control. [User Level] Select a security level from the drop-down list. [User Name] Check a checkbox. Click [OK] to create the specified User Control setup. ■ [Delete] Button Deletes the user control selected on the list. ■ [OK] Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box. ■ [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. 72 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Parameter Link About Parameter Links You can group parameters of the same type and link them. These groups are called “Parameter Links.” When one parameter in a group is changed, all parameters in the group will change in the same way. There are two parameter link types: global links and local links. Global links link parameters for DMEs within a zone. Local links link parameters that are included for a single DME. NOTE Parameters can not apply to multiple groups. Groups can be created and parameters added to groups in the user control/user module control editor and component editor. For information about creating parameter links, see “Creating Parameter Links” on page 314. You can check the status of parameter links and edit them in the Parameter Link window. Parameter Link Window When you click [Parameter Link] in the [Tools] menu, the “Parameter Link” window is displayed. You can also display the window by selecting [Open Parameter Link] from the context menu displayed in the user control/user module editor and component editor. [Global Link] button/[Local Link] button Parameter Link Mode 1 [Global Link] button/[Local Link] button Switches the window display. • Global Link Links to the parameters of multiple DME units in the zone. • Local Link Links to the parameters of one DME unit. NOTE Because there is a large load on the network, the maximum number of Global Links will be limited to eight. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 73 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window 2 Parameter Link Mode Parameter linking is active when checked. Uncheck to temporarily disable parameter linking. Uncheck when you want to adjust the parameters individually. You can also turn parameter link mode ON or OFF using the context menu in the user control/ user module editor or component editor. • Group List Displays a hierarchical list of groups and the parameters that belong to them. When a group name is selected, the controls that belong to that group are selected. • Keep Offset (Group icon) Turns ON or OFF whether the offset value set for each parameter is retained as it is. When ON is set for a group, the Keep Offset icon is displayed in orange. When OFF is set for a group, it is displayed in green. When Keep Offset is set to ON and any parameter within the group goes to the minimum or maximum value, the parameters cannot be further changed. Keep Offset can be set to ON or OFF using the “Keep Offset” item on the context menu that is displayed when you right click the name of a group. • Group Name You can select a group name by clicking on it. Clicking the selected group name again will select the characters in the name, allowing you to change it. Clicking the plus (+) or minus (-) sign to the left of the group name displays or hides items that belong to that group. You can delete a group by selecting it and pressing the <Delete> key. You can also delete a group by right-clicking on the group name and selecting [Delete] in the context menu that is displayed. • DME Icon Displays the DME that includes the parameters that belong to a group. The components can be displayed or hidden by clicking the plus (+) or minus (-) signs for the DME icon. The parameters, Min, and Max can be displayed or hidden by clicking the plus (+) or minus (-) signs for the component. • Parameter Displays the parameters that belong to a group. You can display or hide minimum and maximum values for a parameter by clicking the plus (+) or minus (-) signs. You can delete a parameter from a group by selecting the parameter name and pressing the <Delete> key. 74 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Synchronization (DME Designer and DME Unit Synchronization) The DME unit and DME Designer are synchronized by Synchronization. The DME operates according to the configuration and scene information transferred during this process. This Synchronization is used when transferring the configuration in DME Designer and when controlling the DME unit in real time. NOTE Because Synchronization presupposes that the DME unit can communicate with the computer where DME Designer is installed, the necessary drivers (USB-MIDI or DME-N Network Driver) must be installed, and appropriate settings must be made for the driver and for DME Designer MIDI IN/OUT (page 90). For information about driver installation and settings, see the installation guide. For DME Designer communications settings, see “Online” (page 35). NOTE Because there are no scene settings when the DME unit is purchased, the configuration and scene information in DME Designer must first be transferred. NOTE For information about the online procedure, see “Online” (page 35). Online and Offline When a DME unit is connected to the computer and synchronized with DME Designer, its status is called “Online.” When a DME unit is not physically connected to the computer or is not synchronized even when it is connected, its status is called “Offline.” You can check the online/offline status and message transmission in [Communication Status] in the Main Panel window. ■ Online Sends configurations created in DME Designer to the DME unit and reads data from the DME unit, so that the DME unit configuration is reflected in the DME Designer configuration. You can also control the DME in real time from DME Designer. Operations performed in the DME Designer control editor are reflected in the DME unit, and operations on the DME side are reflected in DME Designer. You can not perform configuration editing using the Designer while online. ■ Offline The communication status becomes offline when editing configurations. ■ Switching Between Online and Offline You can switch between online and offline in the “Synchronization” dialog box. NOTE For information about the online procedure, see “Online” (page 35). DME Designer Owner’s Manual 75 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window “Synchronization” Dialog Box When you click the [Synchronization] command on the [Tools] menu, the “Synchronization” dialog box is displayed. The data from the current zone in the Designer is synchronized with the DME unit. Here you can make settings for synchronizing the unit in DME Designer one-on-one with the DME that actually exists on the network. [Go On-line] Button [Go Off-line] Button [Designer] [Network] Message Area [Close this window after synchronization] checkbox 76 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ [Go On-line] Button This button will be grayed out when the software is online. Clicking the button displays a dialog box where you can decide the synchronization method. [Designer→DME] button A consistency check is performed between the data in the current zone and the DME data, then the communication status changes to online. Transmits data from the DME Designer to the DME unit and synchronizes the two. [Designer←DME] button Data from the DME unit is read into DME Designer. Current data stored in the DME unit, such as scenes, are read into DME Designer. This assumes that the configurations in the DME unit and the DME Designer agree. ■ [Go Off-line] Button Clicking this button changes from online to offline. While offline, this button will be grayed out. ■ [Close this window after synchronization] Checkbox When this checkbox is checked the dialog window will close automatically after synchronization. ■ Designer The Designer list displays DME units arranged in the currently valid zone in the DME Designer. The unit in the DME Designer is matched with a recognized IP address, and they are compared one-to-one. DME Name IP Address Select Box DME Name Displays the names of DME units included in the project. When multiple DMEs of the same type are arranged in a zone window, it is a good idea to change the name of each one. IP Address Select Box Matches the units in the Designer with recognized IP addresses. Click the [▼] to display the IP addresses of same type of devices in the area. If the unit is a DME24N, IP addresses for all DME24N devices in the area will be displayed on the list. If you click the title bar with “IP Address” written on it (pale ▲ mark appears), you can line them up vertically. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 77 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ Network The devices currently connected to the network are displayed in the Network list. To keep consistency with the Designer list on the left side, the status of DMEs on the network is displayed. DME Icon IP Address • DME Icon Displays DME and ICP1 devices connected to the network. The zone master DME icon is red. Icons for slave DMEs are blue. DMEs and ICP1 devices with no relation to DMEs in Designer have gray icons. • IP Address Displays the DME IP address. ■ Message Area Displays a message that synchronization is in progress. Reading from the DME Unit When you are offline in a condition where it is possible to go online, you can read data. Before this can be done, configurations, such as cards inserted in the slots and any connected serial devices, must agree for the DME unit and DME Designer. Preset data overwritten in the DME unit is read, along with every type of parameter setting managed in DME Designer. NOTE The event log is read in the Event Logger. 78 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window GPI About GPI GPI is an abbreviation for General Purpose Interface. Using GPI input and output, DMEs can be remotely controlled from custom-made controllers or external equipment. For both input and output, the DME64N provides 16 GPI channels and the DME24N provides eight. Sets GPI input/output for each DME. Using GPI input data, you can switch DME scenes and change component change component parameters. For hardware-related information such as the connection method for GPI, see the “DME64N/24N Owner’s Manual.” NOTE Only users for whom the [Operation Security] → [Edit] checkbox has been checked can make GPI settings. “GPI” Dialog Box When you click the [GPI] command on the [Tools] menu, the “GPI” dialog box is displayed. Sets GPI input/output for the DME. [DME] GPI IN GPI OUT [Apply] Button [Cancel] Button [OK] Button ■ [DME] From the list, select the DME where you will be making settings. ■ Configuration The current configuration name will be displayed. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 79 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ GPI IN The DME64N has 16 GPI IN channels, and the DME24N has 8 GPI IN channels. These settings determine which DME parameters will be controlled by input received at each individual GPI IN channel. The channel numbers are shown in the leftmost column. [Function] Specifies the function to be controlled by GPI input. Click to see a list from which you can choose the function to be assigned to the corresponding GPI IN channel. The nine available functions are: [No Assign], [Parameter Value Edit], [Scene Change], [Scene Increment], [Scene Decrement], [Mute], [GPI Lock], [Time Adjustment], [Play Wav File]. The [Parameter], [Min], [Max], and [Terminal] items will change according to the selected function. • [No Assign] No function assigned. This is the default setting. Select [No Assign] to clear an assigned function. The [Parameter], [Min], [Max], and [Terminal] items are not available. 80 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window • [Parameter Value Edit] Allows component parameters to be changed via GPI input. In this case [Parameter] is used to select the parameter to be controlled. [Min] and [Max] specify the range over which the parameter can be changed. [Terminal] determines how the GPI input voltage will affect the specified parameter. and specify continuous control of continuously-variable parameters from an external fader, knob, or similar device. and specify on/off control of 2-state parameters via an external switching device. The parameter value changes in proportion to the voltage applied to the GPI input. The minimum voltage applied to GPI IN will produce the specified [Min] parameter value, and the maximum voltage applied to GPI IN will produce the specified [Max] parameter value, with intermediate voltages produced the corresponding intermediate parameter values. Example: Relationship between the voltage applied to GPI IN and the Fader Level when [Fader Level] is set in the [Parameter] box. Max. voltage applied to GPI IN [Max] parameter value [Min] parameter value Min. voltage applied to GPI IN The parameter value changes in inverse proportion to the voltage applied to the GPI input. The minimum voltage applied to GPI IN will produce the specified [Max] parameter value, and the maximum voltage applied to GPI IN will produce the specified [Min] parameter value, with intermediate voltages produced the corresponding intermediate parameter values. Example: Relationship between the voltage applied to GPI IN and the Fader Level when [Fader Level] is set in the [Parameter] box. Max. voltage applied to GPI IN [Max] parameter value [Min] parameter value Min. voltage applied to GPI IN The specified [Min] and [Max] parameter values are alternately selected each time the voltage applied to GPI IN rises from below to above the median voltage.* Example: Relationship between the voltage applied to GPI IN and the Fader Level when [Fader Level] is set in the [Parameter] box. Max. voltage applied to GPI IN Median voltage Min. voltage applied to GPI IN [Max] parameter value [Min] parameter value [Max] parameter value The specified [Min] and [Max] parameter values are alternately selected each time the voltage applied to GPI IN drops from above to below the median voltage.* Example: Relationship between the voltage applied to GPI IN and the Fader Level when [Fader Level] is set in the [Parameter] box. [Max] parameter value [Min] parameter value [Max] parameter value Max. voltage applied to GPI IN Median voltage Min. voltage applied to GPI IN DME Designer Owner’s Manual 81 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window • [Scene Change] GPI input can be used to recall a specified scene. [Parameter] specifies the number of the scene to be recalled. [Min] and [Max] are not available. [Terminal] determines how the GPI input voltage will affect the specified parameter. The scene specified by [Parameter] will be recalled each time the voltage applied to GPI IN rises from below to above the median voltage.* Max. voltage applied to GPI IN Median voltage Min. voltage applied to GPI IN Trigger The scene specified by [Parameter] will be recalled each time the voltage applied to GPI IN drops from above to below the median voltage.* Trigger Max. voltage applied to GPI IN Median voltage Min. voltage applied to GPI IN Same as . Same as . • [Scene Increment] GPI input can be used to increment the scene number. [Parameter], [Min], and [Max] are not available. [Terminal] determines how the GPI input voltage will affect the specified parameter. The scene number will be incremented each time the voltage applied to GPI IN rises from below to above the median voltage.* Max. voltage applied to GPI IN Median voltage Min. voltage applied to GPI IN Trigger The scene number will be incremented each time the voltage applied to GPI IN drops from above to below the median voltage.* Trigger Max. voltage applied to GPI IN Median voltage Min. voltage applied to GPI IN 82 Same as . Same as . DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window • [Scene Decrement] GPI input can be used to decrement the scene number. [Parameter], [Min], and [Max] are not available. [Terminal] determines how the GPI input voltage will affect the specified parameter. The scene number will be decremented each time the voltage applied to GPI IN rises from below to above the median voltage.* Max. voltage applied to GPI IN Median voltage Min. voltage applied to GPI IN Trigger The scene number will be decremented each time the voltage applied to GPI IN drops from above to below the median voltage.* Trigger Max. voltage applied to GPI IN Median voltage Min. voltage applied to GPI IN Same as . Same as . DME Designer Owner’s Manual 83 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window • [Mute] GPI input can be used to engage or disengage the DME mute function. [Parameter], [Min], and [Max] are not available. [Terminal] determines how the GPI input voltage will affect the specified parameter. Mute will be ON when the voltage applied to GPI IN is above the median voltage*, and OFF when the voltage is below the median. Max. voltage applied to GPI IN MUTE ON Median voltage MUTE OFF MUTE OFF Min. voltage applied to GPI IN Mute will be OFF when the voltage applied to GPI IN is above the median voltage*, and ON when the voltage is below the median. Max. voltage applied to GPI IN MUTE OFF Median voltage MUTE ON MUTE ON Min. voltage applied to GPI IN Mute will be alternately turned ON and OFF each time the voltage applied to GPI IN drops from below to above the median voltage.* Max. voltage applied to GPI IN Median voltage Min. voltage applied to GPI IN ON OFF ON Mute will be alternately turned ON and OFF each time the voltage applied to GPI IN rises from above to below the median voltage.* ON OFF ON Max. voltage applied to GPI IN Median voltage Min. voltage applied to GPI IN 84 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window • [GPI Lock] GPI Lock can be turned on or off via GPI input. When GPI Lock is ON, all GPI inputs other than the one being used for GPI Lock control are locked and input will be ignored. [Parameter], [Min], and [Max] are not available. [Terminal] determines how the GPI input voltage will affect the specified parameter. GPI lock will be ON when the voltage applied to GPI IN is above the median voltage*, and OFF when the voltage is below the median. Max. voltage applied to GPI IN MUTE ON Median voltage MUTE OFF MUTE OFF Min. voltage applied to GPI IN GPI Lock will be OFF when the voltage applied to GPI IN is above the median voltage*, and ON when the voltage is below the median. Max. voltage applied to GPI IN MUTE OFF Median voltage MUTE ON MUTE ON Min. voltage applied to GPI IN GPI Lock will be alternately turned ON and OFF each time the voltage applied to GPI IN drops from below to above the median voltage.* Max. voltage applied to GPI IN MUTE ON Median voltage MUTE OFF MUTE OFF Min. voltage applied to GPI IN GPI Lock will be alternately turned ON and OFF each time the voltage applied to GPI IN rises from above to below the median voltage.* Max. voltage applied to GPI IN MUTE OFF Median voltage MUTE ON MUTE ON Min. voltage applied to GPI IN DME Designer Owner’s Manual 85 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window • [Time Adjustment] GPI input can be used to adjust the DME internal clock as follows: Internal clock time Time after adjustment 0~14 seconds Returned to 0 seconds 15~29 seconds Advanced to 30 seconds 30~44 seconds Returned to 30 seconds 45~59 seconds Advanced to 0 seconds [Parameter], [Min], and [Max] are not available. [Terminal] determines how the GPI input voltage will affect the specified parameter. and specify continuous control of continuously-variable parameters from an external fader, knob, or similar device. and specify on/off control of 2-state parameters via an external switching device. The internal clock time will be adjusted each time the voltage applied to GPI IN rises from below to above the median voltage.* Max. voltage applied to GPI IN Median voltage Min. voltage applied to GPI IN Trigger The internal clock time will be adjusted each time the voltage applied to GPI IN drops from above to below the median voltage.* Trigger Max. voltage applied to GPI IN Median voltage Min. voltage applied to GPI IN 86 Same as . Same as . DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window • [Play Wav File] GPI input can be used to initiate playback of the specified Wave file. [Parameter] specifies the Wave file to be played. Files specified by the Wav File Manager can be selected. Wave files can only be selected if a Wav Player is included in the DME configuration. [Min], and [Max] are not available. [Terminal] determines how the GPI input voltage will affect the specified parameter. and specify continuous control of continuously-variable parameters from an external fader, knob, or similar device. and specify on/off control of 2-state parameters via an external switching device. The specified Wave file will be played each time the voltage applied to GPI IN rises from below to above the median voltage.* Max. voltage applied to GPI IN Median voltage Min. voltage applied to GPI IN Trigger The specified Wave file will be played each time the voltage applied to GPI IN drops from above to below the median voltage.* Trigger Max. voltage applied to GPI IN Median voltage Min. voltage applied to GPI IN Same as . Same as . * “Median voltage” refers to the voltage halfway between the maximum and minimum voltages detectable by the GPI input terminals. Refer to the “GPI Page” section of the “Utility Screens” chapter of the DME64N/24N Owner’s manual for details on GPI voltages. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 87 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ GPI OUT The DME64N has 16 GPI OUT channels, and the DME24N has 8 GPI OUT channels. These settings determine which DME parameter values will be output via each individual GPI IN channel. The channel numbers are shown in the leftmost column. [Function] Specifies the function to be transmitted via a GPI output. The four available functions are: [No Assign], [Parameter Value Edit], [Scene Change], and [GPI Lock]. The [Parameter], [Threshold], [Terminal], and [Polarity] items will change according to the selected function. • [No Assign] No function assigned, and no GPI output will occur. This is the default setting. Select [No Assign] to clear an assigned function. The [Parameter], [Threshold], [Terminal], and [Polarity] items are not available. • [Parameter Value Edit] Allows component parameter values to be output via GPI. In this case [Parameter] is used to select the parameter to be output. [Threshold] specifies the parameter threshold value. [Terminal] and [Polarity] determine how the GPI voltage will be output in response to parameter changes. Terminal Polarity GPI Output Ignored When value of the specified parameter is above the threshold level the output will be high, and when below the threshold level the output will be low. Ignored When value of the specified parameter is below the threshold level the output will be high, and when above the threshold level the output will be low. A pulse*1 will be output when the value of the parameter changes from below to above the threshold. A pulse*1 will be output when the value of the parameter changes from above to below the threshold. A pulse*2 will be output when the value of the parameter changes from below to above the threshold. A pulse*2 will be output when the value of the parameter changes from above to below the threshold. 88 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window • [Scene Change] The recall status of the specified scene is transmitted via GPI output. [Parameter] specifies the scene for which the recall status is to be output. [Threshold] and [Polarity] are not available. [Terminal] determines how the GPI voltage will be output in response to parameter changes. Terminal GPI Output When the current scene is the same as the scene specified by [Parameter] the output will be high, and when different the output will be low. When the current scene is the same as the scene specified by [Parameter] the output will be low, and when different the output will be high. A pulse*1 will be output when the current scene is the same as the scene specified by [Parameter]. A pulse*2 will be output when the current scene is the same as the scene specified by [Parameter]. • [GPI Lock] The GPI Lock status is transmitted via GPI output. [Parameter], [Threshold], and [Polarity] are not available. [Terminal] determines how the GPI voltage will be output in response to parameter changes. Terminal GPI Output When GPI Lock is ON the output will be high, and when OFF the output will be low. When GPI Lock is ON the output will be high, and when OFF the output will be low. *1 Pulse waveform 1 *2 Pulse waveform 2 HI HI LO LO 250 msec 250 msec Event Schedule Event Schedule is shown when [GPI OUT] is set in “Event Scheduler.” See “Event Scheduler” on page 116. User Defined Button User Defined Button is shown when [GPI OUT] is set in “User Defined Button.” See “User Defined Button (User Defined Parameters)” on page 98. Event Log Event Log is shown when [GPI OUT] is set in “Event Logger.” See “Event Logger” on page 111. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 89 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window MIDI When you click the [MIDI] command on the [Tools] menu, the “MIDI” dialog box is displayed. Here you can make MIDI input/output port, remote control, and other settings. [Setup] Tab Sets the DME MIDI channels along with program change, control change, and parameter change. ■ [DME] From the list, select the DME where you will be making settings. ■ MIDI CH Sets the MIDI channel. This number is also used as the Parameter Change Device ID. [Tx] Select the MIDI transmit channel from the list. [Rx] Select the MIDI receive channel from the list. ■ Program Change/Control Change/Parameter Change Sets transmit (Tx), receive (Rx), OMNI, and Echo for program change/control change/parameter change. When ON, clicking turns this OFF. When OFF, clicking turns this ON. When OMNI is [ON] channel messages are received regardless of the receive channel setting. When ECHO is [ON] the input data is “echoed” (re-transmitted) via the output port that corresponds to the input port via which it was received. Detailed settings for program change, control change, and parameter change are made on the [Program Change] tab, the [Control Change] tab, and the [Parameter Change] tab. 90 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window [Control Change] Tab Assigns components to control change for each DME. You can change DME parameters by sending control change messages from external equipment. You can assign to control change numbers 1-31, 33-95, and 102-119. NOTE Because control change numbers 0 and 32 are used for bank select MSB, numbers 96-101 are RPN/NRPN related, and 120-127 are used for mode messages, they cannot be used for component assignment. ■ [DME] From the list, select the DME where you will be making settings. ■ Control Change List The control change numbers and current settings are displayed in the list in the center. No. Displays the control change numbers. Component Displays the assigned components. Control changes that have no component assigned to them are blank. If you click here, a list will be displayed. Usable components are on the list. Click the component name to select it. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 91 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Parameter Set the assigned component link parameter. When you click here, a list of parameters included in the component is displayed. Select the parameter you want to assign. Min/Max Sets the range of operation for the parameter. The current values for the [Min] (lower limit) and [Max] (upper limit) are displayed. If you click here, a slider will be displayed. The range and parameter units that can be set will vary, depending on the parameter selected in the [Parameter] box. You can change the parameter by dragging the slider. To make a finer setting, press the <Shift> key while dragging the slider. The value for the parameter will be shown while you are dragging the slider. When you finish dragging and release the mouse button, the slider will disappear. The same slider is displayed whether you click the [Min] box or the [Max] box. The black part is the parameter range. If you drag the left edge of the black part, the [Min] value will change. If you drag the right edge, the [Max] will change. ■ [Clear] Button Clears assignments for the selected control change numbers. ■ [All Clear] Button Clears assignments for all control change numbers. 92 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window [Program Change] Tab Assigns scenes to program control change numbers 1 through 128. Switches scenes when program changes are received. These settings are shared by all DMEs in the zone. Up to 999 assignments can be made. Scenes above number 128 are assigned by changing banks. ■ Program Change Event Program numbers and the scenes assigned to them are displayed in a list. No. This displays program numbers from 1 to 128. Scene Displays the scene number and name of the assigned scene. Program changes that have no scene assigned to them are blank. When you click here, a list of scenes is displayed. Select the scene you want to assign. ■ [All Clear] Button Clears all scene assignments. ■ [Clear] Button Clears the scene assignment for the program number selected in the list, so that no scene is assigned to that number. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 93 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ [All Assign] Button Assigns all scenes in order starting from program number 1. ■ Bank Select LSB The bank is changed when assigning scenes numbered 129 and higher. Eight banks can be used, numbered from zero to seven. Click the [▼] and select the bank where you will make settings. [Parameter Change] Tab Specifies the parameter to be controlled by parameter change commands for each address. Up to 128 can be set. ■ [DME] From the list, select the DME where you will be making settings. 94 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ Parameter Change List The current settings are displayed in the list in the center. No. This displays the parameter change numbers. Component Assigns components. If you click here, a list will be displayed. Assignable components are on the list. Click the component name to select it. Parameter Set the assigned component link parameter. When you click here, a list is displayed of parameters included in the component selected in the [Component] box. Select the parameter you want to assign. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 95 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Min/Max This sets the parameter range. The current values for the [Min] (lower limit) and [Max] (upper limit) are displayed. The range and units that can be set will vary, depending on the parameter selected. If you click here, a slider will be displayed. You can change the parameter by dragging the slider. To make a finer setting, press the <Shift> key while dragging the slider. The value for the parameter will be shown while you are dragging the slider. When you finish dragging and release the mouse button, the slider will disappear. The same slider is displayed whether you click the [Min] box or the [Max] box. The black part is the parameter range. If you drag the left edge of the black part, the [Min] value will change. If you drag the right edge, the [Max] will change. ■ [Clear] Button Clears the assignment for the parameter change selected in the list, so that nothing will be assigned to it. ■ [All Clear] Button Clears all parameter change assignments. 96 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window [Port] Tab Sets the MIDI port for the current zone used by DME Designer. ■ MIDI PORT Selects the MIDI driver used for transmitting and receiving MIDI messages. [Tx] Selects, from a list, the MIDI driver used for transmitting MIDI messages. [Rx] Selects, from a list, the MIDI driver used for receiving MIDI messages. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 97 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window User Defined Button (User Defined Parameters) User Defined Parameters Parameters that the user can operate using function keys <F1> through <F6> in the DME unit or ICP1 are called “User Defined Parameters.” Frequently changed parameters can be assigned in advance to any of 24 (four pages times six) presets, and operated on the DME unit or ICP1 even if DME Designer is not being used. This function sets parameters in DME Designer that can be called by these function keys <F1> through <F6>. In DME Designer, user defined parameter settings are made using the “User Defined Button” dialog box. The user defined parameter settings are shared between zone configurations. “User Defined Button” Dialog Box When you click [User Defined Button] in the [Tools] menu, the “User Defined Button” dialog box is displayed. ■ [1]/[2]/[3]/[4] Tabs Switches the set to which settings will apply. You can set up to six function keys in each set. The user defined parameters set on a single tab are displayed on one page in the DME unit main screen. Function Keys The function keys are displayed in the leftmost column of the table. When you enter text for [LCD Display], a short name with up to eight characters will be created and displayed to the right of the function key. 98 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Function Specifies the function to be assigned to the function keys. • [No Assign] No assignment. Select this option to clear an assigned function. • [Parameter Value Edit] Allows the parameter specified in the [Parameter] field to be changed. • [Direct Parameter Value] Allows the value of a parameter to be set directly. The target parameter is specified in the [Parameter] field, and the value to be set is specified in the [Max] field. • [Scene Change] Allows scene recall. The scene to be recalled is specified in the [Parameter] field. • [GPI OUT] Allows GPI output. The GPI setting is made in the [Parameter] field. • [Play Wav File] Allows initiation of Wave file playback. The Wave file setting is made in the [Parameter] field. Wave files set by the Wav File manager can be specified. Files can not be selected unless a Wav Player is included in the DME configuration. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 99 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Parameter Sets the parameter assigned to each function key. If you click here, a list will be displayed. This list displays the parameters that are included in the current configuration. Select the parameter you want called by the function key. LCD Display Sets the text displayed on the DME unit. Click the [LCD Display] box and enter text. Up to 23 characters can be entered into the [LCD Display] box. After you confirm the name by pressing the <Enter> key, a short name will be created and displayed in the function key area as follows: “F1 [shortnam].” The short name will also be displayed in the DME unit main display. A short name is automatically created with up to eight characters for display as the user defined parameter name on the DME unit main screen Min, Max Sets the lower and upper limits for a parameter. ■ [Clear] Button Clears assignments for the selected function keys. This is the same as “No Assign.” ■ [OK] Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box. ■ [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. 100 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Setting User Defined Parameters After creating a parameter link group to assign, set the user defined parameter. 1 Create a configuration. 2 Click [User Defined Button] in the [Tools] menu. The “User Defined Button” dialog box will be displayed. 3 Click one of the tabs numbered [1] through [4] to select the set of user defined parameters you will assign your parameters to. The four tabs correspond to the pages on the DME unit main screen. 4 Click the [Parameter] box for the function key to which you will assign the parameter. A list of parameters included in the current configuration will be displayed. 5 Select the parameter to assign to the function key. 6 Click the [LCD Display] box and enter text for the user defined parameter name. The [LCD Display] box can accept up to 23 characters, but only eight characters can be displayed in the DME unit main screen. When making a user defined parameter name, the first eight characters should be understandable. Note When making multiple registrations, you can save time by first setting just the [Parameter] box for all keys, then setting the [LCD Display] box names. When you enter a user defined parameter name into an [LCD Display] box and press the <Enter> key to confirm it, the next [LCD Display] box down will be selected, and you can enter text there immediately. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 101 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Word Clock The signal that synchronizes all devices connected to the DME is called the “Word Clock.” It uses the same frequency as the sampling frequency. The word clock is set for each DME in the “Word Clock” dialog box. When you click [Word Clock] on the [Tools] menu, the “Work Clock” dialog box is displayed. Clock Information Slot Information Clock Status • The DME24N has only one SLOT, and [Cascade] is not available. • The number of channels varies according to the card inserted into the slot. ■ DME From the list, select the DME where you will be making settings. ■ Clock Information Displays the word clock frequency for the DME selected in [DME]. 102 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ Card (Slot Information) Displays the name of the card inserted into the slot. Slot Number Card Name ■ Clock Status The clock status is displayed using a color code: Status Meaning Indicates that there is no input signal. Indicates there is an input signal and sync is possible with the current word clock. Indicates there is an input signal but cannot sync with word clock (clocks are different). Indicates that there is no DME unit information. ■ Internal/Word Clock/Cascade You can select one of the following for the word clock: [Slot] (64N: 1-4, 24N: 1 only), [Internal] (44.1kHz/48kHz/88.2kHz/96kHz), [Word Clock] (WCK IN), [Cascade] (IN/OUT, 64N only). Clock buttons that are grayed out cannot be selected. ■ [Close] Button Closes the dialog box. NOTE You can close the dialog box using the Close button, or by pressing <Esc> or <Alt>+<F4>. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 103 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Monitor When you click the [Monitor] command on the [Tools] menu, the “Monitor” dialog box is displayed. Sets the monitor output destination. ■ [DME] From the list, select the DME where you will be making settings. ■ Drop down list From the list, select the card that will be the destination for the monitor output. ■ [OK] Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box. ■ [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. 104 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Clock When you click the [Clock] command on the [Tools] menu, the “Clock” dialog box is displayed. Here you can set the DME internal clock. This can be set only when online. The default is the computer date and time. Set the date in the left box and the time in the right box. You can change the numbers using the [▲] and [▼] at the right of the boxes. NOTE You can close the dialog box using the Close button, or by pressing <Esc> or <Alt>+<F4>. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 105 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Language Settings When you click the [Language] command on the [Tools] menu, the “Language” dialog box is displayed. This sets the DME unit language. ■ [Language] Select the language. [English/German/French/Spanish] and [Japanese] are in the list. ■ [OK] Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box. ■ [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. NOTE You can close the dialog box using the Close button, or by pressing <Esc> or <Alt>+<F4>. 106 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window DME Firmware Update You can update the DME unit firmware using the [Firmware Update] command on the [Tools] menu. When you move the mouse cursor over the [Firmware] command on the [Tools] menu, a submenu is displayed. When you select [Program] or [Component] on the submenu, the “Open” dialog box will be displayed. You can perform a firmware update by specifying a firmware update file. When performing a firmware update, connect the DME unit and the computer. When the DME update is finished, the DME unit will be automatically restarted. You also need to restart DME Designer. NOTE If the firmware has been updated from V1.07 or lower to V1.10 or upper, perform the update twice. Because the text display data in the DME unit is changed, text display for Japanese is not possible with one update only. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 107 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ [Program] Updates the DME/CP1 unit program area firmware. Opens update files with the extension “.DPB”. 1 Select [Firmware Update] ➞ [Program] in the [Tools] menu. The “Open” dialog box will be displayed. 2 Select an update program with the extension “.DPB” and click the [Open] button. The “Firm Update” dialog box will be displayed. The DMEs in the current zone will be displayed in a list. 3 Check the DME you wish to update. You can click on a checkmark to turn it ON/OFF. The [Select All] button places a checkmark next to all the DMEs. The [Clear All] button turns OFF all the DME checkmarks. 108 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window 4 Check the DME you wish to update, then click the [Update] button. The firmware update will begin. NOTE While updating, be very careful not to disconnect the USB or Ethernet cable or turn off the power to the DME. The DME Designer MIDI setting information will be lost. When the DME update is finished, the DME unit will be automatically restarted. You also need to restart DME Designer. ■ [Component] Updates the DME unit component firmware. When you select this command, the “Open” dialog box will be displayed. Opens update files with the extension “.DCB” (for DME) or “.CCB” (for ICP1). You can select multiple update files for components. ■ DME Unit When performing the firmware update, connect the DME unit and the computer by USB or Ethernet. The USB-MIDI or DME-N Network Driver must be installed in the computer. ■ ICP1 To perform the firmware update, the ICP1 and the zone master DME unit must be connected by Ethernet. In addition, the zone master DME unit must be connected to the computer as described above. 1 Select [Firmware Update] ➞ [Component] in the [Tools] menu. The “Open” dialog box will be displayed. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 109 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window 2 Select an update program with the extension “.DCB” (for DME) or “.CCB” (for ICP1) and click the [Open] button. The “Firmware Update” dialog box will be displayed. The DMEs or ICPs in the current zone will be displayed in a list. The component names and versions will be displayed hierarchically for each DME. 3 Check the component you wish to update. You can click on the checkmark to turn it ON/OFF. The [Select All] button places a checkmark next to all the DMEs. The [Clear All] button turns OFF all the DME checkmarks. 4 Check the component you wish to update, then click the [Update] button. The component update will begin. NOTE While updating, be very careful not to disconnect the USB or Ethernet cable or turn off the power to the DME. The DME Designer MIDI setting information will be lost. When the DME update is finished, the DME unit will be automatically restarted. You also need to restart DME Designer. 110 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Event Logger When you click [Event Logger] in the [View] menu while online, the “Event Logger” window is displayed. This records and displays DME unit events. When the dialog box is opened while online, the event log is automatically obtained and displayed as a list in the Event Logger window. Events are displayed in realtime as long as the dialog box stays open while online. The information is also simultaneously recorded in a file if the log function is enabled. NOTE Only users for whom the [View Log Window] checkbox in the “Security” dialog box has been turned ON can display the Event Logger window. The default setting for this parameter is OFF. NOTE The events you wish to display in the Event Logger window must be set in advance in the “Event Log List” dialog box. ■ DME List • [Date] Displays the date the event occurred. (Example Display: 2004-08-24) • [Time] Displays the time the event occurred. • [Type] Displays the event type and icon. There are three event types: (Warning): Warning event (Error): Error event (Information): Other events • [Zone] Displays the name of the zone in which the event occurred. • [DME] Displays the name of the DME in which the event occurred. • [Event] Displays the content of the event. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 111 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window [Log Setup] Button Displays the “Log Setup” dialog box. Here you can make Event Log settings. [Get Log] Button When you are offline, this selects the DME from which the log will be taken. During online status, this button is grayed out and cannot be used. Clicking here displays the “Get Log” dialog box. [Zone] Selects the zone for which events will be displayed. Only events from the selected zone will be displayed in the window. If [All Zones] is selected, events will be displayed for all DMEs arranged in the zone. Display button (Information/Warning/Error) • [Display Information] Button Switches between displaying and hiding Information events. When turned ON, Information events are displayed in the Event Logger window. • [Display Warning] Button Switches between displaying and hiding Warning events. When turned ON, Warning events are displayed in the Event Logger window. • [Display Error] Button Switches between displaying and hiding Error events. When turned ON, Error events are displayed in the Event Logger window. [Clear Screen] Button Clears (erases) events. 112 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window “Log Setup” dialog box Click the [Log Setup] button in the Event Logger window to display the “Log Setup” dialog box. Here you can make Event Log settings. These settings apply to the system as a whole. ■ [Enable Logging] Turns ON or OFF the function that writes the obtained event log data to a file. When a check is placed here, the event log is written to a file. When checked, it is set in the [Enable Logging] frame. Record __ days per log file Sets the number of days recorded into a single log file. When the specified number of days is exceeded, a new log file is created, and future log events are recorded there. When “1” is set for the number of days at 10:00 AM, information will be recorded in the same file until the next day at 9:59 AM. The number of days counted are cleared when the “Log Setup” dialog box is closed by clicking the [OK] button, or when the system goes online. Automatically delete log files after __ days When a check is placed here, log files exceeding the specified number of days are automatically deleted. Specifies the number of days after which log files are automatically deleted. Log file folder Specify the folder for saving log files. Clicking the [Browse] button opens the standard operating system dialog box for specifying folders. Here you can select a folder. Log files are saved with the following file name: “LOG + Start_Date.txt”. If there is a file with the same name already in the specified folder, a number will be affixed to the end of the file name, and it will be saved as a separate file. (Example: LOG20040824-2.txt) ■ [Display Event] Displays events with checks next to them. This operates together with the [Display Information], [Display Warning], and [Display Error] buttons in the Event Logger window. You can place checks next to multiple events. ■ [Display Log Buffer Full Message] When a check is placed here, “Log Buffer Full” messages will be displayed on the displays of all DME units in the zone. ■ [Log List Setup] Button Sets events sent from the DME units. Clicking here displays the “Event Log List” dialog box. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 113 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window “Get Log” dialog box Click the [Get Log] button in the Event Logger window to display the “Get Log” dialog box. ■ DME List Displays the IP addresses and types of DME units included in the zone. Click the DME from which to obtain events by placing a check next to it. ■ [Output File Name] Sets the file name and save location for the log file. Clicking the [Browse] button opens the file select dialog box, where you can select a file. ■ [DME Log Clear] Clears (erases) logs in the DME checked. When you click this button, a confirmation dialog is displayed. 114 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window “Event Log List” Dialog Box Sets events sent from the DME units. Sends events with checks next to them. ■ [Zone] If you click here, a list will be displayed. Specifies a zone. ■ [DME] If you click here, a list will be displayed. Specifies DMEs. ■ [Event] You can turn sending of logs for each event ON or OFF. ■ [Type] If you click here, a list will be displayed. Select type of event. [Information], [Warning], and [Error] are displayed in a list. ■ [GPI OUT] Sends GPI output for each event. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 115 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Event Scheduler “Event Scheduler” Dialog Box When you click [Event Scheduler] in the [Tools] menu, the “Event Scheduler” dialog box is displayed. This sets the scheduling for events. You can schedule events by specifying the date, time, and the action to execute. You can set up schedules for events to be executed at a specified time, and events that are to be repeated periodically. Periodic events are those that repeat each year, month, week, or day. Up to 50 events can be scheduled. Scheduling can be set separately for each zone. Settings and changes are sent to the DME unit during online status. Scene changes, parameter changes, and GPI output can all be scheduled. NOTE Only users for whom the [Edit] checkbox in the “Security” dialog box has been turned ON can edit scheduling settings. ■ Event View Displays registered scheduling events. When periodic events (cyclical events) are first displayed together, they are displayed in order of date. The order of same-time events can be changed by dragging and dropping. Click to select an event. ■ [No.] Displays the event number. Numbers are added from the top in order. This function will not be executed if the checkbox is not checked. ■ [Name] Displays the event names. Clicking an event will select it, allowing you to change its name. There is no limit to the number of characters. ■ [Operation] Displays the function that will be executed when the event starts. 116 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ [Date] Displays the event start date. Periodic events are displayed as shown below, with an icon and text that indicate a periodic event. • [January 1 every year] Each New Year's Day • [First Monday of January every year] First Monday in January each year • [Day 1 every month] First day of each month • [Second Monday of every month] The second Monday of each month. • [Monday every week] Each week on Monday • [Every day] Every day ■ [Time] Displays the time for starting the event. ■ [Enable Event Schedule] Enables the scheduled events. ■ [Add] Button Adds an event. Clicking here displays the “Add Event” dialog box. If the maximum of 50 events has already been registered, this button is grayed out. ■ [Remove] Button Deletes the event selected on the list. This button is grayed out when no event is selected. ■ [Edit] Button Lets you edit the selected event. Displays the “Edit Event” dialog box. This button is grayed out when no event is selected. ■ [Copy] Button Copies the selected event. This button is grayed out when no event is selected. ■ [Paste] Button Pastes the copied event. The event is added. This button is grayed out when no event has been copied. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 117 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window [Add Event (Edit Event)] Dialog Box The dialog box is displayed when you click on the [Add] or [Edit] button in the “Event Scheduler” dialog box. Here you can add or edit a scheduling event. ■ [Event Name] Box Enter the event name. There is no limit to the number of characters. ■ [Event Operation] Set the operation that is executed when the event starts. [Operation] When you click this button, a list of events is displayed. Specify the operation that is executed when the event starts. The following three items are on the list: • [Scene Change] Changes the scene. • [Parameter Value Edit] Changes a parameter. • [GPI Out] Sends GPI output. • [Play Wav File] Allows initiation of Wave file playback. 118 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window [Operation Setting] The content changes according to the event selected for [Operation]. • When [Scene Change] is selected: Select the scene to be recalled from the [Scene] list. Stored scenes are displayed in the list. • When [Parameter Value Edit] is selected: [Scene] Select a scene from the list. If the DME unit's current scene differs from the scene specified in event scheduling, the scheduled scene will be recalled. If the DME unit's current scene is the same as the scene specified in event scheduling, the scheduled scene will not be recalled. [DME Unit] From the list, select the DME unit to which this scheduled event will apply. The DMEs included in the zone are displayed in the list. [Component] Select the component that has the parameter to be changed. The list displays the components arranged for the DME that is selected in the [DME Unit] box. [Parameter] Select the parameter that will change. Parameters for the component that is selected in the [Component] box are displayed in a list. [Value] Set a value for the parameter. Change the parameter using the spin buttons or the slider on the right. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 119 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window • When [GPI Out] is selected: [DME] From the list, select the DME that will produce the GPI output. [Ch1]/[Ch2]/[Ch3] ... Set [ON], [OFF], or [---] for each channel. If it is set to [OFF], the [LOW→HIGH] channel outputs [HIGH→LOW] signal, the [HIGH→LOW] channel outputs [LOW→HIGH] signal. • When [Play Wav File] is selected: [Scene] Select a scene from the list. [Wave] Select a Wave file from the list. Wave files set by the Wav File manager can be specified. Files can not be selected unless a Wav Player is included in the DME configuration. 120 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ [Event Schedule] Set the year/month/date to start the event. Calendar Sets the date the event will start. Change the year and month using the [<] and [>] buttons. Click on a day to set that date. February 29 can be set on the calendar, where it appears every four years (each leap year). [Time] Sets the time the event will start. Click the hour and minute, then set numerical values using the spin boxes. Only the time is set for periodic events. [Repeating Event] When a check is placed here, the event becomes a periodic event, and the calendar is ignored. • [Year]/[Month]/[Week]/[Day]/[Hour] Set the period for the event, using the radio buttons to the left. • [Day]/[Day of the week] Set the conditions on the right side. Select [Day]/[Day of the week], and set the date and other information. The items that can be set vary according to the selected period. When the event period is [Year] All settings can be made. When the event period is [Month] If [Day] is selected, only the date can be set. If [Day Of The Week] is selected, the week of the month and day of the week is set. When the event period is [Week] Only [Day Of The Week] can be selected. Set the day of the week. When the event period is [Day]/[Hour] Condition settings on the area on the right are not needed. [Exception] Button Opens the “Event Exceptions” dialog. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 121 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ [Event Exceptions] Specifies “exception” year/month/day and time settings at which events will not be executed. The available settings will depend on the event cycle. • When the event cycle is [Year] Only the [Year] setting is available. • When the event cycle is [Month] Only the [Month] and [Week] setting is available. • When the event cycle is [Week] Only the [Month], [Week] and [Day] settings are available. • When the event cycle is [Day] Only the [Month], [Week], [Day], and [Day of the week] settings are available. • When the event cycle is [Hour] Only the [Month], [Week], [Day], [Day of the week], and [Hour] settings are available. 122 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Remote Control Setup List Registers the parameters to be controlled from an external controller. Refer to the “DME-N Remote Control Protocol Specifications” document for details about the communication protocol. Information about the “DME-N Remote Control Protocol Specifications” document can be found at the Yamaha pro Audio website (URL below). http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/ [DME] Click to see a list and select a DME. [Function] Select [No Assign], [Parameter Value Edit] or [Level Meter]. [Parameter] Specifies the parameter to be controlled. A list of parameters will be displayed according to the selection of [Function]. [Min]/[Max] Displays the minimum and maximum values for the parameter. [Type] Selects a fader curve when level, etc., is select for [Parameter]. Select [dB] to directly control the level in dB, or [Curve Table] to use one of the DME fader curves for level adjustment. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 123 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Parameter List When you click [Parameter List] in the [Tools] menu, the “Parameter List” dialog box is displayed. A list of parameters in the current configuration of the current zone are displayed. Here you can check things like the parameter IDs. You can also print the list of parameters. When the dialog box is opened or when a DME is selected from the [DME] list, the parameter values are displayed. ■ [DME] From the list, select the DME that will have its parameters displayed. The DMEs included in the current configuration are displayed in the list. Components in the selected DME are displayed in the component list. Component List The components and user modules included in the DME, their IDs, and the component parameters are displayed in hierarchal list. The AD and slot are also displayed. NOTE Components for user modules are also listed in a hierarchal display, but if user module security is enabled, the components are not displayed. However, parameters displayed in the user module editor are displayed here. [ID] Displays the component or parameter ID. The following is displayed for the parameter ID: “Element No. : X : Y : Parameter No. : Index No.” [Value] Displays the value for the parameter. 124 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window [Min]/[Max] Displays the minimum and maximum values for the parameter. NOTE The displayed parameter values are those that were in effect when the dialog box was opened or when the displayed DME was selected from the [DME] list. They cannot be changed here. ■ [Preview] Button Prints a list of parameters. When you click this button a preview screen is displayed. ■ [Save] Button Saves the parameter list as a CSV file. When you click this button, the standard operating system save dialog box is displayed. NOTE The CSV format is a comma delimited text file that can be read by many types of software, such as word processor, spreadsheet, or database programs. ■ [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. Printing a List of Parameters Prints all parameters for the component selected in the list, all parameters for the selected DME, or all parameters for all DMEs. When you click the [Preview] button, the dialog box display will change, and the print preview will be displayed in the center. Buttons will be added to the upper part of the dialog box. ■ [Print] Button Prints a list of parameters. Clicking here displays the “Print” dialog box. When you click the [Print] button, printing begins. NOTE The displayed [Print] dialog box will vary according to the connected printer. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 125 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ [Setup] Button Clicking here displays the “Print Setup” dialog box. Here you can set the paper size, paper orientation, and font. [Paper Size] Select the paper size from the list. [Orientation] Set the orientation of the paper by clicking one of the radio buttons. • [Portrait] Prints on the paper with it oriented vertically. • [Landscape] Prints on the paper with it orientated horizontally. [Font] Displays the set font. Clicking the [Font] button displays the “Font” dialog box, where you can change the font. [Target] Set the parameters to be printed by clicking one of the radio buttons. • [Selected Component] Prints all parameters for the component selected in the list. • [Selected DME] Prints all parameters for the selected DME. • [All DME] Prints all parameters for all DMEs. [Close] Button Ends the preview and returns the screen to the original dialog box. [Prev] Button/[Next] Button Switches the page being previewed when there are multiple pages. The [Prev] button goes to the previous page. The [Next] button goes to the next page. 126 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Component Lock Click [Component Lock] in the [Tools] menu to display the Component Lock dialog. The component/user module names included in the DME will be displayed. AD and Slot will also be displayed. Components can be locked so that parameter changes cannot be made from an external device by checking the checkbox to the left of the component name. The lock settings will be transferred to the DME when the unit is placed on-line. The settings can only be changed while off-line. NOTE The hierarchy of user components in user modules will be displayed, but if user module security is enabled the components will not be displayed. Components displayed by the User Module Editor will be displayed. NOTE Only users who's [Edit] box is checked can edit the lock status. ■ [Select All] Button Checks all component checkboxes. ■ [Clear All] Button Clears all component checkboxes. ■ [OK] Button Enters the settings and closes the dialog box. ■ [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without entering the settings. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 127 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Wav File Manager When you click [Wav File Manager] on the [Tools] menu, the “Wav File Manager” dialog box is displayed. Here you can manage playback settings for Wave files played in the Wav File Player. This is set for each DME. The setting can be made only when in offline status. Up to 100 Wave files can be managed. Up to a maximum of 12 megabytes of Wave files can be registered for each DME unit. If a Wave file is added that will exceed this amount, a warning message will be displayed. NOTE These settings can be edited only by users for whom the [Edit] checkbox in the “Security” dialog box has been turned ON. NOTE Only Wave files with file names of 31 characters or less, (including the extension) can be registered. Check the Wave file name beforehand. Change the name if it has 32 or more characters, including the extension. NOTE When saving project files including Wave files, select “Project File with wave (*.daf)” in the file save dialog box. ■ [DME] From the list, select the DME you want to set. The DMEs included in the current zone are displayed in the list. ■ [Wave File] Displays the Wave file information. Settings can be made here as well. [No.] The Wave file number is displayed in the leftmost column. Numbers are added from the top in order. [List Name] You can set up to 27 characters as a label separate from the Wave file name. The Wave file name is displayed here by default. [File Name] Up to 31 characters are displayed as the wave file name. If you double-click the name, the file selection dialog is displayed, where you can select a file. 128 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window [Size] Displays Wave file size information. The units vary, depending on the file size. The size is displayed to the first decimal. Size Display Up to 1023 bytes 0.X KB 1024 bytes to 1023.9 kilobytes XXX.X KB 1024 kilobytes or more X.X MB [Repeats] Sets the number of repeats for playback. Clicking here will display a list where you can select the number of times. Select [0] to [98] or [INFINITY]. Since external input cannot be edited, [---] is displayed. [Interval] Sets the time until the next playback when [Repeats] is one or more. If you click here, a list will be displayed. You can set [0] to [99]. Since external input cannot be edited, [---] is displayed. [Auto Start] Turns automatic playback ON or OFF. If ON is set, playback happens automatically when the file is selected. If you click here, a list will be displayed. Select [ON] or [OFF]. [Next No.] Specifies the number for the Wave file to be played next. If you click here, a list will be displayed. Select the number for the Wave file to be played next. • [Stop] This stops playback after this Wave file is finished playing, without specifying the next wave file. Since external input cannot be edited, [---] is displayed. ■ [Store] Button Saves the current settings in the “Wav File Manager” dialog box in a file, as a library. Clicking here displays the file save dialog box. ■ [Recall] Button Reads a saved library. Clicking this button displays a menu. A menu displays library files saved in the folder that has been set as the Contents Folder. Click the library to be read. [Open File Dialog] Displays the file select dialog box. You can select a library file that is saved in the folder set as the Contents Folder, and read it. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 129 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ [Add] Button When you click here, External Input and the file select list is displayed. [Wave File] The file selection dialog box is displayed, where you can select a Wave file. If the selected table already has data, an overwrite confirmation dialog box is displayed. [External Input] Sets [External Input]. You can select multiple Wave files. If multiple files are specified, they are added after the selected table. If a Wave file is registered to the number being added, it will be overwritten. The following Wave file formats are supported: 48, 44.1, 24, 22.05 kHz, 16bit/8bit, Mono/Stereo. If a file is selected with a format different than these, a message is displayed that says the file cannot be used. There is an upper limit to size beyond which a file cannot be used. This limit varies according to the format. If the size of the selected file is beyond the limit, a message is displayed that says the file cannot be used. 22.05 K Mono 8 bit 1.37 MB 44.1 K Mono 8 bit 2.75 MB 22.05 K Stereo 8 bit 2.75 MB 44.1 K Stereo 8 bit 5.5 MB 22.05 K Mono 16 bit 2.75 MB 44.1 K Mono 16 bit 5.5 MB 22.05 K Stereo 16 bit 5.5 MB 44.1 K Stereo 16 bit 5.9 MB 24.05 K Mono 8 bit 1.5 MB 48 K Mono 8 bit 3 MB 24 K Stereo 8 bit 3 MB 48 K Stereo 8 bit 5.9 MB 24 K Mono 16 bit 3 MB 48 K Mono 16 bit 5.9 MB 24 K Stereo 16 bit 5.9 MB 48 K Stereo 16 bit 5.9 MB ■ [Remove] Button Deletes settings from the selected line. This button is grayed out when no Wave file is selected in the list. ■ [Up] Button Moves the selected line up one. It is switched with the line immediately above. The button will be grayed out if nothing is selected in the list, or if [No. 1] is selected in the list. ■ [Down] Button Moves the selected line down one. It is switched with the line immediately below. The button will be grayed out if nothing is selected in the list, or if [No. 100] is selected in the list. ■ [Play] Button Plays the selected Wave file on the computer. Allows monitoring and checking of the Wave file. ■ [Stop] Button Stops playback of the Wave file. ■ [Remaining Memory] Displays the remaining size that can be added. 130 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ [OK] Button Updates the settings and closes the dialog box. ■ [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. Adding Wave Files To add a Wave file, select the line where you want to add the file, then click the [Add] button. You can also add a Wave file by dragging and dropping it from the desktop to the “Wav File Manager” dialog box list. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 131 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window DAW Control When you click [DAW Control] on the [Tools] menu, the “DAW Control” dialog box is displayed. Here you can make settings for when the DME is controlled from a DAW controller. This is set for each zone configuration. The setting can be made only when in offline status. NOTE DAW control editing can be performed only by users for whom the [Edit] security checkbox has been checked. ■ [DME] From the list, select the DME you want to set. The DMEs included in the current zone are displayed in the list. ■ [DAW Type] Select the DAW type. The following choices are in the list: [Off], [Type1], and [Type2]. ■ DAW Control Table The following can be set for each channel from 1 to 64: [Function], [Controller], [Label], [Parameter]. [Function] Selects the function that will be changed by the DAW controller. If you click here, a list will be displayed. 132 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window • [No Assign] Makes no assignments. Select this when you are erasing an already set assignment. • [Parameter Value Edit] Allows the parameter of the component specified in the [Parameter] field to be changed. • [Scene Change] Recalls a scene. The scene is recalled even if the current scene, and the one changed by the DAW controller, are the same. When a selection has been made, [SCENE] is displayed in the [Label] field. The last scene is set in the [Parameter] field. • [Scene Increment] Sets the scene increment. Recalls the next valid scene after the current scene. When a selection has been made, [SINC] is displayed in the [Label] field. • [Scene Decrement] Selects the scene decrement. Recalls the next valid scene before the current scene. When a selection has been made, [SDEC] is displayed in the [Label] field. • [Mute] Sets all mute. Mute is set ON and OFF by the DAW controller. When a selection has been made, [MUTE] is displayed in the [Label] field. • [Component] Changes the component parameters. Selectable component names that are arranged in the configuration are displayed in a list. When selected, the first parameter included in the component is set in the [Parameter] field. • [GPI Lock] Assigns GPI Lock. GPI Lock is set ON and OFF by the DAW controller. When a selection has been made, [LOCK] is displayed in the [Label] field. • [Play Wav File] Allows initiation of Wave file playback. The Wave file setting is made in the [Parameter] field. Wave files set by the Wav File manager can be specified. Files can not be selected unless a Wav Player is included in the DME configuration. [Controller] Selects a controller from the list when [Parameter Value Edit] is set in [Function]. [Switch], [Fader], or [Knob] can be selected. [Label] Enter a label. Double-click to enter the text. You can enter up to 16 characters of text. Set the value with the <Enter> key, or cancel it with the <ESC> key. NOTE If [Scene Change], [Scene Increment], [Scene Decrement], [Mute], or [GPI Lock] is selected for [Function], the label name is fixed. [Parameter] If [Scene Change] , [Parameter Value Edit] or [Play Wav File], is set in [Function], set the parameters. If you click here, a list will be displayed. • When [Scene Change] is set in [Function] Displays scenes that can be selected. • When [Parameter Value Edit] is set in [Function] Selectable parameters are displayed. • When [Play Wav File] is set in [Function] Selectable Wave files are displayed. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 133 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Shortcut Keys Click [Shortcut Keys] in the [Tools] menu to display the “Shortcut Keys” dialog. Click to select the desired shortcut item. ■ [Enter New Key] If assigned, the current shortcut will be displayed. A shortcut entered via the computer keyboard will be displayed. ■ [OK] Button Enters the settings and closes the dialog box. ■ [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without entering the settings. 134 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Backup When you click the [Backup] command on the [Tools] menu, the “Backup” dialog box is displayed. Data in the DME is gathered in the computer and saved as a file. Backup files are created for each DME. You can also send the information saved in a file to a DME. Backup can be performed only when in offline status. NOTE Backup operations can be performed only by users for whom the [Edit] security checkbox has been checked. ■ [Target DME] Displays DME, IP addresses, and DME types for each zone. Check the DME from which you want to obtain data. You can place checks next to multiple DMEs. ■ [Folder] Box Specifies the folder that will be the destination for saving and reading operations. Clicking the [Browse] button opens the folder select dialog box, where you can specify a folder. The backup file name will be the DME’s IP address. If the folder is specified when sending DME data, the file sent to the DME will be the file in the folder whose file name that matches the DME’s IP address. ■ [Load] Button Sends the backed up file to the specified DME. ■ [Save] Button Obtains data from the specified DME, and saves it as a backup file. ■ [Close] Button Closes the dialog box. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 135 Chapter 4 Designer Editing Configurations Configurations Information about inputs/outputs, along with the arrangement of components and how they are connected, is called a “configuration.” Configurations are created in the Designer window and sent to the DME unit. In the Designer window, configurations are designed using various design windows, such as the Area, Zone, Configuration, and User Module windows. In each window a sheet is displayed, on which objects can be arranged. New Configurations You can create multiple zones within an area, and multiple configurations within a zone. Zones are added using the “Zone” dialog box, while configurations are added using the “Configuration” dialog box. For information about the “Zone” dialog box, see “Adding, Deleting, and Renaming a Zone” on page 231. For information about the “Configuration” dialog box, see “Adding, Deleting, and Renaming a Configuration” on page 233. Security Editing in the Designer window can be restricted based on the user security settings. Only users for whom the [Operation Security] → [Edit] checkbox in the “Security” dialog box has been checked can display the Designer window and edit configurations. For information about the “Security” dialog box, see “Security (Creating Users and Making User Settings)” on page 55. Edit Mode There is an “Edit Mode” in the Designer window. When the Edit Mode is ON, configurations can be edited. When it is turned OFF, the DME is controlled by DME Designer. ■ Edit Mode=ON When Edit Mode is ON, you can do configuration editing tasks such as arranging objects, making connections, and changing properties. ■ Edit Mode=OFF When Edit Mode is OFF, you cannot arrange objects, make selections, or display “Properties” dialog boxes for objects. You can display the component editor. ■ Edit Mode ON/OFF The edit mode can be turned on or off via the [Edit Mode] command in the [Tools] menu or in the contextual menu that appears when you right-click the sheet. To turn Edit Mode ON click the command, placing a checkmark to the left of the command name. When there is a checkmark next to the command (when Edit Mode is ON), clicking the command again removes the checkmark and turns OFF the Edit Mode. NOTE Only users for whom the [Operation Security] → [Edit] checkbox in the “Security” dialog box has been checked can turn the Edit Mode ON. 136 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Designer Window You can display or hide the Designer window using the [Designer] command on the [View] menu in the Main Panel window. Navigator Window Title Bar Menu Bar Toolbar Toolkit Window Status Bar Design Window Resource Meter Window Title Bar “Designer” is displayed on the title bar. You can move the window by dragging the title bar. There are [Minimize], [Maximize]/[Restore], and [Close] buttons at the right edge of the title bar. Menu Bar Commands that can be executed in the application are collected into categories on the menu bar. When you click one of the categories, a list of commands is displayed. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 137 Chapter 4 Designer Toolbar Frequently used commands are arranged here as buttons. [Navigator] Button [Probe Monitor] Button [Zoom To] Button [Redo] Button [Analyze] button [Zoom In] Button [Copy] Button [Print] Button [Undo] Button [Actual Size] Button [Show Signal Delay] button [Zoom Out] Button [Resource Meter] Button [Paste] Button [Cut] Button ■ [Print] Button Prints the active design window. → “Printing Each Design Window” in “Design Window Shared Settings and Operations” (page 214) ■ [Undo] Button (page 145) Undoes the most recent edit operation. ■ [Redo] Button (page 145) Restores operations undone with the [Undo] button back to their original condition. ■ [Cut] Button (page 145) Cuts the selected object from the screen and moves it to the clipboard. ■ [Copy] Button (page 145) Copies the selected object to the clipboard. ■ [Paste] Button (page 145) Pastes data from the clipboard. ■ [Navigator] Button (page 140) Displays or hides the Navigator window. ■ [Resource Meter] Button (page 139) Displays or hides the Resource Meter window. ■ [Analyze] Button Displays the “Analyze” dialog box, and analyzes the configuration. → "Analyze (Configuration Analysis)" in "Configuration Window" (page 249) ■ [Show Signal Delay] Button The digital signal delay value is displayed in the Configuration window. → "Show Signal Delay (Delay Display Value)" in "Configuration Window" (page 246) ■ [Probe Monitor] Button Turns the probe monitor ON or OFF. → “Probe Monitor” in “Configuration Window” (page 244) 138 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer ■ [Zoom Out]/[Zoom In]/[Actual Size]/[Zoom To] Buttons These buttons correspond to the commands on the [View] menu with the same names. Changes the magnification of the display on the screen. → “[View] Menu” in “Designer Window Menus” (page 147) Status Bar DME ID/Component ID Sheet Size Coordinates ■ DME ID/Component ID When the mouse pointer is moved over a DME device in the Zone window, the ID for that DME device is displayed. When the mouse pointer is moved over a component in the Configuration window, the ID for the component is displayed. ■ Sheet size Displays the size of the sheet in the active design window. ■ Coordinates Displays the coordinates of the mouse pointer any time it is within the design window. When dragging an object, the coordinates displayed here refer to the upper left corner of the object being dragged. Resource Meter Window The Resource Meter window is displayed only when the Configuration window and User Module window are active. Meters for the DSP memory usage percentage and the SPX resource usage percentage are in the Resource Meter window. ■ DSP Memory Usage Percentage When you are designing in the Configuration window, it gives you a yardstick for judging the total usage percentage for DSP memory in the DME unit. You cannot create a design that exceeds 100 percent usage in a single configuration window. In addition, the usage percentage varies depending on the sampling frequency, even for the same component. When the configuration is synchronized with the DME unit during online status, checks of connections and component information begin automatically (this is called compiling). The actual total usage percentage is calculated after this compiling operation. The usage percentage will vary according to the number of connections and components. The Resource Meter window gives you a precompile guideline for use while designing your configuration. An error may occur even when the meter shows less than 100 percent, based on conditions such as the number of connections, and type and number of components used. NOTE If a configuration is compiled at fs=44.1kHz or 48kHz, and the sampling frequency is then changed to 88.2kHz or 96kHz, it is necessary to recompile at 88.2kHz or 96kHz. If this is not done some configurations may produce no sound. In such cases a “DSP Power Shortage” message will be displayed on the DME unit. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 139 Chapter 4 Designer ■ SPX Resource Usage Ratio Displays the resource usage ratio for SPX components arranged in the configuration. NOTE If the [Matrix Mixer 64 input 64 output] or the [Matrix Mixer 64 input 32 output] components are placed in the DME64N configuration window, you will not be able to use other components, even though the window does not reach 100 percent. The [Matrix Mixer 64 input 64 output] or [Matrix Mixer 64 input 32 output] components cannot be used in the DME24N. Navigator Window Gives a hierarchical display of the area, zones, and configurations, along with the DME devices, user modules and components arranged within the configurations. This allows you to check the overall status of your setup. When doing offline editing, you can click the icon or name for an area, zone, configuration, DME device, user module, or component to make each design window active. NOTE For user modules with security enabled, a password is requested when displaying the hierarchical display shown below. Area Zones Configuration DME Devices User Module Components included in the User Module Components ■ [+]/[-] The subordinate items are displayed or hidden using the [+]/[-] buttons to the left of the area, zones, configurations, user modules, or DME devices. When the subordinate items are displayed, the button changes to [-]. If you click this button, the subordinate items will be hidden. When the subordinate items are hidden, the button changes to [+]. If you click this button, the subordinate items will be displayed. Subordinate items are also displayed and the button changes to [-] when you click on an area, zone, configuration, user module, or DME device. 140 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer ■ Area If you click the area while doing offline editing, the Area window becomes active. ■ Zone If you click a zone while doing offline editing, the Zone window becomes active. If another Zone window is open, it will be closed. NOTE When there are multiple configurations in a zone, click a configuration to switch configurations, not the zone. ■ Configuration If you click a configuration while doing offline editing, the Zone window for the clicked configuration becomes active. If another Zone window is open, it will be closed. ■ DME Device If you click a DME, a Configuration window will be opened for that unit. If that window is already open, it will be displayed on top of any other windows. ■ Component Click a component and the component editor will open. ■ User Module The window specified by “User Module Properties [Double Click Action]” will open when clicked. ■ Components Included in the User Module Click a component in the user module and the component editor will be displayed. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 141 Chapter 4 Designer Four Design Windows The following design windows are available: the Area window, Zone window, Configuration window, and User Module window. In each window there is a single sheet on which objects can be arranged. Within the Designer window, you can simultaneously open and edit in the Area window, Zone Window, Configuration window, and User Module window. Configuration Structure and Four Design Windows Area Window Zone Window Configuration Window Component Editor User Module Window ■ Area Window Used to design areas. → See “Area Window” on page 235. ■ Zone Window Used to design zone configurations. → See “Zone Window” on page 237. ■ Configuration Window Used to design configurations for DME units arranged in a zone. → See “Configuration Window” on page 242. ■ User Module Window Used to design user modules configurations. A module that combines a number of other components, yet is treated as a single component, is called a “user module.” It is arranged in the Configuration window. → See “User Module Window” on page 257. 142 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Toolkit Window The Toolkit displays objects that can be arranged in each design window. The displayed contents vary according to which window is active. → See “Toolkit Window” on page 152. Displayed in the designer window Floating-style DME Designer Owner’s Manual 143 Chapter 4 Designer Designer Window Menu [Print] Menu This menu provides commands for exporting configurations and printing windows. ■ [Export DXF] Exports the information in the active window and saves it as a DXF file, which is compatible with CAD software sold by other companies. → “Exporting the Design Window” in “Design Window Shared Settings and Operations” (page 211) ■ [Print Setup] When you select this command, the “Print Setup” dialog box will be displayed. Sets the paper size and orientation. → “Printing Each Design Window” in “Design Window Shared Settings and Operations” (page 214) ■ [Print Preview] Displays a print preview of the active design window. → “Printing Each Design Window” in “Design Window Shared Settings and Operations” (page 214) ■ [Print] Prints the active window. When you select this command, the “Print” dialog box will be displayed. → “Printing Each Design Window” in “Design Window Shared Settings and Operations” (page 214) ■ [Preferences] Displays the “Preferences” dialog box. Sets the line thickness and the design window edit operations. → “Preferences” in “Design Window Shared Settings and Operations” (page 207) 144 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer [Edit] Menu This menu provides edit commands. ■ [Undo] Undoes the most recent edit operation. Repeatedly clicking this button will delete multiple operations. When [Undo] is not possible, the command will be grayed out. ■ [Redo] Returns to the status before the [Undo] command was executed. If you repeatedly click this button, it will redo multiple operations. If redo is not possible, the command will be grayed out. ■ [Cut] Cuts the selected object. Moves the selected object to the clipboard. ■ [Copy] Copies the selected object to the clipboard. The selected object remains as is. ■ [Paste] This command pastes the object on the clipboard into the active window. If there is no data on the clipboard or if the object on the clipboard is not a type that can be pasted into the active window, this command cannot be used. ■ [Delete] Deletes the selected object. The data on the clipboard does not change. NOTE There are some objects that cannot be deleted with the [Delete] command. ■ [Select All] Selects all objects in the active design window. ■ [Duplicate] Duplicates the selected object. The data on the clipboard does not change. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 145 Chapter 4 Designer ■ [Display Order] Changes the display order (in front or behind) of the selected objects. → “Changing the Order” in “Design Window Shared Settings and Operations” (page 218) ■ [Edit Legend] This command can be selected when an Area window, Zone window, or Configuration window is active. It lets you edit the descriptive text (legend) displayed on the sheet in the Area window, Zone window, or Configuration window. When this command is selected, the “Edit Legend” dialog box will be displayed. → “Legend (Descriptive Fields)” in “Objects” (page 198) ■ [Properties] Opens the “Properties” dialog box for the selected objects. → See “Object Types” on page 156. 146 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer [View] Menu Displays or hides the windows. ■ [Toolbar] Displays or hides the toolbar. A checkmark appears beside this menu item when the toolbar is displayed. ■ [Status Bar] Displays or hides the status bar. A checkmark appears beside this menu item when the status bar is displayed. ■ [Area]/[Toolkit]/[Resource Meter]/[Navigator] Displays or hides the Area window, Toolkit, Resource Meter, or Navigator window. A checkmark appears to the left of the command name when a window is displayed. The Resource Meter window is displayed only when the Configuration window and User Module window are active. ■ [Full Screen] Displays in full-screen mode. Displays the active design window (Area, Zone, Configuration, or User Module window) exclusively, with it covering the entire screen. A context menu appears wherever you right-click on the screen, containing the commands that are needed at that location. To return from the full-screen mode to the original display status, press the <Esc> key. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 147 Chapter 4 Designer ■ [Port Long Name] Switches the port name display. When you select this command, a checkmark appears next to it and long names are displayed. If you select this command when a checkmark is next to it, the checkmark disappears and short names are displayed. Long name Short name ■ [Zoom In] Gives a closer view of an area displayed on the screen. ■ [Zoom Out] Widens the area displayed on the screen. ■ [Zoom To] Selects the display magnification from a submenu. ■ [Actual Size] Returns the display to normal dimensions. ■ [Fit in Window] Increases or decreases the display magnification so that the sheet exactly fits the current window. The entire sheet will be visible. 148 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer [Tools] Menu ■ [Area Parts List] This command can be used only when the Area window is active. A submenu displays the same objects that are in the Toolkit window displayed while the Area window is active. Clicking an object on the submenu, then clicking the Area window, places that object in the Area window. → [Area Parts List] in “Toolkit Window” (page 153) ■ [Device List] This command can be used only when the Zone window is active. A submenu here displays the same objects as the Toolkit window. Clicking an object on the submenu, then clicking the Zone window, places that object in the Zone window. → [Zone Device List] in “Toolkit Window” (page 154) ■ [Component List] This command can be used only when a Configuration window or User Module window is active. A submenu here displays the same objects as the Toolkit window. Clicking an object on the submenu, then clicking the Configuration/User Module window, places the object in that window. → “Component List (Configuration Window)” in “Toolkit Window” (page 154), “Component List (User Module Window)” in “Toolkit Window” (page 155) ■ [Zone] Displays the “Zone” dialog box. Here you can add, delete, or rename a zone. → See “Adding, Deleting, and Renaming a Zone” on page 231. ■ [Configuration] Displays the “Configuration” dialog box. Here you can add, delete, or rename a configuration. → See “Adding, Deleting, and Renaming a Configuration” on page 233. ■ [Save User Module] This command can be used only when a User Module is selected in the Configuration window. Saves the selected user module. → “User Module Manager” Dialog Box in “User Modules” (page 255) DME Designer Owner’s Manual 149 Chapter 4 Designer ■ [User Module Manager] Displays the “User Module Manager” dialog box. Here you rename or delete user modules. → “User Module Manager” Dialog Box in “User Modules” (page 250) ■ [Show Signal Delay] The digital signal delay value is displayed in the configuration window with sample units. → "Show Signal Delay (Delay Display Value)" in "Configuration Window" (page 246) ■ [Analyze] Displays the “Analyze” dialog box, and analyzes the configuration. → "Analyze (Configuration Analysis)" in "Configuration Window" (page 249) ■ [Probe Monitor] Turns the probe monitor ON or OFF. This command can be selected only when a Configuration window or User Module window is active while in online status. → “Probe Monitor” in “Configuration Window” (page 244) ■ [Monitoring Point List] Opens the “Monitoring Point List” dialog box. Registers points for monitoring with headphones. → "Monitoring Point List" in "Configuration Window" (page 247) ■ [Edit Mode] Turns the edit mode ON or OFF. → “Edit Mode” in “Editing Configurations” (page 136) NOTE Only users for whom the [Operation Security] → [Edit] checkbox in the “Security” dialog box has been checked can select this command. ■ [Sheet] Opens the “Sheet” dialog box. Sets the sheet size and background. → “Sheet” in “Objects” (page 200) ■ [Prohibit Diagonal Connections] Allows you to draw horizontal and vertical wires only. Diagonal wires cannot be drawn. → “Drawing Settings” in “Drawing and Editing Wires” (page 223) ■ [Grid] Opens the “Grid” dialog box. Displays or hides the grid and sets the grid spacing. → “Grid” in “Design Window Shared Settings and Operations” (page 210) 150 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer [Window] Menu Arranges multiple windows. The lower part of the menu displays the names of currently open windows. A checkmark appears next to the active window. When you click the name of a window, that window becomes active. ■ [Cascade] Displays the windows overlapping one another. ■ [Tile] Displays the windows arranged side-by-side. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 151 Chapter 4 Designer Toolkit Window Displaying the Toolkit Window You can display or hide the Toolkit window using the [Toolkit] command on the [View] menu. The Toolkit displays objects that can be arranged in each design window. You can arrange objects in each design window by dragging them from the Toolkit window or by double-clicking them in the Toolkit window. The objects are categorized by type and displayed here in a hierarchy. You can use the [+]/[-] buttons to display or hide items below a particular level in the window. Click the [+] button to display the items on the next level down, and the [-] button to hide them. Moving the Toolkit Window You can move the Toolkit window by dragging it. If you drag the window to right or left side, it will remain fixed. If you drag it to other locations, it will float independently. When DME Designer is started, the Toolkit window is displayed at the left side of the Designer window. 152 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Toolkit Window Types The contents of the Toolkit window will vary, depending on which window is active. Active Design Window Toolkit Window Area Window Area Parts List Zone Window Device List Configuration Window Component List User Module Window Component List The following objects are displayed in each window: Component List (Configuration Window) Component List (User Module Window) Component ✔ ✔ SPX Component ✔ ✔ User Module ✔ Area Parts List Device List DME ✔ ICP ✔ External Device ✔ ✔ Pictures ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Text ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Boxes ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Ellipses ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ [Area Parts List] The [Area Parts List] displays objects that can be arranged in the Area window. The same objects are displayed in the [Area Parts List] submenu on the [Tools] menu or on the context menu that appears when you right-click on the sheet. NOTE You can create multiple zones in an area. They are added using the menu bar [Tool] menu → “Zone” dialog box. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 153 Chapter 4 Designer [Device List] The Device list displays objects that can be arranged in a Zone window (configuration). The same objects are displayed in the [Device List] submenu on the [Tools] menu or on the context menu that appears when you right-click on the sheet. [Tools] menu Toolkit window [Device List] submenu on the [Tools] menu or on the context menu NOTE Configurations are added using the menu bar [Tool] menu → “Configuration” dialog box. [Component List] (Configuration Window) The Component List displays objects that can be arranged in Configuration windows. The same objects are displayed in the [Component List] submenu on the [Tools] menu or on the context menu that appears when you right-click on the sheet. [Tools] menu Toolkit window 154 DME Designer Owner’s Manual [Component List] submenu on the [Tools] menu or on the context menu Chapter 4 Designer [Component List] (User Module Window) The Component List displays objects that can be arranged in the User Module window. The same objects are displayed in the [Component List] submenu on the [Tools] menu or on the context menu that appears when you right-click on the sheet. [Tools] menu Toolkit window [Component List] submenu on the [Tools] menu or on the context menu DME Designer Owner’s Manual 155 Chapter 4 Designer Objects Object Types The devices, shapes, and wires that can be arranged in each design window are called “Objects.” The following objects are available: Name Window Where It can be Placed/Displayed Explanation Zone Area Zones DME Zones DME and any cards inserted into its slots ICP Zones User defined parameter control External Device Zones External Device Component Configuration User Module User Module, Audio processor, Control parts SPX Component Configuration User Module SPX components User Module Configuration Combination of components Slot Component Configuration Cards inserted into DME slot Pictures All Image Text All Text box Boxes All Box shape Ellipses All Circular shape Wires All Connecting wire, straight line shape Legend All Zones Configuration An area displayed on the sheet where descriptive information is presented. Sheet -- One sheet per design window. Various design elements, such as name, color and size, can be set in the “Properties” dialog box for each object. Size is set using the [Width] and [Height] boxes in the “Properties” dialog box. The maximum size values that can be set may vary according to the sheet size and object position. You can set a size that allows the object to fit in the sheet. 156 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Zone There must be at least one zone in the Area window. Zones are added and deleted using the “Zone” dialog box. Zones are not displayed in the Toolkit window or in the [Area Parts List] submenu in the [Tools] Menu If you right-click on the name of a zone object located in the Area window, a context menu will be displayed. ■ Zone Context Menu [Open] Opens the Configuration window. [Display Order] Changes the display order of the objects, according to a command in the submenu. [Properties] Displays the “Area Properties” dialog box. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 157 Chapter 4 Designer ■ Zone Object Properties When you select a zone in the Area window, then click the [Properties] command on the [Edit] menu, the “Area Properties” dialog box is displayed. Here you can set properties for zone objects. The [Properties] command is also located on the context menu for zone objects. [Text] Box You can enter up to 100 English characters for the object name. The object name is displayed in the rectangular box for the object. If there is a large number of characters and the object’s shape is too narrow, all characters might not be displayed. [Font] Button Clicking here displays the “Select Font” dialog box. This sets the font used to display the object name. For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see page 202. [Color] Button Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. This sets the color of the object name text. For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203. Text Position Sets the location of the text. The list to the left sets the vertical position of the text. The list to the right sets the horizontal position. • Vertical Position Select [Top], [Center], or [Bottom]. • Horizontal Position Select [Left], [Center], or [Right]. [Width] Box Specifies the width of the object in pixels. The default is 50 pixels. [Height] Box Specifies the height of the object in pixels. The default is 50 pixels. 158 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer [Style] Sets the style of the object. From the list, select [Plain], [Raised], or [Sunken]. Raised Sunken Background Image Sets background effects for the object. • [Color] Button Sets the color. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203. • [Image] Button Displays an image inside the object. You can use image files in the following formats: BMP (.bmp), PNG (.png), XPM (.xpm), and JPEG (.jpg). Clicking here displays the “Select Image” dialog box. Specify an image file and set its display method. For information about the “Select Image” dialog box, see page 205. [OK] Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box. [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 159 Chapter 4 Designer DME DMEs are arranged in the Zone window. If DME properties settings have been made for an expansion card installed in one of the DME slots, the card will be displayed automatically. DME24N DME24N with no I/O card installed. DME24N with an I/O card installed in its expansion slot. DME64N DME64N with no I/O cards connected in slots. DME64N with I/O cards installed in expansion slots 1, 2, and 4. 160 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer When I/O Cards Are Installed in DME Expansion Slots When an I/O card is selected for an expansion slot in the DME properties, an I/O port is added for the DME arranged in the Zone window. An I/O component block will be added to the configuration window. If [None] is selected for I/O cards in the DME properties, any I/O component blocks will also be deleted automatically from the Configuration window. (Even if the I/O components are deleted, the wiring will remain.) DME64N block with card inserted in a slot and the Configuration window When the DME64N Cascade Setting is Turned ON When [Show Cascade Port] is checked in the DME64N “DME Device Properties” dialog box, the cascade I/O components will be displayed in the Configuration window. If “Show Cascade Port” is turned OFF in the DME64N “DME Device Properties” dialog box, cascade I/O components will also be deleted automatically in the Configuration window. (Even if the Cascade I/O components are deleted, the wiring will remain.) DME Designer Owner’s Manual 161 Chapter 4 Designer CobraNet Card If the I/O card is a CobraNet card, a CobraNet icon will be displayed in the DME object. DME block with CobraNet card inserted ■ Object Selection To open a configuration window for a DME object arranged in the Zone window, first select it by clicking on it, then double-click on it. If you right-click on the object, a context menu will be displayed. 162 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer ■ DME Object Context Menu [Open Configuration Window] Opens the Configuration window. [Cut] Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard. [Copy] Copies the selected object to the clipboard. [Paste] Pastes the DME device that is on the clipboard. [Delete] Deletes the object you clicked on. [Duplicate] Duplicates the object you clicked on. [Display Order] Changes the display order of the objects, according to a command in the submenu. [Flash Unit LEDs] When selected the DME front panel will flash, and will continue flashing until selected a second time. [Output Level] When you select this command, the “Output Level” dialog box will be displayed. This sets the DME master volume. [Properties] Displays the “DME Device Properties” dialog box. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 163 Chapter 4 Designer ■ DME Properties To display the “DME Device Properties” dialog box, select a DME object, then click the [Properties] command on the [Edit] menu. Here you can set DME properties. DME24N DME64N [Label] Box You can enter up to 100 English characters to display over the object. NOTE The name set in the [Label] box will be displayed on the list in the Toolkit window, [Import]/[Export] menu commands, and on the list in the dialog box. If there are multiple examples of the same DME, set different names for each so that you can distinguish one from the other. [Width] Box Specifies the width of the object in pixels. [Height] Box Specifies the height of the object in pixels. [Style] Sets the style of the object. From the list, select [Plain], [Raised], or [Sunken]. [Label Font] Button Sets the font for the label. Clicking here displays the “Select Font” dialog box. For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see page 202. [Label Color] Button This sets the color of the label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. [Port Label Color] Button Sets the color for the I/O port label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. [Color] Button Sets the color of the object. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. NOTE For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203. 164 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Analog I/O Sets the label for the DME24N I/O port. When you click the [Edit I/O Port Label] button, the “Edit Port Label” dialog box is displayed. Cascade Turns the DME 64N cascade ON or OFF. • Show Cascade Port Checking this enables cascade. • Cascade Setting Here you can make settings that apply when cascade is enabled. Clicking here displays the “Cascade Setting” dialog box. I/O Card Settings for the [Slot1] ~ [Slot4] I/O cards. [Slot1] only can be set for DME24N. • [Select I/O Card] Specifies the type of I/O card. • [Card Label] I/O card names having up to 100 characters can be entered here. • [Edit SlotN I/O Port Label] Button Specifies an I/O port label for each slot. Clicking here displays the “Edit Port Label” dialog box. Port Style On Zone Window Specifies how the DME ports appear in the zone window. • [Audio Port (Classic Style)] Displays all audio ports. • [Custom Port Style] Customizes the port display. [Left] Sets the number of ports to be displayed on the left. [Right] Sets the number of ports to be displayed to the right. • [Edit Port Label and Type] Sets the label and type for each port. Click to display the [Edit Port Label] dialog. [OK] Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box. [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 165 Chapter 4 Designer ■ “Cascade Setting” Dialog Box Clicking the [Cascade Setting] button displays the “Cascade Setting” dialog box. Here you can display DME64E cascade connections and make settings related to them. These settings are common to the cascaded DMEs in the same zone. Unit No. (Cascade Connection Number) All DME units other than the first unit (default “1”) are assigned automatically, and are grayed out after connection indicating that the settings cannot be changed. Head Margin Here you can display and set the head margin for the Cascade connection audio signal. Select [0 db] or [-18 db]. All DME Unit No. settings for DME units other than the first unit will be automatically set to the same value as the first unit when connected. These settings are grayed out after connection indicating that they cannot be changed. Mixer I/O Channel Here you can display and set the channel used for audio input/output to a mixer. If the checkbox is turned ON, the channel for the Cascade connection with the mixer is set. If turned OFF, the channel for connecting with the DME is set. [Check All] Button Checks all checkboxes. [Clear All] Button Clears all checkboxes. [OK] Button Updates the settings and closes the dialog box. [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. 166 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer ■ “Edit Port Label” Dialog Box When you click the [Edit I/O Port Label]/[Edit SlotN I/O Port Label] button, the “Edit Port Label” dialog box is displayed. Here you can set the port labels displayed for components. Enter a [Short Name] and [Long Name] for [Inputs] and [Outputs]. You can enter up to 100 English characters for each name. You can switch between long and short port names displayed in the configuration window with the [Port Long Name] command in the [View] menu. When you select this command, a checkmark appears next to it and long names are displayed. If you select this command while a checkmark is next to it, the checkmark disappears and short names are displayed. When the Port Style On Zone Window [Custom Port Style] is selected, labels specified here will not appear in the Zone Window. Labels specified here are always displayed in the Configuration Window. ■ Edit Port Label and Type Dialog Box The Edit Port Label and Type dialog box will appear when the [Edit Port Label and Type ..] button is clicked. Here you can specify the port labels and types to be displayed in for the components. To set labels enter the [Port Name] for [Left] and [Right]. Each name can be up to 100 characters in length. To set the port type use [Port Type] to select the [Left] and [Right] types. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 167 Chapter 4 Designer ICP You can arrange control panel objects in the Zone window. These can be controlled using user defined parameters. First click on an ICP object arranged in the Zone window to select it, then double-click the object. This opens a “Control Panel Properties” window. If you right-click on the object, a context menu will be displayed. ■ ICP Object Context Menu [Cut] Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard. [Copy] Copies the selected object to the clipboard. [Paste] Pastes the control panel object that is on the clipboard. If the same control panel object exists on the sheet where you are pasting, a new ICP object will be created. [Delete] Deletes the object you clicked on. [Duplicate] Duplicates the object you clicked on. [Display Order] Changes the display order of the objects, according to a command in the submenu. [Properties] Displays the properties dialog box. 168 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer ■ ICP Properties To display the “Control Panel Properties” dialog box, select a ICP object, then click the [Properties] command on the [Edit] menu. [Label] Box You can enter up to 100 text characters to display above the object. Labels for identical ICP objects that exist in other configurations will also be changed. [Width] Box Specifies the object width in pixels. [Height] Box Specifies the object height in pixels. [Style] Sets the object style. Select [Plain], [Raised], or [Sunken] from the list. [Label Font] Button Sets the font for the label. Clicking here displays the “Select Font” dialog box. For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see page 202. [Back Color] Button Sets the object color. Click to display the Select Color dialog box. [Label Color] Button This sets the color of the label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203. [User Defined Lock] Sets whether user defined parameters will be displayed or hidden. Pages with checkmarks will not be displayed. The four [1]/[2]/[3]/[4] tabs in the “User Defined Button” dialog box correspond to the pages on the DME unit main display. Ethernet Port Turns Ethernet port rendering on or off. Ethernet port display will appear when the checkbox is ON. The radio buttons can be used to specify whether the display is on the left or right side. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 169 Chapter 4 Designer [OK] Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box. [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. External Device Arranges external device objects in the Zone window. These objects can be added by plug-in functions. External applications can be linked to the devices arranged in the window. These links to external applications are set using the “External Device Properties” dialog box. To start the application linked to an external device object arranged in the Zone window, first click on the object to select it, then double-click it. If you right-click on the object, a context menu will be displayed. NOTE If no external application is linked to the an object, no application will start when the object is double-clicked. ■ AD824/AD8HR The AD824 is an eight-channel analog-to-digital converter. The AD8HR is an eight-channel analogto-digital converter that features a head amp with high quality sound. You can connect Yamaha AD824 and AD8HR A/D converters to a DME unit and control them remotely from DME Designer. DME Designer has a component editor for controlling [AD824] and [AD8HR] units. If you arrange an [AD824] or [AD8HR] from [External Device] in the Zone window, select the connected DME unit in the properties dialog box, and double-click on an [AD824] or [AD8HR] block, the component editor is displayed. NOTE If a DME is not selected in the properties dialog box, the component editor will not be displayed even if you double-click. 170 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer ■ External Device Object Context Menu [Open Component Editor] Starts the application assigned to the object. For the [AD824] and [AD8HR], it opens the component editor. [Cut] Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard. [Copy] Copies the selected object to the clipboard. [Paste] Pastes the object that is on the clipboard. [Delete] Deletes the object you clicked on. [Duplicate] Duplicates the object you clicked on. [Display Order] Changes the display order of the objects, according to a command in the submenu. [Properties] Displays the “External Device Properties” dialog box. At the lowest position below [External Device], [AD824] and [AD8HR] display the “Serial Controlled Device Properties” dialog box. The other objects display the “External Device Properties” dialog box. ■ External Device Properties To display the “External Device Properties” dialog box, select any external device object besides AD824 or AD8HR, then click the [Properties] command on the [Edit] menu. [Label] Box You can enter up to 100 English characters to display over the object. [Width] Box Specifies the object width in pixels. [Height] Box Specifies the object height in pixels. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 171 Chapter 4 Designer [Style] Sets the object style. Select [Plain], [Raised], or [Sunken] from the list. [Label Font] Button Sets the font for the label. Clicking here displays the “Select Font” dialog box. For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see page 202. [Label Color] Button This sets the color of the label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. [Port Label Color] Button Sets the color of the I/O port label. Click to display the Select Color dialog box. [Back Color] Button Sets the object color. Click to display the Select Color dialog box. NOTE For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203. Launch Application The radio buttons determines whether an application or file will be linked to an external device. • [Application] Box The linked application will be displayed. Click the [Browse] button to locate and select an application. Specifies the path to an application to be launched when an External Device object is double-clicked. • [File] Box The linked file will be displayed. Click the [Browse] button to locate and select a file. Specifies the path to a file to be launched when an External Device object is double-clicked. Port Specifies the number of ports displayed for an External Device object. • [Left] Sets the number of ports to be displayed on the left. • [Right] Sets the number of ports to be displayed to the right. • [Edit Port Label] Button Sets the label and type for each port. Click to display the [Edit Port Label] dialog. [OK] Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box. [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. 172 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer ■ External Device Properties (AD824, AD8HR “Serial Controlled Device Properties” Dialog Box) To display the “Serial Controlled Device Properties” dialog box, select AD824 or AD8HR, then click the [Properties] command on the [Edit] menu. This dialog box is the same as the “External Device Properties” dialog box, except for [Remote]. Remote Select the DME you will control remotely from AD824 and AD8HR. • [DME Unit] The DMEs in the current configuration will be displayed in a list. Select the DME you will control remotely. • [ID] Selects an ID from 1 to 8. The default is 1. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 173 Chapter 4 Designer Component Components are arranged in the Configuration window and the User Module window. They include audio processors like mixers and compressors, and control parts like switches and sliders. They can be added by plug-in functions. Component objects arranged in a configuration are displayed in block form. To open the component editor for an arranged component, first select it by clicking on it, then doubleclick on it. If you right-click on the object, a context menu will be displayed. Label ID Input Port Output Port Amount of DSP memory used in the DME ■ Component Object Context Menu [Open Component Editor] Opens the component editor. [Cut] Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard. [Copy] Copies the selected object to the clipboard. [Paste] Pastes the object that is on the clipboard. [Delete] Deletes the object you clicked on. [Duplicate] Duplicates the object you clicked on. [Display Order] Changes the display order of the objects, according to a command in the submenu. [Recall Component Library] Recalls libraries with component parameters saved in them. Clicking here displays the submenu. When a library is selected from the submenu, the library is read and the component parameters are changed. For more information about libraries, see “Library” (page 275). [Store Component Library] Saves the component parameters. Click to display the Store dialog. If you then save without changing the folder, the parameters will be added to the library. Refer to “Library” on page 275 for more information. [Properties] Displays the “Component Properties” dialog box. 174 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer NOTE Libraries can be recalled only by users for whom [Control Component Editor] in security is turned ON. The command is grayed out for users for whom [Control Component Editor] is turned OFF. ■ Component Properties Here you can set properties for each component. If multiple examples of the same component type are arranged on a single sheet, changing the properties of a single component does not change the others. To display the “Component Properties” dialog box, select a component object, then click the [Properties] command on the [Edit] menu. [Label] Box You can enter up to 100 English characters to display over the object. [Width] Box Specifies the width of the object in pixels. [Height] Box Specifies the height of the object in pixels. [Style] Sets the style of the object. From the list, select [Plain], [Raised], or [Sunken]. [Label Font] Button Sets the font for the label. Clicking here displays the “Select Font” dialog box. For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see page 202. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 175 Chapter 4 Designer [Label Color] Button This sets the color of the label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. [Inputs/Outputs Label Color] Button Sets the color for the I/O port label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. [Color] Button Sets the color of the object. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. NOTE For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203. [OK] Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box. [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. 176 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer SPX Component SPX components are arranged in the Configuration window and the User Module window. Component objects arranged in a configuration are displayed in block form. Clicking on a positioned SPX component will select it, and right-clicking will display a contextual menu. Unlike normal components, SPX components use SPX-specific resources and therefore the usage percentage display that appears to the lower right of normal components will not appear. Check the SPX resource usage percentage via the SPX meter in the Resource Meter window. ■ Context Menu for SPX Component Objects [Cut] Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard. [Copy] Copies the selected object to the clipboard. [Paste] Pastes the object that is on the clipboard. [Delete] Deletes the object you clicked on. [Duplicate] Duplicates the object you clicked on. [Display Order] Changes the display order of the objects, according to a command in the submenu. [Properties] Displays the “SPX Component Properties” dialog box. [Recall Component Library] Recalls libraries with component parameters saved in them. Clicking here displays the submenu. When a library is selected from the submenu, the library is read and the component parameters are changed. For more information about libraries, see “Library” (page 275). When you will change the effect type for the SPX component, select the desired type from the [Effect Type] displayed in the submenu. NOTE Libraries can be recalled only by users for whom [Control Component Editor] in security is turned ON. The command is grayed out for users for whom [Control Component Editor] is turned OFF. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 177 Chapter 4 Designer ■ SPX Component Properties SPX component properties are set for each component. If multiple examples of the same component type are arranged on a single sheet, changing the properties of a single component does not change the others. To display the “SPX Component Properties” dialog box, select a component object, then click the [Properties] command on the [Edit] menu. [Label] Box You can enter up to 100 characters to display over the object. [Width] Box Specifies the width of the object in pixels. [Height] Box Specifies the height of the object in pixels. [Style] Sets the style of the object. From the list, select [Plain], [Raised], or [Sunken]. [Label Font] button Sets the font for the label. Clicking here displays the “Select Font” dialog box. For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see “Select Font” dialog box (page 202). [Label Color] Button Sets the color for the label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. [Inputs/Outputs Label Color] Button Sets the color for the I/O port label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. [Color] Button Sets the color of the object. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. NOTE For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see “'Select Color' Dialog Box” (page 203). [OK] Button Updates the settings and closes the dialog box. [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. 178 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Slot Component If an inserted I/O card is selected in the DME properties settings, it will be displayed in the Configuration window as a Slot component. Slot component objects arranged in a configuration are displayed in block form. If you select an arranged component by clicking on it, then double-click it, the Slot Out component editor opens. If you right click on the object, a context menu will be displayed. ■ Slot Component Object Context Menu [Open MY-Card Editor] Opens the editor for an MY-Card inserted in a slot. [Open Slot Out Component Editor] Opens the Slot Out component editor. [Cut]/[Copy]/[Paste]/[Delete]/[Duplicate] The functions cannot be used with Slot components. [Display Order] Changes the display order of the objects, according to a command in the submenu. [Properties] Displays the “Slot Out Component Properties” dialog box. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 179 Chapter 4 Designer ■ Slot Out Component Properties To display the “Slo tOut Component Properties” dialog box, select a Slot Out component object, then click the [Properties] command on the [Edit] menu. [Label] Box You can enter up to 100 characters to display over the object. [Width] Box Specifies the width of the object in pixels. [Height] Box Specifies the height of the object in pixels. [Style] Sets the style of the object. From the list, select [Plain], [Raised], or [Sunken]. [Label Font] button Sets the font for the label. Clicking here displays the “Select Font” dialog box. For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see “'Select Font' Dialog Box” (page 202). [Label Color] Button This sets the color of the label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. [Inputs/Outputs Label Color] Button Sets the color for the I/O port label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. [Color] Button Sets the color of the object. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. NOTE For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see “'Select Color' Dialog Box” (page 203). [OK] Button Updates the settings and closes the dialog box. [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. 180 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer User Module A user module combines a number of other components into a module that is treated as a single component. It can be arranged in the Configuration window. A user object arranged in a window is displayed as a single block. The User Module Design Window or User Module Window will open, according to the “User Module Manager” setting when you double click the user module (page 250). If you right-click on the object, a context menu will be displayed. ■ User Module Object Context Menu [Open User Module Design Window] Opens the User Module Design Window. [Open User Module Editor] Opens the User Module Editor. [Cut] Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard. [Copy] Copies the selected object to the clipboard. [Paste] Pastes the object that is on the clipboard. [Delete] Deletes the object you clicked on. [Duplicate] Duplicates the object you clicked on. [Display Order] Changes the display order of the objects, according to a command in the submenu. [Recall Component Library] Recalls a library into which component parameters have been saved. Click to display a sub-menu. Select a library from the sub-menu to load the parameters into the component. Refer to “Library” on page 275 for more information. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 181 Chapter 4 Designer [Store Component Library] Saves the component parameters. Click to display the Store dialog. If you then save without changing the folder, the parameters will be added to the library. Refer to “Library” on page 275 for more information. [Save User Module] Saves the selected user module. See “Saving User Modules” on page 255. [Properties] Displays the “User Module Properties” dialog box. NOTE Libraries can be recalled only by users for whom [Control Component Editor] in security is turned ON. The command is grayed out for users for whom [Control Component Editor] is turned OFF. The submenu displays library files saved in the “Library” folder for user modules. • [Open File Dialog] Displays the file select dialog box. You can recall libraries saved in folders other than the user module “Library” folder. ■ User Module Properties To display the “User Module Properties” dialog box, select a user module object, then click the [Properties] command on the [Edit] menu. NOTE The “User Module Properties” dialog box is also displayed when a [Blank User Module] is arranged in the configuration window. 182 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer [Label] Box You can enter up to 100 English characters to display over the object. [Width] Box Specifies the width of the object in pixels. [Height] Box Specifies the height of the object in pixels. [Style] Sets the style of the object. From the list, select [Plain], [Raised], [Sunken], or [Image]. When [Image] is selected the Open dialog will appear. Select an image file and click [Open] to place the selected image as an object. [Label Font] Button Sets the font for the label. Clicking here displays the “Select Font” dialog box. For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see page 202. [Label Color] Button This sets the color of the label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. [Inputs/Outputs Labels Color] Button Sets the color for the I/O port label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. [Color] Button Sets the color of the object. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. NOTE For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203. Inputs/Outputs Sets Sets the number of input/output ports. Enter a number into the [Inputs] box and [Outputs] box, or set a value using the [▲] and [▼] buttons at the right of each box. The maximum of both input and output ports is 64. Edit I/O Port Label Input and output port names up to 100 characters in length can be entered. Double-Click Action Sets the action that occurs when you double-click on a user module object arranged in the Configuration window. • [Open User Module Design Window] Opens the User Module window. • [Open User Module Editor] Opens the User Module editor. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 183 Chapter 4 Designer Security Settings Turns user module security ON or OFF, and sets a password. • [Enable Security] Enables user module security. If you turn this function ON when no password is currently set, the “Set Password” dialog box appears. Enter a password, then click the [OK] button. If you change the setting from OFF to ON, the “Input Password” dialog box appears. You cannot turn Security OFF until you enter the correct password. NOTE When security is active the editor cannot be opened unless the appropriate password is entered. Once the password has been entered security is temporarily disabled until the DME Designer is quit, or a different file is opened. • [Set Password] Button Changes the password for user modules. Clicking this button displays the “Input Password” dialog box. Enter the current password and click the [OK] button. The “Set Password” dialog box will be displayed, and you can set a new password. This button will be grayed out when [Enable Security] is turned OFF. [OK] Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box. [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. 184 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Picture An image can be arranged as an object on a sheet. This specifies a file for this purpose. You can use image files in the following formats: BMP (.bmp), PNG (.png), XBM (.xbm), XPM (.xpm), and JPEG (.jpg). Before placing a picture object, prepare an image file. Copy the image file to the folder specified in the “Preferences” dialog box → [Application] tab → [ContentsFolder] in the Main Panel window. In the project file, the location and name of the image file are registered in an relative path below the [ContentsFolder] and the linked image file is read and displayed. If the image file is moved, renamed, or the [ContentsFolder] is changed, the image cannot be displayed. NOTE The default for the “Preferences” dialog box → [Application] tab → [ContentsFolder] in the Main Panel window is “C:\Program Files\YAMAHA\OPT Tools\DME Designer.” The [Designer] folder is located in the [DME Designer] folder. Within that folder, there is an [Images] folder prepared for saving image files. NOTE Background images for sheets are specified in the “Sheet” dialog box. Pictures are arranged as objects on the sheets. ■ Placing Pictures There are three picture placement methods: • You can drop the [Picture] item from the Toolkit window into each design window. • You can double-click [Picture] on the Toolkit window. • You can click [Picture] in the [Area Parts]/[Device List]/[Component List] on the [Tools] menu, then click each design window. When you place a picture object, the “Open” dialog box is displayed. Select the image file and click the [Open] button. The picture will be placed in the design window. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 185 Chapter 4 Designer ■ Picture Object When you click a picture object that is located in each design window, handles (small squares) appear at the corners and sides of the object. You can expand or reduce the picture’s size by dragging a handle. If you double-click on the object, the “Open” dialog opens. There you can change the image file. If you right-click on a picture object, a context menu will be displayed. ■ Picture Module Object Context Menu [Cut] Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard. [Copy] Copies the selected object to the clipboard. [Paste] Pastes the object that is on the clipboard. [Delete] Deletes the object you clicked on. [Duplicate] Duplicates the object you clicked on. [Display Order] Changes the display order of the objects, according to a command in the submenu. [Properties] Displays the “Picture Properties” dialog box. 186 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer ■ Picture Object Properties To display the “Picture Properties” dialog box, select a picture object, then click the [Properties] command on the [Edit] menu. [Label] Box You can enter up to 100 English characters to display over the object. If the box is left blank, the label will disappear. [Draw Picture Border] Displays a border around picture objects. [Label Font] Button Sets the font for the label. Clicking here displays the “Select Font” dialog box. For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see page 202. [Label Color] Button This sets the color of the label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203. [Port Label Color] Button Sets the color of the I/O port label. Click to display the Select Color dialog box. [File Name] Box Displays the path to the graphic file. [Browse] Button Selects a graphic file. [Link Component Editor] When On a Picture object can be double clicked to open the component editor specified by the [Select Component] button. [Select Component] Button Specifies the component editor to be opened when a Picture object is double clicked. Only effective when [Link Component editor] is On. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 187 Chapter 4 Designer Port Specifies the number of ports to be displayed for a picture object. • [Left] Sets the number of ports to be displayed on the left. • [Right] Sets the number of ports to be displayed to the right. • [Edit Port Label] Button Sets the label and type for each port. Click to display the [Edit Port Label] dialog. [OK] Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box. [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. 188 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Text Box Text objects can be arranged in all design windows. Text is entered into the “Text Properties” dialog box. When first placed in the design window, the word “Text” is entered into the box. If you click the text object, handles (small squares) appear at the corners and sides of the object. You can adjust the size by dragging the handles. You can open the “Text Properties” dialog box by doubleclicking the box. If you right-click on the object, a context menu will be displayed. ■ Text Object Context Menu [Cut] Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard. [Copy] Copies the selected object to the clipboard. [Paste] Pastes the object that is on the clipboard. [Delete] Deletes the object you clicked on. [Duplicate] Duplicates the object you clicked on. [Display Order] Changes the display order of the objects, according to a command in the submenu. [Properties] Displays the “Text Properties” dialog box. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 189 Chapter 4 Designer ■ Text Object Properties To display the “Text Properties” dialog box, double-click on a text object, or select a text object, then click the [Properties] command on the [Edit] menu. [Text] Box You can enter up to 10,000 English characters to display in the text object box. [Text Font] Button Sets the font. Clicking here displays the “Select Font” dialog box. For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see page 202. [Text Color] Button Sets the color of the text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. [Background Color] Button Sets the color of the background. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. NOTE For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203. [Draw Text Border] Displays a frame around the text object. If this is not checked, only the text will be displayed on the sheet. [Text Border Style] Box Sets the style of the object. From the list, select [Plain], [Raised], or [Sunken]. [Link Component Editor] When On a Text object can be double clicked to open the component editor specified by the [Select Component] button. [Select Component] Button Specifies the component editor to be opened when a Text object is double clicked. Only effective when [Link Component editor] is On. [OK] Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box. [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. 190 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Box (Rectangle) You can arrange rectangles on the sheet. If you click the box, handles (small squares) appear at the corners and sides of the object. You can adjust the size by dragging the handles. You can open the “Box Properties” dialog box by doubleclicking the box. If you right-click on the object, a context menu will be displayed. ■ Box Object Context Menu [Cut] Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard. [Copy] Copies the selected object to the clipboard. [Paste] Pastes the object that is on the clipboard. [Delete] Deletes the object you clicked on. [Duplicate] Duplicates the object you clicked on. [Display Order] Changes the display order of the objects, according to a command in the submenu. [Properties] Displays the “Box Properties” dialog box. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 191 Chapter 4 Designer ■ Box Object Properties To display the “Box Properties” dialog box, double-click on a box object or select a box object, then click the [Properties] command on the [Edit] menu. [Width] Box Specifies the width of the object in pixels. The default is 50 pixels. [Height] Box Specifies the height of the object in pixels. The default is 50 pixels. [Style] Sets the style of the object. From the list, select [Plain], [Raised], or [Sunken]. [Round Corner] Creates a rectangular box with rounded corners. [Color] Button Sets the color of the box. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203. Line Sets the line that frames the box. • [Type] Displays a list where you can select the type of line to frame the box. The following types are available: [Solid], [Dash], [Dot], [DashDot], and [DashDotDot]. • [Size] Box Sets the width of the line that frames the box. This setting can range from 1 to 100 pixels. • [Color] Button Sets the color of the line that frames the box. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203. [OK] Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box. [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. 192 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Ellipse [Ellipse] in the Toolkit window places a elliptical shape on the sheet. When you click an Ellipse object that is located in the sheet, handles (small squares) appear at the corners and sides of the object. You can adjust the size by dragging the handles. You can open the “Ellipse Properties” dialog box by double-clicking the ellipse. If you right-click on the object, a context menu will be displayed. ■ Ellipse Object Context Menu [Cut] Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard. [Copy] Copies the selected object to the clipboard. [Paste] Pastes the object that is on the clipboard. [Delete] Deletes the object you clicked on. [Duplicate] Duplicates the object you clicked on. [Display Order] Changes the display order of the objects, according to a command in the submenu. [Properties] Displays the “Ellipse Properties” dialog box. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 193 Chapter 4 Designer ■ Ellipse Object Properties To display the “Ellipse Properties” dialog box, double-click on an ellipse object, or select an ellipse object, then click the [Properties] command on the [Edit] menu. [Width] Box Specifies the width of the object in pixels. The default is 50 pixels. [Height] Box Specifies the height of the object in pixels. The default is 50 pixels. [Color] Button Sets the color of the ellipse. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203. Line Sets the line that frames the ellipse. • [Type] Displays a list where you can select the type of line to frame the ellipse. The following types are available: [Solid], [Dash], [Dot], [DashDot], and [DashDotDot]. • [Size] Box Sets the width of the line that frames the ellipse. This setting can range from 1 to 100 pixels. • [Color] Button Sets the color of the line that frames the ellipse. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203. [OK] Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box. [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. 194 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Wire Draws lines (wires) for connecting components and creating shapes. For instructions on drawing wires, see “Drawing and Editing Wires” on page 219. First click on an wire object arranged on the sheet to select it, then double-click the object. This opens a “Wire Properties” window. Node Termination Line Segment If you right-click on a wire object, one of three types of context menus will be displayed, depending where you clicked. ■ Wire Object Context Menu (Line Segment) Line Segment Context Menu [Start Wire] Begins drawing a line segment from the location where you clicked. [Delete Wire] Deletes the entire wire. [Cut] Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard. [Copy] Copies the selected object to the clipboard. [Paste] Pastes the object that is on the clipboard. [Delete] Deletes the line segment where you right-clicked. [Duplicate] Duplicates the wire object. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 195 Chapter 4 Designer [Wire Color] Specifies the wire color. [Properties] Displays the “Wire Properties” dialog box. ■ Wire Object Context Menu (Node) Node Context Menu [Start Wire] Begins drawing a wire segment from the location where you right-clicked. [Delete Wire] Deletes the entire wire. [Delete] Deletes the node. The nodes before and after will become directly connected. [Properties] Displays the “Wire Properties” dialog box. ■ Wire Object Context Menu (Termination) Termination Context Menu [Continue Wire] Begins drawing wire from a termination node. [Start Wire] Begins drawing a wire from the location where you right-clicked. [Delete Wire] Deletes the entire wire. [Properties] Displays the “Wire Properties” dialog box. 196 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer ■ Wire Object Properties To display the “Wire Properties” dialog box, double-click on a wire object. You can also select a wire object, then click the [Properties] command on the [Edit] menu. [Line Width] Box Set the line width. This setting can range from 1 to 10 pixels. [Line Type] Displays a list where you can select the type of line. The following types are available: [Solid], [Dash], [Dot], [DashDot], and [DashDotDot]. [Line Color] Button Sets the color of the line. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. [Selected Color] Button Sets the color of the selected line. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. NOTE For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203. [OK] Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box. [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 197 Chapter 4 Designer Legend (Descriptive Fields) Displays a legend for all sheets except the User Module window. When you click the [Edit Legend] command on the [Edit] menu or double-click on one of the Legend fields displayed on the sheet, the “Edit Legend” dialog box is displayed. If you right-click on the Legend, the displayed context menu will have the [Edit Legend] command only. If you click there it will display the “Edit Legend” dialog box. The “Edit Legend” dialog box is used to enable/disable Legend display and to set the contents displayed there. You can display the [Edit Legend] command from the [Edit] menu. 198 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer ■ “Edit Legend” Dialog Box [Project] Box, [Title] Box, [No.] Box, [Author] Box, [Company] Box, [Address1] Box, and [Address2] Box Used to enter the Project, Title, Number, Author, Company, Address1, and Address2. You can enter up to 100 English characters for each field. [Date] Box and [Revisions] Box You can enter up to five dates and five revisions. You can enter up to 100 English characters for each field. [Legend Base Font Style] Displays a list where you can select the font. [Show Legend] Place a checkmark here to display the legend on the sheet. [Save as Default Legend] Saves this legend as the default legend used when a new sheet is created. When a new configuration is created, it will have a legend with the same contents as this one. [Change for All Legends In Area] Place a checkmark here to have the changes made here reflected in sheets in all design windows included in the area. [OK] Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box. [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 199 Chapter 4 Designer Sheet There is one sheet in each design window for arranging objects. The size of the sheet and its background image are specified with the “Sheet” dialog box. This dialog box is displayed using the [Sheet] command from the [Tools] menu. Make the window where you are going to change sheet settings active, then click [Tools] menu → [Sheet]. ■ “Sheet” Dialog Box [Preset Size] Displays a list where you can select preset paper sizes. When you select a paper size, numerical values are set for [Horizontal] and [Vertical]. [Custom Sizes] Set a custom size by specifying the vertical and horizontal sizes of the sheet. • [Horizontal] Box Sets the horizontal width of the sheet. • [Vertical] Box Sets the vertical height of the sheet. • [Fixed Aspect Ratio] When this is checked the relationship between horizontal and vertical is fixed. When the value for [Horizontal] or [Vertical] changed, the size of the other direction changes so that the proportions of the paper remain the same. • [Save As Default Sheet Size] When turned ON, the current values will become the default for creating sheets. New sheets will be created at the same size. NOTE The upper left is the starting point for measuring sheet size. Therefore, in the [Horizontal] box set the number of pixels to the right edge, and in the [Vertical] box, set the number of pixels to the lower edge. The boundaries in which items are already arranged on the sheet will form the minimum sheet size. Because any objects that are moved, cut, or deleted will return to the same location if the [Undo] command is used, the minimum sheet size will be determined by the boundaries in which any objects were located, now or in the past. 200 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Background Effect Sets the background for the sheet. • [Color] Button Sets the color of the background. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203. • [Image] Button Displays an image as the sheet background. You can use image files in the following formats: BMP (.bmp), PNG (.png), XPM (.xpm), and JPEG (.jpg). Clicking here displays the “Select Image” dialog box. For information about the “Select Image” dialog box, see page 205. • [Change for All Sheets] Changes all sheets so that they are the same. [OK] Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box. [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 201 Chapter 4 Designer “Select Font” Dialog Box When you click the [Font] or [Label Font] button in an object’s properties dialog box, the “Select Font” dialog box is displayed. Sets the font. ■ Font Selects the font. The currently selected font name is displayed in this box. Select a font by clicking its name on the list. ■ Font Style Sets the style of the text. The currently selected style is displayed in the box. Select a style by clicking its name on the list below. • Normal ..........Standard style • Italic ..............Italic or slanted text • Bold ..............Bold text • Bold Italic......Bold italic text ■ Size Sets the text size. The currently selected size is displayed in the box. Select a size by clicking it in the list below. ■ Effects Sets effects for the text. Check the effects you wish to set. • Strikeout........Adds a strikeout line through the center of the text. • Underline ......Adds an underline to the text. ■ Script From the list, select the script (language) for the text. There is no need to change the language setting unless you want to specify a specific language. ■ Sample Displays an example of the current settings. 202 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer “Select Color” Dialog Box When you click the [Color] or [Label Color] button in an object’s properties dialog box, the “Select color” dialog box is displayed. Sets the color of objects and text. ■ Setting Basic Colors There are 48 basic colors provided in the [Basic colors] section. When you select a basic color by clicking on it, the position of that color in the color palette to the right is indicated by a cross (+). Information about the selected color is displayed below the color palette. Click the [OK] button to set the color you selected. ■ Setting Colors That Are Not in the [Basic colors] Section. You can select any color in the color palette displayed at the upper-right of the dialog box by clicking on it in the palette. Color information is displayed below the color palette. If you like the color you selected, click the [OK] button. If you don’t like the color, you can select a new color by clicking in another location in the color palette, or by dragging the cross symbol to another location there. Grey colors can be selected on the tall, thin chart to the right of the palette. Click the [OK] button to set the color you selected. ■ Saving Colors You Have Created In the custom color section, you can save up to 16 colors you have created. When you save a custom color, it can be selected by clicking on its color button, in the same way as for the [Basic colors]. Even if you open the “Select color” dialog box from the Properties of another object, any custom color you save will be displayed and you can use that same color for the other object. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 203 Chapter 4 Designer 1 Click the [Custom colors] box where you will save the color you create. The box you clicked will be selected and a frame will appear around it. 2 Set the color on the color palette. 3 Click the [Add to Custom Colors] button. The selected color will be added to [Custom colors]. NOTE You can save another color in a box that already has an original color saved in it. Just click on the box to select it. The new color will overwrite the previous color, which will be lost. 204 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer “Select Image” Dialog Box You can display an image for the background of sheets or objects. You can use image files in the following formats: BMP (.bmp), PNG (.png), XPM (.xpm), and JPEG (.jpg). In the project file, the location and name of the image file are registered in an relative path below the [ContentsFolder] and the linked image file is read and displayed. If the image file is moved, renamed, or the [ContentsFolder] is changed, the image cannot be displayed. NOTE The default for the “Preferences” dialog box → [Application] tab → [ContentsFolder] in the Main Panel window is “C:\Program Files\YAMAHA\OPT Tools\DME Designer.” The [Designer] folder is located in the [DME Designer] folder. Within that folder, there is an [Images] folder prepared for saving image files. If you click the [Image] button in the properties dialog box for an object that can display a background image or in the “Sheet” dialog box, the “Select Image” dialog box will be displayed. Specify an image file and set its display method. Image Layout Selects the manner in which the image file will be displayed. • [Center] Centers the image in the object or sheet. • [Tile] Displays multiple copies of the image side-by-side until the available space is filled. If the image file is smaller than the sheet, it will be displayed repeatedly like tiles on a wall. • [Fit] Expands or reduces the size of the image to match the size of the sheet where it will be displayed. [File] Box Specifies a path for the image file. A path can be directly entered in the box. You can also click the [Browse] button and select the image file. It will be entered automatically. To stop display of an image, delete all characters in the box, leaving the field blank. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 205 Chapter 4 Designer [Browse] Button Specifies a path for the image file. Clicking here displays the “Open” dialog box. Select a file with one of the following extensions: “.bmp,” “.png,” “.xpm,” or “.jpg,” then click the [Open] button. [OK] Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box. [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. 206 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Design Window Shared Settings and Operations Preferences You can set the operating environment for the Designer window in the “Preferences” dialog box. This dialog box is opened using the [Preferences] command in the Designer window [Print] menu. ■ Graphics Ports & Wires Specifies wire color, thickness, and type for each port type. • [Color] Sets the default color for the port and wire. • [Width] Sets the default wire width from a range of 1 to 5. • [Type] Sets the port type. NOTE The initial color and thickness of the wires produced when drawing connections are specified here. The color and thickness of drawn wires can be changed via the Wire Properties dialog box. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 207 Chapter 4 Designer Crosshairs • [Show Crosshairs While Dragging] Place a checkmark here to have crosshairs displayed for guidance when dragging the wire endpoint. • [Arbitrary Crosshair Length] Specifies the length of the crosshair lines. Enter a number into the [Arbitrary Crosshair Length] box to specify the length in pixels. [Infinite Crosshairs] causes the lines to go all the way to the edge of the window. Offset Paste/Duplicate from Original By Sets the position when pasting or duplicating objects. • [Auto-size (based on original object)] If you place a checkmark here, the paste/duplicate position will be automatically adjusted so that the object does not overlap the original object. • [Horizontal Pixels] Box Sets the horizontal distance. • [Vertical Pixels] Box Sets the vertical distance. Auto Suffix Number Turns automatic appending of sequentially-numbered suffixes to the names of placed objects on or off. • [DME/ICP1] When ON numbered suffixes will automatically be appended to added DME, and ICP objects. • [Component] When ON numbered suffixes will automatically be appended to added SPX and user module objects. • [Other Objects] When ON numbered suffixes will automatically be appended to added objects not covered by the above two categories. 208 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Compile Priority Here you can make compile settings for the configuration. NOTE These compile settings are reflected in online status. If you change the settings in offline status, it will be enabled when going online after going offline once. • [Resource] Compiles arrangable components in order based on their component numbers. The Delay values differ depending on the signal lines. • [Fixed Delay] Fixes the Delay value (number of Samples) for the signal lines. However, it also reduces the number of components that can be arranged. • [Auto Delay Compensation] This turns ON or OFF a function that automatically corrects the component delay when [Fixed Delay] is selected. NOTE Auto Delay Compensation will not function properly in configurations that have a loop connection. [OK] Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box. [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 209 Chapter 4 Designer Grid Displays a grid on the sheet in each design window to guide the placement of objects. You can also have the objects “snap to” (automatically align with) the grid when dragging them. When you click the [Grid] command on the [Tools] menu, the “Grid” dialog box is displayed. Here you can enable or disable display of the grid and set the grid interval and form. [Snap to Grid] Makes objects align the grid when dragging them. Spacing This sets the spacing of the grid. This setting can range from 2 to 99 pixels. • [X:] Box This sets the spacing of the grid in the horizontal direction. • [Y:] Box This sets the spacing of the grid in the vertical direction. [Show Grid] Displays the grid. Place a checkmark here to enable display and select the type of grid. • [Line] Displays the grid using lines. • [Dot] Displays the grid using dots. [Save As Default Setting] Place a checkmark here to make the current grid settings the default when a new sheet is created. [OK] Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box. [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. 210 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Exporting Each Design Window Configurations are saved in project files. This is done using the [File] menu → [Save] and [Save As] commands in the Main Panel window. For information about saving project files see “Project Files” on page 22. Instead of saving projects in their entirety, you can output the information contained in the active window using the Designer Window [Print] → [Export DXF] command and save it in a DXF format file. These files have “.dxf” as their filename extension. Because the DXF format uses the standard CAD file format, it can be opened using CAD software. DXF format files can also be opened by graphics software that support vector graphics, such as Adobe Illustrator®. When you select this command, the “Export DXF” dialog box will be displayed. • Symbols are substituted for external devices in the following three types of folders. Microphone → mike symbol Power Amp → amp symbol Speaker → speaker symbol • Text decoration except for size will be eliminated. • Picture objects and background images for the sheet or objects will all be eliminated. • [Style] attributes for boxes will be eliminated. When you select the [Print] menu → [Export DXF] command, the “Export DXF” dialog box will be displayed. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 211 Chapter 4 Designer ■ DXF File Name Enter a filename for the DXF file. The default file name entered here will vary according to the currently active window. If you click the [...] button at the right of the box, the “DXF File Name” dialog box is displayed. Specify the DXF file filename and the folder where the file will be saved. Enter the filename, specify the folder where the file will be saved, then click the [Save] button. When you return to the “Export DXF” dialog box, the specified filename will be displayed in the [DXF File Name] box. NOTE When you click on the [Save] button in the “DXF File Name” dialog box, the DXF file is not saved. Only when you click on the [OK] button in the “Export DXF” dialog box, does the DXF file become saved. ■ Scale Sets the reduction ratio. When the size of the sheet is large, you can reduce it before exporting it. ■ Text Style Specifies the text font for output in DXF format. The default is the “TXT” (drawing font used in CAD). ■ Block Sets the block form used in the sheet. Displays a list where you can select the form. [Block] Makes the blocks rectangular and groups the text in the port icons and port names. [Explode] Makes the blocks into sets of four lines, and does not group the text in the port icons and port names. 212 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer ■ [Paper Size] Sets the size of the paper. [Preset Size] Displays a list where you can select preset paper sizes. When you select a paper size, numerical values are set for [Horizontal] and [Vertical]. [Custom Sizes] Set a custom size by specifying the vertical and horizontal sizes of the sheet. • [Horizontal] Box Sets the horizontal width of the sheet. • [Vertical] Box Sets the vertical height of the sheet. [Unit] Selects the unit used for setting the sheet size. [OK] Button Saves the DXF file according to the settings in the dialog box. [Cancel] Button Cancels the DXF file export process. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 213 Chapter 4 Designer Printing Each Design Window You can print out the content of each design window just as it appears on the screen. The content in the window will be expanded or reduced in size as necessary to match the size and orientation of the paper, and printed onto a single sheet of paper. Commands related to printing are found on the Designer Window [Print] menu. ■ [Print Setup] When you select this command, the “Print Setup” dialog box will be displayed. Sets the paper size and orientation. [Paper Size] Displays a list where you can select the paper size. Orientation Sets the orientation of the paper. • [Portrait] Prints on the paper with its long sides vertical. • [Landscape] Prints on the paper with its long sides horizontal. [OK] Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box. [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. 214 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer ■ [Print Preview] Displays a print preview of the active design window. You can check the appearance of the page before printing it. [Print] Displays the “Print” dialog box. [Close] Closes the print preview window. ■ [Print] Prints the active window. When you select this command, the “Print” dialog box will be displayed. Enter the number of copies to print into the [Number of Copies] box, and click the [Print] button. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 215 Chapter 4 Designer Arranging Objects Multiple object placement methods are available. ■ Dragging from the Toolkit Window You can drag items from the Toolkit window to the location where you want to place them in each design window. ■ Double-Clicking an Object in the Toolkit Window You can double-click an object in the Toolkit window to place it in each design window. ■ Selecting from the [Tools] Menu Available objects are displayed on the [Area Parts List]/[Device List]/[Component List] submenus which are accessed from the [Tools] menu. When you click an object name, the mouse pointer changes shape. Click the location on the sheet where you want to place the object. ■ Selecting from the Context Menu If you right-click on the sheet, you will see the [Area Parts List]/[Device List]/[Component List] commands displayed on the context menu that appears. When you click an object name on the submenu, the mouse pointer changes shape. Click the location on the sheet where you want to place the object. Selecting Objects ■ Selecting with a Click You can select an object by clicking on it. If you click another object or an empty location on the sheet, it will cancel selection of the object you previously clicked. ■ Selecting with Click + <Ctrl> Key When you want to select multiple objects, hold down the <Ctrl> key as you click each new object you want to select. If you hold down the <Ctrl> key and click again on one of the objects that is part of the multiple selection, it will cancel selection of that single object. ■ Selecting by Dragging If you position the mouse in an empty location on the sheet and start dragging from there, a frame will be displayed as the pointer moves. Any objects within this frame will be selected. ■ Changing the Selected Object Using the <Tab> Key When a single object is selected, you can change the selection to the next object by pressing the <Tab> key. If you press <Shift> + <Tab>, the selection moves to the previous object. The selection order moves from left to right. NOTE Wires cannot be selected with the <Tab> key. 216 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Editing Objects Objects that have been arranged on the sheet can be edited using the [Cut], [Copy], [Paste], [Duplicate], and similar commands in the [Edit] menu. These edit commands will also appear in the context menu displayed when you right-click an object in the design window. Buttons for [Cut], [Copy], and [Paste] are also available on the Designer window toolbar. NOTE Some objects cannot be edited. ■ Undoing and Redoing Operations You can undo operations using the [Undo] command on the [Edit] menu. You can use the [Redo] command to redo operations that have been undone. ■ Deleting Objects Objects can be deleted by selecting them and pressing the <Delete> key. NOTE Some objects cannot be deleted. With some other objects, you must first make appropriate settings in a dialog box before you can delete them. ■ Moving Objects You can move objects by dragging them with the mouse. If [Snap to Grid] is ON in the “Grid” dialog box, the dragged objects will automatically align with the grid. You can also move a selected object using the arrow keys. If [Snap to Grid] is ON in the “Grid” dialog box, the selected object will move from grid line to grid line. If [Snap to Grid] is OFF, the object will move pixel to pixel. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 217 Chapter 4 Designer Changing the Order Objects newly placed on the sheet will be displayed above any previously placed objects they overlap. You can change this behavior using the [Display Order] command on the [Edit] menu. Select the object for which you want to change the display order, then select the appropriate command from the [Display Order] submenu on the [Edit] menu. [Top] Moves the selected object to the top of the stack. [Bottom] Moves the selected object to the bottom of the stack. [Front] Moves the selected object up one level in the stack. [Back] Moves the selected object down one level in the stack. Uppermost Object Bottom 218 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Back Chapter 4 Designer Drawing and Editing Wires Wire Objects that are arranged on sheets in the Configuration or User Module windows can be connected to each other by wires. Not only does this let you logically connect signal sources (output side) and destinations (input side), it also lets you draw connections and independent lines on the display. Each wire has at least two wire nodes. Between the nodes are line segments. Wire Node Line Segment ■ Selecting Wires and Canceling Selection You can select a line segment by clicking on it. If you hold down the <Alt> key while clicking, you will select the entire wire. NOTE The color used when a wire object is selected can be set with [Selected Color] in the “Wire Properties” dialog box. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 219 Chapter 4 Designer ■ Line Segment The line width default value is set from one to five pixels in the Designer window “Properties” dialog box. In the “Wire Properties” dialog box, the line thickness and color can be adjusted as required for the various wires arranged on the sheet. Line Segment Selection When you select a line segment by clicking on it, only that line segment is selected. If you hold down the <Ctrl> key while clicking, you can select multiple line segments. Furthermore, if you drag the mouse from an empty location on the sheet so that nodes are enclosed by a box, line segments between those nodes will be selected. Canceling Line Segment Selection If you select another object or an empty location on the sheet, it will cancel selection of the object you previously clicked. You can also cancel selections by holding the <Ctrl> key while clicking. <Ctrl> + Click 220 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Canceling Selection of a Line Segment Selected with <Ctrl> + Click Chapter 4 Designer ■ Wire Nodes Both ends of a wire, the location where wires bend, and the location where wires diverge are called “Nodes.” When a wire object is not selected, its nodes are not displayed. When a wire is selected, the nodes are displayed with a red circle. Node Selection When you click on a node, only that node itself is selected. You can select multiple nodes by holding down the <Ctrl> key while clicking. Furthermore, if you drag the mouse from an empty location on the sheet so that nodes are enclosed by a box, the enclosed nodes will be selected. Canceling Node Selection If you select another object or an empty location on the sheet, it will cancel selection of the object you previously clicked. You can also cancel node selections by holding the <Ctrl> key while clicking. With this technique, you can cancel only the node you clicked on when multiple nodes are selected. <Ctrl> + Click Canceling Selection of a Node Selected with <Ctrl> + Click DME Designer Owner’s Manual 221 Chapter 4 Designer Hotspot The small white rectangles at the edge of objects are called “Hotspots.” Wires usually connect to hotspots. Hotspots • Some hotspots do not have a connection to a logical signal within the hardware. • Component and user module hotspots normally include logical connections. • External device hotspots do not include logical connections. ■ Selecting Hotspots If you click a hotspot, drawing will start. To select, press <Shift> + click. You can select multiple hotspots as follows: Select a hotspot with <Shift> + click, then select additional hotspots using <Ctrl> + <Shift> + click. 222 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Drawing Settings Several functions are available to help ensure accurate wire drawing. ■ Grid To accurately draw in relation to the grid, turn ON [Snap to Grid] in the “Grid” dialog box. ■ Draw Exact Vertical and Horizontal Lines If you turn ON [Prohibit Diagonal Connections] in the [Tools] menu, wires will be drawn only vertically or horizontally. It will not be possible to draw diagonal wires. When you select this command, it is turned ON, and a checkmark appears next to it. If you select the command while it is ON, it will turn OFF. Even if “Prohibit Diagonal Connections” is turned OFF, this function will operate whenever you press the <Shift> key while drawing. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 223 Chapter 4 Designer Wire Drawing Wire drawing starts at the positions shown in the following table: Drawing Start Location Start Method Hotspot Click Wire End Terminal Right-click → click [Continue Wire] on the menu Node Right-click → click [Start Wire] on the menu Line Segment Right-click → click [Start Wire] on the menu Anywhere on the Sheet Right-click → click [Start Wire] on the menu NOTE When creating diagrams the keyboard cursor keys can be used to move the mouse cursor, and the <Enter. Key can be used to create nodes. ■ Connecting Hotspots with Hotspots Method 1 Clicking Click the hotspot where the connection originates to begin drawing, then click the destination hotspot. The two hotspots will be connected by a wire. NOTE A termination cannot be connected to a terminal that will be shorted. Multiple connections cannot be made to a DME object's Cascade port. NOTE When creating diagrams horizontally aligned hot spots can be automatically connected by pressing the <Shift> + <→> keys or <Shift> + <←> keys. Method 2 Dragging Drag from the origin hotspot to the destination hotspot. NOTE A termination cannot be connected to a terminal that will be shorted. Multiple connections cannot be made to a DME object's Cascade port. ■ Connect with Bent Line Method 1 From Hotspot to Hotspot Click the hotspot where the connection originates to begin drawing, then click the location (which will become a node) where you want the line to bend. Finally, click the destination hotspot to complete the connection. 224 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Method 2 From Hotspot to Node or Line Segment Click the hotspot where the connection originates to begin drawing, then click the location (node) where you want the line to bend. Click an already drawn wire node or line segment to complete the connection. If you connect to a line segment, a node will be created there. NOTE A termination cannot be connected to a terminal that will be shorted. Multiple connections cannot be made to a DME object's Cascade port. ■ Connect Multiple Hotspots in a Single Operation Method 1 <Ctrl> Key Combinations If you hold down the <Ctrl> key when finishing dragging, a wire will be drawn at all origin hotspots. The wire will be connected to the destination hotspot you dragged and those that come after. Begin dragging from the connection origin hotspot, then press the <Ctrl> key after aligning the mouse pointer with the hotspot you will connect too. A wire will be displayed below the destination hotspot. Finish dragging while holding the <Ctrl> key down. Press <Ctrl> Key Method 2 Connect Multiple Selected Hotspots Select multiple hotspots using <Shift> + click and <Ctrl> + click, then drag from one of the selected hotspots to the destination hotspot. The selected multiple origin hotspots will all be connected. Multiple Hotspots Selected DME Designer Owner’s Manual 225 Chapter 4 Designer Method 3 Using Shortcuts Press the [F2] key to select the uppermost open hot spot to the right of the selected object and begin drawing a wire. Press <Shift> + [F2] to select the uppermost open hot spot to the left of the selected object and begin drawing a wire. Press the [F4] key to connect the uppermost open hot spot to the right of the selected object and the uppermost open hot spot to the left of the object on the right. Press <Shift> + [F4] to connect the uppermost open hot spot to the left of the selected object and the uppermost open hot spot to the right of the object on the left. 226 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Press the [F5] key to connect the uppermost open hot spot to the right of the selected object and the uppermost open hot spot to the left of the object on the right, and continue automatically making sequential connections until no more open ports are available on either object. Automatic connections will not be made over other objects. Press <Shift> + [F5] to connect the uppermost open hot spot to the left of the selected object and the uppermost open hot spot to the right of the object on the left, and continue automatically making sequential connections until no more open ports are available on either object. Automatic connections will not be made over other objects. Press the [F8] key to clear all wires connected to the selected object. NOTE When multiple objects are selected these operations apply to the first object selected. NOTE These shortcuts can be changed as required. → See Chapter 3 Main Panel Window, “Shortcut Keys” on page 134. ■ Starting Drawing from the End Point/Node/Line Segment of an Existing Wire You can draw from the end or midway point of an existing wire. If you start from a node or line segment, a branch line will be created. Method 1 Continue Drawing from a Wire End Point When continuing an existing wire, right-click on the wire end point, then click [Continue Wire] on the displayed context menu. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 227 Chapter 4 Designer Method 2 Start Drawing from a Node Right-click on a wire node, then click [Start Wire] on the displayed menu. You can start a branch wire from the node you clicked on. Method 3 Start Drawing from a Line Segment Right-click on a wire line segment, then click [Start Wire] on the displayed menu. A node will be created at the point you right-clicked, and you can start a branch wire from that node. ■ Drawing from Anywhere on the Sheet Right-click the start position for drawing, the click [Start Wire] on the context menu that is displayed. Click the location where the line should bend, then double-click at the end location to finish drawing. ■ Finishing Drawing When the hotspots or already drawn wires are connected, drawing is finished. To finish drawing without connecting to a hotspot, use one of the following methods: • Right-click the mouse • Double-click • Press the <Esc> key Drawing also finishes if another window is made active. 228 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Wire Editing You can delete wires, change node positions, connect to other wires, and perform other wire edit operations. ■ Delete Deleting an Entire Wire Right-click the wire then click [Delete Wire] in the context menu Deleting Nodes Nodes can be deleted by selecting them and pressing the <Delete> key. Nodes on both sides of the deleted node will become directly connected. Selected Node ■ Editing by Dragging Moving Nodes You can move nodes by dragging them with the mouse. When multiple nodes are selected and dragged with the mouse, you can move all selected nodes simultaneously. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 229 Chapter 4 Designer Moving Line Segments To move a line segment, select the nodes on both sides of the segment, and drag one of the nodes. ■ Connecting to Other Wires If you drag a node and lay it over another wire, the two will be connected at that position. If you drag it to a line segment, a node will be created. Created Node Logical connection A connection from a source (output side) signal to a destination (input side) signal is called a “logical connection.” If a logical connection is present in a configuration, the actual hardware signal will be connected. A single wire can make a single logical connection. Logical connections are possible only in the Configuration window and the User Module window. Wires in the Area window or Zone window can be drawn for display only. Even in the Configuration window and User Module window, you can also draw wires for display only. Window Wire Area Window Drawing for display only Zone Window Drawing for display only Configuration Window Logical connection and drawing for display only User Module Window Logical connection and drawing for display only ■ Situations Where No Logical Connection Is Created • • • • 230 Both sides are source (output side) signals Both sides are destination (input side) signals Two source (output side) signals are connected to a destination There are two destination (input side) signals, and the wire is not connected to a source (output side) signal. DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Adding, Deleting, and Renaming a Zone At least one zone is included within an area. In the default Area window that zone will be named [Zone1]. Multiple zones can be arranged in an Area. When you click the [Zone] command on the [Tools] menu, the “Zone” dialog box is displayed. Here you can add, delete, or rename a zone. Zone List Lists the zones included in the project. To change settings for a zone, select it by clicking it in the list. [Add] Button Adds a zone. Clicking here displays the “Please enter new name” dialog box. Enter a new name, then click [OK]. A zone will be added. [Delete] Button Deletes the zone selected on the list. Clicking here displays the “Are you sure?” dialog box. Click the [OK] button, and the zone will be deleted. Click the [Cancel] button, and the deletion will be cancelled. NOTE A minimum of one zone is required. When only one zone remains, deletion is impossible. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 231 Chapter 4 Designer [Rename] Button Changes the name of the zone selected on the list. Clicking here displays the “Enter new name for the current zone name” dialog box. Enter a zone name, then click the [OK] button. NOTE The current name of the zone you will be renaming is displayed in the “Current Zone Name” box of the “Enter new name for current zone name” message. [Close] Button Closes the “Zone” dialog box. 232 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Adding, Deleting, and Renaming a Configuration At least one configuration is included within a zone. In a new Zone that configuration will be named [Configuration1]. You can add configurations as required. When you click the [Configuration] command on the [Tools] menu, the “Configuration” dialog box is displayed. Here you can add, delete, or rename a configuration. Configurations Lists the configurations included in the zone being edited. To change settings for a configuration, select it by clicking it in the list. [Add] Button Adds a configuration. Clicking here displays the “Please enter new name” dialog box. Enter a configuration name, then click [OK]. A configuration will be added. [Delete] Button Deletes the configuration selected on the list. Clicking here displays the “Are you sure?” dialog box. Click the [OK] button, and the configuration will be deleted. Click the [Cancel] button, and the deletion will be cancelled. NOTE A minimum of one configuration is required. When only one configuration remains, deletion is impossible. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 233 Chapter 4 Designer [Rename] Button Changes the name of the configuration selected on the list. Clicking here displays the “Enter new name for the current configuration” dialog box. Enter a configuration name, then click the [OK] button. NOTE The current name of the configuration you will be renaming is displayed in the “Current Configuration Name” box of the “Enter new name for current configuration name” message. [Close] Button Closes the “Configuration” dialog box. 234 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Area Window In the Area window, the area is designed by arranging objects on a design sheet, When you click “Area” in the Navigator window, the Area window becomes active. You can also open the Area window using the [Area] command in the [View] menu. The following objects can be arranged in the Area window: • Zone • External Device • Picture • Text • Box • Ellipse • Wire • Legend Title Bar Menu Bar Tool Bar Zones Wire (Line) Picture (Image) Text (Text Object) Toolkit Window Ellipse (Circle) Wire Box (Rectangle) Legend Sheet ■ Title Bar You can move windows by dragging the title bar. ■ Zone Zones are added and deleted using the “Zone” dialog box. You cannot perform operations such as deletion, cut, or copy. You can change the position and design of zone objects in the Area window. Double-click to open a Zone window. ■ Objects You can perform edit operations such as arrange, cut, copy, paste, delete, and move on all objects except zones. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 235 Chapter 4 Designer Arranging Objects Objects other than zones can be placed in the window by dragging them from the Toolkit window. You can also place objects by double-clicking them in the Toolkit window. You can also display the [Area Parts List] from the [Tools] menu or from the context menu that appears when you right-click on the sheet. 236 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Zone Window In the Zone window, the zone configuration is designed by arranging zone devices on a design sheet, A zone configuration can be created that is the same as the actual hardware arrangement. To display the Zone window, double-click in the Area window. When you click a configuration in the Navigator window, it becomes active. The following objects can be arranged in the Zone window: • DME • ICP • External Device • Picture • Text • Box • Ellipse (Circle) • Legend Title Bar Menu Bar Tool Bar DME ICP External Device Picture (Image) Text (Text Object) Box (Rectangle) Sheet Toolkit Window Ellipse (Circle) Legend ■ Title Bar Displays the zone name you have in the “Zone” dialog box. There is always one zone named [Zone 1] in a newly created project. ■ Configuration You can create multiple configurations within a zone, but they cannot be arranged within the Zone window. There is a Zone window for each configuration where devices can be arranged. To switch configurations, click the desired configuration in the Navigator window. You can add, delete, and rename configurations in the “Configuration” dialog box. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 237 Chapter 4 Designer ■ Objects You can perform edit operations such as place, cut, copy, paste, delete, and move to devices and shapes. If you double-click on a device arranged in the window, a Configuration window or dialog box will open. Device Action When Double-Clicked DME Displays Configuration Window ICP Displays “Control Panel Properties” dialog box External Device Opens external application linked to the device. Arranging Objects You can place objects by dragging them from the Toolkit window. You can also place objects by double-clicking them in the Toolkit window. The same objects are displayed in the [Device List] submenu on the context menu that appears when you right-click the [Tools] menu or on the sheet. For information about the “Device List,” see page 154. ■ DME Arrangement To place a DME object, first drag the [New] icon. When you drag the [New] icon and place it in the Zone window, you also add an icon for that DME to the Toolkit window. You can rename the DME in the “DME Device Properties” dialog box. This also renames the DME icon in the Toolkit Window. You can place a created DME in another configuration, but you cannot place multiple identical DMEs in a single configuration. If there are multiple DMEs in a hardware configuration, create an equivalent number of DME objects. Place New DME Placed DME DME not placed in active configuration 238 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Placing a New DME Below the DME folder in the Toolkit window are the [DME24N] and [DME64N] folders. Below these folders you will find a [New] icon. Drag it to the Zone window. When you drag the [New] icon and place it in the Zone window, you also add an icon for that DME to the Toolkit window. A DME added to the Toolkit window cannot be placed again in the same configuration window. The DME placed in the Toolkit window will be displayed with a muted color. To place multiple DMEs, drag the [New] icon to add each DME. Placing Existing DMEs When there are multiple configurations, you can place existing DMEs in configurations other than their original one. Drag the DME icon created in the Toolkit window to the Zone window. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 239 Chapter 4 Designer When you place the DME in the Zone window, the DME icon display in the Toolkit window will change to a muted color that indicates that it has already been placed. ■ ICP Placement Just like for a DME, the first step it placing an ICP is to drag the [New] icon from the Toolkit window. You can place the created ICP in another configuration, but you cannot place multiple identical ICPs in a single configuration. If there are multiple ICPs in a hardware configuration, create an equivalent number of ICP objects. ICP not placed in active configuration Placed ICP Place New ICP Placing a New ICP Subordinate to the ICP folder in the Toolkit window is the [ICP1] folder. Below these folders you will find a [New] icon. Drag it to the Zone window. 240 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer When you drag the ICP [New] icon and place it in the Zone window, you also add an icon for that ICP to the Toolkit window. The ICP added in the Toolkit window will be displayed with a muted color to indicate it has already been placed. To place multiple ICPs, drag the [New] icon to add each new ICP. Placing Existing ICPs When there are multiple configurations, you can place existing ICPs in configurations other than their original one. Drag the ICP icon created in the Toolkit window to the Zone window. The ICP will be placed in the Zone window. The ICP added in the Toolkit window will be displayed with a muted color to indicate it has already been placed. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 241 Chapter 4 Designer Configuration Window The Configuration window is used for arranging components on the sheet and making logical connections. It is displayed when you double-click on a DME. Title Bar Menu Bar Tool Bar Component Sheet Toolkit Window Wire User Module I/O Component Legend ■ Title Bar Displays “DME Name (Zone Name).” The configuration window for a DME64N placed in [Zone1] will be “DME64N (Zone1).” The DME name is set in the properties for the DME placed in the Zone window. ■ Objects Objects such components, user modules, and shapes are arranged in the Configuration window. When you double-click a component placed in the window, the component editor will open. If you double-click a user module, the user module will open. ■ I/O Component Depending on the settings for the DME placed in the Zone window, I/O components will be automatically placed or added. • I/O components can be arranged in the DME24N configuration window. • When “Show Cascade Port” is ON in the DME64N “DME Device Properties” dialog, Cascade I/O is added automatically. • When you set a slot in the properties for a DME placed in the Zone window, Slot I/O will be automatically added. You cannot apply edit operations like cut/copy/paste/duplicate to I/O components, Slot I/O, and Cascade I/O. 242 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Placing Components You can place objects by dragging them from the Toolkit window. You can also place objects by double-clicking them in the Toolkit window. The same objects are displayed in the [Component List] submenu on the [Tools] menu or on the context menu that appears when you right-click on the sheet. For information about the [Component List] in the Configuration window, see page 154. NOTE If the [Matrix Mixer 64 input 64 output] or the [Matrix Mixer 64 input 32 output] components are placed in the DME64N configuration window, you will not be able to use other components, even though the window does not reach 100 percent. The [Matrix Mixer 64 input 64 output] or [Matrix Mixer 64 input 32 output] components cannot be used in the DME24N. ■ Arranging a Number of Components of the Same Type You can arrange a number of components of the same type. If there are two or more of the same component, numbers will be attached to their names as follows: “Compressor (2),” “Compressor (3)” and so on. Multiple components placed in the configuration are independent, and you can set different parameters for each of them. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 243 Chapter 4 Designer Probe Monitor Probe monitor is a function that lets you monitor output ports in your configuration with headphones. You can turn it ON or OFF using [Probe Monitor] in the [Tools] menu or the [Probe Monitor] button on the toolbar. The probe monitor can be set to ON or OFF for each DME. The probe monitor can be used only when online with the DME and Configuration window or user module active. When the probe monitor is ON, no editing is possible except in the Component Editor. ■ Probe Monitor Procedure 1 Turn the probe monitor ON. Click [Probe Monitor] in the [Tools] menu or the [Probe Monitor] button on the toolbar. The shape of the mouse pointer changes. 2 Click the output port you want to monitor. The output port you clicked will be selected and monitoring will begin. Monitor object If you click another output port, the location being monitored will change. 244 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer ■ L/R Selection To monitor the left channel and right channel simultaneously, <Shift> + click on the left channel, then do the some for the right channel. ■ Exiting the Probe Monitor Click [Probe Monitor] in the [Tools] menu or the [Probe Monitor] button on the toolbar to turn OFF the probe monitor. When probe monitor is turned off, the mouse pointer returns to its normal shape. ■ Monitoring the Second or Later Time The software remembers the location being monitored even when probe monitoring is turned OFF. The next time probe monitoring is turned ON, the location that was being monitored previously will be selected. NOTE If the configuration is edited after turning monitoring OFF, the monitor location will not be selected. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 245 Chapter 4 Designer Show Signal Delay (Delay Display Value) The signal delays according to the processing time in the audio processor. The [Show Signal Delay] command from the [Tools] menu calculates a delay value and displays it for the component. Selecting this command switches delay value display between ON and OFF. A checkmark appears when display is turned ON. When turned ON, the settings are compiled to obtain a delay value, which is displayed for components and lines. The delay value obtained through compilation remains valid until the configuration is edited. Sample units are used to display the delay value. This corresponds to the [Show Signal Delay] button on the toolbar. ON and OFF settings for [Show Signal Display] are saved for each configuration window. Switching the setting between ON and OFF in another configuration window has no effect on the current window. You can edit the configuration while [Show Signal Delay] is turned ON. When you turn ON [Show Signal Delay], the delay value appears above the object. Delay values for components and I/O components are displayed at the lower center of the object. Delay values for wires are displayed beside the input port of the connected object. NOTE Delay values for SPX components vary depending on the Bypass ON/OFF status, because SPX components add the effect signal to the original signal. When [Show Signal Delay] is turned ON, the delay value for the Bypass ON status will be displayed. NOTE Delay values for Wav File Player components are displayed for external inputs. Delay values for local Wave files cannot be displayed. 246 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Monitoring Point List When you click [Monitoring Point List] in the [Tools] menu, the “Monitoring Point List” dialog box is displayed. Here you can register or edit points for monitoring with headphones. NOTE Monitoring points can be edited only by users for whom the [Edit] security checkbox has been turned ON. ■ [Cut] Button Cuts the selected monitoring point information. When monitoring point information is cut, information below that point moves up. ■ [Copy] Button Copies the selected monitoring point information. ■ [Paste] Button Pastes the copied monitoring point information at the selected line. ■ [Insert] Button The copied monitoring point information is inserted at the selected point. ■ [Clear] Button Deletes the selected monitoring point information. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 247 Chapter 4 Designer ■ Monitoring Point List Displays and allows editing of monitoring point information. [No.] Displays the numbers for monitor link points. Numbers are assigned in order from the top. [Label] Displays and allows editing of monitoring point names. Clicking here selects the text. You can then enter a new name. [Component L] Sets the monitoring point L channel component. Clicking here displays a list of components arranged in the active configuration window. You can then select components for monitoring. NOTE Components arranged in user modules are also displayed in the list. However, components for user modules for which security is set will not be displayed. [Port L] Sets the monitoring point L channel port. Clicking here displays a list of ports for the component selected in the [Component L] field. Click the port you want to monitor. NOTE If you click a port in the designer window while the “Monitoring Point List” dialog box is displayed, the port will be registered to the monitoring point of current selected row. If you will register the monitoring points as stereo, click a port while holding down the <Shift> key to register Component L and Port L, then click a port again while holding down the <Shift> key to register Component R and Port R. [Component R] Sets the monitoring point R channel component. Clicking here displays a list of components arranged in the active configuration window. You can then select components for monitoring. NOTE Components arranged in user modules are also displayed in the list. However, components for user modules for which security is set will not be displayed. [Port R] Sets the monitoring point R channel port. Clicking here displays a list of ports for the component selected in the [Component R] field. Click the port you want to monitor. ■ [OK] Button Updates the settings and closes the dialog box. ■ [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. 248 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Analyze (Configuration Analysis) When you click the [Analyze] command on the [Tools] menu or the [Analyze] button on the toolbar, the “Analyze” dialog box is displayed. The wire connections in the currently active configuration window are analyzed, and the results are displayed in the “Analyze” dialog box. Because this function allows you to make sure there are no problems with component arrangement and wires without connecting to the DME unit, it is useful for eliminating complier errors before executing Synchronization. NOTE The [Analyze] command on the [Tools] menu can be selected only when a configuration window is active. ■ Message Box Displays the progress of the analysis operation. When the analysis finishes, the results are displayed. If errors are detected during analysis, they will display as shown below. ■ [Close] Button Closes the dialog box. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 249 Chapter 4 Designer User Module User Modules A module treated as a single component that combines a number of other components is called a “user module.” A user module can be arranged in the Configuration window just like any other component. User module editing consists of placing the component and making logical connections with wires, the same as for configurations. User modules are saved in the project file, but they can also be saved as files. User modules saved as files can be displayed in the Toolkit window and used in other project files. A “User Modules” folder will be created in the folder specified in [Contents Folder] in the “Preferences” dialog box in the Main Panel window. User modules will be saved there. If you do not change the setting in the “Preferences” dialog box, the location will be “C:\Program Files\YAMAHA\OPT Tools\DME Designer\User Modules.” NOTE The Main Panel Menu “Preferences” dialog box is displayed using [Preference] in the [File] menu. User Module Manager When you click [User Module Manager] on the [Tools] menu, the “User Module Manager” dialog box is displayed. You can change settings, rename or delete in the window that opens when you doubleclick a user module. ■ User Modules Lists user modules that are saved in the “User Modules” folder. Select the target user module by clicking on it. NOTE Only user modules saved can be displayed. User modules placed in the component editor are saved in project files, and can be used without being saved as files. However, they will not be displayed in the “User Module Manager” dialog box list. 250 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer ■ Double Click Action Sets the action that occurs when you double-click on a user module placed in the Configuration window. [Open User Module Design Window] Opens the User Module window. [Open User Module Editor] Opens the User Module editor. The user module editor is a window where controls for components that are placed in a user module can be laid out and their parameters changed. For more information about the user module editor, see “User Control/User Module Editor” on page 279. ■ Security Settings Makes security settings for the user module selected on the list. [Enable Security] Enables user module security. If security is enabled, a password is requested when attempting to open the User Module window. If the correct password is not entered, the window will stay closed. When you place a checkmark here, the “Set Password” dialog box appears. Enter the same password into the [Password] box and [Confirm Password] box, and click the [OK] button. To disable user module security, turn OFF the checkbox. If you click the checkbox when it already has a checkmark, the “Input Password” dialog box appears. Enter the password set for this user module, and click the [OK] button. You can disable security in this way. If you do not enter the correct password, you will not be able to disable security. [Set Password] Button Changes the password. Clicking here displays the “Input Password” dialog box. Enter the current password and click the [OK] button. The “Set Password” dialog box will be displayed. Enter the same password into the [Password] box and [Confirm Password] box, and click the [OK] button. ■ Default Library Specifies the default library file for newly-created user modules. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 251 Chapter 4 Designer ■ [Rename] Button Changes the name of the user module selected on the list. Clicking here displays the “Rename User Module” dialog box. Enter a name into the user module name box, and click the [OK] button. NOTE The user module name also becomes the file name. When naming a user module, do not use characters that cannot be used for filenames. ■ [Delete] Button Deletes the user module selected on the list. ■ [Import] Button Imports the user module settings and library from the user module export file. ■ [Export] Button Saves the user module settings and library to the user module export file. Click to display the Export dialog, All features of this dialog window are the same as the standard Windows file save dialog, except for the [Export Library] option. [Export Library] can be sued to select the library to be saved. ■ [Import Library] Button Loads a file from the specified folder into the library. 252 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer ■ [Export Library] Button Saves the library to a file. Use [Export Library] to select the library to be saved. ■ [OK] Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box. ■ [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. NOTE Settings in the “User Module Manager” dialog box are changed when you click the [OK] button. If you mistakenly set security, change the password, or delete a user module, you can click the [Cancel] button to close the dialog box and return to the original unchanged settings. Please note that [Import], [Export], [Import Library], and [Export Library] will be applied even if the [Cancel] button is clicked. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 253 Chapter 4 Designer Creating User Modules When you place a blank user module in the Configuration window, a new user module is created. 1 Make the Configuration window active. 2 Click the [+] next to [User Module] in the Toolkit window. The items in the level below the [User Module] folder will be displayed. 3 Drag the [Blank User Module] to the Configuration window. When you release the mouse button at the location where you will place the user module, the “User Module Properties” dialog box is displayed. 4 Here you can set object properties. [Inputs/Outputs Sets] is set to 1. Set the required number of ports. 5 Click the [OK] button. A user module will be created, and placed in the Configuration window. The user module properties can also be changed later. For information about the “User Module Properties” dialog box, see “User Module” on page 181. 254 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Saving User Modules When user modules are saved, they appear below [User Module] in the Toolkit window. They can be used in other project files. NOTE User modules placed in the component editor are saved in the project file. When you want to use a user module in another project or in another configuration in the same project, save it using the “Save User Module” command. Save the User Module using the [Save User Module] command on the [Tools] menu. The [Save User Module] command can be used only when a user module is selected in the Configuration window. When you select the command, the “Save User Module” dialog box will be displayed. Enter a name for the User Module, then click the [OK] button. Set [Double Click Action] and [Security Settings] at the lower part of the “Save User Module” dialog box. They correspond to the same items in the “User Module Manager” dialog box. When saved with different settings than the “User Module Manager” dialog box, the saved settings are immediately applied. ■ Double Click Action Sets the window that opens when you double-click on a user module placed in the component editor. [Open User Module Design Window] Opens the User Module window. [Open User Module Editor] Opens the User Module editor. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 255 Chapter 4 Designer ■ Security Settings Sets user module security. [Enable Security] Enables user module security. If you place a checkmark here, the “Set Password” dialog box appears. Enter the same password into the [Password] box and [Confirm Password] box, and click the [OK] button. [Set Password] Button Changes the password. Clicking here displays the “Input Password” dialog box. Enter the current password and click the [OK] button. The “Set Password” dialog box will be displayed. Enter the same password into the [Password] box and [Confirm Password] box, and click the [OK] button. If you try to save a user module with the same name as an already saved user module, a message asking “This file already exists. Overwrite?” will be displayed. To overwrite, click the [Yes] button. To change the name, click the [No] button, and change the file name in the “Save User Module” dialog box. NOTE When the “Save User Module” dialog box is displayed, the name set in the user module’s “User Module Properties” dialog box will be entered into the [File name] box. If you change the name of a user module and save it using the “Save User Module” dialog box, the filename in the user module and the user module name displayed in the Toolkit window will also change. The [Label] box displayed in the “User Module Properties” dialog box will not change. NOTE If characters not usable in file names are used in the file name set in the “User Module Properties” dialog box, an error message will be displayed at the same time as the “Save User Module” dialog box. Delete the unusable characters before saving. 256 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer User Module Window User modules are edited in the User Module window. The User Module window is used for arranging components on the sheet and making logical connections. It is displayed when you double-click on an object arranged in the Configuration window. Title Bar Menu Bar Tool Bar Component Wire ■ Title Bar The user module names are displayed on the title bar. User module names are set in the “User Module Properties” dialog box. ■ Objects You can place, cut, copy, paste, delete, and move component and shape objects. When you double-click an object placed in the window, the component editor will open. ■ Placing Components Components are placed the same as in the Configuration window. You can place objects by dragging them from the Toolkit window to the User Module window. You can also place objects by double-clicking them in the Toolkit window. The same objects are displayed in the [Component List] submenu on the [Tools] menu or on the context menu that appears when you right-click on the sheet. For information about the User Module window [Component List], see page 155. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 257 Chapter 4 Designer ■ Placing a Number of Components of the Same Type You can arrange a number of components of the same type. If there are two or more of the same component, numbers will be attached to their names as follows: “Compressor (2),” “Compressor (3)” and so on. Multiple components placed in the configuration are independent, and you can set different parameters for each of them. 258 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components Types of Components Component Groups When the Configuration window and User Module window are made active, a component list is displayed in the Toolkit window, and you can use the [Component List] on the [Tools] menu. Components can be separated into groups based on types. In the Toolkit window, component groups are displayed as folders. Some of the groups in the Toolkit window are further divided into subgroups. Click the [+]/[-] buttons to the left of the folders to display the components. Group Component NOTE When the User Module window is active, [User Module] is not present on the menu. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 259 Chapter 5 Components In the Designer window [Tools] menu → [Component List] menu, component groups are displayed as submenu items. The items with small rightward-facing triangles are groups. Those without triangles are components. Group Component NOTE When the User Module window is active, [User Module] is not present in the menu. Component List Group Crossover 2 Way 3 Way 4 Way 5 Way 6 Way Crossover Processor 2 Way 3 Way 4 Way 5 Way 6 Way Crossover Processor II 2 Way 3 Way 4 Way 5 Way 6 Way Delay 260 Component Variations DME Designer Owner’s Manual Long 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Output Short 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Output Chapter 5 Components Group Dynamics EQ Compander Mono Stereo CompanderS Mono Stereo Mono Stereo De-Esser Mono Stereo Ducking Mono Stereo Expander Mono Stereo Gate Mono Stereo Limiter Mono Stereo GEQ Fader Mono 7 Band 15 Band 31 Band Stereo 7 Band 15 Band 31 Band Mono 2 Band 3 Band 4 Band 6 Band 8 Band Stereo 2 Band 3 Band 4 Band 6 Band 8 Band 1 Channel 2 Channel 4 Channel 8 Channel 12 Channel 16 Channel BPF Mono Stereo HPF Mono Stereo LPF Mono Stereo Notch Mono Stereo Programmable BPF Mono Stereo Programmable HPF Mono Stereo Programmable LPF Mono Stereo Meter Miscellaneous CompanderH Compressor PEQ Filter Component Variations 1 Channel 2 Channel 4 Channel 8 Channel 12 Channel 16 Channel Oscillator Wav File Player Mono DME Designer Owner’s Manual 261 Chapter 5 Components Group Mixer Auto Mixer Delay Matrix Matrix Mixer Pan 262 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Component Variations 2 Channel 4 Channel 8 Channel 12 Channel 16 Channel 2 Input 2 Output 4 Output 8 Output 12 Output 16 Output 4 Input 2 Output 4 Output 8 Output 12 Output 16 Output 8 Input 2 Output 4 Output 8 Output 12 Output 16 Output 2 Input 1 Output 2 Output 4 Input 1 Output 2 Output 4 Output 8 Input 1 Output 2 Output 4 Output 8 Output 12 Input 1 Output 2 Output 4 Output 8 Output 12 Output 16 Input 1 Output 2 Output 4 Output 8 Output 12 Output 16 Output 32 Input 16 Output 32 Output 64 Input 32 Output 64 Output LCR 1 Channel 2 Channel 4 Channel 8 Channel 12 Channel 16 Channel LR 1 Channel 2 Channel 4 Channel 8 Channel 12 Channel 16 Channel Surround 3-1 5.1 6.1 Chapter 5 Components Group Router Source Selector Speaker Processor Component Variations 1 Input 2 Output 4 Output 8 Output 12 Output 16 Output 2 Input 2 Output 4 Output 8 Output 12 Output 16 Output 4 Input 2 Output 4 Output 8 Output 12 Output 16 Output 8 Input 2 Output 4 Output 8 Output 12 Output 16 Output 12 Input 2 Output 4 Output 8 Output 12 Output 16 Output 16 Input 2 Output 4 Output 8 Output 12 Output 16 Output 3 Position 1 Channel 4 Position 1 Channel 2 Channel 6 Channel 8 Position 1 Channel 2 Channel 6 Channel 16 Position 1 Channel 1 Way 2 Way 3 Way 4 Way 5 Way 6 Way SPX Slot Slot In Component Editor Slot Out Component Editor Cascade Cascade In Component Editor Cascade Out Component Editor DME Designer Owner’s Manual 263 Chapter 5 Components Component Editor Window Component Editor Component parameters are edited in the component editor. The same component can be placed multiple times on the same sheet in a Configuration or User Module window. If there are multiple examples of the same component in a configuration window or user module window, each component is independent and its parameters are set individually in a separate Component Editor window. Opening the Component Editor When you double-click on a component located in a Configuration window, the Component Editor window will open. There is not just one window that is called the component editor. The contents of the editor and the name on the title bar will differ according to type of component for which the window was opened. Component Editor Window Structure The contents of the Component Editor window vary according to the component. Library Back Button Title Bar Snap Graph Meter [ON] Button Slider Edit Box Knob ■ Title Bar Displays the label. Label settings are made in the “Component Properties” dialog box. For information about component labels see “Component” (page 174) in “Objects.”. 264 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components ■ Back Button This button appears in the child window of windows that have a parent-child relationship, and can be clicked to return the parent window. ■ Status Bar Component ID Component Name Parameter ID Component Name Displays the component name. Component ID Displays the component ID. NOTE When controlling the DME64N/24N by connecting an RS-232C compatible controller to the [REMOTE] terminal, a component ID is required for distinguishing the same components in the DME64N/24N. The component ID is included in the signal that controls the component parameters. For details about control methods, contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor at the end of the DME64N/24N Owner’s Manual. Parameter ID Displays the parameter ID for controls that are being operated. ■ Snap Up to four component editor parameter sets can be recorded temporarily. You can switch between parameter sets using buttons. Parameter sets can be copied by dragging and dropping a button onto any other button. Copy can also be carried out from the contextual menu that appears when a button is right-clicked. ■ Library Saves and recalls component editor parameter sets as files. → See “Library” on page 275. ■ Graph Displays the effects of the component in a graphical format. When parameters are changed, the graph changes too. In graphs that have control points, adjust parameters by dragging the points. As you drag the points, the corresponding parameters reflect the changes you make. ■ Meter Displays the signal level. ■ Slider/Knob You can change parameters by dragging the corresponding sliders or knobs. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 265 Chapter 5 Components Changing Parameters In the Component Editor window, parameter settings can be made by dragging buttons and sliders, not only by directly entering numbers. In locations where multiple controls, like edit boxes and knobs, are combined, you can change the values either way. ■ Preference When you click the [Preference] command on the [File] menu in the Main Panel window, the “Preferences” dialog box is displayed. You can set the action of the knobs and sliders on the [Component Editor] tab of the “Preferences” dialog box. When you close the dialog box after changing settings, those changes are immediately reflected in the component. Knob Mode Sets how the knobs operate. Slider Mode Sets the action that occurs when you click on the scale located under the sliders. Edit Box Zoom Specifies whether the edit box will be enlarged or not on mouse-over. Edit Box Font Specifies the edit box font. NOTE This is the font when the box is enlarged, not the font that is used when the box is at it's smallest size. The text may bleed beyond the box with some fonts. 266 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components ■ Knob You can change the way knobs operate, using the [Component Editor] tab → [Knob Mode] setting in the “Preferences” dialog box. Circular The knob is dragged following its shape, as though you were drawing a circle. Linear As you drag the knob to the upper, the value increases. Dragging it down decreases the value. NOTE To make a finer setting, press the <Shift> key while dragging the knob. If you click a knob while pressing the <Ctrl> key, the setting will return to its default value. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 267 Chapter 5 Components ■ Slider Slider Scale You can change the parameter by dragging the slider. You can set the action that results from using the mouse on the scale area with [Component Editor] tab → [Slider Mode] in the “Preferences” dialog box. Ramp When the fader bar is clicked the knob will move a preset amount in the corresponding direction. Touch The slider does not move without directly touching it, even if you click the mouse button. Jump The slider jumps to the location where you click. NOTE To make a finer setting, press the <Shift> key while dragging the slider. If you click a slider while pressing the <Ctrl> key, the setting will return to its default value. 268 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components ■ Buttons There are several types of buttons. Switches between ON/OFF. When turned on, the button lights up. The color depends on the button’s function. When turned ON When turned OFF In button sets of this type, you can select one of several buttons. When you do all other buttons in the set turn off. Click here to execute a command. Click this button to switch all channels in the block. Displays a menu. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 269 Chapter 5 Components Displays another window. ■ Edit Box Displays current values for settings. You can modify values by typing from the keyboard or using the mouse. When a value is changed, the knob or slider moves. Mouse-over When [Edit Box Zoom] in the [Component Editor] tab of the Preferences dialog box is checked, the edit box will zoom when the mouse is positioned over it (mouse-over). Click Text in the selected edit box will turn red. Values can be entered and edited via the keyboard. It is not necessary to enter the unit. Press the <ENTER> key to confirm the entry and display the unit. Changing Values Using Spin Boxes When the mouse pointer is placed over an edit box, a spin box appears. Clicking the up arrow button [▲] increases the value, while clicking the down arrow [▼] decreases it. 270 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components Double-click Selects a number. You can change the selected number using the keyboard. There is no need to enter units. When you press the <Enter> key, the numbers you entered will be set and the units displayed. Enter a number from the keyboard. Set the value with the <Enter> key. Moving with the <Tab> Key If you press <Tab> key while an edit box is selected, the selection will move to the next edit box. If you press <Shift> + <Tab>, the selection moves to the previous edit box. Changing Selections with the Key/Mouse Wheel You can modify values in selected edit boxes using the direction keys or the mouse wheel. • Up and Down Arrow Keys Increases or decreases number settings. • <PageUp> Key/<PageDown> Key Increases or decreases number settings in large increments. The <PageUp> key increases and the <PageDown> key decreases the setting. • <Enter> Key When you press the <Enter> key, the numbers you entered will be confirmed. • <Ctrl> Key + <Enter> Key When you press the <Ctrl> + <Enter> key, the setting will return to its default value. • Mouse Wheel Rolling the mouse wheel upward (away from you) increases the value. Rolling it down (towards you) decreases the value. • Dragging Dragging upward increases the value, while dragging downward decreases it. • <ESC> Key The <ESC> key can be used to cancel a value being entered. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 271 Chapter 5 Components ■ Graph Control Point Displays parameters graphically. When parameters are changed, the graph also changes. In graphs that have control points, you can adjust parameters by dragging the points. On graphs with control points that are limited to movement in one direction only, aligning the mouse pointer with the control point and pressing the mouse button causes the mouse pointer to change to a double-headed arrow pointing in both directions of movement. Change the parameter by dragging in the directions of the arrow. Control points that can be dragged in any direction usually have their position determined by multiple parameters in the component editor. These multiple parameters can be adjusted by dragging the point. When there are multiple control points in the graph, they are identified by their colors. A bar with the same color as each control point can be found below the corresponding knob or edit box. NOTE When a graph that has control points is copied to the User Control Editor or User Module Editor, the controls points will not be displayed. The controllers assigned to the corresponding parameters must also be copied to display the control points. 272 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components Snap About Snap The Snap function records parameters for the component editor, user control editor, and user module editor temporarily. Clicking a button switches the parameter set, setting all parameters in the editor to the status that existed when the parameters were recorded in the memory. You can record the current values for parameters. Furthermore, when you recall a library, it is recorded to the Snap button that is on at that time. For more information about libraries, see “Library” (page 275). Snap Buttons ■ Snap Buttons ([A] through [D]) The Snap buttons allow you to switch between parameter sets. The buttons change in appearance according to their ON/OFF status and to whether or not there were changes to the parameter set from when the editor was started. When there has been no change to the parameter set since the editor was started When a button is selected it lights up. ON OFF When a parameter set that is different than when the editor was started has been recorded to a button The color of the button name changes on buttons for which the parameter set has changed. When a button is selected it lights up. ON OFF DME Designer Owner’s Manual 273 Chapter 5 Components ■ Recording Parameter Sets Recording parameters from the current window The parameters present when the snap button is switched are recorded to the snap button before the switch. 1 Click the snap button ([A] through [D]) that will record the parameter set. This turns it ON. 2 Set the parameters in the editor to the settings you want to record. 3 Click another snap button. Recalling a Library 1 Click the snap button that has recorded the parameter set. This turns it ON. 2 The library is recalled. ■ Switching Parameter Set If you click a snap button that has a parameter set recorded, the system switches to the parameter set recorded there. ■ Copying Parameter Sets Parameter sets can be copied between snap buttons [A]~[D]. • Select from the contextual menu. • Drag and drop. Drag-and-drop copy will also work between components of the same type. 274 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components Library The Library Component editor, user control editor, and user module editor parameters can be saved as library files. By reading back a saved library file, you can reset all the editor parameters to the status they had when the file was saved. Saving in a library file is called “storing,” while bringing back the settings is called “recalling” them. Library files have the following file name extensions: “.cel” for component editors, “.ucl” for user control editors, and “.uml” for user module editors. [Store Library] Button [Recall Library] Button [Recall Library] Menu If you store library files in folders that conform to the following path, they will be automatically displayed in the component editor [Recall Library] menu: “C:\Program Files\YAMAHA\OPT Tools\DME Designer\Editor\Library\Component Group Name\Component Name.” The dialog box used for storing items in the library opens with the library folder displayed. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 275 Chapter 5 Components If you save like this without changing the folder, the item you saved will be displayed on the [Recall Library] menu. When a library is saved, it can be displayed in the component editor for other project files besides the currently open one, and also in new project files. NOTE If you change the [Contents Folder] in the “Preferences” dialog box in the Main Panel window, a “Library” folder will be created in the specified folder, and a folder for each component will be created there. NOTE In the “Save Library File” dialog box, you can specify another folder for saving library files, and save them there. Library files that are saved in another folder also can be recalled by specifying the folder. ■ Library Filenames Because the library filenames are displayed in the [Recall Library] menu, use a filename that helps you understand the contents of the parameter set in the file. When saving in the default folder, there is no need to include the component name in the filename. For example, when you are storing a parameter set in the stereo compressor library, the “Save Library File” dialog will be displayed with the “C:\Program Files\YAMAHA\OPT Tools\DME Designer\Editor\Library\Compressor\Compressor Stereo” folder selected. If you save in that folder, the file you save will be displayed only in the [Recall Library” menu for stereo compressor components only. It will not be displayed in any other library. If you use a filename that makes it easy to understand the parameter contents or the conditions under which they are used, you can select them without confusion when recalling. Storing in the Library The library is the place to store component editor parameters. ■ Editor Window 1 Set the parameters to be stored in the library. 2 Click the [Store Library] button in the component editor. The “Save Library File” dialog box will be displayed. 3 Enter the filename. Select a filename that makes it easy to understand the contents of the parameter set. 4 Specify the folder for saving the file. If you want the saved file displayed on the [Recall Library] menu, do not change the folder for saving. 5 Click the [Save] button. ■ Designer Window Right-click a component or user module in the Designer window to show the contextual menu. Use the [Store Component Library] command to store the library. The menu that appears when the contextual menu [Store Component Library] command is clicked is the same as the menu that appears when the Edit window [Store Library] button is clicked. Specify a file name and save the file. 276 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components Recalling a Library The recall function reads stored parameters into the component editor. ■ Editor Windows You can recall libraries in the component editor, user control editor, and user module editor windows by clicking the [Recall Library] button. When a library is recalled in an editor window, the parameter set is recorded to the selected snap button. 1 Click the snap button ([A] through [D]) that will record the parameter set. 2 Click the [Recall Library] button in the component editor. The [Recall Library] menu will be displayed. 3 Click the library name (filename) in the [Recall Library] menu. The parameters in the library will be recalled. ■ Designer Window If you right-click on a component or user module in the design window, a context menu will be displayed. You can recall a library using the [Recall Component Library] command. If you click [Recall Component Library] in the context menu, the same menu is displayed as when you click the [Recall Library] button in the editor window. If you select a library that is displayed in the submenu, that library is recalled. Not only the library name, but also the effect type is displayed in the submenu that appears when you right-click on an SPX component. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 277 Chapter 5 Components ■ Recalling a Library Stored in a Folder Other Than the Default Libraries not stored in the default folder do not appear on the [Recall Library] menu. You must specify the file you want in order to recall it. 1 Click the [Recall Library] button in the component editor. The [Recall Library] menu will be displayed. 2 Click the [Recall Library] menu [Open File Dialog]. The “Open” dialog box will be displayed. 3 Move to the correct folder and select a library file. 4 Click the [Open] button. 278 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components User Control/User Module Editor User Control The user control function lets you lay out a set of component controls in the Configuration window or User Module window, and create a control window with them. The controls in the user control editor are linked to the controls for the original component. If the parameters are changed in the user control editor, the parameters will change in the same way in the component editor. If parameters are changed in the component editor, the controls in the user control window will also change in the same way. You can create a compact control window by only including controls for parameters that are used frequently. You can also lay out controls for multiple components, so that you can adjust parameters for them from a single window. Component Editor User Control Editor Laid Out Controls Controls Laid Out in the User Control Edit Palette There is also a [Library] button in the user control editor, which you can use to save parameters to the library. User controls are created by selecting [View] menu → [User Control] → [New User Control] in the Main Panel window. Created user controls are displayed in the [View] menu → [User Control] submenu. If you select one, a window will open for it. The controls which can be opened by the user control editor are automatically set according to the user security settings of the currently logged in user. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 279 Chapter 5 Components [User Control] Menu User controls are displayed in the [View] → [User Control] submenu of the Main Panel window. If you click the [User Control] button in the Main Panel window, you will display the same menu as the [View] menu → [User Control] submenu. User Control Name Displays a menu of user controls included in the current configuration of the current zone. Clicking one of the user controls opens the user control editor. A checkmark appears next to already open windows. New User Control When you select the “New User Control” command, the “User Control Manager” dialog box will be displayed. Here you can create, delete, rename, and otherwise manage user controls. For information about the “User Control Manager” dialog box, see page 70. 280 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components Creating New User Controls New user controls are added in the “User Control Manager” dialog box. 1 Click [User Control Manager] on the Main Panel window [Tools] menu. The “User Control Manager” dialog box will be displayed. NOTE You can also display the “User Control Manager” dialog box by clicking the [View] menu → [User Control] → [New User Control] command. 2 Click the [New] button. The “New User Control” dialog box will be displayed. 3 Enter the name for the new user control into the [Name] box. 4 Sets security for User Control. Different settings are provided for individual security levels and users. Security cannot be set higher than the user security level. Click the [User Level] [▼] button to select a security level. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 281 Chapter 5 Components Use [User Name] to select a user. 5 Click the [OK] button. The user control will be created and displayed on the list in the “User Control Manager” dialog box. 6 Click the [OK] button in the “User Control Manager” dialog box. When a new user control is created, it will be displayed in the [View] menu → [User Control] submenu in the Main Panel window. If you click the control, it will be displayed in a user control editor window. [Snap] and [Library] appear appears in a new user control. 282 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components User Control Security Security can be set independently for each User Control. User Control levels higher than the user security level will not be displayed in the menu or the User Control Manager dialog box. The security level settings for both the user control and the user affect editing and display of user controls. ■ User Control Security Level Security 1 ~ 10 can be set for each level or user. Level 1 is the highest level and 10 is the lowest. If the security level for a user control is set to 2, only users at level 1 or level 2 can display or edit it Security levels for user controls can be changed in the “User Control Manager” dialog box by a user who has logged on at a security level equal to or higher than the user control. 1 Click [User Control Manager] on the Main Panel window [Tools] menu. The “User Control Manager” dialog box will be displayed. 2 Changing User Control Security • To Change the Security level Click the [Security Level] box of the User Control to be changed. The security level list will appear. NOTE The levels displayed on the list will differ according to the security level of the user. Click the level to be set for the User Control. The selected level will be displayed in the [Security Level] box. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 283 Chapter 5 Components • Setting Security for Individual Users Click the [User] box of the User Control to be changed. The user list will appear. NOTE The users that can be selected will depend on the user security level. Click the user to be set for the User Control. The selected user name will be displayed in the [User] box. 3 Click the [OK] button. ■ User Security Settings In the “Security” dialog box in the Main Panel window, you can set the user control levels at which to allow or disallow editing and display. A user can edit user controls if a check has been placed for that user in the [Operation Security] → [Edit] checkbox. User controls at a level equal to or lower than the level set in [Operation Security] → [User Control Level] will be displayed in the menu. Using user security, you can set whether user controls will open at logon or when a file is opened. If [Startup User Control] is turned ON, the user control editor will be automatically displayed when files that include user controls are opened. For information about the “Security” dialog box, see “Security (Creating Users and Making User Settings)” on page 55. 284 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components User Module Editor The user module editor lets you make a layout of controls for components arranged in the user module window. For each user module there is one user module editor. The name of the user module is displayed in the title bar. Only components that are arranged in a particular user module can be laid out in the specific control window that is associated with that user module. Both the user module and the control window will have the same name. NOTE You can copy controls from a user module to the user control editor. Component Editor User Module Editor Laid Out Controls Controls Laid Out in the User Control Status Bar Edit Palette ■ Opening a User Module Editor Window Use [Double Click Action] in the “User Module Manager” dialog box or “User Module Properties” dialog box to set the window that will open when you double-click in the Configuration window. If the [Open User Module Editor] checkbox has been turned ON for a user module, a user module editor can be opened for it. For information about the “User Module Manager” dialog box, see page 250. For information about the “User Module Properties” dialog box, see page 181. A User Module can also be opened via the User Module contextual menu in the Designer window. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 285 Chapter 5 Components Operation Mode and Design Mode There are two modes for the user control editor/user module editor and the component editor: “operation mode” and “design mode.” In operation mode you adjust parameters, while in design mode you lay out controls. You can switch between operation mode and design mode using the context menu that is displayed when you right-click in the user control editor/user module editor or component editor. Switches between operation mode and design mode The [Design Mode] command switches the design mode between ON and OFF. A checkmark appears when the design mode is turned ON. If you click in the context menu when the checkmark is present, design mode will turn OFF, and the edit window will return to operation mode. NOTE Only users for whom the [Operation Security] → [Edit] checkbox in the “Security” dialog box has been checked can turn the design mode ON. NOTE You can select controls in the component editor so that you can copy them into the user control editor/user module editor. When you want to select multiple objects, hold down the <Ctrl> key as you click each new object you want to select. 286 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components Status Bar The lock icon will appear in the User Module when security is active. → User Module properties (page 181). → User Module (page 250). The lock icon will appear locked when the password has not been entered, and layouts edited in the Design Mode cannot be saved. When the password is entered it becomes temporarily possible to save the layout. The lock icon will not appear if the [Enable Security] checkbox in the “Properties” dialog box is not checked. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 287 Chapter 5 Components Edit Palette The edit palette is automatically displayed whenever the user control editor/user module editor is active in design mode. Whenever you move the user control editor/user module editor, the edit palette moves together with it. When you turn OFF design mode, the palette disappears. Commands for editing in the user control editor/user module editor are provided on the edit palette. [Design Mode Off] Button [Undo] Button [Redo] Button Control Alignment [Paste] Button [Copy] Button [Cut] Button ■ [Design Mode Off] Button Turns OFF the design mode. ■ [Undo] Button/[Redo] Button Used to undo/redo operations. ■ [Cut] Button/[Copy] Button Cuts or copies the selected controls. → See “Cut/Copy/Paste Controls” on page 303. ■ [Paste] Button Pastes cut or copied controls. → See “Cut/Copy/Paste Controls” on page 303. 288 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Grid Setting Chapter 5 Components ■ Alignment of Controls Aligns the positions of multiple controls. [Picture] Button [Align Left] Button [Align Right] Button [Align To Top] Button [Align To Bottom] Button [TEXT] Button [Box] Button [Ellipse] Button [Frame] Button [Vertical/Center Align] Button [Horizontal/Center Align] Button [Align Vertically] Button [Align Horizontally] Button [Align Left] Button Aligns all selected controls with the left edge of the leftmost selected control. [Align Right] Button Aligns all selected controls with the right edge of the rightmost selected control. [Align To Top] Button Aligns all selected controls with the top edge of the uppermost selected control. [Align To Bottom] Button Aligns all selected controls with the bottom edge of the lowermost selected control. [Align Horizontally] Button This button can be used only when three or more controls are selected. It arranges the controls in a uniform horizontal line. Without changing the position of the leftmost and rightmost control, this button arranges the controls between them at uniform intervals. It puts the same amount of space between each control and its neighbor. [Align Vertically] Button This button can be used only when three or more controls are selected. It arranges the controls in a uniform vertical line. Without changing the position of the uppermost and lowermost control, this button arranges the controls between them at uniform intervals. It puts the same amount of space between each control and its neighbor. [Horizontal/Center Align] Button Aligns the selected controls horizontally with the center position. [Vertical/Center Align] Button Aligns the selected controls vertically with the center position. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 289 Chapter 5 Components ■ [Picture] Button Places a graphic file. ■ [TEXT] Button Places a text box. ■ [Box] Button Places a square. ■ [Ellipse] Button Places an ellipse. ■ [Frame] Button Places a frame. ■ Grid Setting When arranging controls, you can align them along the grid. This menu sets the spacing of the grid. Grid=10 Grid=20 Clicking the [▼] button displays a menu. Click the menu to set the grid spacing. Select [OFF] to turn OFF the grid. NOTE When the grid is turned ON (when any grid item besides OFF is selected), clicking any control that is not aligned with the grid position, will cause it to align with the nearest grid. Please note that after copying multiple controls in one operation from the component editor and adjusting their positions manually, their positions could become disarranged when you select them by clicking on them, if they do not already align with the grid interval. Furthermore, if you change the grid spacing after aligning the positions of controls in the user control editor/user module editor, the controls will be placed into positions that do not align with the grid even if they are arranged using the align buttons. When there are controls that do not align with the grid, turn the grid OFF. 290 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components User Control Editor/User Module Editor Context Menu The context menus that appear when you right-click in a window will differ in operation mode and in design mode. In design mode, other commands will be added, depending on where you click. The context menu for the user module editor contains the [Set User Module As Master Layout] command. ■ Operation Mode Commands that are displayed in the context menus for operation mode will also be displayed in design mode. [Design Mode] Switches between design mode and operation mode. When you are in design mode, a checkmark will appear to the left of the command name. [Peak Hold] Turns the peak hold meter ON or OFF and performs a reset. The ON or OFF setting for peak hold applies to the whole zone. • [On] When you select this, peak hold is turned ON, and a checkmark appears next to it. If you select this item while it is checked, peak hold is turned OFF. • [Reset] Resets peak hold. NOTE Peak hold is a function that makes it easy to see the maximum signal value by lighting up at the level of the maximum value as the signal peak comes in. [Close All Editor Windows] Closes all component editor windows. [Open Parameter Link] Opens the “Parameter Link” window. For information about the Parameter Link window, see “Parameter Link” (page 73). DME Designer Owner’s Manual 291 Chapter 5 Components [Parameter Link Mode] A checkmark appears when this is turned ON. Turning this ON changes to parameter link mode, where group parameters can be linked. When this is turned OFF, group parameters will not be linked, and they can be changed individually. Turn this OFF when editing the offset for each parameter. Parameter link mode is linked to the [Parameter Link] check box in the Parameter Link window. [Set User Module As Master Layout] (User Module Editor Only) Sets the layout of active user module editor as the master layout. The window size and the background will be applied to user module editors created in the future. ■ The Context Menu Displayed in Design Mode When You Right-Click an Empty Location [Tab Order] When using user control editors or user module editors, this function displays the order in which you move through them by pressing the <Tab> key. When you select this command, numbers are displayed next to the edit boxes. A checkmark appears next to [Tab Order] in the context menu. To exit tab order settings, click [Tab Order] the context menu or click anywhere besides a tab order number in the user control editor. Clicking the displayed numbers changes the order. The numbers are changed in the order that they are clicked. To exit tab order settings, click [Tab Order] the context menu or click anywhere besides a tab order number in the user control editor. → See “Changing the Tab Order” on page 313. [Set Background Image] Sets a background image for a window. Clicking here displays the “Background Image” dialog box. → See “Setting Background Images for Windows” on page 295. 292 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components ■ The Context Menu Displayed in Design Mode When You Right-Click a Control [Open Original Component Editor] This menu is displayed when you right-click a control in design mode. It opens the component editor for the control you clicked. [Add Parameter to Parameter Link] Adds a control to the parameter link group. Click the group name displayed in the submenu. See “Creating Parameter Links” (page 314). If you click a parameter link group name, a control is added to that group. [Property] Opens the properties dialog box for the control. → See “Control Properties” on page 303. NOTE There some controls, such as edit boxes and sliders, that do not display the [Property] command. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 293 Chapter 5 Components Changing the Window Size In design mode, you can change the window size of the user control editor. If you align the mouse pointer with a side or corner of the window, its shape will change into a double-headed arrow. When the arrow is shaped like this, dragging it will change the size of the window. Even if you change the width of the window, the library button will remain where it is, in the upper right corner. 294 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components Setting Background Images for Windows The default color for the user control editor/user module editor window background is black, the same as for the component editor window. However, you can change the color or display an image in the background. These settings are made in the “Background Image” dialog box. To display this dialog box, right-click in the user control editor window while in design mode, then click [Set Background Image] on the displayed context menu. ■ [Default] Sets the background color to black, the same as the component editor. Select this if you have set the background with [Color] or [Image], and you want to return to the original background. ■ [Color] Sets the color of the background. Use the [Select Color] button to select a color. [Select Color] Button Clicking here displays the “Select color” dialog box. This sets the color of the background. For information about the “Select color” dialog box, see page 203. NOTE If you select a light color, it may be difficult to see the grid. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 295 Chapter 5 Components ■ [Image] Displays an image for the background. You can use image files in the following formats: BMP (.bmp), PNG (.png), XPM (.xpm), and JPEG (.jpg). Use the [Select Image] button to select an image file. [Select Image] Button Clicking here displays the “Select Image” dialog box. Here you can select an image file to be displayed as the window background. [Layout] Box This box displays a list where you can select how the image file will be displayed. • [Center] Centers the image in the window. • [Tile] Displays multiple copies of the image side-by-side until the available space is filled. If the image file is smaller than the window, it will be displayed repeatedly like tiles on a wall. • [Fit] Expands or reduces the size of the image to match the size of the window where it will be displayed. [File] Box Specifies a path for the image file. Click the [Select Image] button and select an image file. The path will be automatically entered. 296 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components Placing Controls Controls can be placed when you are in the design mode. You can turn the design mode ON and OFF by right-clicking in the user control editor/user module editor, or component editor, then clicking the [Design Mode] command in the context menu that is displayed. You can place controls by dragging them from the component editor or by using the copy and paste commands. Knob Edit Box Slider Buttons Text Solid Frame Graph [Library] Edit Palette ■ Selecting Controls If you click a control in the component editor while in design mode, the control will be selected and a red frame will be displayed around it. Controls like knobs, sliders, edit boxes, and labels are all separate objects. Only the item clicked will be selected. If you hold down the <Ctrl> key while clicking, you can select multiple controls and labels. If you use <Ctrl> + click on a selected control, it will cancel that control’s selection. If you position the mouse in an empty location on the sheet and start dragging from there, a frame will be displayed as the pointer moves. All controls enclosed by that frame will be selected. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 297 Chapter 5 Components NOTE If you drag controls like knobs and sliders, edit boxes and labels that show parameter types, and place them one-by-one in the user control editor, they must be arranged in the user control editor. If you select multiple items and drag them, you can copy them as a group into the user control editor, keeping their original arrangement. When copying multiple controls from a single component editor, if you select all the controls you want copy and drag them together as a unit, their original positional relationship and tab order will be maintained. ■ Placing Controls by Dragging Them (User Control Editor) You can drag the controls you want to copy from the component editor to the user control editor. 1 Open the component edit window that has the controls you will be placing in the user control box. 2 Open the user control editor. User control names are displayed in the [View] → [User Control] submenu in the Main Panel window Click a user control name to open its window. 3 Right-click in the component editor or the user control editor. The context menu will be displayed. 4 Click [Design Mode] on the menu. Design mode will be turned ON. 5 Drag the controls from the component editor to the user control editor. 298 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components Arrange the controls in the user control editor. ■ Placing Controls by Dragging Them (User Module Editor) You can drag the controls you want to copy from the component editor window in the user module to the user module editor. 1 Create a user module, then arrange and connect the components for it. 2 Store the user module by checking [Double Click Action] ➞ [Open User Module Editor] in the Store dialog box (see “Saving User Modules” on page 255 for details about storing user modules). 3 Double-click a user module in the Configuration window. The user module editor and edit windows for the components arranged in the user module will be displayed. 4 Right-click in the component editor or user module editor, then click the [Design Mode] command in the context menu. Design mode will be turned ON. 5 Drag the controls from the component editor to the user module editor. Arrange the controls in the user control editor. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 299 Chapter 5 Components ■ Placing Controls Using Copy and Paste Copy the controls in the component editor and paste in the user control editor or user module editor. To copy controls in the component editor, press the [Copy] command shortcut keys, <Ctrl> + <C>. To paste in the user control editor or user module editor, press the [Paste] command shortcut key, <Ctrl> + <V>, or the [Paste] button on the edit palette. 1 Click on the source component editor window to make it active, then select the control or controls you want to copy. 2 Press the <C> key while holding down the <Ctrl> key. The selected controls will be copied to the clipboard. 3 With the target user control editor or user module editor active, press the <V> key while holding down the <Ctrl> key. You can also paste by clicking the [Paste] button on the edit palette. The controls will be copied. 300 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components ■ When You Cannot Copy Regardless of whether you drag or use copy and paste, you cannot create multiple copies from the same single component. If you drag controls that are already copied into the user control editor or user module editor, the mouse pointer will change into the “unavailable” mark (a circle with a diagonal slash), indicating that you cannot copy. You can copy more than one component of the same type into the user control editor, as long as they come from different components located in the configuration or user module. Controls for components arranged in the configuration can be copied only to the user control editor. Controls for components arranged in a user module can be copied to both the user control editor and the user module. ■ Order of Controls Controls newly pasted in the user control editor will be displayed above any previously pasted controls they overlap. The tab order for edit boxes will be the order in which they were pasted. Because the order cannot be changed, paste solid frames with parameter groups arranged on them before copying controls. NOTE In the component editor, you can select multiple controls using <Ctrl> + click or by dragging. Once controls are copied, they will be pasted in the order in which they were copied. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 301 Chapter 5 Components Moving and Aligning Controls In the user control editor or user module editor, you can move or align copied controls. ■ Selecting Controls In the user control editor or user module editor, controls are selected in the same way as in the component editor. Click a control to select it, or press <Ctrl> + click to select multiple controls. If you use <Ctrl> + click on a selected control, it will cancel that control's selection. If you position the mouse in an empty location in the user control editor or user module editor and start dragging from there, a frame will be displayed as the pointer moves. All controls enclosed by that frame will be selected. A red frame will be drawn around the selected controls. ■ Moving Controls Move selected controls by dragging them or by pressing the arrow keys on your keyboard. When you select multiple controls using <Shift> + click, you can move all of them at the same time. Dragging When grid is ON, the upper left of the dragged controls will automatically align with the grid. When dragging, the coordinates displayed here refer to the upper left corner of the object being dragged. The “Distance to Right” and “Distance to Bottom” are displayed in pixel units, using the upper-left of the window as a reference point. When multiple controls are selected and dragged, the coordinates are those of the upper-left corner of the control where the mouse is aligned. Arrow Keys When the grid is ON, the arrow keys move controls a grid unit at a time. When the grid is OFF, controls are moved one pixel at a time. ■ Alignment You can align controls using the following alignment buttons on the edit palette: [Align Left], [Align Right], [Align To Top], [Align To Bottom], [Align Horizontally], [Align Vertically], [Horizontal/Center Align], and [Vertical/Center Align]. You can only use the [Align Horizontally] or [Align Vertically] buttons when three or more controls are selected. 302 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components Cut/Copy/Paste Controls You can edit controls arranged in the user control editor or user module editor using the [Cut], [Copy], and [Paste] commands in the edit palette. ■ Cut Cuts controls arranged in the user control editor. Select one or more controls, then press the [Cut] button on the edit palette ■ Copy Copies controls arranged in the user control editor or user module editor. Select one or more controls, then press the [Copy] button on the edit palette. ■ Paste Pastes cut or copied controls. Click the [Paste] button on the edit palette. If you cannot paste, the button color turns pale. ■ Delete Controls can be deleted by selecting them and pressing the <Delete> key. Undo and Redo Commands During Editing You can undo or redo control movements, size changes, or deletions using the [Undo] and [Redo] commands in the [Edit] menu. NOTE If you close an editor window, you will no longer be able to undo and redo operations performed there. Control Properties A properties dialog box will open when you either double click a controller in the User Control Editor or User Module Editor, or right-click the controller and select [Properties] from the contextual menu. Here you can specify a design for the controller. Multiple properties of the same type can be set at the same time by clicking the controllers while holding the <Ctrl> key and then opening the properties dialog box. Edited items are shown in bold text until you either click [OK] or [Cancel]. NOTE Sliders have no property settings. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 303 Chapter 5 Components ■ “Knob Properties” Dialog Box When you right-click on a knob, then select [Properties] from the context menu, the “Knob Properties” dialog box will be displayed. This dialog box sets the size of the knob. [Size] Displays a list where you can select the knob size. Select [Large], [Medium], [Small], or [Very Small]. NOTE You can change the size of a knob by dragging one of the marks at the four corners (top, bottom, left, right) of the knob in the user control editor. [Color] Select a color from the list: [White], [Red], [Yellow], [Green], [Blue], or [Violet]. ■ “Toggle Button Properties” Dialog Box The Toggle Button Properties dialog box will appear when you either double click the ON/OFF button or right-click it and select [Properties] from the contextual menu. This sets the text displayed by the button, along with the color of the button. [Text] box Enter the text to be displayed by the button. You can set different text for when the button is ON and for when it is OFF. [Size] Select a button size from the list: [Small (37x11)], [Small (51x11], [Medium (74x11)], [Medium (74x22)], or [Large (111x33)]. 304 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components [Color] Displays a list where you can select the color of the button. If you click the [▼], a list of button colors will be displayed. [Text Font] Button Sets the font, size and style. Clicking here displays the “Select Font” dialog box. For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see page 202. ■ “Radio Button Properties” Dialog Box The Radio Button Properties dialog box will appear when you either double click a radio button or right-click it and select [Properties] from the contextual menu. You can set the button's color, size, and font. [Color] Select a color from the list: [White], [Red], [Yellow], [Green], [Blue], or [Violet]. [Size] Select a button size from the list: [Small (37x11)], [Small (44x11], [Medium (75x11)], [Medium (74x22)], or [Large (111x33)]. [Text] Box Enter the text to be displayed by the button. [Text Font] Button Sets the font, size and style. Clicking here displays the “Select Font” dialog box. For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see page 202. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 305 Chapter 5 Components ■ “Text Properties” Dialog Box The Text Properties dialog box will appear when you either double click a parameter name or other text, or right-click it and select [Properties] from the contextual menu. Here you can enter the text to be displayed. [Text] Box Enter the text to be displayed by the button. [Text Font] button Click this button to display the “Select Font” dialog box. Sets the font, font size, and style. For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see page 203. [Alignment] Specifies the horizontal alignment of the text: [Left], [Center], or [Right]. [Rotate] Rotates the text by the specified angle: [-90], [0], [90], or [180]. [Link Component Editor] Specifies the component editor to be opened when text is clicked. [Text Color] Button Click this button to display the “Select Color” dialog box. Sets the color of the text. For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203. 306 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components ■ Edit Box Properties The Edit Box Properties dialog box will appear when you either double click an edit box or rightclick it and select [Properties] from the contextual menu. Here you can set the edit box size. [Size] Select an edit box size from the list: [Large], [Medium], or [Small]. ■ Level Meter Properties The Level Meter Properties dialog box will appear when you either double click a level meter or right-click it and select [Properties] from the contextual menu. Here you can specify the number of meter segments and scale. [Segment] Select a number of meter segments from the list: [2], [6], or [60]. [Scale] Select the type of scale to be displayed beside the meter from the list. This option is only available when [Segment] is set to 60. ■ “Solid Frame Properties” Dialog Box The Solid Frame Properties dialog box will appear when you right-click a solid frame and select [Properties] from the contextual menu. Here you can enter the text to be displayed. Here you can set the frame size and divider location. Partition Line Sub-Partition Line Frame Size The width is set using the [Width] and the height is set using [Height]. The units are pixels. NOTE You can change the size of a frame by dragging one of the marks at the four corners (top, bottom, left, right) of the frame in the user control editor. Partition Line/Sub-Partition Line Sets partition lines within the frame. [Partition Line] is a long partition line displayed from end to end, and [Sub-Partition Line] is a short partition line. • [Direction] Select the direction of a partition line from the list. [Vertical] inserts a vertical partition line and [Horizontal] inserts a horizontal partition line. When [None] is select, partition lines are not displayed. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 307 Chapter 5 Components • [Position] Displays the currently set line position. Displays the number of pixels from the top of the solid frame when [Vertical] is selected for the [Direction], and the number of pixels from the left of the solid frame when [Horizontal] is selected. NOTE You can change the position of a partition line by dragging one of the marks on the line in the user control editor. • [Add] Button If you set the position of the partition line in the box on the right and click the [Add] button, the partition line will be added and displayed in the [Position] list. • [Delete] Button Deletes the partition line selected in the [Position] list. ■ “Color Frame Properties” Dialog Box The Color Frame Properties dialog box will appear when you right-click a solid frame and select [Properties] from the contextual menu. Here you can enter the text to be displayed. Here you can set the frame size and divider location. Frame Size The width is set using the [Width] and the height is set using [Height]. The units are pixels and the minimum value is 3. NOTE You can change the size of a frame by dragging one of the marks at the four corners (top, bottom, left, right) of the frame in the user control editor. Frame Color Sets the color of the color frame. Click this button to display the “Select color” dialog box. For information about the “Select color” dialog box, see page 203. Fill Color Sets the frame fill color. Click the [Select Color] button to display the “Select color” dialog box. Refer to “Select Color” Dialog Box in the Object section on page 203 for information on this dialog box. Line Width Sets the thickness of the lines at [Top]/[Left]/[Right]/[Bottom]. Set “0” to display no lines. 308 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components ■ User Picture Properties Dialog Box Right-click the image and select [Properties] from the contextual menu to display the User Picture Properties dialog box. [File Path] Box Displays the path to the graphic file. [Select File] Button Selects a graphic file. Size • [Width] Specifies the width in pixels. • [Height] Specifies the height in pixels. • [Reset] Button Click to display the graphic at it's original size. • [Stretch] When ON, the graphic will be enlarged when a size that is bigger than it's original size is specified. [Link Component Editor] When ON, clicking the [Select Component] button selects the editor that is opened when the graphic is clicked. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 309 Chapter 5 Components ■ Text Properties Dialog Box Right-click the text box and select [Properties] from the contextual menu to display the Text Properties dialog box. [Text] Box Displays and edits the text to be displayed. [Text Font] Selects the font. Click to display the Select Font dialog box. Refer to “Select Font” Dialog Box on page 202 for more information on the Select Font dialog box. [Text Color] Button Sets the text color. Click to display the Select Color dialog box. [Alignment] Selects [Left], [Center], or [Right] text alignment. [Rotate] Rotates the text box. [Link Component Editor] When ON, clicking the [Select Component] button selects the editor that is opened when the text box is clicked. 310 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components ■ Box Properties Dialog Box Right-click the box and select [Properties] from the contextual menu to display the Box Properties dialog box. Box Size • [Width] Specifies the width in pixels. • [Height] Specifies the height in pixels. Box Style • [Style] Sets the style of the object. Select [Plain], [Raised], or [Sunken] from the list. • [Round Corner] Turn ON to produce a round-cornered box. Use [Curve] to select the degree of roundness. Line • [Type] Select a type of frame line from the list: [Solid], [Dash], [Dot], [Dash Dot]. Or [Dash Dot Dot]. • [Size] Sets the thickness of the frame line in pixels. The range is from 1 to 100. • [Select Color] Button Sets the color of the frame line. Click to display the “Select color” dialog box. Refer to “Select Color” Dialog Box on page 203 for more information on the Select Color dialog box. Fill Color • [Select Color] Button Sets the frame fill color. Click to display the “Select color” dialog box. Refer to “Select Color” Dialog Box on page 203 for more information on the Select Color dialog box. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 311 Chapter 5 Components ■ Ellipse Properties Dialog Box Right-click the ellipse and select [Properties] from the contextual menu to display the Ellipse Properties dialog box. Ellipse Size • [Width] Specifies the width in pixels. • [Height] Specifies the height in pixels. Line • [Type] Select a type of frame line from the list: [Solid], [Dash], [Dot], [Dash Dot]. Or [Dash Dot Dot]. • [Size] Sets the thickness of the frame line in pixels. The range is from 1 to 100. • [Select Color] Button Sets the color of the frame line. Click to display the “Select color” dialog box. Refer to “Select Color” Dialog Box on page 203 for more information on the Select color dialog box. Fill Color Sets the ellipse fill color when ON. • [Select Color] Button Sets the ellipse fill color. Click to display the “Select color” dialog box. Refer to “Select Color” Dialog Box on page 203 for more information on the Select color dialog box. 312 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components Changing the Tab Order The tab order for controls is determined by the order in which they were pasted into the user control editor or user module editor. If you right-click the user control editor or user module editor, you can check or change the tab order using the [Tab Order] command on the context menu. If you select the [Tab Order] command, tab order numbers will be displayed at the upper-left of each edit box. Clicking the displayed numbers changes the order. 1 Right-click in the user control editor or user module editor. The context menu will be displayed. 2 Click [Tab Order] in the context menu. Numbers for the current tab order are displayed to the upper-left of each edit box. 3 Click the tab order numbers in the order in which you want to set the tab order. Even if you do not want to change tab order number 1, click all the numbers in the order you desire, starting from number 1. When you click on each number, it will change to the number that reflects the order in which it was clicked. 4 Once you have finished specifying the order, click somewhere within the window where there is no tab number. The tab order numbers will disappear. The changed tab order will apply the next time DME Designer is started. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 313 Chapter 5 Components Creating Parameter Links You can group controls (parameters) and link their parameters. You can create parameter link groups and add controls to them in the component editor. Parameter link settings are made in the Parameter Link window. For information about parameter links and the Parameter Link window, see “Parameter Link” (page 73). NOTE A parameter can belong to one group only. Furthermore, only parameters of the same type can be grouped. ■ Creating Parameter Links If you right-click on a control, a context menu will be displayed. The [Global Link] → [Add Group] and [Local Link] → [Add Group] commands create new groups. Controls can be added by right-clicking. ■ Adding Controls to a Group If you right-click a control in the component editor, a context menu will be displayed. You can create groups or add controls using commands in the [Add Parameter to Parameter Link] submenu. Groups that do not have the same type of parameters will be grayed out and cannot be selected. Global Link The group names for global link groups are displayed in the [Global Link] submenu. When you click a group name, a control is added to the group. 314 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components Local Link The group names for local like groups are displayed in the [Local Link] submenu. When you click a group name, a control is added to the group. ■ Adding Multiple Controls You can select multiple controls in Design Mode. When multiple controls are selected, multiple parameters can be added to a group simultaneously. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 315 Chapter 6 Component Guide Crossover Separates input signals into multiple frequency channels and outputs them. The following five types of components are available in the Crossover group: 2 Way, 3 Way, 4 Way, 5 Way, and 6 Way. Crossover components have a single input and multiple outputs. Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. Crossover component 1 3 2 5 7 ) ! 6 4 @ 8 9 Name 1 Crossover Curve Section Displays the level of each frequency band, distinguished by color. Parameter Setting Range Function 2 Input Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the input signal level. 3 Output Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level for each frequency band. 4 Mute ON/OFF Mutes the output signal level for each frequency band. 5 Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the output signal for each frequency band. Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the cross frequency between each frequency band. 6 316 Function Frequency DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide 7 Type Thru 6 dB/Oct 12 dB/Oct AdjustGc 12 dB/Oct Butrwrth 12 dB/Oct Bessel 12 dB/Oct Linkwitz 18 dB/Oct AdjustGc 18 dB/Oct Butrwrth 18 dB/Oct Bessel 24 dB/Oct AdjustGc 24 dB/Oct Butrwrth 24 dB/Oct Bessel 24 dB/Oct Linkwitz 36 dB/Oct AdjustGc 36 dB/Oct Butrwrth 36 dB/Oct Bessel 48 dB/Oct AdjustGc 48 dB/Oct Butrwrth 48 dB/Oct Bessel 48 dB/Oct Linkwitz Sets the attenuation for each octave and the filter type. [THRU] turns off the filter. 8 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the LPF cutoff frequency. 9 Gc -6 dB to +6 dB When [AdjustGc] (Adjustable Gc) is selected for [Type], this sets the gain for the cutoff frequency. Type Thru 6 dB/Oct 12 dB/Oct AdjustGc 12 dB/Oct Butrwrth 12 dB/Oct Bessel 12 dB/Oct Linkwitz 18 dB/Oct AdjustGc 18 dB/Oct Butrwrth 18 dB/Oct Bessel 24 dB/Oct AdjustGc 24 dB/Oct Butrwrth 24 dB/Oct Bessel 24 dB/Oct Linkwitz 36 dB/Oct AdjustGc 36 dB/Oct Butrwrth 36 dB/Oct Bessel 48 dB/Oct AdjustGc 48 dB/Oct Butrwrth 48 dB/Oct Bessel 48 dB/Oct Linkwitz Sets the attenuation for each octave and the filter type. [THRU] turns off the filter. ! Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the HPF cutoff frequency. @ Gc -6 dB to +6 dB When [AdjustGc] (Adjustable Gc) is selected for [Type], this sets the gain for the cutoff frequency. ) LPF HPF The number of output channels varies according to the component variation. 2 Way Low/High 3 Way Low/Mid/High 4 Way Low/Low-Mid/High-Mid/High 5 Way Sub-Low/Low/Low-Mid/High-Mid/High 6 Way Sub-Low/Low/Low-Mid/Mid/High-Mid/High Set the attenuation curve for the lowest band and the middle bands with the Low Pass Filter (LPF) and High Pass Filter (HPF), and the highest band with HPF. Each frequency band has its own color, with Low being red, Mid being green, and so on. These correspond to the colors of the lines on the graph. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 317 Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ Graphic Control Points The graph control points show [Output Level] and [Frequency]. As you modify the parameters using the knobs and edit boxes, the control points move. Also, as you drag the points, the [Output Level] and [Frequency] parameters reflect the changes you make. You can adjust the [Output Level] parameter by vertically dragging the control point in the center of each curve. Changing the [Output Level] Parameter You can adjust the [Frequency] parameter by horizontally dragging the control point at the intersection of the curves for each frequency band. Changing the [Frequency] Parameter 318 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ LFP/HPF [Type] sets the attenuation slope and the filter type for the LPF and HPF. The selected items are displayed on the buttons. Clicking these buttons displays a menu. Combinations of six slope types and four filter types are available. [6dB/Oct], [12dB/Oct], [18dB/Oct], [24dB/Oct], [36dB/Oct], and [48dB/Oct] set the attenuation per octave. A low value produces gentle attenuation. A large value produces sudden attenuation. Type • THRU No filter is applied. There is no attenuation, which produces a level line at all frequencies. • AdjustGc (Adjustable Gc) With this setting, you can adjust Gc (gain on the cutoff frequency) between -6 dB and +6 dB. If you set -3 dB it becomes a Butterworth filter. If you set -6 dB, it becomes Linkwitz-Riley filter. When you select Adjustable Gc, the Gc knob is displayed. • Butrwrth (Butterworth) This filter has the most general characteristics. The pass band is flat and the gain for the cutoff frequency is -3 dB. • Bessel For curves where phase characteristics are important, Bessel has gentler attenuation than Butterworth, and there is little distortion of the waveform when square waves are passed through. • Linkwitz (Linkwitz-Riley) As second-order filters, the sum of the output voltages for LPF and HPF have a gain of 0 dB across the entire band. The pass band is flat, but the cutoff frequency gain is -6 dB. Butterworth Linkwitz-Riley Bessel DME Designer Owner’s Manual 319 Chapter 6 Component Guide Crossover Processor A crossover processor consists of a crossover, delay, parametric equalizer, and compressor. After the input signal is processed by the crossover, effects of the delay, parametric equalizer, and compressor are applied to each frequency band. The following two types are available in the Crossover Processor group: Crossover Processor and Crossover Processor II. Crossover Processor The following five types of components are available in the Crossover Processor group: 2 Way, 3 Way, 4 Way, 5 Way, and 6 Way. Crossover processors have a single input and 2 to 6 outputs. Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. Band numbers may vary depending on the component, but they share a common configuration in the component editor. If you click the [Crossover], [Compressor], [PEQ], or [Delay] button in the [Navigator] section, an editor for the crossover, compressor, parametric equalizer, or delay will be displayed in a separate window. A separate component editor will open for each output channel (such as Low or Mid) when you click on the compressor, parametric equalizer, or delay. Component editor for Crossover Processor 2 3 4 1 6 5 7 8 Section 1 320 Navigator Parameter Setting Range Function Crossover -- This opens the crossover editor window. 2 Delay -- This opens the delay editor window. 3 PEQ -- This opens the parametric equalizer editor window. 4 Compressor -- This opens the compressor editor window. 5 Input Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the input signal level. 6 Output Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the output signal level for each frequency band. 7 Mute ON/OFF Mutes the signal for each frequency band. 8 Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the output signal for each frequency band. DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide The output number varies according to the component variation. 2 Way Low/High 3 Way Low/Mid/High 4 Way Low/Low-Mid/High-Mid/High 5 Way Sub-Low/Low/Low-Mid/High-Mid/High 6 Way Sub-Low/Low/Low-Mid/Mid/High-Mid/High Set the attenuation curve for the lowest band and the middle bands with the Low Pass Filter (LPF) and High Pass Filter (HPF), and the highest band with HPF. Each frequency band has its own color, with Low being red, Mid being green, and so on. These correspond to the colors of the lines on the graph. ■ Crossover When you click the [Crossover] button for the crossover processor, it opens the crossover editor window. [Crossover Processor-Crossover] editor window 1 2 6 7 3 8 4 5 Name 1 Crossover Curve Section 2 Function Frequency Displays the level of each frequency channel, distinguished by color. Parameter Frequency Setting Range 20 Hz to 20 kHz Function Sets the cross frequency between each frequency band. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 321 Chapter 6 Component Guide 3 Type Thru 6 dB/Oct 12 dB/Oct AdjustGc 12 dB/Oct Butrwrth 12 dB/Oct Bessel 12 dB/Oct Linkwitz 18 dB/Oct AdjustGc 18 dB/Oct Butrwrth 18 dB/Oct Bessel 24 dB/Oct AdjustGc 24 dB/Oct Butrwrth 24 dB/Oct Bessel 24 dB/Oct Linkwitz 36 dB/Oct AdjustGc 36 dB/Oct Butrwrth 36 dB/Oct Bessel 48 dB/Oct AdjustGc 48 dB/Oct Butrwrth 48 dB/Oct Bessel 48 dB/Oct Linkwitz Sets the attenuation for each octave and the filter type. [THRU] turns off the filter. 4 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the LPF cutoff frequency. 5 Gc -6 dB to +6 dB When [AdjustGc] (Adjustable Gc) is selected for [Type], this sets the gain for the cutoff frequency. Type Thru 6 dB/Oct 12 dB/Oct AdjustGc 12 dB/Oct Butrwrth 12 dB/Oct Bessel 12 dB/Oct Linkwitz 18 dB/Oct AdjustGc 18 dB/Oct Butrwrth 18 dB/Oct Bessel 24 dB/Oct AdjustGc 24 dB/Oct Butrwrth 24 dB/Oct Bessel 24 dB/Oct Linkwitz 36 dB/Oct AdjustGc 36 dB/Oct Butrwrth 36 dB/Oct Bessel 48 dB/Oct AdjustGc 48 dB/Oct Butrwrth 48 dB/Oct Bessel 48 dB/Oct Linkwitz Sets the attenuation for each octave and the filter type. [THRU] turns off the filter. 7 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the HPF cutoff frequency. 8 Gc -6 dB to +6 dB When [AdjustGc] (Adjustable Gc) is selected for [Type], this sets the gain for the cutoff frequency. 6 322 LPF HPF DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ Delay When you click the [Delay] button for the crossover processor, it opens the delay editor window. Here you can set the delay for each frequency band. [Crossover Processor - Delay] editor window 1 2 5 3 4 Parameter Setting Range Function 1 Delay Sets the delay time. ms: 0 to 500 Sample: the range depends on the Fs value. Meter: 0 to 171.8 Feet: 0 to 563.6 Frame: the range depends on the Frame value. Beat: the range depends on the Beat value. 2 Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level for each channel 3 On ON/OFF Turns delay ON. 4 Mute ON/OFF Mutes the signal for each frequency band. 5 Delay Scale ms Sample Meter Feet Frame Beat Selects the units for setting the delay time. The selected button will light up, and the units in the [Delay] edit box will change. If [Beat] is selected, use the knob to set the BPM (beats/minute). DME Designer Owner’s Manual 323 Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ Parametric Equalizer When you click [PEQ] button for the crossover processor, it opens the parametric equalizer editor window. Here you can make parametric equalizer settings for each frequency band. [Crossover Processor-PEQ] editor window 1 2 7 3 4 5 6 Name 1 PEQ Curve Parameter 324 Function Displays the PEQ curve. Setting Range Function 2 Type PEQ L.SHELF 6 dB/Oct L.SHELF 12 dB/Oct H.SHELF 6 dB/Oct H.SHELF 12 dB/Oct HPF LPF Select the filter type from a menu. 3 Q: 0.1 to 16.0 Sets the frequency band width for each band. 4 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the frequency for each band. 5 Gain -18 dB to +18 dB Sets the gain for each band. 6 Bypass ON/OFF Turns ON bypass for each band. 7 PEQ On ON/OFF Turns the PEQ ON. DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ Compressor When you click the [Compressor] button for the crossover processor, it opens the compressor editor window. Here you can make compressor settings for each frequency band. [Crossover Processor-Compressor] editor window 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 ) Name Function 1 Compressor Curve Displays results graphically. The horizontal axis is the input signal level, and the vertical axis is the output level. 2 Gain Reduction Meter Displays the gain reduction attenuation. 3 Output Meter Displays the output signal level. Parameter Setting Range Function 4 Threshold -54 dB to ±0 dB Sets the threshold value. 5 Ratio 1:1 to ∞:1 Sets the compression ratio. 6 Knee HARD, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 Sets the way compression is applied. 7 Attack 0 to 120 ms Sets the attack time. 8 Release 44.1 kHz: 6 ms to 46 s 48 kHz: 5 ms to 42.3 s 88.2 kHz: 3 ms to 23 s 96 kHz: 3 ms to 21.1 s Sets the release time. The setting range may very, depending on the operating frequency. 9 Gain ±0 dB to +18 dB Sets the output gain. ) On ON/OFF Turns the compressor ON. When you turn this button OFF, the compressor is bypassed. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 325 Chapter 6 Component Guide Crossover Processor II The following five types of components are available in the Crossover Processor II group: 2 Way, 3 Way, 4 Way, 5 Way, and 6 Way. Crossover processor II components have a single input and 2 to 6 outputs. Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The number of bands may vary depending on the component, but they share a common configuration in the component editor. There are input and output level meters in the upper part of the window. If you click the [Crossover], [Delay], [PEQ], or [Compressor] button in the [Navigator] section, an editor for the crossover, delay, parametric equalizer, or compressor will be displayed in a separate window. A separate component editor will open for each output channel (such as Low or Mid) when you click on the delay, parametric equalizer, or compressor. Crossover Processor II 1 2 3 4 7 8 9 Name 6 ) Function 1 Input Meter Displays the input signal level. 2 Output Meter Displays the output signal level. Section 3 Input 4 5 Output 6 326 5 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Parameter Setting Range Function Gain -∞ to +10 dB Sets the input signal level. Mute ON/OFF Mutes the input signal. Gain -∞ to +10 dB Sets the output signal level for each frequency band. Mute ON/OFF Mutes the output signal for each frequency band. Chapter 6 Component Guide Name 7 Navigator Function Crossover -- This opens the crossover editor window. 8 Delay -- This opens the delay editor window. 9 PEQ -- This opens the parametric equalizer editor window. ) Compressor -- This opens the compressor editor window. ■ Crossover When you click the [Crossover] button for the crossover processor, it opens the crossover editor window. Crossover Processor II component editor 1 2 3 4 8 5 9 ) 6 7 Name 1 Function Crossover Curve Section Displays the level of each frequency band, distinguished by color. Parameter Setting Range Function 2 Frequency Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the cross frequency between each frequency band. 3 Polarity Polarity Normal/Inverted Reverses the output signal phase for each frequency band. 4 Mute Mute ON/OFF Mutes the signal for each frequency band. This is linked to the Mute setting in the original window. The display appears as a dotted line when muted. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 327 Chapter 6 Component Guide 5 Type Thru 6 dB/Oct 12 dB/Oct AdjustGc 12 dB/Oct Butrwrth 12 dB/Oct Bessel 12 dB/Oct Linkwitz 18 dB/Oct AdjustGc 18 dB/Oct Butrwrth 18 dB/Oct Bessel 24 dB/Oct AdjustGc 24 dB/Oct Butrwrth 24 dB/Oct Bessel 24 dB/Oct Linkwitz 36 dB/Oct AdjustGc 36 dB/Oct Butrwrth 36 dB/Oct Bessel 48 dB/Oct AdjustGc 48 dB/Oct Butrwrth 48 dB/Oct Bessel 48 dB/Oct Linkwitz Sets the attenuation for each octave and the filter type. [THRU] turns off the filter. 6 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the LPF cutoff frequency. 7 Gc -6 dB to 6 dB When [Adjustable Gc] is selected for [Type], this sets the gain for the cutoff frequency. Type Thru 6 dB/Oct 12 dB/Oct AdjustGc 12 dB/Oct Butrwrth 12 dB/Oct Bessel 12 dB/Oct Linkwitz 18 dB/Oct AdjustGc 18 dB/Oct Butrwrth 18 dB/Oct Bessel 24 dB/Oct AdjustGc 24 dB/Oct Butrwrth 24 dB/Oct Bessel 24 dB/Oct Linkwitz 36 dB/Oct AdjustGc 36 dB/Oct Butrwrth 36 dB/Oct Bessel 48 dB/Oct AdjustGc 48 dB/Oct Butrwrth 48 dB/Oct Bessel 48 dB/Oct Linkwitz Sets the attenuation for each octave and the filter type. [THRU] turns off the filter. 9 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the HPF cutoff frequency. ) Gc -6 dB to 6 dB When [Adjustable Gc] is selected for [Type], this sets the gain for the cutoff frequency. 8 328 LPF HPF DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ Delay When you click the [Delay] button for the crossover processor, it opens the delay editor window. Here you can set the delay for each frequency band. 1 4 2 3 Parameter Setting Range Function 1 Delay Sets the delay time. ms: 0 to 500 Sample: the range depends on the Fs value. Meter: 0 to 171.8 Feet: 0 to 563.6 Frame: the range depends on the Frame value. Beat: the range depends on the Beat value. 2 Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level for each channel. 3 On ON/OFF Turns delay ON. 4 Delay Scale ms Sample Meter Feet Frame Beat Selects the units for setting the delay time. The selected button will light up, and the units in the [Delay] edit box will change. If [Beat] is selected, use the knob to set the BPM (beats/minute). DME Designer Owner’s Manual 329 Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ Parametric Equalizer When you click the [PEQ] button for the crossover processor, it opens the parametric equalizer editor window. Here you can make parametric equalizer settings for each frequency band. 1 2 7 3 4 5 6 Name 1 PEQ Curve Parameter 330 Function Displays the PEQ curve. Setting Range Function 2 Type PEQ L.SHELF 6 dB/Oct L.SHELF 12 dB/Oct H.SHELF 6 dB/Oct H.SHELF 12 dB/Oct HPF LPF Select the filter type from the menu. 3 Q 0.1 to 16.0 Sets the band width of each band. 4 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the frequency of each band. 5 Gain -18 dB to +18 dB Sets the frequency gain for each band. 6 Bypass ON/OFF Bypasses all PEQ bands. 7 PEQ On ON/OFF Turn the PEQ ON. DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ Compressor When you click the [Compressor] button for the crossover processor, it opens the compressor editor window. Here you can make compressor settings for each frequency band. 1 23 4 5 6 7 8 9 ) Name Function 1 Compressor Curve Displays results graphically. The horizontal axis is the input signal level, and the vertical axis is the output level. 2 Gain Reduction Meter Displays the gain reduction attenuation. 3 Output Meter Displays the output signal level. Parameter Setting Range Function 4 Threshold -54 dB to ±0 dB Sets the threshold value. 5 Ratio 1:1 to ∞:1 Sets the compression ratio. 6 Knee HARD, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 Sets the way compression is applied. 7 Attack 0 to 120 ms Sets the attack time. 8 Release 44.1 kHz: 6 ms to 46 s 48 kHz: 5 ms to 42.3 s 88.2 kHz: 3 ms to 23 s 96 kHz: 3 ms to 21.1 s Sets the release time. The setting range may vary, depending on the operating frequency. 9 Gain ±0 dB to +18 dB Sets the output gain. ) On ON/OFF Turns the compressor ON. When you turn this button OFF, the compressor is bypassed. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 331 Chapter 6 Component Guide Delay This is a multi-tap delay that provides independent delay and level control for each output. You can specify the delay time in milliseconds, samples, meters, feet, time code frames, or number of beats. Within the delay group, there are two subgroups called Long and Short. Each has a different setting range for the delay. Delay Long Delay long components are available with from one to eight outputs. Each has a single input and from one to eight outputs. Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. Only the number of outputs in each component is different. The other parts are the same. Delay Long Component Editor 8 1 4 5 2 6 7 3 Section Setting Range Function 1 Delay All Bypass ON/OFF Bypasses from input to output. 2 Input Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the input signal level. Mute ON/OFF Mute the input signal. Delay ms: 0 to 1300 Sample: the range depends on the Fs value. Meter: 0 to 446.7 Feet: 0 to 1465.4 Frame: the range depends on the Frame value. Beat: the range depends on the Beat value. Sets the delay time. There are two edit boxes, displaying milliseconds and the units selected for [Delay Scale]. 5 Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level for each channel. 6 On ON/OFF Turns ON each channel’s delay. 7 Mute ON/OFF Turns ON muting for each channel’s output. Delay Scale Delay Scale ms Sample Meter Feet Frame Beat Selects the units for setting the delay time. The selected button will light up, and the units in the [Delay] edit box will change. If [Beat] is selected, use the knob to set the BPM (beats/minute). 3 4 8 332 Parameter Delay Tap DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Delay Short Delay short components are available with from one to eight outputs. Each has a single input and from one to eight outputs. Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. Only the number of outputs in each component is different. The other parts are the same. Delay-Short component editor 1 8 4 5 2 6 7 3 Section Parameter Setting Range Function 1 Delay All Bypass ON/OFF Bypasses from input to output. 2 Input Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the input signal level. Mute ON/OFF Mute the input signal. Delay ms: 0 to 130 Sample: the range depends on the Fs value. Meter: 0 to 44.7 Feet: 0 to 146.5 Frame: the range depends on the Frame value. Beat: the range depends on the Beat value. Sets the delay time. There are two edit boxes, displaying milliseconds and the units selected for [Delay Scale]. 5 Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level for each channel. 6 On ON/OFF Turns ON each channel’s delay. 7 Mute ON/OFF Turns ON muting for each channel’s output. Delay Scale Delay Scale ms Sample Meter Feet Frame Beat Selects the units for setting the delay time. The selected button will light up, and the units in the [Delay] edit box will change. If [Beat] is selected, use the knob to set the BPM (beats/minute). 3 4 8 Delay Tap DME Designer Owner’s Manual 333 Chapter 6 Component Guide Dynamics Components in the dynamic group adjust the dynamic range of the sound. There are eight types of components, each of which is available in mono channel and stereo channel versions. The seven types are: compander hard, compander soft, compressor, de-esser, ducking, expander, gate, and limiter. ■ KeyIn All components in the dynamic group, except the de-esser, have KeyIn input. This is used as a trigger source that activates the effects of the component. The trigger source is set in the [KeyIn] section of the component editor. [KeyIn] Section The currently selected trigger source is displayed on the button. Click the button and select the trigger source from the menu. Mono channel Stereo channel • [SELF] Sets the input signal as the trigger source for mono channel components. • [L]/[R] Sets the left or right input signal as the trigger source for stereo channel components. • [LR BOTH] Sets both the left and right input signals as the trigger source for stereo channel components. The strongest input signal will be the trigger source, whether from the left or right channel. • [KEYIN] The KeyIn input will be the trigger source. 334 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Compander The compander combines the effects of a compressor and an expander. A compressor compresses signals that exceed the threshold, while the expander reduces signals that fall below the threshold. There are two compander groups, CompanderH (compander hard) and CompanderS (compander soft). Within each group, there are mono channel and stereo channel companders. Mono channel companders have one input, one output, and one KeyIn input. Stereo channel companders have two inputs, two outputs, and one KeyIn input. CompanderS CompanderH Stereo channel Mono channel Stereo channel Mono channel Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for mono channel and stereo channel components. The compander hard and compander soft differ in the compression ratio of their fixed expander. The expander compression is expressed by the straight portion of the lower-left part of the compander curve. The compression ratio of the compander hard is large. The slope is also large. The compression ratio of the compander soft is small, with a gentle compression. The parameters in the component editor are the same. CompanderH Mono component editor 4 5 CompanderS Stereo component editor 6 1 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 7 23 8 ) 9 ! 2 3 Name ) ! Function 1 Compander Curve Displays results graphically. The horizontal axis is the input signal level, and the vertical axis is the output level. 2 Gain Reduction Meter Displays the gain reduction attenuation. 3 Output Meter Displays the output signal level. Parameter Setting Range Function 4 Threshold -54 dB to ±0 dB Sets the threshold value. 5 Ratio 1:1 to ∞:1 Sets the compression ratio. 6 Width +1 dB to +90 dB Sets the width of the expander. 7 Attack 0 to 120 ms Sets the attack time. 8 Release 44.1 kHz: 6 ms to 46 s 48 kHz: 5 ms to 42.3 s 88.2 kHz: 3 ms to 23 s 96 kHz: 3 ms to 21.1 s Sets the release time. The setting range may very, depending on the operating frequency. 9 Gain -18 dB to ±0 dB Sets the output gain. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 335 Chapter 6 Component Guide ) ! KeyIn On Mono SELF KEYIN Stereo L R LR BOTH KEYIN Selects the trigger source from a menu. The currently selected trigger source is displayed on the button. ON/OFF Turns the compander ON. Ratio=4:1 +20 Width=25 Output Level (dB) +10 0 –10 –20 –30 –40 –50 Threshold=–25dB –60 –70 –70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20 Input Level (dB) Compressor Compresses signals that exceed a threshold. Narrows the dynamic range of the signal, making it easier to mix or record signals with a wide dynamic range such as vocals or piano music. Both mono channel and stereo channel compressors are provided. Mono channel compressors have one input, one output, and one KeyIn input. Stereo channel compressors have two inputs, two outputs, and one KeyIn input. Double-click a component to open the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for mono channel and stereo channel components. Compressor component editor 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 336 DME Designer Owner’s Manual ) ! Chapter 6 Component Guide Name Function 1 Compressor Curve Displays results graphically. The horizontal axis is the input signal level, and the vertical axis is the output level. 2 Gain Reduction Meter Displays the gain reduction attenuation. 3 Output Meter Displays the output signal level. Parameter Setting Range Function 4 Threshold -54 dB to ±0 dB Sets the threshold value. 5 Ratio 1:1 to ∞:1 Sets the compression ratio. 6 Knee HARD, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 Sets the way compression is applied. 7 Attack 0 to 120 ms Sets the attack time. 8 Release 44.1 kHz: 6 ms to 46 s 48 kHz: 5ms to 42.3 s 88.2 kHz: 3 ms to 23 s 96 kHz: 3 ms to 21.1 s Sets the release time. The setting range may very, depending on the operating frequency. 9 Gain ±0 dB to +18 dB Sets the output gain. ) KeyIn Mono SELF KEYIN Stereo L R LR BOTH KEYIN ! On ON/OFF Selects the trigger source from a menu. The currently selected trigger source is displayed on the button. Turns the compressor ON. +20 Output Level (dB) +10 Ratio=2:1 0 –10 –20 Knee=Hard –30 –40 –50 Threshold=–20dB –60 –70 –70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20 Input Level (dB) De-Esser Compresses the signal above a specified frequency. The de-esser controls sibilant (hissing) sounds included in speech that are produced by the letter “S.” Both mono channel and stereo channel deessers are provided. Mono channel de-essers have one input and one output each. Stereo channel de-essers have two inputs and two outputs each. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 337 Chapter 6 Component Guide Double-click a component to open the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for mono channel and stereo channel components. De-Esser component editor 4 5 6 1 7 8 2 3 9 ) 9 Name Function 1 De-Esser Curve Displays results graphically. The horizontal axis is the input signal level, and the vertical axis is the output level. 2 Gain Reduction Meter Displays the gain reduction attenuation. 3 Output Meter Displays the output signal level. Parameter Setting Range Function 4 Threshold -54 dB to ±0 dB Sets the threshold value. 5 Ratio 1:1 to ∞:1 Sets the compression ratio. 6 Knee HARD, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 Sets the way the de-esser effect is applied. 7 Attack 0 to 120 ms Sets the attack time. 8 Release 44.1 kHz: 6 ms to 46 s 48 kHz: 5 ms to 42.3 s 88.2 kHz: 3 ms to 23 s 96 kHz: 3 ms to 21.1 s Sets the release time. The setting range may very, depending on the operating frequency. 9 Gain ±0 dB to +18 dB Sets the output gain. ) Frequency 80 Hz to 10 kHz Sets the minimum signal frequency for compression. ! On ON/OFF Turns the de-esser ON. +20 Output Level (dB) +10 Ratio=2:1 0 –10 –20 Knee=Hard –30 –40 –50 Threshold=–20dB –60 –70 –70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 Input Level (dB) 338 DME Designer Owner’s Manual 0 +10 +20 Chapter 6 Component Guide Ducking Attenuates the output a particular amount, when an input signal exceeds its threshold. Both mono channel and stereo channel duckers are provided. Mono channel duckers have one input, one output, and one KeyIn input. Stereo channel duckers have two inputs, two outputs, and one KeyIn input. Double-click a component to open the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for mono channel and stereo channel components. Ducking component editor 4 5 6 1 2 3 7 8 9 ) Name Function 1 Ducking Curve Displays results graphically. The horizontal axis is the input signal level, and the vertical axis is the output level. 2 Gain Reduction Meter Displays the gain reduction attenuation. 3 Output Meter Displays the output signal level. Parameter Setting Range Function 4 Threshold -54 dB to ±0 dB Sets the threshold value. 5 Range -70 dB to ±0 dB Sets the amount by which the level is reduced. 6 Attack 0 to 120 ms Sets the attack time. 7 Hold 44.1 kHz: 0.02 ms to 2.13 s 48 kHz: 0.02 ms to 1.96 s 88.2 kHz: 0.01 ms to 1.06 s 96 kHz: 0.01 ms to 981 ms Sets the hold time. The setting range may very, depending on the operating frequency. 8 Decay 44.1 kHz: 6 ms to 46 s 48 kHz: 5 ms to 42.3 s 88.2 kHz: 3 ms to 23 s 96 kHz: 3 ms to 21.1 s Sets the decay time. The setting range may very, depending on the operating frequency. 9 KeyIn Mono SELF KEYIN Stereo L R LR BOTH KEYIN Selects the trigger source from a menu. The currently selected trigger source is displayed on the button. ) On ON/OFF Turns the ducking ON. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 339 Chapter 6 Component Guide +20 Output Level (dB) +10 0 Threshold=–20dB –10 –20 Range=–25dB –30 –40 –50 –60 –70 –70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20 Input Level (dB) Expander Widens the dynamic range of the signal. Low-level signals such as noise are diminished. Both mono channel and stereo channel expanders are provided. Mono channel expanders have one input, one output, and one KeyIn input. Stereo channel expanders have two inputs, two outputs, and one KeyIn input. Double-click a component to open the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for mono channel and stereo channel components. Expander component editor 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 ) ! Name 1 Expander Curve Displays results graphically. The horizontal axis is the input signal level, and the vertical axis is the output level. 2 Gain Reduction Meter Displays the gain reduction attenuation. 3 Output Meter Displays the output signal level. Parameter 340 Function Setting Range Function 4 Threshold -54 dB to ±0 dB Sets the threshold value. 5 Ratio 1:1 to ∞:1 Sets the compression ratio. 6 Knee HARD, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 Sets the way the expander is applied. 8 Attack 0 to 120 ms Sets the attack time. DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide 8 Release 44.1 kHz: 6 ms to 46 s 48 kHz: 5 ms to 42.3 s 88.2 kHz: 3 ms to 23 s 96 kHz: 3 ms to 21.1 s Sets the release time. The setting range may very, depending on the operating frequency. 9 Gain ±0 dB to +18 dB Sets the output gain. ) KeyIn Mono SELF KEYIN Stereo L R LR BOTH KEYIN ! On Selects the trigger source from a menu. The currently selected trigger source is displayed on the button. ON/OFF Turns the expander ON. +20 Output Level (dB) +10 0 Knee=Hard –10 –20 Ratio=2:1 –30 –40 Threshold=–10dB –50 –60 –70 –70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20 Input Level (dB) Gate Attenuates signals that are lower than the threshold level. Both mono channel and stereo channel gates are provided. Mono channel gates have one input, one output, and one KeyIn input. Stereo channel gates have two inputs, two outputs, and one KeyIn input. Double-click a component to open the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for mono channel and stereo channel components. Gate component editor 4 5 6 1 2 3 7 8 9 ) DME Designer Owner’s Manual 341 Chapter 6 Component Guide Name Function 1 Gate Curve Displays results graphically. The horizontal axis is the input signal level, and the vertical axis is the output level. 2 Gain Reduction Meter Displays the gain reduction attenuation. 3 Output Meter Displays the output signal level. Parameter Setting Range Function 4 Threshold -54 dB to ±0 dB Sets the threshold value. 5 Range -70 dB to ±0 dB Sets the amount by which the level is reduced. 6 Attack 0 to 120 ms Sets the attack time. 7 Hold 44.1 kHz: 0.02 ms to 2.13 s 48 kHz: 0.02 ms to 1.96 s 88.2 kHz: 0.01 ms to 1.06 s 96 kHz: 0.01 ms to 981 ms Sets the hold time. 8 Decay 44.1 kHz: 6 ms to 46 s 48 kHz: 5 ms to 42.3 s 88.2 kHz: 3 ms to 23 s 96 kHz: 3 ms to 21.1 s Sets the decay time. The setting range may very, depending on the operating frequency. 9 KeyIn Mono SELF KEYIN Stereo L R LR BOTH KEYIN Selects the trigger source from a menu. The currently selected trigger source is displayed on the button. ) On ON/OFF Turns the gate ON. +20 Output Level (dB) +10 0 –10 Threshold=–20dB –20 –30 Range=–25dB –40 –50 –60 –70 –70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20 Input Level (dB) Limiter Signals above the threshold are compressed at an ∞:1 ratio, preventing output of signals that exceed the threshold level. Mono channel and stereo channel components are provided. Mono channel components have a single input and output plus a key input, while stereo channel components have two inputs and outputs and a key input. 342 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Double click the component to open the component editor. Mono channel and stereo channel components have the same parameters. Limiter component editor 4 1 5 23 6 7 8 Name Function 1 Limiter Curve Displays the limiter response in graph form. The horizontal axis represents input signal level and the vertical axis represents output level. 2 Gain Reduction Meter Displays the amount of gain reduction. 3 Output Meter Displays the output signal level. Parameter Setting Range Function 4 Threshold -54 dB to ±0 dB Sets the threshold value. 5 Attack 0 to 120 ms Sets the attack time. 6 Release 44.1 kHz: 6 ms to 46 s 48 kHz: 5 ms to 42.3 s 88.2 kHz: 3 ms to 23 s 96 kHz: 3 ms to 21.1 s Sets the release time. The range varies according to the operating frequency. 9 KeyIn Mono SELF KEYIN Stereo L R LR BOTH KEYIN The trigger source can be selected from this menu. The currently selected source is displayed in the button. On ON/OFF Turns the limiter ON. +20 RATIO=20:1 +10 0 Output Level (dB) ) Threshold=–20dB –10 –20 –30 –40 –50 –60 –70 –70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20 Input Level (dB) DME Designer Owner’s Manual 343 Chapter 6 Component Guide Equalizer (EQ) The equalizer boosts or cuts the levels of specified frequencies. The EQ group contains graphic equalizers (GEQ) and parametric equalizers (PEQ). The frequency bands in the graphic equalizer are fixed. The graphical interface lets you visually check the gain of each frequency. There are three different types of equalizers, each with a different number of frequency bands. Mono channel and stereo channel equalizers are available for each type. With the parametric equalizer, you can freely adjust the frequency bands, their amplitudes, and bandwidths. There are six different types of parametric equalizers, each with a different number of frequency bands. Mono channel and stereo channel equalizers are available for each type. Graphic Equalizer (GEQ) Boosts or cuts signals within the specified frequencies. The mono group contains 7 band, 15 band, and 31 band mono channel components. The stereo group contains 7 band, 15 band, and 31 band stereo channel components. Mono channel GEQs have one input and one output each. Stereo channel GEQs have two inputs and two outputs each. Mono channel Stereo channel Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The number of bands varies depending on the component, but all share a common configuration in the component editor. Component editor for GEQ 2 1 3 4 6 7 5 8 9 # ! ) @ $ Name 344 * % ^ & % ^ & % ^ & % ^ & ( Function 1 Input Meter Displays the input signal level. 2 EQ Curve Displays the equalizer effect. 3 Output Meter Displays the output signal level. DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Section 4 Setting Range Function Bypass ON/OFF Bypasses all bands in the GEQ equalizer section. 5 Gain Set by [Range]. Sets the output gain for its band. 6 GEQ ON ON/OFF Turns the GEQ ON. 7 Range (Button) ±15 ±12 ±6 -24 Selects the gain adjust width. 8 EQ Flat 9 Equalizer Parameter Input -- Returns the faders of all bands to 0dB. Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the input signal level. Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal. Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the HPF cutoff frequency. Bypass ON/OFF Turns bypass ON. Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the LPF cutoff frequency. Bypass ON/OFF Turns bypass ON. Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the notch filter frequency. ^ Q: 0.1 to 63.0 Sets the width of the frequency band that will be changed by the filter. & Bypass ON/OFF Turns bypass ON. Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the signal level. On ON/OFF Turns output ON. ) ! HPF @ # LPF $ % * ( Notch Output ■ EQ Graph [Bypass] Button A number for each frequency band is displayed on these buttons. When you click the button, it lights up and the bypass turns ON. When you turn this ON, bypassed sound (unchanged sound) is output. When you turn this OFF, the sound is output with effects applied. Bypass ON Bypass OFF DME Designer Owner’s Manual 345 Chapter 6 Component Guide Parametric Equalizer (PEQ) Boosts or cuts signals within specified frequencies. In both the Mono group and Stereo group there are 2 band, 3 band, 4 band, 6 band, and 8 band components available. Mono channel PEQs have one input and one output each. Stereo channel PEQs have two inputs and two outputs each. The number of bands varies depending on the component, but all share a common configuration in the component editor. Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The number of bands varies depending on the component, but all share a common configuration in the component editor. PEQ component editor 1 4 9 5 2 ) 6 7 8 3 ! Name 1 EQ Curve Displays the equalizer effect. You can change the parameter by dragging the control point with the mouse. Section 2 Input Parameter Setting Range Function Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the input signal level. Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal. Type PEQ L.SHELF 6 dB/Oct L.SHELF 12 dB/Oct H.SHELF 6 dB/Oct H.SHELF 12 dB/Oct HPF LPF Select the filter type from the menu. 5 Q 0.1 to 16.0 Sets the band width for each frequency band. 6 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the frequency for each band. 7 Gain -18 dB to +18 dB Sets the level of the frequency that will be changed. 8 Bypass ON/OFF Turns ON bypass for each band. 3 4 346 Function Equalizer DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide 9 Equalizer PEQ ON ON/OFF Turns the PEQ ON ) Output Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level. On ON/OFF Turns output ON. ! ■ Filter Type Various types of curves are available for changing the level. Click the [Type] button and select the type from the menu. • PEQ This is a general parametric equalizer. • L. SHELF (Low Shelving) There is no sound attenuation at low frequencies. The sound is attenuated at a constant rate from the cutoff frequency towards the higher frequencies. The attenuation rate per octave can be set to [6 dB/Oct] or [12 dB/Oct]. • H.SHELF (High Shelving) There is no sound attenuation at high frequencies. The sound is attenuated at a constant rate from the cutoff frequency towards the lower frequencies. The attenuation rate per octave can be set to [6 dB/Oct] or [12 dB/Oct]. • HPF This is a high-pass filter (Q=0.7). Attenuates the low frequencies with a gentle curve (12 dB/ Oct). • LPF This is a low-pass filter (Q=0.7). Attenuates the high frequencies with a gentle curve (12 dB/ Oct). DME Designer Owner’s Manual 347 Chapter 6 Component Guide Fader Controls the output level for each channel. Fader components are available for 1, 2, 4, 8, 12, and 16 channels. Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The number of channels varies, but all components share a common configuration in the component editor. Fader component editor 1 2 3 4 Parameter Setting Range Function 1 Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the output signal for each channel. 2 On ON/OFF Turns ON each channel’s output. 3 Fader -∞ to +10 dB Sets the output signal level for each channel. 4 Fade ON/OFF Sets fade during scene recall ON or OFF. ■ [Fade] Sets the action of the fader when there is a large change in its position during scene recall. When you turn this ON, the fader moves gradually to the position after the jump. If you turn this OFF, it immediately jumps to the parameters saved in the recalled scene. See “The ‘Scene Manager’ Dialog Box” (page 63) for details about settings for the components to be faded and the time period when the [Fade] is On. 348 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Filters A filter passes specific frequencies and attenuates all others. There are seven types of filters available in the filter group: band pass filter (BPF), high pass filter (HPF), low pass filter (LPF), notch filter (Notch), programmable BPF, programmable HPF, and programmable LPF. Band Pass Filter (BPF) The band pass filter passes the signal from a specified frequency band, while attenuating frequencies outside that band. There are two types of BPF components: mono channel and stereo channel. Mono channel BPFs have one input and one output. Stereo channel BPFs have two of each. Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for mono channel and stereo channel components. BPF component editor 1 2 Section 1 Input Parameter 3 4 6 5 Setting Range Function Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the input signal level. Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal. Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the center frequency. 4 Q: 0.1 to 16.0 Sets the band width of a frequency band. 5 Bypass ON/OFF Turns bypass ON. Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level. 2 3 6 BPF Output DME Designer Owner’s Manual 349 Chapter 6 Component Guide High Pass Filter (HPF) The high pass filter passes frequencies in the signal that are higher than a specified frequency, while attenuating lower frequencies in the signal. There are two types of HPF components: mono channel and stereo channel. Mono channel HPFs have one input and one output. Stereo channel HPFs have two of each. Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for mono channel and stereo channel components. HPF component editor 1 2 Section 1 Input 4 6 5 Setting Range Function Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the input signal level. Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal. Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the cutoff frequency. 4 Slope 6 dB/Oct 12 dB/Oct Sets the attenuation for each octave. 5 Bypass ON/OFF Turns bypass ON. Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level. 2 3 6 350 Parameter 3 HPF Output DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Low Pass Filter (LPF) The low pass filter passes frequencies in the signal that are lower than a specified frequency, while attenuating higher frequencies in the signal. There are two types of LPF components: mono channel and stereo channel. Mono channel LPFs have one input and one output. Stereo channel LPFs have two of each. Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for mono channel and stereo channel components. LPF component editor 1 2 Section 1 Input Parameter 3 4 6 5 Setting Range Function Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the input signal level. Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal. Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the cutoff frequency. 4 Slope 6 dB/Oct 12 dB/Oct Sets the attenuation for each octave. 5 Bypass ON/OFF Turns bypass ON. Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level. 2 3 6 LPF Output DME Designer Owner’s Manual 351 Chapter 6 Component Guide Notch Filter (Notch) The notch filter attenuates the signal within a specified frequency band, while passing frequencies outside that band. There are two types of notch filter components: mono channel and stereo channel. Mono channel notch filters have one input and one output. Stereo channel notch filters have two of each. Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for mono channel and stereo channel components. Notch component editor 1 2 Section 1 Input 4 6 5 Setting Range Function Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the input signal level. Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal. Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the center frequency. 4 Q: 0.1 to 63.0 Sets the band width of the frequency band that will be changed 5 Bypass ON/OFF Turns bypass ON. Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level. 2 3 6 352 Parameter 3 Notch Output DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Programmable BPF The band pass filter passes the signal from a specified frequency band, while attenuating frequencies outside that band. With the programmable band pass filter you can set the filter type and the slope between the frequency band that is passed and the band that is cutoff. There are two types of programmable BPF components: mono channel and stereo channel. Mono channel programmable BPFs have one input and one output. Stereo channel programmable BPFs have two of each. Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for mono channel and stereo channel components. Programmable BPF component editor 1 2 Section 1 Input Parameter ! 3 4 7 8 5 9 6 ) Setting Range Function Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the input signal level. Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal. Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the HPF cutoff frequency. 4 Type Thru 6 dB/Oct 12 dB/Oct AdjustGc 12 dB/Oct Butrwrth 12 dB/Oct Bessel 12 dB/Oct Linkwitz 18 dB/Oct AdjustGc 18 dB/Oct Butrwrth 18 dB/Oct Bessel 24 dB/Oct AdjustGc 24 dB/Oct Butrwrth 24 dB/Oct Bessel 24 dB/Oct Linkwitz 36 dB/Oct AdjustGc 36 dB/Oct Butrwrth 36 dB/Oct Bessel 48 dB/Oct AdjustGc 48 dB/Oct Butrwrth 48 dB/Oct Bessel 48 dB/Oct Linkwitz Sets the attenuation for each octave and the filter type. [THRU] turns off the filter. 5 Gc -6 dB to +6 dB When [AdjustGc] (Adjustable Gc) is selected for [Type], this sets the gain for the cutoff frequency. 6 Bypass ON/OFF Turns bypass ON. 2 3 HPF DME Designer Owner’s Manual 353 Chapter 6 Component Guide Section 7 354 Setting Range Function Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the LPF cutoff frequency. 8 Type Thru 6 dB/Oct 12 dB/Oct AdjustGc 12 dB/Oct Butrwrth 12 dB/Oct Bessel 12 dB/Oct Linkwitz 18 dB/Oct AdjustGc 18 dB/Oct Butrwrth 18 dB/Oct Bessel 24 dB/Oct AdjustGc 24 dB/Oct Butrwrth 24 dB/Oct Bessel 24 dB/Oct Linkwitz 36 dB/Oct AdjustGc 36 dB/Oct Butrwrth 36 dB/Oct Bessel 48 dB/Oct AdjustGc 48 dB/Oct Butrwrth 48 dB/Oct Bessel 48 dB/Oct Linkwitz Sets the attenuation for each octave and the filter type. [THRU] turns off the filter. 9 Gc -6 dB to +6 dB When [AdjustGc] (Adjustable Gc) is selected for [Type], this sets the gain for the cutoff frequency. ) Bypass ON/OFF Turns bypass ON. Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level. ! LPF Parameter Output DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Programmable HPF The high pass filter passes frequencies in the signal that are higher the specified frequency, while attenuating lower frequencies in the signal. With the programmable high pass filter you can set the filter type and the slope between the frequency band that is passed and the band that is cutoff. There are two types of programmable HPF components: mono channel and stereo channel. Mono channel programmable HPFs have one input and one output. Stereo channel programmable HPFs have two of each. Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for mono channel and stereo channel components. Programmable HPF component editors 7 1 3 4 5 2 Section 1 Input Parameter 6 Setting Range Function Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the input signal level. Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal. Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the HPF cutoff frequency. 5 Type Thru 6 dB/Oct 12 dB/Oct AdjustGc 12 dB/Oct Butrwrth 12 dB/Oct Bessel 12 dB/Oct Linkwitz 18 dB/Oct AdjustGc 18 dB/Oct Butrwrth 18 dB/Oct Bessel 24 dB/Oct AdjustGc 24 dB/Oct Butrwrth 24 dB/Oct Bessel 24 dB/Oct Linkwitz 36 dB/Oct AdjustGc 36 dB/Oct Butrwrth 36 dB/Oct Bessel 48 dB/Oct AdjustGc 48 dB/Oct Butrwrth 48 dB/Oct Bessel 48 dB/Oct Linkwitz Sets the attenuation for each octave and the filter type. [THRU] turns off the filter. 6 Gc -6 dB to +6 dB When [AdjustGc] (Adjustable Gc) is selected for [Type], this sets the gain for the cutoff frequency. 7 Bypass ON/OFF Turns bypass ON. Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level. 2 3 8 HPF Output DME Designer Owner’s Manual 355 Chapter 6 Component Guide Programmable LPF The low pass filter passes frequencies in the signal that are lower than the specified frequency, while attenuating higher frequencies in the signal. With the programmable low pass filter you can set the filter type and the slope between the frequency band that is passed and the band that is cutoff. There are two types of programmable LPF components: mono channel and stereo channel. Mono channel programmable LPFs have one input and one output. Stereo channel programmable LPFs have two of each. Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for mono channel and stereo channel components. Programmable LPF component editor 1 3 7 4 5 2 Section 1 Input Setting Range Function Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the input signal level. Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal. Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the LPF cutoff frequency. 5 Type Thru 6 dB/Oct 12 dB/Oct AdjustGc 12 dB/Oct Butrwrth 12 dB/Oct Bessel 12 dB/Oct Linkwitz 18 dB/Oct AdjustGc 18 dB/Oct Butrwrth 18 dB/Oct Bessel 24 dB/Oct AdjustGc 24 dB/Oct Butrwrth 24 dB/Oct Bessel 24 dB/Oct Linkwitz 36 dB/Oct AdjustGc 36 dB/Oct Butrwrth 36 dB/Oct Bessel 48 dB/Oct AdjustGc 48 dB/Oct Butrwrth 48 dB/Oct Bessel 48 dB/Oct Linkwitz Sets the attenuation for each octave and the filter type. [THRU] turns off the filter. 6 Gc -6 dB to +6 dB When [AdjustGc] (Adjustable Gc) is selected for [Type], this sets the gain for the cutoff frequency. 7 Bypass ON/OFF Turns bypass ON. Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level. 2 3 8 356 Parameter 6 LPF Output DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Meter Displays signal levels. Meter components are available with 1, 2, 4, 8, 12, and 16 channels. Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The number of channels varies depending on the component, but all share a common configuration in the component editor. Meter component editor 1 Name 1 Meter Function Displays signal levels for each channel. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 357 Chapter 6 Component Guide Miscellaneous In the Miscellaneous group, there are the Oscillator subgroup and the Wav File Player. Oscillator The Oscillator subgroup contains a monochannel oscillator component. The oscillator generates sine waves at fixed frequencies of 100 Hz, 1 kHz, and 10 kHz, a variable frequency sine wave, pink noise, and burst noise. The oscillator component has two outputs. Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. Oscillator component editor 2 1 4 5 3 Section 1 Setting Range Function Sine 100 Hz 1 kHz 10 kHz Vari 2 Noise Pink Burst 3 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz When [Vari] is selected for [Sine], this sets the frequency of the generated sine wave. Level -∞ to +6 dB Displays the signal level. 5 On ON/OFF Turns ON the oscillator. 6 Meter 4 Wave Form Parameter 6 Output Selects the frequency and waveform that will be generated. Only one of the six [Sine] and [Noise] buttons can be selected. -- Displays the output signal level. Pink Noise A standard signal used for sound measurement. This sound covers a frequency range of 20 Hz to 20 kHz. As the frequency doubles, the energy of the sound is cut in half. The sound level is equal at all frequencies. Burst Outputs pink noise continuously. 358 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Wav File Player The Wav File Player is a component for playing Wave files. Only one Wav File Player component can be arranged for each single DME unit. NOTE If you switch the effect type for SPX components while playing Wave file by Wav File Player, drop-outs in the sound played in the Wav File Player may occur. Double-click the component to display the component editor for it. Wav File Player component editor 1 2 Section Parameter 4 5 Setting Range 6 7 3 Function 1 Ex. Input Level -∞ to 0 dB Sets the input level from an input port. Only effective when “External Input” is selected as the playback file. 2 Wav File Player Play 001 to 100 Selects and displays the playback file. Only files set in the DME unit in which this component is placed by the Wav File Manager can be selected. 3 List -- Open the Wav File Manager to display a list of files set in the DME unit in which this component is located. This list functions as a play list. 4 IG -- Selects the previous file in the play list. 5 HI -- Selects the next file in the playsuit. 6 F -- Plays the selected Wave file. Mute is turned OFF when “External Input” is selected. 7 J -- Stops playback of the Wave file. Muted when “External Input” is selected. NOTE Playback will be paused if synchronization is carried out in the “Designer ← DME” direction during playback. Playback will resume once synchronization is complete, but if a Wave file was being played it will resume playback from the beginning. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 359 Chapter 6 Component Guide Mixer The Mixer group contains the Auto Mixer, Delay Matrix, and Matrix Mixer. Auto Mixer There is a noise gate for each input channel, which passes only signals that exceed a specified threshold. There are five mixer types, each with a different number of inputs. Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The number of channels varies depending on the component, but all share a common configuration in the component editor. The auto mixer component editor consists of two sections: input channels and master output. Auto Mixer component editor 1 2 3 4 9 5 6 360 7 ) 8 ! DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Section 1 Input Channels Parameter Phase Setting Range ON/OFF Function Reverses the phase of each channel’s input signal. 2 Gate Indicator 3 Threshold -54 dB to ±0 dB 4 Hold 44.1 kHz: 110 m to 2.13 s Sets the gate hold time. 48 kHz: 101 m to 1.96 s The setting range may vary, depending 88.2 kHz: 55.1 m to 1.06 s on the operating frequency. 96 kHz: 50. 6m to 981 m Decay 44.1 kHz: 110 m to 46 s 48 kHz: 101 m to 42.3 s 88.2 kHz: 55 m to 23 s 96 kHz: 51 m to 21.1 s Sets the speed for closing the gate. The setting range may vary, depending on the operating frequency. 6 Solo ON/OFF Turns solo ON. 7 On ON/OFF Turns ON each channel’s input. 8 Fader -∞ to +10 dB Sets the input signal level for each channel. Gain Correct ON/OFF Turns ON gain correction. ) On ON/OFF Turns ON each channel’s output. ! Master -∞ to +10 dB Sets the output signal level. 5 9 Input Channels Master Output -- When the gate is open, the light turns green. When the gate is closed, the light turns yellow. Sets the threshold value for each gate. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 361 Chapter 6 Component Guide Delay Matrix This is a matrix mixer that allows you to set an independent delay time and level adjustment for each output. There are three groups of delay matrix, based on the number of inputs: 2 Input, 4 Input, and 8 Input. In each of the three groups there are five mixers available with 2, 4, 8, 12, or 16 outputs, for a total of 15 components. 2 Input 4 Input 8 Input Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The number of input and output channels varies depending on the component, but all share a common configuration in the component editor. The delay matrix component editor consists of four sections: input, output, matrix, and block. The [Master] buttons in the [Input] and [Output] sections display windows where you can make master input and output settings. Delay and level for each channel are set in separate windows that display four channels each. Delay Matrix component editor 2 4 6 1 5 7 3 Section 362 Name Function 1 Input Master Opens the Input Master window. 2 Output Master Opens the Output Master window. 3 Matrix Delay meters Output level meters Displays output level and delay time for each output channel. Clicking here displays the Crosspoint window. DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Section 4 Block Name Function On Turns ON output for all channels in the Crosspoint window. Lights the [ON] button (does not change the delay matrix component editor). 5 Off Turns OFF output for all channels in the Crosspoint window (does not change the delay matrix component editor). 6 Nominal Resets all output levels in the Crosspoint window, making them 0 dB. The delay settings are not changed. 7 Minimum Resets all output levels in the Crosspoint window, making them -∞ dB. The delay settings are not changed. ■ Matrix (Delay Meter/Output Level Meter) The upper row has delay meters, while the middle row has output level meters. You can view parameters for all output channels at once. Delay Meter Output Level Meter When you click the output channel number on the matrix, the [Delay Matrix - All Inputs to One Output] editor window opens. When you click the input channel number on the left side of the matrix, the [Delay Matrix - One Input to All Outputs] editor window opens. Click to open the [Delay Matrix - All Inputs to One Output] editor window. Click to open the [Delay Matrix - One Input to All Outputs] editor window. The matrix is divided into groups. For the 2 Input matrix, each group has two input channels and four output channels. For the 4 Input matrix, each group has four input channels and four output channels. Groups in matrixes with more than four inputs are the same as for the 4 Input matrix. When you place the mouse pointer over a group, its channel numbers are highlighted. Click to open the [Delay Matrix - Crosspoint] editor window. Click to open the “In 1-4 x Out 1-4” Crosspoint window. Click to open the “In 5-8 x Out 5-8” Crosspoint window. For 2 input matrix, click to open the “In 1-2 x Out 1-4” Crosspoint window. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 363 Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ Input Master If you click the [Input Master] button in the delay matrix component editor, it will open the [Delay Matrix - InputMaster] editor window. Here you can turn the master input for each channel ON and OFF and set the level. [Delay Matrix - InputMaster] editor window 1 2 5 7 3 4 Section 1 364 Setting Range 8 Function Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of each channel’s signal. 2 Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the level of the signal from each channel’s input. 3 Solo ON/OFF Turns ON solo for each channel. 4 On ON/OFF Turns ON each channel’s input. 5 Input Parameter 6 Block On -- Turns ON input for all channels in the Input Master window. When turned ON, the [On] button lights up. 6 Off -- Turns OFF input for all channels in the Input Master window. 7 Nominal -- Resets all input signal levels in the Input Master window, making them 0 dB. 8 Minimum -- Resets all input signal levels in the Input Master windows, making them -∞ dB. DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ Output Master If you click the [Output Master] button in the delay matrix component editor, it will open the [Delay Matrix - OutputMaster] editor window. Here you can turn the master output for each channel ON and OFF and set the level. [Delay Matrix - OutputMaster] editor window 1 4 6 2 5 7 3 Section 1 Output Parameter Meter Setting Range -- Function Displays the output signal level for each channel. 2 Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the output signal level for each channel. 3 On ON/OFF Turns ON each channel’s output. 4 Block On -- Turns ON output for all channels in the Output Master window. When turned ON, the [On] button lights up. 5 Off -- Turns OFF output for all channels in the Output Master window. 6 Nominal -- Resets all output signal levels in the Output Master window, making them 0 dB. 7 Minimum -- Resets all output signal levels in the Output Master window, making them -∞ dB. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 365 Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ All Inputs to One Output When you click the output channel number on the matrix, the [Delay Matrix - All Inputs to One Output] editor window opens. All input channels and one output channel are displayed. The output channel is the one you have clicked on in the delay mixer component editor. 4 1 7 9 2 8 ) 3 5 Section Parameter 1 Bus Send Level Delay 2 3 4 Output Setting Range 6 Function 0 to 500 Sets the delay time for each input channel. Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the output signal level for each input channel. On ON/OFF Turns ON the output for each input channel. Channel -- Displays the selected output channel. Select another channel from a menu. 5 On 6 Meter -- Displays the output signal level of the channel displayed in the window. On -- Turns ON all channel inputs. When turned ON, the [On] button lights up. 8 Off -- Turns OFF all channel inputs. 9 Nominal -- Resets all of input signal levels, making them 0 dB. ) Minimum -- Resets all of input signal levels, making them -∞ dB. 7 Block ON/OFF Turns ON the output for the channel displayed in the window. Output Channel Switching The [Delay Matrix - All Inputs to One Output] editor window displays the output channel clicked on in the delay matrix component editor. The [Channel] buttons in the [Output] section of the [Delay Matrix - All Inputs to One Output] editor window switch the channel group that is displayed in the window. If you make the delay matrix component editor active while the [Delay Matrix - All Inputs to One Output] editor window is displayed, and then click another output channel, that channel group will be displayed in the [Delay Matrix - All Inputs to One Output] editor window. One [Delay Matrix - All Inputs to One Output] editor window is displayed for each delay matrix component editor. 366 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ One Input to All Outputs When you click the input channel number on the left side of matrix, the [Delay Matrix - One Input to All Outputs] editor window opens. One input channel and all output channels are displayed. The input channel is the one you have clicked on in the delay mixer component editor. 1 2 6 9 3 ! 7 4 5 Section 1 Input ) @ 8 Parameter Channel Setting Range Function -- Displays the selected input channel. Select another channel from a menu. 2 Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal. 3 Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the input signal level. 4 Solo ON/OFF Turns solo ON. 5 On ON/OFF Turns input ON. 0 to 500 Sets the delay time for each output channel. 6 Bus Send Level Delay 7 Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the signal level for each output channel. 8 On ON/OFF Turns ON the output for each output channel. 9 Block On -- Turns ON all channel outputs. When turned ON, the [On] button lights up. ) Off -- Turns OFF all channel outputs. ! Nominal -- Resets all output signal levels, making them 0 dB. @ Minimum -- Resets all output signal levels, making them -∞ dB. Input Channel Switching The [Delay Matrix - One Input to All Outputs] editor window displays the input channel for the channel number clicked on in the delay matrix component editor. The [Channel] buttons in the [Input] section of the [Delay Matrix - All Inputs to One Output] editor window switch the channel group that is displayed in the window. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 367 Chapter 6 Component Guide If you make the delay matrix component editor active while the [Delay Matrix - One Input to All Outputs] editor window is displayed, and then click another input channel, that channel will be displayed in the [Delay Matrix - One Input to All Outputs] editor window. One [Delay Matrix - One Input to All Outputs] editor window is displayed for each delay matrix component editor. ■ Crosspoint [Delay Matrix - Crosspoint] editor window If you click a level meter in the delay matrix component editor, that group's [Delay Matrix - Crosspoint] editor window will be displayed. Turns the input channels ON and OFF and sets their levels. Just like the delay matrix component editor, the input channels are arranged vertically while the output channels are arranged horizontally. 2 3 4 6 5 8 7 9 1 Section Setting Range Function 1 Input Channel -- Switches to another channel group. 2 Output Channel -- Switches to another channel group. 3 Bus Send Level Delay 4 5 6 368 Parameter Block 0 to 500 Sets the delay time for each crosspoint. Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the output signal level for each crosspoint. On ON/OFF Turns ON output for each crosspoint. On -- Turns ON output for all channels in the Crosspoint window. The [On] button lights up. 7 Off -- Turns OFF output for all channels in the Crosspoint window. 8 Nominal -- Resets all output signal levels in the Crosspoint window, making them 0 dB. 9 Minimum -- Resets all output signal levels in the Crosspoint window, making them -∞ dB. DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Channel Group Switching The [Delay Matrix - Crosspoint] editor window displays four channels each for Input and Output. It displays the channel group you click on in the delay matrix component editor. The [Channel] buttons in the [Input] and [Output] sections of the [Delay Matrix - Crosspoint] editor window switch the channel group that is displayed in the window. [Input] section [Channel] menu [Output] section [Channel] menu If you click another channel group when the delay matrix component editor is active and an [Delay Matrix - Crosspoint] editor window is displayed, that channel group will be displayed in the open [Delay Matrix - Crosspoint] editor window. Only one [Delay Matrix - Crosspoint] matrix window is displayed for each delay matrix component editor. Matrix Mixer In the matrix mixer, the input channels and output buses are arranged in a checkerboard configuration. You can adjust the group balance for each output bus. There are 24 components in the in the Matrix Mixer group, each with different numbers of input and output channels. There are seven groups based on the number of inputs, as follows: 2 Input, 4 Input, 8 Input, 12 Input, 16 Input, 32 Input, and 64 Input. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 369 Chapter 6 Component Guide NOTE If a 64 input 64 output Matrix Mixer component or a 64 input 32 output Matrix Mixer component is placed in the DME64N configuration window, no other components can be used even though the resource meter does not reach 100%. The 64 input 64 output Matrix Mixer component or the 64 input 32 output Matrix Mixer component cannot be used in the DME24N. Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The number of input and output channels varies depending on the component, but all share a common configuration in the component editor. The matrix mixer component editor consists of four sections: input, output, matrix, and block. The [Master] buttons in the [Input] and [Output] sections display windows where you can make master input and output settings. The level for each channel is set in separate windows that display four channels each. Matrix Mixer component editor 2 4 3 6 1 Section 370 Name 5 7 Function 1 Input Master Opens the Input Master window. 2 Output Master Opens the Output Master window. 3 Matrix Output level meters These meters display the output level for each channel. Clicking here displays the Crosspoint window. 4 Block On Turns ON output for all channels in the Crosspoint window. Lights the [ON] button (does not change the matrix mixer component editor). 5 Off Turns OFF output for all channels in the Crosspoint window (does not change the matrix mixer component editor). 6 Nominal Resets all output levels in the Crosspoint window, making them 0 dB. 7 Minimum Resets all output levels in the Crosspoint window, making them -∞ dB. DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ Matrix (Output Level Meters) In the matrix, you can view levels for all output channels at once. The meter will be grayed out when the corresponding channel is set to Off. Output level meter When you click an output channel number on the matrix, the [Matrix Mixer - All Inputs to One Output] editor window opens. When you click the input channel number on the left side of the matrix, the [Matrix Mixer - One Input to All Outputs] editor window opens. Click to open the [Matrix Mixer - All Inputs to One Output] editor window. Click to open the [Matrix Mixer - One Input to All Outputs] editor window. The matrix is divided into groups, each with four input channels and four output channels. When you place the mouse pointer over a group, its channel numbers are highlighted. Click to open the [Matrix Mixer - Crosspoint] editor window. Click to open the “In 1-4 x Out 5-8” [Matrix Mixer - Crosspoint] editor window DME Designer Owner’s Manual 371 Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ Input Master If you click the [Input Master] button in the matrix mixer component editor, it will open the [Matrix Mixer - InputMaster] editor window. Here you can turn the master input for each channel ON and OFF and set the level. [Matrix Mixer - InputMaster] editor window [Matrix Mixer - InputMaster] G fB^ [ EB h E 1 5 2 7 3 4 Section 1 372 Setting Range 8 Function Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of each channel’s signal. 2 Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the signal level from each channel input to the output bus. 3 Solo ON/OFF Turns ON solo for each channel. 4 On ON/OFF Turns ON each channel’s input. 5 Input Parameter 6 Block On -- Turns ON input for all channels in the Input Master window. When turned ON, the [On] button lights up. 6 Off -- Turns OFF input for all channels in the Input Master window. 7 Nominal -- Resets all output signal levels in the Input Master window, making them 0 dB. 8 Minimum -- Resets all output signal levels in the Input master window, making them -∞ dB. DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ Output Master Window If you click the [Output Master] button in the matrix mixer component editor, it will open the Output Master window. Her you can turn the master output for each channel ON and OFF and set the level. [Matrix Mixer - OutputMaster] editor window [Matrix Mixer - OutputMaster] G fB^ [ EB h E 1 4 6 2 5 7 3 Section 1 Output Parameter Meter Setting Range -- Function Displays the output signal level for each channel. 2 Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the output signal level for each channel. 3 On ON/OFF Turns ON each channel’s output. 4 Block On -- Turns ON output for all channels in the Output Master window. When turned ON, the [On] button lights up. 5 Off -- Turns OFF output for all channels in the Output Master window. 6 Nominal -- Resets all output signal levels in the Output Master window, making them 0 dB. 7 Minimum -- Resets all output signal levels in the Output Master window, making them -∞ dB. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 373 Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ All Inputs to One Output When you click the output channel number on the matrix, the [Matrix Mixer - All Inputs to One Output] editor window opens. All input channels and one output channel are displayed. The output channel is the one you have clicked on in the matrix mixer component editor. 3 6 1 8 2 4 Section 1 Bus Send Level Level 2 3 Parameter On Output Channel Setting Range 7 9 5 Function -∞ to +10 dB Sets the output signal level for each input channel. ON/OFF Turns ON the output for each input channel. -- Displays the selected output channel. Select another channel from a menu. 4 On 5 Meter -- Displays the output signal level of the channel displayed in the window. On -- Turns ON all channel inputs. When turned ON, the [On] button lights up. 7 Off -- Turns OFF all channel inputs. 8 Nominal -- Resets all input signal levels, making them 0 dB. 9 Minimum -- Reset all input signal levels, making them -∞ dB. 6 Block ON/OFF Turns ON the output for the channel displayed in the window. Output Channel Switching [Matrix Mixer - All Inputs to One Output] editor window displays the output channel clicked in the matrix mixer component editor. The [Channel] buttons in the [Output] section of the [Matrix Mixer All Inputs to One Output] editor window switch the channel group that is displayed in the window. If you make the matrix mixer component editor active while the [Matrix Mixer - All Inputs to One Output] editor window is displayed, and then click another output channel, that channel group will be displayed in the [Matrix Mixer - All Inputs to One Output] editor window. One [Matrix Mixer - All Inputs to One Output] editor window is displayed for each matrix mixer component editor. 374 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ One Input to All Outputs When you click the input channel number on the left side of the matrix, the [Matrix Mixer - One Input to All Outputs] editor window opens. One input channel and all output channels are displayed. The input channel is the one you have clicked on in the delay mixer component editor. 1 2 3 Section Input ) 7 4 5 1 8 6 Parameter Setting Range Channel -- 9 ! Function Displays the selected input channel. Select another channel from a menu. 2 Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal. 3 Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the input signal level. 4 Solo ON/OFF Turns solo ON. 5 On ON/OFF Turns input ON. Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the signal level for each output channel. On ON/OFF Turns ON the output for each output channel. 6 Bus Send Level 7 8 Block On -- Turns ON all channel outputs. When turned ON, the [On] button lights up. 9 Off -- Turns OFF all channel outputs. ) Nominal -- Resets all output signal levels, making them 0 dB. ! Minimum -- Resets all output signal levels, making them -∞ dB. Input Channel Switching The [Matrix Mixer - One Input to All Outputs] editor window displays the input channel for the channel number clicked on in the matrix mixer component editor. The [Channel] buttons in the [Input] section of the [Matrix Mixer - All Inputs to One Output] editor window switch the channel group that is displayed in the window. If you make the matrix mixer component editor active while the [Matrix Mixer- One Input to All Outputs] editor window is displayed, and then click another input channel, that channel will be displayed in the [Matrix Mixer - One Input to All Outputs] editor window. One [Matrix Mixer - One Input to All Outputs] editor window is displayed for each matrix mixer component editor. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 375 Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ Crosspoint If you click a level meter in the matrix mixer component editor, the output crosspoint window for the group will be displayed. Turns the input channels ON and OFF and sets their levels. Just like the matrix mixture component editor, the input channels are arranged vertically while the output channels are arranged horizontally. [Matrix Mixer - Crosspoint] editor window [Matrix Mixer - Crosspoint] G fB^ [ EB h E 2 3 5 4 7 6 8 1 Section Setting Range Function 1 Input Channel -- Switches to another channel group. 2 Output Channel -- Switches to another channel group. 3 Bus Send Level Level 4 5 376 Parameter On Block -∞ to +10 dB Sets the output signal level for each crosspoint. ON/OFF Turns ON output for each crosspoint. On -- Turns ON output for all channels in the Crosspoint window. When turned ON, the [On] button lights up. 6 Off -- Turns OFF output for all channels in the Crosspoint window. 7 Nominal -- Resets all output signal levels in the Crosspoint window, making them 0 dB. 8 Minimum -- Resets all output signal levels in the Crosspoint window, making them -∞ dB. DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Channel Group Switching The [Matrix Mixer - Crosspoint] editor window displays four channels each for Input and Output. It displays the channel group that was clicked on in the matrix mixer component editor. The [Channel] buttons in the [Input] and [Output] sections of the [Matrix Mixer - Crosspoint] editor window switch the channel group that is displayed. [Input] section [Channel] menu [Output] section [Channel] menu If you click another channel group when the matrix mixer component editor is active and an [Matrix Mixer - Crosspoint] editor window is displayed, that channel group will be displayed in the open [Matrix Mixer - Crosspoint] editor window. Only one [Matrix Mixer - Crosspoint] matrix window is displayed for each matrix mixer component editor. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 377 Chapter 6 Component Guide Pan The Pan group contains the following subgroups: LCR, LR, and Surround. ■ Pan Nominal Position Component editors for both LCR and Surround contain the “Pan Nominal Position” parameter. The button for that parameter displays its current setting. Clicking the button displays a menu with [Center] and [LR], which are used to set the pan 0 dB reference. Center (Center Nominal) Uses the center volume as a reference, setting it as 0 dB. The LR speakers are -3 dB. LR (LR Nominal) Uses the LR speaker volumes as a reference, setting them as 0 dB. The center volume is +3 dB. LCR In the LCR component, one input is divided into left, center, and right outputs. The number of outputs is triple the inputs. Components are available with 1, 2, 4, 8, 12, and 16 channels. Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The number of channels varies depending on the component, but all share a common configuration in the component editor. 378 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide LCR component editor 1 2 3 Parameter Setting Range Function 1 CSR 0 to 100% Sets the ratio for sending the center signal to LR. 2 Pan L63 - Center - R63 Sets LR orientation. 3 Pan Nominal Position Center LR Selects the nominal position from a menu. LR Separates a single input into left and right outputs. Components are available with 1, 2, 4, 8, 12, and 16 channels. Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The number of channels varies depending on the component, but all share a common configuration in the component editor. Pan component editor 1 2 Parameter Setting Range Function 1 Pan L63 - R63 Sets the LR orientation. 2 Pan Nominal Position Center LR Selects the nominal position from a menu. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 379 Chapter 6 Component Guide Surround There are three types of surround pan components in the Surround subgroup: 3-1, 5.1, and 6.1. The surround pan component editor has a two-dimensional surround pan graph where you can set the location of the sound image. Surround 6.1 component editor 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 9 ) Name 1 2D Surround Pan Graph 2 Speaker Button Location, Setting Range -- Function Sets the sound image orientation. You can move the sound image by clicking and dragging. L Left L63 F63 C Center C F63 4 R Right R63 F63 5 Ls Left Surround L63 R63 6 Bs Back Surround C R63 7 Rs Right Surround R63 R63 8 LFE Low Frequency Effect (Sub Woofer) 9 Left-Right Position L63 - C - R63 Displays the LR sound image. ) Front-Back Position L63 - C - R63 Displays the front-back sound image. 3 -- Clicking here moves the sound image to the button location. Indicates that there is a sub woofer. Clicking makes the LFE level 0 dB. The sound image does not move by clicking. You can set the sound location using the mouse in the two-dimensional surround pan graph. The sound image location is displayed at the bottom of the two-dimensional surround pan graph, but numbers cannot be entered there. 380 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Dragging You can move the control by dragging it with the mouse. Click If you click within the graph, the control point will move to that position. Click DME Designer Owner’s Manual 381 Chapter 6 Component Guide Speaker Button If you click any speaker button besides the [LFE] button, the control point will jump to that speaker’s position. Click 382 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ Surround 3-1 Surround 3-1 has four channel surround pan, with three channels in front, and one in the rear. There is one input and four outputs. Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. Surround 3-1 component editor 2 5 1 6 2 3 4 Section 1 2D Surround Pan Graph 2 3 Position 4 Name/Parameter Setting Range Function 2D Surround Pan Graph -- Sets the sound image orientation. You can move the sound image by clicking and dragging. Speaker Button -- Clicking here moves the sound image to the button location. Left-Right Position L63 - C - R63 Displays the LR surround location. Front-Back Position F63 - C - R63 Displays the front-back surround location. Front 0 to 100% Sets the ratio for sending the front-center signal to front L and front R. Center LR Selects the nominal position from a menu. 5 Divergence 6 Pan Nominal Position DME Designer Owner’s Manual 383 Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ Surround 5.1 Surround 5.1 has surround pan with three channels in front, two in the rear, and one sub woofer channel. There is one input and six outputs. Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. Surround 5.1 component editor 2 5 1 6 2 7 3 4 Section 1 2D Surround Pan Graph 2 3 Position 4 384 Name/Parameter Setting Range Function 2D Surround Pan Graph -- Sets the sound image orientation. You can move the sound image by clicking and dragging. Speaker Button -- Clicking here moves the sound image to the button location. Left-Right Position L63 - C - R63 Displays the LR surround location. Front-Back Position F63 - C - R63 Displays the front-back surround location. 5 Divergence Front 0 to 100% Sets the ratio for sending the front-center signal to front L and front R. 6 LFE Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets output level to the sub woofer. 7 Pan Nominal Position Center LR Selects the nominal position from a menu. DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ Surround 6.1 Surround 6.1 has surround pan with three channels in front, three in the rear, and one sub woofer channel. There is one input and seven outputs. Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. Surround 6.1 component editor 2 5 6 1 7 2 8 3 4 Section 1 2D Surround Pan Graph 2 3 Position 4 5 Divergence 6 Name/Parameter Setting Range Function 2D Surround Pan Graph -- Sets the sound image orientation. You can move the sound image by clicking and dragging. Speaker Button -- Clicking here moves the sound image to the button location. Left-Right Position L63 - C - R63 Displays the LR surround location. Front-Back Position F63 - C - R63 Displays the front-back surround location. Front 0 to 100% Sets the ratio for sending the front-center signal to front L and front R. Rear 0 to 100% Sets the ratio for sending the rear-center signal to rear L and rear R. Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets output level to the sub woofer. Center LR Selects the nominal position from a menu. 7 LFE 8 Pan Nominal Position DME Designer Owner’s Manual 385 Chapter 6 Component Guide Router The router assigns inputs to outputs. Each of the six router groups has a different number of inputs. The groups are 1 input, 2 input, 4 input, 8 input, 12 input and 16 input. Each group has five components, with 2, 4, 8, 12, and 16 outputs. 1 Input 8 Input 2 Input 12 Input 4 Input 16 Input Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The number of channels varies depending on the component, but all share a common configuration in the component editor. Routers let you route signals from various [Input] locations by connecting them to various [Output] locations. One output can be connected to one input only. A single input can be output to multiple channels, but multiple inputs cannot be output over a single channel. In other words, you can distribute the inputs, but you cannot mix them. You cannot setup routing for more signals than the number of output channels. 386 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ Routing Settings To change an assignment, click at the position where the desired input and output channels intersect. When the mouse pointer is moved over a cell, the input and output channels are highlighted, and a red line is displayed connecting them. Click to set routing for that position. If another output channel has been assigned to the clicked input channel, the original assignment will not be cleared. If another input channel has been assigned to the clicked output channel, the original assignment will be cleared. Click Cleared Not Cleared ■ Clearing Routing Settings If you click the dot that indicates routing, the routing indicated by that dot will be cleared and the dot will be erased. Click DME Designer Owner’s Manual 387 Chapter 6 Component Guide Source Selector This component selects a single input source from multiple input sources. “Position” is the number of input sources, and “Channel” is the number of channels included in the source. For example, a “4 Position 2 Channel” component allows you to select a single 2-channel source from four 2-channel input sources. 3 Position and 16 Position components are all 1 Channel types, while 1, 2, and 6 Channel versions of 4 Position and 8 Position components are provided. 388 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Double-click a component to open the component editor. The component editor is the same for all types, the only difference being the number of sources. Source Selector Component The Source Selector connects the selected input to the output. For example, if you select [1] for a 4 Position 2 Channel component, IN1-1 will be connected to OUT-1 and IN1-2 will be connected to OUT2. If you select [2] IN2-1 will be connected to OUT-1 and IN2-2 will be connected to OUT2. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 389 Chapter 6 Component Guide Speaker Processor The Speaker Processor is a crossover processor that includes APF (All Pass Filter), horn EQ, and limiter functions. Six component types are available: 1 Way, 2 Way, 3 Way, 4 Way, 5 Way, and 6 Way. Speaker Processor components have one input and one or multiple outputs. Double-click a component to open the component editor. Speaker processor Component 1 3 4 2 5 8 6 5 9 ) ! Name # $ Function 1 Crossover response (phase) Crossover phase response, color coded for output channel. 2 Crossover response (level) Crossover level response, color coded for each output channel. 3 Input meter Displays the input signal level. 4 Output meter Displays the output level for each band. 5 Crossover Curve Display Button Turns crossover curve display for each output channel on or off. Section 390 @ 7 Parameter Range Function 6 Delay Delay ON/OFF Applies delay to the crossover response. 7 PEQ PEQ ON/OFF Applies PEQ to the crossover response. DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide 8 Navigator Input Level -∞ to +10 dB 9 Crossover – Opens the crossover editor window. ) Delay – Opens the delay editor window. ! PEQ – Opens the parametric equalizer editor window. @ Output Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the output level from each output channel. # Mute $ Limiter ON/OFF – Specifies the input signal level. Mutes the output of each output channel. Opens the limiter editor window. Different numbers of channels are provided by each component variation. 1 Way ALL 2 Way Low/High 3 Way Low/Mid/High 4 Way Low/Low-Mid/High-Mid/High 5 Way Sub-Low/Low/Low-Mid/High-Mid/High 6 Way Sub-Low/Low/Low-Mid/Mid/High-Mid/High Each frequency band has its own color, with Low being red, Mid being green, and so on. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 391 Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ Graph Control Points The crossover level control points indicate [Output Level] and [Frequency]. The control points will move in response to [Output Level] changes made via the knobs or edit boxes. The [Output Level] and [Frequency] parameters can also be changed by directly dragging the control points. Changes to the [Frequency] parameter are shown on the crossover phase response graph. The control point in the center of the graph can be dragged vertically to change the [Output Level] parameter. The [Output Level] parameter changes. Control points at the intersections between the frequency bands can be dragged horizontally to change the [Frequency]. The crossover phase response will change. 392 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ Crossover Click the Speaker Processor [Crossover] button to open the crossover editor window. [Speaker Processor - Crossover] editor window 3 1 2 7 4 8 Section 9 5 6 Parameter Range Function 1 Polarity Polarity Normal/Inverted Inverts the polarity of each output channel. 2 Mute Mute ON/OFF Mutes the output of each output channel. This parameter is linked to the Mute setting in the original window. 3 Frequency Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the crossover frequency between output channels. The display appears as a dotted line when muted. 4 LPF Type Thru 6dB/Oct 12dB/Oct AdjustGc 12dB/Oct Butrwrth 12dB/Oct Bessel 12dB/Oct Linkwitz 18dB/Oct AdjustGc 18dB/Oct Butrwrth 18dB/Oct Bessel 24dB/Oct AdjustGc 24dB/Oct Butrwrth 24dB/Oct Bessel 24dB/Oct Linkwitz 36dB/Oct AdjustGc 36dB/Oct Butrwrth 36dB/Oct Bessel 48dB/Oct AdjustGc 48dB/Oct Butrwrth 48dB/Oct Bessel 48dB/Oct Linkwitz Sets the roll-off slope and filter type for each octave. The filter is bypassed when [Thru] is selected. 5 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the LPF cutoff frequency. 6 Gc -6 dB to +6 dB Sets the cutoff frequency gain when the [Type] setting is [AdjustGc] (Adjustable Gc). DME Designer Owner’s Manual 393 Chapter 6 Component Guide Section 7 Parameter Range Function Type Thru 6dB/Oct 12dB/Oct AdjustGc 12dB/Oct Butrwrth 12dB/Oct Bessel 12dB/Oct Linkwitz 18dB/Oct AdjustGc 18dB/Oct Butrwrth 18dB/Oct Bessel 24dB/Oct AdjustGc 24dB/Oct Butrwrth 24dB/Oct Bessel 24dB/Oct Linkwitz 36dB/Oct AdjustGc 36dB/Oct Butrwrth 36dB/Oct Bessel 48dB/Oct AdjustGc 48dB/Oct Butrwrth 48dB/Oct Bessel 48dB/Oct Linkwitz Sets the roll-off slope and filter type for each octave. The filter is bypassed when [Thru] is selected. 8 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the HPF cutoff frequency. 9 Gc -6 dB to +6 dB Sets the cutoff frequency gain when the [Type] setting is [AdjustGc] (Adjustable Gc). HPF ■ Delay Click the Speaker Processor [Delay] button to open the window. Delay can be set independently for each output channel. [Speaker Processor - Delay] editor window 1 3 2 Parameter 394 Range Function 1 Delay ms: 0 to 500 Sample: the range depends on the Fs value. Meter: 0 to 171.8 Feet: 0 to 563.6 Frame: the range depends on the Frame value. Beat: the range depends on the Beat value. Sets the delay time. Two edit boxes show milliseconds and the unit specified in the [Delay Scale] section. Sets the output level for each band. 2 On ON/OFF Turns delay ON. 3 Delay Scale ms Sample Meter Feet Frame Beat Selects the delay time units. The selected button will light and the [Delay] edit box will change accordingly. When [Beat] is selected the knobs can be used to adjust BPM. DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ Parametric Equalizer Click the Crossover Processor [PEQ] button to open the window. Parametric equalization is provided for each crossover band. [Speaker Processor - PEQ] edit window 1 2 3 4 9 5 6 7 8 Name Function 1 Crossover response (phase) Shows crossover phase response. 2 Crossover response (level) Shows crossover level response. Parameter Range Function 3 Type PEQ L.SHELF 6dB/Oct L.SHELF 12dB/Oct H.SHELF 6dB/Oct H.SHELF 12dB/Oct HPF LPF APF*1 1st APF*1 2nd Horn EQ*2 Select a filter type from the menu. 4 B/W 0.090 to 6.672 Sets the octave bandwidth for each band. 5 Q 0.1 to 16.0 Sets the Q for each band. 6 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the frequency for each band. 7 Gain -18 dB to +18 dB Sets the gain for each band. 8 Bypass ON/OFF Bypasses the PEQ for each band. 9 PEQ On ON/OFF Turns PEQ ON. *1 APF: The APF (All Pass Filter) is a filter that passes all frequency bands while affecting only the phase. Used to match the phase of the crossover bands. APF 1st shifts the phase from 0° to 180°, while APF 2nd shifts the phase from 0° to 360°. APF 2nd also allows Q adjustment. *2 Horn EQ: CD (Constant Directivity) horn speakers exhibit a roll-off in high-frequency level. Horn EQ is provided to compensate for this roll-off. For this reason the gain can only be set to higher than 0dB, and the frequency higher than 500Hz. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 395 Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ Limiter Click the Speaker Processor [Limiter] button to open the window. Limiter settings are provided for each output channel. [Speaker Processor - Limiter] Editor Window 4 5 6 1 23 7 Name 1 Limiter Curve A graphic representation of limiter response. The horizontal axis represents input level, and the vertical axis represents output level. 2 Gain Reduction Meter Displays the amount of gain reduction. 3 Output Meter Displays the output level. Parameter 396 Function Range Function 4 Threshold -54 dB to ±0 dB Sets the threshold level. 5 Attack Fast Mid Slow Manual (0 to 120ms) Sets the attack time. 6 Release Fast Mid Slow Manual (44.1kHz: 6ms to46s 48kHz: 5ms to 42.3s 88.2kHz: 3ms to 23s 96kHz: 3ms to 21.1s) Sets the release time. With the [Fast], [Mid], or [Slow] settings the optimum value is automatically set based on the longest wavelength audio signal received by the limiter. Three settings are available: [Fast], [Mid], and [Slow]. 7 On ON/OFF Turns the limiter ON. The limiter is bypassed when the button is turned OFF. DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide SPX SPX is an effect component that supports many different effect applications, such as reverb, delay, and modulation effects, along with complex combinations of multiple effects. Although the SPX component is a single component, it encompasses 43 effect types. When you change the effect type, right-click the SPX component to display the context menu, click [Recall Component Library], then select the effect type from the [Effect Type] submenu. Double-click this component to display the component editor for it. SPX component editor Name Function 1 Input Meter Displays the input signal level. 2 [Mix Balance] Control Adjusts the balance between the fundamental tone and the effect tone. 3 [Bypass] button When turned ON, the input signal is output without change. 4 Output Meter Displays the output signal level. 5 Other Parameters Other parameters vary according to the effect type. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 397 Chapter 6 Component Guide Other effect parameters vary according to the selected effect type, as shown below. Effect Type Reverb Hall Reverb Room Reverb Stage Reverb Plate One input, two output hall, room, stage, and plate reverb simulations, all with gates. Parameter 0.3 to 99.0 s 0.0 to 500.0 ms 0.1 to 1.0 0.1 to 2.4 0 to 10 0 to 100% 0.0 to 100.0 ms 0 to 100% HPF LPF Gate Lvl Attack Hold RoomSize Liveness THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU OFF, -60 to 0 dB 0 to 120 ms 44.1kHz: 0.02ms to 2.13s 48kHz: 0.02 ms to 1.96s 88.2kHz: 0.01ms to 1.06s 96kHz: 0.01ms to 981ms 44.1kHz: 6.0ms to 46.0s 48kHz: 5.0ms to 42.3s 88.2kHz: 3ms to 23.0s 96kHz: 3ms to 21.1s S-Hall, L-Hall, Random, Revers, Plate, Spring 0.1 to 20.0 0 to 10 Ini.Dly Diff. Density ER Num. FB.Gain Hi.Ratio HPF LPF Type RoomSize Liveness 0.0 to 500.0 ms 0 to 10 0 to 100% 1 to 19 -99 to +99% 0.1 to 1.0 THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU Type-A, Type-B 0.1 to 20.0 0 to 10 Decay Early Ref. One input, two output early reflections. Gate Reverb Reverse Gate One input, two output early reflections with gate, and early reflections with reverse gate. Type Ini.Dly Diff. Density ER Num. FB.Gain Hi.Ratio HPF LPF Mono Delay Delay One input, one output basic repeat FB.Gain delay. Hi.Ratio HPF LPF 398 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Setting Range Rev Time Ini.Dly Hi.Ratio Lo.Ratio Diff. Density E/R Dly E/R Bal. 0.0 to 500.0 ms 0 to 10 0 to 100% 1 to 19 -99 to +99% 0.1 to 1.0 THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU 0.0 to 2730.0 ms -99 to +99% 0.1 to 1.0 THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU Function Reverb time Initial delay before reverb begins High-frequency reverb time ratio Low-frequency reverb time ratio Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spread) Reverb density Delay between early reflections and reverb Balance of early reflections and reverb (0% = all reverb, 100% = all early reflections) High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Level at which gate kicks in Gate opening speed Gate open time Gate closing speed Type of early reflection simulation Reflection spacing Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live) Initial delay before reverb begins Reflection diffusion (left-right reflection spread) Reflection density Number of early reflections Feedback gain High-frequency feedback ratio High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Type of early reflection simulation Reflection spacing Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live) Initial delay before reverb begins Reflection diffusion (left-right reflection spread) Reflection density Number of early reflections Feedback gain High-frequency feedback ratio High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Delay time Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) High-frequency feedback ratio High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Chapter 6 Component Guide Effect Type Parameter Stereo Delay Delay L Two input, two output basic stereo Delay R delay. FB.Gain L FB.Gain R Setting Range 0.0 to 1350.0 ms 0.0 to 1350.0 ms -99 to +99% -99 to +99% Hi.Ratio HPF LPF Mod.Delay Delay One input, two output basic repeat FB.Gain delay with modulation. Hi.Ratio Freq. Depth Wave HPF LPF Delay LCR Delay L One input, two output 3-tap delay Delay C (left, center, right). Delay R Delay FB Level L Level C Level R FB.Gain 0.1 to 1.0 0.05 to 40.00 Hz 0 to 100% Sine, Tri THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU 0.0 to 2730.0 ms 0.0 to 2730.0 ms 0.0 to 2730.0 ms 0.0 to 2730.0 ms -100 to +100% -100 to +100% -100 to +100% -99 to +99% Hi.Ratio HPF LPF Echo Delay L Two input, two output stereo delay Delay R with crossed FB.Dly L feedback loop. FB.Dly R FB.Gain L 0.1 to 1.0 THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU 0.0 to 1350.0 ms 0.0 to 1350.0 ms 0.0 to 1350.0 ms 0.0 to 1350.0 ms -99 to +99% Chorus Two input, two output chorus effect. 0.1 to 1.0 THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU 0.0 to 2725.0 ms -99 to +99% FB.Gain R -99 to +99% L->R FBG -99 to +99% R->L FBG -99 to +99% Hi.Ratio HPF LPF Freq. AM.Depth PM.Depth Mod.Dly Wave LSH F LSH G EQ F EQ G EQ Q HSH F HSH G 0.1 to 1.0 THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU 0.05 to 40.00 Hz 0 to 100% 0 to 100% 0.0 to 500.0 ms Sine, Tri 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz -12 to +12 dB 100 Hz to 8.00 kHz -12 to +12 dB 10.0 to 0.10 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz -12 to +12 dB Function Left channel delay time Right channel delay time Left channel feedback (plus values for normalphase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) Right channel feedback (plus values for normalphase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) High-frequency feedback ratio High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Delay time Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) High-frequency feedback ratio Modulation speed Modulation depth Modulation waveform High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Left channel delay time Center channel delay time Right channel delay time Feedback delay time Left channel delay level Center channel delay level Right channel delay level Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) High-frequency feedback ratio High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Left channel delay time Right channel delay time Left channel feedback delay time Right channel feedback delay time Left channel feedback gain (plus values for normalphase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) Right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reversephase feedback) Left to right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reversephase feedback) Right to left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reversephase feedback) High-frequency feedback ratio High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Modulation speed Amplitude modulation depth Pitch modulation depth Modulation delay time Modulation waveform Low shelving filter frequency Low shelving filter gain EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ (peaking type) gain EQ (peaking type) bandwidth High shelving filter frequency High shelving filter gain DME Designer Owner’s Manual 399 Chapter 6 Component Guide Effect Type Parameter Flange Freq. Two input, two output flange effect. Depth Mod.Dly FB.Gain Symphonic Two input, two output symphonic effect. Phaser Two input, two output 16-stage phaser. Auto Pan Two input, two output autopanner. Tremolo Two input, two output tremolo effect. 400 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Setting Range 0.05 to 40.00 Hz 0 to 100% 0.0 to 500.0 ms -99 to +99% Wave LSH F LSH G EQ F EQ G EQ Q HSH F HSH G Freq. Depth Mod.Dly Wave LSH F LSH G EQ F EQ G EQ Q HSH F HSH G Freq. Depth FB.Gain Sine, Tri 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz -12 to +12 dB 100 Hz to 8.00 kHz -12 to +12 dB 10.0 to 0.10 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz -12 to +12 dB 0.05 to 40.00 Hz 0 to 100% 0.0 to 500.0 ms Sine, Tri 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz -12 to +12 dB 100 Hz to 8.00 kHz -12 to +12 dB 10.0 to 0.10 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz -12 to +12 dB 0.05 to 40.00 Hz 0 to 100% -99 to +99% Offset PHASE Stage LSH F LSH G HSH F HSH G Freq. Depth Direction 0 to 100 0.00 to 354.38 degrees 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz -12 to +12 dB 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz -12 to +12 dB 0.05 to 40.00 Hz 0 to 100% L<->R, L->R, L<-R, Turn L, Turn R Sine, Tri, Square 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz -12 to +12 dB 100 Hz to 8.00 kHz -12 to +12 dB 10.0 to 0.10 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz -12 to +12 dB 0.05 to 40.00 Hz 0 to 100% Sine, Tri, Square 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz -12 to +12 dB 100 Hz to 8.00 kHz -12 to +12 dB 10.0 to 0.10 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz -12 to +12 dB Wave LSH F LSH G EQ F EQ G EQ Q HSH F HSH G Freq. Depth Wave LSH F LSH G EQ F EQ G EQ Q HSH F HSH G Function Modulation speed Modulation depth Modulation delay time Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) Modulation waveform Low shelving filter frequency Low shelving filter gain EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ (peaking type) gain EQ (peaking type) bandwidth High shelving filter frequency High shelving filter gain Modulation speed Modulation depth Modulation delay time Modulation waveform Low shelving filter frequency Low shelving filter gain EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ (peaking type) gain EQ (peaking type) bandwidth High shelving filter frequency High shelving filter gain Modulation speed Modulation depth Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset Left and right modulation phase balance Number of phase shift stages Low shelving filter frequency Low shelving filter gain High shelving filter frequency High shelving filter gain Modulation speed Modulation depth Panning direction Modulation waveform Low shelving filter frequency Low shelving filter gain EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ (peaking type) gain EQ (peaking type) bandwidth High shelving filter frequency High shelving filter gain Modulation speed Modulation depth Modulation waveform Low shelving filter frequency Low shelving filter gain EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ (peaking type) gain EQ (peaking type) bandwidth High shelving filter frequency High shelving filter gain Chapter 6 Component Guide Effect Type HQ.Pitch One input, two output high-quality pitch shifter. Dual Pitch Two input, two output pitch shifter. Rotary One input, two output rotary speaker simulator. Ring Mod. Two input, two output ring modulator. Mod.Filter Two input, two output modulation filter. Distortion One input, two output distortion effect. Parameter Setting Range Pitch Fine Delay FB.Gain -12 to +12 semitones -50 to +50 cents 0.0 to 1000.0 ms -99 to +99% Mode Pitch 1 Fine 1 Pitch 2 Fine 2 Level 1 1 to 10 -24 to +24 semitones -50 to +50 cents -24 to +24 semitones -50 to +50 cents -100 to +100% Pan 1 Level 2 L63 to R63 -100 to +100% Pan 2 Delay 1 FB.Gain 1 L63 to R63 0.0 to 1000.0 ms -99 to +99% Delay 2 FB.Gain 2 0.0 to 1000.0 ms -99 to +99% Mode Rotate Speed Slow Fast Drive Accel Low High Source Osc.Freq. FM Freq. FM Depth Freq. Depth Phase 1 to 10 STOP, START SLOW, FAST 0.05 to 10.00 Hz 0.05 to 10.00 Hz 0 to 100 0 to 10 0 to 100 0 to 100 OSC, SELF 0.0 to 5000.0 Hz 0.05 to 40.00 Hz 0 to 100% 0.05 to 40.00 Hz 0 to 100% 0.00 to 354.38 degrees Type Offset Reso. Level DST.Type LPF, HPF, BPF 0 to 100 0 to 20 0 to 100 DST1, DST2, OVD1, OVD2, CRUNCH 0 to 100 0 to 100 -10 to +10 0 to 20 Drive Master Tone N.Gate Function Pitch shift Pitch shift fine Delay time Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) Pitch shift precision Channel #1 pitch shift Channel #1 pitch shift fine Channel #2 pitch shift Channel #2 pitch shift fine Channel #1 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values for reverse phase) Channel #1 pan Channel #2 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values for reverse phase) Channel #2 pan Channel #1 delay time Channel #1 feedback gain (plus values for normalphase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) Channel #2 delay time Channel #2 feedback gain (plus values for normalphase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) Pitch shift precision Rotation stop, start Rotation speed (see SLOW and FAST parameters) SLOW rotation speed FAST rotation speed Overdrive level Acceleration at speed changes Low-frequency filter High-frequency filter Modulation source: oscillator or input signal Oscillator frequency Oscillator frequency modulation speed Oscillator frequency modulation depth Modulation speed Modulation depth Left-channel modulation and right-channel modulation phase difference Filter type: low pass, high pass, band pass Filter frequency offset Filter resonance Output level Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive) Distortion drive Master volume Tone Noise reduction DME Designer Owner’s Manual 401 Chapter 6 Component Guide Effect Type Parameter Amp Simulate One input, two output guitar amp simulator. AMP.Type DST.Type Dyna.Filter Two input, two output dynamically controlled filter. Drive Master Bass Middle Treble Cab Dep EQ F EQ G EQ Q N.Gate Sense Direction Decay Dyna.Flange Two input, two output dynamically controlled flanger. Type Offset Reso. Level Sense Direction Decay Offset FB.Gain Dyna.Phaser Two input, two output dynamically controlled phaser. 402 DME Designer Owner’s Manual LSH F LSH G EQ F EQ G EQ Q HSH F HSH G Sense Direction Decay Setting Range STK-M1, STK-M2, THRASH, MIDBST, CMB-PG, CMB-VR, CMB-DX, CMB-TW, MINI, FLAT DST1, DST2, OVD1, OVD2, CRUNCH 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 100% 100 to 8.0 kHz -12 to +12 dB 10.0 to 0.10 0 to 20 0 to 100 UP, DOWN 44.1kHz: 6.0ms to 46.0s 48kHz: 5.0ms to 42.3s 88.2kHz: 3ms to 23.0s 96kHz: 3ms to 21.1s LPF, HPF, BPF 0 to 100 0 to 20 0 to 100 0 to 100 UP, DOWN 44.1kHz: 6.0ms to 46.0s 48kHz: 5.0ms to 42.3s 88.2kHz: 3ms to 23.0s 96kHz: 3ms to 21.1s 0 to 100 -99 to +99% Offset FB.Gain 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz -12 to +12 dB 100 Hz to 8.00 kHz -12 to +12 dB 10.0 to 0.10 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz -12 to +12 dB 0 to 100 UP, DOWN 44.1kHz: 6.0ms to 46.0s 48kHz: 5.0ms to 42.3s 88.2kHz: 3ms to 23.0s 96kHz: 3ms to 21.1s 0 to 100 -99 to +99% Stage LSH F LSH G HSH F HSH G 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz -12 to +12 dB 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz -12 to +12 dB Function Guitar amp simulation type Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive) Distortion drive Master volume Bass tone control Middle tone control High tone control Speaker cabinet simulation depth EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ (peaking type) gain EQ (peaking type) bandwidth Noise reduction Sensitivity Upward or downward frequency change Filter frequency change decay speed Filter type Filter frequency offset Filter resonance Output Level Sensitivity Upward or downward frequency change Decay speed Delay time offset Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) Low shelving filter frequency Low shelving filter gain EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ (peaking type) gain EQ (peaking type) bandwidth High shelving filter frequency High shelving filter gain Sensitivity Upward or downward frequency change Decay speed Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) Number of phase shift stages Low shelving filter frequency Low shelving filter gain High shelving filter frequency High shelving filter gain Chapter 6 Component Guide Effect Type Rev+Chorus One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in parallel. Parameter Setting Range Rev Time Ini.Dly Hi.Ratio Diff. Density HPF LPF Rev/Cho 0.3 to 99.0 s 0.0 to 500.0 ms 0.1 to 1.0 0 to 10 0 to 100% THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU 0 to 100% Rev->Chorus One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in series. Freq. AM.Depth PM.Depth Mod.Dly Wave Rev Time Ini.Dly Hi.Ratio Diff. Density HPF LPF Rev Bal. 0.05 to 40.00 Hz 0 to 100% 0 to 100% 0.0 to 500.0 ms Sine, Tri 0.3 to 99.0 s 0.0 to 500.0 ms 0.1 to 1.0 0 to 10 0 to 100% THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU 0 to 100% Rev+Flange One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in parallel. Freq. AM.Depth PM.Depth Mod.Dly Wave Rev Time Ini.Dly Hi.Ratio Diff. Density HPF LPF Rev/Flg 0.05 to 40.00 Hz 0 to 100% 0 to 100% 0.0 to 500.0 ms Sine, Tri 0.3 to 99.0 s 0.0 to 500.0 ms 0.1 to 1.0 0 to 10 0 to 100% THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU 0 to 100% Freq. Depth Mod.Dly FB.Gain 0.05 to 40.00 Hz 0 to 100% 0.0 to 500.0 ms -99 to +99% Wave Rev Time Ini.Dly Hi.Ratio Diff. Density HPF LPF Rev Bal. Sine, Tri 0.3 to 99.0 s 0.0 to 500.0 ms 0.1 to 1.0 0 to 10 0 to 100% THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU 0 to 100% Freq. Depth Mod.Dly FB.Gain 0.05 to 40.00 Hz 0 to 100% 0.0 to 500.0 ms -99 to +99% Wave Sine, Tri Rev->Flange One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in series. Function Reverb time Initial delay before reverb begins High-frequency reverb time ratio Spread Reverb density High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Reverb and chorus balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all chorus) Modulation speed Amplitude modulation depth Pitch modulation depth Modulation delay time Modulation waveform Reverb time Initial delay before reverb begins High-frequency reverb time ratio Spread Reverb density High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Reverb and chorused reverb balance (0% = all chorused reverb, 100% = all reverb) Modulation speed Amplitude modulation depth Pitch modulation depth Modulation delay time Modulation waveform Reverb time Initial delay before reverb begins High-frequency reverb time ratio Spread Reverb density High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Reverb and flange balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all flange) Modulation speed Modulation depth Modulation delay time Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) Modulation waveform Reverb time Initial delay before reverb begins High-frequency reverb time ratio Spread Reverb density High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Reverb and flanged reverb balance (0% = all flanged reverb, 100% = all reverb) Modulation speed Modulation depth Modulation delay time Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) Modulation waveform DME Designer Owner’s Manual 403 Chapter 6 Component Guide Effect Type Rev+Sympho. One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in parallel. Setting Range 0.3 to 99.0 s 0.0 to 500.0 ms 0.1 to 1.0 0 to 10 0 to 100% THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU 0 to 100% Rev->Sympho. One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in series. Freq. Depth Mod.Dly Wave Rev Time Ini.Dly Hi.Ratio Diff. Density HPF LPF Rev Bal. 0.05 to 40.00 Hz 0 to 100% 0.0 to 500.0 ms Sine, Tri 0.3 to 99.0 s 0.0 to 500.0 ms 0.1 to 1.0 0 to 10 0 to 100% THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU 0 to 100% Rev->Pan One input, two output reverb and autopan effects in parallel. Freq. Depth Mod.Dly Wave Rev Time Ini.Dly Hi.Ratio Diff. Density HPF LPF Rev Bal. 0.05 to 40.00 Hz 0 to 100% 0.0 to 500.0 ms Sine, Tri 0.3 to 99.0 s 0.0 to 500.0 ms 0.1 to 1.0 0 to 10 0 to 100% THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU 0 to 100% Freq. Depth Direction Wave Delay L Delay R FB.Dly FB.Gain 0.05 to 40.00 Hz 0 to 100% L<->R, L->R, L<-R, Turn L, Turn R Sine, Tri, Square 0.0 to 1000.0 ms 0.0 to 1000.0 ms 0.0 to 1000.0 ms -99 to +99% Hi.Ratio HPF LPF Dly/ER 0.1 to 1.0 THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU 0 to 100% Type RoomSize Liveness S-Hall, L-Hall, Random, Revers, Plate, Spring 0.1 to 20.0 0 to 10 Ini.Dly Diff. Density ER Num. 0.0 to 500.0 ms 0 to 10 0 to 100% 1 to 19 Delay+ER. One input, two output delay and early reflections effects in parallel. 404 Parameter Rev Time Ini.Dly Hi.Ratio Diff. Density HPF LPF Rev/Sym DME Designer Owner’s Manual Function Reverb time Initial delay before reverb begins High-frequency reverb time ratio Spread Reverb density High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Reverb and symphonic balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all symphonic) Modulation speed Modulation depth Modulation delay time Modulation waveform Reverb time Initial delay before reverb begins High-frequency reverb time ratio Spread Reverb density High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Reverb and symphonic reverb balance (0% = all symphonic reverb, 100% = all reverb) Modulation speed Modulation depth Modulation delay time Modulation waveform Reverb time Initial delay before reverb begins High-frequency reverb time ratio Spread Reverb density High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Reverb and panned reverb balance (0% = all panned reverb, 100% = all reverb) Modulation speed Modulation depth Panning direction Modulation waveform Left channel delay time Right channel delay time Feedback delay time Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) High-frequency feedback ratio High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Delay and early reflections balance (0% = all delay, 100% = all early reflections) Type of early reflection simulation Reflection spacing Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live) Initial delay before reverb begins Spread Reverb density Number of early reflections Chapter 6 Component Guide Effect Type Delay->ER. One input, two output delay and early reflections effects in series. Delay+Reverb One input, two output delay and reverb effects in parallel. Delay->Reverb One input, two output delay and reverb effects in series. Parameter Setting Range Delay L Delay R FB.Dly FB.Gain 0.0 to 1000.0 ms 0.0 to 1000.0 ms 0.0 to 1000.0 ms -99 to +99% Hi.Ratio HPF LPF DLY.BAL 0.1 to 1.0 THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU 0 to 100% Type RoomSize Liveness S-Hall, L-Hall, Random, Revers, Plate, Spring 0.1 to 20.0 0 to 10 Ini.Dly Diff. Density ER Num. Delay L Delay R FB.Dly FB.Gain 0.0 to 500.0 ms 0 to 10 0 to 100% 1 to 19 0.0 to 1000.0 ms 0.0 to 1000.0 ms 0.0 to 1000.0 ms -99 to +99% Delay Hi HPF LPF Dly/Rev 0.1 to 1.0 THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU 0 to 100% Rev Time Ini.Dly Rev Hi Diff. Density Delay L Delay R FB.Dly FB.Gain 0.3 to 99.0 s 0.0 to 500.0 ms 0.1 to 1.0 0 to 10 0 to 100% 0.0 to 1000.0 ms 0.0 to 1000.0 ms 0.0 to 1000.0 ms -99 to +99% Delay Hi HPF LPF Dly.Bal 0.1 to 1.0 THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU 0 to 100% Rev Time Ini.Dly Rev Hi Diff. Density 0.3 to 99.0 s 0.0 to 500.0 ms 0.1 to 1.0 0 to 10 0 to 100% Function Left channel delay time Right channel delay time Feedback delay time Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) High-frequency feedback ratio High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Delay and early reflected delay balance (0% = all early reflected delay, 100% = all delay) Type of early reflection simulation Reflection spacing Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live) Initial delay before reverb begins Spread Reverb density Number of early reflections Left channel delay time Right channel delay time Feedback delay time Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) Delay high-frequency feedback ratio High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Delay and reverb balance (0% = all delay, 100% = all reverb) Reverb time Initial delay before reverb begins High-frequency reverb time ratio Spread Reverb density Left channel delay time Right channel delay time Feedback delay time Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) Delay high-frequency feedback ratio High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Delay and delayed reverb balance (0% = all delayed reverb, 100% = all delay) Reverb time Initial delay before reverb begins High-frequency reverb time ratio Spread Reverb density DME Designer Owner’s Manual 405 Chapter 6 Component Guide Effect Type Parameter Dist->Delay DST.Type One input, two output distortion and delay effects in Drive series. Master Tone N.Gate Delay FB.Gain Multi.Filter Two input, two output 3-band multi-filter (24 dB/ octave). Stereo Reverb Two input, two output stereo reverb. 406 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Setting Range DST1, DST2, OVD1, OVD2, CRUNCH 0 to 100 0 to 100 -10 to +10 0 to 20 0.0 to 2725.0 ms -99 to +99% Hi.Ratio Freq. Depth Dly.Bal 0.1 to 1.0 0.05 to 40.00 Hz 0 to 100% 0 to 100% Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Freq. 1 Freq. 2 Freq. 3 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Reso. 1 Reso. 2 Reso. 3 Rev Time Rev Type Ini.Dly Hi.Ratio Lo.Ratio Diff. Density E/R Bal. HPF, LPF, BPF HPF, LPF, BPF HPF, LPF, BPF 28.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz 28.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz 28.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 20 0 to 20 0 to 20 0.3 to 99.0 s Hall, Room, Stage, Plate 0.0 to 100.0 ms 0.1 to 1.0 0.1 to 2.4 0 to 10 0 to 100% 0 to 100% HPF LPF THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU Function Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive) Distortion drive Master volume Tone control Noise reduction Delay time Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) High-frequency feedback ratio Modulation speed Modulation depth Distortion and delay balance (0% = all distortion, 100% = all delayed distortion) Filter 1 type: high pass, low pass, band pass Filter 2 type: high pass, low pass, band pass Filter 3 type: high pass, low pass, band pass Filter 1 frequency Filter 2 frequency Filter 3 frequency Filter 1 level Filter 2 level Filter 3 level Filter 1 resonance Filter 2 resonance Filter 3 resonance Reverb time Reverb type Initial delay before reverb begins High-frequency reverb time ratio Low-frequency reverb time ratio Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spread) Reverb density Balance of early reflections and reverb (0% = all reverb, 100% = all early reflections) High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Chapter 6 Component Guide Effect Type M.Band Dyna. Two input, two output 3-band dynamics processor, with individual solo and gain reduction metering for each band. Parameter Setting Range Low Gain Mid Gain Hi. Gain Presence -96.0 to +12.0 dB -96.0 to +12.0 dB -96.0 to +12.0 dB -10 to +10 Cmp.Thre Cmp.Rat Cmp.Atk Cmp.Rel -24.0 dB to 0.0 dB 1:1 to 20:1 0 to 120 ms 44.1kHz: 6.0ms to 46.0s 48kHz: 5.0ms to 42.3s 88.2kHz: 3ms to 23.0s 96kHz: 3ms to 21.1s 0 to 5 0.0 to 100.0 ms ON/OFF 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz -6 dB, -12 dB -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB, OFF -54.0 dB to -24.0 dB 1:1 to ∞:1 44.1kHz: 6.0ms to 46.0s 48kHz: 5.0ms to 42.3s 88.2kHz: 3ms to 23.0s 96kHz: 3ms to 21.1s ON/OFF -12.0 dB to 0.0 dB 0 to 120 ms 44.1kHz: 6.0ms to 46.0s 48kHz: 5.0ms to 42.3s 88.2kHz: 3ms to 23.0s 96kHz: 3ms to 21.1s ON/OFF 0 to 5 ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF Cmp.Knee Lookup Cmp.Byp L-M XOver M-H XOver Slope Ceiling Exp.Thre Exp.Rat Exp.Rel Exp.Byp Lim.Thre Lim.Atk Lim.Rel Lim.Byp Lim.Knee Low Mid High Function Low band level Mid band level High band level For positive values, the threshold of the high band is lowered and the threshold of the low band is increased. For negative values, the opposite will occur. When set to 0, all three bands are affected the same. Compressor threshold Compressor ratio Compressor attack Compressor release time Compressor knee Lookup delay Compressor bypass Low/mid crossover frequency Mid/high crossover frequency Filter slope Specifies the maximum output level Expander threshold Expander ratio Expander release time Expander bypass Limiter threshold Limiter attack Limiter release time Limiter bypass Limiter knee Low band solo Mid band solo High band solo DME Designer Owner’s Manual 407 Chapter 6 Component Guide Slot ■ Slot In The Slot In Component only has outputs. 4, 8, and 16 channel types are provided. Right-click the component and select [Open Slot In Component] from the contextual menu to open the component editor. The component editor is the same for all types. Name 1 408 Meter DME Designer Owner’s Manual Function Shows the signal level for each channel. Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ Slot Out The Slot Out component has only an input. There are three types of Slot In components: fourchannel, eight-channel, and 16 channel types. The component editor can be displayed by right-clicking the component, then clicking [Open Slot Out Component Editor] on the displayed context menu. Slot Out component editor 1 3 4 2 5 Parameter Setting Range Function 1 Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the output signal for each channel. 2 On ON/OFF Turns ON each channel's output. 3 Delay 0 to 24 Samples Sets the delay time. 4 Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the output level. 5 Dither Off 16 20 24 Sets the quantization bit rate for conversion. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 409 Chapter 6 Component Guide Cascade ■ Cascade In The Cascade In Component only has outputs. Only the DME64N has a Cascade In component, which can be displayed by checking [Show Cascade Port] in the DME Device Properties dialog box. Right-click the component and select [Open Component Editor] from the contextual menu to open the component editor. The component editor is the same for all types. Name 1 410 Meter DME Designer Owner’s Manual Function Shows the signal level for each channel. Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ Cascade Out The Cascade Out Component only has inputs. Right-click the component and select [Open Component Editor] from the contextual menu to open the component editor. The component editor is the same for all types. Name 1 Meter Function Shows the signal level for each channel. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 411 Chapter 6 Component Guide Internal Head Amp In the DME24 configuration window, there are [Unit Input] and [Unit Output] blocks. They are the Analog In and Analog Out DME24 I/O ports. ■ Unit Input Double-click [Unit Input] to display the component editor for it. Internal Head Amp component editor 1 2 Parameter Setting Range Function 1 +48 ON/OFF Turns ON phantom power (+48V). 2 Gain +10 to -60 dB Sets the head amp gain. ■ Analog Out Double-click [Unit Output] to display the component editor for it. The displayed parameters are the same as for Slot Out component editor. 412 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide MY-Card This shows the input and output for the card inserted into the DME expansion slot. The following components are available, depending on the card types: Input Format/Output Format This is the I/O mode for high sample rate operation (88.2/96 kHz). In the Double Channel Mode, high sampling rate data (88.2/96 kHz) is transmitted and received by two channels, each channel handling the digital audio data at half the sampling rate. For this reason the total number of available channels is halved, and even-numbered channels are unavailable. In the Double Speed Mode digital audio data is transmitted and received at the current high sampling rate (88.2/96 kHz). In the Single Mode digital audio data is transmitted and received at half the current high sampling rate (88.2/96 kHz). Setting Examples Operation clock of related equipment 88.2/96 kHz (Double Channel) The DME operation clock 88.2/96 kHz Input Format/Output Format Double Channel 88.2/96 kHz (Double Speed) Double Speed 44.1k/48k Single When the MY card word clock is used as the master word clock, Double FS determines whether the speed of that word clock is to be doubled and used as the DME clock. The Double Fs setting is only available the word clock from an MY Card is used. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 413 Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ MY-Others Double-click the block to display the component editor for it.This editor can be used for generic MY card editing, but some parameters are not available. Use a card specific editor when available. 1 3 Parameter 2 Setting Range Function 1 Input Format Double Channel Double Speed Single Selects the format for 88.2/96 kHz. 2 Double Fs ON/OFF When ON the speed of the word clock from the MY Card is doubled. 3 Output Format Double Channel Double Speed Single Selects the format for 88.2/96 kHz. ■ MY8-AE96S Double-click the block to display the component editor for it. MY8-AE96S component editor 1 3 2 4 Parameter 414 Setting Range Function 1 Input Format Double Channel Double Speed Selects the format for 88.2/96 kHz. 2 Double Fs ON/OFF When ON the speed of the word clock from the MY Card is doubled. 3 Output Format Double Channel Double Speed Selects the format for 88.2/96 kHz. 4 Sampling Rate Converter ON/OFF Turns the sampling rate converter ON. DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ MY16-AE/MY8-AE96/MY8-AE/MY8-AT/MY8-TD/MY16-TD/MY16-AT Double-click the block to display the component editor for it. Example: MY16-AE component editor 1 3 Parameter 2 Setting Range Function 1 Input Format Double Channel Double Speed Selects the format for 88.2/96 kHz. For MY8-AE96, the setting range is Double Channel/Double Speed. For other cards, it is Double Channel/Single. 2 Double Fs ON/OFF When ON the speed of the word clock from the MY Card is doubled. Only for MY16-AE/MY8-AE96/MY16TD. When On is set for the MY8-AE96, the Input Format is Double Channel. When Off is set, the input format is Double Speed. 3 Output Format Double Channel Double Speed Single Selects the format for 88.2/96 kHz. For MY8-AE96, the setting range is Double Channel/Double Speed. For other cards, it is Double Channel/Single. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 415 Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ MY16-C Double-click the block to display the component editor for it. MY16-C component editor MY16-C R |[l g G fB^ [ 1 2 3 4 5 Section Parameter 1 Setting Priority 2 Bundle Number Input 3 4 Serial Channel Properties 5 Setting Priority Setting Range Function Hardware/ Software The MY16-C switch settings take priority when “Hardware” is selected, and the DME Designer settings take priority when “Software” is selected. 0 to 65279 Sets the input bundle number. Output 0 to 65279 Sets the output bundle number. Rx OFF, 1 - 16 Sets the serial channel for the receive side. Tx OFF, 1 - 16 Sets the serial channel for the send side. Bit Length Bit Off 16 bit 20 bit 24 bit Sets the bit rate for output. Mutes the signal if [Bit Off] is set. Latency 5.33 ms 2.67 ms 1.33 ms Sets the delay. NOTE The parameters will not link immediately when Setting Priority is switched. Please edit another parameter after switching Setting Priority. 416 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Remote Controlled Head Amp There are AD824 and AD8HR components arranged in the zone window. ■ AD824 Controls the Yamaha A/D converter AD824. The AD824 is an eight channel analog to digital converter. Double-click the component to display the component editor for it. NOTE If a DME is not selected in the properties dialog box, the component editor will not be displayed even if you double-click (page 170). AD824 component editor 1 3 Parameter 2 Setting Range Function 1 +48 ON/OFF Turns ON phantom power (+48V). 2 Gain +10 to -62 dBu Sets the head amp gain. 3 Word Clock 48 kHz 44.1 kHz BNC Slot Sets the operating frequency for the Word Clock. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 417 Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ AD8HR Controls the Yamaha A/D converter AD8HR. The AD8HR is an eight channel analog to digital converter. Double-click this component to display the component editor for it. NOTE If a DME is not selected in the properties dialog box, the component editor will not be displayed even if you double-click (page 170). AD8HR component editor 1 2 3 5 4 Section 1 418 Setting Range Function +48 ON/OFF Turns ON phantom power (+48V). 2 HPF ON/OFF Turns output ON. 3 Frequency 20 to 600Hz Sets the cutoff frequency. 4 Gain +10 to -62 dBu Sets the head amp gain. Word Clock 96 kHz 88.2 kHz 48 kHz 44.1 kHz Word Clock In Digital Out A Sets the operating frequency for the Word Clock. Double Speed Double Channel Selects the operation for 88.2/96 kHz. 5 Gain Parameter Word Clock DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Component Glossary Adjustable Gc (AdjustGc) One type of filter characteristic. With this setting, you can adjust Gc (gain on the cutoff frequency) between -6 dB and +6 dB. If you set -3 dB it becomes a Butterworth filter. If you set -6 dB, it becomes Linkwitz-Riley filter. Components: Crossover, Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, Programmable BPF, Programmable HPF, Programmable LPF, Speaker Processor Attack (Attack Time) In dynamic components, sets the time period for compressing or expanding the signal after the component operates. As the attack time is made faster, compression or expansion becomes more instantaneous. As it is made slower, the initial attack part of the sound will not be compressed or expanded. Components: Crossover Processor, Compander, Crossover Processor II, Compressor, DeEsser, Ducking, Expander, Gate, Limiter, Speaker Processor Bessel One type of filter characteristic. For curves where phase characteristics are important, Bessel has gentler attenuation then Butterworth, and there is little distortion of the waveform when square waves are passed through. Components: Crossover, Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, Programmable BPF, Programmable HPF, Programmable LPF, Speaker Processor Butterworth (Butrwrth) One type of filter characteristics. This filter has the most general characteristics. The pass band is flat and the gain for the cutoff frequency is -3 dB. Components: Crossover, Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, Programmable BPF, Programmable HPF, Programmable LPF, Speaker Processor Bypass Passes the signal without changing it. When you turn this ON, bypassed sound (unchanged sound) is output. When you turn this OFF, the sound is output with effects applied. Components: Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, GEQ, PEQ, BPF, HPF, LPF, Notch, Programmable BPF, Programmable HPF, Programmable LPF, Speaker Processor, SPX Decay (Decay Time) Sets the time period until gain returns to normal after a trigger signal level falls below the threshold value. Components: Ducking, Gate, Auto Mixer Delay Sets the time period by which a signal is delayed. Components: Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, Delay Long, Delay Short, Delay Matrix, Speaker Processor, SPX, Slot Output, Unit Output DME Designer Owner’s Manual 419 Chapter 6 Component Guide Delay Scale Sets the units used for specifying the delay time. Components: Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, Delay Long, Delay Short, Speaker Processor Divergence Sets the ratio for sending the center signal to LR. When 100 percent is set, the signal will be sent to LR only. When zero percent is set, the signal is sent to center only. Components: LCR, Surround 3-1, Surround 5.1, Surround 6.1 Fade Sets the action of the fader when there is a large change in its position during scene recall. When you turn this ON, the fader moves gradually to the position after the jump. If you turn this OFF, it immediately jumps to the parameters saved in the recalled scene. Component: Fader Frequency Sets a frequency. In the de-esser, this sets the lowest frequency of the signal to be compressed when the component is operating. In the BPF, HPF, and LPF filters, this sets the cutoff frequency. In the graphic equalizer, it is also used as the frequency band button. Components: Crossover, Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, De-Esser, GEQ, PEQ, BPF, HPF, LPF, Notch, Programmable BPF, Programmable HPF, Programmable LPF, Oscillator, Speaker Processor, SPX, Remote HA Gain Sets the amplification factor for the entire signal level. Components: Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, Compander, Compressor, De-Esser, Expander, GEQ, PEQ, Auto Mixer, Speaker Processor, Remote HA, DME24N HA-AD Gain Correct In the Auto-Mixer, automatically controls the output level for the number of open channels. In situations, where multiple microphones are used, feedback may occur because many channels are open at the same time. Feedback can be avoided by using gain correct. Component: Auto Mixer Hold (Hold Time) Sets how long the gate stays open or the ducking remains active once the trigger signal has fallen below the threshold level. Components: Ducking, Gate, Auto Mixer, SPX KeyIn Turns an input signal connected to a component's KeyIn port into a trigger that activates the component. You can select the trigger source in components that have KeyIn ports. Components: Compander, Compressor, Ducking, Expander, Gate, Limiter 420 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Knee In compressors, de-essers, and expanders, sets the way in which compression or expansion will be applied after the signal exceeds the threshold. The following range of settings is available: HARD, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5. If Hard is set, the signal level changes to a straight line following the specified slope when the trigger signal exceeds the threshold. If a value between 1 and 5 (5 = softest) is specified, the curve gradually changes when the threshold is exceeded, producing a more natural sound. Components: Compander, Compressor, Ducking, Expander, Gate, Limiter LFE (Sub Woofer Speaker) This is a special speaker for playing back low frequency sounds. Component: Surround 5.1, Surround 6.1 Linkwitz-Riley (Linkwitz) One type of filter characteristics. As second-order filters, the sum of the output voltages for LPF and HPF have a gain of 0bB across the entire band. The pass band is flat, but the cutoff frequency gain is -6 dB. Components: Crossover, Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, Programmable BPF, Programmable HPF, Programmable LPF, Speaker Processor Pan Sets the distribution ratio of the input signal between right and left. Components: LCR, LR, SPX Pan Nominal Position Sets the 0 dB reference for pan. There are two selections available, [Center] and [LR] (LR Nominal). Center nominal uses the center volume as a reference. The means the center volume is 0 dB, and the LR speakers are -3 dB. LR nominal uses the LR speaker volume as the reference. The means the LR speaker volume is 0 dB, and the center is +3 dB. Components: LCR, Surround 3-1, Surround 5.1, Surround 6.1 Phase Reverses the phase of the signal. If you turn this ON, signal is inverted. If you turn this OFF, the signal is not inverted. Components: Crossover, Crossover Processor, GEQ, PEQ, BPF, HPF, LPF, Notch, Programmable BPF, Programmable HPF, Programmable LPF, Fader, Auto Mixer, Delay Matrix, Matrix Mixer, Slot Output, Unit Output Q Sets the frequency bandwidth that will change the sound. As the value gets larger, the width gets narrower and the curve becomes steeper. In the parametric equalizer, this sets the frequency width where the gain will be cut or boosted. When Q is widened, the gain is boosted or cut along a wide range centering on the frequency set by the frequency setting, resulting in a large change in the tone quality. When Q is narrowed, only a specific frequency is boosted or cut. Components: Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, GEQ, PEQ, BPF, Notch, Speaker Processor, SPX DME Designer Owner’s Manual 421 Chapter 6 Component Guide Range Set for Ducking and Gate. Sets the amount by which the level is reduced when signal is ducked/ gated. It can be set within the range of -70 to 0 dB. At -70 dB the entire signal above the threshold value is cut. At 0 dB, there is no effect. Components: Ducking, Gate Ratio Sets the ratio of change in the output signal level with respect to the input signal level. At 1:1, there is no compression. At 2:1, when a trigger signal level that exceeds the threshold changes by 10 dB, the output level will change by 5 dB. Components: Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, Compander, Compressor, De-Esser, Expander, SPX Release (Release Time) Sets the time period until gain returns to normal after a trigger signal level falls below the threshold value and operation of a component ceases. If the release time is short, the sound will seem like it is jumping (the ear will notice the change) because the gain suddenly returns to normal. If the release is set too long, compression might not be applied properly because the next high level signal will be input before the gain returns to normal from the previous high. It’s a good ideal to try an initial release time setting in the range of 0.11 to 0.5 milliseconds. Components: Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, Compander, Compressor, De-Esser, Expander, Limiter, Speaker Processor, SPX Slope In a high pass filter (HPF) or low pass filter (LPF), this sets the attenuation amount for each octave. A large value results in rapid attenuation. Clicking the [Slope] button displays a menu. You can select [6 dB/Oct] or [12 dB/Oct] in the HPF or LPF. In the crossover that is part of the crossover processor, in the stand-alone crossover, the programmable BPF, the programmable LPF, and the programmable HPF, you can select from [6 dB/ Oct], [12 dB/Oct], [18 dB/Oct], [24 dB/Oct], [36 dB/Oct], and [48 dB/Oct]. Component: HPF, LPF Threshold Sets the signal level that causes the component to operate. Components: Crossover, Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, Compander, Compressor, De-Esser, Ducking, Expander, Gate, Limiter, Auto Mixer, Speaker Processor, SPX Width Sets how much lower the level must be than the threshold level for the expansion effect to begin. When the trigger signal level changes by 2 dB with the expansion ratio of the expander set at 5:1, the output level will change by 10 dB. In the compander, if the width is set at 90 dB, the expander effect will be essentially be turned OFF. Component: Compander 422 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Troubleshooting For the latest information about DME Designer, visit the Yamaha pro audio site at http://www.yamahaproaudio.com. Symptom A compile error occurs during synchronization. Possible Causes DSP total resource consumption has exceeded the upper limit. Corrective Actions Delete unneeded components. The Resource Meter window must read 100% or less. The wiring between components is Change the connections so that a single connected from multiple output terminals output is connected to a single input to a single input. terminal. Using a matrix mixer or similar component, gather multiple outputs into one signal. Cannot place component. Cannot place You are in online status. wiring. Execute [Go Off-line] on the synchronization screen to go into offline status. The Designer window in not in edit mode. Place a checkmark next to [Edit] on the [Tool] menu. The currently logged on user is restricted Logoff, then log in again as a new user, from editing. or as the Administrator. If edit restrictions are required for a user, place a check in the [Security] → [Edit] checkbox A user module is not displayed on the list. The [File] menu → [Preference] → [ContentsFolder] has been changed, or the “User Module” folder has been moved. Check that there are user module files (.umf) in the “ContentsFolder” and “User Module” folders. Cannot switch configurations in the Navigator Window. While online, you cannot not switch to a configuration different from the current scene. If you can switch between scenes, you will be able to switch configurations. The user module window does not open, This is a user module saved by selecting Open the save dialog, select [Open] → even when a user module is double[Open] → [User Module Design [User Module Editor], and resave the clicked. Window]. user module. No editor displays after right-clicking on Some cards do not have editors. a card component, and selecting [Open] from the context menu. No special corrective action. The message “Reset Config…” is This is not abnormal. If many scenes are Wait until processing finishes. displayed for a long time in the message entered into the DME, processing takes area of the “Synchronization” dialog box. time. Cannot set the monitor output. This is because channels connected with Select an unconnected channel. wiring cannot be used as monitor output. The MIDI Setup toolbar will not be displayed. Stored in the minimized task tray. Right-click the MIDI Setup icon in the task tray then click [Show]. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 423 Index A AD824 ................................................................................. 170, 417 AD8HR ................................................................................ 170, 418 "Add Event" dialog box ................................................................ 118 “Add User” dialog box .................................................................. 60 Adjustable Gc (AdjustGc) ........................................................... 419 [Administrator] User ...................................................................... 55 Analyze ........................................................................................ 249 [Area Parts List] ........................................................................... 153 Area window .......................................................................... 15, 235 Attack (Attack Time) .................................................................... 419 Auto Log On .................................................................................. 21 Auto-Logon User ................................................................... 57 Auto Mixer ................................................................................... 360 B Background Images setting ................................................................................. 295 Backup ........................................................................................ 135 Band Pass Filter (BPF) ................................................................ 349 Bessel .......................................................................................... 419 Box (rectangle) ............................................................................ 191 Butterworth (Butrwrth) ................................................................. 419 Bypass ........................................................................................ 419 C “Cascade Setting” dialog box ..................................................... 166 “Change User Information” dialog box ......................................... 60 Changing Order .......................................................................... 218 “Clock” dialog box ...................................................................... 105 Close ............................................................................................. 29 Communication Status .................................................................. 43 Compander ................................................................................. 335 Component ............................................................................ 17, 174 placing ................................................................................ 243 Component Editor ......................................................................... 17 opening ............................................................................... 264 Component Editor window structure .............................................................................. 264 Component Group ...................................................................... 259 Component List ........................................................................... 260 [Component List] (Configuration window) .................................. 154 [Component List] (User Module window) ................................... 155 Compressor ................................................................................. 336 Configuration ............................................................................... 136 adding ................................................................................. 233 analysis ............................................................................... 249 creating new ....................................................................... 136 creation procedure ................................................................ 34 deleting ............................................................................... 233 editing ................................................................................. 136 renaming ............................................................................. 233 Configuration window ............................................................ 16, 242 [Component List] ................................................................. 154 Control aligning ................................................................................ 302 copy .................................................................................... 303 cut ....................................................................................... 303 moving ................................................................................. 302 paste ................................................................................... 303 placing ................................................................................ 297 properties ............................................................................ 303 [Control Change] tab .................................................................... 91 Crossover .................................................................................... 316 Crossover Processor ................................................................... 320 Crossover Processor II ................................................................ 326 424 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Current Scene ............................................................................... 42 Current Zone ................................................................................. 43 D DAW Control ................................................................................ 132 Decay (Decay Time) ................................................................... 419 De-Esser ...................................................................................... 337 Delay ................................................................................... 332, 419 delay long ........................................................................... 332 delay short .......................................................................... 333 Delay Matrix ................................................................................ 362 Delay Scale ................................................................................. 420 Delay value .................................................................................. 246 Design Mode ............................................................................... 286 Design window ............................................................................ 142 exporting ............................................................................. 211 printing ................................................................................ 214 shared settings and operations .......................................... 207 Designer window ........................................................................... 15 [Device List] ................................................................................ 154 Display Order .............................................................................. 218 Divergence .................................................................................. 420 DME ............................................................................................. 160 arrangement ........................................................................ 238 DME Data File ............................................................................... 30 export .................................................................................... 32 import .................................................................................... 30 Drawing Setting ........................................................................... 223 Ducker ......................................................................................... 339 Dynamics .................................................................................... 334 E "Edit Event" dialog box ................................................................ 118 [Edit] menu ............................................................................ 47, 145 Edit Mode .................................................................................... 136 Edit Palette .................................................................................. 288 Ellipse .......................................................................................... 193 Auto Log On [Enable Auto-Log On] ........................................................... 57 [Enable Auto-Log On] ................................................................... 57 Equalizer Graphic Equalizer (GEQ) .................................................... 344 Parametric Equalizer (PEQ) ................................................ 346 Equalizer (EQ) ............................................................................. 344 “Event Log List” dialog box ......................................................... 115 Event Logger ............................................................................... 111 “Event Scheduler” dialog box ..................................................... 116 Expander ..................................................................................... 340 Export Design window .................................................................... 211 DME ...................................................................................... 32 External Device ........................................................................... 170 F Fade ............................................................................................ 420 Fader ........................................................................................... 348 [File] menu .................................................................................... 44 Filter Band Pass Filter (BPF) ........................................................ 349 High Pass Filter (HPF) ......................................................... 350 Low Pass Filter (LPF) .......................................................... 351 Notch Filter (Notch) ............................................................. 352 Programmable BPF ............................................................. 353 Programmable HPF ............................................................. 355 Programmable LPF ............................................................. 356 Index Filters ........................................................................................... 349 Firmware Update DME unit firmware ............................................................... 107 Frequency ................................................................................... 420 “Monitor” dialog box .................................................................... 104 Monitoring Point List .................................................................... 247 [Mute] button ................................................................................. 42 MY-Card ...................................................................................... 413 G N Gain ............................................................................................. 420 Gain Correct ................................................................................ 420 Gate ............................................................................................. 341 General Purpose Interface (GPI) ................................................... 79 “Get Log” dialog box ................................................................... 114 GPI (General Purpose Interface) ................................................... 79 “GPI” dialog box ............................................................................ 79 Graphic Equalizer (GEQ) ............................................................ 344 Grid ............................................................................................. 210 Navigator window .................................................................. 17, 140 Notch Filter (Notch) ..................................................................... 352 H [Help] menu .................................................................................. 51 High Pass Filter (HPF) ................................................................. 350 Hold (Hold Time) ......................................................................... 420 Hotspot ........................................................................................ 222 I ICP ............................................................................................... 168 placement ........................................................................... 240 Import DME ....................................................................................... 30 K KeyIn ................................................................................... 334, 420 Knee ............................................................................................ 421 L Language setting ................................................................................. 106 “Language” dialog box ............................................................... 106 LCR ............................................................................................. 378 Legend (Descriptive Fields) ........................................................ 198 LFE (Sub Woofer Speaker) .......................................................... 421 Library ......................................................................................... 275 recalling ............................................................................... 277 storing ................................................................................. 276 Linkwitz-Riley (Linkwitz) .............................................................. 421 Log Off .......................................................................................... 21 Log On .......................................................................................... 20 “Log Setup” dialog box ............................................................... 113 Logical connection ...................................................................... 230 situations where no logical connection is created .............. 230 Low Pass Filter (LPF) ................................................................... 351 LR ................................................................................................ 379 M Main Panel window ................................................................. 14, 39 Matrix Mixer ................................................................................. 369 Menu bar ............................................................................... 39, 137 Meter ........................................................................................... 357 MIDI ............................................................................................... 90 [Control Change] tab ............................................................ 91 [Parameter Change] tab ....................................................... 94 [Port] tab ............................................................................... 97 [Program Change] tab .......................................................... 93 [Setup] tab ............................................................................ 90 “MIDI” dialog box .......................................................................... 90 Miscellaneous ............................................................................. 358 Mixer ............................................................................................ 360 Auto Mixer ........................................................................... 360 Delay Matrix ........................................................................ 362 Matrix Mixer ......................................................................... 369 O Object ............................................................................................ 17 arranging ............................................................. 216, 236, 238 editing ................................................................................. 217 selecting .............................................................................. 216 types ................................................................................... 156 Offline ............................................................................................ 75 switching between online and offfline ................................... 75 Online ...................................................................................... 35, 75 switching between online and offfline ................................... 75 Open ............................................................................................. 27 opening a project file from the “Recently Used Files” list ..... 28 opening a project file that has security set ........................... 28 Operation Mode .......................................................................... 286 Oscillator ..................................................................................... 358 P Pan ...................................................................................... 378, 421 LCR ..................................................................................... 378 LR ........................................................................................ 379 Surround ............................................................................. 380 Pan Nominal Position .......................................................... 378, 421 Parameter changing ............................................................................. 266 [Parameter Change] tab ............................................................... 94 Parameter Link ...................................................................... 73, 314 Parameter List ............................................................................. 124 Parametric Equalizer (PEQ) ........................................................ 346 Phase .......................................................................................... 421 Picture ......................................................................................... 185 placing ................................................................................ 185 [Port] tab ....................................................................................... 97 Preferences ........................................................................... 53, 207 Preset list ....................................................................................... 68 Print Design window .................................................................... 214 [Print] menu ................................................................................. 144 Probe Monitor .............................................................................. 244 [Program Change] tab .................................................................. 93 Programmable BPF ..................................................................... 353 Programmable HPF ..................................................................... 355 Programmable LPF ..................................................................... 356 Project file ...................................................................................... 22 closing ................................................................................... 29 creating new ......................................................................... 22 opening ................................................................................. 27 saving .............................................................................. 23, 25 Q Q .................................................................................................. 421 R Range .......................................................................................... 422 Ratio ............................................................................................ 422 Release (Release Time) .............................................................. 422 Resource Meter ............................................................................. 18 Resource Meter window .............................................................. 139 Router .......................................................................................... 397 DME Designer Owner’s Manual 425 Index S Save ........................................................................................ 23, 25 saving a file with a new name ............................................... 25 Save As ................................................................................... 23, 25 Scene current ................................................................................... 42 Scene Manager ............................................................................. 63 “Scene Manager” dialog box ........................................................ 63 Security ....................................................................................... 136 [Administrator] User .............................................................. 55 creating users and making user settings .............................. 55 security for the Logged On User ..................................... 63, 70 user security level ................................................................. 56 user setting restrictions ......................................................... 55 Security Level ................................................................................ 56 “Select Color” Dialog Box ........................................................... 203 “Select Font” dialog box .............................................................. 202 “Select Image” dialog box .......................................................... 205 [Setup] tab .................................................................................... 90 Sheet ........................................................................................... 200 Show Signal Delay ...................................................................... 246 Slope ........................................................................................... 422 Slot Component ................................................................... 179, 408 Snap ............................................................................................ 273 SPX Component .................................................................. 177, 397 Status bar .................................................................................... 139 Surround 3-1 ............................................................................... 383 Surround 5.1 ................................................................................ 384 Surround 6.1 ................................................................................ 385 Synchronization DME Designer and DME unit synchronization ...................... 75 “Synchronization” dialog box ................................................ 76 T Tab Order changing ............................................................................. 313 Text box ....................................................................................... 189 Threshold .................................................................................... 422 Title bar ................................................................................. 39, 137 Tool button large ...................................................................................... 41 small ...................................................................................... 39 Toolbar ........................................................................................ 138 Toolkit window ....................................................................... 17, 143 displaying ............................................................................ 152 moving ................................................................................. 152 types ................................................................................... 153 [Tools] menu ......................................................................... 48, 149 U [User] logged on user ...................................................................... 43 User ............................................................................................... 19 creatng new .......................................................................... 61 list .......................................................................................... 58 User Control .......................................................................... 70, 279 creating new ....................................................................... 281 security ................................................................................ 283 “User Control Manager” dialog box .............................................. 70 [User Control] menu .................................................................... 280 User Defined Button User Defined Parameters ...................................................... 98 “User Defined Button” dialog box ................................................. 98 User Defined Parameters .............................................................. 98 setting ................................................................................. 101 User Module ........................................................................ 181, 250 creating ............................................................................... 254 saving .................................................................................. 255 User Module Editor ..................................................................... 285 context menu ...................................................................... 291 User Module Manager ................................................................ 250 426 DME Designer Owner’s Manual User Module window ............................................................. 16, 257 [Component List] ................................................................ 155 User Setting Restrictions ............................................................... 55 V [View] menu .......................................................................... 48, 147 W Wav File Manager ....................................................................... 128 Wav File Player ............................................................................ 359 Width ........................................................................................... 422 [Window] menu ..................................................................... 51, 151 Window size changing ............................................................................. 294 Wire ..................................................................................... 195, 219 drawing ............................................................................... 224 drawing settings .................................................................. 223 editing ................................................................................. 229 line segment ........................................................................ 220 nodes .................................................................................. 221 Z Zone ............................................................................................ 157 adding ................................................................................. 231 current ................................................................................... 43 deleting ............................................................................... 231 renaming ............................................................................. 231 Zone window ......................................................................... 16, 237 U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation © 2004 Yamaha Corporation MW D0